FY19 Standard Items Package

Transcript

1 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM NUMERICAL INDEX 19 FY - UTILIZATION CATEGORY TITLE DATE ITEM NO. 01 General Criteria; accomplish 009 01 OCT 2017 - I - 02 NOV 2016 009 18 I Report Environmental Compliance for Material Usage at Naval ; y Facilit accomplish - 03 009 01 OCT 2017 I Toxic and Hazardous Substance; control 04 - 009 I 01 OCT 2017 Quality Management System; provide - 05 Temporary Access ; accomplish II 009 18 NOV 2016 009 06 NOV 2016 18 - I Maintaining Protection and Radioactive - Cleanliness from Non Operations; accomplish 009 - 07 01 OCT 2017 I Confined Space Entry, Certification, Fire Prevention and Housekeeping; accomplish 009 - 08 01 OCT 2017 I Shipboard Fire Protection and Fire Prevention ; accomplish - 09 01 OCT 2017 II 009 Process Control Procedure (PCP); provide and accomplish - 10 NOV 2016 18 009 I Containing Material - Asbestos (ACM); control 009 - 11 01 OCT 2017 II ; ulation and Lagging Ins accomplish - 009 01 OCT 2017 12 II Weld, Fabricate, and Inspect ; accomplish 009 - 13 Meter ; repair II 01 OCT 2017 009 14 - 01 OCT 2017 II ; Gage, Switch, and Thermometer repair 009 - 15 Rotating Machinery; balance II 18 NOV 2016 II Electronic Equipment; repair NOV 2016 18 16 009 - - 1 19 of 8 FY

2 UTILIZATION CATEGORY TITLE DATE ITEM NO. 009 17 - 01 OCT 2017 II Rotating Electrical Equipment; repair - 18 Magnetic Material; control I 07 MAR 2017 009 - 009 30 JUL 2015 19 I Technical Provisioning Documentation (PTD); provide 009 - 20 Government Property; control I 01 OCT 2017 009 - 21 01 OCT 2017 I Logistics and Technical Data; provide - 22 Canceled 18 009 NOV 2016 009 - 23 Interference ; remove and install I 01 OCT 2017 009 24 - 01 OCT 2017 I Authorization, Control, Isolation, Blanking, Tagging and Cleanliness; accomplish - 25 009 01 OCT 2017 II Structural Boundary Test; accomplish 009 - 26 Deck Covering; accomplish II 01 OCT 2017 II 009 - NOV 2016 18 27 Material Identification and ; ontrol (MIC) for Level I System C accomplish 28 Canceled 18 NOV 2016 009 - 29 - 009 I 29 JUL 2004 Asbestos - Free Pipe Hanger Liner Material; install - 30 Boiler Sample Tube ; inspect II 18 009 NOV 2016 - 31 009 II 18 JUL 2014 Boiler Waterjet Cleaning; accomplish 009 - 32 MAR 2017 II 07 Cleaning and Painting Requirements; accomplish - 33 009 01 OCT 2017 II Rotating Electrical Equipment; rewind 009 - 34 NOV 2016 18 I Fir e Protection of Unmanned a Contractor t Vessel Facility; accomplish - 35 Canceled 18 NOV 2016 009 II Controller; repair 36 - 01 OCT 2017 009 - 2 19 of 8 FY

3 UTILIZATION CATEGORY TITLE DATE ITEM NO. 37 II 009 01 OCT 2017 - General Procedure for Woodwork; accomplish 18 009 - NOV 2016 38 II Boiler, Catapult Accumulator, and up; - Reboiler Dry Lay accomplish - 39 NOV 2016 18 I 009 Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR) for a New ial for Commerc Technical Manual Equipment/Component; accomplish 009 40 01 OCT 2017 - I Contractor Crane , Multi - Purpose and Material Handling Machine Equipment ; a Naval Facility at provide 009 41 NOV 2016 18 II - Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR) for a Topically Structured Technical accomplish Manual; 18 009 - 42 NOV 2016 II Technical Manual Contract ) for Updating Requirement (TMCR ; accomplish Technical Manual 009 - 43 30 JUL 2015 II Engineering Plant Production Off - Completion Date (PCD), Light Assessment (LOA) Support; provide 45 009 II 01 OCT 2017 - Tapered Plug Valve; repair - 46 01 OCT 2017 II 009 Butterfly Valve, Synthetic and Metal Seated; repair II - 009 47 01 OCT 2017 Gate Valve; repair 009 - 48 01 OCT 2017 II Shop Pressure Seal Bonnet Valve Repair; accomplish 49 - 01 OCT 2017 009 II - Pressure Seal Bonnet Valve In ; accomplish line R epair 009 - 50 01 OCT 2017 II Valve; Horizontal Swing Check repair 009 - 51 01 OCT 2017 II Globe, Globe Angle, and Globe Stop Check Valve; repair 01 OCT 2017 009 - 52 Relief Valve; repair II 009 01 OCT 2017 II 53 - Bolted Bonnet Steam Valve Shop epair R ; accomplish - 3 of 8 19 FY

4 UTILIZATION CATEGORY TITLE DATE ITEM NO. 54 01 OCT 2017 009 - II line - In Valve Bolted Bonnet Steam Repair; accomplish 55 Regulating/Reducing Valve; repair II 01 OCT 2017 009 - - 009 NOV 2016 II 56 18 - Main Propulsion Boiler Wet Lay up; accomplish - 57 Redu ction Gear Security ; 009 II 18 NOV 2016 accomplish II 009 01 SEP 2015 58 - Pump and Driver Shaft Alignment; accomplish 009 - 59 NOV 2016 18 II ; Organotin Antifouling Material control 009 - 60 01 OCT 2017 I Schedule and Associated Reports for Availabilities Over 9 Weeks in Duration; provide and manage 009 - 61 18 JUL 2014 I Shipboard Use of Fluorocarbons; control 62 009 - NOV 2016 18 II oiler Handhole, Manhole Seat and B Plate ; inspect - NOV 2016 009 63 II 18 Lubricating Oil and Hydraulic Fluid ; analyze 009 - 64 NOV 2016 18 II Resistant Synthetic Fire Hydraulic Fluid; control 009 - 65 01 OCT 2017 I Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs); control 01 OCT 2017 009 - 67 I Integrated Total Ship Testing; manage - Bolted Bonnet Valve; repair II 01 OCT 2017 009 68 - 009 01 OCT 2017 I 69 Weather/Mooring Plan; Heavy provide NOV 2016 009 - 70 18 I , Confined Space Entry Certification, Fire Protection, Housekeeping Fire Prevention, and Vessel ; accomplish for Unmanned NOV 2016 009 71 Piping System ; test II 18 - 009 01 OCT 2017 I 72 - Physical Security at a Private Contractor Facility; accomplish of 8 19 - 4 FY

5 UTILIZATION CATEGORY TITLE DATE ITEM NO. 009 73 - 01 OCT 2017 I Shipboard Electrical/Electronic Procedure ; Cable accomplish - 74 01 OCT 2017 009 I , Safety and Health Occupational ; accomplish Plan II - 009 Breaker; repair 75 01 OCT 2017 Circuit 009 - 76 NOV 2016 18 II - Rigid Coaxial Lay Waveguide and ; accomplish Up - 77 01 OCT 2017 009 II Cofferdam Installation ; accomplish - NOV 2016 009 II 78 18 Passive Countermeasures System (PCMS) Material ; r epair I 009 NOV 2016 - 79 18 vernment Owned Material (GOM) Go S tatus ; report - 009 80 Ship Facilities; maintain I 18 NOV 2016 009 - Compartment Closeout; accomplish I 01 OCT 2017 81 - Installation of Equal Component 82 NOV 2016 I 009 18 Vice Specified Component; report - 83 Wire Rope Assembly ; 009 II 18 NOV 2016 fabricate 009 - 84 01 OCT 2017 I Threaded Fastener Requirements ; accomplish - 85 19 JUL 2007 009 II Government Sponsored Planning Yard/Configuration Data Manager Site Representative - (CDM) On Facility; provide - 86 I 009 NOV 2016 18 I and Turn - In of Ozone Recovery ; ubstance (ODS) S Depleting accomplish 009 - 87 01 OCT 2017 I I ; Procedure Chemical Disinfection accomplish NOV 2016 18 I - I 88 009 Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) and Motor Gasoline(MOGAS) Tanks, Spaces, and P iping, including Sewage or MOGAS - Contaminated Tanks, Spaces, and Piping; certify of 8 5 19 - FY

6 UTILIZATION TITLE CATEGORY DATE ITEM NO. - 89 01 OCT 2017 009 I Contractor Furnished ; ) ion (Purchase and Inspect Anode accomplish - 90 Technical Representative; provide II 01 OCT 2017 009 - 01 OCT 2017 009 91 II Place Inspection; - Propeller In accomplish 009 - 92 Resilient Mount; install II 18 NOV 2016 009 93 - NOV 2016 18 I Emergency Planning and Community Know Act (EPCRA) and - to - Right Pollution Prevention Act (PPA) Information; provide 009 - 94 NOV 2016 18 I Work at General Environmental Facility; accomplish Contractor 009 - 95 I I 01 OCT 2017 Mechanically Attached Fitting ; install (MAFs) - 009 01 OCT 2017 96 Ball Valve; repair II 009 - 97 17 JAN 2013 I Ship Repair Shipbuilding and Operations National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) for Surface Coating Information; provide - 98 Canceled 18 NOV 2016 009 I - Ship Departure Report; provide 009 99 18 JUL 2014 009 - 100 Ship's Stability; maintain I 01 OCT 2017 NOV 2016 009 101 - I 18 ; Ship Transit and Berthing accomplish - 102 Alteration Verification; provide I 01 OCT 2017 009 - 103 009 I 18 JUL 2014 Weight and Moment Change Data; provide 009 104 01 OCT 2017 - II Analysis; Vibration Testing and accomplish 01 OCT 2017 009 - 105 II for Thermal Sprayed Coating Machinery Component Repair; accomplish 01 OCT 2017 I 106 - 009 Work Authorization Form Coordinator (WAFCOR); provide 19 - 6 of 8 FY

7 UTILIZATION TITLE CATEGORY DATE ITEM NO. 107 01 OCT 2017 009 II - Piping System Cleanliness Nuclear); - (Non Restoration accomplish 009 - 108 NOV 2016 18 I Transit and Aircraft Carrier Berthing ; accomplish 009 I 109 01 OCT 2017 - - Non SUBSAFE Work on SUBSAFE - ; accomplish Certified Vessel 009 - 110 NOV 2016 18 I Nuclear Non - Nuclear Work on a accomplish Vessel ; NOV 2016 18 009 - 111 I Schedule and Associated Reports for Availabilities 9 Weeks or Less in Duration; provide and manage 18 II 009 - 112 NOV 2016 - Prevention of Radiographic ction Ionizing - Radiation Inspe ; accomplish Hazard II 01 OCT 2017 Rotating Electrical Equipment 113 - 009 with a Sealed Insulation System (SIS); rewind 07 NOV 2013 II 009 114 - Mold Remediation; accomplish 30 JUL 2015 II 115 009 Bearing Rebabbitting; accomplish - II 30 JUL 2015 116 Auxiliary and Waste Heat Boiler - 009 - up; Sodium Nitrite Wet Lay accomplish NOV 2016 18 I 009 - Off; support - 117 Combat Systems Light I 18 JUL 2014 - CG Deck Loading; accomplish 009 118 Cancelled 18 JUL 2014 009 - 119 01 OCT 2017 I Critique of - 120 Fact Finding and 009 Unplan ned Event ; manage 19 - 7 of 8 FY

8 UTILIZATION TITLE CATEGORY DATE ITEM NO. II NOV 2016 18 009 - 121 Ship Assessment/Inspection; accomplish 01 OCT 2017 I 122 - Temporary Padeye; install 009 and remove 01 OCT 2017 II ; remove, Component 009 - 123 Fiber Optic install relocate, repair, and - 8 19 of 8 FY

9 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 01 - 009 ITEM NO: 01 DATE: OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: I SCOPE: 1. 1.1 General Criteria; accomplish Title: 2. REFERENCES: Standard Items 2.1 40 CFR Part 61, National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air 2 2. Pollutants 3. REQUIREMENTS: 3.1 Report delays to the SUPERVISOR. In the event difficulty is encountered or anticipated in 3.1.1 complying with the contract schedule dates, not ify the SUPERVISOR immediately by verbal means, followed on the next work day by an original and 2 copies of a letter stating pertinent details. Receipt of this notification by the SUPERVISOR is not to be construed as a waiver of the requirements, deliver y schedule by the Government, or waiver of rights or remedies provided by law or under this Job Order or any other requirements in the Job Order relating to jeopardy of contract schedule dates. 3.2 Reports: When a Work Item does not require a report, and one is 3.2.1 determined to be necessary in order to produce a reliable or complete repair, media, of a report with approved transferrable submit one legible copy, in supporting data as early as possible in the cont ract period. The goal is to have required work completed within the original contract period. For reports required by 2.1 or the Work Item, 3.2.2 that could accomplished or additional material to be result in a change in work to be procured, complete t he preliminary work and submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable report in a time frame to allow the media, of the SUPERVISOR to initiate early action, but no later than the first 20 percent of the availability. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of 3.2.3 one day prior to the weekly progress the following to the SUPERVISOR : meeting 01 1 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

10 A report listing Government Furnished Material not 3.2.3.1 title, material received, showing the associated Work Item number and description, expected delivery date, required delivery date, and action proposed to resolve problems resulting from late delivery. Material with expected delivery dates before the required delivery date need not be listed in this report. 3.2.3.2 A report listing late or deficient Government Furnished Information, showing the associated Work Item number, deficiency description, and proposed corrective action. 3.2.3.3 A report of overdue contractor condition reports by r and expected submission date. The report shall also include Work Item numbe those deficiency and condition reports for which Government response is outstanding. 3.2. 4 Dry dock related inspection reports shall be submitted no later than the first 20 percent of the sc heduled docking period. Dry dock related reports which contain readings (final, thickness, etc.), clearances, alignments, test results, or other such data for work that has to be completed prior to pre - flood/undocking, shall be submitted to the SUPERVISOR within one day after recording the data but no later than 4 days prior to pre - flood/undocking, whichever occurs first. 3.2. 5 Reports shall contain the following information: Job Order 3.2. 5 .1 Name and hull number of ship or craft, the , Work Item, a including tem paragraph number if I tandard S nd paragraph numbers applicable . 5 .2 A description of the conditions found with supporting 3.2. data. Include annotated sketches, graphs, and photographs when necessary to make a report clearly understandable to the SUPERVISOR. Identify actual readings/dimensions taken. 3.2. 5 .3 Recommendations and/or a list of material required. , printed name, Data required by, signature .4 5 and title 3.2. of the contractor's representative, and submission date. Reports written or submitted in NMD satisfy the 3.2.5.5 requirements of 3.2.5.4. Prepare and submit one legible copy, in 3.2. 6 approved transferrable (PCP) media, of a listing of all reports and Process Control Procedures to the SUPERVISOR no later than 15 days required by the Job Or CNO/CMAV der CNO/CMAV prior to the start of the availability. The listing shall be sequential by Work Item number, and include each applicable paragraph number, / ovision for PCP , and a pr report due date, completion date, submission date . adding report serial numbers from NMD When the equivalent information is r ) the Inspection Plan (TIP and provided in the Test port may be waived. e 01 2 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

11 .1 3.2. 6 The report shall be revised and provided weekly include additions, deletions, modifications, throughout the availability to progress, completions , and serial numbers from NMD ( e.g., Con tractor F urnished Reports (CFR) ) after numbers are assigned to the reports . approved Where one legible copy of a report in hard copy or 3.2. 7 nsferrable media is required, or where sketches, graphs, or photographs are tra required, the electronic methods and file format shall be as agreed to by the SUPERVISOR. 3.2.7.1 Use NMD, or an approved web interface with NMD, for contracts managed in NMD. When a report is required to be submitted but no time 8 3.2. S requirement is specified in the tem or tem, it shall be I ork W I tandard submitted no later than 4 days after completion of the event. 3.3 Accomplish tests and checkouts. Complete work that requires tests in time to allow correction 3.3.1 of deficiencies prior to dock trials, sea trials, or other applicable milestones established in the Job Order . Do not operate 3.3.2 on the equipment new, existing, or repaired ship . Ship's F orce will accomplish such o peration when required for test, checkout purposes. Such requirements will be coordinated by maintenance , and the SUPERVISOR. Exception will be on unmanned vessels when Ship’s 3.3.2.1 Force is not present. 3.4 labor, material, equipment, and services (such as air, power, Provide water, etc.) which are required to complete the Work Item, including that which is indicated on drawings or test specifications as being provided by sources other than the contractor, unless spe cifically listed as Government Furnished Material (GFM) in paragraph 5 of the Work Items. PRF) is 3.4.1 When a performance specification (such as MIL - , the products approved to that specification are those listed on the specified Government ducts Database (QPD) for that performance Qualified Pro specification. If a Type, Class, Grade or other subcategory is listed, the products approved for use are limited to those that meet that subcategory on the performance specification’s QPD. 2 ts that are not available from the Manufacture par 3.4. vendor/manufacturer, utilizing NAVSEA approved drawings, technical manuals, templates, or sketches. .1 Verify latest revisions are correct via the 2 3.4. SUPERVISOR prior to start of manufacture. 01 3 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

12 3.4. 3 Submit one leg ible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a status report, listing Contractor Furnished Material (CFM) required to accomplish the work in Work Items that is not already on hand, to the Job Order award, or 2 days after SUPERVISOR not later than 30 days after the Update the report and submit availability start date, whichever occurs first. revisions to the SUPERVISOR every 14 days up to availability start date , within 10 days after availability start date , then monthly thereafter to End of Availability (EOA) . The reports are to contain the following: 3.4. 3 .1 Contract number 3.4. 3 .2 Contractor's purchase order number 3.4. 3 .3 Description of material 3.4. 3 Quantity ordered .4 3.4. 3 .5 Date scheduled to be ordered 3 3.4. .6 Date ordered 3.4. Date required to meet production schedule .7 3 Proposed receipt date .8 3 3.4. 3.4. 3 A summary listing any problem areas .9 3.4. 3 .10 Date submitted to the SUPERVISOR 3.4. .11 Alteration n umber 3 .12 umber piece n Drawing and 3 . 3.4 .13 3.4. 3 Manufacturer 3 3.4. .14 Manufacturer's part n umber .15 3.4. 3 Date r eceived Work Item number .16 3 3.4. Purchase Orders 4 3.4. Maintain a file of purchase orders for CFM for review .1 4 3.4. by the SUPERVISOR upon request. Submit one legible copy, in .2 4 3.4. approved transferrable media, of selected purchase orders to the SUPERVISOR upon request. 01 4 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

13 3. s Work Item reference When a Class and Hull specific configuration and 5 Ship Alteratio n information, planning activity shall validate that reference information (Ship Alteration drawings, LARS, "as built drawings", Test Procedures, etc.) used is correct via the assigned Class Planning Yard. 6 3. s and Commercial Procure Military Specifications and Standard Specifications and Standards. 6 3. Procure unclassified NAVSEA Standard Plans, Military .1 Specifications and Standards, and Commercial Specifications and Standards referenced in the Work Items. .2 are available at the office 6 3. Classified Military Specifications of the SUPERVISOR. .3 Work Items will normally reference the basic Government 6 3. suffix letters or Specifications, Standards, or NAVSEA Standard Plans, without e specified, numbers which identify revisions or amendments. Unless otherwis the effective issue of these basic referenced documents, including revisions or amendments, shall be the most recent issue at the date of solicitation for a Job Order . Wherever specific dates for specifications, standards, and publications or amendments, revisions, or alterations thereto are specified in the Work Items, issues of those dates specifically shall apply in lieu of any other issue. Where industry standards such as ASTM and ANSI are referenced, the issue or revision in effect on th e date specified for Government publication applies. 7 Work Items may reference specific revision levels of equipment 3. technical manuals or drawings which are not NAVSEA Standard Plans. When these references are listed in a Work Item without suffix let ters or numbers which | identify revisions, change notices, or amendmen ts , u nless otherwise specified, the effective issue of technical manuals, including revisions, change notices, or amendments, shall be the most recent issue at the date of solicitation for . the Job Order 8 3. Submit requests for deviations to the SUPERVISOR. A deviation is defined as any action which is not in .1 8 3. conformance with the Work Item requirements, including references thereto, no matter how minor. .2 3. Deviations from Work Items and references thereto will not be 8 considered by the SUPERVISOR without a written request from the contractor. approved transferrable Submit one legible copy, in .3 8 3. media, of of one day deviations to the SUPERVISOR within requests for identifying the deviation. tem, For technical deviations from the references of any ork W I .4 8 3. e following minimum information: include th 01 5 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

14 3. 8 .4.1 Ship name .4.2 3. 8 Hull number 3. 8 .4.3 Contractor/Subcontractor .4.4 3. 8 Name of deviation requestor 3. 8 .4.5 Identification as an existing condition or result of repair .4.6 3. Duration of repair with and without the deviation 8 3. 8 .4.7 System, component as indicated in the applicable selected record drawing 3. 8 .4.8 Location by compartment, frame and deck .4.9 8 3. - Description of the deviation and degree of non compliance 3. Document deviated from .4.10 8 3. 8 Technical justification for the deviation .4.11 3. 8 .4.12 Alteration number if applicable 3. .4.13 Proposed resolution 8 response is needed by S Date UPERVISOR 3. 8 .4.14 3. 8 . 5 The Government does not have an obligation to approve any deviation; it may elect to do so if benefit to the Government can be shown. Accomplish deviation only when authorized in writi ng by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 9 Submit documents (including procedures, required reports, plans, review, approval, acceptance o forms) requiring SUPERVISOR r direction via an NMD Contractor F urnished Report (CFR) unless otherwise directed by the SUPERVISOR. 3.1 0 Accomplish the requirements of the contract. 1 1 Comply with security requirements. 3. 1 In the event that the work required by the 3. Job Order requires 1 .1 access to spaces or equipment that are classified, or use of technical or drawings that are classified, the specific security manuals, references, clearance requirements will be identified in the individual Work Item in addition to the requirements provided in the Invitation for Bid/Request for Proposal (IFB/RFP) by the Contract Security Classifi cation Specification (DD Form 254). 01 6 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

15 .2 1 1 Verify that personnel, including subcontractor's personnel, 3. are cleared for the required level of security classification for handling, repair, installation, and testing of classified equipment and for access to areas of the ship which require a specific security clearance. .2.1 After selection of a subcontractor, prepare in 1 3.1 triplicate a DD Form 254 for the subcontract and request the official e contract to designated in Paragraph 14.b of the DD Form 254 for the prim approve and sign the DD Form 254 for the subcontract and to make the required distribution. In preparing the DD Form 254 for subcontracts, extract pertinent data from the DD Form 254 pertaining to the prime contract. arting work on a Work Item that requires a 1 .2.2 3.1 Prior to st security clearance, submit a list in triplicate of the names, badge numbers or other identification numbers, and security clearances of contractor and information or subcontractor personnel who will require access to classified areas in order to accomplish the work. Verify that classified equipment removed from ship and .3 1 3.1 classified documents, such as drawings, technical manuals, and test specifications, are marked or tagged and safeguarded at all times in accordance with the National Industrial Security Program Operating Manual (DOD 5220.22 - M). 3.1 2 Comply with applicable federal, state, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations in their entirety. Any reference to a specific portion of a federal , state, or local law, code, ordinance, or regulation in this or any other item shall not be construed to mean that relief is provided from any other sections of the law, code, ordinance, or regulation. l United States 3.1 2 .1 Provide appropriate notification to regiona Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in accordance with the requirements of 2. 2 . Also, comply with notification requirements of state and local air pollution control laws. 3.1 2 .2 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of .1 that has been provided to any regulatory notification required in 3.1 2 authority for work on board the vessel to the SUPERVISOR within 2 days of providing such notice to the regulatory authority. Data Sheet 3.1 3 Maintain a current copy at the job site o f the Safety (SDS) for each hazardous material that will be utilized aboard the ship and/or in a Navy facility during the performance of this Job Order . S ubmit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, to the SUPERVISO R upon request. - time submittal/acceptance unless the Each SDS .1 require s a one 3.1 3 . this NAVSEA Standard Item and/or references change SDS changes or 01 7 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

16 4 Comply with applicable federal, state, local, and foreign contractor 3.1 host country requirements when using Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) licensed radioactive material , Agreement State licensed radioactive material, and/or machine sources of ionizing radiation on Government property. Do not commence operations .1 4 using radioactive material or 3.1 machine sources of ionizing radiation on Government property until authorized in writing by the SUPERVISOR. 3.1 4 .2 Contract personnel shall not be used as operators under a Navy Radioactive Material Permit (NRMP) issued to a naval facility. Navy personnel shall not be use d as operators under a Nuclear R egulatory Commission (NRC) or Agreement State License issued to a contractor. .3 4 transferrable approved media, of a 3.1 Submit one legible copy, in consolidated inventory of all ionizing radiation producing machines or material that will be utilized aboard the ship and/or naval facility during the performance of this Job Order to the SUPERVISOR, 5 days prior to the start work. of 4 3.1 Submit one legible copy, in .4 approved transferrable media, of the applicable NRC or Agreement State License including procedures regarding for use of licensed radioactive material system process and operation the , to start of work SUPERVISOR ys prior to the 5 da . Agreement State licensees shall - provide evidence of NRC Form 241 (Report of Proposed Activities in a Non Agreement State) with the copy of the license for Agreement State licensees. 3.1 4 .5 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of for machines that the applicable State license, authorization, or registration produce ionizing radiation, start of the 5 days prior to to the SUPERVISOR work . me approved transferrable dia, of a 3.1 4 .6 Submit one legible copy, in formal Radiological Safety Plan which shall include operating and emergency 3 , and actions to control procedures pertinent to the items listed in 3.14. jobsite - boundary radiation exposures below those allowed for members of the general public unde r NRC and OSHA standards , to the SUPERVISOR 5 days prior to . the start of work .7 Provide the SUPERVISOR with remedies to any radiation safety 3.1 4 , to be rectified prior to commencing the SUPERVISOR shortcomings identified by operations. 5 Correct 1 3. errors in record keeping by drawing a single line through the me ing, dating, and printing the na error, recording the correct entry, initial of the person making the correction. .15.1 Corrections 3 to records shall be made by the individual that made the original entry and/or signed for the accuracy and validity of the record. If the individual is no longer in the contractor employ or not readily 01 8 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

17 de or supervisor available at the time of correction the cognizant tra cognizant project superintendent shall make the correction. 3.15.1.1 Submit corrected report to SUPERVISOR. Record and Certification Signature Block or signature shall be 3. 1 6 itto marks, outs, d overs, white - legible and in ink. Erasures, write - continuation arrows, signature stamps, etc., are not acceptable. 6 1 3. Copying records to "make them neat" is not allowed. .1 Electronic records shall utilize electronic signature controls 3.1 6 .2 signature. for certification of individual providing Do not commence operations that could compromise watertight integrity 7 3.1 during waterborne availabilities until confirmation by the SUPERVISOR that the ship has at least one back - up power source immediately available for providing inimum load to support firefighting and dewatering equipment in the power of m event of loss of shore power. 3.1 8 Protect the ship and its equipment from damage. 4. NOTES: T "day" means 24 hours prior to or after the scheduled event. he term 1 4. “Business day” is used to indicate Monday through Friday, otherwise “day” means calendar day (Sunday through Saturday). Known sources for unclassified military specifications and standards 4. 2 are: https://mercury.tdmis.navy.mil https://assist.dla.mil http://quicksearch.dla.mil The term is defined as the local Government activity ” SUPERVISOR “ 3 4. responsible for the execution and contract administration of Navy maintenance and modernization work. and Job Order The term " “Task " is synonymous with the term "Contract" 4. 4 Order”. he term “approved transferrable ” media 4. is the form, system or T 5 program for submitting reports required as agreed by the SUPERVISOR. to ubcontract” 6 The term “ means any contract as defined in the FAR, 4. s Subpart 2.1 , entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies or services for performance of a prime contract or a subcontract. It includes but is not limited to purchase orders, and changes and modifications to purchase orders. 01 9 of 9 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

18 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 - 02 ITEM NO: DATE: 18 NOV 201 6 I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE: Environmental Compliance Report for Material Usage at Naval Title: 1.1 accomplish ; Facilit y REFERENCES: 2. 42 USC 7412(b), Clean Air 2.1 Act, Section 112(b), List of Hazardous Air Pollutants 3. REQUIREMENTS: an approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in , of 3.1 as eport Environmental Compliance R for Material usage at Naval Facility follows: it applicable permits for portable, registered, or rental Subm 3.1.1 emission units to the SUPERVISOR prior to start of work. keeping program to reflect the manner in - 3.1.2 Establish a record which the material records will be maintained and submitted to the SUPER VISOR. Maintain facility specific records to ensure accurate 3.1.3 reporting for all preservation, welding repairs, and fuel consumption for each individual portable internal combustion engine or portable emission unit. Provide the SUPERVISOR sufficien t details to track usage of all paints, solvents, adhesives, welding rods, and fuel used for each individual - brake horsepower. Report any portable internal combustion engine over 50 other materials used which contain chemicals listed in 2.1. 3.1.4 Main tain current usage records of materials listed in 2.1. Negative reports are required. 3.1.5 3.1.6 Reports shall contain the following items based upon category of the material. 3.1.7 , and nonskid usage records are to be adhesive Paint, solvent, submitted monthly and shall include the following: 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 02 FY - 1 9

19 3.1.7.1 Product manufacturer, identification or color 3.1.7.2 Net daily paint usage in gallons, paint application method (airless spray, HVLP, brush, or roller) per paint t ype, amount of paint disposed as hazardous waste; density of mixed paint; net daily onsite solvent usage in gallons used for equipment cleaning and surface preparation; net amount of adhesives in unit of measure (ounces, quart, gallons or pound) 3.1.7. technical data heet (SDS), S ata D 3 Product S afety sheet, VOC certification for paint and nonskid product Government site location, applicable local Air 3.1.7.4 Pollution Control District (APCD) permit number, date, and ship's name Abrasive blast grit materials used shall be submitted monthly 3.1.8 and shall include: 3.1.8.1 Manufacturer of abrasive blast grit and SDS Abrasive blast grit usage certification if required 3.1.8.2 orities by the cognizant state or local auth Amount and hourly usage of the abrasive blast grit 3.1.8.3 3.1.8.4 Permit associated with the abrasive blasting equipment if required by the cognizant state or local authorities submitted monthly and shall 3.1.9 Welding operation report shall be include welding rod manufacturer, specific product used in welding application, SDS, usage in pounds, and type of welding application . 3.1.10 Portable internal combustion (IC) engine greater than 50 brake horse power operation report shall be submitted monthly and shall include: Amount of fuel used in gallons and the hours of 3.1.10.1 operation IC engine permit number and site location if 3.1.10.2 required by the cognizant state or local authorities approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in 3.2 , of each report required the end by 3.1 to the SUPERVISOR no later than 10 days after of the month throughout the availability. NOTES: 4. Examples of paint and nonskid manufacturers may be Ameron, 4.1 International, American Safety Technology, or others as applicable. 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 02 FY - 1 9

20 Examples of American Welding Society Classifications for welding rod 4.2 AL 308 - 16, E7018 - may be E316 there is no American Welding - 16, or others. If Society (AWS) classification assigned, use the product name and circle the product on the SDS. Examples of welding applications may be Shielded Metal Arc Weld 4.3 ), and others. (SMAW), Gas Metal Arc Weld (GMAW), Flux Core Arc Weld (FCAW 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 02 FY - 1 9

21 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 03 201 7 01 OCT DATE: I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : Title: Toxic and Hazardous Substance; control 1.1 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard Employment REQUIREMENTS 3. : 3.1 Identify materials that may contain toxic or hazardous substances as listed in Subpart Z of 2.1 that are to be used, removed, or disturbed during work operations. 3.1.1 Conduct and document an initial determination of potential personnel exposure to these materials prior to the start of work. Provide a copy of the documentation, signed by a 3.1.1.1 competent pers on as defined in 29 CFR 1915.4, to the SUPERVISOR upon request. Ensure that work operations comply with the r 3.2 equirements of 2.1 for the use of toxic or hazardous substances and removal or disruption of existing toxic or hazardous substances. 3.3 work operations that can Ensure that process es or procedures for expose personnel to toxic or hazardous substances comply with the requirements of 2.1. At a minimum, address the following: exposure monitoring, method of compliance, engineering and work practice controls, respiratory protection, protective clothing, housekeeping, hygiene facilities and pract ices, medical surveillance, employee information and training, signs, and recordkeeping. 3.3.1 , in (s) or procedure (es) Submit one legible copy of process approved transferrable media, when requested by the SUPERVISOR. VISOR Provide a notice to the SUPER and to the Commanding Officer's 4 3. at least 4 hours, but not more than 24 hours prior designated representative that requires any to commencement of establishment of a work operation the requirements of regulated area in accordance with 2.1 (i.e. cleaning of 1 of 3 03 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

22 spaces that have contained flammable or combustible liquids, lead work, cadmium work, asbestos work, etc.) 3. 4 Post the notice at the ship's Quarterdeck and at all entrances .1 to spaces where work operations will be performed that require posting of warning signs, signs, or establishment of a regulated area. 3. 4 .2 The notice shall contain the following information: 3. 4 .2.1 Ship's name and hull number 3. 4 .2.2 Work Item number 3. 4 .2.3 Compartment or frame number .2.4 4 Identification of hazard 3. 4 3. .2.5 Date and time of work process 4 3. .2.6 Identification of engineering and work practice controls 3. .3 4 over a weekend or Monday Deliver notification of work planned following that weekend to the Commanding Officer's designated representative not later than 0900 on the Friday immediately preceding that weekend. .4 4 3. Deliver notification of work planned on a Federal holiday and llowing the Federal holiday to the Commanding Officer's on the day fo designated representative not later than 0900 on the last working day the Federal holiday. e pr ceding Provide for isolation and blanking of ship's ventilation systems in 5 3. work areas to prevent toxic or hazardous substance contamination of ventilation systems or other compartments/spaces. 6 3. Establish regulated areas for monitoring and authorized personnel entry whenever concentrations of the toxic or hazardous substance are in excess of exposure limits as listed in 2.1. 7 3. Monitor the affected areas during work operations to ensure compliance with 2.1. Monitoring shall include adjacent spaces to ensure the work area containments and work practices are effective. Results of ce shall be documented and documentation shall be made available to surveillan the SUPERVISOR. NOTES : 4. 4.1 The term "hazardous substance" means a substance, which by reason of being explosive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritant, or otherwise ha rmful is likely to cause injury. 2 of 3 03 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

23 Consider ventilation cleaning debris to contain toxic or hazardous 4.2 substances. ITEM NO: 009 - 03 3 of 3 - 1 FY 9

24 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 9 FY - 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 04 01 OCT 2017 DATE: CATEGORY: I SCOPE : 1. Management System; provide 1.1 Quality Title: : REFERENCES 2. Standard Items 2.1 2 2. Requirements – 2015, Quality Management Systems - ANSI/ISO/ASQ Q9001 3, Requirements for the Calibration of Measuring and 2. 3 ANSI/NCSL Z540 - Test Equipment ISO/IEC 17025, General 2. 4 Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories 2. 4734, Navy and Marine Corps Calibration Laboratory - 5 NAVSEA 04 Audit/Certification Manual 2. 6 SSPC QP1 Application, Instructions, and Program Rules ogy Requirements List (METRL) NAVSEA OD 45845, Metrol 7 2. REQUIREMENTS : 3. Establish, document, implement, and maintain a Quality Management 3.1 System (QMS) as a means of ensuring tha t product conforms to specified | requirements. 3. 2 A written QMS Manual addressing all elements of 2. 2 and | supporting documented procedures shall be submitted to the SUPERVISOR for to SUPERVISOR a t Subsequen review and acceptance. , the written tance ccep QMS each is acceptable in geographic location in which the Manual . QMS contractor maintains the same | accepted The contractor shall have an QMS , in accordance with this Standard Item, in place to receive an award of a Job Order. Include the following documented procedures: 3. Support: Address all areas of Paragraphs 7.1.5, 7.2 and 7.5 .1 2 . of 2. 2 ITEM NO: 009 1 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

25 2 .1 .1 Calibration laboratories shall be accredited to 3. or 2. by a Commercial Accreditation Activity, or certified by a either 2. 4 3 , and the scope of accreditation must Navy Certification Activity to 2. 5 cover the appropriate measurement parameters and ranges of the calibrations performed. 3. 2 .1 .2 Calibration intervals assigned to Measuring and Test Equipment used by the contractor for acceptance testing shall meet 7 unless alternate calibration intervals are those recommended in 2. 3 . established in accordance with 2. .2 Operation: Address all areas of Paragraphs 8.2, 8.4, 8.5, 3. 2 2 8.6, 8.7 of 2. 3. 2 .2 .1 Verification of Purchased Product: Identify, in the purchasing documents, verification arrangements at the subcontractor or shall contain the following vendor location/premises. Purchasing documents statement when the SUPERVISOR requests government inspection: "Government Inspection is required prior to shipment from your plant. Upon receipt of this order, promptly notify and furnish a copy to the Government representative who normally services your plant so that appropriate planning for government inspection can be accomplished. In the event the government representative or office cannot be located, our purchasing agent shall be notified immediately. 2 .2 .2 Unless otherw ise specified in 3. a higher tier furnished document, Inspection of contractor Receipt materials shall be based on supplier performance history and one or more of the following: material certificate of compliance, vendor test certification data, manufacturer's mill certificate, or testing using sampling techniques. 9.2 Paragraphs of areas all 3. 2 .3 Performance evaluation: Address and 9.3 of 2. 2 3. 2 .4 Improvement: Address all areas of Paragraph 10.2 of 2. 2 . include a matrix listing the 3. 2 .5 The documented QMS shall | correlation between 2. 2 , 3. 2 and the submitted documents. throughout 3. 3 The QMS shall be subject to audits by the SUPERVISOR | the contract. Retain documented information to demonstrate the processes are carried out as planned. 3. 4 Submit one legible in hard copy or approved transferrable copy, media, of any revisions to the accepted QMS identified in 3. 2 to the | contractor approval. SUPERVISOR within 7 days of of Submittal of procedures and Process Control Procedures (009 5 3. 09 - STDs, drawings, technical - ) invoked by NAVSEA Standard Items, MIL 2.1 , shall QMS the publications, and specifications, although an integral part of be submitted to and approved by the SUPERVISOR | a QMS independent of the ITEM NO: 009 2 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

26 minimum of planned days prior to start of required process for 14 | a vailabilities, or as otherwise approved by SUPERVISOR. shall require that a copy of the 3. 6 The corrective action program written responses to contractor generated corrective actions will be provided to the SUPERVISOR when requested. 3. 7 Respond in writing to each SUPERVISOR issued Method B/C/D Corrective Action (CA) within 3 business days unless otherwise specified by the SUPERVISOR. Initial response shall include immediate corrective action taken and a plan of action for CA completion. Final response shall include for recurrence of identifie , root cause d nonconformance preventive action analysis and Objective Quality Evidence (OQE) for corrective action completed. All follow up responses shall be as specified by the SUPERVISOR. Inform the SUPERVISOR when corrective actions are complete for .1 7 3. VISOR issued Method A Corrective Action (CA). Response required each SUPER within 72 hours unless otherwise specified by the SUPERVISOR. Response shall state that the non - conformance has been corrected. Use NMD, or approved Web interface, to perform all .2 7 3. CAR functions for contracts managed in NMD. - fact Attend finding/investigative meetings when requested by the 8 3. SUPERVISOR. (See 4.4) Develop a Test and Inspection Plan 9 3. (TIP) incorporating each Work Item in the job order, LOA Chits or Statements of Work (SOW). The initial TIP tier references - shall include all inspections and tests required by zero (Q) test/inspections and and first tier references, as well as symbols (I)(V) (G ) government notification identified in the Work Item, and any additional tests and inspections the contractor deems necessary to substantiate product conformance. one legible copy, in hard copy or approved .1 3. 9 Submit transferrable media, of initial copy of the TIP to the SUPERVISOR prior to - productive work for non CNO availabilities and no later than 5 start of days prior to the availability start date for CNO availabilities. .1.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved 9 3. media that can be sorted (e.g., Excel spreadsheet) of an transferrable updated TIP when requested by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 9 .2 A TIP shall: 3. .2.1 Be revised prior to the start of productive work and 9 updated as work proceeds on each Work Item. It shall be available upon request by the SUPERVISOR. Supporting data for tests and inspections requiring government notification (G), including accept/reject criteria, shall be available at the location of each test and inspection. Include ITEM NO: 009 3 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

27 provisions for documentin g the date, time, and identification of the SUPERVISOR's representative notified and government representative attending each (G) Point on the TIP. The TIP shall annotate the relationship to a - specific key event. The following key events shall be conside red at a minimum (as applicable): Undocking, Production Completion Date (PCD), | Command, Control, Communications, Computer, Combat Systems, and Intelligence - (C I) Light 5 Off (C5ILO) , Dock Trials (DT), Fast Cruise (FC), Sea Trials (ST), and Ava ilability Completion (AC). Each test and inspection shall be identified by its 3. 9 .2.2 respective Work Item number and Work Item paragraph number, including Standard Item paragraph number, and shall include inspection symbols (I) (Q) and (V), and the government notification (G) Point symbol where applicable. Provide identification of the item to be inspected by 3. 9 .2.3 - 180 - E). name, number, and location (e.g., number 3 main feed pump, 5 - 0 9 3. Provide identification of each characteris tic of the .2.4 items to be in spected and provide the criterion for acceptance for each characteristic (e.g., air test; 2 PSIG for 10 minutes; no drop). Test and Inspection records shall: 10 3. Include the ship's name and hull number, Job Order and Work 3. 10 .1 Item number, applicable PCP number, paragraph number, component identification, accept/reject criteria, date, time, and signature of the performed the test or contractor's authorized representative who witnessed or The signature occurs after the checkpoint is determined to be inspection. satisfactory or unsatisfactory and any exceptions are documented. Be maintained at a contractor location accessible to the site 3. 10 .2 of the work required by the Job Order. 3. Be documented within one day of accomplishment or prior to the 10 .3 subsequent tests or inspections, whichever is less. The records shall indicate the results of the test and or inspection accomplished. Records completion of each shall be incorporate d into the TIP within 4 days after test or inspection. - For tests and inspections involving (G) points, .3.1 10 3. records shall be documented upon acceptance or rejection and a hard copy (or electronic copy as authorized by the SUPERVI SOR) provided to the SUPERVISOR Point. For tests and inspections utilizing - at the conclusion of each (G) of Coating aperless QA program in accordance with 009 - Kit (CQATK) p QA Tool 32 , the data must be downloaded into the computer at the time and locat ion 2.1 of inspection. (See 4.5) .4 10 3. Required reports resulting from tests or inspections shall include for each attribute or measurement the appropriate design criterion required by the Work Item. ITEM NO: 009 4 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

28 The SUPERVISOR will consider the Work Item inco 3. 11 mplete if the contractor's documentation and records are not complete. (Q) , (V) Accomplish (I) 12 3. and tests/inspections that do not have associated (G) - points, with qualified and/or currently certified personnel where required by the technical documen ts (e.g., NBPI, NACE, nondestructive testing, electrical cableway inspection, etc.) as follows: 3. (I) inspections require verification and documentation by .1 2 a 1 , other than the person who has accomplished the work, who separate individual as an inspector. qualified is .2 2 1 3. (V) inspections require verification and documentation by the qualified tradesperson, trade supervisor, or inspector. .3 12 3. (Q) inspections require verification and documentation by a qualified Technical Representative in accordance with 009 - 90 of 2.1 and associated PCP requirements. 4 1 3. The authority to accomplish, document, accept and reject (I) 2 . and (V) inspections ma y be delegated to qualified subcontractor personnel, without regards to geographical location, subject to SUPERVISOR approval. 1 3. 3 Point (government notification) as follows: - Accomplish (G) 3 1 3. a point (G) is a symbol inserted in a Work Item to establish .1 in the sequence of accomplishment of work at which time the SUPERVISOR shall be notified by the prime contractor in all cases to permit observation of a specific test or inspection (I)(V) by the government. When the symbol (G) spections in a Work Item which are applicable to more precedes tests or in than one action, the symbol (G) shall identify the action required, e.g., (G) "HYDROSTATIC TEST". When more than one unit is involved, the (G) inspec - notification requirement applies to each unit. Pre tion by the – Point is neither required nor desired. contractor prior to a (G) 1 .2 3 Notify the SUPERVISOR's designated representative via FAX, 3. hard copy, or by electronic method, as directed by the SUPERVISOR. 1 3. Notify the SUPERVISOR during n .2.1 3 ormal day shift working hours, at least 4 hours, but not more than one day, prior to commencing the specific requirements in the paragraph annotated with the symbol (G). Notify the SUPERVISOR to cancel a scheduled test or inspection as soon as known, but no later than 30 minutes prior to the scheduled event. 3 .2.2 1 Notify the SUPERVISOR not later than 4 hours before 3. the end of the last preceding day shift when tests or inspections following a rs, on a weekend, (G) Point are scheduled after normal day shift working hou or on a federal holiday. ITEM NO: 009 5 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

29 Notify the SUPERVISOR at least 48 hours, but not more 3. 1 3 .2.3 than 72 hours, prior to commencing (G) - Points at contractor's/subcontractor's plants located in excess of 50 miles by the most direct roadway ne arest to the place of performance of the contract. Document the date, time, and identification of the SUPERVISOR's representative notified. 3. 3 Points scheduled after normal day shift - 1 For (G) .2.4 working hours, on a weekend, or a Federal holiday, not ify the SUPERVISOR to cancel a scheduled test or inspection as soon as known, but no later than 2 hours prior to the scheduled event. .3 3. 1 3 Proceed with the test or inspection if the SUPERVISOR is not present, provided the required advance notice has b een furnished to the SUPERVISOR and the contractor has completed and documented the preceding tests and inspections. A partial test or inspection requiring (G) notification may be .4 3 1 3. rk progress accomplished in the event that all work cannot be completed and wo would be delayed in waiting for total completion of work. Comply with the 13 requirements of 3. .2 when the incomplete work is completed and ready for the remainder of the test or inspection. Note partial inspections on the test or inspection f orm. .5 3 3. 1 Invoke (G) notification requirements for tests or inspections involving a subcontractor in purchase orders such that the requirements of 3. 1 3 .2 are met. 3. 1 3 .6 A qualified contractor representative shall be present to accomplish, accept o r reject and document tests or inspections associated with the symbol (G). 3 3. 1 The authority to witness or perform, document and .6.1 , (Q)(G), and (V)(G) tests and inspections is a prime accept/reject (I)(G) contractor's responsibility but, subject to SUPERVISOR approval within a 50 - mile radius of the contractor’s plant nearest to the place of performance of the contract, may be delegated to subcontractors who are MSRA or ABR agreement holders, SSPC QP1 certif ied, NDT certified, or have a current QMS accepted by the SUPERVISOR. The contractor may delegate responsibility to .6.2 3 1 3. subcontractors to perform, document and accept/reject (I)(G) and (V)(G) tests and inspections performed at plants located mile radius of the - outside a 50 contractor's plant nearest to the place of performance of the contract subject to SUPERVISOR prior approval. .6.3 3 Associated (G) - 1 Point notification requirements shall 3. not be delegated. 4 1 d outside a 50 - For work being performe mile radius of the place of 3. contract performance, the prime contractor shall submit one legible copy, in ITEM NO: 009 6 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

30 hard copy or approved transferrable media, of purchase orders to the , prior to SUPERVISOR within 2 days or otherwise as directed by the SUPERVISOR issue of purchase order and shipment of equipment. For contractors who do not utilize purchase orders as a vehicle for accomplishing work within their company, a report identifying the delineation of the specific Work Item of the purchase order shall be submitted to the requirements, in lieu SUPERVISOR. 3. 1 Maintain a current list for reference by the SUPERVISOR, designating 5 the contractor's qualified and currently certified inspectors who witness or s, indicating the type of tests and perform and sign for symbol (I) inspection inspections for which each inspector is qualified and currently certified. When subcontractors are delegated responsibility, the subcontractor's t. qualified and currently certified inspectors shall be included on this lis Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable 1 3. 6 1 audit - media, of the most recent contractor's/subcontractor's SSPC QP results to the SUPERVISOR, no later than 10 days after report. contractor's/subcontractor's receipt of the final audit Contractor/subcontractor shall notify the SUPERVISOR within one day 3. 17 when aware of any preliminary SSPC audit findings for critical audit items that result in a rating of one (1) (i.e., major CAR or deficiency) as referenced in 2. 6 . These no tifications shall be submitted, as required, in addition to the final SSPC audit report. 18 3. Certify to the SUPERVISOR that work is completed technically correct with all required OQE. All supporting documentation shall be submitted in C5ILO , ollowing Key Events: Undocking (if applicable), PCD, support of the f | DT, FC, ST, and CA. - As required by 009 .1 3. 18 60 of 2.1, each Work Item to be accomplished during the availability shall be evaluated and properly tied to the appropriate Key Event in a pred ecessor/successor methodology and documented in the Integrated Production Schedule (IPS) and tracked via the Event Readiness List. Key Event ties shall also be annotated for each item .2.1. 9 in the TIP as required by 3. .2 Notify the SUPERVISOR of t he condition and status of each 3. 18 individual Work Item in the availability within 3 days of Work Item completion or a minimum of 5 days prior to the scheduled Key Event to which that item is tied, whichever occurs first, by either of the following methods: 18 .2.1 Completion and submission of one legible copy of 3. Attachment A, in hard copy or approved transferrable media. Submission of Event Readiness List (ERL) may substitute for Attachment A when authorized by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 18 .2.2 Signature on a centralized signature sheet or record book maintained by the SUPERVISOR if Work Item is complete. If work is incomplete or complete with discrepancies, supporting rationale and impact ITEM NO: 009 7 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

31 statem ent with recovery plan shall be provided to the SUPERVISOR via submission of one legible copy of Attachment A, in hard copy or approved transferrable media. Upon completion of work or correction of discrepancies, atus shall be submitted to the a revised Attachment A with the updated st SUPERVISOR in hard copy or approved transferrable media. 4. : NOTES 4.1 ANSI/ISO/ASQ Q9001: 2015 commercial third party registrar certification is not required. 4.2 3.2 requires a one time - submittal/acceptance | QMS The submitted in unless this NAVSEA Standard Item and/or references change or contractor's status changes. 4.3 tier reference" is a specification, standard, drawing, test - A "zero g its memo, planning/design memo that is cited in the contract (includin attachments). A "first - tier reference" is either: (1) a specification, tier reference, or (2) a specification - standard, or drawing cited in a zero cited in a first tier drawing. All zero - tier and first tier references are mandatory for use. All lo wer tier references shall be used for guidance only. run critiques or fact findings are accomplished in - Contractor 4.4 accordance with 009 - 120 of 2.1. 4.5 - point may be accomplished for a fraction of the work A partial (G) n elected, the contractor is responsible to specification components. Whe point is - account for the inspection status of each component. A final (G) required for the last remaining component(s). System tiered - follow a 4 typically 4.6 Management s ISO compliant Quality hierarchy comprised of: The “first is the Quality Manual, a. - tier” document related to the QMS level document that is authored and approved by - which is the high upper management of the organization and is the guiding ers within the organizational document for which all subsequent ti system should be aligned with. b. tier” documents are the Quality Procedures making up the - The “second center of the documentation system. These procedures span all the required processes and practices within the organization and should inclu de references both upward to the Quality Manual and downward to the Work Instructions associated with each process. The “third - tier” documents are Work Instructions comprised of c. instructions that describe the specific actions required to achieve product. a quality ITEM NO: 009 8 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

32 d. The “fourth - tier” documents are the Quality Records which capture all the data, information, records, forms and become the objective QMS evidence is being executed per procedure. which will prove the ing Bodies (AB). 4.7 NAVSEA 04RM3 Approved list of Accredit - ASQ National Accreditation Board (ANAB), http://anab.org/ . ANSI - . b.com/ - a B), http://l - A - Laboratory Accreditation Bureau (L . Perry Johnson Registrars (PJLA), http://www.pjr.com/ (A2LA), The American Association for Laboratory Accreditation . https://www.a2la.org/ National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), . https://www.nist.gov/nvlap . International Accreditation Service (IAS), http://www.iasonline.org n in Contact NAVSEA 04RM3 for information on commercial accreditatio by NAVSEA approved commercial Accrediting Bodies 2.3 and 2.4 accordance with (AB). ITEM NO: 009 9 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

33 Attachment A Work Completion Certification SHIP’S NAME : HULL NO.: WORK ITEM NO: SSP NO.: KEY EVENT: Undocking (UD) Production Completion Date (PCD) Dock Trials (DT) Fast Cruise (FC) Sea Trials (ST) Availability Completion (AC) Command, Control, Communications, Computer, Combat Intelligence Light Off (C5ILO) - Systems, and Other ______________________ 1) All contracted production work (original, new and growth) has been All non conformances have - satisfactorily reviewed, accurate and complete. are at an acceptable level ) action request (CAR been corrected and corrective of completion. : RESULTS/STATUS Complete Complete w/ Discrepancies Incomplete If work is incomplete or complete with discrepancies, supporting Note: . rational and impact statement with recovery plan in the Comments block below Comments: Print and Sign Date: Name: Position and Responsibili ty: 2) All Tests and Inspections have been completed satisfactorily reviewed, accurate, complete and properly documented in the T&I Plan. ITEM NO: 009 10 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

34 : RESULTS/STATUS Complete Complete w/ Discrepancies Incomplete If work is incomplete or complete with discrepancies, supporting Note: rational and impact statement with recovery plan in the Comments block below. Comments: Print and Sign Name: Date: Position and Responsibility: 3) All required reports and all accompanying required data have been submitted, reviewed, accurate, complete and satisfactory. RESULTS/STATUS : Complete Complete w/ Discrepancies plete Incom If work is incomplete or complete with discrepancies, supporting Note: rational and impact statement with recovery plan in the Comments block below. Comments: Print and Sign Name: Date: Position and Responsibility: ITEM NO: 009 11 04 - of 1 1 1 FY - 9

35 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 05 201 6 DATE: 18 NOV II CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : Title: Temporary Access ; accomplish 1.1 2. REFERENCES : Items Standard 2.1 - 2.2 MIL 1689, Fabrication, Welding, and Inspection of Ships - STD Structure 2.3 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard 29 CFR Employment 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Submit one legible drawing or sketch of each proposed temporary access cut to the ship structure or engine enclosure and a list of each proposed bolted/riveted access removal to the SUPERVISOR 3 days prior to ted access. bolted/rive - powered For a nuclear making the cut s or removing the temporary each vessel, submit drawing/sketch of proposed the access cut to SUPERVISOR 5 days bolted/riveted access. the prior to making cut or removing Submittal of drawing or sketch is not required for those 3.1.1 access cuts authorized on a NAVSEA - approved drawing. The drawing or sketch shall include, as a minimum, the 2 3.1. following information: A plan and elevation view specifying the location of .1 2 3.1. the access by deck, frame, and distance from the ce nter line or deck edge and showing location of adjacent penetrations, bulkheads, framing, welds, and riveted joints within 12 inches of the proposed cut. .2 2 3.1. Location and number of previous cuts visible in each ds as required by . sting wel 2.2 plate and the cutback of exi .3 2 3.1. Temporary structural reinforcement required to prevent distortion of ship structure. 1 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 05 FY - 1 9

36 2 .4 Thickness and type of material of plating and 3.1. structural members to be cut. Include source or document/drawing number identifies material requirements. which 3.1. 2 .5 A description of the temporary access closure or enclosure. .6 3.1. 2 Include a copy of the weld procedure or approved weld procedure number with the proposed access sketch. ccess covers shall include location, 3.1. 3 List of bolted/riveted a designation, and classification as identified on ship's damage control book . 3.1. 4 Provide all drawing titles and numbers (including applicable sub - tier), and technical documentation used to accomplish the requiremen ts of 3.1. 3.1.5 Temporary accesses include access plates, small access plates, and closure plates as defined in Paragraph 3.33 of 2.2. conform to the requirements of 2.2 Ensure that access cut boundaries 3.2 and the following : extend across one or more frames as required Boundaries may 3.2.1 for size of opening. 3.2.2 Are sized and located to accomplish the requirements of the Job Order. 3.2.2.1 Verify access requirements on NAVSEA drawings conform to these same requirements. weld with glass cloth - plates using a single V iveted Weld r 3.2.3 conforming to MIL 24576, Type One, Class One, to prevent fusion between - C - backing member and plate. 3.2.3. 1 Remove existing rivets within 6 inches of a cut and install new rivets in accordance with 2 .2. Round patches 2 feet in diamet er or less shall be 3.2. 3.2 - dished 1/16 inch. - inch to 1/8 4 Minimum width of small access plates shall be at least times 4 3.2. the material thickness of the plate being cut or 3 inches, whichever is greater. 3.2. 5 Corners of small access plates between 3 inches minimum to 6 - half the width. Exception inches maximum in width shall have a radius of one to this corner radius criteri on is where a boundary terminates on an existing hull longitudinal seam or transverse butt joint. 2 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 05 FY - 1 9

37 3.2.6 Corners of small access plates greater than 6 inches in width shall have a radius of 2 times the material thickness of the plate being cut on or 3 inches, whichever is greater. Exception to this corner radius criteri is where a boundary terminates on an existing hull longitudinal seam or transverse butt joint. 3.2.7 Corners of access plates shall have a minimum radius of 6 is where a boundary inches. Exception to this corner radius criteri on terminates on an existing hull longitudinal seam or transverse butt joint. Utilize the same boundaries as used for prior cuts unless the 3.2. 8 requirements of this Standard Item have been violated. Annotate violations on the drawing or sketch .1 3.2. 8 required by 3.1. (V)(G) "INSPECT LAY OUT" 3.3 Lay out access on both sides of the structure to be cut, in accordance with drawing or sketch. the approved structure and after 3. 4 Prior to cutting access in the ship/vessel's , accomplish positive verification layout checkpoint drilling a pilot hole by in the path of the cut to be accomplished . 3.5 Center punch access layout upon completion of verification in 3.4. 3. 6 Accomplish the requirements of 2.3 for guarding of access openings. stallation of access 3. 6 .1 Remove temporary guarding after in plates. Chip and grind surfaces flush in way of removals. 7 3. Install a temporary coaming with a minimum height of 4 inches around access cuts through decks. Tack - weld the coaming to the deck and seal the deck joint with caulking co mpound. Remove the temporary coaming after installation of access .1 7 3. plate. Chip and grind surfaces flush in way of removals. drawing or sketch. the approved 8 Cut access in accordance with 3. 3. Remove bolted/riveted access. 9 Clean and .1 9 3. preserve gasket faying surfaces. 3. 9 .2 Chase and tap exposed threaded areas. 3. 10 Protect ship from weather and contamination. 3 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 05 FY - 1 9

38 10 .1 Fabricate temporary closures using fire retardant material, 3. prior to removing plates or cutting access openings. 3. 10 Closures shall be constructed to protect the access .1.1 from inclement weather and entry of contaminants. 10 3. .1.2 Horizontal deck closures shall support a minimum of 150 pounds per square foot. 3. .1.3 Closures shall be fitted with fasteners that permit 10 rapid installation and removal. 3. 10 .2 Install closures whenever access is not in use. 3. 11 Maintain watertight integrity of waterborne ship. 3. 11 .1 Fabricate and install watertight enclosures prior to removing plates or cutti ng access openings that do not provide a minimum of 4 feet of freeboard. 3. 11 .1.1 Maintain watertight integrity to a level 4 feet above the maximum calculated draft. Maintain watertight integrity of ship in dry dock. 3.1 2 2 .1 Provide temporary access closure plates and fasteners prior 3.1 to removing plates or cutting access openings below 4 feet of waterborne freeboard. 3.1 .1.1 Closure plates shall be available on short notice 2 for emergency sealing of the temporary access openings. 2 .2 Seal access openings with closure plates when conditions 3.1 warrant. 3.1 2 .3 Secure openings at the end of each shift not immediately followed by another shift engaged in dry dock work. 3.1 3 Remove the temporary closures when no longer required. 4 Re i nstall the temporary access 3.1 8 in accordance with the removed in 3. approved drawing or sketch. 3.1 4 .1 Accomplishment of welding, fabrication, and inspection temporary access shall be in requirements installation of a to support accordance with NAVSEA St andard Items (See Note 4.2) .2 Install the bolted/riveted access. 3.1 4 - Use new gasket material conforming to MIL .2.1 4 3.1 . 900 - PRF 4 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 05 FY - 1 9

39 .2.2 3.1 4 Install new rivets for riveted access plates in accordance with 2.2. (V) "CHALK TEST" 5 3.1 sh a chalk test on structural closure in way of temporary Accompli rint shall be centered with 100 - percent contact. access. Chalk imp Accomplishment of structural boundary test 6 3.1 (e.g., cofferdam, ing each watertight/airtight temporary vacuum box, air hose, water hose) of access closure shall be in accordance with NAVSEA standard items (See Note 4.3). NOTES : 4. The maximum draft, calculated – Maximum Calculated Draft (MCD) 4.1 during the period in which ship’s draft is affected due to evolut ions which add, remove, or change weight. It represents the “worst case” cumulative effect at any one time on trim, list, or draft for the proposed weight standard - changes throughout the period that hull penetrations are in a non be known and utilized by the SUPERVISOR and Ship’s configuration. MCD shall Force in scheduling work and testing during waterborne maintenance periods. If welding, fabrication, or inspection for installation of a 4.2 temporary access of 3.14.1 is required; the use of Category I I Standard Item abrication, and Inspection Requirements; accomplish” of 2.1 F - 009 12 “Welding, will be specified in the Work Item. If a structural boundary test (e.g., cofferdam, vacuum box, air 4.3 hose, water hose) to support testing of a watertight/ai rtight temporary closure access is required; the use of Category II Standard Item 009 - 25 “ Structural Boundary Test; accomplish” of 2.1 will be specified in the Work Item. 5 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 05 FY - 1 9

40 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 ITEM NO: - 06 DATE: 18 NOV 201 6 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE: Radioactive - Non Title: 1.1 Maintaining Protection and Cleanliness from Operations; accomplish 2. REFERENCES: 2.1 Standard Items - 1623, Fire Performance Requirements and Approved STD - 2.2 MIL Specifications for Interior Finish Materials and Furnishings (Naval Shipboard Use) NFPA Standard 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame 2.3 Propagation of Textiles and Films 3. REQUIREMENTS: 3.1 Observe t , in addition to the specific ts he following requiremen protection and leanliness c requirements of the Job Order, for maintaining radioactive operations from non - n o the ship, ship's equipment, components, and spaces for the duration of the availability. 3.1.1 Accomplish an inspection of the work area prior to installation of protective covering to identify the current condition of equipment, systems, and components, including any exposed cables, penetrations, stuffing tubes, bolted cover plates, and antennas. 3.1.1.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of a report listing results o f the requirements of 3.1.1 to the SUPERVISOR. 3.2 Prevent contamination and damage of the ship's equipment, producing operations. - components, and spaces during contamination 3.2.1 Plug, blank, wrap, cover, seal, and mask equipment, components, cables , wireways, boots, and openings using fire retardant/water components, systems repellent material, and prevent entry of contaminants to and equipment. - 1 of 5 06 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 1 9

41 3.2.1.1 Ensure plugging and blanking does not result in flooding or damage to ship's equipment. 3 .2.1.2 Install Herculite or canvas covering conforming to 55308, and/or fire retardant plywood conforming to Category 2, Type II, A - A - L 19140 - - , or other NAVSEA approved fire retardant industrial protective - of MIL . material dustrial filter material 3.2.2 meeting the Install fire retardant in minimum requirements of UL 900 Class 1, non - fire contributing material, on the intake of supply and exhaust end of ventilation systems that will be in use. 3.2.2.1 Remove existing and install new filter or clean the filter material when air flow is restricted. (V) "VERIFY PROTECTIVE MEASURES" 3.2.3 All protective measures are to be in place prior to start of producing operations and shall remain in place until the any contamination - contamination operations are complete. producing - 3.2.4 Install double curtain baffles at the entrance of each access door where airborne contamination could occur during contamination - producing operations. Install a dirt collecting mat on the deck directly inside each um of 4 doors. Secure and mark The SUPERVISOR will select a maxim door. doors not designated for access. Temporary coverings shall not be removed during 3.2.5 contamination producing operations without permission of the SUPERVISOR. - (V) "INSPECT PROTECTI VE COVERING" 3.3 Inspect the integrity of the protective covering at the beginning of producing operations will be accomplished. each shift in which contamination - Ensure that equipment and machinery have not been infiltrated by SUPERVISOR immediately by verbal means, followed on contaminants. Notify the the next day in writing, if contamination or surface damage has occurred. Reseal to prevent further entry of contaminants or surface damage. free from 3.4 Maintain cleanliness of the work site, including bilges, accumulation of industrial debris caused by contractor and/or subcontractor employees on a continuous basis throughout the availability. Work spaces include those areas immediately under and adjacent, and those areas where , and bilge areas in vicinity of the work site. service lines are run Cleaning shall be accomplished no later than at the end of 3.4.1 each shift at a minimum, on a daily basis. 3.4.2 at the Remove and dispose of industrial debris from the ship end of each shift at a mini on a daily basis. mum, - 2 of 5 06 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 1 9

42 Vacuum cleaners shall be emptied of all debris at the end of 3.4.3 each shift at a minimum, on a daily basis . ship board the , s a 3.4.3.1 Use metal canister vacuum cleaner those used for regulated and controlled radiological and hazardous except waste or hazardous material. Permane 3.4.3.2 n tly and legibly mark each vacuum cleaner with a company name or unique identifier. collection Plastic trash cans are prohibited for trash 3.4.4 onboard in spaces where industrial work is being performed. Plastic trash as a liner for bags . s metal trash can may be used onboard Accomplish a cleanliness inspection on a daily basis whenever work 3. 5 is in progress. The inspection shall be made jointly with the SUPERVISOR and the Commanding Officer's designated representative. During inspection the responsible party shall be assigned. A written report of any unclean work sites/spaces shall be prepared by the contractor and copies distr ibuted to the SUPERVISOR and Commanding Officer's designated representative within 4 hours after completion of the inspection. The inspection report shall list the responsible activity (contractor, ship, etc.) for each unclean site/area. Unclean sites/are as determined as contractor responsible shall be immediately cleaned. 5 3. Accomplish inspections and reporting during the daily fire .1 prevention and housekeeping inspections in accordance with 009 - 07 of 2.1. (V)(G) "FINAL CONTAMINATION/DAMAGE INSPECT ION" Remove protective covering upon completion of installed in 3.2 6 3. contamination producing operations. Accomplish a final inspection of the - work area to identify the presence of contamination and/or damage created by contamination ons. Contamination/damage shall be documented producing operati - on the inspection record. 3.6.1 Presence of contamination and/or damage created by contamination producing operations is unacceptable and shall be corrected. - 3. and foreign matter 7 Remove from the ship and dispose of debris generated as a result of work being accomplished at the end of each shift at a minimum, on a daily basis Comply with the requirements of federal, state, . and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations or as specified elsewhere in t he Job Order. fabric material used onboard for containment or as protective Non 3.8 - coverings shall be in accordance with 2.2. Fabrics used onboard for containment or as protective coverings shall be tested in accordance with and meet the requirements o f 2.3 or be listed as an acceptable "Drapery or Curtain" in 2.2. - 3 of 5 06 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 1 9

43 4. NOTES: 4.1 Definitions: Cleanliness means the removal of all industrial debris 4.1.1 (industrial trash, waste material, weld rods/tips, fasteners, rags, lagging waste, job scrap, wir e, litter, rubbish, etc.) at the end of each shift, leaving the areas broom clean and electronic spaces vacuum clean. Adjacent/surrounding machinery, equipment, etc., shall be cleaned free of all resulting debris. 4.1.2 Daily means at least once per ev ery calendar day. include but are not limited to: - radioactive operations 4.1.3 Non Operations liable to produce particulates to become 4.1.3.1 airborne during accomplishment of the work scope, i.e., abrasive blasting, mechanical cleaning, spray hot work operations, and air blowdowns. painting, Operations liable to produce fluid contamination of 4.1.3.2 equipment as a result of external leakage of piping systems during testing. 4.1.3.3 Operations liable to produce fluid contamination of uipment as a result of external leakage of piping systems during eq waterjetting. Operations liable to produce industrial debris such 4.1.3.4 as, but not limited to, industrial trash, waste material, weld rods/tips, ap, wire, litter, rubbish, etc. fasteners, rags, lagging waste, job scr 4.2 The SUPERVISOR will coordinate operation of ventilation systems, as requested by the contractor, to maintain a positive pressure within the vessel's envelope and to create an outward flow of air through crevices or aro und penetrations. The cleanliness goal is to turn over all areas of the ship in the 4.3 same condition or better as at beginning of the availability. 4.4 Ship's Force responsibility: 4.4.1 Ship's Force is responsible for dust that collects as a matt er of course throughout the availability and for any Ship's Force job es being worked by intermediate site maintenance including monitoring job sit AIT Alteration Installation Teams ( ) , and any maintenance activities, ranged. contractor services that the ship has ar 4.4.2 Ship's Force is responsible to maintain cleanliness of their areas of responsibility broom clean at the end of each shift, on a daily basis. - 4 of 5 06 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 1 9

44 Ship's Force will report cleanliness concerns to the 4.4.3 e areas. SUPERVISOR for contractor responsibl 4.4.4 Ship's Force will work continually throughout the availability to keep bilges and other general areas of the ship clean where the Contractor is not working. Ship's Force and the Contractor will familiarize each other with 4.5 their scope of work (any other work being performed on board the ship not pursuant to contractor authorized work under the Job Order is considered Ship's Force work). The affected locations and aspects of the work and/or ship conditions (i.e., blasting, grinding, preservation, hot work, insulation removals, decking replacement, hydroblasting, weight tests, electrical cable replacement, etc.) will be identified. Each responsible party will cl ean site in locations where both parties will be working, on a daily basis. Communications must be continuous and active 2 ways. Diligence in inspection will ensure that action is taken by the 4.6 ory. responsible party prior to any area becoming unsatisfact - 5 of 5 06 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 1 9

45 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 07 - 09 0 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 I CATEGORY: : SCOPE 1. 1.1 Title: Confined Space Entry, Certification, Fire Prevention and Housekeeping; accomplish : REFERENCES 2. Standard Items 2.1 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for 2.2 Shipyard Employment 2.3 29 CFR Part 1910.134, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Respiratory Protecti on NFPA Standard 51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, 2.4 Cutting, and Other Hot Work 2.5 NFPA Standard 312, Standard for Fire Protection of Vessels During up Construction, Repair, and Lay - Hygienists (ACGIH) 2.6 American Conference of Government Industrial Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents NAVSEA OP - 4, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat 7 2. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) Standard 199, Automatic Sprinklers for 2.8 Protection Service Fire - 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Comply with the requirements of 2.2 through 2.5 and this item to or other dangerous atmosphere exists in determine whether or not an explosive tanks, spaces, and associated piping, including adj acent tanks, spaces, and piping aboard the ship and control hot work and entry to those spaces to plishment preclude damage to the ship or injury to personnel during the accom of this Job Order. 009 - 1 of 07 1 7 ITEM NO: 9 FY - 1

46 3.1.1 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of tanks or spaces to be opened or certified to the SUPERVISOR at a list of least one day prior to opening the tank or void . NAVSEA 3.1.1.1 Comply with additional requirements of | Standard Items when accomplishing work in Collection, Holding and Transfer Motor Gasoline (MOGAS) tanks, spaces, or associated piping. (See (CHT) and Note 4.6) 3.1.1.2 For fuel tanks or spaces that conta in or have contained fuel, including F - 76 and JP - 5, in addition to the atmospheric - - 30 testing required by 2.2, test for diesel fuel (CAS No. 68334 - 30 - 5; 68476 2; 68476 28 - 3) as total hydrocarbons in accordance - 6, 77650 - 34 - 3; 68476 - 31 - otal hydrocarbon test results on the Marine Chemist with 2.6, and record t Certificate or competent person’s test/inspection record. 3.1.2 Provide initial and annual update training for Competent Persons by utilizing a National Fire Protection Association ( NFPA) Certified Marine Chemist or NFPA Instructor . The length of the initial training class shall be at least 24 hours. Annual update training shall be at least 8 hours. Maintain a current roster of designated Competent 3.1.2.1 Person(s) and copies o f certificates of completion for the training required in 3.1.2 for reference by the SUPERVISOR. Submit one legible copy, in media, of the specific documents when requested by the approved transferrable SUPERVISOR. , Certified st Certificate Post a copy of the Marine Chemi 3.1.3 Industrial Hygienist's test/inspection record, or Competent Person's test/inspection record at each access to the affected space while work in the copy of the MCC or test/inspection space is in progress. When requested, a record shall also be delivered to a location designated by the SUPERVISOR. In the event that the space is to be NOT SAFE FOR WORKERS or NOT identified SAFE FOR HOT WORK , the space shall be posted accordingly and other a ffected contractors, the SUPERVISOR and Ship’s Force shall be notified immediately. The posted copy shall be clearly visible and legible. 3.1.3.1 Initial certification of spaces that require a Certified MCC or Certified Industrial Hygienist's test/ins pection record in support of work operations shall be effective until conditions change which test/inspection . record A Competent Person would void the certificate or required testing as ic tmospher a shall conduct the same or on the MCC l Hygienist's test/inspection record. Certified Industria For those certified spaces which employees will 3.1.3.2 each space and record , test enter, a Competent Person shall visually inspect certified as ENTER WITH RESTRICTIONS or SAFE FOR WORKERS as often as necessary, a nd as a minimum, prior to entry by employees on a daily basis. If a space is not to be entered on any given day, it is not required to be ITEM NO: 009 2 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

47 inspected and tested by a Competent Person. The initial MCC remains valid if ed on the MCC. conditions have not changed, unless not 3.1.3.3 For those certified spaces affected by hot work, a , Competent Person shall visually inspect each space , and record test certified as SAFE FOR HOT WORK as often as necessary and, as a minimum, daily prior to commencement of hot work to ensure that conditions established by , the affected continuous the certificate are maintained. When hot work is visually inspected, tested, and recorded on a daily basis to spaces shall be maintain the SAFE FOR HOT WORK certification. If a Competent Person finds that the conditions 3.1.3.4 within a certified space fail to meet the applicable requirements for which certified, work in the space shall be stopped and may not be resumed it was until the space has been recertified by a Marine Chemist. 3.1.3.5 For those spaces where only Competent Person tests Person shall and inspections are required in accordance with 2.2, a Competent visually inspect and test each space as often as necessary and, as a minimum, daily prior to entry or commencement of hot work to ensure that conditions are safe. 3.1.3.6 After the Competent Person has determined initially that a space is safe for entry and finds subsequently that the conditions within the tested space fail to meet the requirements of 2.2, work shall be stopped until the conditions in the tested space are corrected, the space is retested, rei n spected, and a new record of te sts/inspections is recorded and posted. 7 3.1.3. Allow Navy civilian and military personnel to enter under the certificate or test / inspection record for inspection purposes . 3.1.4 Tank cleaning personnel shall be trained annually on safety practice s to include a discussion of safety information identified in Subparts A, B, and Section 1915.152 of Subpart I of 2.2. Maintain a of the names of the Shipyard/Plant 5 3.1. current roster Rescue Team Members, along with contractor certification that training requirements of Subpart B of 2.2 have been accomplished and are current for side each Rescue Team Member, or documentation of arrangements made for an out in a rescue team to respond promptly to a request for rescue service approved transferrable Submit one legible copy, in contractor facility. media, of the specific documents when requested by the SUPERVISOR. 3.1. will respond. .1 5 At a naval facility, the Navy 3.1. Spaces that are determined to contain Immediately Dangerous 6 to Life or Health (IDLH) atmospheres shall never be entered except for emergency rescue or for short duration for installation of ventilation 2 and 2.3. When entering IDLH spaces for the equipment in accordance with 2. purpose of installing ventilation, notify the SUPERVISOR prior to entry. ITEM NO: 009 3 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

48 N otifications of rescue shall be made as soon as management becomes aware of such an event. 7 ted the space prior to Confirm that all personnel have exi 3.1. closure of tanks, voids, and cofferdams. Designate one person to account for all personnel who may have entered the space. Provide a written notice for each job or separate area of hot work 3.2 aboard ship. The notice sha 3.2.1 ll state a description of the work to be done, , of the hot work and the specific location , , to include compartment number compartments adjacent to decks, bulkheads, and similar structures upon which - hot work is to be accomplished, the time hot work will commence, current gas free status of the area (if required), the absence or existence of feet in any direction of the operation (or combustible material within 35 further, if affected by the operation), and if combustible material exists, what action shall be taken to protect the material from fire, the provision ditions at the and assignment of a fire watch, and the affirmation that con work site (ventilation, temporary lighting, accesses) permit the fire watch(es) to have a clear view of and immediate access to all areas included in the fire watch. 3.2.2 charged fire - The notice shall affirm that a suitable, fully exting uisher shall be available at the job site and provide for an inspection of the area 30 minutes after completion of the hot work or the cessation of hot work at the job site unless the contractor's Hot Work Supervisor surveys rmines that there is no further fire hazard as the affected work area and dete the final action to complete the notice. 3.2.3 The notice shall be signed by a supervisor specifically designated as responsible for coordination of the hot work and the fire watch for each shift . where hot work is being conducted requirement when One copy of each notice shall be given to the SUPERVISOR 3.2.4 requested and one copy to the Commanding Officer's designated representative, conspicuously posted and at a minimum, one copy of each notice shall also be . accomplished at the location where the hot work is being 3.2.4.1 The notice to the Commanding Officer's designated representative shall precede the initiation of the actual hot work in order to permit the Commanding Officer to des ignate a member of the crew to observe the operation, if desired. 3.2.4.2 Deliver written n otification of hot work planned Tuesday through Friday to the Commanding Officer's designated representative at least 30 minutes and not more than 24 hours prece ding start of work. 3.2.4.3 otification of hot work planned Deliver written n over a weekend or Monday following that weekend to the Commanding Officer's ITEM NO: 009 4 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

49 0900 on the Friday immediately designated representative no later than that weekend. preceding of hot work planned on 3.2.4.4 Deliver written notification to the a federal holiday and on the day following the federal holiday Commanding Officer's designated representative no later than 0900 of the last the federal holiday. preceding working day .2.4.5 3 The notice shall be effective for 24 hours unless a shorter period is specified in the contract or the gas free status of the - work area or system requires stopping the work. A new notice is required if free st - atus. work is interrupted due to loss of gas 3.3 fire watches, at all affected areas where hot work Provide trained is being accomplished. Provide fire extinguishing equipment as described in 2.2, 2.4, and 2.5. in The program utilized to train fire watches shall be 3.3.1 includ and accordance with the requirements of 2.2 and 2.4, e steps to be taken by the fire watch and hot work operator prior to accomplishment of hot work, proper selection and use of fire extinguishing equipment and other between the fire watch and hot work operator, safety equipment, relationship proper fire reporting procedures and other sounding of fire alarms, and A means of communicating reporting of fires to the ship's Quarterdeck. between l be all fire watches and their corresponding hot workers shal This training shall include theory and practical (hands provided. on) fire - suppression techniques. This training shall be provided to all newly assigned fire watches, with annual updates provided to personnel. Provide rained fire watches, i.e., badge, sticker, visible means of identifying t vest, etc. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable 3.3.1.1 media, of the training program when requested by the SUPERVISOR. hot work accomplishing Each fire watch attending worker(s) 2 3.3. be equipped with a fully have charged and operable fire extinguisher, - shall immediate access and an unobstructed view of the affected hot work area to and shall remain at the job site for 30 minutes from which they are assigned unless the contractor's Hot Work the time the hot work is completed Supervisor surveys the affected work area and determines that there is no further fire hazard. other duties .1 2 3.3. The fire watch shall not accomplish while hot work is in progress. accomplishing Where several workers are 3 3.3. hot work at one site, the fire watch shall have a clear view of and immediate access to each worker accomplishing hot work. ITEM NO: 009 5 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

50 .1 3.3. 3 No more than 4 workers shall be attended by a single fire watch. rom hot work may involve more 3.3. 4 In cases in which hot material f and on scaffolding machinery spaces, a fire , than one level, as in trunks , watch shall be stationed at each level unless positive means are available to prevent the spread or fall of hot material. 5 3.3. In cases where hot work is to be accomplished on a bulkhead or deck, combustible material shall be removed from the vicinity of the hot work on the opposite side of the bulkhead, overhead, or deck, and a fire watch shall be posted at each location. If multiple blind compartments are involved in any . .1 3.3 5 hot work job, fire watches shall be posted simultaneously in each blind area. Comply with the firefighting and fire prevention requirements 3.3.6 work operations in or adjacent areas containing 7 prior to hot of 2. to ammunition or explosives. Hot work shall not be conducted during any logistics 3.3.6.1 or maintenance movement of ammunition or explosives. No hot work shall be performed without an operational general 3.3.7 announcing system .e., Ship’s 1MC, or a , i communication strategy documented . approved by the SUPERVISOR 3.4 Locate oxygen, acetylene, fuel gas, toxic, oxygen depleting (OD) gas supply systems off the ship. Manifolds connected to pierside supply systems may be placed on board ships as long as they are located on a weather deck and equipped with a shutoff valve located on the pier. The pierside shutoff valve shall be in addition to the shutoff valve at the inlet to each portable der required by 2.2. outlet hea xygen O 1 3.4. , acetylene, fuel gas, toxic, and OD gas supply systems shall be stored to prevent collisions by trucks, forklifts, falling objects, etc. tanks shall be staged in designated LOX ( Liquid oxygen 2 3.4. ) locations on the quay wall/pier to be determined jointly by the contractor , SUPERVISOR. Ship's Force, and the 3.4. 3 When gas cylinders are in use on board ship, they shall be located on the weather decks or in a loca tion determined jointly by the in cylinder and shall be secured contractor, Ship's Force, and the SUPERVISOR racks, and in an upright position. The number of in - use cylinders shall be limited to those which are required for work in progress and which have pressure regulators connected to the cylinder valves. On - board reserve gas half the number of in use cylinders and shall cylinders shall not exceed one - - be located in a remote area of the weather decks or in a location determined ITEM NO: 009 6 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

51 jointly by the contractor , Ship's Force, and the SUPERVISOR . Reserve acetylene cylinders shall be secured in an upright position. When not in use, gas cylinders and manifolds on board shall 3.4. 4 lines disconnected, protective cover (cap) in place, and have valves closed, shall be secured. Acetylene cylinders shall be secured in cylinder racks and in an upright position. shall be positively identified run Each fuel gas and oxygen hose 3.5 with durable unique marki ngs that include maintenance activity name, service type, location, and shore side shut - off points. Tags shall be located (at a minimum) at the source, point of entry aboard ship, at each connection point nt. (including quick disconnects) , and termination poi 5 3. .1 Unattended fuel gas and oxygen hose lines or torches are . prohibited in confined spaces charged fuel gas and oxygen hose lines or torches 5 3. .2 Unattended , . are prohibited in enclosed spaces for more than 15 minutes All fuel gas 3. 5 .3 and oxygen hose lines shall be disconnected at the supply manifold at the end of each shift . All disconnected fuel gas and oxygen hose lines shall be .4 5 3. rolled back to the supply manifold or to open air to disconnect the torch; or extended fuel gas a nd oxygen hose lines shall not be reconnected at the given a positive means of supply manifold unless the lines re we identification when they were first connected and the lines are tested using a drop test to ensure the integrity of fuel gas and oxygen bur ning system. Alternate procedures must be approved by the SUPERVISOR. 5 . 5 fuel gas system hook - - Upon completion of oxygen up, accomplish 3. a pressure drop test to include the torch, hoses, and gages. . pressure by .1 5 5 3. Apply pressure to the system. Back off turning off the valve supplying gases to the system. If the pressure on the gage drops, a leak in the system exists. If the pressure on the gage does not drop, the system is tight. After applying pressure, wait 2 minutes to ensure 5 5 . .2 3. pressure does not drop. The use of gas hose splitters is prohibited. 6 . 5 3. gas/oxygen depleting (OD) hose 6 Each inert run shall be positively 3. identified with durable unique markings that include maintenance activity - name, service type, location, and shore side shut off points. Tags shall be located (at a minimum) at the source, point of entry aboard ship, at each (including quick disconnects) connection point , and termination point. ITEM NO: 009 7 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

52 Unattended inert gas/OD hose lines or torches are 6 .1 3. prohibited in confined spaces. 3. 6 .2 Unattended, charged inert gas/OD hose lines or torches are prohibited in enclosed spaces for more than 15 minutes. 3. 6 .3 All inert gas/OD hose lines shall be disconnected at the supply manifold at the end of each shift. 3. 6 .4 All disconnected inert gas/OD hose lines shall be rolled back to the supply manifold or to open air to disconnect the torch; or extended inert gas/OD hose lines shall not be reconnected at the supply manifold ositive means of identification when they were unless the lines were given a p first connected and the lines are tested using a drop test to ensure the integrity of inert gas/OD systems. Alternate procedures must be approved by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 6 .5 Upon completion of inert gas/OD ga s system hook - up, accomplish a pressure drop test to include the torch, hoses, and gages. .1 .5 6 3. Apply pressure to the system. Back off pressure by turning off the valve supplying gases to the system. If the pressure on the gage drops, a leak in the system exists. If the pressure on the gage does not drop, the system is tight. .2 . 6 3. 5 After applying pressure, wait 2 minutes to ensure pressure does not drop. 3. 6 .6 The use of gas hose splitters is prohibited. 3. - 7 Use fireproof or fire - re tarda n t covering in accordance with MIL - C - - resistant synthetic fabrics, non 24576, such as fireproofed canvas, fire in accordance with ASTM D6413 , or other combustible fabrics, metal covers ent from falling sparks or other suitable materials, to protect ship’s equipm potential sources of fire. Coverings shall be in place prior to commencing hot work and be maintained throughout the hot work evolution . Proper documentation of fire retardancy shall be available for review upon request. 3.7.1 Non fire - retardant temporary wooden structures located on the dock blocks) shall dock (not including dry pier, dry dock edge, or in the dry be a minimum of 35 feet from the ship to prevent spr ead of fire. . 7 3. except that used for and staging boards, , plywood Lumber, 2 pallets, shall be fire retardant in accordance with Category Two, Type II, of - L - MIL 19140. 3 Storage of material aboard ship shall be limited to that . 7 3. or work in progress. Materials, trailers, temporary which is required f lights, flammable liquids, fueling of vehicles, and the rigging of hoses/welding leads/temporary lights aboard the ship shall comply with the ITEM NO: 009 8 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

53 following: Material, including that stowed in bins that are placed and held temporarily on hangar decks, well decks, or tank decks shall not exceed 8 feet in height. A 20 - foot - wide lane shall be maintained the length of hangar decks to act as a fire break. Material shall occupy a deck space not to exceed 25 - feet b y 25 - feet with adjacent 6 - foot - wide aisles on each side for ready hose line access. . 3. 7 4 Prior to bringing equipment or working material aboard ship, its crating and packing shall be removed. If the equipment or material may , the crating and packing shall be removed be damaged during handling immediately after the equipment or working material is brought aboard and taken ashore for disposal. A small quantity of pallets may be staged in a location determined jointly by the contractor, Ship's Force, and the SUPERVISOR aboard ship for use in materials handling operations. 5 3. 7 . Install sprinkling systems on temporary structures constructed or staged onboard for the purpose of material stowage. pen sprinkler pendent, sprinkler and o Identify 3.7.5.1 be most suitable for the . The type shall upright or sidewall type shape and configuration of the protected area. Pendent and upright sprinklers shall have 180 degree full cone spray patterns. The sprinkling density shall be 0.2 gpm/sqft and the sprinklers shall be arranged to cover the entire level of the temporary structure and all contents. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for spacing of sprinklers, distance from the overhead of the protected area, and distance from stowed material or obstructions. Place and note the height that placards on the interior of the protected area material cannot be stacked above. 3.7.5.2 The system shall be a dry deluge type, manually turn sprinkler valve located outside and near the operated by a quarter - he structure. The system shall be continuously charged up to the access to t sprinkler valve, from the ship’s permanent or temporary firemain, using collapsible hose suitable for the pressure and temporary piping or a non - flow. Piping downstream of the sprinkler valve . A shall luminum shall be metal not be used for piping . Place a placard at the sprinkler valve identifying the protected area and providing instructions on operating the sprinkler valve. Provide freeze protection with the water supply sprinklers, with the heat responsive and 3.7.5.3 Automatic activating elements removed, may be substituted for open (deluge) sprinklers. 4 3.7.5. CONEX boxes/MILVANs staged within the ship for material storage or other operational purposes shall be of all steel exterio r construction and be capable of being completely sealed closed. Only Class A combustibles are permitted to be stored within such - type combustibles and non structures and they shall remain completely sealed closed when not being uch structures are used as manned office or physically manned. When s operating spaces (including temporary Enclosed Operating Stations), they and in accordance with 2.8 shall be equipped with smoke detection have shall ITEM NO: 009 9 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

54 at a minimum, one fire extinguisher of appropriate size and class at each T he use of kitchen appliances (microwave s access. , coffee makers, hot pots, etc.) and hot work within the unit is prohibited. 3. 7 . 5. 5 Smoke alarms, approved by Underwriter's Laboratory, shall be installed in enclosures and shall be audible outside the enclosures. 3. temporary structures 7 . 6 Install sprinkling system on each constructed or staged onboard not for the purpose of material stowage. The the sprinklers shall be arranged sprinkling density shall be 0.1 gpm/sqft and to cover the entire level of the temporary structure and all contents. The system shall be a wet automatic type. The system shall be continuously charged up to the sprinkler, from the ship’s permanent or temporary firemain. Place a placard at the sprinkler valve identifying the protected area and providing instructions on operating the sprinkler valve. Provide freeze protection with the water supply. Operation of the sprinkler system shall sound an audible alarm outside the structure. Install smoke detection system inside the structure. Provide a udible alarms both inside and outside the structure. P rovide p ortable AFFF and CO2 extinguishers interior to the structure near the access. bustible liquids and com The quantity of f 3.7.7 brought lammable onboard shall be kept to a minimum, shall not exceed that necessary for one shift’s use, and shall not be left unattended. Fueling of vehicles or transfer of fuel between containers 8 . 7 3. shall be accomplished at designated sit es on weather decks or in a location determined jointly by the contractor, Ship's Force, and the SUPERVISOR . Notify ship's Officer of the Deck prior to the fueling or transfer operation. When fuel is transferred between containers, the containers shall be bonded and grounded to prevent static discharge. Fueling operations shall be conducted at designated sites on exposed weather decks. All fuel shall be transferred aboard ship in approved safety containers. Direct fueling of vehicles aboard ship shall b e avoided but may be utilized during operations via an approved fuel storage tank on the weather deck (flight deck, Helo deck, or deck edge elevator) provided the following safety precautions are provided and maintained by the performing activity: Fuel storage tank .1 8 3.7. shall be either of double wall s construction or have integral cofferdam sized to exceed tank capacity. in a location approved by 3.7. 8 .2 Locate f uel storage tanks n ot in open to atmosphere on an exposed weather deck and the SUPERVISOR, up of fuel vapors would be of concern. - interior spaces where a build be inspected and verified Fuel storage tanks .3 8 3.7. shall by safety personnel to meet safety requirements . .4 Perform and document weekly inspections of the fuel 8 3.7. ge tanks. stora ITEM NO: 009 10 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

55 Provide 2 dry chemical fire extinguishers 3.7. 8 .5 , each with an Underwriter’s Laboratory rating of at least 60 B:C, for each fuel storage tank. Post signs at each storage tank designating 8 .6 3.7. of an emergency. ownership and contact numbers in the event .7 3.7. 8 Stage an Oil and Haza rdous Substance Spill Response K it at each fuel storage station. etal coamings 4 inches high, tack welded .8 8 Install m 3.7. openings to control deck access - around all through and caulked to the deck, Modifications from this requirement based on ammable liquid spills. fl location of the access openings may be approved by the SUPERVISOR . 3.8 emergency lighting and power as the Utilize the ship’s permanent and preferred systems. Plan and execute work in such a manner that the ship’s permanently installed lighting and power systems will be out of service for the minimum amount of time. hip’s lighting systems that Install temporary lighting for s 3.8.1 are non - operational or require additional illumination. Provide 2 sources of lighting to all spaces that normally 3.8.2 The operational. - have 2 sources for ship’s lighting systems that are non lighting may be the ship’s permanent and emergency lighting systems or a combination of temporary and ship’s permanent lighting, provided that The removal of lighting separate power sources are utilized for each system. at could impede damage control efforts, from spaces or compartments th personnel egress, and/or casualty responder access shall require approval by the SUPERVISOR prior to removal. 3.8.3 Permanent or temporary lighting shall meet the illumination requirements of 2.2. Accompli 3. sh temporary access requirements as follows: 9 Temporary access cuts may be made in fire zone boundaries .1 9 3. provided they are equipped with fume - tight steel closures when installed. Boundary degradation by use of temporary access cuts or passage of ser vice lines shall be permitted only upon granting of a written waiver by the designated Commanding Officer's SUPERVISOR, in conjunction with the representative, for a limited time. 9 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable .1.1 3. ecord of boundary openings and their locations to the SUPERVISOR media, of a r designated Commanding Officer's and one additional copy to the ITEM NO: 009 11 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

56 representative. Resubmit boundary opening data when any changes, additions, or deletions of boundary openings occur. 9 .2 En sure at least one unobstructed access on ships designed 3. with 3 or fewer accesses to each main and auxiliary machinery space and at least 2 unobstructed accesses on ships designed with 4 or more accesses to each main and auxiliary machinery space. to provide 3. 9 .3 Stage fire retardant material adjacent to the ship and other hull penetrat for temporary closure of access cuts, hatches , ions created by contractor work (e.g. , access cuts and open hatches due to running of temporary services). 3. 10 Accomplish a fire prevention and housekeeping inspection during each shift Once each manned/regular workday, t he whenever work is in progress. inspection shall be made jointly with the SUPERVISOR and the Commanding Office r's designated representative. Deviation fr om this requirement for availabilities less than 30 days in duration must be adjudicated by the SUPERVISOR. approved transferrable media, of in Submit one legible copy, 3.10.1 request for deviation to the SUPERVISOR. 2 . 10 3. media, approved transferrable an Submit one legible copy, in written report of the discrepancies and corrective action of a s, using Commanding Officer's designated Attachment A, the SUPERVISOR and the to e inspection. representative within 4 hours after completion of th Provide a safety representative to accomplish the fire 3.10.3 prevention and housekeeping inspection who at a minimum has completed the training required in para 3.1.2 and the following OSHA Training Institute (OTI) courses or NAVSEA appro ved equivalents: 5410; Occupational Safety and Health Standards for the Maritime Industry, 3095; Electrical Standards. .3.1 10 3. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of the certificates of completion for the required courses upon request by the SUPERVISOR. Determine fire zone boundaries as follows: 1 1 3. .1 1 1 3. The SUPERVISOR, Ship's Force, and the contractor shall establish fire zone boundaries prior to start of production work. 1 .1. 1 For ships having fire zones by desi 1 3. gn, the under 600 feet in designated bulkheads shall be used as fire zones. S hips length shall have a minimum of 2 fire that do not have fire zones by design hips that do not have fire S 600 feet and over in length zone boundaries. zones by design shall have a minimum of 3 fire zone boundaries. ITEM NO: 009 12 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

57 Fire zone boundaries shall be continuous through the vertical 1 1 .2 3. extent of the ship, from the keel up to the highest weather deck, excluding the superstructure. 3. 1 1 .2.1 For ships that have establ ished fire zone boundaries that run from keel up through the superstructure, the fire zone boundaries as depicted on the ship's damage control diagrams shall be observed. On aircraft carriers, provide for closing of hangar .2.2 3. 1 1 se of fire in the event division doors being repaired by division doors in ca the contractor are mechanically inoperative. As a minimum, rig chain falls to manually close doors in the event of fire. Exceptions shall be permitted only upon execution of a written waiver approv ed by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 1 1 .3 Indicate each fire zone by installing a sign adjacent to each ach sign with international orange tape. Mark e entrance. 1 Service line(s) shall not be run through fire zone 1 .3. 3. 1 boundaries unless quick disconnects are installed in temporary service lines within 6 feet of the opening, door, or closure. The quick disconnects shall with be pos itively identified be marked with international orange tape and s durable unique marking maintenance activity name, service that include the shall - off points. type, location, and shore side shut be A ll service line(s) able to be secured and pulled back within 3 minutes. Fuel hoses pressurized above 140 gas/oxygen/compress ed gas hoses, steam lines, (as defined in | , or hoses carrying hazardous/flammable materials PSI shall not be run through fire zone boundaries . Hose numbers Subpart P of 2.2) or sizes shall not restrict free and easy access or closure of fire zone boundary doors. Request for deviation shall be in writing to the .3.2 11 3. SUPERVISOR and shall include the following; rational for deviation, location(s) and duration of each deviation, description of services that will violate any fire zone boundary, hazards associated with services, and the hazard mitigation plan(s). | 3.1 Ensure access to temporary and Ship’s Force firefighting equipment 2 is not obstructed or restricted. Ship’s Force 3.12 .1 firefighting equipment is not relocated Ensure Ship’s without written authorization from the SUPERVISOR. Provide a secure , Force accessible for firefighting equipment that temporary storage facility is moved from its original location. Conduct a firefighting and fire prevention conference in conjunction 3 3.1 with the arrival conference or no later than 5 days after start of the . This conference shall availability for availabilities in excess of 30 days re safety and fire response familiarize Ship’s Force with the contractor’s fi plan for fire prevention and firefighting and with the procedures that will be in use by the contractor and the region/installation or municipal fire and ITEM NO: 009 13 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

58 emergency services, as well as familiarize the contractor and the nstallation or municipal fire and emergency services with the ship region/i arrangement, shipboard fire prevention, and firefighting systems, equipment, and organization, and familiarize all parties with the scope of work and aspects of the work or ship conditions that have significance in fire prevention and firefighting. 3.1 3 .1 The conference shall specifically address the following matters: .1.1 Fire alarm and response procedures 3.1 3 3 3.1 .1.2 Contractor firefighting capability and procedures 3.1 3 .1.3 Region/installation or municipal fire and emergency services firefighting capability and procedures and incident Firefighting jurisdictional cognizance 3.1 3 .1.4 command procedures 3 3.1 .1.5 Communication system for fire reporting and control or firefighting efforts 3 3.1 Shipboard arrangement including access routes, .1.6 availability or firefighting systems (installed and temporary), fire zone boundaries, and communication systems Each system, hipboard firefighting organization, s .1.7 3.1 3 drill , and equipment to i nclude rehabilitation procedure. Ship, space, and equipment security consideration .1.8 3 3.1 3.1 3 Compatibility of ship, contractor, and .1.9 region/installation or municipal fire and emergency services firefighting equipmen t 3.1 .1.10 Industrial work scope, including location of ship, 3 and effect on firefighting syst ems, access, and communications 3 3.1 .1.11 The roles, responsibilities, and membership of the Fire Safety Council (FSC). Include the requirement to obtain permission from the FSC to perform work that affects the fire safety posture (e.g., securing the firemain, securing the 1MC, undocking, transferring fuel/lube oil) of the ship. 3.1 3 .1.12 Hotwork monitoring and confined space practices. .2 3.1 3 irefighting and fire prevention conference shall include The f a table top fire drill. ITEM NO: 009 14 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

59 tour of the ship for Naval installation fire and emergency 3.1 4 Conduct a services /or municipal fire department personnel, the SUPERVISOR, Ship’s Force, and contractor key personnel assigned specific responsibilities during fires to familiarize personnel concerned with the ship’s normal access and anticipated condition while industrial work is in pr ogress. 3.1 Provide a portable 300 KW diesel generator with associated cables, 5 lugs/plugs to supply emergency power during transits to and from dry dock when ship’s emergency power cannot be used or anytime during the availability is not available as an emergency back up to installed that the ship’s power - shore power. 4. NOTES : Hydrogen sulfide (H S) may be tanks, OGAS In addition to CHT and M 4.1 2 systems. , seawater, and firemain found in AFFF Booklet of General Plans and Tank Sounding Tables are 4.2 available for review at the office of the SUPERVISOR. 4.3 A "quick disconnect" is a coupling or connecting device/system designed to permit easy and immediate separation of lines without the use of tools and to ensure the contents do not escape. hipboard fixed extinguishing systems such as Halon and CO2 are to be S 4.4 secured or isolated only at the discretion of the ship’s Commanding Officer or designated representative. Employees should be trained as required by 2.2 with active shipboard fixed extinguishing before entering/working in spaces systems. 5 4. exceed 12 months. - to The term “annual” means once a year, not - 4.6 When accomplishing work in Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) and is required; the Motor Gasoline (MOGAS) tanks, spaces, or associated piping use of Standard Item 009 - 88 of 2.1 “Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) and Motor Gasoline (MOGAS) Tanks, Spaces, and Piping, including Sewage or Contaminated Tanks, Spaces, and Piping; certify” will be specified in MOGAS - the Work Item. ITEM NO: 009 15 07 - of 1 7 1 FY - 9

60 ATTACHMENT A Attendees Fire Zone Boundaries SH Discrepancy and Corrective E Action Log Ship name/hull number: Location: Prime Contractor: Time: Date: Point of Contact No. Code Corrective Action Discrepancy Location Date Date Identified Corrected - Type Codes: 1 Fire Prevent./ Fire Equipment , 3 - Hot Work ., 4 - FZ Boundary, 5 - Electrical, 6 - Compress Housekeeping, 2 - anifolds , 7 - Scaffolding, 8 - Egress/Exit, 9 - Walking/Working Surfaces, 10 - PPE , 11 - Containment , 12 - Gas/Hoses/Bottles/M Openings/Fall Protection, 13 - Confined/Enclosed Spaces, 14 - Lines & Leads Hazards, 15 Unguarded/Edges/Holes/ Equip. Adrift & - Rollback, 16 - Ventilation, 17 - Machine G uardin g/Hand T ools , 18 - Crane/Rigging, 19 - Environmental & Hazardous Material /Communication, 20 Environmental P rotection, 21 - General Safety - 1 6 1 7 ITEM NO: 009 - 07 of FY - 1 9

61 ATTACHMENT A INSTRUCTIONS ESH DISCREPANCY AND CORRECTIVE ACTION LOG - 1 : List the designated Fire Fire Zone Boundaries Zone Boundaries. 2 - : List Company and or Command and names of personnel present for walk thru. Attendees 3 - Ship Name/H ull Number : Indicate ship name and hull number of the location of the walk thru. , i.e. name of contractor facility or pier at Naval Base or Station. Indicate location where ship is moored or docked : Location - 4 : 5 Prime Contractor - Indicate prime contractor who has the contract with the SUPERVISOR. - : Indicate date of walk thru being accomplished. Date 6 7 - Time : Indicate start time (24 hour clock) of walk thru being accomplished. 8 N - o. (n umber ) : List sequentially, each discrepancy noted during the walk thru. N umber will continue where the n umber ing left off the previous day , un til the end of the availability . discrepancy the identified with Indicate Company : Point of Contact - 9 /Command . - 10 Date Corrected : Date condition was corrected. If condition is not corrected , condition will be carried over to the next walk thru until condition is corrected. 11 - Location : Indicate location of the condition, i.e. space number or frame number. 12 Discrepancy : Indicate condition that needs corrective action, be specific as necessary. - 13 - Corrective Action : Indicate corrective action taken to correct the condition and who is responsible for the corrective action. Lines and - Code : 14 code, located at the bottom of ATTACHMENT A that condition can be grouped with, i.e. lines on deck causing trip hazard would use code 14 - Indicate Leads Hazards. FZ Boundary, 5 Type Codes: 1 - Fire Prevent./Fire Equipment, 3 - Hot Work., 4 - Housekeeping, 2 - El ectrical, 6 - Compress - Gas/Hoses/Bottles/Manifolds, 7 - Scaffolding, 8 - Egress/Exit, 9 - Walking/Working Surfaces, 10 - PPE, 11 - Containment, 12 - Unguarded/Edges/Holes/Openings/Fall Protection, 13 - Confined/Enclosed Spaces, 14 - Lines & Leads Hazards, 15 - Equip. Adrift & - Ventilation, 17 - Machine Guarding/Hand Tools, 18 Rollback, 16 - Crane/Rigging, 19 - Environmental & Hazardous Material/Communication, 20 General Safety - Environmental Protection, 21 - of 17 07 - 009 ITEM NO: 17 - 19 FY

62 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 08 _ DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 _ ____ I CATEGORY: : SCOPE 1. ; accomplish Fire Prevention 1.1 Title: Shipboard Fire Protection and : REFERENCES 2. 2.1 NFPA Standard 312, Standard for Fire Protection of Vessels During Construction, Conversion, Repair, and Lay - up 2.2 NFPA Standard 1962, Standard for the Care, Use, and Service Testing of Fire Hose Including Cou plings and Nozzles 2.3 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard Employment 2.4 NFPA Standard 14, Standard for Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems 2.5 NFPA Standa r d 1961, Standard on Fire Hose 2. 701, Standard Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame NFPA 6 Propagation of Textiles and Films 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 to minimize the use of temporary Plan and execute all work fire , t fighting systems. When the scope of work allows he ship's firemain system shall provide the sh ip's firefighting capability. Firemain system repairs or modifications that reduce 3.1.1 the coverage or damage control capability of the ship's firemain shall be coordinated through the use of jumpers and/or temporary fire hose ected areas firefighting to in aff restore manifold stations capabilities. Use of temporary firefighting systems shall be 3.1.2 approved by the SUPERVISOR. 3. Provide fire protection in accordance with 2.1 through 2.4. 2 08 1 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

63 3.3 E S hipboard T emporary stablish, document, implement, and maintain a F ire P rotection P lan when temporary fire protection is needed . T he plan shall include the following elements: , at a minimum, 3. 3 .1 Fire pump manual (s) , operating instructions, and performance specifications 3. 3 .2 Temporary f irefighting and dewatering e quipment inventory 3. 3 .3 List of each ship compartment (by space number) and c orresponding uniquely numbered temporary fire hose manifold station(s) providing coverage to that compartment 3. 3 .4 Identification of which hoses / pipes are charged/not charged , to include the temporary firemain system iagram of D 3 .5 3. following elements: .5.1 Diameter, length, and connection path of each 3. 3 (See Note /pipe hose ) 4.3 distribution manifold 3. 3 .5.2 Location of each temporary fire hose station and its elevation relative to the fire pump(s) . 3. .5.3 Connection locations to shore side water supply. 3 3. 4 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media of the initial Shipboard T emporary Fire Protection Plan to the SUPERVISOR for approval and posting no later than 10 days prior to placing any section of the ship’s firemain out of service. 4 3. .1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media of an updated Sh ipboard Temporary Fire Protection Plan prior to any modification to the plan after initial approval. 3. Train ship’s force 5 P lan P rotection ire Shipboard Temporary F n the o no later than day one and firemain prior to securing ship’s day one at least graving dock , or marine railway , entering dry dock to prior . Provide temporary fire protection equipment as follows: 6 3. .1 6 Each f ire hose 3. shall be: 6 .1.1 Manufactured with National Hose/National Pipe 3. - half inch and larger Straight Hose (NH/NPSH) fittings (NH for 2 and one - half inch couplings to ensure compatibility hoses, and NPSH for one and one with shipboard equipment). I - 3. 6 tested in accordance with 2.2 .1.2 nspected and service 90 days nd being placed in service for the first time a within prior to annually thereafter. 08 2 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

64 3. 6 .1.3 Cotton or synthetic double jacketed manufactured to 24606B. in accordance with - H - MIL or the requirements of 2.5 3. .2 Each f ire hose nozzle shall be : 6 6 .2.1 O ne and one half inch combination straight stream 3. conforming to - N - 24408, rated for 125 gallons MIL and spray pattern nozzles, per minute (GPM) at 100 pounds per square inch (PSI). 6 .2.2 P re - connected to the end of each handline hose and 3. operati onal . (See Note 4.4 maintained ) 3. 6 .3 Each t emporary f ire hose manifold station shall: rovide 3. 6 .3.1 Be p d in sufficient numbers such that all parts of the ship, including the interior of temporary structures, can be reached by a 10 foot fog stream from at least 2 each , 100 foot lengths of one and three quarters inch handline hose . - 3. 6 .3.2 Have, at a minimum, three handline outlets, each individually valved from each temporary fire hose manifold station. Each handline outlet shall be one and one half - inch NPSH thread. hoses distribution Have 6 3. .3.3 of sufficient size to meet nozzle pressure at the end of a minimum of GPM and 60 PSI residual each 95 one and three - quarters inch handline hose . 3. 6 .3.4 H ave 2 each , 100 foot lengths of one and three - quarters inch hose manufactured with one and one - half inch NPSH handline couplings pre - connected to temporary fire hose manifold station valve outlets and faked on racks nearby . 3. 6 .3.5 Have p ressure gages installed with a 0 – 250 (plus or minus 50) PSI range . (plus or minus 6 0 3. 250 .3.6 Have a 50 ) PSI range – calibrated gage installed on the hydraulically most remote temporary fire hose manifold station. ( See Note 4.2 ) . 3. .3.7 Have operating instructions posted on each 6 temporary manifold station with sources of water identified . Instructions must endure the repair process , stay attached , and be legible the entire time the station is on board. .4 Each 3. p rimary fire pump shall: 6 .4.1 6 3. . auto start capability functioning ave H 08 3 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

65 3. 6 P rovide GPM flow specified in Attachment A .4.2 at the most remote measured uninterrupted shore side at a minimum of 150 PSI outlet providing firemain water to the ship . 3. 6 .4.3 M aintain constant pressure automatically without manually valves. manipulating 3. 6 shall: Each b ack - up fire pump .5 3. 6 .5.1 B e equivalent to primary fire pump(s) , powered from a different than that powering the p rimary fire pump(s) , (s) and be source pre - installed in the temporary fire protection system. 3. 6 .6 Ensure w hen ship's firemain system cannot be used, portable fire pump(s) capable of providing a total of 500 GPM at 100 PSI shall be on the ship during berth shifts, transits to and from Na val facilities, board dock ings, undocking’s . The pump shall be connected to the ship’s fire main system or the temporary firemain system prior to ship movement . driven equipment providing emergency engine Ensure all .7 6 3. firefighting water services ( with a equipped are lighting) and , power, functioning audible low fuel level alarm capable of producing a continuous minus 110dBA (plus 0 or signal. 25 d ecibel ) When connection of the shore supply to the ship’s Firemain 3. 6 . 8 gate hose connection - Shore Connection fitting is not possible. Ensure a tri compatible with the ship’s portable fire pumps is used to connect to the ship’s fire plugs, to permit ship’s firemain to remain in service while also acting as shore firemain conn ection. distribution .9 Provide and install 6 3. hoses connected to the ship’s permanent firemain or temporary firemain in sufficient number to deliver the fire protection capacity specified in Attachment A. This shall be determined by dividing the water su pply capacity from Attachment A (plus cooling and flushing loads) by the hose line capacity for the chosen /pipe . ) See Note 4.1 for example ( diameter. distribution hose .1 The number of hoses connected to the ship from the .9 6 3. operational shall not be reduced when the ship’s firemain become shore s unless the permanently installed pumping capacity of the ship can meet the entire fire protection water supply requirement of Attachment A plus cooling and flushing loads . Unpressu - half inch drop lines, supplied rized 2 and one 3.6.10 half inch N - from a temporary hose manifold station, with a 2 and one by one H and one - half inch NPSH by one and one - half inch NPSH hose fittings may be to provide coverage to the lowermost compartments (tanks and voids) utilized approved by the that are inaccessible with a 100 feet of handline hose, . SUPERVISOR 08 4 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

66 1 Equip temporary firemain systems with a minimum of 2 3.6.1 isolation valves from shore side supply prior to entry to the temporary system. Place additional isolation valves in the remainder of the firemain temporary firemain system so that the maximum distance between any 2 adjoining valves does not exceed 200 feet. 3. 7 Provide emergency fire protection equipment as follows: 3. .1 Install a temporary fire alarm system on the quarterdeck 7 configured to send a signal directly to the cognizant fire department, shipyard /Naval facility fire department, or a continuously manned location take immediate within the shipyard /Naval facility where trained personnel can action to transmit an alarm. 3. 7 .1. 1 T emporary fire alarm devices placed aboard ship - shall be a fire alarm pull box , non dial telephone , or as approved by the SUPERVISOR . n addition a telephone on the quarterdeck, i rovide P 2 .1. 7 3. to the temporary fire alarm system, as an alternate means of calling the cognizant fire department, shipyard /Naval facility fire department, or a where trained continuously manned location within the shipyard /Naval facility mediate action to transmit an alarm. personnel can take im emergency reporting 3. 7 .1. 3 Conspicuously post the procedures at the quarterdeck. .1.4 Test the temporary fire alarm system daily. Repair 3. 7 or replace defective or inoperative equipment immediately. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of the test when requested by the , system report for the temporary fire alarm SUPERVISOR. 3. Provide dewatering equipment 2 . 7 a sufficient number to include of pumps capable of providing 100 GPM minimum each and a total dewatering capability specified in of the supply GPM half - one equal to at least Attachment A . S afety and E mergency F F ire ire 3. 8 Develop and implement a written P lan in accordance with 2.3 . In addition to the requirements of 2.3, R esponse the plan shall identify: i Each .1 8 3. ntegrated fire protection system in effect during the maintenance availability. performance of the types along with the , and f Each .2 8 3. ire prevention program used of tests of equipment and devices. frequency 08 5 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

67 .3 D etails of all communication links (telephones, drop boxes, 8 3. shore side alarms, horns) location, testing interval, and interface with response systems. 3. 8 .4 Each n ormal and emergency source of electric power, , lighting firefighting water , testing interval, and interface with shore side response systems. 3. 8 .5 Each l ocation of all normal and emergency backup support equipment to be used in support when combating a fire, and the equipment's testing cycle. rganization to be used o responsibility of designation Each , 3. 8 .6 for all shifts, training, anticipated response times, and interface with shore side response units . 3. Ensure g .7 8 directing contractor for eneral procedures employees on fire reporting, fire res ponses, firefighting actions, personnel accountability, . and prolonged firefighting responsibilities 3. 8 .8 Provision for portable communication devices for contractor use during firefighting operations between site, fire, and operations center. contractor's/shipyard’s Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved 3.8.9 transferrable media of the Fire Safety and Emergency Fire Response Plan to the SUPERVISOR no later than 10 days prior to commencement of work. Submit one legibl .1 3.8.9 e copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media of an updated Fire Safety and Emergency Fire Response Plan prior to any modification to the plan after initial approval. 3.9 Review the Fire Safety and Emergency Fire Response plan in accordance with 2.2 with contractor employees and subcontractors. 3. 10 Ensure access to temporary and Ship’s Force firefighting equipment is not obstructed or restricted. Provide fire reporting devices in ry dock, graving dock, or 1 1 3. D marine railway as follows : 1 clearly identified and 1 .1 Fire reporting devices shall be 3. located at each manifold station and each exit serving the dry dock, graving dock, or marine railway. 3. 1 200 feet not exceed shall 1 Fire reporting device separation .2 horizontally along the dry dock, graving dock wall, or marine railway or 100 . feet from either end of the dry dock, graving dock, or marine railway 08 6 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

68 3. 1 .3 Modifications to locations of fire reporting devices for 1 ships docked side by side, must be approved by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 1 2 Provide water for firefighting to the ship through sufficient ly size hoses or pipes to carry capacities specified by Attachment A. These d requirements shall be in addition to water required for flushing and cooling . .1 3 2 .1 Maintain a minimum of 100 PSI residual and static pressure uninterrupted for the entire availability and during testing , measured at temporary fire each station . hose manifold 3.1 3 Locate each t emporary fire distribution hose and each fire hose manifold station to minimize exposure to areas of the ship where flooding due ould cause damage . to a rupt ured hose w 4 3.1 days no later than 5 to Ship’s Force Conduct an orientation brief of the availability start to include the following : 3.1 4 .1 Procedures to rapidly secure temporary systems (e.g., air, electrical power, and ventilation) under Ship’s Force control. 3.1 .1.1 on the procedures to Train Ship’s Force personnel 4 operate temporary firefighting systems, if installed. Provide written operating procedures/instructions to Ship’s Force on each type of Provide information and training aids for all firefighting system. physical versions of quick disco nnect fittings used in conjunction with temporary services. 3.1 4 .2 Procedures to operate temporary firefighting equipment. ( I )(G) “TEMPORARY FIREMAIN OPERATIONAL TEST” t 3.1 Conduct a n operational 5 est of both shore side supply and shipboard distribution of firefighting water through the temporary firemain 3.1 . 5 3.1 .1 shall be 2 system prior to taking down ships firemain . 5 and acceptance criteria met simultaneously. tested concurrent with 3.1 - 5 .1 Discharge firefight ing water from 4 each one and three quarters inch handline hoses from the two most hydraulically remote temporary hose distribution fire hose manifold stations on the ship that share the same (four nozzles total). Discharge firefighting water from each hose simultaneously for 60 seconds prior to measurement start in order to obtain est firefighting water steady state flow conditions. Once at steady state, t 60 seconds Measure and record flowr ate and residual flow for a minimum of . - nozzle pressure at each nozzle by in line flow meter and calibrated nozzle shall be equal to or each nozzle pressure gage. of tested The elevation than the elevation of the temporary fire hose manifold station greater Accept/Reject Criteria: water to that nozzle. providing Temporary pumps automatically start. shall 60 a minimum of Maintain a minimum of 95 GPM and 08 7 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

69 PSI residual pressure for a while flowing simultaneously at each nozzle . minimum of 60 seconds Pressure and flowra te shall be constant , m aximum nozzle pressure variation allowed during 60 seconds is plus 25 or minus 0 PSI. When 5 .1.1 nozzle(s) cannot be tested at the same or 3.1 higher elevation as the temporary fire hose manifold station(s), add 4.5 PSI to residual nozzle pressure acceptance criteria per 10 foot drop in elevation from the station(s). shore side 5 .2 Measure and record residual pressure at the 3.1 r to those temporary fire hose manifold supply outlet(s) providing wate stations tested in 3.1 5 .1 while simultaneously discharging the 4 nozzles Maintain a minimum of 150 PSI tested in 3.1 .1. Accept/Reject Criteria: 5 residual pressure at the shore side supply outlet(s) . .3 5 .2 if the 5 system is .1 and 3.1 5 Accomplish a retest of 3.1 3 .1 5 either 3.1 the criteria of modified after initial test and 5 .3.2 or 3.1 .3.1 are met . system modification, 3.1 5 .3.1 A fter any temporary firemain where nger lo the previously tested hydraulically most remote stations are no the hydraulically most remote . 5 3.1 system modification, temporary firemain fter any .3.2 A where the available hydraulically remote residual pressure at the most stations is reduced. T” (V)(G) “MONTHLY TEMPORARY FIREMAIN OPERATIONAL TES 6 operational ischarge water test of temporary firemain d 3.1 n Conduct a monthly from the most hydraulically remote temporary fire hose manifold station to verify valves are not secured and/or obstructions in the piping system are not present. Verify that all control valves in the temporary are in the intended open/close d position. firemain system Accept/Reject Criteria: Maintain a minimum of 95 GPM and a minimum of 60 PSI residual pressure while flowing one nozzle for a minimum of 30 seconds. WATER SUPPLY VALIDATION” )(G) “PERIODIC SHORE SIDE I ( 3. Conduct 7 flow and pressure 1 validation of shore side water supply each time the vessel shifts berths, and rior to availability start date, p M . annually thereafter should the contract extend beyond one year easure and line flow meter and - flow and residual pressure calibrated record in using a calibrated pressure gage . Accept/Reject Criteria: Minimum water supply plus flushing and cooling loads specified in Attachment A is available at the a minimum of 150 PSI residual with shore side firemain supply outlet(s) and pressure. 08 8 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

70 8 Provide a recirculation capability where weather and flow 1 3. that freezing may occur. Freeze protection equipment conditions are such shall be functional when temperatures drop below 40 degrees F. Use of aluminum piping in a temporary saltwater firemain system is 19 3. prohibited. coordinate and be Provide a representative, whose purpose is to 3.20 responsible for the management of all project temporary services, including services provided by other maintenance activities. 3.21 The following applies to routing of temporary services through and interior, designed for installed ship hull openings, both exterior personnel ingress and egress: Doorways/Hatches: Temporary services shall be routed within 3.21.1 the topmost area of the opening, such that the unobstructed opening of any doorway/hatch with services run shall be at least fift y (50) inches high and six (26) inches wide. - twenty 3.21.2 Vertical Ladders: Temporary services shall be routed to allow safe access. Route services so that personnel may transit the hatch. Services shall not be routed within four (4) inches on either side of the ladder. Services routed behind the ladder shall not interfere with safe access to the ladders and rungs. 3.22 In the event temporary services cannot be routed through interior and exterior installed shipboard personnel openings in accordance with the direction provided above, additional access cuts shall be utilized for routing of temporary services or personnel access and egress. Deviation from this requirement must be adjudicated by the SUPERVISOR. d copy or approved Submit one legible copy, in har 3.22.1 . tion to the SUPERVISOR transferrable media, of each approved devia Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable 3.23 media, of a consolidated drawing in the format of a damage control diagram, depicting all services entering the ship to the SUPERVISOR within 2 days of availability start date. 3.23.1 The drawing shall be updated weekly, or immediately to reflect significant changes, and shall be suitable for use by emergency responders for isolation of services duri ng an emergency. 3.23.2 At a minimum, the drawing shall include: 3. 23 .2.1 Type and description of service . Shore side shut - off points . 23 .2.2 3. .2.3 23 3. Route of service through the ship . 08 9 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

71 .2.4 3. 23 Location of quick disconnect fittings . .2.5 3. services and any Identification of critical temporary 23 cautions for critical services. 3.23.2.6 Status of hull openings and access cuts and . identification and location of closure materials . watering capabilities - 3.23.2.7 De . 3.23.2.8 Designated fire zone boundaries 3.23.2.9 Critical temporary services and their shore side off points shall be highlighted. shut - 3.24 Install quick disconnect fittings (QDF) within 6 feet of hull penetrations used for personnel access to f acilitate the deployment of smoke control curtains. Where it is necessary to support a service between a QDF and the designated boundary or hull penetration, the type of support shall not prevent rapid clearing of services from the opening. For hull openings used for services only, a QDF is not 3.24.1 required, provided the opening is fitted with an air and smoke control curtain that remains in place around the services. 3.24.1.1 Curtains shall be made of fire retarda nt fabric in . accordance with 2.6 3.25 Temporary enclosures erected around hull access openings shall be constructed with openings and removable covers to accommodate standard smoke control ventilation fans (e.g., damage control box fans). If the enclosure ion fans installed, the fans shall be equipped is constructed with ventilat with reverse air flow capability. Ensure that adequate protection is provided during installation, 3.26 operation, and removal of temporary services. For fluid systems, spray protection shall be installed a t each mechanical joint of a temporary system that is inside of the hull of the vessel, in the vicinity of shore power or electrical equipment, or in the vicinity of hull openings to prevent fluids n shall consist of other than air spray on ship’s equipment. Spray protectio adequate see through sheeting (minimum 5 mils thickness) around each joint secured by several wraps of tape allowing view of the component as much as - chafing protection shall be installed around services in possible. Anti as (i.e., hatches, high traffic areas, vicinity of sharp particular are objects) where there is a high risk of damage. : 4. NOTES 4.1 Example equation for DDG - 51 Class with 200 - foot hose: Parameters for the example: 08 10 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

72 Attachment A = 1000 GPM for DDG Sample Cooling and flushing load: 250 GPM and one half inch hose Attachment B = 200 GPM for 200 - foot hose of 2 - ) ( Flushing Load Attachment A + Cooling and # = of required hoses B Attachment ( ) 1000gpm + gpm 250 6 = hoses 25 . 200gpm (rounded up to next whole number) one 2 Requires 7 - and half inch hoses to supply firefighting and cooling load. 4.2 “Hydraulically Remote” is defined as an area/location that will encounter the highest pressure loss, from both flow friction and elevation change, while encountering maximum possible flowrate. 4. transports water is defined any hose or pipe that Hose 3 Distribution to the temporary hose manifold station s or ship’s firemain. transports water from Handline 4 4. the Hose hose(s) is defined as that nozzle. fire hose manifold station to the hose temporary the 5 4. Air and smoke control curtains are not intended to provide an air tight seal of the hull opening. The curtains are to ensure that emergency responders can control the flow of air and smoke through the opening to allow for de - smoking of compartments, and minimize “chimney” effects. A "quick disconnect" is a coupling or connecting device/system 4. 6 designed to permit easy and immediate separation of lines without the use of contents do not escape. tools and to ensure the 08 11 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

73 ATTACHMENT A FIRE PROTECTION WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS SHIP TYPE SHIP CLASS * FLOW (GPM) AD Destroyer Tender 1,500 ADG Degaussing Ship 500 AE Ammunition Ship 1,500 AF Store Ship 1,500 AFS Combat Store Ship 1,50 0 AG Miscellaneous Auxiliary Ship 1,500 500 AGEH Hydrofoil Research Ship AGF 2,000 Miscellaneous Flagship 1,000 AGFF Frigate Research Ship Missile Range Instrumentation Ship AGM 1,500 AGMR Major Communications Relay Ship 1,500 AGOR Oceanographic Research Ship 500 AGP 2,000 Gunboat Support Ship AGS Surveying Ship 1,000 AH Hospital Ship 1,000 AK Cargo Ship 1,500 1,500 AKS Store Issue Ship AKR 1,500 Vehicle Cargo Ship ANL Net Laying Ship 500 AO 1,500 Oiler AOE Fast Combat Support Ship 1,500 AOG Gasoline Tanker 1,000 AOR Fleet Replenishment Oiler 1,500 AP Transport Ship 1,000 500 APB Self - propelled Barracks Ship AR Repair Ship 1,500 500 ARB Battle Damage Repair Ship ARC Cable Repair and Laying Shi p 1,000 Internal Combustion Engine Repair Ship ARG 1,500 Landing Craft Repair Ship 1,000 ARL ARS Salvage Ship 500 ARSD Salvage Lifting Ship 500 ARVA 1,000 Aircraft Repair Ship Aircraft Engine Ship 1,000 ARVE ARVH Helicopter Tender 1,5 00 Submarine Tender AS 1,500 ASR 600 Submarine Rescue Ship Ocean Tug ATA 500 Ocean Tug Fleet 500 ATF 500 ATS Salvage and Rescue Tug 1,500 Guided Missile Ship AVM CV, CVN Aircraft Carrier 3,000 Guided Missile Cruiser 1,000 CG 08 12 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

74 ATTACHMENT A FIRE PROTECTION WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS (Con't) SHIP TYPE FLOW (GPM) * DDG Guided Missile Destroyer 1,000 FFG Guided Missile Frigate 1,000 FFR Radar Picket Frigate 1,000 IX Unclassified Miscellaneous 1,500 LCC 1,000 Amphibious Command Ship LCS Littoral Combat Ship 1,000 LHA** Amphibious Assault Ship 2,500 LHD** Amphibious Assault Ship 2,500 1,500 LKA Amphibious Cargo Ship 1,500 LPD*** Amphibious Transport Dock LSD*** Landing Ship Dock 2,000 500 Repair and Berthing Barge YRB YRBM 500 Repair, Berthing and Messing Barge YRBL Repair, Berthing and Messing Barge (large) 500 LST Landing Ship Tank 1,500 MCM Mine Counter Measures Ship 750 Patrol Coastal PC 500 PCH Craft 500 Hydrofoil Patrol Patrol Combatants 500 PG PGH Hydrofoil Gunboat 500 * All flows are from the pier or dry dock outlet and are available at adequate residual pressures from those systems in compliance with present design criteria for dry docks and piers as reflected in NAVFAC design manuals 152 - 06). 12, UFC 4 - 213 - - 10, UFC 4 150 - 02, and UFC 4 - 150 - 01, UFC 4 - (UFC 4 - 213 - ** Includes supply to operate 2 hangar sprinkler groups and 2, 2 and one - half - inch hose lines. - *** Includes supply to operate one sprinkl er group and 2, 2 and one - half inch hoses. 08 13 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

75 Attachment B Hose Capacity (GPM)* LENGTH SIZE (in.) LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH (250ft.) (150ft.) (200ft.) (100ft.) 2 ½ 175 GPM 200 GPM 225 GPM 300 GPM 3 ½ GPM 750 GPM 600 GPM 500 GPM 450 825 GPM 700 GPM GPM 650 GPM 1000 4 Notes: *Based on 20 PSI total friction loss 08 14 of 1 4 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

76 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 - 09 009 ITEM NO: 01 7 201 OCT DATE: CATEGORY: II SCOPE: 1. 1.1 accomplish Process Control Procedure (PCP); provide and Title: 2. REFERENCES: None. 2.1 3. REQUIREMENTS: Submit one legible copy of each PCP, in approved transferrable 3.1 media, to the SUPERVISOR for approval. For planned availabilities, days prior to start of the required 14 submission shall be no later than Attachment A process, or as otherwise approved by the SUPERVISOR. shall be each element is contained within its PCP development ; ensur e used for respective section. 3. 2 Submit updated or changed procedures to the SU PERVISOR at least 3 days prior to implementation. 3 Participate in a joint Ship's Force and SUPERVISOR personnel safety 3. brief, prior to start of PCP. s, the safety brief shall include a hand ’ 88 PCP - For SI 009 .1 3.3 - - - out piping/mechanical/ hand inspection and verific ation of the tagged over electrical system. (V)(G) "START OF PROCEDURE" Provide notification to the SUPERVISOR when ready to start the PCP. 3.4 3.4.1 Verify the PCP is approved. hand to start 3.4.2 Verify necessary parts and equipment are on work. 3.4.3 Attend/verify job briefing conducted prior to start of work. 3. PCP. 5 Accomplish the requirements of the approved 009 - 1 09 of 4 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

77 3.6 - ink editorial changes to the PCP when required after - and Make pen limited to those correcting work commences. Editorial changes are typographical errors and do not create a technical change as defined in 3.7. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of 3.6.1 one day any editorial change made to the PCP to the SUPERVISOR within of making the change. 3.7 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a report to the SUPERVISOR identifying any technical changes required after work has commenced and prior to proceeding with the affected procedural steps. Technical changes inc lude any change to work scope, work location, work sequence, testing, technical parameters (torque, test pressure, flow rate, etc.), material, inspections, repair processes, references, or change which otherwise alters any technical aspect of the work. Make technical changes to the PCP and proceed when approved by 1 3.7. the SUPERVISOR. Ensure completed process control documentation provides a record of 3.8 the data required to control and determine the satisfactory completion of the process. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved 3.8.1 within transferrable media, of the completed documentation to the SUPERVISOR of the PCP 3 days of completion or a minimum of 5 days prior to the scheduled s first. Key Event to which the PCP is tied, whichever occur 4. NOTES: 4. None. 1 009 - 2 09 of 4 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

78 ATTACHMENT A Process Control Procedure (PCP) Requirements One - Section Identification • Include the Process Title and Procedure Number with revision on each page. • Ship’s name, Work Item and paragraph that the PCP fulfills. List the /subcontractor's name and address. • Include contractor Include space for the Approval Signature and title of the contractor's • representative Date of , Include spaces for the Date Developed . cheduled start date. Submission and s If submitting a previously approved PCP, include the previous Government • approval letter (if appropriate) and attach a letter of intent to use the PCP with the updated information required by this section. A revision of the previously approved PCP is not required. Section 1 of A previously approved PCP is defined as one that has been approved by the SUPERVISOR for a like system or component. Section 2 - Personnel Qualifications the work. List the qualifications of the personnel performing • Include a statement that a briefing will be conducted prior to beginning • work to ensure personnel have direct knowledge of the requirements of the procedure and the safety requirements of the job. Section 3 - Process Description Method • utilized to control the procedure. List any specialized or critical equipment needed to perform the work. • List any specialized or critical personnel safety equipment. • )(G) will be made at the start of V State that Government Notification ( • s as applicable. the proces • , including each Describe the process as related to the sequence of work critical factor which has a direct bearing on the process quality and safety. and (G) Provide inspections required for the process, to include (V), (I), • nvoked by the Work I tem applicable to the process. symbols i Provide inspection and documentation forms applicable to the process. •  List the acceptance and rejection criteria used for determining satisfactory process completion. f the PCP will be provided at the work • Include a statement that a copy o site during the performance of the work. Section 4 Hazardous Material - State if no hazardous material/waste will be used or generated. • r generated during the Identify any hazardous material/waste used o • performance of work. • Describe the methodology to limit the quantity that will require control. 009 - 3 09 of 4 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

79 Describe the methods of the disposal of hazardous material or hazardous • waste. 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 09 4 of 9 1 FY -

80 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 10 - 009 ITEM NO: 18 DATE: NOV 2016 CATEGORY: I SCOPE: 1. 1.1 Title: - Asbestos Containing Material (ACM); control 2. REFERENCES: 2.1 29 CFR 1915.1001, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard Employment, Asbestos 2.2 Insulation Requirements for U.S. Naval Vessels 769, - STD - MIL 2.3 40 CFR Part 61, National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants REQUIREMENTS: 3. insulation, lagging, deck tile, underlayment, shipboard Consider 3.1 containing gasket, shipboard cabling (see 4.2), and mastic to be asbestos - material (ACM) until it can be established by laboratory analysis, or other stos, in reliable method(s), that the material does not contain asbe accordance with 2.1. This includes reusable covers as defined in 2.2. 3.2 Apply the following requirements for the removal, disturbance, or disposal of all asbestos containing materials during the initial monitoring, ol of ACM throughout the work areas, and to Class daily monitoring, and contr I, II, III, or IV activities as defined in 2.1. Ensure that responsibilities for personnel safety and 3.2.1 environmental control of ACM existing or damaged during accomplishment of implemented. work are assigned and Maintain written substantiation of the credentials of the 3.2.2 Qualified Person. 3.2.2.1 The Qualified Person shall take airborne samples, site inspections, set monitor work practices, maintain daily logs, conduct on - up regulated areas, be capable of specifying the necessary protection and mplish the other precautions to be taken during work with ACM, and acco requirements in accordance with Class I, II, III, and IV activities as defined in 2.1. The Qualified person shall have successfully completed an 009 - 1 10 of 6 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

81 - initial EPA or state approved 40 hour Asbestos Supervisor's Course and annual refreshers. Individuals performing airborne asbestos analysis 3.2.2.2 must have successfully completed a NIOSH 582 course or equivalent and be rated proficient in either AIHA's PAT program or AAR program. Persons performing analysis of fiber type on bulk samples mus t have completed a McCrone Course in analysis of bulk asbestos samples and be rated proficient in either the NVLAP or AIHA's asbestos program. Copies of certifications, licenses, notifications 3.2.2.3 (such as advance notification to OSHA of new or mod ified control technology to be used to reduce exposure), and other documentation required by federal, state, and local regulatory authorities, shall be maintained at the worksite. Identify removal routes and steps to be taken to protect 3.2.3 insulation , repair damaged insulation, and to avoid asbestos contamination along those routes and obtain SUPERVISOR approval prior to proceeding. approved transferrable media , of Submit one legible copy, in 3.2.4 notifications made to regulatory authority, regard ing ACM removal, to the SUPERVISOR within 2 days of providing such notices to the regulatory authority. Submit a written notice to the SUPERVISOR and to the 3.2.5 Commanding Officer's designated representative, and post at the Ship's r designated location for each job or separate area of ACM Quarterdeck or othe removed or damaged aboard ship where there may be ACM at least 4 hours, but not more than 24 hours, prior to the start of work. The notice shall contain the following information: Ship 's name and hull number 3.2.5.1 3.2.5.2 Work Item number 3.2.5.3 Compartment Class of activity and type of insulation, lagging, 3.2.5.4 deck tile, underlayment, and mastic, i.e., ACM or possible ACM (provide basis for determination) Date an 3.2.5.5 d time to start to work 3.2.5.6 Deliver notification for work planned over a weekend or Monday following that weekend to the Commanding Officer's designated representative no later than 0900 on the Friday immediately preceding that weekend. Deliver notification of work planned on a federal 3.2.5.7 holiday and on the day following the federal holiday to the Commanding 009 - 2 10 of 6 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

82 Officer's designated representative no later than 0900 of the last working day preceding the federal holiday. Personnel accomplishing ACM work shall have a direct 3.2.6 knowledge of the requirements of this procedure prior to beginning work. All training shall be under the direct supervision of a Qualified Person . th 3.2.7 Monitor the affected areas daily to ensure compliance wi 2.1. Monitoring shall include adjacent spaces to ensure the work area containments and work practices are effective. Results of surveillance shall be documented and the documentation shall be provided to the SUPERVISOR. 3.2.8 , of approved transferrable media y, in Submit one legible cop a list of regulated areas, decontamination areas, and engineering controls to be established in accordance with 2.1, to the SUPERVISOR. 3.2.8.1 Identify configuration of critical barriers or isolation methods. Identify location/configuration of decontamination 3.2.8.2 , and clean change ) if necessary areas, inclu ding the equipment room, shower ( room. 3.2.8.3 Identify ventilation and filtration requirements, essary. including the negative pressure enclosure(s) if nec Isolate or blank the ship`s ventilation systems in work areas 3.2.9 to prevent asbestos contamination. arning w Post prominent 3.3 uired by 2.1 outside of signs as req egulated r areas. 009 - 3 10 of 6 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

83 DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA 3.4 Monitor work areas. 3.4.1 Determine areas of airborne concentrations and potential personnel exposure to airborne asbestos fibers in accordance with the requirements of 2.1. 3.4.2 Take air samples and monitor regulated areas in the vicinity of access openings that are not tightly secured. If the airborne concentration of a 3.4.2.1 sbestos fibers is at, or exceeds, 0.1 fiber, longer than 5 micrometers, per cubic centimeter of air, corrective action shall be taken to reduce the concentration to less than 0.1 fiber, longer than 5 micrometers, per cubic centimeter of air. sh ACM removal as follows: Accompli 3.5 3.5.1 Secure and tag out ventilation systems securing the work area. 3.5.1.1 Blank ventilation systems to prevent contamination of the ventilation systems and other compartments. 3.5.2 Air discharged to the environment from any containment zone shall have passed through a HEPA filter and otherwise conform to 2.3. A negative pressure will be maintained in the containment area where possible. 3.5.3 Remove materials which may contain ACM, using wet work gineering controls that will minimize airborne contamination practices and en in and adjacent to the work area. 3.5.3.1 Removal tools and work practices shall minimize the generation of airborne contamination and the deposit of ACM in the work area. 3.5.3.2 Equip v acuum cleaners used to help prevent the dispersion of asbestos fibers with HEPA filters. 3.5.3.3 Clear the work area of loose ACM, including ACM dust, prior to returning the area to normal status. 10 - 009 ITEM NO: 6 of 4 FY - 1 9

84 3.5.4 Contain edges of insulation exposed by removal operations by cutting the exposed surface true and square and sealing the surface. Encapsulate exposed ACM surfaces with insulating cement conforming to ASTM C 195. 3.6 Dispose of ACM by bag method described below: Collect and dispose of ACM waste, scrap, debris, and special 3.6.1 clothing consigned for disposal, which may produce airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers, in sealed, impermeable polyethylene bags (minimum thickness, wn to 6 mils). Prior to placing in bags, asbestos waste shall be wet do reduce airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers. 3.6. 2 Bag ACM scrap, debris, and waste at the worksite. mil or heavier, impermeable 3.6.3 ACM shall be placed in sealed, 6 - polyethylene bags before removal from the work area. Pieces of insula tion too large to fit into bags shall be encased in 6 - mil, or heavier polyethylene - - 20079. film with edges sealed with tape conforming to MIL C Vacuum outer surfaces of bags containing ACM in affected 3.6.4 areas immediately after removal from and adjace nt to the worksite. 3.6.5 tight double bags. - Place the ACM waste while wet in leak each bag, 3.6.6 L abel prior to in accordance with 2.1 and 2.3 , regulated areas. removal from the contractor's Affix a legible label to each bag stating 3.6.7 name, the name of the ship the asbestos was removed from, the name of the facility where the work was performed and date of the removal. The label shall be in permanent waterproof marking. 3.6.8 Dispose of bags containing ACM waste in accordance with a pplicable federal, state, and local regulations. Provide a copy of the completed Waste Shipment Record to the SUPERVISOR within 15 days after initial shipment. Monitor the area for asbestos upon completion of work and after 3.7 cleanup. airborne concentration of asbestos fibers after work and The 3.7.1 cleanup shall be less than 0.1 fiber, longer than 5 micrometers, per cubic centimeter of air on an 8 - weighted average basis. The workspace hour, time - shall not be released for entry of unprotected p ersonnel until verification has been provided to the SUPERVISOR that the airborne level of asbestos is less than the 0.1 fiber level. Submit one legible copy, in 3.7.1.1 approved transferrable , of the lab analysis listing results of air monitorin media g certifying the 009 - 5 10 of 6 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

85 area to be less than 0.1 asbestos fiber longer than 5 micrometers per cubic centimeter of air, to the SUPERVISOR. 3.8 Remove ACM from salvage or scrap equipment, piping, and structural components prior to delivery to the GOVERNMENT. NOTES: 4. 4.1 See additional notification requirements of NAVSEA Standard Item 009 01. - 4.2 Shipboard cabling as used in 3.1 refers to all shipboard cabling, with the exception of low smoke, coaxial cables, and lamp cord cabling. 4.3 The following ACB ci rcuit breakers listed by manufacturer contain friable asbestos arc chutes: - non 4.3.1 SPD, ITE, ITE/Gould: 640R, 900RC, 901R, 1600R, 1600HR, 1600HRC, 2000HR, 2000RC (450V), 2601R, 2801R, 3200HR, 4000HR. ll types. A General Electric: 4.3.2 We stinghouse: All DBN types. 4.3.3 4.4 The term "asbestos fibers" is defined in 2.1. 4. Property has some value in excess of its basic material Salvage 5 - content, but repair or rehabilitation to use for the originally intended Repair for any use would exceed 65 percent purpose is clearly impractical. of the original acquisition cost. Scrap - 6 4. Material that has no value except for its basic material content. 009 - 6 10 of 6 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

86 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 11 DATE: 01 OCT 7 201 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Ins ulation and Lagging ; accomplish REFERENCES: 2. 2.1 Standard Items STD U.S. Naval Vessels Insulation Requirements for 769, - 2. 2 MIL - 3 2. Installation - 5959212, Surface Ship Machinery Insulation - 804 Details 5959214, Piping Insulation 4 - 2. - Installation Details 804 2. 5 804 - 5773931, Insulation for Compartments, Acoustic and Thermal Installation Details 2. 6 804 - 5773932, Insulation for Ducts, Acoustic and Thermal, Installation Details - 803 7 - tallation Ins 5184182, Insulation, Passive Fire Protection 2. Details 2. 8 46 CFR Part 164, Materials - 2. 9 S 4823 - C 3160935, Fasteners for Insulation and Lagging REQUIREMENTS: 3. 3.1 Install new insulation, lagging, and reusable covers in accordance with 2. 2 through 2. 7 , and the following: P - Use of elastomeric foam conforming to MIL 3.1.1 15280 and - polyphosphazene conforming to MIL 24703 is not permitted. - I - PRF - 22344 insulation shall not be installed on hot pipi MIL ng 3.1.2 - iping ) and shall be installed only on p NPS ize ( inch Nominal Pipe S - above one with a vertical orientation or in low traffic areas. 1 of 3 11 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

87 3.1.3 I nstall insulation, anti - sweat and refrigerant, thermal foam conforming to MIL - PRF - 32514 on anti - sweat and refrigeration piping systems that have an operati ng temperature of m inus 20 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit. (See Note 4.6) 3.1.3.1 Install with adhesive conforming to MIL - A - 24179 . 3.1.3.2 Install rewettable fibrous glass cloth lagging - C - 20079, Type I, Class 6 or 8, in high traffic area s. In conforming to MIL addition to the requirements of MIL - C - 20079, rewettable lagging shall meet the requirements of Section 164.009 - 3 of 2. 8 , unless otherwise approved by NAVSEA. Utilize Polyimide foam insulation conforming to - DTL 3.1.4 - MIL 24688 , Type I, for piping | and machinery systems other than systems listed in 3.1.3, and with a maximum operating temperature of 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Accomplishment of welding, fabrication, and inspection 3.1.5 requirements for new fasteners (studs) to support insulation and lagging shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.3). 3.1.6 Accomplishment of cleaning and painting requirements for - surfaces to be insulated with the exception of non ferrous and corrosion resistant steel (CRES) piping, plating, and vent ducting shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.4). 3.1.7 Secure reusable covers using snap fasteners or laced with copper, brass or soft steel galvanized wire through hooks or rings in . 9 accordance with 2. 3.1.7.1 the surface of the lacing washers, piece 200 Stamp 8 , on the reusable cover with one quarter inch high letters, NO AB, of 2. located close to the outer edge of the washer and visible when the reusable cover is installed. 3.2 Accomplishment of cleaning and paint ing requirements for new insulation, lagging, and reusable covers to match surrounding areas shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard items (See Note 4.5). 4. NOTES : 4.1 Known source for EB Spec. 4013: General Dynamics Company Material Services Dept. 447 Attn: K. Hamler 75 Eastern Point Road 4899 - Groton, CT 06340 2373 - 433 - Tel: 860 4.2 Known sources for rewettable fibrous glass cloth lagging: 2 of 3 11 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

88 BGF Industries, Inc. Alpha Associates 3802 Robert Porcher Way Two Amboy Avenue Gr eensboro, NC 27410 Woodbridge, NJ 07095 - Tel: 800 - 925 - 1961 Tel: 732 - 634 5700 If welding of fasteners (studs) to support lagging and or insulation 4.3 12 “Welding, of 3.1.5 is required; the use of Category II Standard Item 009 - Fabrication, and Inspecti on Requirements; accomplish” will be of 2.1 specified in the Work Item. - If surfaces are to be insulated with the exception of non ferrous 4.4 and corrosion resistant steel (CRES) piping, plating and vent ducting of II Standard Item 009 - 3.1.6 is required; the use of Category 32 “Cleaning and will be specified in the Work of 2.1 Painting Requirements; accomplish” Item. c ainting for the new insulation, lagging, and leaning and If p 4.5 of reusable covers to match surrounding areas of 3.2 is required; the use Category II Standard Item 32 “Cleaning and Painting Requirements; - 009 of 2.1 accomplish” will be specified in the Work Item. - "Electric Boat Specification No. 4013 Anti 4.6 Sweat and Refrigerant - Insulation Systems (EB Spec. 4013) and MIL equivalent." 32514 are - PRF 3 of 3 11 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

89 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - 1 9 FY ITEM NO: 009 - 12 01 DATE: OCT 201 7 II CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Weld, Fabricate, and Inspect ; accomplish 2. REFERENCES: 2.1 Standard Items 2.2 MIL - STD - 1689, Fabrication, Welding, and Inspection of Ships Structure American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Rules for Building and Classing 2.3 Steel Vessels - 060 - LP 0900 2.4 - Welding, and Inspection of Metal Boat 4010, Fabrication, and Craft Hulls - S9074 - 2.5 GIB - 010/248, Requirements for Welding and Brazing Procedure AQ and Performance Qualification - 0900 - LP 2.6 001 - 7000, Fabrication and Inspection of Brazed Piping Systems AR 010/278, Requirements for Fabrication Welding and - GIB - - 2.7 S9074 Inspection, and Casting Inspection and Repair for Machinery, Piping, and Pressure Vessels 2.8 STD 22, Welded Joint Design - - MIL - 2.9 MIL STD - 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria T9074 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing - 2.10 - AS - GIB Methods 2.11 DOD - STD - 2185, Requirements for Repair and Straightening of Bronze Naval Ship Propellers 2.12 ; - GTP - Repair and Overhaul C1 - S9221 010/020, Main Propulsion Boilers - AB - S9AAO GOS 2.13 - 010, General Specifications for Overhaul of Surface Ships (GSO) of 19 1 009 - 12 ITEM NO: 9 FY - 1

90 - 2191, Repair, Welding, Weld Cladding, Straightening, and - STD MIL 2. 14 Cold Rolling of Main Propulsion Shafting 010, Superstructure Cracking Repair; FFG7 Class - SRM - - S9FFG 5 2.1 AG , Ship Repair Manual Class Aluminum Deckhouse Critical Welds and 612, SERMC, FFG7 DM 10 2.16 - Critical Weld Regions 010/CG - BP - SRM - 2.1 - 47CL, Technical Manual for CG - S9CGO 7 47 Class, Superstructure Cracking Repair 2.18 Assurance Requirements for Welding 5XXX , Quality DM C 10 623 - , SERM 47 Class Series Aluminum Structures for CG - REQUIREMENTS: 3. Utilize specific requirements of 2.2 through 2.12 listed in Tables 3.1 One, 2, 3, and 4 of this item for determining the welder and brazer qualifications , electrodes, weld design, welding requirements, brazing requirements, welding procedures, brazing procedures, welding parameters and controls, inspection standards, and acceptance criteria. h 2.2 Maintain a Welding Workmanship Program in accordance wit 3.1.1 and Welding Training Program in accordance with 2.5. 3.1.2 Maintain a Welding Surveillance Inspection Program in accordance with 2.2. 3.1.3 Maintain a Brazing Process Inspection in accordance with 2.6. Weld bell ance with Section 505c8 of 2.13. end fittings in accord - 3.2 2 piping systems - Nondestructive testing inspection shall comply with Class P as defined by 2.7. Ground welding machines, for purposes of providing a return path for 3 3. welding current, using a grounding bar or lead whic h shall be connected directly from the machine ground return connection to the ship's hull, sized on the basis of 1,000,000 Circular Mils per 1,000 amps per 100 feet, but in no event using less than a Number One cable (85,037 Circular Mils). ng machines used for welding on machinery, pressure .1 3 3. Weldi vessels, or piping, rotating ordnance, electronic, or fire control equipment shall have the ground return connection in the immediate vicinity of the work to ensure that current does not flow through bear ings, pipe hangers, or other areas where arcing or high resistance paths exist. For ships constructed of non - magnetic materials, the ground return cables shall be connected directly - as close to the weld zone as feasible. to the component being welded 2 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 9 FY - 1

91 3. 3 .2 Shipboard power distribution system shall not be used as the power source for welding equipment. External power source shall be used. 3. 4 Accomplishment of a Process Control Procedure (PCP) for the specific welding, brazing, and inspection operations in 3.4.1 through 3.4.9 shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.1) and the following : 3, A LT, M 1 - 1, and T - - 1, P - LT, P - 3. 4 .1 Class A - F, A - 1, A - 2, A - welding, as defined by 2.7. These procedures shall include, as a minimum, the information required by Paragraph 4.1.3 of 2.7 and supporting data such as a sketch of the weld repair areas and associated ship components . Joint numbers shall not be duplicated on ship during the availability. - er brazing, as defined by 3a special category silv Class P 3. 4 .2 The procedure shall include, as a minimum, the information required by 2.6. Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 of 2.6. 3. 4 .2.1 All brazing of steam piping shall conform to 2.6, Class P - 3a special category, including ultrasonic inspection, regardless of - pipe size, including any (existing) copper to (new) copper nickel transition joints. 3. ed piping and fittings In steam systems, where braz .2.2 4 up, the - are to be reused, or piping has to be sized to achieve proper fit option for a 5X visual inspection for cracks listed in Sections 5.5.3, 5.10.1, and 5.10.2 of 2.6 shall not be used; liquid penetrant inspection ed. shall be requir 3.4.3 For bronze propellers, using 2.11 for guidance. 4 . 4 3. For propellers other than bronze, using 2.7 for guidance. 14 4 . 5 For propulsion shafting and rudder stocks, using 2. for 3. guidance. 3. 4 . 6 For titanium - based materials, using 2.7 fo r guidance. 3. 4 . 7 Accomplish aluminum welding and nondestructive testing for Class . and 2.16 5 in accordance with 2.1 ships FFG - 7 8 3. 4 . Accomplish aluminum welding and nondestructive testing for 5XXX series and 17 in accordance with 2. CG superstructure of ships - 47 Class aluminum structures for CG . 18 2. 47 class ships in accordance with - The use of a permanent backing strap in accordance with 9 3.4. , Section 11 Paragraph 11.1 of 2.2 is prohibited unless detailed in the original weld joint design or when authorized by the SUPERVISOR. (I)(G) “NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING” or (I) Accomplish nondestructive testing in accordance with the following: 5 3. 3 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 9 FY - 1

92 5 .1 Manufacture, installation, and repair ( welding, brazing, 3. machining, or lapping ) of Level I fittings or components: 3. 5 .1.1 Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection - (I) Nondestructive Testing Magnetic Particle, Liquid 3. 5 .1.2 Penetrant and Ultraso nic Testing (Final Only) - (I)(G) - (I) Nondestructive Testing Radiographic .1.3 5 3. Welding/brazing of P 3. 5 .2 - 1, P - LT, P - 3a piping systems or Class - - A - F, A - 1, A - 2, A - 3, A - LT, M 1, T - 1 welding , and P 2 steam service : 3. 5 .2.1 Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection - (I) 3. 5 .2.2 Nondestructive Testing Magnetic Particle, Liquid Penetrant and Ultrasonic Testing (Final Only) - (I)(G) 3. 5 .2.3 Nondestructive Testing Radiographic - (I) 3.5.2.4 Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection (I)(G) materials S 51, S - 52, S - 53. - 3. 5 .3 Welding on ship /craft listed in Attachment A hull or structure when required by the fabrication document: 5 3. .3.1 Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection - (I) Nondestructive Testing Magnetic Par 3. 5 .3.2 ticle, Liquid Penetrant and Ultrasonic Testing (Final Only) - (I)(G) - (I) 3. 5 .3.3 Nondestructive Testing Radiographic 3. repair: and Weight handling equipment manufacture .4 5 .4.1 3. 5 Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection - (I) destructive Testing Magnetic Particle, Liquid .4.2 Non 3. 5 - Penetrant (G) (I) 5 .4.3 3. Ultrasonic Testing (Final Only) - (I)(G) - (I) 3. 5 Nondestructive Testing Radiographic .4.4 Corrective maintenance within the certified boundaries of .5 5 3. defined in NSTM 589): cranes (as 3. .5.1 (I) Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection - 5 009 of 19 4 ITEM NO: - 12 9 FY - 1

93 3. 5 .5.2 Nondestructive Testing Magnetic Particle, Liquid Penetrant - (I) (G) 3. 5 .5.3 Ultrasonic Testing (Final Only) - (I)(G) (I) aphic 3. 5 .5.4 Nondestructive Testing Radiogr - .6 3. 5 Maintenance on aircraft launch and recovery equipment: 5 3. .6.1 Nondestructive Testing Visual Inspection - (I) 3. 5 .6.2 Nondestructive Testing Magnetic Particle, Liquid (I)(G) Penetrant and Ultrasonic Testing (Final Only) - . 3 .6.3 (I) - Nondestructive Testing Radiographic 5 (I)(G) "EVALUATION OF RT FILMS" 6 Accomplish RT film interpretation. 3. Provide the cognizant .1 Government representative designated by 6 3. (G) the SUPERVISOR the evaluated radiographs and records within 2 days of the point. 3.7 Provide and maintain a Welding Consumable Control System in accordance with 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.6, 2.7, 2.11, 2.12, 2.14, and 2 .18 which covers the control and issuance of filler materials. The system shall be described in a written procedure that shall be submitted to the SUPERVISOR work. This for review and approval prior to the initiation of production a one procedure only requires time submittal/approval unless the Standard - Items change and/or references change or are updated. The Welding Consumable Control System shall be subject to periodic conformity audits by the SUPERVISOR throughout the contract period. 8 3. Do not de - posit ferritic welds on welds made with austenitic or non ferrous electrodes. Where the base material is ferrous and the existing weld ferrous, that weld shall be completely removed prior to - is austenitic or non ing shall be accomplished in welding with ferritic electrodes. The weld accordance with 2.2. combatant vessels - Utilize Attachment A to define combatant and non 9 3. and applicable table. 3. Where requirements in the repair and testing instructions for 10 propulsion boilers conflict, 2.12 shall t ake precedence. 4. NOTES: If a Process Control Pro 4.1 cedure (PCP) for all specific welding, brazing, and inspection operations in 3.4.1 through 3.4.9 is required; the of 19 5 009 - 12 ITEM NO: 9 FY - 1

94 use of Category II Standard Item 009 - 09 “Process Control Procedure (PCP); will be specified in the Work Item. of 2.1 provide and accomplish” ITEM NO: 12 009 - of 19 6 FY 9 - 1

95 TABLE 1 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF PIPING, PRESSURE VESSELS, PROPELLERS, AND MACHINERY C B A COLUMN D E CLASS A L - I HARD FACING *PROPELLERS SITUATION ** PROPULSION CLASS P - 1, P 2 AND P - LT PRESSURE CLASS P - 3a SPECIAL CATEGORY, OTHER BOILERS N PIPING VALVE PARTS EVOLUTION VESSEL (BRONZE) - - b 3 E CLASS P AND P 3a, PIPING - - 010/020 GTP C1 - S9221 AQ - S9074 AQ , 7000 1 010/248, PARAGRAPH 5 WELDER AND - 001 - - S9074 - GIB - GIB - 010/248 , LP - 0900 - BRAZER SECTION 4 ARAGRAPH 5 P QUALIFICATION 010/020 - - - S9221 GTP C1 , 2185 - STD - DOD S9074 WELDING 2 PARAGRAPH 4 S9074 - AQ - GIB - 010/248 , 010/248, PARAGRAPH 4 NOT APPLICABLE - AQ - GIB - PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH 4 3 NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE - 0900 - LP - 001 7000 , BRAZING SECTION 4 PROCEDURE MIL , 010/278 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 - NOT APPLICABLE 2185 , - STD - 4 WELDING GIB - S9074 - AR REQUIREMENTS PARAGRAPH 6 PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 6 S9221 010/020 - GTP - C1 - 5 FILLER MATERIAL S9074 - AR - - 010/278 , 0900 - LP - 001 - 7000 , GIB SECTION 5 S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278, PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 5 STD DOD - - 2185 , PARAGRAPH 5 - C1 - GTP - 010/020 S9221 AR 001 - LP - - - S9074 NOT APPLICABLE , 7000 - GIB 0900 , 010/278 - GIB - AR 6 JOINT DESIGN S9074 - - 010/278 , SECTION 5 PARAGRAPH 9 PARAGRAPH 9 22 - STD - MIL 22 - STD - MIL - PARAGRAPH 3 . 4.4 APPLIES * - PARAGRAPH 3. 10 APPLIES ** of 19 7 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 19 FY -

96 TABLE 1 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF PIPING, PRESSURE VESSELS, PROPELLERS, AND MACHINERY E D COLUMN A B C CLASS A L - SITUATION CLASS P ** PROPULSION 1, P - 2 AND P PRESSURE LT I CLASS P - 3a SPECIAL *PROPELLERS HARD FACING - (BRONZE) EVOLUTION PIPING BOILERS N CATEGORY, OTHER VALVE PARTS VESSEL E 3b - 3a, AND P - CLASS P PIPING S9221 - C1 - GTP - 010/020 , 7000 - 001 - GIB - AR - S9074 GIB - - AR - S9074 7 HEAT TREATMENT S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , - LP 0900 - 010/278 SECTION 5 , PARAGRAPH 6 010/278 , PARAGRAPHS 6 PARAGRAPH 6 AR S9074 - - GIB - AND 11.6 DOD 010/278 2185 , - STD - , PARAGRAPH 6 PARAGRAPH 5 - 010/020 - GTP - C1 S9221 S9074 - GIB - - GIB - AR - GIB - - 8 AR WORKMANSHIP AR - - S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , S9074 S9074 0900 - LP - 001 - 7000 , , , REQUIREMENTS 010/278 , 010/278 PARAGRAPH 7 SECTION 5 010/278 PARAGRAPHS 7 PARAGRAPH 7 PARAGRAPH 7 AND 11.6 GTP S9221 - C1 010/020 - - - GIB S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , , 2185 - STD - 0900 VISUAL INSPECT LP - 001 - 7000 , DOD - 9 NOT APPLICABLE S9074 - AR - SECTION 7 , - UP PARAGRAPH 9 010/278 JOINT FIT PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 9 22 - STD - MIL - FOR CLASS P 3a MIL - STD - 22 SPECIAL CATEGORY 10 VISUAL INSPECTION S9074 010/278 GIB , - - AR - S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , - GIB - AR - S9074 , 0 900 - LP - 001 - 7000 , 010/278 PARAGRAPH 10 SECTION 7 AND 8 PARAGRAPH 10 , PARAGRAPH 11.6.3 2035 - STD - MIL FOR CLASS P - 3a PARAGRAPH , 2035 - STD - MIL MIL - STD - 2035 , 4 PARAGRAPH 4 , 4 SPECIAL CATEGORY MIL - STD - PARAGRAPH 2035 PARAGRAPH 4 11 010/278 GIB - AR - S9074 - RADIOGRAPHIC S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 PARAGRAPH 10 INSPECTION (RT) PARAGRAPH 10 T9074 - AS - - GIB - AS - NOT APPLICABLE T9074 PARAGRAPH 3 , - 010/271 NOT APPLICABLE PARAGRAPH 3 , 010/271 GIB MIL - STD - 2035 , MIL - STD - 2035 , PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 5 (NORMALLY ONLY P - 1 AND P - LT) - . 4.4 APPLIES * PARAGRAPH 3 APPLIES PARAGRAPH 3. ** - 10 - 009 ITEM NO: 12 of 19 8 19 FY -

97 TABLE 1 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF PIPING, PRESSURE VESSELS, PROPELLERS, AND MACHINERY D C E B A COLUMN CLASS A L - CLASS P *PROPELLERS LT - 2 AND P - 1, P - CLASS P PRESSURE SITUATION I HARD FACING ** PROPULSION 3a SPECIAL BOILERS VESSEL EVOLUTION PIPING (BRONZE) CATEGORY, OTHER N VALVE PARTS - 3b 3a, AND P - E CLASS P PIPING 12 NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE 0900 ULTRASONIC - 001 S9245 - - 7000 AR - , TSM - - LP 010/PROP , TIONS 6,7,8 AND 9 SEC INSPECTION (UT) - FOR CLASS P PARAGRAPH 3a 5 SPECIAL CATEGORY - 7.5.2 PIPING ONLY 13 GIB 0900 PARAGRAPH 10 , 010/278 - , - AR - S9074 - GIB - AR MIL - STD - 2035 LIQUID PENETRANT S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , - S9074 , 7000 - 001 - LP - PARAGRAPH 5 - PARAGRAPH 10 , 010/278 SECTION 7 AND 8 INSPECTION (PT) AS - PARAGRAPH 7 T9074 - GIB 010/271 , PARAGRAPH 11.6.3 GIB - AS - 010/271, - GIB T9074 - - T9074 - AS STD - 2035 , PARAGRAPH 7 MIL - 3a - FOR CLASS P 010/271 PARAGRAPH 5 , - STD - 2035 , MIL SPECIAL CATEGORY PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 7 2035 - - MIL , STD PARAGRAPH 7 (NORMALLY .2.2 4 3. SEE 1 AND P - LT) ONLY P - NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE 14 GIB - AR - S9074 MAGNETIC AR PARAGRAPH 10 , 010/278 - GIB - - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - PARTICLE PARAGRAPH 4 AS - T9074 - 010/271 , PARAGRAPH 10 INSPECTION (MT) - AS - T9074 - 010/271, GIB MIL STD - 2035 - PARAGRAPH 4 PARAGRAPH 6 STD 2035 - , MIL - 6 (NORMALLY PARAGRAPH 1 AND P - LT) ONLY P - * - PARAGRAPH 3 . 4.4 APPLIES ** - PARAGRAPH 3. APPLIES 10 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 9 - FY 19

98 TABLE 1 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF PIPING, PRESSURE VESSELS, PROPELLERS, AND MACHINERY G COLUMN F I J H REDUCTION AND L CASTINGS SITUATION EVOLUTION MACHINERY CLASS M TURBINE PARTS FORCED DRAFT I STEAM TURBINE BLOWERS DRIVEN AUXILIARY N E GEARS 1 WELDER AND BRAZER S9074 QUALIFICATIONS - AQ - GIB - 010/248, PARAGRAPH 5 010/248, PARAGRAPH 4 2 S9074 - AQ - GIB - WELDING PROCEDURE 3 BRAZING PROCEDURE NOT APPLICABLE 4 WELDING REQUIREMENTS S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , PARAGRAPH 6 5 S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278, PARAGRAPH 5 FILLER MATERIAL - 6 S9074 - AR - GIB JOINT DESIGN 010/278, PARAGRAPH 9, AND MIL - STD - 22 7 HEAT TREATMENT S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278, PARAGRAPHS 6 AND 8 GIB 8 S9074 - AR - 010/278, PARAGRAPH 7 - WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS 9 - S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278, PARAGRAPH 10, AND MIL - STD - 22 VISUAL INSPECT JOINT FIT UP 10 VISUAL INSPECTION - - - GIB - AR - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 S9074 - AR - GIB GIB 010/278, - AR - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 , PARAGRAPH 16 010/278 PARAGRAPH 10 , 010/278 PARAGRAPH 14 PARAGRAPH 15 PARAGRAPH 13 - PARAGRAPH MIL , 2035 - 4 STD - MIL , 2035 - STD PARAGRAPH 4 NOT APPLICABLE 11 , 010/278 - GIB - AR RADIOGRAPHIC S9074 - S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , GIB - - AR - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 PARAGRAPH 16 INSPECTION (RT) PARAGRAPH 14 PARAGRAPH 10 010/278 , AS - T9074 - AS - GIB - 010/271 , - GIB - T9074 , - AS - T9074 010/271 010/271, - GIB PARAGRAPH 13 PARAGRAPH 3 PARAGRAPH 3 PARAGRAPH 3 - 2035 - STD - MIL , , 2035 MIL - STD MIL - STD - 2035 , PARAGRAPH 5 5 PARAGRAPH PARAGRAPH 5 - 12 009 of 19 ITEM NO: 10 19 FY -

99 TABLE 1 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF PIPING, PRESSURE VESSELS, PROPELLERS, AND MACHINERY F G H I J COLUMN L REDUCTION AND MACHINERY CLASS M I TURBINE PARTS SITUATION EVOLUTION CASTINGS FORCED DRAFT STEAM TURBINE BLOWERS DRIVEN AUXILIARY N E GEARS 12 , , 010/278 - GIB - AR ULTRASONIC INSPECTION - S9074 S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 PARAGRAPH 15 (UT) PARAGRAPH 13 PARAGRAPH 14 PARAGRAPH 10 PARAGRAPH 16 - AS - T9074 , 010/271 - GIB PARAGRAPH 6 , 2035 - 8 PARAGRAPH STD - MIL 13 - , 010/278 AR - - S9074 LIQUID PENETRANT - GIB S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , - AR - S9074 010/278 , , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 - AR GIB GIB - 010/278 , S9074 - PARAGRAPH 16 INSPECTION (PT) PARAGRAPH 10 PARAGRAPH 13 PARAGRAPH 14 PARAGRAPH 15 - T9074 AS - - GIB - , 010/271 - , T9074 - AS - GIB - 010/271 , T9074 , 010/271 - GIB - AS GIB T9074 010/271 - GIB - - AS 010/271, AS - T9074 - PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 5 PARAGRAPH 5 , - , 2035 MIL - STD - 2035 , PARAGRAPH 7 - STD - MIL MIL - STD - 2035 MIL - STD - 2035 , , MIL - STD 2035 PARAGRAPH 7 PARAGRAPH 7 PARAGRAPH 7 PARAGRAPH 7 14 GIB - AR - S9074 , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 , 010/278 MAGNETIC PARTICLE S9074 S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278 , , 010/278 - GIB - AR - - , 010/278 - GIB - AR - S9074 PARAGRAPH 13 PARAGRAPH 10 PARAGRAPH 14 INSPECTION (MT) PARAGRAPH 15 PARAGRAPH 16 - - 010/271 , , 010/271 - - GIB - AS - T9074 , 010/271 AS T9074 - GIB GIB - 010/271 , - AS - , 010/271 T9074 - GIB - AS - T9074 - AS - GIB T9074 PARAGRAPH 4 PARAGRAPH 4 PARAGRAPH 4 PARAGRAPH 4 PARAGRAPH 4 2035 , 2035 - STD MIL - STD - 2035 , STD - MIL - MIL - , MIL - STD - 2035 , MIL - STD - 2035 , PARAGRAPH PARAGRAPH PARAGRAPH 6 PARAGRAPH 6 6 6 6 PARAGRAPH of 19 ITEM NO: 009 11 - 12 FY - 19

100 TABLE 2 FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF SURFACE SHIP HULLS (COMBATANT) WELDING, F E D C B COLUMN A CARBON STEEL , ORDINARY (MS) L COPPER AND/OR 80 - 80/100, HSLA - (HY STRENGTH CHROMIUM NICKEL SILICONE BRONZE I ALLOY ALUMINUM MATERIAL EVOLUTION NICKEL BASE STEEL (STAINLESS) AND AND STS) STEEL(OS), N ALUMINUM BRONZE A LLOYS HIGHER STRENGTH E ) STEEL (HSS AQ 010/248, PARAGRAPH 5 - GIB S9074 - - 1 WELDER QUALIFICATION 010/248, PARAGRAPH 4 - GIB S9074 - AQ - WELDING PROCEDURE 2 3 ELECTRODE - - - GIB - , 1689 - AR , - - 1689 STD STD S9074 MIL - STD - 1689 , MI MIL - STD - 1689 , , MIL MIL - STD - 1689 PARAGRAPH 10 PARAGRAPH 10 TABLE II PARAGRAPH 10 , 010/278 PARAGRAPH 10 PARAGRAPH 10 TABLES XIV AND XV TABLE X TABLE XI TABLE XVI TABLES XII AND XIII JOINT DESIGN 4 MIL STD - - 22 MIL - STD - 1689, PARAGRAPH 11 WELDING REQUIREMENTS 5 - MIL - STD 1689, PARAGRAPH 13 6 WORKMANSHIP - 1689, PARAGRAPHS 12 AND 14 STD - MIL REQUIREMENTS 7 VISUAL STD - 1689, PARAGRAPHS 6, 7, AND 8 MIL - - - MIL 2035, PARAGRAPH 4 STD AS - GIB - T9074 010/271, PARAGRAPH 8 - 8 RADIOGRAPHIC STD - MIL - 1689, PARAGRAPHS 6, 7, AND 8 INSPECTION (RT) - STD - MIL 2035, PARAGRAPH 5 T9074 AS - GIB - 010/271, PARAGRAPH 3 - *PARAGRAPH 3.8 APPLIES 12 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 FY - 19

101 TABLE 2 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF SURFACE SHIP HULLS (COMBATANT) E D C A B F COLUMN CARBON STEEL L (MS), ORDINARY I COPPER AND/OR - 80/100, HSLA STRENGTH (HY CHROMIUM NICKEL 80 - SILICONE BRONZE ALUMINUM ALLOY MATERIAL EVOLUTION N NICKEL BASE STEEL(OS), AND STEEL (STAINLESS) AND STS) ALUMINUM BRONZ E E ALLOYS HIGHER STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) 9 1689, PARAGRAPHS 6, 7, AND 8 STD - MIL ULTRASONIC INSPECTION - - (UT) MIL 2035, PARAGRAPH 8 - STD - GIB - 010/271, PARAGRAPH 6 T9074 - AS 1689, PARAGRAPHS 6, 7, AND 8 - STD - MIL 10 LIQUID PENETRANT - MIL 7 PARAGRAPH - STD 2035, INSPECTION (PT) - GIB 010/271, - - PARAGRAPH 5 T9074 AS STD - MIL 1689, PARAGRAPH 6 - 11 MAGNETIC PARTICLE STD 6 - MIL - 2035, PARAGRAPH NOT APPLICABLE INSPECTION (MT) GIB - - AS - T9074 010/271, PARAGRAPH 4 *PARAGRAPH 3.8 APPLIES of 19 13 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 19 FY -

102 TABLE 3 COMBATANT) * ** WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF SURFACE SHIP HULLS (NON - F E D B C A COLUMN CARBON STEEL L (MS), ORDINARY SILICONE I CHROMIUM COPPER ALUMINUM STRENGTH *** BRONZE NICKEL STEEL MATERIAL EVOLUTION N AND/OR NICKEL STEEL(OS), AND - (HY ALLOY 80/100) ALUMINUM E (STAINLESS) BASE ALLOYS HIGHER STRENGTH BRONZE STEEL (HSS) 1 WELDER QUALIFICATION ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 2 ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 WELDING PROCEDURE 3 ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 ELECTRODE 4 ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 JOINT DESIGN 5 WELDING REQUIREMENTS ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 6 WORKMANSHIP ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 REQUIREMENTS VISUAL ABS RULES, 7 PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 8 RADIOGRAPHIC ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 INSPECTION (RT) 14 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 19 FY -

103 TABLE 3 - WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF SURFACE SHIP HULLS (NON COMBATANT) * ** D C B F E COLUMN A CARBON STEEL (MS), ORDINARY SILICONE L CHROMIUM COPPER *** STRENGTH ALUMINUM I BRONZE MATERIAL EVOLUTION NICKEL STEEL AND/OR NICKEL 80/100) STEEL(OS), AND - (HY ALLOY N ALUMINUM (STAINLESS) BASE ALLOYS HIGHER STRENGTH E BRONZE STEEL (HSS) 9 ULTRASONIC PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 ABS RULES, INSPECTION (UT) 10 LIQUID PENETRANT ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 INSPECTION (PT) 11 MAGNETIC PARTICLE NOT APPLICABLE ABS RULES, PART 2, CHAPTER 4, SECTION 1 INSPECTION (MT) - * - IDENTIFICATION OF "SURVEYOR" IN ABS RULES SIGNIFIES SUPERVISOR OF SHIPBUILDING (SUPERVISOR) ACTION. THE SUPERVISOR MAY USE MIL STD - 1689 FOR GUIDANCE WHERE ADDITIONAL DIRECTION IS NECESSARY. SUCH GUIDANCE MAY BE USED TO: ESTABLISH NDT REQUIREMENTS, ESTABLISH WELDING/NDT PR OCEDURE AND PERSONNEL Q UALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS, OR TO DEFINE OTHER ATTRIBUTES LISTED IN THE "MATERIAL EVOLUTION" LINE OF TABLE 3. - THE SUPERVISOR MAY ALSO ALLOW THE SHIPBUILDER TO CHOOSE FROM THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS, PROVIDING: ** - THE SHIPBUILDER'S UTILIZATION OF THE FOLLO WING OPTIONS SHALL RESULT IN NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE GOVERNMENT. - TH BETWEEN THE SHIPBUILDER SHALL UTILIZE THE FABRICATION DOCUMENT SELECTED FOR THE ENTIRE AVAILABILITY AND SHALL NOT SWITCH BACK AND FOR DOCUMENTS. ERVISOR OF WHICH FABRICATION DOCUMENT HAS BEEN SELECTED. THE SHIPBUILDER SHALL NOTIFY THE SUP - OPTIONS: A) MIL - STD - 1689 MAY BE UTILIZED BY THE SHIPBUILDER AT THE SHIPBUILDER'S DISCRETION. THE REQUIREMENTS OF TABLE 2 ABOVE WOULD THEN APPLY. FOR DETERMINATION OF NDT METHOD(S) AND EXTENT B) OF NDT INSPECTION WHEN REPAIRS ARE TO BE ACCOMPLISHED, THE SHIPBUILDER MAY REQUEST TO UTILIZE THE SAME NDT REQUIREMENTS THAT WERE INVOKED IN CONSTRUCTION OF THE VESSEL. IN SUCH CASES, THE SHIPBUILDER SHALL BE RESPONSIB LE TO DETERMINE UIREMENTS AND SUBMIT EVIDENCE SUCH AS DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS WHICH DETAIL THE REQUIREMENTS TO THE SUPERVISOR THE ORIGINAL NDT REQ ALONG WITH A REQUEST FOR APPROVAL. FICATION PROGRAM(S) WHICH HAVE ESTABLISHED WELDING AND/OR NDT PROCEDURES AND PERSONNEL QUALI C) THE SHIPBUILDER MAY REQUEST TO UTILIZE PRE - ACCEPTED WORK. IN SUCH CASES, THE SHIPBUILDER SHALL SUBMIT EVIDENCE OF SUCH ABS BEEN PREVIOUSLY UTILIZED IN THE PERFORMANCE OF SIMILAR ABS - TATION FOR THE PROPOSED PROGRAM(S). SUCH ACCEPTABILITY TO THE SUPERVISOR ALONG WITH DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS AND SUPPORTING DOCUMEN DOCUMENTATION SHALL INCLUDE THE WELDING/NDT PROCEDURES AND METHODS OF WELDING/NDT PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION THAT WERE UTILIZED IN FORMER - THAT MAY BE REQUESTED BY THE SUPERVISOR TO ESTABLISH THAT ACCEPTED WORK. THE SHIPBUILDER SHALL ALSO SUBMIT OTHER SUPPORTING EVIDENCE ABS ACCEPTED WORK. - THE PROPOSED PROGRAMS HAVE BEEN PREVIOUSLY UTILIZED FOR SIMILAR ABS 8 PARAGRAPH 3. - *** APPLIES. of 19 ITEM NO: 15 009 - 12 19 FY -

104 TABLE 4 WELDING, FABRICATION, AND INSPECTION OF METAL BOAT AND CRAFT HULLS E D C F COLUMN A B L SILICONE COPPER AND/OR MATERIAL CHROMIUM NICKEL I BRONZE 80/100) ALUMINUM ALLOY NICKEL BASE CARBON STEEL (MS) (HY - STEEL (STAINLESS) EVOLUTION N ALUMINUM ALLOYS E BRONZE 1 WELDER AQ S9074 QUALIFICATION - GIB - 010/248, PARAGRAPH 5 - 2 WELDING PROCEDURE AQ S9074 - - GIB - 010/248, PARAGRAPH 4 3 ELECTRODE 4010 - S9074 - AR - - GIB 0900 060 - 0900 - 060 - 4010, 0900 - 060 - 4010 , , 4010 - 060 - 0900 - 060 - 4010 , 0900 SECTION 10 , SECTION 10 , TABLE TABLE , SECTION 10 , 010/278 SECTION 10, SECTION 10 , TABLE TABLE II 10 - 3 - 2 AND 10 - TABLES 10 1 - 10 10 - 4 7 TABLES 10 - 5 AND 10 - 6 JOINT DESIGN 4 MIL - STD - 22 - 4010, SECTION 11 0900 - 060 5 WELDING REQUIREMENTS 0900 - 060 - 4010, SECTION 13 6 WORKMANSHIP 060 14 0900 S 12 AND 4010, SECTION - - REQUIREMENTS VISUAL 7 4010, SECTIONS 6, 7, AND 8 - 060 - 0900 GIB - AS - T9074 - 010/271, PARAGRAPH 8 8 - RADIOGRAPHIC 0900 060 - 4010, SECTION 6, TABLE 6 - 1 AND SECTIONS 7 AND 8 INSPECTION (RT) - T9074 - AS GIB - 010/271, PARAGRAPH 3 9 ULTRASONIC - AS - INSPECTION (UT) T9074 010/271, PARAGRAPH 6 - GIB 10 LIQUID PENETRANT 4010, SECTIONS 6, 7, AND 8 INSPECTION (PT) - 0900 - 060 AS - T9074 - GIB 010/271, PARAGRAPH 5 - 11 4010 - 060 - 0900 MAGNETIC PARTICLE SECTION 6 NOT APPLICABLE 010/271, PARAGRAPH 4 - INSPECTION (MT) - T9074 - AS GIB 009 ITEM NO: 16 of 19 12 - *PARAGRAPG 3.8 APPLIES FY - 19

105 ATTACHMENT A COMBATANT SURFACE SHIPS WARSHIPS TABLE Aircraft Carriers: Aircraft Carrier ...CV... 2 Aircraft Carrier (nuclear propulsion) ...CVN... 2 Surface Combatants: . 2 uided Missile Cruiser ... G ...CG... Guided Missile Destroyer ...DDG... 2 Guided Missile Frigate ...FFG... 2 ...LCS... 2 Littoral Combat Ship Patrol Combatants: 4 ...PC... ... Patrol Coastal AMPHIBIOUS WARFARE SHIPS Amphibious Command Ship ...LCC... 2 Amphibious Assault Ship (general purpose) ...LHA... 2 Amphibious Cargo Ship ... ...LKA... 2 Amphibious Transport Dock ...LPD... 2 ...LSD... 2 Dock Landing Ship ... Amphibious Assault Ship (general purpose) ...LHD... 2 XILIARY SHIPS AU Oiler ...AO... 2 Fast Combat Support Ship ...AOE... 2 MINE WARFARE SHIPS Mine Countermeasures Ship ...MCM.. ... 2 .. 17 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 19 FY -

106 ATTACHMENT A (Con't) COMBATANT SURFACE CRAFT AMPHIBIOUS WARFARE CRAFT TABLE Landing Craft, Air Cushion ...LCAC... 4 ... 4 Landing Craft, Mechanized ...LCM... Landing Craft, Personnel, Large ...LCPL... 4 Landing Craft, Utility ...LCU... 2 Landing Craft, Vehicle, Personnel ...LCVP... 4 ...LSSC... 4 Light Seal Support Craft ... Amphibious Warping Tug ...LWT... 4 Medium Seal Support Craft ...MSSC... 4 Swimmer Delivery Vehicle ...SDV... 4 ping Tug ...SLWT... 4 Side Loading War Special Warfare Craft, Light ...SWCL... 4 Special Warfare Craft, Medium ...SWCM... 4 PATROL CRAFT Armored Troop Carrier ...ATC... 4 - Mini Patrol Boat ...PB... 4 River Patrol Boat ...PBR... 4 Patrol Craft (fast) ...PCF... 4 Fast Patrol Craft ...PTF... 4 COMBATANT SURFACE SHIPS - NON AUXILIARY SHIPS Auxiliary Crane Ship ...ACS ... . 3 Missile Range Instrumentation Ship ...AGM... 3 Oceanographic Research Ship ...AGOR... 3 Ocean Surveillance Ship ...AGOS... 3 ...AGS... 3 Surveying Ship ... Hospital Ship ...AH... 3 Cargo Ship ...AK... 3 Auxiliary Cargo Barge/Lighter Ship ...AKB... 3 On/Float ary Cargo Float - Off Ship ...AKF... 3 - Auxili Transport Oiler ...AOT... 3 Barracks Craft ...APL... 3 ..ARC... 3 Cable Repairing Ship ... Salvage Ship ...ARS... 3 Submarine Tender ...AS... 3 Fleet Ocean Tug ...ATF... 3 Support Ship ...AVB... 3 Aviation Logistic 18 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 19 FY -

107 ATTACHMENT A (Con't) NON - COMBATANT SURFACE CRAFT SERVICE CRAFT TABLE propelled) ...AFDL... 3 Small Auxiliary Floating Dry Dock (non - self - Medi um Auxiliary Floating Dry Dock (non - self - propelled) ..AFDM... 3 propelled) ...ARDM... 3 Medium Auxiliary Repair Dry Dock (non - self - Causeway Section, Powered ...CSP... 3 Causeway Section (non self - propelled) ... ...CSNP... 3 - Unclassified Miscellaneous ...IX... 3 Open Lighter (non propelled) ...YC... 3 - self - Aircraft Transportation Lighter (non - self - propelled) ...YCV... 3 - Cargo Semi ersible Barge ...YCSS... 3 Subm Floating Crane (non - self - propelled) ...YD... 3 propelled) ...YDT... 3 Diving Tender (non - self - . 3 - Ferryboat or Launch (self propelled) ...YFB.. Covered Lighter (non - self - propelled) ...YFN... 3 - Large Covered Lighter (non self - propelled) ...YFNB... 3 Dry Dock Companion Craft (non - self - propelled) ...YFND... 3 propelled) ...YFNX... 3 - self - Lighter (special purpose) (non propelled) ...YFP... 3 - self - Floating Power Barge (non Salvage Lift Craft, Light ...YLC... 3 propelled) ...YOGN... 3 - self - Gasoline Barge (non - self - non Fuel Oil Barge ( propelled) ...YON... 3 - self - propelled) ...YOS... 3 Oil Storage Barge (non Patrol Craft (self - propelled) ...YP... 4 Floating Workshop (non - self - propelled) ...YR... 3 - Repair and Berthing Barge (non propelled) ...YRB... 3 self - Berthing and Messing Barge (non - self - propelled ) ..YRBM. . . 3 Repair, Floating Dry Dock Workshop (hull) (non - self - propelled) ...YRDH. . . 3 . . 3 Floating Dry Dock Workshop (machine) (non - sel f - propelled) YRDM. on Radiological Repair Barge (n . 3 . YRR. propelled) ... - self - .. 3 Seaplane Wrecking Derrick (s elf - propelled) ... YSD . Large Harbor Tug ... ... YTB . .. 4 .. 4 Small Harbor Tug ... ... ... YTL . . .YTT ... Torpedo Trials Craft ... .. 4 .. 3 . Water Barge (non - self - prope lled) ... .YWN NOTES: Letter prefixes to classification symbols may add identification: Prototype ship or craft in an experimental -- E or developmental status. Assigned to MSC (Military Sealift Command) -- T F Being Constructed for a foreign government. -- a new class whose Often added to existing classifications to indicate -- X charact eristics have not been defined. 19 of 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 12 19 FY -

108 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 13 201 DATE: 01 OCT 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Meter; repair REFERENCES: 2. 2.1 Calibration Requirements List (CRL) for Shipboard Installed Instrumentation NAVSEA OD 45845, Metrology Requirements List 2.2 Guide for 010, Electrical Workmanship Inspection - GYD - A6 - S9300 2.3 Surface Ships and Submarines 4 2. ISO 17025, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories, First Edition 2. 5 ANSI/NCSL Z540 - 3, Requirements for the Calibration of Measuring and Test Equipment NAVSEA 04 04734, Naval and Marine Corps Calibration Laboratory - 2. 6 Audit/Certification Manual 35TR - NAVAIR 17 2. 7 8, Technical Requirements for Calibration Labels and - Tags 3. REQUIREMENTS: 3.1 instrument calibration verify Prior to the installation of meters, applicable NAVSEA documentation. Permanently installed requirements in meters are addressed by 2. non 1 installed meters are addressed by ; all other - 2.2. , the meter shall have at least If 1 calibration is required 1 3. . of its calibration life remaining. If it does not, the meter thirds two - shall be calibrated in accordance with 3.6. If the meter is designated as No Calibration Required (NCR), 3.1.2 a perform functional check to ensure proper functioning of the meter if it is not required for system acceptance testing. Meters identified as requiring calibration for system/acceptance testing/trials but designated as NCR in the accordance with 3.6 and shall be labeled ship’s CRL, shall be calibrated in 1 of 5 13 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

109 with a special calibration label NAVSEA 4734/6, and an NCR label NAVSEA 4734/26 . The special calibration label shall be annotated to read, All such special calibration “CALIBRATION PERFORMED TO SUPPORT TESTING ” . abels shall be removed and the meter shall have NCR labels affixed upon l completion of testing/trials. 3.1.3 System or chain calibrations (designated as Level 2 in the ship's CRL) are not to be performed by commercial activities. For system calibration . Level 2 calibrated meters installed in SUPERVISOR , contact the systems shall be subject to system or chain calibrations at the next available period. 3. 2 Disconnect and remove each meter and associated impeders, reactors, resistor boxes, and shunts. 3. 2 .1 Record and retain hook - up data and mounting hardware. (V) "CONDITION OF WIRE LEADS" .1.1 2 3. Inspect lead wires and insulation; broken or partially broken lead wires shall be cut back to remove damaged/questionable . 3 terminal ends installed in accordance with 2. portions of the wire and new conductor identification 3. 2 .2 Remove existing and install new identified conductor identification sleeving in place of sleeving to be . Install new sleeving where missing. New illegible conductor identification DTL AMS 23053, Class One, white, marked with shall conform to SAE - sleeving - - indelible ink. 3. 3 Disassemble and clean equipment to remove loose paint and foreign matter. 3. 4 Repair each meter and associated equipment to manufactu rer's specifications. .1 Remove existing and install new components in place of those 4 3. identified to be defective. Install new components where missing. .2 Free - up and adjust moving parts. 4 3. 4 .3 Restore unit cases to original finish. 3. Assemble equipment. Install new seals and gaskets conforming to 5 3. manufacturer's specifications. 6 3. Calibrate and adjust each meter, including associated accessories, s to manufacturer's specifications, using appropriate calibration procedure 2.1 for permanently installed meters, and test equipment in accordance with for portable/non 2.2 . - installed meters or 2 of 5 13 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

110 6 .1 Calibration laboratories shall be accredited to either 2. 4 or 3. 5 y 2. by a Commercial Accreditation Activity, or certified by a Nav Certification Activity to 2. 6 , and the scope of accreditation must cover the . appropriate measurement parameters and ranges of the calibrations performed Calibration must meet a minimum Test Accuracy Ratio (TAR) of 4:1, or a Test Uncertainty Ratio (TUR) equal to or greater than 4:1, or a Probability of False Accept (PFA) not to exceed 2 percent. In the absence of manufacturer's specifications, to 3. 6 lerances .2 shall be in accordance with Section 1 of 2.2. 3. 6 .3 Affix a calibration label to the face of each meter, denoting the name and location of the calibration facility, the NAVSEA Lab Code if , the date of calibration, and date of next cali assigned bration. Department Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic of the Navy calibration activities and TMDE ) custodians shall use calibration labels and tags in Equipment ( accordance with 2. 7 . The calibration interval assigned for shipboard installed 3. 6 .4 instr umentation shall be in accordance with 2. 1 . All other meters shall have a calibration interval assigned in accordance with 2.2. 3.6.5 Submit one legibl e copy, in hard copy and approved transferrable media , of a calibration events data file in (in Excel format) for each contractor and subcontractor - performed accordance with Attachment A calibration event to the ship's Field Calibration Activity (FCA), Engineering/Maintenance Officer and AIMD Officer (if assigned) via the SUPERVISOR on a bi - weekly basis . The cogn izant shipboard representative shall enter the calibration data into the Navy's calibration recall system. Install and connect each meter, including associated accessories, 3. 7 up data and mounting hardware retained in 3. .1. 2 - using hook (V) “VERIFY CORRECT INDICATION” 3. 8 Verify correct indication of each meter during operational test of equipment. 4. NOTES: 4.1 The SUPERVISOR will supply the contractor with a copy of the CRL provided by the Ship's Chief Engineer. 4.2 The SUPERVISOR will provide a copy of the calibration data to the Ship's Force Calibration Coordinator for the purpose of updating the ship's RECALL list. 4.3 NAVSEA 04RM3 Approved list of Accrediting Bodies (AB). ASQ National Accreditation Board (ANAB), http://anab.org/ - . ANSI - a - B), http://l - A - Laboratory Accreditation Bureau (L . b.com/ 3 of 5 13 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

111 http://www.pjr.com/ Perry Johnson Registrars (PJLA), . merican Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA), . The A https://www.a2la.org/ National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), . https://www.nist.gov/nvlap International Accreditation Service (IAS), http://www.iasonline.org . Contact NAVSEA 04RM3 for information on commercial accreditation in accordance with 2. 4 and 2. 5 by NAVSEA approved commercial Accrediting Bodies AB). ( Contact one of the following Navy Certification Activities for 4.4 : 6 certification requirements in accordance with 2. Atlantic Regional Maintenance - Mid Southwest Regional Maintenance Center Center Laboratory Certification Branch Laboratory Certification Branch (Code 240C) - Phone: (619)556 - 6699 /(619)556 1346 (Code 212 ) FAX: (619)556 4877 - Phone: (757) 400 - 0735 FAX: (757) 400 - 3160 4 of 5 13 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

112 ATTACHMENT A  Entries in the calibration events file shall not be abbreviated. sha The event data for NOFORN/Reactor/Steam plant instruments  ll be handled in accordance with the applicable SEA 08 directives. For existing, permanently installed instruments, the calibration events  ence number , file data set shall include the nomenclature, CRL refer condition received (i.e., In T olerance (IT) or Out of Tolerance (OOT)), date calibrated, date due, procedure used, calibration standard used, servicing lab code and service label applied (i.e., calibrated, special .) cal ibration , rejected, etc in accordance with 2. 7 . - installed instruments, the calibration events file data For existing, non  Category - Number, Sub set shall include the nomenclature, National Stock ) SCAT ( ’s Commercial and Code, instrument serial number, manufacturer - , procedure used, calibration standard used, sub ) CAGE y ( government Entit , custodian work center. Manufacture’s model number, condition received, ) METRL ( (if Metrology Requirements List cycle, servicing laboratory code applicable) label attached. , date serviced, due date, and servicing  For newly added instruments, the minimum data set includes manufacturer, model, serial number, nomenclature, manufacturer's CAGE, range, procedure ibration standard used, date calibrated, date due, servicing lab used, cal l attached, location, part code, service labe of (System), function within - the system (if permanently installed), National Stock Number and SCAT Code. 5 of 5 13 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

113 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 14 01 7 201 OCT DATE: II CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE: and Thermometer ; repair Title: Gage, Switch , 1.1 REFERENCES: 2. Calibration Requirements List (CRL) for Shipboard Installed 2.1 Instrumentation 2. 2 NAVSEA OD 45845, Metrology Requirements List ISO 17025, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and 2. 3 Calibration Laboratories, First Edition - 2. 4 ANSI/NCSL Z540 3, Requirements for the Calibration of Measuring and Test Equipment - 2. 5 NAVSEA 04 04734, Naval and Marine Corps Calibration Laboratory Audit/Certification Manual 2. 6 NAVAIR 17 - 35TR - 8, Technical Requirements for Calibration Labels and Tags REQUIREMENTS: 3. 3.1 and thermometers, , switches, Prior to the installation of gages verify instrument calibration requirements in applicable NAVSEA documentation to determine if the instrument requires cali bration . Permanently installed , switches, ; all other 1 - non gages and thermometers are addressed by 2. installed instruments are addressed by 2. 2. If required to be calibrated, the instrument shall have at 3.1.1 thirds of its calibration life r - least two emaining. If it does not, in accordance with 3.7. calibrate the instrument instrument If the 3.1.2 is designated as No Calibration Required a (NCR), perform functional check to ensure proper functioning of the if it is not required for syste m acceptance testing. Instrument s instrument identified as requiring calibration for system/acceptance testing/trials but designated as NCR in the ship’s CRL, shall be calibrated in accordance with and shall be labeled with a special calibration manufacturer’s specifications The special label NAVSEA 4734/6, and an NCR label NAVSEA 4734/26 . calibration label shall be annotated to read, “CALIBRATION PERFORMED TO 1 of 5 14 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

114 SUPPORT TESTING. THIS LABEL MUST BE REMOVED UPON COMPLETION OF ING/TRIALS TO REFLECT THE CRL CAL - N (NCR) DESIGNATION OF THE INSTRUMENT”. TEST All such special calibration label shall s shall be removed and the instrument have NCR labels affixed upon completion of testing/trials. 3.1.3 System or chain calibrations (desi gnated as Level 2 in the ship's CRL) are not to be performed by commercial activities. For system calibration, contact the SUPERVISOR. (See 4.6) and thermometer. 3. 2 Disconnect and remove each gage , switch, unit. 3. 2 .1 Remove sealed gages as a complete 3. 3 Clear gage lines from instrument side of root connection of obstructions by blowing clean, dry air through the lines. 3. 4 Disassemble and clean equipment to remove loose paint and foreign matter. 3. 4 .1 Do not disassemble sealed gage unit. and thermometers to manufacturer's , switches, Repair the gages 5 3. specifications. Remove existing and install new components in place of those 3. 5 .1 identified Install new components where missing. to be defective. 3. 5 .2 Free - st moving parts. up and adju 3. 5 .3 Restore unit cases to original finish. 6 ssemble equipment. A 3. 7 3. Calibrate and adjust each gage and thermometer, including , switch, associated accessories, to the manufacturer's specifications, using 1 appropriate calibration procedures and test equipment in accordance with 2. gages, switches, and t for 2 2. , or for permanently installed h ermometers installed gages, switches, and thermo meters . portable/non - Calibration laboratories shall be accredited to either 2. 3. 3 or .1 7 2. by a Commercial Accreditation Activity, or certified by a Navy 4 , 5 Certification Activity to 2. and the scope of accreditation must cover the appropriate measurement parameters and ranges of the calibrations performed . Calibration must meet a minimum Test Accuracy Ratio (TAR) of 4:1, or a Test Uncertainty Ratio (TUR) equal to or greater than 4:1, or a Probability of False Accept (PFA) not to exceed 2 percent. 3. In the absence of manufacturer's specifications, tolerances .2 7 shall be in accordance with S . 2 ection 1 of 2. 2 of 5 14 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

115 3. 7 .3 Affix a calibration label to the face of each gage, switch, meter, denoting the name and location of the calibration facility, and thermo the NAVSEA Lab Code if assigned , the date of calibration, and date of next calibration. Depa rtment of the Navy calibration activities and Test, custodians shall use calibration ( ) TMDE Measurement, and Diagnostic Equipment labels and tags in accordance with 2. . 6 3. 7 .4 The calibration interval assigned for shipboard installed instrumentation sha ll be in accordance with 2. 1 . All other instrumentation shall have a calibration interval assigned in accordance with 2. 2 . Submit one legible copy, in hard copy and 3.7.5 approved a calibration events data file , of (in Excel format) transferrable media in performed - for each contractor and subcontractor accordance with Attachment A calibration event to the ship's Field Calibration Activity (FCA), Engineering/Maintenance Officer and AIMD Officer (if assigned) via the S . The weekly basis izant shipboard representative cogn - UPERVISOR on a bi shall enter the calibration data into the Navy's calibration recall system. 8 3. I nstall and c onnect each unit. Install new seals, gaskets, and fasteners. (V) “VERIFY CORRECT INDICATION /OPERATION ” 3. and operation correct indication Verify and , switch 9 of each gage thermometer during operational test of equipment. NOTES: 4. 4. 1 The SUPERVISOR will supply the contractor with a copy of the CRL provided by the Ship's Chief Engineer. The SUPERVISOR will provide a copy of the calibration data to the 4.2 Ship's Force Calibration Coordinator for the purpose of updating the ship's CALL list. RE 4.3 NAVSEA 04RM3 Approved list of Accrediting Bodies (AB). ANSI . - ASQ National Accreditation Board (ANAB), http://anab.org/ - http://l B), - a - b.com/ . Laboratory Accreditation Bureau (L - A http://www.pjr.com/ Perry Johnson Registrars (PJLA), . The American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA), . https://www.a2la.org/ . National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), https://www.nist.gov/nvlap International Accreditation Service (IAS), http://www.iasonline.org . NAVSEA 04RM3 for information on commercial accreditation in Contact by NAVSEA approved commercial Accrediting Bodies accordance with 2. and 2. 4 3 (AB). 3 of 5 14 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

116 4.4 Contact one of the following Navy Certification Activities for certification requirements in accordance wit h 2. 5 : Southwest Regional Maintenance Center - Mid Atlantic Regional Maintenance Laboratory Certification Branch Center (Code 240C) Laboratory Certification Branch 212 1346 - 6699/(619)556 - (Code Phone: (619)556 ) Phone: (757) 4877 FAX: (619)556 400 - 0735 - FAX: (757) 400 - 3160 4.5 This item does not apply to Oxygen gages. 4.6 Point of contact for Level 2 system or chain calibrations is NAVSEA 04RM. 4 of 5 14 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

117 ATTACHMENT A  Entries in the calibration events file shall not be abbreviated. The event data for  NOFORN/Reactor/steam plant instruments will be handled in accordance with the applicable SEA 08 directives.  For existing, permanently installed instruments, the calibration events file data set shall include the nomenclature, CRL reference number , olerance (IT) or Out of Tolerance (OOT)), on received (i.e., In T conditi date calibrated, date due, procedure used, calibration standard used, servicing lab code and service label applied (i.e., calibrated, special calibration, rejected, etc.) in accordance with 2 .6.  For existing, non - installed instruments, the calibration events file data category - set shall include the nomenclature, National Stock Number, Sub ) Commercial and ’s Code, instrument serial number, manufacturer SCAT ( - used, calibration standard used, sub , procedure ) CAGE Government Entity ( work center manufacture’s model number, condition received, , custodian , (if ) cycle, servicing laboratory code ( Metrology Requirements List METRL . applicable) , date serviced, due date, and servicing label attached  ewly added instruments, the minimum data set includes manufacturer, For n model, serial number, nomenclature, manufacturer's CAGE, range, red hand settings (if applicable), procedure used, cal standard used, date ibration calibrated, date due, servicing lab code, service label attached, of (System), function within the system (if permanently - location, part installed), National Stock Number and SCAT Code. 5 of 5 14 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

118 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 15 DATE: 18 NOV 2016 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE: Title: Rotating Machinery; balance 1.1 2. REFERENCES: 2.1 Standard Items - 231, Propulsion and SSTG Steam Turbines 2.2 S9086 - G9 - STM - 010/CH 2. - Type I Equipment ( - STD - MIL 3 167, Mechanical Vibration of Shipboard Environmental and Type II Internally Excited) - 2.4 S9245 nd AR - TSM - 010/PROP, Marine Propeller Inspection, Repair a - Certification REQUIREMENTS: 3. 3.1 Measure and record the maximum eccentricity of the rotor shaft and installed components relative to the points of support using dial indicators. Balance rotating machinery assemblies or components in accordanc 3.2 e with the following requirements and procedures: 3.2.1 otors in accordance with steam turbine r ultistage Balance m 2. 2 . Contact the SUPERVISOR prior to directing balance 3.2.1.1 work for multistage steam turbine rotors. 3.2.1.2 Multistage steam turbine rotors shall only be ection 231 8.13 - S balanced at high speed (operating speed), in accordance with . Balance work must be performed by the OEM, OEM certified equivalent, 2 of 2. d has a proven capability to high spee who or NAVSEA approved contractor balance rotors in accordance with 2. and the OEM balance specification 3 , 2. 2 for the rotor. 3.2.1.3 No attempt shall be made to straighten a turbine rotor assembly. 3.2.1.4 Steam turbine rotors shall be balanced with the overspeed trip governor installed. 1 of 3 15 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

119 Post 3.2.1.5 - repair testing (sea trials for propulsion units) for multistage steam turbines where turbine repairs have been accomplished, shall include a bearing cap vibration survey. 3.2.1.6 Submit one legible copy, in ha rd copy or approved . transferrable media, of a n equipment overhaul report to the SUPERVISOR of 8.13 Report shall include a balance report in accordance with Section 231 - 009 - and a vibration survey report in accordance with 2.2 104 of 2.1 . Unsatisfactory vibration balance levels recorded in the post repair testing, place balancing in as determined by the SUPERVISOR, shall be corrected by in - accordance with Section 231 - 8.13 of 2.2 . 3.2.2 Except for propellers, if the design operating speed of the compon ent to be balanced is less than 150 revolutions per minute (RPM), the rotor including shaft shall be balanced by symmetrically supporting the rotor on 2 knife edges and applying a correction to attain a gravity balance. he design operating speed of the Except for propellers, if t 3.2.3 component to be balanced is equal to or greater than 150 RPM, the rotor including shaft shall be balanced with equipment which requires rotation of the work piece. 4 Propellers shall be balanced in accordance with 2. 3.2.4 . 3.2.5 Types of correction: TYPES OF CORRECTION N 1/ ROTOR CHARACTERISTIC 1/ 000 , 1 - plane 0 L/D Less than or Equal to 0.5 Single - 0 150 L/D Greater than 0.5 - , L/D Less than or Equal to 0.5 000 2 - plane Greater than 1 Greater than 150 L/D Greater than 0.5 TYPES OF CORRECTION N 1/ ROTOR CHARACTERISTIC 1/ Multi Flexible: Unable to correct by - plane - plane balancing 2 1/ L = Length of rotor mass, exclusive of shaft D = Diameter of rotor mass, exclusive of shaft N = Maximum operating RPM 3.2.6 Allowable unbalance: The values determined by Paragraph 3 5.2.2.2 of 2. are permitted in each plane of correction, except for th ection S multistage steam turbine rotors which shall be in accordance wi 231 . 8.13 of 2. 2 - 2 of 3 15 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

120 When the computation for converting displacement measurements 3.2.7 - inches of force unbalance is an approximation, verification shall be to ounce made by adding a trial weight to the rotor, equal and opposite to the calculate d ounce - inches of force. If putty is used as a trial weight, it shall be removed, weighed and a permanent compensating weight shall be installed in its place. media, of a 3.3 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable report listing results of t he requirements of 3.1 and 3.2 to the SUPERVISOR. The report shall include the following information: 3.3.1 Ship's name and hull number 3.3.2 Contractor and subcontractor 3.3.3 Job Order and Work Item number 3.3.4 Unit and component identifica tion 3.3.5 Manufacturer and model number of balance machine Date of last calibration, by whom it was calibrated, and when 3.3.6 the next calibration is due for the balancing machine Maximum total indicated runout of rotor or balancing arbor 3.3.7 3.3.8 Weight of rotor assembly in pounds 3.3.9 Design operating RPM of rotor - inches 3.3.10 Computation of allowable unbalance in ounce Measured unbalance, prior to and after balancing, in 3.3.11 - inches ounce for converting displacement 3.3.12 C omputations or procedures measurements to ounce inches of unbalance force, when the machine used to - balance components indicates displacement measurements in lieu of direct unbalance forces. 4. NOTES: For multi stage steam turbine rotors only: 4.1 4.1.1 place balance, SUPERVISOR - Prior to performing machine or in . shall contact NAVSEA 05Z22 - found/final balance result and SUPERVISOR shall forward as 4.1.2 - shipboard vibration survey to NAVSEA 05Z22 and NSWCCD e 922. SSES Cod 3 of 3 15 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

121 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 16 DATE: 18 NOV 2016 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Electronic Equipment; repair REFERENCES: 2. 2.1 Equipment Technical Manual - 2.2 Interferences (EMI) Survey 5291780, Standard Electromagnetic 407 Procedures SE000 2.3 010, Navy Installation and Maintenance Book (NIMB), - IMB - 01 - - General Section VI, Electronics Installation and Maintenance Book Maintenance (Source CD: N0002400003) IMB 01 - 010, Navy Installation and Maintenance Book (NIMB), - - SE000 2.4 Section IX, Installation Standards (Source CD: N0002400003) 010, Electrical Workmanship Inspection Guide for 2.5 S9300 - - GYD - A6 Surface Ships and Submarines - 31, Information Assurance Shipboard Red/Black - 5239 IA PUB 2.6 lation Publication Instal 2.7 NSTISSAM TEMPEST/2 - 95, Red/Black Installation Guidance (FOUO) 1310, Shipboard Bonding, Grounding, and Other Techniques for MIL - STD 2.8 - Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) , Mitigation, and Safety 3. REQUIREMENTS: 3.1 Disassemble equipment for cleaning, inspection, and repair, using 2.1 for guidance. (V) "VISUALLY INSPECT" 3.1.1 Visually inspect components prior to cleaning to detect evidence of casualties and deteriorating conditions that may not be apparent after cleaning. 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 16 FY - 1 9

122 Clean equipment and remove foreign matter. 3.1.2 3.1.3 Dry equipment, removing moisture and cleaning solvents. Inspect equipment for applicable electromagnetic interference 3.1.4 (EMI) fixes usin g Shipboard Electromagnetic Compatibility Improvement Program (SEMCIP) Technical Assist Network (STAN) in accordance with 2.2. copy of a report, in Submit one legible approved 3.1.4.1 and EMI transferrable media , listing the applicable EMI fixes not installed fixes that have been improperly installed, to the SUPERVISOR. (V) "INSPECT AND TEST TO DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS" Inspect and test electrical and mechanical components, assemblies, 3.2 nt enclosures, internal circuitry, and enclosure subassemblies, equipme hardware to design characteristics and determine missing and defective components, circuitry, and enclosure hardware in accordance with 2.1. Remove existing and install new electrical and mechanical 3.2.1 components, assemblies, subassemblies, internal circuitry, and enclosure hardware in place of those identif ied to be missing or defective. New material shall conform to the requirements of 2.1. 3.2.1.1 Soldering, desoldering, and removal of component s and circuitry shall be in accordance with Section 4 of 2.3. 3.2.1.2 Miniature and microminiature repair of printed circuit boards shall be in accordance with Sections 5 and 6 of 2.3. 16878. Wire - DTL - New wiring shall conform to MIL 3.2.1.3 size and color code shall be in accordance with 2.1. Individual wires in conductor harnesses and chassis wiring may be plain white conductors with identification sleeving at each end, stenciled with indelible ink to indicate color coding. ) "INSPECT SHIELDING TERMINATIONS" (V Inspect braided wire shielding terminations for conformance to 3.3 - Paragraph 2 19.3 of 2.4. Remove existing and install new grounding sheath connectors 3.3.1 in place of those identif ied to be missing or defective. Installation shall - 14 of 2.4. be in accordance with Paragraph 2 (V) "INSPECT WIRE CONNECTIONS" Inspect terminal board wire connections for termination with lugs 3.4 - conforming to SAE AS7928 o f each conductor at the terminal board connections. 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 16 FY - 1 9

123 3.4.1 Remove existing and install new lugs in place of those to be missing or defective, using 2.5 for accept or reject identified AS7928. - criteria. New lugs shall conform to SAE (V) "INSPECT WIRE M ARKERS" conductor identification sleeving Inspect for missing and defective 3.5 . conductor identification Remove existing and install new 3.5.1 to be missing or defective, using 2.5 identified in place of those sleeving for accept conductor identification sleeving or reject criteria. New shall DTL - AMS - conform to SAE 23053, Class One, white, marked with indelible ink. - Conductor identification sleeving 3.5.1.1 shall be marked in accordance with 2.1. in terminal board connections in 3.6 Correct discrepancies identified accordance with 2.1 and as modified by applicable field changes identified on the field change accomplished plate. (V) "INSPECT FOR SLACK" 3.7 ng and cable harnesses between hinged parts Inspect existing cabli and between chassis and parts which are subject to removal for slack to prevent breaking of individual wires by repeated flexing and for chafing protection. 15 of 2.4 to 3.7.1 Provide slack in accordance with Paragraph 2 - prevent breaking of individual wires. 3.7.2 Install new chafing protection in accordance with Paragraph - 15 of 2.4. 2 3.8 Tie loose harness lacing in accordance with Paragraph 2 - 15.2 of 2.4. 3.9 Secure loose wiring ha rness clamps and install new plastic clamps to be missing or defective, in accordance with Paragraph 2 where identified - 15.3 of 2.4. 3.10 Adjust relays and burnish contacts in exposed type relays and switches. 3.11 teeth by stoning. Remove high spots on pinion and gear Adjust and align mechanical components in accordance with 2.1. 3.12 3.13 Assemble equipment , using 2.1 for guidance. up binding in - Tighten loose controls and hardware. Free 3.13.1 moving parts, controls, switches, chassis slides, and runners. 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 16 FY - 1 9

124 3.13.2 Lubricate equipment in accordance with 2.1. - - 3.13.3 DTL - dissipating tube shields conforming to MIL Install heat 24251. Bond and ground equipment in accordance with 2.6 through 2.8. 3.14 equipment; calibrate, adjust, and align to achieve Energize the 3.15 optimum operational characteristics in accordance with 2.1. 3.16 Update field change accomplished plate to indicate completed field changes when the Work Item directs the installation of new field change s. 4. NOTES: 4.1 Equipment technical manual will be listed in the invoking Work Item. Shipboard Electromagnetic Compatibility Improvement Program (SEMCIP) 4.2 Technical Assist Network (STAN) referred to in 3.1.4 is available at . ps://www.nde.navy.mil htt 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 16 FY - 1 9

125 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - 1 9 FY ITEM NO: 009 - 17 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Rotating Electrical Equipment; repair 2. REFERENCES: Standard Items 2.1 2.2 Equipment Technical Manual - S9086 - KC - STM 2.3 010/CH - 300, Electric Plant - General /CH 010 - 2.4 STM - KE - S9086 302, Electric Motors and Controllers - KN 2.5 S9086 - - STM - 010/CH - 310, Electric Power Generators and Conversion Equipment STM - HN - S9086 2.6 244, Propulsion Bearings and Seals - 010/CH - Electrical Machinery Repair, Electric Motor, Shop - GTP - BJ 010, S6260 2.7 - Procedures Manual 2.8 S9310 - - HBK - 010, Commutator/Slip Ring Maintenance Handbook AC - MIL - STD 2.9 1310, Shipboard Bonding, Grounding, and Other Techniques for Electromagnetic Compatibility , Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) Mitigation, and Safety - 2.10 S9086 010/CH 100, Hull Structures - - STM - DA DTL - MOTORS, ALTERNATING CURRENT, INTEGRAL 17060, - - 2.11 MIL HORSEPOWER, SHIPBOARD USE REQUIREMENTS: 3. 3.1 Accomplish preliminary repair preparations as follows: Prior to disconnecting equipment: 3.1.1 electrical hook up data. - Record and retain 3.1.1.1 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 of 17 1 1 9 - FY

126 Inspect couplings for cracks, broken segments, wear, 3.1.1.2 and misalignment in excess of tolerances specified in 2.2. Record and retain air gap readings. Record and retain bearing clearances for sleeve bearing equipment only. 3.1.2 Identify associated cables and wiring. Disconnect equipment mechanically, using 2.2 for guidance. 3.1.2.1 Matchmark, identify, and retain chocks, shims, shock mounts, sound damping pads, and other accessories associated with equipment. Record shaft thrust and run out readings. 3.1.2.2 3.2 Remove equipment including rotating components connec ted directly to the shaft. 3.2.1 Remove entire vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan assemblies from the duct system and transport to the shop for repair. 3.3 Accomplish a structural inspection of each foundation in accordance with 2.10. , of a Submit one legible copy, in 3.4 approved transferrable media report for electrical hook up data recorded in 3.1.1.1, mechanical inspection required by 3.1.1.2 through 3.1.2.2, and structural inspection required in . upon request 3.3 to the SUPERVISOR 3.5 Matchmark, disassemble, and inspect the equipment removed in 3.2, using 2.2 through 2.7 for guidance. 3.5.1 Inspect and dimensionally measure end bells, frame, rabbet fits, shaft, sleeve and pedestal bearings, keyways, f an and running surfaces for wear, eccentricity, and other defects, using 2.2 for accept or reject criteria, and 2.6 for location and type of measurements to be taken. Record data. volt megger insulation resistance test, using 3.6 Accomplish 500 - Paragrap - 3.4.11, and 300 - 3.4.8, 300 hs 300 - 3.2.3, 300 - 3.2.2 through 300 - 5.3.7.1 of 2.3 for guidance. Record data. 3.6.1 - Disconnect solid state devices and ground temperature - sensing leads prior to measuring insulation resistance of windings. Accomplish a of windings, using a phase resistance balance test 3.7 Wheatstone or Kelvin bridge, or with an ohmmeter capable of resolving one phase equipment, using - ohm). Record phase balance for multi milliohm (0.001 of 2.7 5.21 11 Paragraph for guidance. Record data. and 3.6.1 of 2. Accomplish a voltage surge test in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 3.8 3.5.5 of 2.3. Record data. 3.5.4 through 300 - 2 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

127 Accomplish a DC HI POT test in accordance with Paragraph 300 - 3.5.2 3.9 through 300 - 3.5.2.3.4 of 2.3. Record data. 3.10 Accomplish a Polarization Index Test in accordance with Paragraph 300 - 3.4.12 of 2.3. Record data. 3.11 Measure resistance value of each winding temperature detector, heater, and heater strip using low voltage ohmmeter. Record data. gible copy, in 3.12 Submit one le , of a approved transferrable media report listing results of the requirements of 3.5 through 3.11 to the upon request . SUPERVISOR 3.13 - Clean the equipment and windings in accordance with Paragraphs 300 4.5.1 through 300 - 4.5.5 of 2.3. 3.13.1 Dry the equipment by placing it in an oven in accordance with Paragraph 300 - 5.3.2.3 of 2.3. | 3.14 volt - Allow to cool to ambient temperature and accomplish a 500 - 3.2.2 through 300 - megger insulation resistance test, using Paragraphs 300 3.4.8, 300 3.2.3, 300 Record - 3.4.11, and 300 - 5.3.7.1 of 2.3 for guidance. - data. - 3.15 Accomplish a DC HI POT test in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 3.5.2.3.4 of 2.3. Record data. 3.5.2.3 through 300 3.16 Repeat cleaning, drying, and testing in 3.13 thr ough 3.15 if DC HI POT test readings are questionable, or if insulation resistance readings minimum of 500 Meg Ohms for motors with a VPI Sealed Insulation System) are ( not in accordance with the following: DC generators and motors (except propul 3.16.1 sion and auxiliary - generators for submarines) including exciters, Table 300 of 2.3. 6 - 3 3.16.2 DC propulsion generators and motors and DC auxiliary of 2.3. - generato rs for submarines, Table 300 - 3 7 AC generators and motors othe 3.16.3 r than propulsion , Table 300 - 3 - 8 of 2.3. AC propulsion gene rators and motors, Table 300 - 3 - 9 3.16.4 of 2.3. 3.17 If satisfactory readings are not obtained after the second cleaning, repeat 3.13 through 3.15. 3.18 Notify the SUPERVISOR if satisfactory readings are not obtained after a third cleaning. of windings, using a 3.19 Accomplish a phase resistance balance test Wheatstone or Kelvin bridge, or with an ohmmeter capable of resolving one 3 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

128 ohm). Record phase balance for multi - phase equipment, using milliohm (0.001 for guidance. Record data. Paragraph 5.22 of 2.7 and 3.6.1 of 2. 11 3.20 Accomplish a voltage surge test in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 3.5.4 through 300 - 3.5.5 of 2.3. Record data. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a 3.21 report listing results of the requirements of 3.14 through 3.17, 3.19 and 3.20 to the SUPERVISOR upon request. 3.21.1 Include test results from 3.14 through 3.17, 3.19 and 3.20. 3.22 Protect the windings and machined surfaces. Accomplishment of ning and painting requirements for equipment housing exterior, including clea fan(s) and interior and exterior of end bell shall be in accordance with each NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.9). wound rotors for loose or cracked bars, - Inspect and test non 23 3. localized overheating, and rubbing in accordance with 2.7. Inspect wound rotors, slip ring leads, and armatures for insulation damage and burns/hot spots. Inspect for loose coils and slot wedges. Inspect slip rings and commutators for damage and for we ar limits, using 2.2 for criteria. Record data. 3. 24 Inspect brush rigging for cracks, chips, worn areas, distortion, spring condition, and insulating material for cracks and arc paths. Record data. defects. Identify 3. 25 Inspect leads and terminal lugs for damage and and tag leads with aluminum wrap - around bands with metal stamped or embossed markings. Record data. 26 approved transferrable media , of a Submit one legible copy, in 3. 23 t o the 25 through 3. report listing results of the requirements of 3. . upon request SUPERVISOR (V) "VARNISH TEMPERATURE, VISCOSITY, AND GEL TIME TESTS" 3. 27 Select the proper insulating process based on winding insulation classifications and to meet state or local air pollution standards. 3. 27 .1 - Select varnish m ethods and material, using Paragraphs 300 4.5.8.2 of 2.3 for guidance. 4.5.8 through 300 - .1.1 27 3. Maintain the varnish in accordance with Paragraphs 4.5.8.3 through 300 - 4.5.8.3.3 of 2.3 and the varnish manufacturer's 300 - instructions. 3. Maintain a current revision of the varnish .1.2 27 manufacturer's instructions on storage, maintenance, and use of the type of varnish to be applied. 4 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

129 3. 27 .1.3 Maintain a record of varnish temperature, viscosity varnish, gel time tests. Tests must show varnish is and, for solventless within varnish manufacturer's recommendations and have been accomplished in the intervals specified by the varnish manufacturer. The record must also show that the varnish is being stored as recommende d by the varnish manufacturer. Delete the requirements of 3. 3. 27 .1.4 27 through 3. 27 .1.3 for motors with a VPI Sealed Insulation System. 3. 28 Varnish windings in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 4.5.8. 4 of 2.3 and the varnish manufacturer's instruction s. 3. .1 Do not immerse the leads. 28 3. 28 .2 Wipe surfaces that affect assembly, such as rabbet fits and mounting flanges, with a cloth moistened with a solvent after draining and before baking. through 3. 28 Delete the requirements of 3. .3 28 for motors .2 28 3. with a VPI Sealed Insulation System. off from the component locations described 29 Remove excess varnish run - 3. - .2, after baking. Apply a thin coat of air in 3. 28 dry varnish to metal surfaces exposed by the removal process in accordance with P - aragraph 300 4.5.8.5 and 300 - 4.5.8.6 of 2.3. 3. 29 .1 Delete the requirements of 3. 29 for motors with a VPI Sealed Insulation System. 3. 30 Repeat tests described in 3.14, 3.15, 3.19, and 3.20. for motors with a .1 VPI Sealed 30 Delete the requirements of 3. 3. 30 Insulation System. 3.3 1 Accomplish an AC HI POT test in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 3.5.3 through 300 - 3.5.3.2.9 of 2.3. Record data. 1 3.3 .1 Delete the requirements of 3.3 1 for motors with a VPI Sealed Insulation System. 3.3 2 Accomplish a 500 - volt megger insulation resistance test, using 3.4.8, 300 - - 3.2.3, 300 3.4.11, and 300 .3.7.1 Paragraphs 300 - 3.2.2 through 300 - - of 2.3 for guidance. Record data. for motors with a VPI Sealed .1 Delete the requirements of 3.3 2 2 3.3 Insulation System. 3 3.3 Measure resistance value of each winding temperature detector, using a low voltage ohmmeter. Record data. 5 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

130 4 , of a approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in 3.3 to the through 3.3 3 report listing results of the requirements of 3. 30 SUPERVISOR . upon request 5 True the commutator or collector rings. Eccentricity shall not 3.3 exceed the requirements of 2.8. Resurface or machine each individual collector ring to the same exact diameter to allow symmetrical brush holder to ring clearance spacing. Ensure metal shavings are not permitted to contaminate the rotor or stator assembly. 3.3 .1 Each cut shall not exceed 0.010 inch. Finish thickness shall 5 not be less than design wear toleranc e as shown in 2.2. 3.3 Undercut the mica between the commutator bars with the edge .2 5 of the mica not exceeding a depth of 5/64 inch below the bars. - 3.3 Chamfer the bar edges and remove rough surfaces in accordance 5 .3 of 2.8. 4.1.3 - 7 with Paragraph Burnish the commutator with a very fine commercial burnishing 3.3 5 .4 stone conforming to A - A - 58052. Polish collector rings to a mirror finish. 3.3 6 Accomplishment of the balancing requirement for each rotating assembly shall be in accordance with NAVS EA Standard Items (See Note 4.8). 3.3 7 Accomplish the following for the brush rigging: Disassemble the brush rigging. .1 3.3 7 Remove foreign matter. .2 7 3.3 - existing cadmium plated parts with zinc in accordance 3.3 7 .3 Replace with ASTM A 153 . Recondition threads of plated parts. .4 3.3 7 Assemble brush rigging. .5 7 3.3 3.3 8 Repair lightly scored areas of frame, end bells, and shaft by manual Visually inspect keyway methods. Recondition threads and fit key to keyway. chipped edges or high spots. Verify that fit for deformed, cracked or between key and key seat sides has a minimum clearance of 0.002 inch or - maximum interference of 0.0005 inch. High spots in keyway may be removed by y; instead, use machining or grinding. Do not unnecessarily repair any keywa a step key up to a maximum of 0.010 inch oversize and, where possible, include a radius in step. If key tightness cannot be corrected with a step machine worn/damaged keyways to recommended over sizes as follows: - - key, re - Maximum of 0.015 i nch oversize for a 1/8 inch key and increasing oversize inch increase in key size up to a - allowance of 0.010 inch for each 1/8 6 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

131 maximum of 0.075 inch. If key tightness cannot be corrected by keyway repair, replace part involved. 3.3 8 .1 Apply a thin coat of petrolatum to unpainted mating surfaces except for explosion proof motors, which shall have clean, dry mating - surfaces. Prepare and refinish equipment. Protect machine surfaces, windings, 3. 3 9 and nameplates from being painted or otherwise damaged. 3. 3 9 .1 Accomplishment of cleaning and painting requirements for housing, fan, and interior and exterior of each end bell shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.9). Accomplishment of cleaning and painting requirements for fo 3. 40 undations of equipment removed in 3.2 shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.9). 1 Accomplish the following on equipment having other than sleeve type - 3.4 bearings unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item, using 2.7 for guidance. .1 1 3.4 1 (utilizing Attachment A for .1.1 Except as indicated in 3.4 guidance) , install new bearings, seals, fittings, lock washers, and locknuts conforming to 2.2, using 2.6 and Chapter 6 of 2.7 for guidance. 3.4 1 .1.1 Install Type 111, Clas s 8 (double seal), bearings in motors meeting the criteria identified in Chapter 6 of 2.7. Only double seal bearings identified in Chapter 6 of 2.7 are acceptable for use. 3.4 fan motors not meeting For vaneaxial and tubeaxial .1.2 1 the criteria of Chapter 6 of 2.7, if not originally furnished or already accomplished during previous repair, install Type 111, Class 8 (double seal), bearings with a C3 (greater than normal) radial internal clearance in place of th e Type 111 bearing originally furnished. Install Type 120 bearings in vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan motors originally furnished with Type 120 bearings. 1 3.4 .1.3 Install new label plates with the inscription "DO seal bearings (Type 111, Class 8, or NOT LUBRICATE" on equipment using double Type 120). 3.4 - lubricable bearings 1 .1.4 For equipment converted from re to double seal bearings, install pipe plugs on all grease fills and drains. For equipment converted from lubricated bearings to 1 .1.5 3.4 uble seal bearings, submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable do media, of a report that reflects the change in the maintenance requirements . UPERVISOR to the S for the converted motor 7 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

132 3.4 1 .2 For equipment not using double seal bearings, lubricate bearings with grease conforming to DOD - G - 24508 as required in Paragraphs 244 - 1.7.7. 2 and 244 - 1.7.7.3 of 2.6. 3.4 2 Assemble the equipment disassembled in 3.5, using 2.2 through 2.7 for guidance. pair and .1 Do not use materials containing silicone in the re 3.4 2 assembly of equipment with commutator or collector rings. 3.4 2 .2 Install new gaskets on covers, inspection plates, and between the external connection box and the frame. Gaskets shall conform to MIL - PRF - specified in 2.2. 1149 unless otherwise Set brush holders not less than 1/16 3.4 2 .3 - inch or more than 1/8 - inch from commutator or collector rings unless otherwise specified in 2.2. 2 3.4 Set brush holders in electrical neutral plane and stagger .4 brushes for maximum cover age of the commutator, in accordance with Paragraph 300 4.7.7.1.10 of 2.3. - Center the brush holder over the collector rings. 2 3.4 .5 .5 2 3.4 .1 Ensure the brushes do not extend beyond the edge of the collector rings. Install new brushes in ac 3.4 2 .6 cordance with 2.2. Sand new brushes to fit curvature of th e commutator or collector rings in accordance with - Paragraph 6 3.5 through 6 - 3.5.4 of 2.8. .6 Brushes shall have a surface contact of 100 percent .1 2 3.4 and shall not be chipped, cracked, or broken. Remove sand, carbon, and other foreign matter .6 2 3.4 .2 resulting from fitting new brushes. 3.4 2 .7 Adjust spring tension of brushes in accordance with 2.2. 2 Adjust air gap as specified in 2.2, plus or minus 10 percent. 3.4 .8 Rota 3.4 2 .9 te shaft by hand a minimum of 3 revolutions. Rubbing or allowed. binding of rotating assembly shall not be Install label plates conforming to MIL - DTL - 15024 for those .10 2 3.4 to be missing or damaged. identified LOAD SHOP TEST" - (V) "NO load shop test of the motor for a minimum of - sh a no Accompli 3 3.4 - half hour. one 8 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

133 3.4 3 .1 Verify proper direction of rotation. 3.4 After one 3 .2 - half hour, record current and voltage in each phase, speed and bearing temperature rise measured on the equipment's exter ior near each bearing. , of 3.4 3 .3 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media upon request ta to the SUPERVISOR da the recorded . (V) "OPERATIONAL SHOP TEST (FOR VANEAXIAL/TUBEAXIAL FANS - ASSEMBLY COMPLETELY REASSEMBLED)" the vaneaxial With fan reassembled, accomplish an /tubeaxial 3.4 4 bearing and stator for one hour after temperatures stabilize operational test within one degree Celsius for 3 consecutive 15 - minute intervals. 4 .1 3.4 Verify proper direction of rotation. 3.4 .2 Record current, voltage, frame and bearing temperature rise 4 and speed at 15 minute intervals. - 3.4 4 .2.1 Bearing temperatures shall not exceed 180 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item or equipment nual. technical ma 3.4 4 .3 Measure and record hot insulation resistances of winding to ground immediately upon completion of the operational shop test, using a 500 - volt megger. 3. 4 5 Install equipment removed in 3.2. 3. 4 5 .1 Align equipment in accordance with 2.2. Measure and record facial and peripheral coupling data. 5 .1 Install chocks, shims, shock mounts, and sound .1 4 3. damping pads. 3. 4 5 .1 .2 Accomplishment of pump and driver shaf t alignment shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.10). 3. 4 5 .2 Connect electrical cables to equipment, using data retained in 3.1.1.1. 3. 4 5 .3 Bond and ground equipment in accordance with 2.9, using new ground straps. .4 4 5 Rotate shaft by hand a minimum of 3 revolutions. Rubbing or 3. binding of rotating assembly be allowed. shall not .5 5 4 3. Measure and record the air gap and bearing clearance (sleeve bearing equipment only), insulation resistance (at 500 volts DC), and th rust. 9 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

134 46 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a 3. report listing results of the requirements of 3.5.1, 3.6 through 3.11, 3.14, 3.15, 3.19 through 3.21, 3.23 through 3.25, 3.31 through 3.33 and 3.45.1 to the SUPERVISOR. (V)(G) "OPERATIONAL TEST" 3. 4 7 (For continuous duty motors) Accomplish an operational test of the assembled equipment at full system capacity for one hour after bearing and stator temperatures stabilize within one degree Celsius for 3 consecutive 15 - minute intervals , unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item. When temperatures do not stabilize in four hours, stop test and contact the SUPERVISOR. 3. Verify proper direction of rotation. 4 7 .1 3. 4 7 .2 Verify/establish oxide film coating of the commutator/ collector rings, using 2.8 for guidance 7 3. 4 .3 Record current, voltage, frame and bearing temperature rise, and speed at 15 - minute intervals. Frame and bearing temperature rise and speed is not required for vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan assemblies. Bearing temperatures shall not exceed 180 degrees 3. 4 7 .3.1 Fahrenheit, unless other tem or equipment wise specified in the invoking Work I technical manual. 7 4 3. insulation resistances of windings to Measure and record hot .4 ground immediately upon completion of test, using a 500 - volt megger. 3.4 (For two speed motors) Accomplish an operational test at low speed 8 in accordance with 3.46. Repeat 3.4 7 for high speed. 3.4 8 .1 he requirements of 3.4 7 .1 through 3.4 7 .4. Accomplish t (For limited duty motors) 7 the requirements of 3.4 for a 3.4 9 Accomplish period of time equal to the duty cycle of the motor. 3.4 9 .1 7 Accomplish the req uirements of 3.46.1 through 3.4 .4. For motors with a duty cycle equal to or less than 30 minutes, record data every 10 minutes. 3. 50 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable .5 , 3. , 4 5 media , of a report listing data recorded in 3.4 4 .2, 3.4 4 .3, 3. 4 5 .1 7 4 .4 to the SUPERVISOR. 3. 7 4 .3, and 3. NOTES: 4. 4.1 Equipment technical manual , Allowance Parts List (APL) (if and drawings will be listed in the invoking Work Item. applicable) 10 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

135 4.2 Shop test of generator will be addressed in the invoking Work Item. 4.3 The use of silicone is not allowed on any rotating electrical machinery containing brushes. 2 .1, 7 4.4 The purpose of 3.13.2, 3.16, 3. 30 .1, 3. .1.4, 3. 2 8 .3, 3. 2 9 3 3. 3 1 .1, and 3. 2 .1 is to ensure the integrity of motors with a VPI Sealed Insulation System. r determination if the Navy’s motor bearing Utilize Attachment A fo 4.5 conversion program for Extended Life Double Seal (ELDS) ball bearings is - permissible). 4.6 B - MIL 17931 (Bearings, Ball, Annular, for Quiet Operation) bearings - are considered to be Long Lead Time (LLT) material. It is recommended these bearings be provided as Government Furnished Material (GFM). for the SUPERVISOR used by the 4.7 Data received in 3. 4 1 .1.5 shall be purpose of initiating action ensuring shipboard databases such as the Equipment Guidance List (EGL) are updated to reflect the change in maintenance o requirements for converted motors. Additi nally, where APL changes are initiated to convert to ELD S bearings, a COSAL feedback report shall be submitted, providing the NSN and part number for the ELDS bearing by the . SUPERVISOR Utilize the following website to initiate changes to Technical Manuals, APLs, etc.: . http://www.navy311.navy.mil If balancing of rotating equipment of 3.36 is required; the use of 4.8 - of 2.1 15 “Rotating Machinery; balance” will be Category II Standard Item 009 specified in the Work Item. 4.9 cleaning and painting of 3.22, 3.39.1, If or 3.40 is required, the tem 009 I use of Category II Standard 32 “Cleaning and Painting Requirements; - will be specified in the Work Item. of 2.1 accomplish” .2 is required, the use driver shaft alignment of 3.45.1 4.10 If pump and of Category II Standard Item 009 58 “Pump and Driver Shaft Alignment; - will be specified in the Work Item. of 2.1 accomplish” 11 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

136 ATTACHMENT A 1. To reduce motor maintenance and repair costs, the NAVY has implemented a ows for the use of Extended Life Double Seal (ELDS) bearings. program that all 2. LIMITATIONS: The ELDS program does NOT apply to motors that are under the cognizance of NAVSEA 08. 3. APLs for motors meeting the conversion criteria requirements have been ntify ELDS bearings. In these cases, the APL bearing criteria modified to ide will override any specifications delineated in the equipment technical manual or the motor "Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)" drawings. If ELDS lowing motor criteria must meet bearings are not indicated in an APL, the fol the applicability specifications for motors to undergo conversion to ELDS bearings: 3.a Motor must be installed on a surface ship and must NOT be under the cognizance of NAVSEA 08. 3.b Commercial motors are not eligible. Motors must have been 17060 (Motors, Alternating DTL - furnished to the NAVY in accordance with MIL - Current, Integral Horsepower, Shipboard use), MIL 17413 (Motors, Direct - M - Current, Integral H.P., Naval Shipboard [NAVY] - M - 17059 (Motors, 60 ) or MIL Cycle, Alternating Current Fractional H.P. [Shipboard Use]). 3.c Motors using one or more noise 17931 - B - quiet bearings per MIL - (Bearings, Ball, Annular, For Quiet Operation) are NOT eligible for ELDS conversion. T ype 111 originally furnished with the motor must be 3.d Bearings - B - bearings per FF 171. Motors are NOT to be considered as candidates for ELDS conversion in situations where the equipment technical manual and/or the OEM rings but have notes 171 bea - B - motor drawings originally specified FF 17931 indicating that replacement bearings are to be in accordance with MIL - B - (Bearings, Ball, Annular, For Quiet Operation). 3.e The use of ELDS bearings is limited to motors where the full load e as follows: speed and the size of both bearings ar 1. Maximum bearing size 306 or 206 and full load rpm between 1,801 and 3,600 rpm. 2. Maximum bearing size 313 or 213 and full load rpm between 1,201 and 1,800 rpm. 3. Maximum bearing size 318 or 218 and ful l load rpm less than 1200 rpm. 4. The repair process using ELDS bearings includes the following : requirements 4.a Only ELDS bearings, in accordance with the following table (Attachment A / Table 1), can be used. Other double seal bearings will not e an acceptable bearing life. provid 12 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

137 Attachment A / Table 1 ELDS Bearings NSNs and Part Numbers P/N NSN SIZE 201 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 492 - 0221 6201 6202 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 491 - 0233 202 01 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6203 - 491 - 0234 203 3110 6204 - 2RS1C3/GHY - 01 - 491 - 6636 204 205 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9166 6205 01 206 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6206 - 451 - 9165 207 6207 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9164 - 208 6208 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 01 - 451 - 9170 209 6209 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9252 492 1831 210 6210 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - - 211 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 518 - 0937 6211 01 303 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6303 - 493 - 3750 304 6304 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9153 01 305 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6305 - 451 - 9158 6306 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9159 306 2RS1C3/GHY 607 6307 - 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9161 308 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9167 6308 01 309 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6309 - 451 - 9168 310 6310 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 490 - 6683 - 311 6311 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 01 - 492 - 0223 - 6848 312 6312 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 490 0191 - 492 - 01 - 3110 2RS1C3/GHY - 6313 313 13 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

138 - 6314 - 2RS1C3GHY 3110 01 - 492 - 0226 314 - 315 6315 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 494 0993 316 2RS1C3/GHY 0188 - 492 - 01 - 3110 - 6316 3110 2RS1C3/GHY 317 6317 - - 01 - 492 - 0219 01 - 3749 - 493 - 3110 2RS1C3/GHY - 6318 318 4.b Both bearings of each converted motor must be ELDS bearings. A label plate must be permanently attached to the motor indicating 4.c "Do Not Lubricate". 4.d Grease fills and drains, if present, must be fitted with a pipe plug, securely fastened. Fittings to accommodate grease guns must be replaced with pipe plugs." 14 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 17 FY - 1 9

139 ATTACHMENT B SECTION 1. NAME PLATE DATA EQUIPMENT USS TYPE FRAME MFGR HP INSULATION CLASS *C/*F TEMP. RISE VOLTS AMPS CYO R/M PHASE ADDITOINAL DATA SERIAL NO. SECTION 2. INPLACE INSPECTION CAUTION: OBSERVE APLICABLE SAFETY PROCEDURES SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY __________ - 2) __________ INSULATION RESISTANCE IN MEGOHMS (REFER TO TABLE 3 POLARIZATION INDEX TEST 1 MIN 10 MIN RATIO 6) - MECHANICAL CONDITION (REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3 CONTINUITY OF WINDINGS (REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3 - 5.1) CURRENT BACLANCE (USE LIMITS PRESCRIBED IN PARAGRAPH 3 - 10) CONDITION OF BRUSHED AND COMMUTATOR CONDITION OF CABLES AND CONTROLLER TO MOTOR CONDITION OF CONTROLLER SECTION 3. INCOMING INSPECTION (GENERAL) 1 2 SURGE TEST - SAT/UNSAT 2 - 3 SAT/UNSAT - 3 1 SAT/UNSAT INSULATION RESISTANCE TO GROUND MEGOHMS RESISTANCE BALANCE - 2 1 OHMS WITH DIGITAL OHMETER 2 - 3 OHMS 3 OHMS 1 - ACTION REWIND RECONDITION 15 of 17 17 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

140 ATTACHMENT B SECTION 4. RECONDITIONING STEPS OF: AFTER DRYING CLEANING INSULATION RESISTANCE (MEGOHMS) PHASE RESISTANCE BALANCE TEST SURGE TEST (SAT/UNSAT) DC HIGH - POTENTIAL TEST ACTION REWIND VARNISH SECTION 5. AFTER RECONDITIONAING OR REWINDING AND VARNISHING MEGOHMS INSULATION RESISTANCE 1 RATIO 10 POLARIZATION INDEX MIN MIN TEST - 1 OHMS 2 RESISTANCE BALANCE WITH 2 - 3 OHMS DIGITAL OHMMETER 1 - 3 OHMS SAT/UNSAT SURGE TEST SAT/UNSAT AC HIGH - POTENTIAL TEST MEGOHMS INSULATION RESISTANCE AFTER AC POTENTIAL TEST HIGH - AMPERES PHASE NO - LOAD TEST A PHASE AMPERES B AMPERES PHASE C 16 of 17 17 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

141 ATTACHMENT C SHIPNAME & HULL NUMBER DATE MONTH/DAY/YEAR MOTOR LOCATION (I.E., NO.2 MAIN FEED PUMP, ETC.) HOUSING DIAMETERS DRIVE END B C A 1 2 3 OUTER END C B A 1 2 3 SHAFT DIAMETERS* OUTER END DRIVE END A B C A B C 1 2 3 FOR BEARING JOURNAL WIDTH LESS THAN 1 INCH ONLY SIX READINGS ARE REQUIRED. SHAFT RADIAL RUNOUT A FACE RUNOUT, BEARING INNER RING B DRIVE END OUTER END C FACE RUNOUT, BEARING OUTER RING DRIVE END OUTER END MECHANICAL CONDITION (LOSS OF LUBE, BURNED ETC.) - 17 009 ITEM NO: 17 of 17 19 FY -

142 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 18 DATE: 07 MAR 201 7 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Magnetic Material; control 2. REFERENCES: - 2.1 801 5844249, Location of Magnetic Material MCM - 1 2.2 2 - 5977033, Location of Magnetic Material MCM - 800 - 6134737, Location of Magnetic Material MCM - 801 2.3 3 - 2.4 800 6135526, Location of Magnetic Material MCM - 4 5 2. 801 - 6356761, Location of Magnetic Ma terial MCM - 6 7 - 6787960, Location of Magnetic Material MCM 2. 6 800 - 7 2. 6356761, Location of Magnetic Material MCM 8 - - 801 801 2. 8 - 6645302, Location of Magnetic Material MCM - 9 thru 14 7048237, IF Engine Emergency Cutout Valve - 524 9 2. 2.1 010/CH - 075, Fasteners M - 0 S9086 - CJ - ST 6644926, Insulation and Lagging Schedule, Pipe and Machinery 508 1 2.1 - REQUIREMENTS: 3. Provide and implement a procedure for maintaining a maximum 3.1 material permeability factor of 2.0 on board mine warfare ships and craft for and equipment installed, repaired, or relocated during the accomplishment of work required by the Job Order. The procedure shall have been reviewed and accepted by the SUPERVISOR prior to the implementation. time submittal/acceptance unless - The procedure requires a one 3.1.1 Standard Items and/or references change or are updated. 1 of 6 18 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

143 3.1.2 Describe a receipt inspection system to verify Government, contractor, and subcontractor furnished material is in compliance with the permeability limits. Describe controls used in fabrication work to ensure 3.1.3 compliance with the permeability limits after fabrication. Describe the method used to determine magnetic content of 3.1.4 materials removed from or brought on board the ship or craft including monitoring station locations. 3.1.5 Identify type of instrumentation, conforming to Method 3 of ASTM A 342, used to measure the magnetic permeability of material. 3.1.6 Describe the record and reporting system utilized to list determined to have exceeded the permeability factor material required, but 2.0 after fabrication and the maximum dimension of the part exceeds 2 inches or the maximum dimension of all parts having a similar function in a 30 foot section of the ship exceeds 60 inches. This list shall include material and The record and equipment removed, repaired, installed, or relocated. reporting system shall contain description, magnetic dimensions, approximate weight, location installed on board ship or craft, and a record verifying item is contained in the current Location of Magnetic Material that the electronic database, a new database entry made for previously NAVSEA - approved items missing an entry or both a new entry made and waiver granted for new 8 items or substitutions. Use 2.1 thru 2. as applicable, and the electronic database to determine if the 60 inches in 30 foot rule above is met. permeability of items at or below 2.0, including e or reduc aintain M 3.2 proposing alternative materials for existing designs to the SUPERVISOR . Where alternatives are not possible or practical, submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a report in the format of Attachment A , to document repaired or replaced items in excess of the magnetic material control limit of 3 .1.6. E nsure the part number, permeability range and , magnitude and location match component material and design . Equipment which is magnetic and not currently authorized by applicable NAVSEA drawing or manual (i.e., substitution or new item) a nical tech dditionally requires evaluation and acceptance by the SUPERVISOR prior to installation. Verify the following attributes on all reinstalled magnetic 3.3 material, whether current design or not, to minimize in accordance with magnetic signature. 3.3.1 Vendor or stock number matches or crosses to NAVSEA document, if per current design. Magnetic field location is limited to areas appropriate to the 3.3.2 solenoids). component (e.g., 2 of 6 18 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

144 3.3.3 Magnetic permeability is appropriate for the specified material. Measured permeability will be affected by material, geometry, location temperature and degree of magnetization. 3.3.4 400 Series Monel and 304 CRES can be weakly magnetized by machining or welding ; permeability must be less than 5 in accordan ce with Note 3.07 of 2. 9 . Material Upgrades: Technical documentation may be used in lieu 3.3.5 for items that could become magnetic even if of surveys for identification not when installed. 3.3.5.1 U pgrade low energy, non - safety critical system fast eners which are magnetic or potentially so, such as carbon steel, 304 CRES and 400 Series Monel to 500 Series Monel or 316L CRES as appropriate for the working environment . Replacement fasteners must be of identical thread size, type, shape and fit. .3.5.2 3 approved transferrable in , one legible copy Submit media of a list of all proposed replacement fasteners with costs and sizes , to the SUPERVISOR for approval prior to procurement . 3.3.5.3 Upgrade mechanical wire which is magnetic or potentially so, such as carbon steel wire used for lagging pad installation in accordance with 2.1 0 , to 500 Series Monel or 316L CRES lockwire in accordance with P ara graph 5.5.1 of 2.1 1 . Replacement wire must be of equivalent size. 3.3.5.4 L CRES as appropriate 6 Monel or 31 Select 500 Series for the working environment for items with material not specified in NAVSEA documentation, such as the lagging pad hooks and washers of 2.1 1 . 3.3.5.5 critical load bearing hardware which is Upgrade non - magnetic or pote ntially magnetic, such as carbon steel, 304 CRES and 400 Series Monel hinges, hasps, latches, chair swivels, corner reinforcements, etc., to 500 Series Monel or 316L CRES as appropriate for the working environment. 3.3.5.6 hich are magnetic or Upgrade electrical fittings w potentially magnetic, such as carbon steel, 304 CRES and 400 Series Monel stuffing tube packing nuts, cover plates, knockout plugs, etc., to 500 Series Monel, 316L CRES or Underwriter’s Laboratory fire rated nylon or plastic as iate for the working environment. appropr 6 media, of a . 3 3. approved transferrable Submit one legible copy, in report furnishing documentation provided by supplier, as required by 3.1.6. 4. NOTES: The magnetic field of mine warfare ships and craft consists of the 4.1 superposition of the magnetic field from 4 basic sources: ferrous field, 3 of 6 18 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

145 eddy current field, ship service stray field, and minesweep generator stray electric currents in cables and wiring field. The stray field sources are the associated with the operation of the equipment of the ship or craft. The ferrous field and eddy current field sources are as follows: Ferrous Field Source: The ferrous field sources are the items 4.1.1 of the ship or craft which use a material in their construction on or part that exhibits a relative magnetic permeability different than 1.0, the relative magnetic permeability of air. Each ferrous field source acts like a on the material's relative magnetic bar magnet whose magnetic field depends up permeability, volume (not mass), and shape of the earth's magnetic field. At a point or location external to a ferrous field source, the magnetic field of this source is essentially the same whether the source is hollow (such as a block or pedestal). A material whose relative magnetic permeability is 2.0 or less is arbitrarily defined to be nonmagnetic when used in conjunction with mine warfare ships and craft; otherwise, the material is said to be magnetic. Whether the material of an item is classified magnetic or nonmagnetic, according to the above arbitrary definition, a change in relative magnetic permeability of the material will, in general, result in a change in the magnetic field associated with this item. Eddy Current Field Source: The eddy current field sources are .2 4.1 the items on or part of the ship or craft which use a material in their construction that exhibits an electrical conductivity. A material whose electrical conductivity is less than 10.0 per cent of the electrical 5 5.8 x 10^ /cm at 20 degrees Centigrade) is arbitrarily conductivity of copper ( defined to be nonconductive when used in conjunction with mine warfare ships and craft; otherwise, the material is said to be electrically conductive. Ea ch eddy current field source acts like a generator when it oscillates in the earth's magnetic field due to the rolling and pitching of the ship or craft. The current in this source, resulting from the generator action, has associated with it a magnetic fi an eddy current field. The magnitude eld - of this field is dependent upon the conductivity of the material, the size of - the electrical path in the material, the cross sectional area of the electrical path, and the orientation of the source with respect to the earth's magnetic field due to the rolling and pitching of the ship or craft. 4.1.3 If an item is both highly magnetic and electrically conductive, such as mild steel or steel, the ferrous field will mask out the eddy current field. If an electri cally conductive item is located inside a highly magnetic enclosure, such as mild steel or steel, the enclosure will mask the magnetic effects of its contents and will appear as if it were a solid magnetic block. 4.2 The SUPERVISOR will provide written d irection for accomplishment of one of the following prior to reinstallation of temporarily removed existing or new material/equipment as a result of the deviation request. Authorization for deviation request. 4.2.1 4 of 6 18 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

146 4.2.2 Identification and authorizat ion of an acceptable Contractor Furnished Material (CFM) substitute material or equipment. Receipt of an acceptable Government Furnished Material (GFM) 4.2.3 substitute material or equipment. 4.2.4 Technical direction and information for manufacturin g of acceptable material or equipment. 4.2.5 Other direction as determined acceptable by the ship class planning yard or higher authority. 5 of 6 18 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

147 ATTACHMENT A Authorizing Location Description Data Recorder per plan Data Frame # Port or Starboard PN MCM-xx NSN Date Installed/Noted Magnetic Component Permeability Range System/ESWBS Compartment # Comments Document(s) Size of Magnetic Portion Material (YES/NO) (distance from reference point) Name Recorder Shipbuilding Work (tech manual, DWG) Item # Company Specialist IDR # ITEM NO: 009-18 6 of 6 FY-17

148 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 19 5 JUL 201 30 DATE: I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE: Title: Provisioning Technical Documentation (PTD); provide 1.1 REFERENCES: 2. Manual, Provisioning, Allowance, 1500, Policies and Procedures - 9090 2.1 and Fitting Out Support (PAFOS), Chapter 4, Provisioning 2.2 Interactive Computer Aided Provisioning System (ICAPS) 3. REQUIREMENTS: 3.1 Provide Provisioning Technical Documentation (PTD) in accordance with 2.1, for all new and/or modified Contractor Furnished (CF), Allowance Parts List (APL) worthy, Hull, Mechanical, and Electrical (HM&E) and/or Electronics components. PTD shall include a Provisioning Parts List (PPL) and Engineering Data for Provisioning (EDFP). 3.1.1 P PL shall identify each part subject to failure/replacement, or required for maintenance of the component, and shall include the following 0007 - STD - Data Product Deliverables (DPDs): SAE GEIA 3.1.1.1 Provisioning Contract Control Number (PCCN) 3.1.1. 2 Provisioning List Item Sequence Number (PLISN) 3.1.1.3 electronic components Indenture Code for non - 3.1.1.4 Reference Designation for electronic components Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code 3.1.1.5 Reference Number 3.1.1.6 Item Name 3.1.1.7 3.1.1.8 Quantity Per Assembly (QPA) Quantity Per End Item (QPEI) 3.1.1.9 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 19 FY - 1 9

149 3.1.1.10 Unit of Issue (UI) 3.1.1.11 Unit of Issue Price (UI Price) 3.1.1.12 Component Identification Data (CID): Enter all available data 3.1.2 Ship Level Provisioning Parts List (SLPPL) shall include items determined not to be APL worthy in accordance with Appendix G of 2.1, and shall include the SAE GEIA - STD - 0007 DPDs identified in 3.1.1. 3.1.3 Statements of Prior Su bmission (SPS) shall be submitted in lieu of PTD, whenever PTD that meets the requirements of the contract has previously been furnished to the Government. An SPS certifies that all replacement parts are identical to those provided by the previously furni shed PTD. The SPS shall apply to the end item or to any component thereof and shall include: 3.1.3.1 End item part number Manufacturer's CAGE 3.1.3.2 Manufacturer's drawing number and revision 3.1.3.3 3.1.3.4 RIC (APL number) 3.1.3.5 C ertification statement certifying that all replacement parts are identical to those identified by the APL or previously furnished PTD 3.1.4 If there are any changes to replacement parts, a PTD package (PPL and EDFP) that identifies t he changes shall be submitted in lieu of an SPS. 3.2 An EDFP shall be provided with each PPL and SLPPL submittal. EDFP shall be marked with Distribution Statements in accordance with DoD Directive 5230.24. 3.3 Furnished Material (CFM) report and a copy of Provide a Contractor the Purchase Order and receipt document for each procurement of equipment or components for which PTD or SPS is required. The report shall include : 3.3.1 Contract number 3.3.2 Contractor's purchase order number 3.3.3 Description of material Quantity ordered 3.3.4 Date scheduled to be ordered 3.3.5 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 19 FY - 1 9

150 3.3.6 Date ordered 3.3.7 Date required to meet production schedule 3.3.8 Proposed receipt date 3.3.9 A summary listing any problem areas 3.3.10 Date submitted to SUPERVISOR 3.3.11 Alteration number 3.3.12 Drawing and piece number Manufacturer 3.3.13 Manufacturer's part number 3.3.14 3.3.15 Date received Work Item number 3.3.16 , of approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in 17 3.3. no later than 30 days after the Job Order the CFM report to the SUPERVISOR award, every 14 days up to availability start date, within 10 days after availability start date, then monthly thereafter to End of Availability (EOA) . 3.4 Submit data for PPLs and SLPPLs via 2.2, or in accordance with the ICAPS compatible format identif ied in Appendix K of 2.1. Submit SPSs in approved transferrable media (spreadsheet or document) within 20 days after of the contractor's component or equipment. the installation Submit PTD via the SUPERVISOR to: 3.4.1 SSES NSWCCD - 1 Attn: Code 945 5001 S. Broad St. Philadelphia, PA 19112 - 5083 mail: [email protected] - E NOTES: 4. acquired for EDFP is required for all systems or equipment that are 4.1 Navy use and for which PTD is being acquired. EDFP is the data acquired to support Line Material Item supportability analysis. It is the technical data that provides definitive identification of dimensional, material, mechanical, electrical , or other characteristics adequate for provisioning of the support items of the end article(s) on contract. EDFP consists of but is not limited to data such as specifications, standards, drawings, photographs, sketches 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 19 FY - 1 9

151 assembly and general arrangement and descriptions, and the necessary drawings, schematics, drawings, schematic diagrams, wiring and cable diagrams, etc. This data is necessary for the assignment of Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability (SMR) codes to assignment of Item Management prevention of proliferation of identical items in the Government Codes, inventory, maintenance decisions, and item identification necessary in the assignment of a National Stock Number (NSN). 2.1 is available at: 4.2 pafos.nsf http://www.nslc.navsea.navy.mil/nslcprod/ 4.3 2.2 is available for download from: nedcchrgw.dc3n.navy.mil https:// 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 19 FY - 1 9

152 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 20 01 OCT 2017 DATE: I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Government Property; control REFERENCES: 2. 2.1 Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) Part 45, Government Property 2.2 Defense FAR Supplement (DFARS) Part 245, Government Property - Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.245 2.3 1, Government Property REQUIREMENTS: 3. 3.1 property control system for government Provide and maintain a property in accordance with 2.1 and 2.2. The property control system shall include the following functional elements, modified by the additional requirements in the following paragraphs: Property Management 3.1.1 3.1.2 Acquisition 3.1.3 Receiving Identification 3.1.4 3.1.5 Records Movement 3.1.6 Storage 3.1.7 Physical Inventories 3.1.8 Reports 3.1.9 Consumption 3.1.10 3.1.11 Utilization 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 20 FY - 1 9

153 Maintenance 3.1.12 3.1.13 Subcontractor Control 3.1.14 Disposition out 3.1.15 Contract Property Close - 3.2 Provide for receipt of Government Furnished Property (GFP) as follows: 3.2.1 Submit the names and signatures of persons authorized to . receive and account for GFP to the SUPERVISOR 3.2.2 Inspect GFP immediately upon receipt for possible shipping damage. 3.2.2.1 Note any damage on carrier's copy of the Government Bill of Lading and notify the SUPERVISOR. 3.2.2.2 Forward one signed copy of the Shipping Document and one copy of the Bill of Lading to the ) (DD Form 1 or DD Form 1149 1 - 348 SUPERVISOR. 3.2.3 days of receipt to verify conformance 5 Inspect GFP within with description and requirements. media, of 3.2.4 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable a report within 2 days after inspection to the SUPERVISOR listing product quality deficiencies, including the following: 3.2.4.1 Date discovered National Stock Number (if applicable) 3.2.4.2 3.2.4.3 Nomenclature Manufacturer 3.2.4.4 Manufacturer's Part Number/Identification Number 3.2.4 .5 3.2.4.6 Contract Number Item condition (new or overhauled/repaired) 3.2.4.7 A specific description of the defect(s), listing 3.2.4.8 drawing or technical manual dimensions, required and actual 3.2.4.9 If material is defective due to mishandling, rust, or moisture 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 20 FY - 1 9

154 3.2.5 Notify the SUPERVISOR immediately upon discovery of loss, damage, destruction, or theft of Government property. 3.2.5.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of a report in accordance with 2.3 to the SUPERVISOR within 5 days of the discovery. Maintain records for GFP, containing the following information: 3.3 3.3.1 Ship's name and hull number 3.3.2 Job Order and Work Item numbers Date received 3.3.3 Shipping document or Bill of Lading number 3.3.4 3.3.5 Date issued 3.3.6 Unit price and quantity 3.4 Dispose of government property as follows: Return material purchased from the Government under the Cash 3.4.1 Sale (Bailment) procedure and not incorporated into the end product being procured under the contract, or consumed directly in the performance of such contract, to the Government at the contractor's expense in the same condition as received. Submit one l egible copy, in approved transferrable media, of 1) showing material returned for credit, to the - in document (DD 1348 - turn SUPERVISOR. 3.4.2 Process material permanently removed from the ship for serviceable or not, replacement, substitution, or elimination, whether including equipment units, parts, and items determined by the SUPERVISOR to be of value to the Government as follows. A written certification shall accompany the inventory schedule submitted to the SUPERVISOR for equipment n purged of fluorocarbon or halon materials. that has bee Inventory, identify, and tag or otherwise mark such 3.4.2.1 property. Identification shall include ship's name and hull number, Job Order and Work Item numbers, part number/stock number, and item descriptio n. Assemble equipment prior to delivery to the 3.4.2.2 Government except as specifically directed in the Work Item. 3.4.2.3 Remove valves or drill holes in empty gas cylinders prior to delivery to the Government. Remove the chemicals fr om firefighting bottles, 3.4.2.4 remove valves/stems, triple rinse the bottle, and stencil the bottle "Triple Rinsed". 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 20 FY - 1 9

155 3.4.2.5 Clean each item to be disposed of free of grease and/or substances considered to be hazardous in nature prior to delivery to the Gove rnment. 3.4.2.6 approved Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or media, of the inventory to the SUPERVISOR. The inventory shall transferrable be signed by the contractor's representative and submitted when directed by immediately following the completion of each the SUPERVISOR, or in any case, Job Order. Submit Final Termination of Inventory Report within 14 days after 3.5 completion of availability. 4. NOTES: 4.1 None. 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 20 FY - 1 9

156 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 ITEM NO: 21 - DATE: 01 OCT 2017 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Logistics and Technical Data; provide 2. REFERENCES: None. 2.1 3. REQUIREMENTS: 3.1 Complete Attachment A for all Government Furnished Material (GFM) and Contractor Furnished Material (CFM) equipment or components installed or permanently removed. This applies to all configuration changes, including alterations and repairs. Provide individual Attachment A forms for each piece of 3.1.1 equipment or component, including contractor submission and SUPERVISOR receipt signatures. approved 3.1.2 Submit data required by Attachment A, in transf errable media (spreadsheet or word processing document), to the SUPERVISOR no later than 5 days after installation or removal of GFM and CFM from shipboard system(s) equipment or components . 3.2 Submit all copies of technical manuals, Maintenance Index P ages (MIP), and Maintenance Requirements Cards (MRC) received with GFM and CFM equipment to the SUPERVISOR no later than 5 days after receipt of equipment. Data received in 3.2 required for installation and testing will be 3.3 provided to the contractor. 4. NOTES: The technical point of contact for the requirements contained in 4.1 . this NAVSEA Standard Item is the local Class Maintenance Team Logisti ci an 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 21 FY - 1 9

157 ATTACHMENT A EQUIPMENT/COMPONENT LOGISTICS AND TECHNICAL DATA NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 009 - 21 INSTALLED/RE MOV ED DATE: ALL DATA FIELDS ARE MANDATORY FILL. WRITE "NONE" WHERE NOT APPLICABLE. SHIP NAME: HULL: SPEC PKG. NO.: AUTHORITY (WORK ITEM): ACTION: RIC: SHIP CHANGE DOCUMENT (SCD)/SHIPALT NO: SERIAL NUMBER: ITEM UNIQUE IDENTIFIER (IUID)/UNIQUE ITEM IDENTIFIER (UII): VALVE MARK/ELECTRICAL SYMBOL NUMBER: LOCATION: SHIPBOARD QUANTITY: RIC NOMENCLATURE: TM(S) RECEIVED: PMS MIP/MRC'S RECEIVED: OBRP(S) RECEIVED: INSTALLATION DRAWING NO: RIC CHARACTERISTICS: - 1. MFR - 2. MFR DWG 3. MFR ID - 4. NSN - CIRCLE ONE: GFM or CFM COMMENTS: __________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ __________________ REPORTING CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________ PRINTED NAME: ______________________________________________________________ SIGNATURE: _________________________________________________________________ RECEIVING SUPERVISOR: ______________________________________________________ PRINTED NAME: ______________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________ SIGNATURE: ______________________ 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 21 FY - 1 9

158 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 23 OCT 2017 DATE: 01 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE: 1.1 Title: Interference ; remove and install REFERENCES: 2. 2.1 Standard Items 045 - - - 7010, Material Control Standard 2.2 0948 LP - 062 - - 0924 2.3 LP 0010, Submarine Safety (SUBSAFE) Requirements Manual 2. 4 S9086 - KC - STM - 010/CH - 300, Electric Plant - General 2. 5 NAVSEA OD32382, Grounding and Bonding Equipment Enclosures, Chassis and Cases, Design and Installation S9086 Piping Systems Shipboard 505, - 010/CH STM - - 2. 6 RK - REQUIREMENTS: 3. components from the following systems as Do not remove 3.1 interferences, except when the scope of work requires repairs to components of these systems or when specified in the Work Item: Main steam and catapult systems 3.1.1 operate at pressures Gaseous oxygen piping systems which 3.1.2 higher than 100 PSIG, liquid oxygen piping from oxygen plant to the liquid oxygen charging carts, and the overboard drain piping from the liquid oxygen storage plant and spillage drain Degaussing systems 3.1.3 es which cannot be removed without cutting Electric cabl 3.1.4 3.1.5 Hydraulic systems 3.1.6 High pressure air systems. High pressure air systems are 000 PSIG or greater. those systems designed for pressures of 1 , 1 of 6 23 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

159 3.1.7 Support systems (e.g.,SCBA Charging and Swimmer and Diver support and protection systems, this list is not all inclusive), which supply breathable air. 3.1.8 Cryogenic systems 3.1.9 Spring hangers Ship's strength members involving structural integrity 3.1.10 3.1.11 Halon systems 2 LEVEL I systems in accordance with 2. 3.1.12 Sonar dome pressurization system 3.1.13 Passive countermeasure materials 3.1.14 Ballistic plating 3.1.15 3.1.16 Waveguides 3.1.17 Collective Protection System (CPS) 3.1.18 MRG Lube oil piping SUBSAFE 3.1.1 9 For submarines and capable ships only, in addition to the systems identified above, SUBSAFE components/systems in accordance with 2. 3 For nuclear 3.1. 20 - powered ships only, in addition to the system s identified above, steam plant systems that carry steam, water, or gas and which introduce these fluids either directly or indirectly into the steam generators, including: 20 Main Steam .1 3.1. 20 3.1. .2 Steam Generating 3.1. 20 .3 Feed 3.1. 20 .4 Condensate 3.1. 20 .5 Auxiliary Steam/Reduced Pressure Steam 3.1. 20 .6 Auxiliary Exhaust Steam 3.1. .7 Gland Seal and Exhaust Steam 20 .8 20 3.1. Bleed Steam 2 of 6 23 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

160 3.1. 20 .9 High Pressure Drain 3.1. 20 .10 Reserve Feed (except for reserve feed day tanks in surface ships) 3.1. 20 .11 Fresh Water Drain/Low Pressure Drain/Turbine Drain Catapult Steam Drain (up to catapult fill/charging valves and associated high - pressure drain system) 20 3.1. .12 Catapult Trough Heating and Drain Systems 3.1. 20 .13 Main Steam Supply to reboiler and reboiler drains to Deaerating Feed Tank (DFT) the .14 Heating steam and condensate return piping to and 20 3.1. from distilling units and lithium bromide air conditioners n plant makeup water .15 Those portions of the propulsio 20 3.1. distribution system downstream of the distiller output or reverse osmosis outlet demineralizer used to supply water directly or indirectly to the steam plant .16 Nitrogen supply system used for sparging of aircraft 3.1. 20 eam generators carrier st .17 Reactor Plant Fresh Water System (RPFW), Propulsion 20 3.1. Plant Fresh Water System (PPFW), and Steam Generator Cooldown .18 Support systems (such as nitrogen systems, 20 3.1. eup systems), which hydrostatic test rigs, and temporary steam generator mak add water, steam, or gas directly or indirectly into steam generators .19 Any other systems or components governed by NAVSEA 3.1. 20 Instruction C 9210.4 3.2 approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in , of a report of c omponents of the systems listed in 3.1 that must be removed as i nterferences and the work is not required by the Work Item, to the S UPERVISOR. The report shall list the following information: 3.2.1 Identification of the item to be removed or disturbed: Location/Space 3.2.1.1 1.2 .2. 3 Item description (e.g., piping size, valve number, cable identification, gage number, etc) 3 .2. 1.3 System Necessity for the action 3.2. 2 3 of 6 23 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

161 3.2. 3 Protective measures which will be taken to protect equipment from damage or contamination 3.2. 4 Alignment procedures and details for tests that will be accomplished to verify acceptability after reinstallation 3.3 The SUPERVISOR will review and respond to the report required by 3.2 and if removal of the compone nts is approved, an appropriate change to the Work Item will be prepared. 3.4 Visually examine interferences prior to and during removal for previous damage and deterioration. , of 3.4.1 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media a report listing previously damaged and deteriorated interferences to the SUPERVISOR within 5 days after removal. 3.5 Material containing asbestos that requires removal as an interference shall not be reinstalled. 3.5.1 transferrable media , of Submit one legible copy, in approved a report listing location and system identification of asbestos removed and - non asbestos installed which has not been identified elsewhere in the Job Order, to the SUPERVISOR. 3.6 Remove interferences. 3.6.1 interferences from damage or loss and prevent Protect contamination of removed components and remaining parts of the system. 2 3.6. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media , of a report listing interferences removed to the SUPERVISOR within 5 days of removal. The report shall identify and include the following information for interference that was each disturbed: Location/Space .1 2 3.6. Item description (e.g., pi 3.6. .2 2 ping size, valve number, cable identification, gage number, etc) .3 2 3.6. System When energized components (e.g., lights, receptacles, 3.6. 3 sensors) greater than 30 volts are removed for interference and a path to orary ground shall be installed before the ground will no longer exist, a temp component is disconnected from its permanent ground connection. Verify - - ground connection exists and that it is securely fastened with metal metal to contact in accordance with 2. 4 . 3.6. Components will be 3 adequately secured to a permanent .1 structure so that there is no tension/stress on cable/energy source. 4 of 6 23 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

162 I nstall interferences removed in 3.6 . 3.7 Install interferences that were neither reported as 3.7.1 , nor rendered unsuitable for previously damaged or deteriorated reinstallation during removal. 3.7.2 Install interferences reported in 3.4.1 in the as - found condition or after authorized repairs have been accomplished. 3.7.3 endered unsuitable Install new material in place of material r for reinstallation during removal or storage. 3.7.3.1 New material shall be equal in composition, strength, design, type, and size as existed prior to removal of the interferences. 3.7.3.2 Ground and bond AEGIS combat systems equipment and in accordance related electrical equipment enclosures, chassis, and cases with 2. 5 . 3.7.4 Accomplish the requirements of 2. 6 for system cleanliness. 3.7. 5 Accomplish the requirements of 009 - 12 of 2.1. disturbed 71 of 2.1 for - mplish the requirements of 009 6 Acco 3.7. joints. e in accordance 3.7. 6 .1 Test pressure and test medium shall b with 2. 6 . 3.7. 7 Accomplish the requirements of 009 - 37 of 2.1. 3.7. 8 Accomplish the requirements of 009 - 11 of 2.1. .1 3.7. 8 Damaged reusable covers shall not be reinstalled. 3.7. 8 .2 Install new insulation, lagging, and reusable covers where missing. 3.7. 9 Install new silicone coated aluminized cloth spray shields on mechanical joints and components in accordance with ASTM F 1138 in place of those removed as interference. 3.7. 10 Install new gaskets and assemble in accordance with Section 5 of 2. 6 when reinstalling interferences. 3.7. Ac complish the requirements of 009 - 32 of 2.1 for new and 11 disturbed surfaces. 12 3.7. Restore compartment, equipment, and systems labeling. 5 of 6 23 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

163 26 of 2.1 for deck - Accomplish the requirements of 009 13 3.7. covering removed or damaged as interference . 13 . 3.7 .1 New material shall be equal to existing in color and composition. (V)(G) "STRENGTH, TIGHTNESS, AND OPERATIONAL TESTS" 3.8 Align and accomplish appropriate strength, tightness, system led cleanliness, and operational tests and ensure that the reinstal interferences perform their normal functions within the system. Test and 3.8.1 incorporated into the contractor's Tests shall be lan . Inspection P NOTES: 4. An interference 4.1 is any part of a ship, whether installed or portable, that must be moved or disturbed in the accomplishment of work specified in the Job Order. 6 of 6 23 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

164 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 9 FY - 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 24 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : Title: Authorization, Control, Isolation, Blanking, 1.1 Tagging , and Cleanliness ; accomplish 2. REFERENCES: 2.1 Standard Items 2. 2 Joint Fleet Maintenance Manual (JFMM) 2. 3 9002 - AK - CCM - 010/6010, Industrial Ship Safety Manual (ISSM) for Submarines 010/TUM, s Manual ’ - 2. 4 S0400 - AD - URM - Out User Tag 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for 2.5 Shipyard Employment 2.6 S9AAO - AB GOS - 010, General Specifications for Overhaul of Surface - Ships (GSO) 2.7 0902 - 018 - 2010, General Specifications for Deep Diving SS BN/SSN Submarines 2.8 S9086 - RK - STM - 010/CH - 505, Shipboard Piping Systems 4612172, Hydrostatic Test Blanks 2. 9 845 - 10 MIL - 2. - 777, Schedule of Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Associated STD Piping Components for Naval Surface Ships 2. 1 1 802 - 5959353, MIL - STD - 777 D Modified for DDG - 51 Class, Schedule of Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Associated Piping Components 2.1 2 S9074 - AR - GIB - 010/278, Requirements for Fabrication Welding and Inspection, and Casting Inspection and Repair for Machinery, Piping, and Pressure Vessels 3. REQUIREMENTS: Work Authorization requirements of Vol ume IV, Chapter 3.1 Accomplish the non 2 for all 2. 10 of during Chief of nuclear work performed shipboard - 1 of 7 24 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

165 Naval Operations (CNO) Availabilities, Continuous Maintenance Availabilities (CMAV), Window of Opportunity (WOO), or Emergent Maintenance (EM) Availabilities. Ensure all work on ship’s systems and components is properly authorized and controlled in ord er to ensure rigorous personnel and ship safety standards are met. Include work such as planned maintenance, troubleshooting, corrective maintenance, and modernization and assessments. Ensure all outside activity work (non Ship’s Force) on ship’s - 3.1.1 systems and components, regardless of who performs the work, is formally authorized through a Work Authorization Form (WAF) completed and processed in accordance with Volume IV, Chapter 10 (including Appendix A) of 2.2. A copy of the authorized WAF shall be maintained at the worksite during productive work. For submarines only Work Authorization 3.1.2 accomplish the , requirements of Volume IV, Chapter 10 of for safety of ship maintenance 2.2 2. item identification, listing , and control, or the requirements of for 3 Ship's Plan of the Day (SPOD) . 3.1.3 Maintain the WAF in the Work Authorization Log from the time of original authorization, through production work and testing, and until the WAF is formally closed out. Whe n notified by the cognizant Repair Activity’s (RA) designated representative that the work is complete and ready for tags to be cleared, the RA’s designated representative will sign the WAF work completion block, then obtain ship’s concurrence to clear the associated Tagout Record Sheet line item(s). Additional sign - offs required by the WAF for testing and closure shall be made as work progresses in accordance with Volume IV, Chapter 10 of 2.2. 3.1.4 When a WAF Coordinator (WAFCOR) is required in accord ance with 009 - 106 of 2.1, all repair activities participating in the availability shall submit properly prepared WAFs to the Lead Maintenance Activity (LMA) WAFCOR for processing. 3.1.4.1 The Repair Activity (RA) responsible for the work shall accompli sh the requirements of 2.4 and complete blocks 1, 2, and 4 through 10 of the WAF and submit to the WAFCOR. 3.1.4.2 The WAFCOR shall obtain the appropriate WAF serial number from the Ship’s Force WAF Log and enter it into block 3 of the WAF. The WAFCOR shall then submit the WAF to the ship’s Watch/Duty Officer for processing blocks 11 through 14. The WAFCOR will sign block 1 2 for . work | concurrence to start 3.1.4.3 The RA responsible for the work shall sign Block 14 in conjunction with the Ship’s Watch/Duty Officer. The WAFCOR will issue a copy of the authorized WAF to 4 3.1.4. the Repair Activity indicating authorization to begin work. 2 of 7 24 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

166 3.1.4. 5 When work is complete, the RA will complete blocks 15 nce with Volume IV, Chapter 10, Appendix A and 16 of the WAF in accorda instructions of 2.2. 3.1.4. 6 When all work and testing are completed, block 18 shall first be signed by the WAFCOR and then the SF Watch/Duty Officer shall be the final signature in block 18 to close the WAF. 3.2 Ac complish the requirements of 2. 4 for equipment, systems, circuits, components, tanks, voids, piping, and valves that require isolation. - 3.2.1 Ensure the isolation, de energization, drainage of the isolated area, and depressurization of mechanica l, electrical, electronics, and pressure system has been accomplished. 2. 2 Train and qualify contractor's designated representative in 3. the WAF and Tag - O ut process in accordance with 2. 2 and 2. 4 . copy of the utilized to train plan 3. 2. 2 .1 Maintain a current and qualify contractor's designated representatives in accordance with 2 2. by 4 2. and for reference the SUPERVISOR. 2 3. 2. .2 Notify the SUPERVISOR of revisions to the plan as . they occur 3.3 Accomplish the requirements of the contra ctor’s lockout/tags - plus program for unmanned craft and barges in accordance with 2.5 . 3.3.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved plus program to the transferrable media, of contractor’s lockout/tags - SUPERVISOR when requested. - 3.3.2 Position equipment to achieve required isolation, by de energizing, draining of the isolated area, and depressurization, and use out of equipment, systems, circuits, lockout/tag s - plus program when lock - 2.5 components, piping, or valves is required in accordanc e with . 3. 4 Post warning signs and barriers and install temporary positive means to prevent closure or movement of components that create a safety hazard at hull and deck openings. hment and maintain a written record by work item using Attac 3.5 Complete verifying - Off Sheet), A (Accountability of Temporary Blanks and Plugs Check temporary blanks/plugs used for Foreign Material installation and removal of Exclusion (FME), isolation of pressure boundaries, or hydrostatic testing. the i shall Location information associated system/equipment name or nclude | tank number; frame, port or starboard, below or above water line. - Ensure the Accountability of Temporary Blanks and Plugs Check 3.5.1 Off Sheet (Attachment A) is at all tank closings; ensure the removal of - blanks/plugs in tanks are verified and documented via signature on the check 3 of 7 24 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

167 off sheet by Ship's Force representative and the SUPERVISOR prior to tank closing. 3.5.1.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or transferable media, of the Accountability of Temporary Blanks and Plugs Check Off Sheet - (Attachment A) to the SUPERVISOR upon each satisfactory tank closing to ment blanks/plugs were removed. docu 3.5.2 Maintain the Accountability of Temporary Blanks and Plugs Off Sheet (Attachment A) for the duration of the availability. Check - 2 3.5. Maintaining the Accountability of Temporary Blanks 1 . - (Attachment A) for material that has been removed and Plugs Check Off Sheet from the ship is not required; however that material must be entered in the - Accountability of Temporary Blanks and Plugs Check Off Sheet (Attachment A) when material is returned to the ship. 3.5.3 t one legible copy, in hard copy or approved Submi transferrable media, of the completed Attachment A to the SUPERVISOR at the end of the availability. Install identification tags on each removed piping section, valve, 6 3. ventilation system, and equipment to indicate company name, ship’s name, hull number, system, location, and Work Item number prior to removal from system. Tags must endure the repair process, and must stay attached and be readable until the removed piping section, valve, ventilation system, or equipment is reinstalled. Include quantity when components are grouped/bagged/comingled .1 6 3. together in a bucket or any other type of storage having only one identification tag. .2 3. 6 Ensure FME is maintained on equipment removed from the ship. 3. painted blaze nuts and bolts, Install and maintain blanks plugs, / 7 orange for use as FME immediately upon openings in equipment, valves, and piping systems not subject to pressure to prevent entry of foreign material and protect flanges and threaded ar eas. Existing system fasteners used for blanking that will be reused for installation are excluded from the requirement for blaze orange color. FME may be used for systems normally - out for maintenance. under pressure but are tagged The use of cloth, All yvinyl sheet, paper, tape, and rubber sheeting as FME is prohibited. pol FME material must be applied with care, without using excessive force, to avoid damage to surfaces/components being protected. lugs are 3. 7 .1 Wood products, including damage control (DC) p permitted for use as FME external to the ship for hull penetrations not in immediate vicinity of the flight deck. Wood products, including DC plugs, may be used as FME internal to the ship in piping and ventilation systems where permitted explici tly in the applicable Naval Ship’s Technical Manual. DC plugs, wood, or wood products are prohibited for use in tanks/voids. 4 of 7 24 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

168 Piping, ventilation, and equipment components designated as 3. 7 .2 scrap prior to removal do not need to be blanked to maintain cleanliness; however, they shall be properly marked as scrap material prior to removal. Precautions shall be taken to preclude spillage of system contents. Maintain the cleanliness of new, modified, repaired and disturbed 3.8 - nuclear piping systems non nuclear powered - and components of nuclear and non in accordance with 2.6 through 2.8 . Cleanliness levels shall naval vessels be as assigned in 2.6. 3.8.1 Maintain cleanliness at the following acceptance standard: ace shall be vi Cleanliness Level II: Surf 3.8.1.1 sually free , scale, dirt, loose particles and any other of grease, oil, flux contamination foreign to the base metal. Tap water residues on all metals and light superficial rust on carbon steel surfaces, caused by short time exposure to the atmosphere, are permitted. Light dust on cleaned surfaces is not objectionable, provided that the quantity and size of the particle does not adversely affect system operations. Cleanliness Level III: Surface shall be reasonably 3.8.1.2 mination and any remaining residue on the surface does not free of conta interfere with system operations or damage system components. Re 3.8.2 establishing local cleanliness status: Local cleaning is - permitted in accordance with 505j4 of 2.6. If existing system cl eanliness has been lost in a localized area (such as metal shavings deposited in a pipeline while removing a section for replacement), cleanliness condition can be re - established by locally swabbing, wiping, vacuuming, etc. the area to Local cleaning is limited requirements of 505j2 of 2.6. meet the cleanliness to piping sections which can be accessed directly and the results of cleaning fully observed without the aid of borescopes, mirrors or other devices. “VERIFY CLEANLINESS” (V) existing cleanliness was maintained. Verify that 3.8.3 3.8.4 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a report identifying any location where cleanliness has not been maintained in accordance with 3.8.1 and cannot be restored by local cleaning in acco rdance with 3.8.2. Include the cause of system contamination and recommended actions for cleanliness recovery. 3. Install and maintain blanks/plugs, nuts and bolts, colored blaze 9 d orange that will be used for hydrostatic testing on equipment, valves, an to withstand maximum system pressure 9 piping systems in accordance with 2. s for systems which will erve as the primary or secondary barrier to support hydrostatic testing. Existing system fasteners used for blanking that will are excluded from the requirement for blaze orange be reused for installation color. Secure blanks in place with gaskets and fasteners in accordance with 1 and 2. 1 10 , or weld in place. Ensure welding requirements for blanks meet 2. dance with 2. the same requirement as the piping welds, in accor , and 2 , 2.1 8 5 of 7 24 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

169 009 - 12 of 2.1. The use of cloth, polyvinyl sheet, paper, tape, and rubber sheeting as blanks is prohibited. DC plugs, wood, or wood products are prohibited as blanks on pressurized system s , but may be used on non - pressurized sys tems to include gravity drain piping. 3. 9 .1 Ensure p ressure blanks have a positive means of attachment for affixing tags. Tags must endure the repair process, and must stay attached Include company/contrac and be readable until the blanks are removed. tor name, Work Item number, WAF number, Contractor blanking/plugging log entry number, along with system/equipment/component name, number, and location. 3. Ensure blanks, plugs or cable end protection installed is removed 10 and system/equipment is restor ed as soon as possible after completion of work. Ensure all tag - out requirement s of 2.4 are followed. 4. NOTES: 4 2. and TUM ( ), 3 2. , 6010 ( line at: - ) are available on 4. 1 JFMM ( 2. 2 ) https://www.submepp.csd.disa.mil/jfmm/index.htm 4.2 FME is used to maintain system cleanliness. Accomplishment of NSI 009 to restore cleanliness, - 107 of 2.1 will be invoked within the Work Item | lost or suspected of being lost. when General piping system cleanliness is addressed in Section 505 of 4.3 2.6. Cleaning requirements for specific systems are addressed 4.4 in individual sections of 2.6 and 2.7. 4.5 The Lead Maintenance Activity (LMA) is defined in 2.2. MSRA/ABR 60/009 111 contractors tasked with availability schedule management under 009 - - of 2.1 are considered the LMA. 4.6 MSRA/ABR contractors fulfilling the role of Lead Maintenance Activity 60/009 under 2.2, or tasked with availability schedule managements under 00 9 - - 111 of 2.1 are not “component contractors” and are responsible for the full scope of Repair Activity obligations under Volume IV, Chapter 10, of 2.2. 4.7 Worksite is defined as within the specific compartment or space where physical productive w ork is occurring. For tanks and voids, the WAF may be posted at the entry point of the space. 6 of 7 24 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

170 ATTACHMENT A ACCOUNTABILITY OF TEMPORARY BLANKS AND PLUGS CHECK - OFF SHEET COMPANY NAME HULL AND AVAILABILITY WORK ITEM NUMBER SUPERVISOR SHIP’S FORCE MECHANIC’S MECHANIC’S SYSTEM DATE DATE LOCATION, SERIAL TYPE, SIZE, TANK N UMBER NAME, INSTALLED NAME, REMOVED SIGNATURE COMPONENT REPRESENTATIVE SIGNATURE EQUIPMENT BADGE NUMBER BADGE NUMBER NUMBER & SIGNATURE & SIGNATURE of 7 009 7 ITEM NO: - 24 9 FY - 1

171 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 25 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 II CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Structural Boundary Test; accomplish REFERENCES : 2. S - AB - S9AA0 2.1 GO 010, General Specifications for Overhaul of Surface - Ships (GSO), Chapter 192 : REQUIREMENTS 3. TEST” COMPLETION AIR (G) “ (I) completion air test of spaces in accordance with Accomplish a 3.1 Section 192 of 2.1 and the following: 3.1.1 Install 2 independent pressure gages. 3.1.1.1 Gage range shall be such that the test pressure is in the middle third of the scale. 3.1.2 Install 2 relief valves set at a maximum of 10 percent above test pressure. 3.1.3 Install one vent valve. The air source shall not exceed 25 PSIG and shall have a 3.1.4 supply capability less than the exhaust capability of either relief valve. the tank/void/space to be tested to the pressure 3.1.5 Pressurize specified in the invoking Work Item. Isolate the pressure source and hold pressure for 15 3.1.5.1 minutes for temperature stabilization prior to commencing the pressure drop test. 3.1.5.2 Measure the pressure drop of the tested space for 10 minutes. Allowable pressure drop shall be as specified in the invoking Work Item. (I) “UNOBSTRUCTED FLOW” 1 of 4 25 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

172 3.1.6 Accomplish unobstructed airflow test of air escape and overflow piping. (V) “VISUAL INSPECTION ” 3.1.7 Accomplish a visual inspection of disturbed mechanical joints for leakage upon completion of filling each tank. Allowable leakage: None. AIR TEST" (I)(G) RUNNING " Accomplish a 3.2 air test of spaces in accordance with Section running 192 of 2.1, and the following: 3.2. 1 Install 2 independent pressure gages. Gage range shall be such that the test pressure is .1 1 3.2. in the middle third of the scale. Install 2 relief valves set at 2 3.2. a maximum of 10 percent above test pressure. 3.2. 3 Install one vent valve. 3.2. The air source shall not exceed 25 PSIG and shall have a 4 supply capability less than the exhaust capability of either relief valve. solution to the opposite side of the structure, Apply a soap 5 3.2. y associated tank piping, overflow and air escape piping, and inspect for leaks. 3.2.6 Inspect for leakage by observing for formation of bubbles. Allowable leakage: None. (I) "UNOBSTRUCTED FLOW" Accomplish unobstructed airflow test of air escape and 7 3.2. overflow piping. (V) "VISUAL INSPECTION" Accomplish a visual inspection of 8 disturbed mechanical joints 3.2. Allowable leakage: None. for leakage upon completion of filling each tank. (I)(G) "AIR HOSE TEST" Section 192 of 3.3 Accomplish a local air hose test in accordance with the following: 2.1 and 2 of 4 25 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

173 Air hose nozzle shall be placed at less than 3 inches, but 3.3.1 zero greater than and pressure di rected inches, from the area to be tested at the structure under test in a manner most likely to disclose leaks. 3.3.1.1 The minimum nozzle diameter shall be 3/8 inch and the nozzle pressure shall be plus or minus 5 90 PSIG as monitored at the nozzle. 3.3.2 Apply a soap y solution to the opposite side of the structure and inspect for leak s . Inspect joint or fitting for leakage by observing for 3.3.3 formation of bubbles. Allowable leakage: None. (I)(G) "WATER HOSE TEST" ce with 3.4 Accomplish a water hose test in accordan Section 192 of 2.1 and the following: Use a one and one 3.4.1 half inch hose with a minimum nozzle - . Pressure at the nozzle shall be - diameter of one half inch PSIG at to 55 50 a maximum distance of 10 feet from the surface being tested. The stream of water shall be directed against the structure 3.4.2 in a manner most likely to disclose leaks. The opposite side of the structure shall be inspected to detect and locate leaks. Allowable leakage: None. (I)(G) "VACUUM BOX TEST" Section 192 of 3.5 Accomplis h a local vacuum box test in accordance with the following: 2.1 and 3.5.1 Apply a soap y solution to the structure being tested. 3.5. Install a vacuum box with a clear cover over the entire joint 2 or fitting being tested. In .1 stall the vacuum box so that the pressure 3.5. 2 differential is in the direction of an air test. Draw a vacuum of at least 10.2 inches of mercury and inspect 3.5.3 for leaks. Inspect the joint or fitting for leakage by 3.5.3.1 cover for no formation of bubbles. observing through the clear (I)(G) “COFFERDAM TEST METHOD” Accomplish a cofferdam test in accordance with 3.6 Section 192 of 2.1 and the following: 3 of 4 25 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

174 Install the cofferdam over the joint or fitting to be tested 3.6.1 differential will be in the same direction of an air so that the pressure test. Pressurize the air space inside the cofferdam to the test 3.6.2 pressure specified for the air test. Apply a soapy solution to the opposite side of the structure 3.6.3 being tested. Inspect the joint or fitting for leakage by observing for 3.6.4 formation of bubbles. Allowable leakage: None. If the opposite side of the structure is inaccessible, an 3.6.5 alternate method of proving tightness is to measure the drop in pressure within th e cofferdam over a 10 minute period. The gasket and fittings in the cofferdam should be checked for leakage using a soapy solution. Allowable drop in pressure: None. (I)(G) “CHALK TEST” 3. tertight Accomplish a chalk test of each knife edge and gasket on wa 7 doors, hatches, and scuttles. A chalk test may only be used as a preliminary test. 3.7.1 3.7.2 Apply chalk to the bearing surface of the knife edge and close the door, hatch or scuttle by normal procedure. uttle is opened, the chalk from the When the door, hatch or sc 3.7.3 knife shall have been transferred to the gasket. - The chalk imprint shall be in the center three 3.7.4 fifths of the width of the gasket with 100 percent continuous contact of knife edge to gasket. 3. 8 Repaired areas requiring a structural boundary test shall remain uninsulated and unpainted until completion of successful inspection and test. : 4. NOTES , 1 Associated "An assembly of pipe, tubing, tank piping is defined as 4. valves, fittings, and related components f orming a whole or a part of a system which starts or terminates in subject area, thus being common to and associated with same." 4 of 4 25 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

175 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 - 26 ITEM NO: DATE: 01 OCT 2017 CATEGORY: II : SCOPE 1. Title: 1.1 Deck Covering; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 Standard Items STD 2.2 MIL - - 1623, Fire Performance Requirements and Approved Specifications for Interior Finish Materials and Furnishings (Naval Shipyard Use) 3. R EQUIREMENTS : All deck coverings materials specified herein shall conform to the 3.1 fire performance requirements of 2.2. Shipbuilders and reviewed - Maintain a current copy of the NAVSEA 3.2 Marine Paints and Coatings Product/Procedure Data Sheet (ASTM F718) for the approved deck covering system specified in the invoking Work Item for - NAVSEA F718 does not exist for a reference by the SUPERVISOR. Where the ASTM in a copy of the manufacturer's technical data sheets. product, mainta Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of 3.2.1 specific documents when requested by the SUPERVISOR. All deck covering materials that are qualified to 3.2.2 PRF) are to be applied in accordance with performance specifi - cations (MIL reviewed ASTM F718 product data sheet. The dry - the manufacturer's NAVSEA film thickness (DFT), temperature, relative humidity, and surface - e NAVSEA preparation requirements stated herein take precedence over th reviewed - reviewed ASTM F718 data sheets if there is a conflict. The NAVSEA ASTM F718 data sheets shall supersede any other manufacturer's ASTM F718 data sheets for that product, even if it is newer (more recent) than the reviewed ASTM - data sheets. Copies of the NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 - NAVSEA F718 data sheets are available from the Naval Surface Treatment Center (NST . http://www.nstcenter.biz Center) website: reviewed ASTMF71 - Comply with the NAVSEA 8s, manufacturer’s 3.2.3 Safety Data Sheet (SDS) and/or manufacturer’s instructions submitted in 3.2 for safety and health precautions during the removal, handling, and application of deck covering products. - 1 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

176 ts are Ensure that harmful vapors, fumes, and mis 3.2.3.1 ventilated to the exterior of the vessel. 3.3 Deck covering materials shall be stored in a cool, dry place, not exposed to freezing temperatures or direct sunlight, and shall be stored in rer's accordance with NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718s and/or manufactu instructions. 3.4 Accomplish an unobstructed flow test of each deck drain, using clean fresh water prior to the disturbance of existing deck covering. Verify that all deck DC fittings are free, removable, and operational. If any defects a 3.4.1 re identified in 3.4, submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of a report listing defects found to the SUPERVISOR. 3.4. 2 Blank or plug each drain to prevent entry of contaminants. 3.5 Accomplish removal of the existing deck covering in its entirety (including base cove where installed) for locations requiring installation of a complete deck covering system. Remove unused remnants, clips, brackets, and weldments from 3.5.1 coverings. decks and vertical surfaces receiving new deck Chip and grind surfaces flush and smooth in way of 3.5.1.1 removals. Accomplish a visual inspection of each exposed piping penetration, 3.6 deck drain, deck plating and bulkheads for structural integrity, nd areas of damage or distortion. deterioration, pitting, cracks, a 3.6.1 If any defects are identified in 3.6, submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of a report listing defects identified to the SUPERVISOR. 3.7 Acc omplishment of cleaning and painting for each deck surface, including up the adjacent vertical surfaces intersecting the deck up to one inch above the complete deck covering system level shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.4). If solvent is used to clean the deck at any point in the 3.7.1 installation process, the deck shall be allowed to dry before application of any coating. No visible solvent shall be present on deck surfaces prior to proceeding with the next process step. 3.7.2 Where waterproof membranes are to be installed, the required surface preparation and primer application shall be completed 5 inches up the adjacent vertical surfaces intersecting the deck. - 2 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

177 3135 underlayment may als 3.7.3 Decks receiving a MIL - PRF - o be primed using the primer or bond coat qualified as part of the deck covering system or MIL - DTL - 24441, Type IV, Formula 150 at 4 to 6 mils. 3.7.4 - 3135, Type III or IV, - PRF Prior to the installation of MIL underlayment, the surface preparation shall be an SSPC - SP 3 substrate (i.e. - to direct substrate without primer). - "VISUAL INSPECTION" (See 4.3) (I) Accomplish a visual inspection of the exposed base coat or 3.8 underlayment surfaces (after removing the top coats in accordance with the applicable Attachment) for a deck covering system repair that requires resurfacing or partial replacement and not a complete installation. Installation of deck coverings. 3.9 3.9.1 Install new rings and/or collars around each sounding tube and deck drain. New rings shall be CRES Grade 316, 3/8 - inch high by 3/16 - inch peripherally to sounding tube or deck - inch thick and installed 1/4 drain. Seal each ring and/or collar to the deck, using epoxy compound PRF conforming to MIL - - 24176. 3135, - PRF - derlayment conforming to MIL based un - Install resin 3.9.2 Type III or IV, in way of low spots, dish pans, and high points that cannot be ground flush, to provide a smooth and fair surface. Slope and fair as required to ensure positive draining to deck drains where installed . See Underlayment shall be additional requirements in the applicable Attachment. installed in accordance with NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718s and/or - manufacturer's instructions and procedure submitted in 3.2 beneath the - chemical r resistant deck tile, following deck covering materials: wea resistant floorings , solid vinyl tile, vinyl composition tile, porcelain tile, and quarry tile. If the deck may cause a tripping hazard or promote 3.9.2.1 seams), a premature failure of the deck covering (i.e. not level, high weld - PRF MIL 3135 underlayment may be installed beneath carpet and electrical - sheeting/matting as directed by the SUPERVISOR. 3135, Type IV underlayment is used, - PRF 3.9.3 Except where MIL - d in Table 2) and install a waterproof membrane in each wet space (as define in locations adjacent to wet space bulkheads where the coaming to deck joint is not 100 percent seam welded, and any other locations identified in the individual Work Item or as directed by the SUPERVISOR, where there is an lihood of water penetration under the deck covering (e.g., increased like around refrigerated vending machine foundations, AC spot cooler drains, spaces leading to the weather, etc.). The membrane shall be in accordance with ANSI 3.9.3.1 A118.10, and be certified by the manufacturer to be compatible with both the underlayment and the installed deck covering. The membrane shall be one - 3 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

178 continuous barrier covering the entire deck, including the cove base 100 mm (4 inches) up each vertical surface. The use of a waterproof membrane is not required in 3.9.3.2 areas where MIL - PRF - 32584, T ypes I, II or III products are used. (I)(G) "VISUAL INSPECTION" 3.9.3.3 Accomplish a visual inspection of the completely installed and cured waterproof membrane. Ensure that the w aterproof membrane is installed in accordance with 3.9.3 and is uniform and free of defects. Where the prevention of condensation on certain decks, e.g. 3.9.4 above ballast tanks, or to reduce heat flow to decks located over hot machinery spaces, especially where these decks form the deck tops of living spaces, insulating deck covering material shall be installed where designated by the SUPERVISOR. Install insulating deck covering material reviewed - - 23134 in accordance wit - D - h NAVSEA - D conforming to MIL 18873 or MIL ASTM F718s and/or manufacturer's instructions. 3.9.5 Accomplish the requirements of Attachment A for the installation of new unglazed porcelain tile deck covering system, using the NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s in structions. 3.9.6 Accomplish the requirements of Attachment B for the installation of new wear resistant deck tile covering system, using the NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s instructions. Accomplish the requirements of Attac 3.9.7 hment C for the installation of new, or the resurface of existing, chemical resistant - flooring systems , using the NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.9.8 Accomplish the requirements of Attachment D for the installation of new electrical grade sheeting and matting deck covering reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s system, using the NAVSEA - instructions. 3.9.8.1 Electrical grade sheeting is a continuous deck ss the entire deck covering acting as the primary deck covering system acro of a space. Electrical grade matting is installed over the 3.9.8.2 primary deck covering system in localized areas in way of electrical hazards. Accomplish the requirements of Attachment E for the 3.9.9 installation of new carpeti - ng deck covering system, using the NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s instructions. - 4 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

179 3.9.10 Accomplish the requirements of Attachment F for the installation of new vinyl composition and solid vinyl tile deck covering - systems, using the N AVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s instructions. - Accomplish the installation of new light weight concrete 3.9.11 reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the deck covering system, using the NAVSEA - manufacturer’s instructions. 3.9.12 PRF Accomplishment o f cleaning and painting for each MIL - - - 24667 - and MIL PRF 32584, T ypes I, II or III high durability deck coating nonskid applications shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.4). Accomplish the requirements of Attachment G for the 3.9.12.1 - using MIL - PRF installation of new or replacement of nonskid , 24667, Type XI - the NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 and/or the manufacturer’s instructions. - 15562 matting is required in areas where - DTL specific MIL 3.9.13 designated electrical spaces as - electrical hazards may exist in non designated by the SUPERVISOR. Newly installed deck covering systems shall be allowed to 3.9.14 stabilize at room temperature for 24 hours prior to foot traffic and must not be washed for 48 hours. "VISUAL INSPECTION" (I)(G) Accomplish a visual inspection of the completely installed 3.9.15 and cured deck covering system. Ensure that each deck covering system is in f defects. accordance with Tables One and 2, and is uniform and free o Deck coverings with a sealer coat installed shall have a continuous surface, free of blotchy areas, pooling, ridge marks or runs, with only negligible embedded surface contaminants. Air bubbles in the seal coat are acceptable; shall not penetrate any other layers of the deck covering however, they system. Imperfections that may cause premature failure or do not meet the above requirements shall be corrected before the surfaces are accepted. (I) INSPECTION" "UNOBSTRUCTED FLOW TEST AND POSITIVE DRAINING 2 Remove each blank and plug installed in 3.4. 3.9.15.1 and accomplish an unobstructed flow test of each deck drain (where installed), using clean, fresh water. No obstruction allowed. For wet space decks, nspection, using a sufficient amount of accomplish a positive draining i clean, fresh water throughout each deck surface to ensure that new deck covering system slopes to the drains. Water shall flow to drains and not stand or puddle. ation, Upon completion of deck covering install 3.9.15.2 verify all deck DC fittings are free, removable, and operational. Ensure deck drain covers, remote operating gear deck box covers, and other DC - 5 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

180 fittings have not been sealed over during the installation of sealer coats lation are removable and operational. and/or deck covering instal NOTES 4. : Table One provides the deck covering systems for dry interior 4.1 spaces. Table 2 provides the deck covering systems for wet interior spaces. are exposed to Wet interior spaces are defined as interior compartments that wet conditions or potential immersion resulting from equipment in space, exposure to weather, or other service conditions of the space. Column A lists the approved decking materials for each group of spaces. Column B 15562, shall be rade sheeting or matting, MIL - DTL - lists where electrical g - used for non designated electrical spaces where electrical hazards may exist in accordance with 3.9.13. Column C lists where nonskid shall be used in ordance with 3.9.12. working areas around machinery and walking areas in acc The SUPERVISOR will select type, color, and pattern of deck 4.2 coverings (with input from Ship’s Force when possible), using all available samples supplied by the manufacturer. 4.3 The exact location of work will be indicated in the invoking Work Item, including the type (and grade or class) of deck covering, the location (space name and number and if entire space, within the coaming, not under furniture, etc.) and the required Table , Line, and Column from 009 - 32 of 2.1 for surface preparation. Locations that are to retain underlayment or base coats shall also be indicated as such in the invoking Work Item se coats, (e.g., replacing deck covering down to existing underlayment or ba replacing deck covering systems down to bare substrate or partial replacement of existing deck covering system). 4.4 If cleaning and painting of 3.7 or 3.9.12 is required; the use of 2 “Cleaning and Painting Requirements; Category II Standard Item 009 3 - accomplish” of 2.1 will be specified in the Work Item. - 6 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

181 ATTACHMENT A CERAMIC TILE (QUARRY AND PORCELAIN) Ceramic includes both porcelain and quarry tiles and shall be 1. tile listed in in Table 2. installed locations Ceramic tile shall meet A. the requirements of ANSI A137.1 Tile Council of North the and be unglazed, (available from America) a with of friction (COF) of 0.7 dry and 0.6 wet minimum coefficient when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028. Adhesive and grout shall both B. be epoxy, chemical resistant, and water cleanable, in accordance ANSI A118.3. with C. underlayment shall be in accordance with 3. 9 . The D. Concrete. Fabricate and install box units around hard (1) reach areas, to i.e., vent ducting, stuffing tubes, pipe brackets. and (2) Apply concrete by pouring into boxed area to produce slope provide vertical towards drains and to deck surfaces and square corners that suit application of cove tiles. is Remove box units after concrete (3) cured. E. Adhesive (mortar) and tile. to deck the adhesive epoxy on and (1) Apply an ANSI A118.3 vertical surfaces 4 inches from the deck. up be Ceramic cove base and bull nose (2) top pieces shall used on the vertical portions of the tile system. (3) The tiles shall be stored flat. (4) The application and installation of adhesive and tile may have to be accomplished in sections if the area is so large as to prevent pot laying tiles within adhesive - life. ensure (5) Periodically lift a set tile inspect to and that 100 percent contact adhesive and tile is achieved and that there is no between the entrapped air adhesive. in be Tiles, adhesive and (6) shall allowed to stabilize to a deck temperature as close as practicable to room temperature, but in all between 64 degrees Fahrenheit and 81 degrees Fahrenheit cases for a period of 24 hours before, during, and after installation. after The deck should be protected (7) from traffic for 24 hours for 48 shall not hours following be washed installation and installation. - 7 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

182 F. Grout. Mix and apply an ANSI, (1) A118.3 epoxy grout by working it into tile seams to ensure air pockets are eliminated. Clean epoxy grout residue from (2) the surface of the tile. (3) Protect tile from foot traffic for a minimum of hours. 24 G. Deck drain sealant installation. In the area between the tile, adhesive, and collar joint, install a waterproof sealant conforming to SAE - AMS - S - 8802, Class B; MIL - A - 46106, Group I, Type I; 3M 5200 Fastcure approved Marine Sealant; or NAVSEA - equivalent, around the entire to drain deck interface. the adhesive tile and the circumference of - 8 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

183 ATTACHMENT B RESISTANT DECK TILE WEAR Wear resistant deck tiles shall be installed 1. locations listed in Table in . One The wear resistant deck tile materials shall be qualified under MIL - A. - 32170. PRF The adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. For B. adhesive application, substrate temperature shall be between 64 the with 81 degrees Fahrenheit, a maximum relative degrees Fahrenheit and of 75 percent. The temperature and relative humidity shall be humidity for 24 hours prior to installation and for 24 hours following the stabilized installation . Tile: C. Tiles, adhesive and sub - floor should be allowed (1) to stabilize to a temperature close as practicable to room temperature, but in as Fahrenheit be between 64 degrees all cases and 81 degrees shall before, period of 24 hours Fahrenheit for during and after tile a installation. (2) The tiles shall stored flat. be (3) The deck should be protected from traffic for 24 hours after washed tile installation and shall not be for 48 hours following installation. Tiles (4) Do not spring wear resistant deck tiles into position. oversize requiring hand cutting shall not be cut sprung and then (forced) into tile shall be cut such that they fit position. The into position without a gap between them and not requiring neatly or application by force. Tiles can be taped together with bending tape to pull the together during curing of masking adhesive. joints seam deck should be rolled initially by hand with a vinyl (5) The roller. Two to 4 hours after application of the adhesive, but prior to adhesive setting, the tiled surface should be rolled with a 100 to lb. floor tile roller ensure a good bond between the tiles, adhesive, - floor. and sub dry. For Clean away excess adhesive before it is allowed (6) to water based adhesive use a soft cloth moistened with denatured alcohol. Do not use mineral spirits, which will cause swelling and have a tendency to curl. D. Seal all edges of the tile including penetrations for pipes, structures foundations, vents, and other with a waterproof sealant I; 3M conforming to SAE - AMS - S - 8802, Class B; MIL - A - 46106, Group I, Type NAVSEA or Sealant; Marine 5200 Fastcure equivalent. approved - - 9 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

184 ATTACHMENT C CHEMICAL - RESISTANT FLOORINGS Chemical - resistant floorings shall be installed in locations listed in 1. Tables One and 2. The chemical - resistant flooring materials shall be qualified under A. - PRF - 32584, Types IV or V, and listed on the QPL. MIL B. If aggregate is required to meet the coefficient of friction (COF) an requirements of MIL - PRF - 32584 , aggregate (e.g., white aluminum oxide or glass beads) shall be included in the final seal coat to provide slip resistance. at stored be The 60 between temperature a C. shall materials Fahrenheit and 80 degrees Fahrenheit for best degrees application properties. D. Maintain deck surface and room temperature in accordance with and instructions manufacturer’s procedures reviewed the NAVSEA - application and at submitted in 3.2 for proper curing during for 24 after installation. least hours flake deck coverings, apply base - complete replacement of color E. For coat, color coat, color chips and sealer coat (as applicable for the - specified Class) in accordance with NAVSEA - 718s and/or reviewed ASTM F manufacturer's instructions submitted in 3.2. Color chips shall be applied to the color coat in an even distribution, at an approximate 20 percent color chip area to total color coat area ratio. When multiple sealer coats are required, lightly abrade each sealer coat and solvent fore applying the next coat. wipe the abraded surface be flake deck coverings, abrade the existing - For resealing of color F. sealer coat. Apply new color chips to maintain the approximately 20 percent chip coverage of the color coat and sealer coat in accordance 718s and/or manufacturer's instructions. with NAVSEA - reviewe d ASTM F - Repair localized areas of torn, punctured or defective base coat to achieve a consistent appearance. When multiple sealer coats are required, lightly abrade each sealer coat and solvent wipe the abraded s urface before applying the next coat. - 10 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

185 ATTACHMENT D MATTING GRADE AND SHEETING ELECTRICAL Electrical grade sheeting and matting shall be installed 1. locations in Table One. listed in A. The electrical grade sheeting and matting materials shall be qualified DTL - under MIL - 15562. B. The electrical grade sheeting adhesive shall be installed over the entire deck in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Heat welded electrical seams shall provide a continuous surface to prevent a path for grounding. Where seams are inaccessible they shall be sealed with waterproof sealant conforming to SAE - AMS - S - 8802, Class B; MIL - A - 46106, a Type I; 3M 5200 Fastcure Marine I, Sealant; or NAVSEA - approved Group equivalent. Electrical matting seams shall not be within 914 mm (3 ft) of electrical/electronic equipment, and workbenches. If this is panels, a - weld unavoidable, the seams to provide heat continuous surface free of seams, craters, or porosities. for Seal all edges of the electrical sheet including penetrations D. structures pipes, foundations, vents, and other with a waterproof sealant I, conforming to SAE - AMS - S - 8802, Class B; MIL - A - 46106, Group Type I; 3M or Sealant; 5200 Marine equivalent. approved - NAVSEA Fastcure 2. Exposed corners of electrical grade matting shall be rounded off. optional, Installation of A. mat with adhesive is but if the mat the is installed without adhesive, an outline of the area covered by the deck. Inside mat be stenciled on the shall the outlined area the following shall be stenciled in 20 mm (0.8 inch) or larger letters: “ELECTRICAL GRADE MAT REQUIRED WITHIN MARKED LINES”. B. Over removable deck plates, the mats shall be installed without adhesive and marked as detailed above. Seams shall be backed with 20 mil thick lb/in) polyvinyl chloride tape, with a high - tack adhesive, 7 kN/m (40 breaking strength, a dielectric strength of 20,000 volts in accordance with under of each side inch) minimum overlap ASTM D1000, and with a 50 mm (2 - the seam. - 11 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

186 ATTACHMENT E CARPETING Carpeting shall be installed in locations listed in Table One . 1. Carpets completely, shall cover the deck A. but shall be fitted around all permanently installed furniture. B. Carpets shall be installed without pad over underlayment, primed steel or procedure, as adhesive an with or aluminum deck by a tackless recommended by the carpet manufacturer. For DDG 51 - Class ships, acoustic CO insulation is authorized for use under carpeting in and XO cabins. A clean, bright CRES or C. transition strip shall be installed to aluminum where the carpet abuts traffic areas secure the edges of the carpet in foot other deck covering. - 12 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

187 ATTACHMENT F COMPOSITION VINYL AND TILE SOLID VINYL Solid vinyl and vinyl composition tile shall be installed in locations 1. in Table One. listed Vinyl composition deck tiles shall conform to ASTM F1066, Class 2, and A. inch be 1/8 - thick for maximum shall durability. Solid vinyl tile shall conform ASTM F1700, Class to III (commercial), Type B. B. Vinyl tile epoxy adhesive shall be a qualified proprietary part of the in new deck covering system applied accordance with NAVSEA - reviewed in manufacturer's instructions and procedures submitted 3.2. to adjacent on off squared and bulkhead C. Installations bulkhead shall be edge stiffeners stanchions. Where the exposed and fails to butt up against a fitting or bulkhead, a vinyl beveled edge strip or a stainless/brass strip (one inch by 0.08 inch) shall be installed (with epoxy adhesive) to the to protect deck the edge. D. Seal all edges of the tile including penetrations for pipes, structures foundations, vents, and other with a waterproof sealant I, Group 46106, - MIL A - I; Type conforming to SAE - AMS - 8802, Class B; 3M approved - NAVSEA equivalent. Sealant; Marine 5200 Fastcure or - 13 of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

188 ATTACHMENT G AND - 24667, Type XI NONSKID (PEEL - STICK ) MIL PRF MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI 1. shall be installed in locations listed nonskid in Tables One and 2. Exterior applications for MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI nonskid are located in Table 2 of 009 - 32 of 2.1. A. The MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI nonskid materials shall be qualified under MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI, Comp PS. B. Spaces between and adjacent pieces s hall have a minimum gap of 1/2 inch with maximum gap up to 1 - 1/2 inches. This spacing should align weld seams to avoid the practicable so as to extent the material from bridging maximum seams. these of eal all free C. For exterior applications only, s the MIL - PRF - edges with the manufacturer’s approved sealer. 24667, Type XI nonskid the both the edge of product and the sealer bead covers Verify that the substrate surface. T he edge sealer shall be dry to the touch in accordance with ASTM D1640 prior to permitting foot traffic. frequently D. MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI nonskid shall not be used in areas fluid, fuel, oil) hydraulic hydrocarbons (e.g. with contaminated as well as traffic pallet and fork truck areas. jack, Corners of MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI nonskid shall be rounded. E. existing If approved by the SUPERVISOR, 2. of MIL - PRF - 24667, Type XI areas nonskid can be repaired by removing worn or damaged areas. Product removal with shall be accomplished in accordance the manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Surfaces shall be prepared to a minimum surface preparation level of SSPC - the of application to 24667, Type XI - PRF - MIL SP 11 and be prior painted nonskid . A. If approved by the SUPERVISOR, for areas where the paint is intact, surface preparation and painting is not required. The surface shall be cleaned of all loose debris and be detergent washed or solvent wiped to of remove all surface contaminants. Any existing areas paint damage shall be touched up. shall 24667, Type XI nonskid - be installed PRF in accordance with 4. MIL - manufacturer’s documentation. 5. Color topping is authorized as required for safety markings. of 20 009 ITEM NO: 14 - 26 9 FY - 1

189 NOTES OF TABLES ONE AND 2 FOR SURFACE SHIPS I s , ha and II (1) ve High durability deck coating , MIL - PRF - 32584 , Type than all other decking significantly lower total ownership cost s materials. Chemical PRF - resistant flooring, MIL - - materials qualified to Type V 32584, (2) do not require an underlayment to create a coaming or slope to a drain and therefore have a lower total ownership cost than Type IV materials which require an underlayment. ck tiles, MIL When no products are listed on wear resistant de (3) - PRF - 32170, Class 1, qualified products database (QPD), solid vinyl tile in accordance with Attachment F may be substituted. Listed spaces may be designated as an electrical space, requiring (4) example: If the pilot 15562. (For - DTL - electrical grade sheeting, MIL house is designated an electrical space, the entire floor will require MIL 15562 sheeting.) - DTL - 15562, Type I, electrical grade sheeting is not installed in (5) If MIL - DTL - - designated electrical spaces, then localized installation of MIL - DTL 15562, Type II or III matting is required in areas where specific electrical hazards may exist in accordance with 3.9.13. - in working areas around machinery. 24667, Type XI nonskid (6) Install MIL - PRF INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK (7) inch square, or four - square, three inch - Two (8) inch square tiles shall be - used. - Quarry tile shall be 0.5 - (9) - inch by six inch. inch by six (10) Four inch square tiles shall be inch square, six - inch square, or eight - - used. - (11) or II high durability deck 32584, Type I Apply one coat of MIL PRF - coating following air blasting cleaning in accordance with ASTM D4258. of 20 009 ITEM NO: 15 - 26 9 FY - 1

190 TABLE ONE A C B - PRF - PRIMARY DECK DRY INTERIOR SPACES NONSKID, MIL ELECTRICAL GRADE LINE COVERING 24667, TYPE XI SHEETING OR MATTING RESISTANT LIVING AND WORKING S ELECTRICAL GRADE 1 CHEMICAL - PACES (E.G. OFFICES AND BE SHEETING OR FLOORING , RTHING), MAIN PASSAGEWAYS, ME MATTING, - , TYPES 32584 - PRF MIL SSING MANNED - MIL IV OR V 15562, TYPE - DTL AREAS, BARBER SHOP, S STOREROOMS AND SHIP’ I, II OR III STORE SEE NOTES (4) & (5) SEE NOTE (2) SEE NOTE (1) 2 HIGH DURABILITY DECK SAME AS LINE ONE , MIL - PRF COATING - 32584 , TYPE I SAME AS LINE ONE WEAR RESISTANT DECK 3 TILE, MIL PRF - 32170, CLASS 1 - OR - SOLID VINYL OR - COMPOSITION VINYL TILE SEE NOTE (3) CHEMICAL RESISTANT SAME AS LINE ONE 4 ROL PILOT HOUSE AND CONT FLOORING , STATIONS, CHART ROOM AND 32584 - PRF - MIL , TYPES COMBAT INFORMATION C ENTER IV OR V SEE NOTE (1) SEE NOTE (2) 5 HIGH DURABILITY DECK SAME AS LINE ONE COATING , MIL - PRF - 32584 , TYPE I 6 SAME AS LINE ONE WEAR RESISTANT DECK TILE, MIL - PRF - 32170, CLASS 1 - OR SOLID VINYL OR - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE SEE NOTE (3) CARPET D XO 7 FLAG QUARTERS, CO AN QUARTERS, TROOP CO QUARTERS HIGH DURABILITY DECK 8 COATING , MIL - PRF - SEE NOTE (1) , TYPE I 32584 9 RESISTANT CHEMICAL - , FLOORING PRF 32584 - , TYPES MIL - IV OR V SEE NOTE (2) WEAR RESISTANT DECK 10 TILE, PRF - - MIL 32170, CLASS 1 SOLID VINYL OR - - OR VINYL COMPOSITION TILE SEE NOTE (3) - of 20 26 ITEM NO: 009 16 9 FY - 1

191 B A C TABLE ONE ELECTRICAL GRADE NONSKID, MIL DRY INTERIOR SPACES - PRF - PRIMARY DECK LINE SHEETING OR 24667, TYPE XI COVERING MATTING 11 CHEMICAL RESISTANT , WARDROOM, CPO LOUNGE ND FLOORING , LIBRARY, CLASSROOM A , TYPES 32584 - MIL CHAPEL - PRF IV OR V SEE NOTE (1) SEE NOTE (2) 12 HIGH DURABILITY DECK , COATING - 32584 , TYPE I PRF - MIL WEAR RESISTANT DECK 13 TILE, - PRF - 32170, CLASS 1 MIL SOLID VINYL OR - OR - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE SEE NOTE (3) PACES MEDICAL AND DENTAL S 14 CHEMICAL - RESISTANT FLOORING , - PRF 32584 SEE NOTE (1) - , TYPES MIL IV OR V SEE NOTES (2) 15 HIGH DURABILITY DECK , COATING MIL - PRF - 32584 , TYPE I 16 LABORATORY SPACES, ELECTRICAL GRADE SHEETING, DESIGNATED ELECTRICA L NTROL SPACES (E.G. CCTV CO MIL - DTL - 15562, TYPE I ROOMS, ELECTRIC POWE R CONVERSIONS, IC AND GYRO SEE NOTE (5) ROOMS, RADAR ROOMS, AND 17 SAME AS LINE ONE HIGH DURABILITY DECK CONTROL ROOMS), AND COATING , MIL - PRF - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONI C 32584 , TYPE I WORKSHOPS SAME AS LINE ONE - CHEMICAL RESISTANT 18 SEE NOTE (1) FLOORING , 32584 - PRF - MIL , TYPES IV OR V SEE NOTE (2) SAME AS LINE ONE HIGH DURABILITY DECK NONSKID, CARPENTER AND MACHINE 19 PRF - , MIL 24667, SHOPS AND OTHER SHOP COATING - , TYPE I MIL - PRF - 32584 SPACES TYPE XI, COMP PS SEE NOTE (6) 20 TERIOR) HIGH DURABILITY DECK SIDE PASSAGEWAYS (IN ACES , ONLY SERVING SHOP SP COATING - PRF - MIL , TYPE I 32584 (NOT MAIN PASSAGEWAY S) 21 CARGO AMMUNITION HOL DS SAME AS LINE 19 LATEX CONCRETE, - PRF 32584, TYPE VI (BETWEEN DUNNAGE TRA CKS) MIL - (11) SEE NOTE 22 MACHINERY SPACES SAME AS LINE 19 SAME AS LINE ONE HIGH DURABILITY DECK N COATING , (EXCLUDING BILGES) I - PRF , TYPE I WORKING AREAS MIL - 32584 17 - 009 ITEM NO: 20 of 26 - 1 9 FY

192 C B A TABLE ONE ELECTRICAL GRADE NONSKID, MIL - PRF - PRIMARY DECK DRY INTERIOR SPACES LINE 24667, TYPE XI COVERING SHEETING OR MATTING HIGH DURABILITY DECK DRY GOODS STOREROOMS 23 COATING , , TYPE I MIL - PRF - 32584 TRAPS HIGH DURABILITY DECK 24 AIR LOCKS AND LIGHT , COATING - MIL , TYPE I PRF - 32584 OTHER INTERIOR SPACE SAME AS LINE 19 HIGH DURABILITY DECK SAME AS LINE ONE 25 S , COATING , TYPE I 32584 - PRF - MIL 009 of 20 ITEM NO: 18 - 26 9 FY - 1

193 TABLE 2 C A B - NONSKID, MIL WET INTERIOR SPACES PRF ELECTRICAL - PRIMARY DECK LINE COVERING GRADE SHEETING 24667, TYPE XI OR MATTING SANITARY SPACES (WAS HROOMS, PORCELAIN TILE 1 WATER CLOSETS, AND S HOWERS) SEE NOTE (8) SEE NOTE (1) HIGH DURABILITY DECK 2 COATING , - 32584 MIL - PRF , TYPE II 3 CHEMICAL - RESISTANT , FLOORING , TYPES 32584 PRF - MIL - IV OR V SEE NOTE (2) 4 SMALL ENCLOSED SPACES RESISTANT - CHEMICAL FLOORING ADJOINING SANITARY S PACES , (HOT WATER HEATER SP ACES, CG , TYPES 32584 - MIL - PRF LOCKER, ETC.) IV OR V SEE NOTE (1) SEE NOTE (2) HIGH DURABILITY DECK 5 COATING , , TYPE II MIL - PRF - 32584 6 FOOD SERVICE SPACES (GALLEY, QUARRY TILE OP, SCULLERY, BUTCHER SH SEE NOTE (9) BAKERY, MEAT PREPARA TION LINES) ROOMS, FOOD SERVICE 7 HIGH DURABILITY DECK COATING , SEE NOTE (1) , TYPE II - MIL - PRF 32584 8 PORCELAIN TILE SEE NOTE (8) NONSKID, TRASH COMPACTOR ROOM S 9 CHEMICAL RESISTANT 24667, - PRF - MIL , FLOORING NOTE (1) , TYPES TYPE XI, COMP PS SEE - 32584 MIL - PRF IV OR V SEE NOTE (6) SEE NOTE (2) SAME AS LINE 9 10 HIGH DURABILITY DECK COATING , 32584 - - MIL PRF , TYPE II SAME AS LINE 9 QUARRY TILE 11 SEE NOTE (9) ER WET 12 HIGH DURABILITY DECK WALKING AREAS OF OTH SAME AS LINE 9 COATING E ROOMS, WORKING SPACES (NIXI , MIL - , TYPE II ETC.) PRF 32584 - 009 of 20 19 ITEM NO: - 26 19 FY -

194 B A TABLE 2 C PRIMARY DECK SLIP RESISTANT DE CK WET INTERIOR SPACES ELECTRICAL LINE COVERING GRADE SHEETING COVERING OR MATTING SAME AS LINE 9 LAUNDRY FACILITIES 13 CHEMICAL RESISTANT , FLOORING PRF MIL SEE NOTE (1) , TYPES 32584 - - IV OR V SEE NOTE (2) HIGH DURABILITY DECK 14 SAME AS LINE 9 , COATING 32584 , TYPE II MIL - PRF - PORCELAIN TILE 15 SAME AS LINE 9 SEE NOTE (10) AFFF STATION DECK 16 AFFF STATIONS - - COATING, MIL PRF 32171, TYPE IV SAME AS LINE 9 HIGH DURABILITY DECK OTHER MANNED SPACES 17 COATING , , TYPE II 32584 MIL - PRF - S OTHER UNMANNED SPACE HIGH DURABILITY DECK 18 , COATING , TYPE II 32584 - - MIL PRF 009 of 20 ITEM NO: 20 - 26 19 FY -

195 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 27 DATE: 18 NOV 201 6 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Title: Material Identification and Control (MIC) for Level I System ; 1.1 accomplish 2. REFERENCES : Standard Items 2.1 - 045 - - 0948 2 2. LP 7010, Material Control Standard 221, Boilers 2. 3 S9086 - GY - STM - 010/CH - REQUIREMENTS : 3. 3.1 Provide and maintain a Material Identification and Control (MIC) 2 for both Government furnished and contractor System in accordance with 2. furnished materials utilized in the installation, alteration, and repair of of systems designated as MIC LEVEL I by Work Items in the systems or portions shall Job Order. The system shall be descr ibed in a written procedure that submitted to the SUPERVISOR for review and approval prior to be implementation. The procedure requires a one - time submitt al/approval unless the Standard Items change and/or references change or are updated. The Material Identification and Control program for Level I Materials shall be subject to periodic conformity audits by the SUPREVISOR throughout the contract period. T his procedure shall specifically address, as a minimum, the following: 3.1.1 Assignments of responsibility for identification and control of LEVEL I material including working level instructions for: terial certified from - pre LEVEL I ma 3.1.1.1 Procurement of . an authorized LEVEL I certifying activity or National Stock System certified LEVEL I material in - Inspection of pre 3.1.1.2 . 2 accordance with Section 3.4 of 2. 3.1.1.3 Storage of LEVEL I material including segregation materials. - LEVEL I from non 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 27 FY - 1 9

196 3.1.1.4 Issue of LEVEL I material including transfer of marking for raw materials (e.g., bar, pipe, tube and threaded rod) . Identification and control of LEVEL I material 3.1.1.5 during all phases of work (e.g., material movement, manufa cturing, repair, . ripout, installation) Local manufacturing and testing of LEVEL I 3.1.1.6 components manufactured from certified raw materials. Visually verifying at the time of or subsequent to 7 3.1.1. installation into a system subassembly or ab oard ship that the permanent material designator markings, material type for fasteners or grade/type for consumable materials are correct in accordance with the generic material - requirements of applicable drawing and/or NAVSEA approved nonconformances and . Engineering Changes 3.1.1.8 Documentation of installation of LEVEL I material in . 2 accordance with Section 3.10.3 of 2. 3.2 Accomplishment of a Process Control Procedure (PCP) for all work within the LEVEL I boundary including manufacture, installat ion and repair of LEVEL I systems, components and material shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.2) except for the following actions: 3.2.1 Software replacement (e.g., O - rings, packing glands, body - to - bonnet gaskets, silver sea l replacements). 3.2.2 Inspection to support routine maintenance programs or troubleshooting. 3.2.3 - pressure boundary parts which are not Replacement of any non LEVEL I parts. 3. 3 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media , of the installation records to completed LEVEL I work item including the required the SUPERVISOR at the completion of work and/or a minimum of one day prior to system testing/operation. 4. NOTES : 1 and LEVEL I designation applies only to materials specified in 2. 2 4. of 2. 2.17 - Section 221 . 3 If a Process Control Procedure (PCP) for all work within the LEVEL I 4.2 bounda ry including manufacture, installation and repair of LEVEL I systems, components and material in 3.2 is required; the use of a Category II Standard 09 “Process Control Procedure (PCP); provide and accomplish” Item 009 - of 2.1 will be specified in the Work I tem. 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 27 FY - 1 9

197 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 29 DATE: 29 JUL 2004 I CATEGORY: SCOPE 1. : Title: 1.1 Asbestos - Free Pipe Hanger Liner Material; install REFERENCES : 2. None. 2.1 3. REQUIREMENTS : Install new fibrous glass pipe hanger liners in lieu of liners 3.1 containing asbestos material. This requirement applies only where hangers and pipes are removed or new hangers are being installed. 3.2 C - - 20079, Type II, New liner material shall be in accordance with MIL Class 4, for temperatures over 180 degrees Fahrenheit up to 650 degrees Fahrenheit. m contact area 3.3 For services above 650 degrees Fahrenheit where minimu - type hanger designs (similar to that shown in MSS SP 58) are required, no liner material is used. NOTES 4. : None. 4.1 009 - 1 29 of 1 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

198 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 - 30 ITEM NO: DATE: 18 NOV 2016 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Boiler Sample Tube ; inspect 2. REFERENCES : S9221 ; Main 010, - GTP - C1 - 2.1 Propulsion Boilers Repair and Overhaul 3. REQUIREMENTS : Remove tubes using tube 3.1 sampling methods in accordance with - Paragraph 3.4 of 2.1. 3.1.1 Cut generating tubes removed as samples 8 to 10 inches above the water drum. 2 3. - tag tubes, tube stubs, and tube sections removed, Identify and metal with ship's name and hull number, Work Item number, boiler number, tube designation, bottom and top of sections, segment sequence, upstream side (furnace face), and downstream side of gas flow. Cut tube removed into 3 foot minimum segments and split - 3.2.1 longitudinally by mechanical method with tube dry (no oil) so that upstream side (furnace face) half is split from side downstream of gas flow half. 3.2.1.1 T here shall be 2 distinct, individual halves to each segment, tube stub, and bend. Each half (waterside/steamside and fireside) shall 3.2.1.2 remain intact. 3.2.2 - Identify and metal tag each segment and half in accordance so that full length of tube may be reconstructed and placement with 3.2 oriented. 3.3 Inspect tube segments for the following: 3.3.1 Steamsides/watersides: Oil deposits 3.3.1.1 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 30 FY - 1 9

199 3.3.1.2 Loose sludge Hard baked 3.3.1.3 - on sludge 3.3.1.4 Scale 3.3.1.5 Scabs/tubercles Pitting 3.3.1.6 3.3.1.7 High temperature oxides 3.3.1.8 Waterside grooves 3.3.1.9 Corrosion fatigue fissures 3.3.1.10 General waterside thinning Waterside burning 3.3.1.11 W aterside abrasion 3.3.1.12 Die marks 3.3.1.13 3.3.1.14 Steam tracking Stress corrosion cracking (caustic embrittlement) 3.3.1.15 3.3.2 Firesides: General fireside thinning 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2 Fireside burning 3.3.2.3 Tube enlargement Swaging 3.3.2.4 3.3.2.5 Sagging Warping 3.3.2.6 Heat blisters 3.3.2.7 3.3.2.8 Thermal cracks 3.3.2.9 Mechanical fatigue cracks Steam gouging 3.3.2.10 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 30 FY - 1 9

200 approved 3.3.3 Submit one legible copy, in transferrable media , of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.3 to the SUPERVISOR. Collect samples (equal to a heaping tablespoon each) of waterside 3.4 soft and hard deposits for each boiler. Soft deposits Place the tube segments in a vise with the - 3.4.1 waterside up and wirebrush watersides. Collect loose residue in a bottle. Label bottle with the title Soft Deposits, ship, boiler number, and tube number. 3.4.2 Place the tube segment in a vi - Hard deposits se with the waterside up and power wirebrush watersides to remove loose residue. Crimp the tube segment slowly allowing flakes of hard sludge to fall back into the tube. Collect the loose flakes in a bottle. Label bottle with title Hard Deposits, ship, boiler number, and tube number. 3.5 Package tubes, deposit samples, and a copy of report (3.3.3) and send to a laboratory qualified to accomplish chemical analysis. Analyze the tube samples for the following: 3.5.1 3.5.1.1 degree - wall thickness at zero, 90, 180, and 270 Tube positions 3.5.1.2 Extent of pitting (major pit depths and average overall pitting) 3.5.1.3 Thickness of hard scale mineral deposits Analyze deposit samples for specific m ineral composition in 3.5.2 percentages of calcium, magnesium, and silicon oxide. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media 3.5.3 , of listing results of the requirements of 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 to the a report SUPERVISOR. NOTES : 4. 4.1 Sample tube(s) replacement will be included in the invoking Work Item. 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 30 FY - 1 9

201 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 31 DATE: 18 JUL 2014 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Boiler Waterjet Cleaning; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : - Waterjet, Model WBD 010, - - AE - S6300 MMA 150N, Operation, Maintenance, 2.1 Repair and Overhaul Procedures 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Accomplish the requirements of this item for waterjet cleaning of boiler watersides, using manufacturer's equipm ent manual and 2.1 for guidance. 3.1.1 Portable extension lights shall conform to MIL - F - 16377/49, 16377/52, Symbol 286. - Symbol 306.2 or MIL - F 3.1.1.1 Ground each light fixture at the voltage source. The high 3.1.2 - pressure waterjet cleaning unit shall be operated at no more than 10,000 pounds per square inch (PSI). Rope off and post warning signs in the areas where the unit 3.1.3 - is operating, where the high pressure hose is run, and where the waterjet cleaning is to be accomplished. pressure leaks 3.1.4 U nit shall be stopped immediately if high - pressure hose, or hose couplings. - occur in pump, piping, high While personnel are waterjetting, lance operator shall be in 3.1.5 direct visual contact with control gun operator stationed outside of boiler. Control gun operator shall also maintain direct person - to person voice - communication with pump operator, using telephone, radio, or other positive direct means. Communication relay through intermediaries is not acceptable. The control gu 3.1.6 n operator shall be able to regulate the flow of water to permit the system to be pressurized during the actual tube cleaning and have the nozzle pressure reduced to zero while the operator to be removes the lance from one tube and inserts it into the next tube cleaned. 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 31 FY - 1 9

202 3.2 Cleaning equipment shall meet minimum requirements listed herein: Supply hose from the pump to the control gun shall be 3.2.1 inch inside diameter (I.D.) with 30,000 PSI minimum burst pressure and - 1/2 - shall not exceed 400 feet in length. A 15 foot length of supply hose shall be attached between the control gun and the flexible lance. 3.2.2 Provide a high pressure return line from the control gun dump connection to the waterjet supply tank, on units that discharge pressure to th e bilges between cycles. - Tube cleaning nozzle shall be non rotating. Orifices in the 3.2.3 nozzles shall be angled back 30 degrees. Nozzles shall have a minimum of 18 orifices evenly spaced around the circumference. Each orifice shall be 0.024 n diameter, plus or minus 0.001 inch. inch i Fan pattern nozzle attached to a rigid lance for cleaning 3.2.4 drum and header surfaces. 3.2.5 Lance and nozzle burst pressure ratings shall be 25,500 PSI minimum. Lance shall be 0.229 inch or larger I.D. and s hall have a smooth Teflon core, and shall not exceed 25 feet in length. 3.2.6 Waterjet cleaning solution shall consist of one pound of sodium nitrite to 100 gallons of clean, fresh water. ning as Maintain operating pressures and flow rates for boiler clea 3.3 follows: 10,000 PSI maximum, 9,000 PSI minimum - Boiler tube cleaning 3.3.1 pump discharge pressure at 20 gallons per minute. Drum and header surface cleaning 3.3.2 - 7,500 PSI maximum, 6,500 allons per minute. PSI minimum pump discharge pressure, at 12 to 14 g 3.4 Verify waterjet cleaning equipment capability prior to commencement of work. 3.4.1 Place the lance and nozzle that will be utilized in waterjet cleaning securely into a container. Ensure lance cannot break loose and that utput is 20 gallons per minute. unit o 3.5 Accomplish cleaning operations as follows: 3.5.1 Lance and nozzle shall traverse the entire length of every tube cleaned. Downcomer, riser, and support tubes shall be 3.5.1.1 traversed twice. 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 31 FY - 1 9

203 The lance and nozzle shall traverse the tubes at a maximum 3.5.2 rate of one foot per second. 3.5.3 A fan nozzle shall be used to clean entire interior drum surfaces. Pump waterjet wastewater effluent from boiler to a holding container 3.6 or a waterjet wastewater re cycling unit. Do not drain wastewater to bilges. 3.6.1 Waterjet wastewater recycling filter process shall be capable of filtering the wastewater effluent to meet the following criteria: Suspended Solids < 10 mg/L Sodium Nitrite 1100 - 1300 mg/L Ph 6.5 - 8.5 Nitrate < 10 mg/L Oil and Grease < 5 mg/L 3.6.1.1 Recycled wastewater discharge samples shall be taken every 3,000 gallons to ensure levels do not exceed the above criteria. 3.6.2 Remove and dispose of spent chemicals and solutions in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. 3.6.3 Accomplish a fresh water flush of all internal surfaces cleaned in 3.5. 3.7 Dry tubes, headers, drums, and downcomers using clean, dry air immediately upon completion of waterjet cleaning. Remove pockets of water and dry surfaces using clean rags. "CLEANLINESS" (G) (V) 3.8 Inspect surfaces to ensure the following requirements are met: 3.8.1 Surfaces shall be dry. 3.8.2 There shall be no evidence of flash rusting. There shall be a streaking effect seen when looking into the 3.8.3 tubes. The streaking effect shall begin within one to 2 inches from the tube e. end and continue through the visible length of the tub Soft deposits and obstructions shall be removed. 3.8.4 Residual sodium nitrite deposits remaining after the surfaces 3.8.5 acceptable are dried is . NOTES : 4. 4.1 None. 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 31 FY - 1 9

204 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 19 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 DATE: 07 MAR 201 7 CATEGORY: II __ 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Cleaning and Painting Requirements; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 Standard Items 2.2 S9086 - VD - STM - 010/CH - 631, Preservation of Ships in Service - General 29 CFR 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard 2.3 Employment, Subparts C and Z S9510 Nuclear Powered Submarine Atmosphere Control 010/(U), - ATM - AB - 2.4 Manual Systems and Specifications, SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 2 2.5 015, Submarine Preservation 2.6 MS6310 - 081 - S6360 2.7 010, Camouflage Manual, Surface Ship Concealment - MAN - AG - VG 2.8 S9086 - STM - 010/CH - 634, Deck Coverings - 2.9 ASTM D4417, Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel 2.10 NACE International Standards 2.11 3, Assessment of Dust on Steel Surfaces Prepared for - ISO 8502 Painting (Pressure Sensitive Tape Method) 2.12 079, Damage Control Practical Damage Control - S9086 - CN - STM - 020/CH - - - 505, Piping Systems RK STM - - 010/CH 2.13 S9086 : REQUIREMENTS 3. 3.1 General Preservation Requirements: 3.1.1 Consider marine coatings , and abrasive blast ing media to contain heavy metals (e.g., beryllium, cadmium, chromium, or lead), 1 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

205 hexavalent chromium, crystalline silica and/or other toxic or hazardous substances. 3.1.2 Accomplish safety precautions as specified in 2.2, 2.3, and the Work Item task order during surface preparation and the application or or removal of marine coatings . 3.1.2.1 For deck coverings installed onboard submarines, NAVSEA - approved deck covering systems shall comply with the requirements of 2.4. 3.1.3 Blast Media: 3.1.3.1 Maintain a current copy of material certification of abrasive blast media conforming to MIL - A - 22262, A - A - 1722, or A - A - 59316 for reference by the SUPERVISOR. Copy shall be available prior to blasting. - A - 22262 abrasives must be listed on the Qu alified Products List (QPL), or MIL the repair activity shall have written notification from NAVSEA indicating pending listing on the QPL. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, to the SUPERVISOR upon request. For A - A - 1722 - or A - A abrasives, a complete data package demonstrating compliance with 59316 the requirements must be provided by the supplier to the procuring activity. Exceptions are listed in 3.1.3.2 and 3.1.3.3. Recyclable Encapsulated Abrasive Media material 3.1.3.2 conforming to SSPC AB 4 may be used as an alternative to obtain NACE 2/ SSPC - - SP 10 or SSPC - SP 11 cleanliness. 3.1.3.3 Recyclable ferrous metallic abrasive materials conforming to AB 3 of 2.5 may be used as an abrasive blast media for steel substrates. Cleanliness of recyclable ferrous metallic abrasive materials shall be measured and maintained in accordance with the requirements of AB 2 of 2.5. 3.1.3.4 For requirements specified in 3.1.3.3, maintain a current copy of the results of the quality control requirements of Paragraph 6 of AB 2 and quality assurance test required by Paragraph 5 of AB 3 of 2.5 for reference by the SUPERVISOR. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or a, to the SUPERVISOR upon request. approved transferrable medi Steel 3.1.3.5 media, defined as steel shot, steel grit, AB 4 media containing steel abrasive SHALL stainless steel media, and SSPC - NOT be used for on LHA, LHD, LPD, and LSD Class ship surface preparation catwalk, and hangar , vertical replenishment deck, elevators, flight deck, superstructure above the flight deck . Steel media may be use d on tanks and deck s and associated voids below the flight, hangar , and vehicle storage ramps f the steel media with containment that prevents release o onto the elevators, , vertical replenishment deck, catwalk, and flight deck, hangar AB 4 media that does not contain superstructure - SSPC . above the flight deck - steel abrasive or MIL A - 22262 abrasive may be used on flight decks and other ar The following checkpoints apply eas of LHA, LHD, LPD, and LSD Class ships. Class ship on ONLY when steel media is being used on an LHA, LHD, LPD, or LSD tanks and voids below the flight, hangar, and vehicle storage decks and . associated ramps 2 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

206 MEDIA BLASTING PROCESS AND MEDIA CONTAINMENT INSPECTION” (V)(G)”STEEL 3.1.3.6 Steel media blasting equipment, steel media, wastes from steel media blasting, materials used to contain steel media , and workers conducting steel media blasting shall not be allowed to transit or otherwise come into contact with the flight, hangar, and vehicle storage decks and associated ramps. Accomplish a start of blasting media containment inspection to ensure blast Any media is contained within the confines of the work area. media detected outside of the containment shall be reported to the SUPERVISOR. (V)(G)”BLASTING MIDPOINT MEDIA CONTAINMENT INSPECTION” 3.1.3.7 Accomplish a blasting midpoint media containmen t inspection to ensure blast media is contained within the confines of the work Any media detected outside of the containment shall be reported to the area. SUPERVISOR. (V)(G)”POST BLASTING MEDIA CONTAINMENT INSPECTION” ting media containment 3.1.3.8 Accomplish a post blas inspection to ensure blast media is contained withi n the confines of the work area. Any media detected outside of the containment shall be reported to the SUPERVISOR. FINAL (V)(G)” BLASTING MEDIA VISUAL INSPECTION” media 3.1.3.9 Acco all mplish a visual inspection to ensure , wastes from steel media blasting, and steel media blasting equipment is completely removed from the ship . Any media detected outside of the or left on the ship containment . shall be reported to the SUPERVISOR Abrasive blast steel and aluminum plates, shapes, and ferrous 3.1.4 piping, equal to NACE 2/SSPC - SP 10 of 2.5 and 2.10, establishing a surface , and coat, prior to shipboard profile that meets the requirements of 3.10.5 installations except in the areas where weld joints remain to be accomplished, or unless specified otherwise in the invoking Work Item or task order. Material for fuel oil storage, fuel oil service, and diesel service tanks shall not be painted. If these materials are to be installed in potable water, reserve feedwater, or freshwater drain collection tanks, they shall be blasted and coated at a maximum 50 percent relative humidity from surface preparation checkpoint acceptan ce until cure to recoat time of final up of the topcoat; for materials to be installed in all other areas, - touch they shall be blasted and coated at a maximum 85 percent relative humidity; this requirement supersedes Notes (26) and (29A). For t anks, when masking is removed from the open ends 3.1.4.1 adherent paint or remain bare up to - of piping, the piping may retain tightly 6 inches above the open end. Loose or delaminating paint shall be prepared SP 2. - to SSPC ferrous piping which - For non penetrates bulkheads, 3.1.4.2 extend paint one to 2 inches (onto the pipe) beyond the bulkhead penetration weld. - pipe 3 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

207 Non 3.1.4.3 - ferrous piping and cable pans , which are to be preserved shipboard, shall be prepared SP 2 in accordance with SSPC - or SSPC - ferrous piping SP 16 of 2.5. For painted non - and cable pans in tanks of nuclear powered ships, surface preparation shall be in accordance with SSPC - shall not be ferrous piping one inch in diameter or less SP 16 of 2.5. N on - or painted. Surface profil prepared e is not required. 3.1.4.4 Diffusers in reserve feedwater dump tanks shall not be painted. 3.1.5 With the exception of potable water, reserve feedwater, and PRF - - freshwater drain collecting tanks, nonskid applications (MIL 24667), and / single coat app - PRF - 23236 Type VII Class x lications (MIL 18 ). For steel substrates on surface ships, preconstruction primer may be retained and overcoated with applicable coating systems specified in Tables One through 5, if the preconstruction primer application process meets the following: The preconstruction primer shall be a zinc silicate 3.1.5.1 material. Compatibility with the coating systems specified in Tables One through 5 shall be confirmed by the coating manufacturer. “PROCESS INSPECTION” (I) The preconstruction primer shall be applied in a 3.1.5.2 - The surface QP 3. QP 1, or SSPC - process which is certified to ISO 9001, SSPC NACE 2/ SSPC - SP 10 of 2.5 shall meet the requirements of and 2.10 , and t he ments of 3.10.2, process shall be verified to meet the technica l require a minimum of once per shift. 3.10. 5, and 3.10. 6 3.1.5.3 maximum The relative humidity requirement of 3.10.1 shall be 85 percent. The secondary surface preparation, once the steel is 3.1.5.4 in accordance with 3.1.5.5 through installed shipboard, shall be accomplishe d 3.1.5.8. Accomplish degreasing/cleaning prior to surface 3.1.5.5 preparation to ensure that the surface is free of contaminants in accordance with SSPC - SP 1 of 2.5. 3.1.5.6 - tion primer preconstruc the - clean Brush off blast of 2.5 and 2.10 SP 7 to remove contaminants and - SSPC NACE 4/ surface to coated thorough pressure wash of the area with fresh water at 3,000 A loose paint. pounds per square inch to 5,000 (PSI) may be substituted for the off blast to - - SSPC NACE 4/ SP 7. degreasing/cleaning to SSPC - brush SP 1 and the For cumulative surface areas less than 10 percent of the total area, with no individual area greater than 10 square feet, SP 3 cleaning followed - an SSPC substituted for by a fresh water wipe ma NACE 4/ SSPC - SP 7. y be For weld joints where the preconstruction primer was 3.1.5.7 burned away, and for any other areas of visible rust where the 4 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

208 preconstruction primer had been previously damaged, clean the affected areas required by applicable Line in Tables One through 5. to the level 3.1.5.8 Upon completion of secondary surface preparation , the SP 1 of 2.5. A visual water surface shall meet the requirements of SSPC - - F 21 or SP - validate SSPC 22) on the surface may be used to break test (ASTM F - 1. 3.1.6 up, disturbed (terms are clarified in 3.6), and/or - For touch inaccessible areas, the minimum surface preparation shall be that shown in Tables One through 8, except that an SSPC - SP 11 is acceptable for areas WJ - SP 10 or NACE/SSPC - SP 2. The decision originally requirin g a NACE 2/SSPC - that an area is inaccessible shall be determined by inspection and agreed to by the SUPERVISOR prior to surface preparation. The degree of surface preparation required would be the maximum possible for that area, but could not include retention of existing tightly adherent paint in inaccessible areas to exceed 0.02 percent of the total surface area, with no individual areas han 2 square inches. larger t 3.1.7 - Feather edges of well adhered paint re maining after cleaning for all surface preparation methods. Feathering is e xplained in more detail in 3.6.4 . 3.1.8 Clean insulation and lagging prior to painting; ensure such areas are free of foreign matter and contaminants that would prevent e of paint. adherenc 3.1.9 Clean and dry all prepa red and previously coat ed surfaces; ensure such surfaces are free of foreign matter that will affect adherence of coatings . Inclusions such as dust and debris in the coating film shall be removed prior to the ap plication of the next coat. Record and restore existing painted labels, compartment 3.1.10 designations, hull markings, and interior photoluminescent tape/markings other painted information which will be removed or covered during cleaning coat ing op erations, except for Visual Landing Aid (VLA) markings. VLA and marking installation is addressed in 3.11.13. 3.1.11 Install masking material for protection of equipment and items not to be coat ed during preservation. Shipboard items not to be coat ed are listed in 2.2 and 2.6. Remove masking material upon completion of final coating. Clean shoe coverings shall be worn when walking on prepared or 3.1.12 coat ed surfaces. Shoe coverings shall be selected that do not degrade and contaminate surfaces. listed on the Unless otherwise specified, only 13 3.1. coatings Government Qualified Products Database (QPD) shall be applied. All coatings - that are qualified to performance specifications (MIL PRF) are to be applied AVSEA in accordance with the manufacturer’s N - reviewed ASTM F718 product data sheet. The dry film thickness (DFT) , temperature, relative humidity, and surface preparation requirements stated herein take precedence over the 5 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

209 - reviewed ASTM F718 data sheets if there is a conflict. The NAVSE A - NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 data sheets shall supersede any other manufacturer’s ASTM F718 data sheets for that product, even if it is newer (more recent) than the NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 data sheets. Copies of the NAVSEA - - reviewed ASTM F718 data sheets are ava ilable from the Naval Surface Treatment Center (NST Center) website: http://www.nstcenter.biz. system components in a cool, dry place. Do not coating 3.1.14 Store , ght. For all coatings expose to freezing temperatures or direct sunli 90 mperature shall be maintained between 50 and storage ambient te degrees Fahrenheit, or within the manufacturer’s recommended storage temperature range with written authorization from the SUPERVISOR. Low temperature nonskid systems (nonskid and primer) shall be stored bet ween 65 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit with the optimal storage temperature being between 70 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit. 3.1.14.1 Monitor the storage temperature over the 24 - hour period prior to initiation of the application process and document the and maximum temperatures. If recorded manually, temperature shall be minimum during the 24 hour period. once per shift (not to exceed 12 hours) - recorded Manual readings are not necessary if monitoring equipment is used that tracks - for the 24 minimum and maximum temperature hour period. When approved by the SUPERVISOR, a 3.1.14.2 s an alternative to the storage monitoring requirement for coatings in 3.1.14.1, a maximum of 1 hour before application of products, measure individual components (after coating but before components are combined together) with a each is mixed, thermometer to confirm that each component of the system is within the required range. - - PRF 3.1.14.3 When MIL 23236 Type VII coatings are applied recirculation and preheating, the using a plural component spray pump with 24 - hour storage temperature requirement is waived. When applying paint, multiple coats shall be of contrasting 3.1.15 colors, unless specifically stated otherwise in Tables One through 8. omponent (such as 2 systems part) - When using multiple c coating 3.1.16 (e.g., epoxies and polyurethanes), use of "partial kits" is prohibited unless using verified proportioning equipment or other verified measuring equipment (gravimetric). nonskid coatings. Use of partial kits is prohibited for 3.1.17 For surface ships, for commercial underwater hull coating 3.1.18 including anti - corrosive paints and antifouling paints, the systems . No manufacturer's primer must be used with its antifouling paint substitution is allowed. corrosive paints shall be Successive coats of anti - of a contrasting color. Coats of antifouling paints shall be of the colors stated in Tables One through 5. paint For all ships, antifouling 3.1.18 may be repaired, .1 efined in 4.3 with any other approved up, and/or overcoated as d - touched 6 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

210 ablative antifouling system, and approved antifouling paints may be applied over any approved exterior anti paints must be corrosive system. Antifouling - tings. Type I or II; this does not apply to foul release (Type III) coa 3.1.19 Apply the first coat of MIL 24647 antifouling paint when PRF - - the last coat of epoxy paint is ) and in still tacky (as defined in 3.6.3 - reviewed accordance with applicable NAVSEA If the maximum recoat ASTM F718. time for the epoxy is exceed ed, accomplish the overcoat window requirements of 3.5, then apply a tack coat of epoxy paint one to 2 milli - inches (mils) wet film thickness (WFT) over previously painted surfaces. The epoxy tack full coat of coat shall be allowed to cure until tacky, the fi rst and then antifouling paint shall be applied. 3.1.20 Mix and apply all coatings in accordance with the product’s NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718, except for invoked requirements for surface preparation and dry film thickness (DFT) as specified in Table s One through 8. shelf life / expiration Coatings that are past their 3.1.20 .1 date shall not be applied without written authorization from the SUPERVISOR. Boats and small craft that are embarked on surface ships or 21 3.1. otherwise deployed should meet the camouflage requirements of 2.7. 3.1. based latex fire retardant paints in preference - Utilize water 22 to chlorinated alkyd based fire retardant paints in areas where condensation, - high humidity, and temperatures below 50 degrees Fahrenheit are n ot expected during application and cure. Such paints are available under MIL PRF - 24596. - 3.1.23 Mix and apply the Navy Polyamide Epoxy MIL - DTL - 24441 paints in accordance with the following, except the DFT shall be as specified in Tables - to - one by - mixing ratio is one paints’ 24441 One through 8. The MIL - DTL volume. The components of the various formulas are not interchangeable. Blend each component thoroughly prior to mixing the components. After mixing equal volumes of the 2 components, the mixture m ust be thoroughly stirred. For Type III only, the stand - in times listed below must be observed. There is no induction time for Type IV. DTL 3.1.23 .1 Stand in time (induction time) for MIL - - - 24441 Type III is considered to be the time immediately following the mixing of components A and B, during which the critical reaction period of these components is initiated and is essential to the complete curing of t he paint . During stand - in time, the mixture must be thoroughly stirred at least once every 20 minutes to avoid hot spots caused by localized overheating from the chemical reaction. Surface Temperature at Job Site - In Time in Hours _ (Degrees Fahrenheit) _____ _ Stand 2 35 to 50 hours at 70 degrees Fahrenheit (paint temperature) 50 to 60 2 hours at job site temperature 7 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

211 60 to 70 One hour to 1 - 1/2 hours at job site temperature 70 to 90 1/2 to one hour at job site temperature For proper curing, the maximum application and cure 3.1. 24 - DTL - 24441 products shall be 90 degrees Fahrenheit temperature for MIL (ambient and surface temperature). 3.1. 25 Powder coating application may be used if approved by the SUPERVISOR ; otherwise use applicable Lines in Tables One through 8. Powder coatings may be overcoated with liquid paints. Powder coated items require . Any use of a SP 10 - near white metal blast, NACE 2/SSPC surface preparation coatings) requires approval chemical pretreatment (e.g., phosphate conversion For areas listed in 3.7, by NAVSEA. ) QA checkpoints are quality assurance ( still required for items that are powder coated. Powder coatings are not practical for use on large 25 .1 3.1. scale applications to ship structure - ge components or ship structure. Any lar require approval by NAVSEA. 25 3.1. Powder coating is not authorized for use on .2 components, covers, or any parts to be installed in potable, reserve feed water, or freshwater drain collecting tanks aboard nuclea r powered ships. .3 SUPERVISOR approval shall denote 25 3.1. For surface ships, specific items or classes of items and applications. .4 25 3.1. For submarines, powder coating may be used if approved by the SUPERVISOR. Thermoplastic powder coatings (such as vinyls, nylons, polyethylenes, and polypropylenes) are not authorized for interior or use on those submarine applications and powder coatings are prohibited f components and coating applications governed by reactor plant paint schedules. Application of thermoset powder coatings to approved components using the electrostatic spray method are to be accomplished in accordance with Uniform Industria l Process Instruction (UIPI) 0631 - 901, “Electrostatic Powder Coating” or equivalent as approved by the SUPERVISOR. Interior and exterior miscellaneous metal components to be powder coated shall be non - reactor plant miscellaneous components. ir flasks may be powder coated as approved by the .5 25 3.1. A SUPERVISOR. Accomplishment of installation of slip resistant deck 26 3.1. coverings in interior and exterior applications on surface ships shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (see Note ) 4.10 . Exterior applications require material designated as coarse on NAVSEA reviewed manufacturer’s instructions. .1 3.1.26 For submarines, slip resistant deck coverings are approved for limited interior application during Chief of Naval Operations vailabilities in dry dock only. (CNO) a 8 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

212 3.1.26 .2 Slip resistant deck coverings shall not be painted or 24667 color - topped for cosmetic purposes. MIL - PRF - color topping is authorized as required for safety or VLA markings. ings are mandatory for use 3.1.26 .3 Slip resistant deck cover on masts, antenna platforms, and yardarms receiving nonskid. Do not install slip resistant deck coverings on .4 3.1.26 diamond plate. used on interior spaces of submarines are approved Paints 3.1. 27 under the Submarine Atmosphere Control Program and listed on the Submarine Material Control List (SMCL). For interior use on submarines, only those PRF MIL - e used. For use in - 23236 Type VII paints listed in Note (8A) may b listed in paints Table use tanks, voids, and freefloods on submarines, only . 8 inspections and repairs required by the 28 3.1. For submarines, SUPERVISOR shall be accomplished before the prime coat is applied if using high solids pain ts . Upon completion of structural repairs, the affected be abrasive blasted to areas shall NACE 2/ SSPC - SP 10 prior to paint application unless otherwise specified. 3.1. 29 Restrictions on repair activity personnel (which includes Contractors) working in propulsion plant spaces aboard nuclear powered ships shall be in accordance with NAVSEAINST 4350.2 (Series) (Contract Work Onboard Nuclear - Powered Ships). 3.1.30 For nuclear powered ships, surfaces covered by a reactor plant paint schedule shall use th at schedule for all preservation and painting requirements for those surfaces. 3.1.31 For areas that require 100 percent preservation or major structural repairs/modifications, coating removal may be accomplished prior - e requirements of 009 to starting the repairs without th 32 applying until the full surface preparation can be accomplished in accordance with the applicable Table and Line. (I) "CLEANING" .1 - Accomplish the requirements of SSPC SP 1 of 2.5 prior 3.1.31 WJ - repared to NACE/SSPC - SP to coating removal. For areas p 2 of 2.5 and 2.10 with ultra high pressure (UHP) waterjetting equipment, the requirement of initial degreasing/cleaning is waived. A visual water break test (ASTM F - 21 - 22) on the surface may be used to validate SSPC SP 1. or F - 3.1.32 On surface ships, accomplish the requirements of SSPC - SP 15 of - PRF - 23236 primer or tank system 2.5 and apply one coat of appropriate MIL DTL - - 8 mils, or 2 coats of appropriate MIL 24441 tank system coating at 6 - oid, and vent plenum bolting rings. coating at 2 - 4 mils/coat, for tank, v 3.2 Stripe Coat Requirements: 9 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

213 For all areas where stripe coating is required, as denoted in 3.2.1 - Tables One through 8, apply stripe coat in accordance with applicable NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 data sheet to edges, weld seams, welds of attachments and appendages, cutouts, corners, butts, foot/handholds (including inaccessible areas such as back side of piping, underside of I - beams), and other mounting - flat surface). Stripe coat these areas after the p revious coat hardware (non tions in accordance with 3.10.9 have been completed. The has dried and inspec stripe coat shall encompass all edges as well as at least a one - inch border - based paints shall have outside each edge and weld. For submarines, solvent oat applied by brush. the stripe c 3.2.1.1 Each stripe coat shall be of the specified paint system and shall be a different color from both the paint over which it is omes in 2 being applied and the next coat in the system (if a product only c colors, the stripe coat shall contrast with the color of the previous coat). Full coat inspection shall be conducted prior to stripe coat application. 3.2.2 A stripe coat is no longer specified for MIL - PRF - 23236 Type VII paints. Instead, - PRF - 23236 Type VII paints require MIL additional DFT readings to be performed in accordance with Attachment A. These readings 23236 Type VII paint on shall be performed following the last coat of MIL - PRF - the areas where the stripe coat would have been applied . 23236 Type VII coatings, runs, drips and sags may - PRF - For MIL 3.2.3 appear. In areas where DFTs of runs, drips, and sags are 50 mils or less, no action is required; areas with DFTs in excess of 50 mils shall be assessed by the SUPERVISOR. Cure time is dependent on temperature; products applied at lower 3.3 temperature will need more time to cure. This includes low temperature NAVSEA Cure time of each coat shall be reviewed . - coating s in accordance with he following requirements: ASTM F718 unless otherwise specified in t for potable, 3.3.1 Drying time between coats of a specified paint reserve feedwater, and freshwater drain collecting tanks shall be a minimum 36 hours (for paint applied to more than 2 percent of the tank surface of area) or 1 2 hours (for paint applied to 2 percent or less of the tank surface area) at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees Fahrenheit (substrate and ambient), using heated air if necessary to maintain temperature. Ventilation shall be sufficient to ensure continuou s flow of air through the tanks with For potable water tanks at least one complete air change every 4 hours. - - coated with MIL PRF paints and reserve feedwater tanks 23236 Type VII Class 9 - - nuclear ships coated with MIL - PRF on non 23236 Type VII Class 11 and 11/18 paints, see Note (55) for surface ships and Note (39A) for submarines. paint applications, potable, reserve feedwater, and 3.3.2 Following freshwater drain collecting tanks shall be continuously ventilated with a minimum of one complete air chang e every 4 hours for at least 5 consecutive days prior to filling with water. During the ventilation period, maintain a minimum tank temperature of 70 degrees Fahrenheit (substrate and ambient). lled and Verify and document daily that ventilation is properly insta . (document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 1) operating For potable water tanks coated with MIL and reserve feedwater 23236 Type VII Class 9 paints - PRF - 10 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

214 tanks on non - - PRF - 23236 Type VII Class 11 and nuclear ships coated with MIL , see Not e (55) for surface ships and Note (39A) for submarines. 11/18 paints 3.3.2.1 For potable water tanks, once the final topcoat is fully cured (as defined in the product's NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F - 718 data - sheet), inspect the surface for cleanliness. Verify that the su rface meets the requirements of SP 1 by wiping all tank surfaces with potable water applied to clean, light - colored rags. When wiping, the surface shall, when viewed without magnification, be free of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, matter. Any surfaces producing visible contamination on a and other foreign rag shall be re - cleaned until both rag and surface are visually free of contamination. As an option to wiping the tank, the tank shall be completely filled with potable water and drained at least twice to ensure tank cleanliness. 3.3.3 Prior to application of any MIL PRF - 24635 over an epoxy paint , - the epoxy shall be dry to the touch but not fully cured (as defined on the epoxy paint’s NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F - 718 as cure to service) before - overcoa ting. The epoxy shall be overcoated with MIL - PRF - 24635 within 7 days of the epoxy application. Dry to the touch is defined in ASTM D1640. paint , such as MIL based - Prior to application of any water - 3.3.4 , allow the epoxy paint 24596, over an epoxy - PRF to dry for at least 16 hours. 24441: 3.4 Overcoating of MIL - DTL - 24441 with MIL - DTL - 3.4.1 If less than 7 days has elapsed since the application of the prior coat, the next coat may be applied after visual inspection to confirm the absence of grease, di rt, salts, or other surface contaminants. If surface contamination is suspected as a result of visual inspection or for other reasons, the entire surface shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC - SP - DTL d after surfaces are 24441 shall be applie 1 of 2.5. The next coat of MIL - completely dried. 3.4.2 If more than 7 days but less than 30 days has elapsed since the application of the prior coat, the entire surface shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC - SP 1 of 2.5. Ensure the surface has fully dried, and apply a mist coat (one to 2 mils WFT) of the last coat applied or then - 8 hours; Formula 150. The mist coat shall be allowed to cure (dry) for 4 then apply the next full coat of the system. This condition can only be met one time during the painting syst em application. 3.4.3 If more than 30 days has elapsed since the application of the prior coat, the entire surface shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC - SP 1 of 2.5. After allowing the surface to dry, the surface shall be lightly off abrasive blast (preferred), - abraded to degloss the epoxy, using a brush power sanding, or hand sanding using 80 120 grit, then apply the next full - coat of the system. 3.5 DTL 24441 Epoxy Paints - : - - Overcoating of Non MIL reviewed - Follow the manufacturer's NAVSEA 3.5.1 ASTM F718 instructions for the allowable overcoat window, not to exceed 30 days. The 11 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

215 30 day maximum may be extended beyond 30 days if specifically approved in - writing by NAVSEA. Where the base coat and topcoat are provided from different manufacturers, t he term "manufacturer" refers to the manufacturer of the base coat. Application of a mist or tack coat shall not restart the 30 - day window. 3.5.1.1 If either the manufacturer's NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718 instructions or the 30 - day window (or a specific extension approved by paint shall be reactivated by following the NAVSEA) has been exceeded, the reviewed ASTM F718 for reactivating instructions of the manufacturer’s NAVSEA - the surface, as approved by the SUPERVISOR. 3.6 Clarification of Terms: - installed up of in 3.6.1 Touch - service coatings (i.e., not newly - coatings) is defined differently within this Standard Item for surface ships and submarines. - Touch up is defined within this Standard Item for 3.6.1 .1 s on cumulative surface areas less than submarines as preservation operation one percent of the total area (e.g., bilge, tank, space, etc.) being . Included under vidual area greater than 4 square feet preserved, with no indi touch uare feet ed surfaces of less than 4 sq up operations are new and disturb - . Except for potable, reserve feedwater, or freshwater drain collecting tanks, the documentation requirements of 3.7 and 3.8.1 are replaced with Appendix 9 service or for touch - up of in - Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 1 is still required), and th coatings (3.8.1. e requirements of 3.10.2, 3.10.5, 3.10.6 shall be verified by the accomplishing activity as 10.7, and 3.10.9 , 3. coating applications. (I) inspections prior to 3.6.1 .2 For potable, reserve feedwater, or freshwater drain collecting tanks on nuclear powered surface ships, touch up is defined within - this Standard Item as preservation operations on cumulative surface areas less than 1 percent of the total area being preserved, with no indiv idual area greater than 10 square fe et . Included under touch - up operations are new and disturbe d surfaces of less than 10 square feet . For surface ship areas, except for potable, reserve .3 3.6.1 feedwater, or freshwater drain collecting tanks on nuclear powered surface up i ships, touch - s defined within this Standard Item as preservation operations on cumulative surface areas less than 10 percent of the total area (e.g., bilge, tank, space, etc.) being preserved, with no individual area u - p operations are new and greater than 10 sq uare feet . Included under touch disturbe . The documentation d surfaces of less than 10 square feet up of in requirements of 3.7 and 3.8 are waived for touch - - service coatings, 11.5, /3. rements of 3.10.2/3.11.3, 3.10.5/3.11.4, 3.10.6 and the requi /3.11.10 shall be verified by the accomplishing 3.10.9 3.10.7/3.11.6, and activity as (I) inspections prior to applications. coating .4 3.6.1 Except for potable, reserve feedwater, and freshwater up of in - service MIL drain collecting tanks on nuclear powered ships touch - - - PRF - 24441 Type IV and MIL - L DT 23236 paint systems may be performed . interchangeably using any of these paints 12 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

216 3.6. 1 .5 On surface ships and submarines, for new and disturbed reas of individual areas 2 square feet or less totaling less than 0.03 a percent o f the total surface area, t he requirements of Notes (26) and (29A) do not apply. Except for potable, reserve feedwater and fresh water drain collecting tanks, the requirements to perform and document the following /3.11.3 .1 /3.11.2 , 3.10.2 paragraphs are waived: 3.10 , 3.10. 5 /3.11.4 , 11.5 3.10. 6 ; the documentation /3. , 3.10. 7 /3.11.6 , and 3.10. 9 /3.11.10 requirements of 3.7 and 3.8 are also waived. The requirement of 3.10.1.1 shall be accomplished, but not documented. For application, apply paint in a paints ccordance with Tables One through 8 with the following exception: apply only one coat of primer on prepared substrate, followed by topcoat product applied to overlap intact paint by a minimum of one inch around primer. Disturbed surfaces are defin 3.6.2 ed as any surface that requires cleaning and/or coating due to existing coating finish being damaged in the accomplishment of work specified by the Work Item or task order. Exterior surfaces of underwater hull closure .1 3.6.2 plates/hull accesses and t heir associated welds will not be considered prepared, painted, and documented in disturbed surfaces and shall be cleaned, eviations For surface ships, d accordance with the applicable area. from the n size, location, requirements may be authorized by the SUPERVISOR based o application, or severity of condition of the paint system being applied. 3.6.2 Interior surfaces of underwater hull closure .2 plates/hull access - associated welds shall have surface preparation in accordance with 3.1.6. .3 The word "new" in "new and disturbed surfaces" refers 3.6.2 regardless of to all material installed on the ship by the repair activity source. 3.6.3 Tacky is defined as that curing (drying) timeframe when a fingertip pressed lightly , without twisting, against th e paint film leaves no residue on the finger, until the time when the finger leaves only a slight impression on the surface of the paint film . paint 3.6.4 Feathering is used for transition of applying a fresh system that is not removed. To do paint system to an area with an intact this, visible areas of defective old paint shall be removed until an area of completely intact and adhering paint is attained around the defective area by feathering (tapering) the edges of tightly adhering old paint at a n approximate 30 degree slope into the newly prepared bare metal surface, thus preventing application of new paint over loose or cracked paint. Solvent wipe is defined as cleaning a surface by pouring 3.6. 5 , light colored rag and subsequently wiping the surface. solvent on a clean e 3.6. 6 time Initiation of the application process is defined as th is removed from storage for staging at the work site a coating when , but is . coating not the start date/time for applying the 13 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

217 me (CCT) is defined as the accrued time for Creditable Cure Ti 3.6. 7 which data shows compliance with environmental requirements collected in accordance with 3.10.1. CCT is accrued based on established environmental data collection intervals (e.g., 4 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours) wh en consecutive environmental readings are shown to satisfy the requirements of 3.10.1. Regardless of elapsed overall time between consecutive acceptable environmental readings, CCT equivalent to a single data collection interval 24 hours) is accrued. (e.g., 4 hours, 12 hours, 3.7 The following ship structural surfaces are defined as critical coated areas: SURFACES TYPE OF SUBSTRATE surfaces Underwater hull, including appendages and below the waterline up to and including the All boottopping Cofferdams Steel and aluminum landing, Hangar, flight (including aircraft elevator), Steel and aluminum catapult, and vertical replenishment decks Recovery, Assist, Securing and Traversing (RAST) track Steel and aluminum (including sumps) trough eck overheads and enclosed boat handling areas Steel and aluminum Well d (including sumps) Surface ship bilges Steel and aluminum Interior surfaces of vent plenums, defined as combustion air intakes (gas turbine, diesel, and Steel and aluminum steam) and other vent system plenums with openings greater than 7 square feet Tanks and floodable voids (including sumps , Steel and aluminum ; see Note (65) ) covers , and bolting rings floodable voids (at waterline or below) Stee - Non l and aluminum Steel and aluminum 41 - Surface ship Vertical Launch System (VLS), MK - 51 Class top of stacks (i.e., 05 level weather DDG Steel decks and bulwarks) Gas turbine exhaust uptake spaces and trunks Steel below the upper boottop All recesses on submarines Steel and (fairwater) nterior surfaces of submarine sail I Steel superstructure when SP 10 is accomplished - SSPC Aircraft Launch and Recovery Equipment (ALRE) defined herein as catapult wing voids, catapult System Steel troughs, catapult exhaust blowdown trunks, barricade stanchions and wells, catapult jet blast deflector pits, and associated void spaces Steel Arresting gear sheave foundations Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) Battery Compartment Steel at conversion 14 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

218 process records in Record and maintain in - 3.7.1 Coating QA Tool Kit (CQATK) p aperless QA program (or NAVSEA - approved equivalent) or on QA Checklist Form Appendices as blasting, coating , inspections, and tests are being accomplished. CQATK program and installation setup are available upon request from the Global Distance Support Center (GDSC), http://www.anchordesk.navy.mil TOUCH. - 1 - - 877 4 - , 1 areas to be 3.7.1.1 For surface ship nonskid work in multiple coated, a detailed sketch shall be completed for each area or zone of installation to indicate the area of work. 3.7.1. 2 QA documentation shall include 3.7.1.3 through 3.7.1.11. 3 3.7.1. Ambient and substrate surface temperatures, relative humidity, and dew point during preservation process (QA Checklist Form Appendix 1); 3.7.1.4 Cleaning/degreasing prior to surface preparation inspection results (QA Checklist Form Appendix 2 or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6); 3.7.1.5 Surface profile readings and surface preparation - 22262 revision number from which method, including name of abrasive and QPL the product was purchased, or copy of NAVSEA product approval letter. (QA Checklist Form Appendix 3 or Naval Shipyard QA Ch ecklist Form Appendix 3 or 3A); 3.7.1.6 Surface conductivity or chloride test results (QA Checklist Form Appendix 4); 3.7.1.7 Surface cleanliness test results for dust (QA Checklist Form Appendix 5); 3.7.1.8 h number, , manufacturer, batc coating Name of and date of expiration (QA Checklist Form Appendix 6); Elapsed time between coats (QA Checklist Form 3.7.1.9 Appendix 6); Dry film thickness (DFT) measurements (QA Checklist 3.7.1.10 surements (QA Checklist Form Appendix 7) and/or wet film thickness (WFT) mea Form Appendix 7A or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 7); 3.7.1.11 Minimum and maximum storage temperatures of the hour period prior to use (QA Checklist Form Appendix 1). - over the 24 coating ces, submit one legible copy, in hard copy 3.7.2 If using QA Appendi media, of recorded in or approved transferrable process information on QA - Checklist Forms to the SUPERVISOR within 72 hours of completion of or preservation of each separate location listed in the invoking Work Item task order. 15 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

219 3.8 Determine the type of surface preparation required and coating system options that are available for use in accomplishing the work. on aircraft ccomplish receipt inspection A 3.8.1 coatings applied for (excluding underwater hull and carriers and submarines to areas listed in 3.7 Accomplish nonskid coating systems) upon receipt from the manufacturer. testing of the following properties in accordance with the requirement of the applicable spec ification and NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718 . Receipt inspect - coating components for density, fineness of grind, and condition viscosity, in container. Receipt inspect mixed coating for dry hard time, sag Receipt inspection resistance, and color of dry film. testing is not required for those characteristics that have satisfactory test data provided on the manufacturer's certificate of compliance or conformance test data forms, or another shipyard's receipt inspection test data forms that meet the Submit one legible copy, in oating specification requirements. applicable c media to the SUPERVISOR upon request. approved transferrable hard copy or On all ships for coatings applied to areas listed in 3.8.1.1 3.7 (excluding underwater hull and nonskid coating sy stems), maintain on file the original manufacturer's certificate of compliance and material conformance test data in accordance with Section 11 of 2.2. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media to the SUPERVISOR upon request. For areas listed in 3.7, if requested by the 3.8.1.2 SUPERVISOR, prepare and submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of Coatings Application Product Summary (CAPS) sheet (QA Checklist Form Appendix 8). 3.9 ollowing certifications for accomplishing preservation Maintain the f operations to areas as listed in 3.7. Information for these certifications institute .org / C ertification . can be found at www.sspc.org and www.nace Coating inspectors shall be certified in accor dance with the 3.9.1 NAVSEA Basic Paint Inspector (NBPI) course, NACE International Coating Inspector Program (CIP) Level 1 or higher, or SSPC Protective Coating Inspector Program (PCI) Level 2. Coating inspectors shall also have a coatings related work experience. minimum of 2 years of marine Organizations performing blasting operations (abrasive and 3.9.2 waterjetting) or shall be certified in accordance with QP application coating 1 of 2.5 (with the exception of the Coating Application Specialist (CAS) uirement) or NAVSEA - approved equivalent. req 3.9.2.1 For components that are removed from the ship and preserved, ISO 9001 may be substituted for QP 1. 3.9.3 Spray painters shall be certified in accordance with SSPC C - NAVSEA - - 12, SSPC C approved equivalent. For 14, SSPC CAS Level 2, or equivalent certifications, a copy of the NAVSEA approval letter shall be maintained by the repair activity. 16 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

220 Plural Component Pump Tenders and Applicators shall be 3.9.4 - a pproved equivalent 14 or NAVSEA certified in accordance with SSPC C - certifications. For equivalent certifications, a copy of the NAVSEA approval letter shall be maintained by the repair activity. 7, SSPC Blasters shall be certified in accordance with SSPC C - 3.9.5 approved equiv CAS Level 2, or NAVSEA - alent. For equivalent certifications, a copy of the NAVSEA approval letter shall be maintained by the repair activity. High Pressure waterjetting shall be Blasters performing Ultra 3.9.6 - 13 or NAVSEA - approved equival ent. For certified in accordance with SSPC C equivalent certifications, a copy of the NAVSEA approval letter shall be maintained by the repair activity. 3.10 For all systems except surface ship nonskid, accomplish coating preservation operations in accordance with the following. For surf ace ship nonskid system application, refer to 3.11. (V) "ENVIRONMENTAL READINGS" 3.10.1 ambient and substrate surface temperatures, For coatings , take site, in close proximity relative humidity, and dew point from conditions on - to the structure being coated, for all areas listed in Tables One through 8. Tables Unless otherwise stated within the Notes of 3.10.1.1 One through 8, and as noted in 3.10.1.2, 3.10.1.3, and 3.11.2.3, coatings shall be applied only when the ambient temperature and the temperature of the prepared substrate are 50 degrees Fahrenheit or greater and a minimum of 5 ve the dew point. The maximum relative humidity shall degrees Fahrenheit abo be 85 percent. For areas listed in 3.7, readings shall be documented on QA checklist Form Appendix 1. - In areas where MIL 3.10.1.2 - 23236 Type VII Class 15B PRF products are specified, these products are exempt from dew point and relative humidity requirements. For these products, dew point and relative humidity do not need to be recorded on QA Checklist Forms. The only products that may be applied below 50 3.10.1.3 degrees Fahrenheit are those specified in the Tables and Notes for use below 50 degrees Fahrenheit. These environmental readings shall be taken prior to, 3.10.1.4 after, t . of creditable cure time to 48 hours he application of a coat Creditab le cure time is defined in 3.6.7 For areas preserved under . 3.6.1.1/3.6.1 .3, environmental readings shall be taken immediately prior to start of application to 24 hours afte . If a final r application of a coat to immersion coat fully cures /service in less than 48 hours (24 hours for 1 . 3.6 .1/3.6. 1 .3), as defined in its NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718, environmental to readings for that final coat shall be taken until the product's cure immersion /service time is reached. For potable, reserve feedwater, and freshwater drain collecting tanks on s ubmarines and aircraft carriers, during inspection of each coat, the (G) point inspection shall validate that the 17 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

221 environmental readings during application and curing of that coat comply with All components blasted a nd primed in applicable environmental requirements. accordance with 3.1.4 shall have environmental readings taken until the cure to recoat time is reached. 3.10.1.5 For potable, reserve feedwater, and freshwater drain collecting tanks, environmental readings shall be taken from the surface preparation acceptance checkpoint to 5 days of creditable cure time after application of the final coat, unless otherwise stated in Tables One through 8. The preferred method of measurement is use of a data 3.10.1.6 logger. If a data logger is used, i t shall collect data at a minimum of every one hour . A m anual reading shall be taken once every 24 hours and at every evolution involving - (G) points. For areas listed in 3.7, manual readings shall be documented on QA Checklist Form Appendix 1. Maintain all data logger recorded data with the QA appendices. a data logger is not used, 3.10.1.7 For areas where environmental readings shall be manually taken every 4 hours and at every For areas list . except as modified below points evolution involving (G) ed in - 3.7, readings shall be documented on QA Checklist Form Appendix 1. For areas where relative humidity is maintained 3.10.1.8 (through the use of dehumidification equipment or forced hot air) below 50 than 5 degrees above the dew percent and the surface temperature is greater point, manual readings where a data logger is not used are required once every 12 hours and at every evolution involving a (G) point. - - 3.10.1.9 Environmental readings at (G) points are only en in 3.10.1.4 and 3.10.1.5. required within the timeframes giv 3.10.1.10 Environmental readings shall be monitored during application of powder coating products, but they do not need to be recorded. (I) or (I)(G) "CLEANLINESS" (See 4.4) 3.10.2 Accomplish degreasing/cleaning prior to surface preparation to ensure that the surface is free of contaminants in accordance with SSPC - SP 1 SP of 2.5. For areas prepared to NACE/SSPC - WJ - 2 of 2.5 and 2.10 with UHP requirement of initial degreasing/cleaning is waterjetting equipment, the 21 or F - d. A visual water break test (ASTM F waive 22) on the surface may be - SP 1. For areas listed in 3.7, document on QA used to validate SSPC - . Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 Checklist Form Appendix 2 or m of 4 hours prior to Inspect the surface a maximu 3.10.2.1 - start of coating removal to ensure accomplishment of SSPC SP 1. For areas listed in 3.7, document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 2 or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 . Except for tanks, surface preparation by abra sive blasting is 3.10.3 prohibited on submarine interior surfaces, with the exception that use of 18 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

222 self - Recyclable Encapsulated Abrasive Media material conforming to contained - SSPC is permissible in submarine machinery spaces. AB 4 | 3.10.4 Limit the squ are footage of surfaces being prepared for preservation to an area that can be coated prior to the occurrence of flash ve any flash rust prior to coat ing, except as rusting and/or oxidation. Remo follows: 3.10.4 .1 Surfaces cleaned by waterjetting shall meet the applicable NACE/SSPC Standard for flash rust. For submarines, the first coat of epoxy primer shall be applied within 24 hours of coating removal if removal is by non - automated waterjetting. The 3.10.4 .2 water used in waterjetting shall not include detergents or inhibitors without written approval from the coating manufacturer and the SUPERVISOR. (I) or (I)(G) "SURFACE PROFILE" (See 4.4) One profile measurement shall be 3.10.5 recorded quare for every 200 s feet for the first 1,000 square feet; for each additional 500 or square feet profile measurement shall be taken. Profile measurements shall be less , one taken in accordance with Method B or Method C of 2.9. For Method B of 2.9, nt shall be the average (mean) of 10 individual measureme one profile readings. For profile measurements taken in accordance with Method C of 2.9, use profile tape suitable to read subject profile (i.e., coarse to extra - coarse plus ). For Method C of 2.9, one profile measureme nt shall be the average (mean) of 2 individual readings . If any individual reading is found to be greater than or equal to 5 mils, use Method B of 2.9 in those areas to determine existing profile. The retention of profile tape is not required. For areas listed in 3.7, document surface profile on QA Checklist Form . Appendix 3 or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 3 or 3A Following blasting or waterjetting operations, .1 3.10.5 Surface profile shall be - to - valley profile must be checked. surface peak validated on areas without visible pitting. For Method B of 2.9, each profile measurement shall be between 2 and 4 mils. For Method C of 2.9, each profile measurement shall be between 2 and 4 mils, with no individual tape reading less than one mil or greater than 5 mils. If such profile is not present, shall establish the proper profile. repair activity Following power tool cleaning to SSPC SP 11 of 2.5, .2 3.10.5 - mum profile is For submarines, one mil mini surface profile shall be checked. profile measurements shall be 2 acceptable for all areas. For surface ships, mils minimum for areas listed in 3.7 and one mil minimum for all other areas where accessible (inaccessible areas must be determined by inspection and the SUPERVISOR). agreed to by .3 For products without a NAVSEA - reviewed F718, 3.10.5 manufacturer’s instructions may be substituted. .4 3.10.5 Avoid excessive power wire brushing or excessive grinding/sanding which results in a polished surface. 19 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

223 3.10. 5 .5 Con versely, excessive use of mechanical tools (grinders, sanders, chippers, etc.) must be minimized to avoid metal loss. Disc sanders and rotary impact tools fitted with cutter bundle assemblies are not authorized on aluminum substrates . Overly aggressive b lasting which causes metal thickness loss over the amount required for surface profile Excessive depth of profile can cause problems with shall also be avoided. poor coating performance. A greater than recommended surface profile requires a paint film be applied to totally cover the profile to prevent pinpoint or flash rust. The increase in paint film thickness also increases the susceptibility of solvent entrapment, causing blistering and premature failure of the coating. Due to the potenti .6 3.10. al for excessive metal loss, for 5 - 21 and SSN - 774 Class submarines, only the following power tools may be SSN Scot used to obtain an SSPC - SP 11 surface: ch Brite pads, needle guns and R otopeens. On submarines, any areas of potential metal loss by corrosion o r mechanical means shall be documented and reported to the SUPERVISOR. .7 3.10.5 Recyclable Encapsulated Abrasive Media material AB 4 may not establish a sufficient surface profile. If - conforming to SSPC ficient to meet the this method is employed and the profile is insuf repair activity requirements, the shall establish a sufficient surface profile. Waterjetting will not establish a surface profile. 3.10.5 .8 If this method is selected by the and a surface profile does repair activity not exist or i repair activity s insufficient to meet the requirements, the shall establish a sufficient surface profile. (I)(G) "CONDUCTIVITY OR CHLORIDE MEASUREMENT" 3.10.6 For surfaces listed in 3.7, accomplish the requirements for conductivity or chloride measurements as follows: 3.10.6 .1 Following coating removal, accomplish conductivity or with the requirements of 3.10.6 chloride measurements in accordance .3. .2 6 3.10. accomplish a visual inspection within 4 Additionally, hours prior to application of each coat. If evidence of contamination of the .3. plish the requirements of 3.10.6 surface exists, accom Accomplish surface conductivity or chloride checks .3 3.10.6 using available field or laboratory test equipment on the freshly prepared One reading shall be taken for every 200 square feet for the first surface. 1,000 square feet. One determination shall be conducted for every additional 500 . For immersed applications, such as tanks and or less square feet 2 2 ); (30 mg/m t exceed 3 μg/cm chloride measurements shall no bilges, conductivity measurements shall not exceed 30 micro - siemens/cm. For non - 2 chloride measurements shall not exceed 5 μg/cm immersed applications, (50 2 ); mg/m conductivity measurements shall not exceed 70 micro - siemens/cm. Condu ctivity samples shall be collected using a product that meets the 2010, “Methods of Validating Equivalence to ISO - requirements of NACE SP0508 20 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

224 - ” Document on QA . 9 on Measurement of the Levels of Soluble Salts 8502 Checklist Form Appendix 4. Be .4 6 cause conductivity testing measures more than just 3.10. chlorides, for any conductivity check that fails, a confirmatory chloride check may be conducted to confirm chloride levels. If the chloride levels do not e xceed the requirements in 3.10. 6 , the measurem ent passes the .3 conductivity/chloride check. .5 a conductivity check fails and the confirmatory If 3.10.6 chloride measurements exceed the chloride check is not conducted, or if 5,000 PSI) the affected areas with – respective values, water wash (3,000 affected areas and remove all standing water. pota water. Dry the ble Accomplish surface conductivity or chloride checks on affected areas in .3. Repeat step until satisfactory levels are 3.10.6 accordance with obtained. wash, the measurements exceed If, after a freshwater .6 6 3.10. required levels, a salt remover may be used; however, the only salt remover products that may be used for a coating system are those specified on that ASTM F718. - reviewed coating's NAVSEA (I) or (I)(G) "SURFACE PREPARATION" (See 4.4) 3.10.7 Verify surface preparation for the coating systems specified in the Work Item or task order and Tables One through 8 are in accordance with 2.5 and 2.10. For areas listed in 3.7, document on QA Checklist Form Naval Shipya rd QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 . Appendix 3 or .1 3.10.7 For surface ships, surface cleanliness for dust shall be accomplished for the underwater hull and documented on QA Checklist Form Appendix 5. Surface cleanliness for dust shall meet Rating 2, Class 2, of . One dust tape reading shall be taken for every 200 square feet for the 2.11 500 square feet or less , one first 1,000 square feet; for each additional tape reading shall be taken. The tape reading requirement is waived if the on for the entire surface is preparati surface final stage of ultra high waterjetting. (UHP) pressure .2 3.10.7 When waterjetting has been performed to a specified WJ level of cleanliness on a steel surface, and the level of flash rust (low, moderate, or high) cannot be agreed upon bet ween the authorized coating inspector and the Contractor through the use of the written NACE/SSPC WJ standard or the SSPC - VIS 4 visual reference standard, the procedure in Attachment B shall be used to resolve the dispute. can be , and 3.10.7 .10.5, 3.10.6 The checkpoints of 3 .3 3.10.7 accomplished concurrently. in accordance with 3.10. 8 Coating systems shall be applied and cured this NAVSEA Standard Item and applicable NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718s as defined in 3.1.13. 21 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

225 preservation of areas not listed in 3.10.8 .1 For surface ship Tables One through 5, see the Tables in Section 1 of 2.2. For submarine preservation of areas not listed in Tables 6 through 8, see the Tables in 2.6. 3.10.8 .2 Coating s shall not be thinned. 3.10.8 .3 Unless fully enclosed, (i.e., with containment), do application when sustained winds exceed 15 miles not perform exterior paint per hour (MPH). (I) or (I)(G) "C OATING INSPECTION FOR EACH COAT" (Consists of Coating Thickness, Holidays, and Cleanliness) ( See 4.4) 3.10.9 Inspect each Prime, Intermediate, Stripe, Tack, and Top Coat (including Capastic) as follows: 3.10.9 .1 Accomplish DFT measurements of each coat applied for the coating systems listed in Tables One through 8. This excludes any stripe coats and draft marks. For areas listed in 3.7, document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 7. .2 Accomplish a visual holiday check on each coat of the 3.10.9 . system document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 7. , or areas listed in 3.7 F Any holiday found sh - up up. These touched - all be identified and touched constitute a new coat holidays do not . Paint containing Optically Active Pigment (OAP) shall be visually inspected using violet light. Where an OAP ly checked using primer is used, each primer and topcoat shall be visual light violet light. When this occurs, the inspector shall use a violet - flashlight conforming to ASTM E2501 to enhance the normal visual inspection process. An ASTM E2501 flashlight produces violet light that activates the fluorescent OAP . The inspector shall wear yellow or amber tinted glasses - that block ultraviolet and violet light to accomplish the inspection. See ASTM E2501 for the light transmittance specification for tinted glasses and http://www.nstcenter.biz for a list of safety eyewear models that meet the specification. Guidance regarding OAP inspection practices is available in TU 11. SSPC - .3 Accomplish a visual inspection for surface 3.10.9 cleanliness. If evidence of contamination exists, accomplish maximum of 4 hours prior to to application of next coat degreasing/cleaning a ensure removal of surface contaminants. For areas listed in 3.7, document on 7 or 7A or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form QA Checklist Form Appendix Naval . If condition is UNSAT, then also use Appendix 2 or Appendix 6 or 7 Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 . 3.10.9 .4 Accomplish a visual inspection for chloride contamination for areas listed in 3.7. If evidence of chloride contamination exists, accomplish requirement of 3.10.7.2 a maximum of 4 hours prior to application of next coat to ensure removal of surface contaminants. Document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 7 or 7A or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 or 7 . If condition is UNSAT, then also use Appendix 4 as required . 6 in 3.10. 3. 22 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

226 3.10.10 For DFT readings required in 3.10.9 .1, DFT readings for each coat shall be taken in accordance with Method PA 2 of 2.5. When measuring full coats to determine total system thicknesses denoted in Tables One through 8, DFT readings shall not b e taken in areas where stripe coatings have been applied. When scanning technology is used in SSPC - PA 2 fixed batch mode (average of three readings), the average DFT displayed in each batch will be recorded in Appendix 7. quired in lieu of DFT readings .1 WFT readings are re 3.10.10 for any coat that must be in a ) when the tacky state (as defined in 3.6.3 next coat is applied , for non - metallic surfaces , for anti - corrosive and antifouling paint applied over capastic and sprayable shields, and when applied over existing coatings . For metallic surfaces, the number of WFT metallic . For non ll be 2 readings per 1,000 square feet spot readings sha - surfaces, the number of WFT spot readings shall equal the number of DFT When WFT readings are used in this uld have been taken. readings that wo manner, the sampling frequency, distribution, and acceptance criteria shall be the same as described in SSPC - PA 2 of 2.5, except that only one WFT reading is required to represent a “spot measurement ” instead of the three “gage readings” defined in SSPC - PA 2. WFT equals DFT divided by percent solids by volume (when percent solids by volume is expressed as a decimal, i.e., 60 percent equals 0.60). For areas listed in 3.7, document on QA m Appendix 7A or Checklist For . Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 7 .2 3.10.10 If any coat measures less than its specified DFT, apply an additional coat of that product. The total DFT of these 2 coats shall not exceed the specified maximum thickness for the original coat as specified in Tables One through 8. If an additional coat is required, accomplish a cleanlin .3 prior to point in accordance with 3.10.9 ess check application of the additional coat. .3 During paint application, a WFT gage shall be used 3.10.1 0 to verify the application of proper paint thickness for each coat of all coating systems listed in Tabl es One through 8. WFT readings shall be taken to confirm this, but need not be recorded. Except to remediate small, localized drips or sags 3.10.10 .4 totaling less than 0.03 percent of the coated area, excessive DFT shall not be sanded to reduce DFT w ithout approval of the SUPERVISOR. With the exception of potable water, reserve feedwater, and 3.10. 11 freshwater drain collecting tanks, w hen performing QA inspections for holidays and DFT readings, for all areas where aesthetics are not an issue, perm These are acceptable. anent marker s, as approved by the SUPERVISOR, markings may be directly overcoated with the next coat of paint (or remain exposed if used on the final coat in an area where aesthetics are not an issue). PRF - 24667 Except for 3.11 sli p resistant deck coverings (MIL NONSKID. - Type XI Composition PS), which shall have preservation operations as specified in 3.10, a ccomplish preservation operations for surface ship nonskid systems in accordance with the following: 23 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

227 installing nonskid coating systems to critical coated 3.11.1 When areas (listed in 3.7) within enclosed spaces, including exterior temporary structures for environmental control, the following conditions shall be maintained for a minimum of 48 hours after application of each coat of the nonskid system: 3.11.1.1 Maintain sufficient volumetric air changes to satisfy 2.3 requirements that ventilation be provided in sufficient quantities to keep the concentration of coating solvent vapors below ten percent of their low er explosive limit. 3.11.1.2 Continuously maintain airflow into and out of the enclosed space to satisfy the requirements of 2.3. Fully open hangar doors satisfy 2.3 requirements. 3.11.1.3 Orient input air such that airflow is directed cross the deck and in the direction of the exhaust ventilation towards or a ports. Locate exhaust ventilation ports such that the bottom of the exhaust duct/opening is less than one foot from the deck surface to ensure that “heavier than air” coating solvent vapor is e ffectively removed from the enclosed space. 3.11.1.4 Evenly distribute input and exhaust ports such that uniform air movement throughout the enclosed space and across deck surface is aust by maintained. Ensure airflow is not “short circuited” from input to exh maximizing distance between input and exhaust ports. 3.11.1.5 Ensure the ventilation system remains operational and powered throughout application of the nonskid system regardless of whether personnel are in the enclosed space. (V) "ENVIRONME NTAL READINGS" 3.11.2 Accomplish the requirements of 3.10.1 (environmental) with the following additions: Record ambient and substrate surface temperatures, 3.11.2.1 relative humidity, and dew point readings at one - hour intervals during system application. nonskid 3.11.2.2 Unless fully enclosed (i.e., with a tent), do not apply nonskid primer when sustained winds exceed 15 MPH. reviewed - Unless the applicable NAVSEA ASTM F718 is 3.11.2.3 - more stringent, ambient air temperature shall be 55 100 degrees Fahrenheit, 120 degrees Fahrenheit, - deck temperature for primer application shall be 40 110 degrees - and deck temperature for nonskid application shall be 40 Fahrenheit. Deck temperature shall be a minimum of 5 degrees Fahrenheit For application of Type point for nonskid system application. above the dew VIII (low temperature) nonskid systems, ambient air and deck temperatures shall be between 35 degrees Fahrenheit and the upper limit specified by the - NAVSEA reviewed ASTM F718. 24 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

228 3.11.3 Accomp lish the requi with the rements of 3.10.2 through 3.10.4 following additions: 3.11.3.1 If cleaning is performed via solvent wiping, after solvent wiping, the deck shall be allowed to dry before application of any coating. No visible solvent shall be pr esent on deck surfaces prior to proceeding with the next process step. So lvent wiping is defined in 3.6. 5 . When a solvent wipe is performed, annotate Appendix 2 3.11.3.2 or with type of solvent and time Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 6 allo wed to dry. xterior nonskid decks with High 3.11.3.3 When cleaning e Pressure Water Cleaning (HP WC), cleanliness shall meet the requirements of SSPC - SP WJ - 4/NACE WJ - 4 instead of SSPC - SP 1. (I) or (I) (G) “SURFACE PROFILE” (See 4.4) - 3.11.4 Followin g blasting or waterjetting operations, surface peak valley profile shall be checked. to - Surface profile shall be validated on areas without visible pitting. For each area of preparation, one profile square square feet for th e first 500 measurement shall be taken every 100 . Only one profile measurement shall be taken for every 1,000 feet square feet remaining. Profile measurements shall be taken in accordance with Method B or Method C of 2.9; For Method B of 2.9, one profile measurement shall be the averag e (mean) of 10 individual readings. For Method B of 2.9, each profile between measurement shall be 6 mils. For profile measurements taken in 3 and accordance with Method C of 2.9, use profile tape suitable to read subject profile (i.e., coarse to extra coarse plus). For Method C of 2.9, one - es. For profile measurement shall be the average (mean) of 2 individual tap 6 mils, with Method C of 2.9, each profile measurement shall be between 3 and less than 2.5 mils or greater than, or equal to 5 no individual tape reading mils. If any individual tape reading is found to be greater than, or equal to, 5 mils, use Method B of 2.9 in those areas to determine existing profile. If such profile is not present on decks and aircraft elevators, repair activity shall establish proper profile. The maximum profile requirement is waived for carrier aircraft elevators prepared via waterjetting. The retention of profile tape is not required. For areas listed in 3.7, document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 3 or Naval Shipyard QA Checklist Form Appendix 3 or 3A. 3.11.4.1 For nonskid areas that abrasive blast equipment or et equipment cannot access, substrate shall be prepared to SSPC waterj - SP 11, except that minimum profile shall be 2 mils where accessible. Underside of SP 3 of 2.5; however, - down s tie shall be prepared to SSPC - SP 2 or SSPC - aived, while remainder of tie are w down - feathering requirements of 3.6.4 - SP 15 of 2.5. shall be prepared to SSPC .6 apply 1.4.2 through 3.10.5 .4 3.1 The requirements of 3.10.5 to nonskid. 3.11.5 plish the requirements of 3.10.6 for conductivity/ Accom chloride measurements. 25 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

229 3.11.6 Accom for surface preparation. plish the requirements of 3.10.7 3.11.6.1 Surface cleanliness for dust shall be accomplished for nonskid flight decks and documented on QA Checklist Form Appendix 5. of 2.11. Three Surface cleanliness for dust shall meet Rating 2, Class 2, individual readings shall be taken every 100 sq uare f ee t for the first 500 sq uare f ee t. If the tape readings are consistent, only one tape reading uare shall be taken for every 1,000 sq f ee t remaining. The tape reading requirement is waive d if the surface preparation for the final stage of entire surface is (UHP) waterjetting and the primer is ultra high pressure applied within 6 hours of completion of surface preparation. 3.11.6.2 For flight deck areas receiving a nonskid system and pr epared to NACE/SSPC - SP WJ - 2, a minimum of 20 percent of the total area - receiving NACE 2/SSPC to an shall be abrasively blasted system nonskid a SP 10 level of cleanliness . The areas to be prepared to NACE 2/SSPC SP 10 shall - be as directed by the SUPERVISOR. 3.11.7 Nonskid systems shall be applied in accordance with the applicable Tables. A new nonskid system shall overlap existing nonskid to the minimum extent necessary to create a continuous film as agreed upon by the SUPERVISOR. 3.11.7.1 Nonskid shall be rolled parallel to ship's main axis. Welds parallel with the direction of peaks and valleys shall be cross rolled. - Cross - rolling shall extend 3 to 6 inches on each side of the weld. The requirement to roll nonskid parallel to the ship's main axis is waived on LCS 2 class flight decks and any other areas with extruded aluminum plank decks as approved by the SUPERVISOR. In these areas, nonskid shall be rolled perpendicular to the ship's main axis. 3.11.7.2 Nonskid material remaining in the can after nonskid is poured onto primed deck surface shall not be removed from the can. 3.11.7.3 If probing the nonskid surface with a dull putty knife results in penetration of the putty knife into the nonskid, neither foot nor vehicular traffic shall be permitted. 3.11.7.4 DFT measurements of nonskid primer in overlap areas shall be no more than 15 mils. 3.11.8 Accomplish the requirements of 3.2 for stripe coat with the exception that stripe coat may precede prime coat. ercoating of stripe coat or stripe coating of For ov 3.11.8.1 - ASTM F718. When the reviewed the primer coat, refer to the applicable NAVSEA stripe coat is applied prior to overcoating with a full coat of primer, the M D1640. stripe coat shall be dry to touch in accordance with AST within 36 hours of begin Nonskid application shall completion 3.11.9 application. coat primer full of final For areas not listed in 3.7, nonskid 26 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

230 - reviewed ASTM overcoating application shall be in accordance with NAVSEA F718. For areas listed i n 3.7, use the following: within 36 to 72 hours 3.11.9.1 If nonskid application begins application, the primer coat shall full coat primer after completion of final be solvent wiped with reviewed ASTM F718 - solvent required by the NAVSEA . begins f nonskid application I within 3 to 7 days 3.11.9.2 primer after completion of final full coat application, the primer coat shall solvent required by the NAVSEA be solvent wiped with , then reviewed ASTM F718 - coat (one to 2 mils) of lightly abraded, solvent wiped again, and a mist primer shall be applied and allowed to cure to recoat. 3.11.9.3 If the primer coat is not overcoated with nonskid coat primer final full within 7 days of application, the primer shall be removed and the surface preparation repea - in areas where For zone tie ted. the primer is to be overcoated with itself (up to 12 inches of overlap), the recoat window shall be in accordance with the NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718; the solvent required by the NAVSEA primer shall be solvent wiped with - re viewed ASTM F718 , then lightly abraded, then solvent wiped again. Aircraft carrier landing areas not overcoated with 3.11.9.4 completion shall have surface nonskid within 72 hours of primer application preparation repeated. 3.10.11 through for 3.11.10 Accomplish the r equirements of 3.10.9 . inspection of nonskid primer (full and stripe coats) (I) or (I) (G) "NONSKID MIXING AND APPLICATION" (See 4.4) 3.11.11 Accomplish the following requirements during initiation of the mixing and application pr ocess: 3.11.11.1 Verify that nonskid mixing blade is free of previously cured coatings . - ASTM reviewed 3.11.11.2 Verify that applicator meets NAVSEA F718 mixing and application requirements, including: specified mixing ime, induction time, pot equipment, pre - mix time, mix t - life and any product specific application requirements. (I) or (I) (G) “NONSKID SPREAD RATE AND HOLIDAY INSPECTION” (See 4.4) 3.11. 12 Verify that nonskid spread rate meets the following V, VI, VII, and VI - II 18 square feet/gallon minimum requirement: Types I, - nd X /gallon maximum; Types II, III, IX a and 30 square feet 23 square /gallon minimum and 35 sq feet /gallon maximum; and, Types IV and IX uare feet t/gallon maximum. Perform visual holiday inspect 60 sq uare f ee ion (sprayed) - of nonskid and document on QA Checklist Form Appendix 7. Spread rate shall be determined by the following formula: [(square feet coated) / ((gallons per kit) x (number of kits))] . 27 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

231 - 3.11. 12.1 Holidays less than 4 square inches shall be touched up as follows: 1) solvent clean primer with solvent required in product NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718, 2) lightly sand exposed primer, 3) solvent clean ASTM F718, reviewed sanded surface with solvent required in product NAVSEA - and 4) apply nonskid to primer to appr oximate texture of surrounding nonskid. - up of holidays in non - Overcoat window restrictions do not apply to touch olidays less than 1/8 of a landing areas. H square inch shall be exempt from touch - up. Inspect the location and color of required V 13 LA markings 3.11. in accordance with Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division (NAWCAD) Class Guidance Drawings, Air Capable Ship Aviation Facilities Bulletin, Amphibious Assault Ship Aviation Facilities Bulletin, Shipboard Aviation Resume (NAEC - LA General Service Bulletin No. 7576), V - 8 (latest revision) or by ENG contacting the local NAWC (CAFSU/ASIR) Field Office. 3.12 For submarines, accomplish preservation of damping and acoustic tiles and surfaces in way of these tiles in accordance with the following. All exterior tiles and tiles inside tanks shall be installed over a surface NACE 2/ prepared to SP 10 and painted with the preservation system - SSPC indicated in Table 8. Surfaces beneath exterior tiles and tiles inside tanks are considered critically coa ted. Care shall be taken to ensure blasting does not damage tiles. Surface preparation and preservation of steel restrained tiles shall be as listed in Table 8. Paint only steel portions of that is 726 Class acoustic baffles. Before overcoating tile - SSBN/SSGN currently coated, sweep blast the surface to roughen the existing paint. steel restraining covers are not required to be painted except for - Non antifouling purposes. Overspray of otherwise unpainted covers is acceptable. Full paint out of non - st eel damping restraining covers, unrestrained damping, and acoustic tile (including Gradual Transition Coating (GTC)) and covers is not intended. In interior spaces, exposed surfaces of acoustical absorptive - SP 1 and shall be SSPC treatments that are painted shall be prepared to - painted with 1 2 mils of paint (avoid filling perforations) to match surroundings. 4. : NOTES Wet space decks include sanitary spaces (washrooms, water closets, 4.1 and showers), food service spaces (galley, scullery, butcher shop , bakery, meat prep rooms, and food service line), and trash compactor rooms. Total DFT encountered during removal may exceed specified Table 4.2 thicknesses. . An ablative 4.3 Total removal of ablative coating is not required copper antifoulant (AF) coating system shall not be removed by blasting prior to its specified service life unless it is blistered, peeling, or otherwise damaged beyond repair. Stable and intact ablative AF coatings shall be retained and overcoated. The total film thickne ss of the combined retained and freshly applied paint shall comply with Table One/Table 6. When the Work Item or task order calls for overcoating of retained intact ablative copper AF coating, AF surfaces shall be washed down with fresh water. ips For all sh except submarines and aircraft carriers, this fresh water washdown shall be 28 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

232 at 2,000 PSI as the vessel comes out of the water, in order to performed prevent slime and oxidized paint from drying on the hull and inhibiting leaching of the paint when the ship is returned to the water. For submarines and aircraft carriers, instead, within 24 hours of the hull being released by cognizant shipyard authorities, pressure wash with fresh water between 2,000 before new paint is and 5,000 PSI . T he surface shall be cleaned and dried - AC ) paint to areas in need of repairs. applied. Apply any anti corrosive ( - PRF - 24647 Overcoat the AC paint with the approved AF paint of the same MIL Type. The Work Item or task order will specify the degree of removal. 4.4 The par agraphs referencing this note are considered an (I)(G) if the inspection/test is on a critical surface as listed in 3.7. If the inspection/test is not on a surface listed in 3.7, then the paragraph is considered an (I). ropriate for requirements concerning - 03 of 2.1 as app Refer to 009 4.5 potential exposure to toxic or hazardous substances and hazardous operations. 4.6 The repair activity may use environmental enclosures to control environmental conditions. an Unrestricted Operations (URO) Preservation system repairs are 4.7 Maintenance Requirement Cards (MRC) program attribute. 4.7 .1 The Unrestricted Operations (URO) Maintenance Requirement Cards (MRC) program was developed by NAVSEA to monitor specific areas of interest to determine if th e conditions of these areas are suitable for continued unrestricted operations. Maintaining the protective capability of the coating system is critical to maintaining structural integrity during the periods between inspections. For this reason, complying with requirements for coating system application for all aspects of the preservation process is essential. Other systems that impact the URO MRC program are Special Hull Place (MIP), - In - Treatment (SHT) application process, including Mold maintenance of c athodic protection systems (Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) and anodes) and installation of various types of tiles (acoustic, damping, etc.). 4. 7 .1.1 not Substrate preparation and preservation are authorized/covered in this Standard Item f or vertical launch system (VLS) towed array (TLTA) interior, surfaces covered by SHT, bathtub area, thin line and retractable bow plane recesses on submarines. propulsor, 4.7 .2 Preservation work in submarine tanks and enclosed spaces is usually schedule d to occur when the tanks and spaces are opened and entered to perform URO MRC structural inspections. Any time a tank or other enclosed space is entered, if a URO MRC 003 structural inspection is not authorized, the government will be performing a struct ural visual examination. Any URO MRC item being blasted and painted will have a URO MRC .3 4.7 hull survey inspection performed by the government prior to blasting and again prior to repainting. 29 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

233 4.8 Painting of rubber piece parts of pipe hangers is per mitted in the following areas: Main Ballast Tanks (MBTs), freeflood areas, and internal tanks which are normally painted. The rubber piece parts include the liners, grommets, and inserts found in steel strap and steel block type pipe hangers; also include d is the block rubber type pipe hangers. Prior to painting rubber piece parts in surface ship potable water and reserve feedwater tanks, existing paint shall be removed to an SSPC SP 2 level of cleanliness as - approved by the SUPERVISOR. Do not paint rubber piece parts in surface ship FWDCTs, submarine RFTs, and hangers on nuclear piping that traverses other non - nuclear tanks. 4.9 Inspections such as URO inspections and inspection periodicities are addressed in 2.2 and 2.6. 4.10 If installation of slip r esistant deck coverings in interior and exterior applic is required; the use of ation on surface ships in 3.1.26 Category II Standard Item 009 - 26 “Deck Covering Requirements; accomplish”, including Attachment G will be specified in the work item. 4 .11 Unless otherwise noted, carriers are considered surface ships throughout this document. The tables are split up between surface ships and submarines. Table One is for surface ship underwater hull areas. Table 2 is 3 is for surface ship interior for surface ship exterior areas. Table spaces. Table 4 is for surface ship tanks and voids. Table 5 is for surface ship miscellaneous areas. Table 6 is for submarine exterior hull areas. Table 7 is for submarine interior areas. Table 8 is for submarine tanks and voids. 30 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

234 Attachment A Edge DFT Measurement - In addition to the required DFTs per SSPC PA 2, a separate set of “edge” DFT readings shall be taken in close proximity to corners and edges of area structural elements including, but not limited to stiffene rs, “rat holes,” PA 2 - outs, and frames. cut This data shall be taken in accordance with SSPC - .1 y from those required by 3.10.9 and reported separatel , with the following modifications: 1) The “edge” gage readings shall be taken approximately ¼ inch (i.e., 0.5 - cm) from edges using micro - probe gages with a probe less than or equal to ½ - inch in diameter. For “edge” readings taken on substrates less than ½ inch thick, readings shall be taken from the “middle” of the substrate. Microprobe gages shall be cali brated, in accordance with manufacturer’s thicknesses expected during application. paint direction, to measure 2) Welds not associated with corners or edges (i.e., a butt weld joining 2 flat plates) shall be inspected using standard visual techniques. Th e inherent roughness of the weld precludes the collection of reproducible data from these areas. Inspectors may, if they choose, take a spot reading within ¼ inch (i.e., 0.5 cm) from a butt weld. dings taken within a 3) An "edge" spot measurement shall consist of 3 gage rea 1.5 inch (i.e., 4 cm) diameter circle. Accomplish front, back, and edge DFT gage readings as shown in Figure 1 (see attached). For each data set required for the flat surface data set the equivalent is required for the data set. For example, if 20 spot DFT measurements are edge or corner required for an area, then 20 DFT measurements are required using the front, back, edge method set and 20 for the flat surface set. Figure 1 31 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

235 Attachment B Flash Rust Adjudication Procedure: NAVSEA When waterjetting has been performed to a specified WJ level of cleanliness on a steel surface, and the level of flash rust (low, moderate, or high) cannot be agreed upon between the authorized coating inspector and the WJ NACE/SSPC Contractor through the use of the written standard or the SSPC - VIS 4 visual reference standard, the following procedure shall be used to resolve the dispute. Note that this procedure is not a substitute for the SSPC standard, but rather is intended to NACE/ definitions contained in the provide objective quality evidence (OQE) that a disputed zone, surface, or area has a low, moderate or high level of flash rust. 1. . The zone, surface, or area shall have been Ensure Surface Condition to the required waterjetting level of cleanliness in accordance with cleaned 2.5 and 2.10 and possess a level of flash rust that cannot be readily gauged VIS 4 or appraised with certitude using the guidelines of 2.5, 2.10, and SSPC - alone. 2. Determine Minimum Nu mber of Samples . One flash rust reading (consisting of one test measurement and one control measurement) shall be taken for every 200 square feet for the first 1,000 square feet of a zone, surface, or area. t thereof, one additional For each additional 500 square feet or incremen flash rust reading shall be taken. CAUTION Excessive pressure applied to the tape can crack the slide and create a dangerous, sharp surface. 3. Prepare Test Sample and Control Sample . Both the test and control samples are prepared by applying a 4 - 5 inch long piece of ISO 8502 - 3 dust tape to a 1.2 mm thick clean, clear microscope slide which is 50mm by 75mm or larger. scribed in The tapes for the test and control samples shall be prepared as de the sub - paragraphs below. Fully adhere the adhesive side of the tape to the slide, centering the tape’s length over the 75mm dimension of the glass. To - help secure the tape to the slide, not more than 1/4 inch of the tape end may der the slide. Additional tape may interfere with the measuring be wrapped un inch in diameter shall - devices. Any sample with air bubbles larger than 1/4 test portion of the - be rejected. Using a permanent marker to write on a non h sample. slide, date and uniquely identify eac . For each test sample, the dust tape is 3.1 Test Sample Tape Preparation applied to a representative area of the flash rusted surface before being applied to the microscope slide. The inspector shall rub the tape onto the with his/her thumb or other finger, pressing as hard as flash rusted surface inches of the tape without damaging it. Remove - possible over the central 3 the tape from the steel in a manner that retains as much of the adherent rust islodge the rust. as possible; do not shake the tape or try to d 32 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

236 Attachment B (Con’t) Control Sample Tape Preparation 3.2 . While avoiding transferring fingerprints to the central 3 inches of tape, apply a control piece of tape from the same n, clear microscope roll as that used for the test sample to a separate clea slide. 4. - slide . For each test and control tape/microscope Measure Transmittance assembly, measure the transmittance using a Laser Labs Model LM100, Monroe PMP Model PD2.1, Monroe PMP Model PD3.0, or NAVSEA - approved equivalent ttance measurement meter. Transmittance measurements shall not be transmi made in direct sunlight or in an area where the ambient light level exceeds 100 foot candles. Insert the slide into the instrument with the tape facing the meter's light source. Record tw o measurements from different locations on the test sample. Record 2 measurements from the control tape, taking one measurement from each end. Subtract the average of the 2 test readings from erage the average of the two control readings. The difference in av transmittance of the test sample (i.e., sample with flash rust) and the average transmittance of the control sample shall constitute one transmittance reading. . A difference in transmittance reading (i.e., Adjudicate Flash Rust Level 5. control min us test sample) shall be applied to the entire zone, surface, or area which the measurement is intended to represent. The percentage difference between the average control and test sample values, as compared to sh the following flash rust the control sample, shall be used to establi levels: WJ "High" level of flash rust: greater than 20 percent difference in transmittance readings. WJ “Moderate” level of flash rust: 10 percent to 20 percent difference in transmittance readings. st: less than 10 percent difference in WJ “Low” level of flash ru transmittance readings. If the adjudicated flash rust level is determined to be greater than the - cleaned until the requirements for the area allow, then the area shall be re specification is met. Retain Samples . All test transmittance samples and control transmittance 6. samples shall be retained as objective quality evidence that the required level of surface cleanliness was obtained. 33 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

237 Attachment C Process for Spot and Sweep Blast of the Underwater Hull and Free board 1. The “Spot Sweep” method shall only be used if authorized by the and SUPERVISOR prior to the start of work in thes e areas. The use of this Spot Sweep process shall only apply to the underwater hull and freeboard areas and of the ship and may only be considered for use on surface ships. 2. The spot and sweep blast process shall be performed by a robotic crawler Wat unit that uses Ultra High Pressure er jetting (UHPWJ). For areas not accessible by the robotic crawlers, UHP lances and/or abrasive blasting may SP - 4/M surface or an SSPC SSPC - - SP 7 WJ be used to create either a NACE/ - surface, respectively. SSPC SP 3 power tool cleaning may be used for ering in the spot and sweep - prepared surfaces. feath 3. Examine the existing coating on the ship’s hull and determine the color sequence of the current epoxy coating system prior to blasting. The anticipated sequence is red epoxy primer followed by gray epoxy tie coat. The examiner shall note these colors for use during inspection of the hull prior to application of the first coat of epoxy primer. 4. The UHP robotic crawler unit shall be set up to accomplish the following: (a) Remove all loose and degrade d coating, rust and fouling from areas of - SSPC WJ 2/M surface. - bare metal to create a NACE/ SP (b) For the underwater hull: Remove all antifouling coating and remove approximately 1/2 of the thickness of the current MIL - 24647 epoxy tie - PRF coat from the u nderwater hull area. - (c) For the freeboard portion of the hull: Remove all of the MIL - PRF 24635 coating, regardless of thickness, and remove approximately 1/2 of the thickness of the top MIL 23236 epoxy coat from - PRF - 24647 or MIL - PRF - the freeboard area. (d) Smoothly feather or transition from areas of bare metal to the retained epoxy coating. Areas of sharp or "step" transition between bare metal and paint shall be noted on the applicable QA appendix form in the s needed where the UHP robotic comments section. Also, feather edges a crawler leaves behind markings in the existing paint (concentric circles). 5. The use of the Spot and Sweep method does not waive any surface preparation QA steps. Conduct all QA inspections on bare metal areas and QA data. Areas of retained paint shall be visually inspected and record shall satisfy the following: (a) There shall be no more than two colors of paint visible in any area of retained coating. Inspectors shall observe the red primer adjacent to l areas and then continue observations into the bulk of the any bare meta retained epoxy. Gray epoxy may be retained on top of the red primer, but any visual evidence of additional coats of red or black paint (indicating PRF - antifouling coating retention) or haze gray MIL 24635 (indicating - 34 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

238 silicon alkyd/polysiloxane coating retention) on top of the gray epoxy shall be cause for closer inspection. Closer inspection shall be conducted from a minimum distance of 3 feet. Upon closer inspection, a wipe test with a white rag shall be conducted using an antifouling - solvent up solvent. If the solvent wipe test shows color transfer - coating clean onto the rag, the area shall be rejected. Rejected areas shall be cleaned again until no color transfers to the rag. (b) Minimize areas of sharp transition or steps between bare metal and paint. Any such areas shall be inspected and tested with a dull putty knife to determine adhesion. If the paint flakes or can be dislodged, the area shall be rejected and cleaned again to remove t he loose paint. (c) Feather the transition areas where partial blasted areas occur next to bare steel blasted areas. Sharp edges shall be removed in accordance with SSPC - SP 3 and the areas feathered for a smooth transition. 6. The first step of the co ating application process shall be as follows: Apply one coat of epoxy primer in accordance with Tables One and 2 to all areas in the zone or work area (i.e., both bare metal and retained epoxy not apply a primer) to achieve the specified epoxy coating thickness. Do thin or varied primer thickness when traversing areas between bare metal and retained epoxy. paint in Coating inspections shall be performed for each coat of 7. . In bare metal areas, DFT readings shall be measured accordance with 3.10.9 recorded. In areas of retained paint, however, WFT readings shall be and measured and recorded in place of DFT readings for determining proper coating thickness for each coat. (Follow the requirement for taking WFT readings in t/reject criteria). In areas of retained place of DFT readings for accep paint, DFT readings shall still be measured and recorded. However, high DFT readings shall not be cause for rejection; such readings shall only be measured for documentation purposes. 8. Once the primer has reac hed the cure to overcoat state, the surface area shall be inspected for edge lifting of the remaining epoxy that was overcoated. This inspection shall be conducted at a maximum distance of 15 f the existing feet. As it cures, the epoxy primer may lift any loose edges o coating that may not have been visible during the initial surface preparation inspection. Any areas where the paint has lifted shall be prepared in SP 3 and primed. This inspection may be included as - accordance with SSPC T and visual holiday inspection. part of the DFT/WF 9. For underwater hull areas: (a) Apply second / tie coat of epoxy and first coat of antifouling in accordance with Table One. (b) Apply remaining antifouling system in accordance with Table One. areas, apply second coat of epoxy then the topcoat in 10. For freeboard accordance with applicable Line in Table 2. 35 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

239 NOTES OF TABLES ONE THROUGH 5 FOR SURFACE SHIPS (1) Draft marks are applied directly over the complete antifouling system. (2) Boottop - The boottopping is defined as the black area from minimum load waterline at which the ship is expected to operate to 12 inches above the maximum load waterline. The black paint is an antifouling shall 24635 - PRF - The haze gray MIL 24647. PRF - paint conforming to MIL - . 24647 - PRF - MIL not over lap antifouling topcoat onto the black - This area includes DDG (3) 51 Class top of stacks (i.e., 05 level weather decks and bulwarks). (4) For the structural decks within the machinery spaces above the bilge line, use the Table Lines for “ INTERIOR DECK PASSAG EWAYS NOT RECEIVING DECK COVERINGS .” (5) Applicable to mast and yardarm surfaces as approved by the SUPERVISOR. A minimum of 24 hours drying time shall be allowed after last coat (6) prior to undocking. Within a zone or work are a, proprietary primer and nonskid listed on (7) - QPLs for MIL 24667 shall be coated with the same primer and - PRF compatible topcoat. For applications below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, MIL (8) 24647 coatings - PRF - 718 to shall be used in accordance with the NAVSEA - reviewed A STM F - determine lower application temperature limit. Do not apply these coatings below 35 degrees Fahrenheit. - PRF - be used must 24607 - MIL DTL - MIL 24596, Grade C, Classes 1 and 2 or (9) s if surface and ambient temperature are less than 50 degrees hrenheit. Fa (10) The "inner shield" is defined as the portion of the dielectric shield that extends 3 ft. from the anode in all directions. The "outer shield" is defined as the portion of the dielectric shield from the rom the anode. Repair of the inner shield to a distance of 6 ft. f inner shield area is required when total deteriorated inner shield surface area is from 0 to 2 percent, and no single spot is greater than one square foot. Repair of the outer shield area is required when uter shield surface area is from 0 to 10 percent, total deteriorated o and no single spot is greater than one square foot. Replacement (new installation) of the entire dielectric shield is required when either of the above criteria is exceeded (damage to the inner shield is g reater than 2 percent, OR damage to the outer shield is greater than 10 percent, OR any single spot damage is greater than one square foot). Repair of this system shall be performed with EVOQUA Water Technologies LLC part number Capastic™ 35524 (W3T106410 ). 36 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

240 The following steps shall be used for repair/replacement of dielectric (11) shields. Ensure QA checkpoints are conducted in accordance with 3.7. Protect surrounding area from damage. Mask anode surfaces with a. heavy cardboard or plywood. b. Abrasive blast. c. For repair, areas of undamaged dielectric shield shall be roughened and feathered into the bare metal areas to provide a profile for adhesion of the new dielectric shield. Feather edges at least one inch using power tools or hand sand ing. To prevent fracturing of shield, do not feather using abrasive blasting. The trowelable or sprayable dielectric shield material shall be d. mixed, applied, and cured in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions as modified by this document. The dielectric shield material should be faired in and made smooth e. from the anode for a distance of at least 10 inches to minimize hull serviceable anodes which require no turbulence except for diver - fairing. f. The anti - corrosive shall be applied when the dielectric shield material is in a tack - free state. If the dielectric shield material has cured, sanding shall be accomplished to smooth any rough areas and to degloss the surface for the anti - corrosive to be a pplied over it. During visual inspection, ensure anode surfaces are undamaged and g. free of paint and dielectric shield material. h. The anode should remain covered with heavy cardboard or plywood to water hull coating prevent damage or contamination by the ship’s under system until just before undocking. (12) These systems may also be invoked for preservation of decks in spaces that are prone to wear and do not receive deck covering. rdance Anchors below lower boottopping limit shall be painted in acco (13) fouling system. - corrosion/anti with normal underwater hull anti - (14) For MCM class ships, use walnut shells, garnet, or crushed glass for 2/L may be used - WJ abrasive blast media. Waterjetting to NACE/SSPC - SP WJ SP - 3/L may tting to NACE/SSPC SP 10. Waterje - in place of NACE 2/SSPC - SP 6. - SSPC NACE 3/ be used in place of (15) coded in - Anchor chain and detachable links shall be marked and color accordance with NSTM Chapter 581 unless otherwise directed by the Work Item or task order. 81733, Type II, Class fide compound conforming to MIL Apply polysul - (16) PRF - 2, after primer application, prior to topcoat application. 37 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

241 8 (17) - 8 - 10 and 631 - Colors shown in Tables 631 - 11 of 2.2 shall be specified raph 631 - by TYCOM or ship's Commanding Officer in accordance with Parag 8.18.3.2 of 2.2. (18) Restore each compartment marking in accordance with 2.12 and 2.13. 24667 nonskid systems shall be applied as complete systems (19) MIL - PRF - - PRF - 24667, Type III, coatings are (primer, intermediate coat when MIL invoked, nonsk id, and color topping) from the same manufacturer except for the color topping. When a manufacturer does not have approved color topping, use another compatible manufacturer's color topping. MIL - PRF - 24667, Type I, when required, shall be specified in the invoking Work Item or task order. (20) Prior to accomplishing painting of wooden underwater hulls, allow the hull to dry to a moisture content of 15 percent. Readings shall be taken with an electronic moisture meter, Sovereign Moisture Master or equal. Cover grounding plates and zincs prior to painting. (21) Blasted surface metal must be degreased following walnut shell paint adhesion. blasting. Even traces of residual oil will degrade ts must Appropriate safety precautions for working with flammable solven be enforced. Alternate procedure is a vigorous soap and water wash followed by pressurized fresh water rinse. Do not use a detergent and fresh water washdown when using aluminum oxide as an abrasive blast medium. reas not receiving nonskid may substitute (22) Peripheral deck edging and a 24667 color topping at 2 - PRF - the manufacturer's MIL 3 mils for MIL - PRF - - DTL 24441 F Aircraft tie - downs may be coated with MIL - 24635. - - 155 in lieu of nonskid color topping. Apply MIL PRF - y, No. 26270 to all launcher areas 24635, Type V, Haze Gra - (23) not receiving nonskid. For DDG Flight II class ships where troughs are installed, topcoat using Deck Gray No. 26008 for trough covers and troughs. This product shall be spray applied where possible. (24) to All references “brush coat” or “brush application” may be accomplished using a paint brush or a paint roller or cartridge unit. Multiple coats applied by /cartridge unit brush/roller shall be substituted for one coat of the component - cation total 30 mils of - 20 spray appli eas where plural in ar For brush spray application is not feasible or for paint touch - up. application, the spray version of each product may be brush applied or - The brush coat the brush coat version of the product may be used. Will - version of Sherwin iams Fast Clad ER is Fast Clad Brush Grade. The Interline 783 is Interline 624. International brush coat version of For application of the "single coat" products (by brush, roller, or , the product shall be applied all at one time, meaning during spray) a - coat” “single continuous spray up - and touch operation. Specifically, a evolution system involves one color of paint, applied during one work (i.e., no time is required to wait for the paint to dry), with a single 38 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

242 pass or double pass. Because the spray application is one work 3.10. 9 evolution, coating inspection QA checkpoint need only be conducted after completion of application of the full coat. Completing a single work evolution may involve actions over numerous days, but it is still one evolution, requiring one QA checkpoint. If a tank or void is touched up with a contrasting color, it is acceptable - for the area to have a multi - color appearance. Williams Fast Clad primer - For heavily pitted areas, substitute Sherwin 8 mils. - or International THA787/785 for the prime coat; apply at 4 - - 22 mils if spray applying or 2 coats at 8 Then apply the topcoat at 16 11 mils each if applied by brush/roller/cartridge unit. The primer application constitutes a separate QA checkpoint from the topcoat; however, the checkpoint for the primer shall be (I) instead of (I) (G). (25) Power impact tool cleaning using power driven needle guns, chipping or - piston scalers, or scaling hammers, rotary scalers, single or multiple - utilized in the other similar impact cleaning tools shall not be cleaning methods. (26) For coating repair or replacement, maintain the relative humidity in surface the tank or void space at a maximum of 50 percent from preparation checkpoint acceptance until cure to recoat time of final touch - up of the topcoat; relative humidity shall be maintained at a maximum of 85 percent from cure to recoat for the final touch - up of the - - topcoat through cure to service. For in service coating touch up until a maximum cure to immersion of topcoat, maintain relative humidity at of 85 percent. Finish coats for boats and craft shall be as specified in Paragraph (27) 631 - 9.3.2 through 631 - 9.3.3 of 2.2 unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item or task order. Thermal insulation shall be soap and water clean ed and hand sanded. (28) 24441, Type III at 3 - DTL Three coats of MIL (29) - 4 mils per coat can be - DTL - 6 mils per coat, - 24441, Type IV at 4 - substituted for 2 coats of MIL for total system DFT of 8 - 12 mils. Three full coats and 2 stripe coats Type III at 3 24441, - - DTL 4 mils per coat can be substituted for - of MIL - DTL 24441, Type IV at 4 - 6 mils 2 full coats and one stripe coat of MIL - 12 mils. - per coat, for total system DFT of 8 Grit blasting to near white metal is the preferred method of surface (30) Only where grit blasting is not possible should power preparation. tool cleaning be used with prior authorization by the SUPERVISOR. Power tool cleaning should not be used for well deck areas frequently exposed to LCAC exhaust. SI) fresh water washdown of the well pressure (3,000 to 5,000 P - A low (31) deck area shall be performed before either grit blasting or power tool cleaning to remove dirt, oil, grease, salts, and loosely adherent . paint 39 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

243 . (32) Upon completion of surface preparation, pH measurements must be taken The pH must be in the range of 6.5 to 7.5. If the pH is not within this range, the surface must be washed with fresh water until the required pH is obtained. (33) If approved by the SUPERVISOR, the surface preparation method of Spot ed in Attachment C may be used in place of the Sweep, describ and surface preparation SSPC/NACE standard required in the Table Line. These systems may also be invoked for preservation of well deck (34) bulkheads and decks. (35) 24441 - DTL - h one coat MIL Topcoat JBD pits and barricade stanchions wit PRF or MIL 4 mils. - 23236 Type VI, white, at 2 - - - SSPC (36) SP 11 shall be the surface preparation standard used, even if the - reviewed ASTM F718 has a more stringent requirement. applicable NAVSEA (37) Total DFT specified for potable water tanks shall not be exceeded except in isolated areas adjacent to shapes and stiffeners. In no case shall the maximum DFT be exceeded by 2 mils. The isolated areas shall be less than 2 percent of the total area. in the tank at a maximum of 85 percent Maintain the relative humidity (38) from the start of abrasive blasting to cure of the topcoat. By allowing 85 percent vice 50 percent relative humidity, this will reduce 12 years. - - the service life of the tank from 15 20 years to 10 (39) Ameron Amercoat 892HS shall not be used for surfaces that exceed 700 degrees Fahrenheit. (40) Do not stripe coat inside surfaces of the Sonar Trunk Guide Rail angles. - - (41) - Apply 3 coats of a vapor barrier 19565, in PRF coating compound, MIL contrasting colors ( final coat white), to thermal insulation within insulation laundries, sculleries, galleys, drying rooms, and to thermal on the warm side of refrigerated stores spaces. (42) High temperature areas of exhaust pipe exteriors include BLISS caps, air eductors, and exhaust stacks. In lieu of white, use Light Gray, Color No. 26373 (Low Solar Absorption (43) only). In lieu of black, use Ocean Gray, Color No. 26173 (Low Solar Absorption only). (44) These systems shall also be invoked for Aircraft Electrical Serv icing Stations (AESS) trunks. (45) Passive Counter - measure System (PCMS) tile on the bow flares shall be painted with the same topcoat as the freeboard. 40 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

244 (46) prone areas, add one coat 3M Co. For struts, rudders, and other erosion - 2216, 4 - - nd 3 coats, 5 - 6 mils/coat over the first coat No. EC 5 mils, a of the second coat of AC, of if authorized by AC prior to application the TYCOM. (47) The topcoats for ordnance/non ordnance pyrotechnic locker sun shields - shall be painted white or as directed by NAVSEA. (48 ) All of the AC and AF coats in the product system must be from the same manufacturer. (49) For touch - up of Sherwin - Williams Fast Clad ER, Fast Clad Brush Grade may be used. Fast Clad Brush Grade is applied at 8 - 10 mils/coat. For touch up of Interline 7 83, Interline 624 can be used. Interline 624 is applied at 4 8 mils/coat. - (50) "Cosmetic" color topping is not to be applied on top of nonskid on vertical replenishment or aviation decks. A second full coat of proprietary nonskid primer listed on the QPL for (51) - MIL . The second by the approved 24667 may be applied if - SUPERVISOR PRF full coat satisfies the stripe coat requirement. received fin Do not blast fin stabilizers to near white metal. As (52) - stabilizers shall be brush - SP 7 (Brush - Off off blasted to NACE 4/SSPC - Blast Cleaning) in lieu of near white metal blast to ensure polymer n of paint . Blank, fairing compound is not removed prior to applicatio wrap, cover, or mask equipment, shafts and openings to preclude damage and prevent entry of contaminants prior to cleaning operation. Remove protective covering upon completion of preservation operations. “Total System” value is only listed when it is more stringent than the (53) sum of the individual coats of the system. (54) This Table Line does not apply to propulsion plant water tanks aboard nuclear - powered ships . s paint , 9/18, 11, and 11/18 23236 Type VII Class 9 - PRF For MIL - , follow (55) the NAVSEA - reviewed ASTM F718 for temperatures, cure and recoat times. This supersedes the hour/5 day requirement. - 70 degree Fahrenheit , 36/12 inch wide strip of deck surface in way of the helo Do not nonskid a 7 - (56) - A ships. 51 Class Flight II - on DDG hangar door seal interface ships will be to match allowed PCMS - paint Painting PCMS tile on (57) surrounding surfaces and as designated by the SUPERVISOR. Painting is paint PCMS ships. - prohibited on no (58) Products used for the primer or single coat shall contain Optically Active Pigment (OAP). Composition G areas with TYCOM (59) Composition L nonskid may be used in approval. 41 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

245 24667 Composition L material shall be applied in areas - PRF (60) - MIL er 8. designated by the VLA General Services Bulletin Numb For flight decks equipped with RAST tracks, see Figure 2 for guidance (61) on RAST track plates. SEE NOTE 2 ½ INCH 4 ½ INCH ½ INCH RAST TRACK ½ INCH ½ INCH 4 ½ INCH ½ INCH SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 1 Figure 2 NOTES: 1. APPLY NONSKID ONLY TO CROSS - HATCHED AREAS. 1/4 INCH DIAMETER CIRCLES CENTERED ON HOLES. - 3/4 to 3 - 2. NO NONSKID ON 2 - 32 009 ITEM NO: of 99 42 FY 19 -

246 Once the old nonskid is removed, or if it is a new deck being prepared (62) for nonskid installation, the surface of the GRP fiberglass shall be - grit paper to roughen the surface. sanded with 80 - lightly hand 3 inches of deck fittings and (63) Nonskid shall be applied to within 2 - - 6 inches from protrusions. Nonskid shall be applied to within 4 coamings and deck edges. Areas underneath protrusions, such as stowage racks or fire stations that are normally found on hangar decks, or co aming areas of decks not subject to vehicle or aircraft movement, need not comply with the 4 - 6 inch rule for applying nonskid near deck edges. (64) Primer coat(s) shall be from the same manufacturer as the other coats in the system. , fuel oil service, and diesel service tanks are not (65) Fuel oil storage . unless specifically addressed in the tables be painted required to For existing paints, when flaking occurs, SSPC - SP 3 surface preparation e wiped shall be accomplished and a light coat of system fluid shall b over the surface prior to closing. If preconstruction primer was applied in accordance with 3.1.5, it may be retained, but it shall be - overcoated with one coat MIL 23236, Type Class 5 at or VII VI, V, - PRF - 4 8 mils. heads and overheads. Do not apply primer to bulk (66) (67) This option shall not be used for bilges on aircraft carriers. (68) For interior surfaces of stern tubes and extensions, strut barrels, and fairwater interiors, shaft flanges (not exposed to seawater) coupling covers, do not app ly antifouling topcoat. The sprayable dielectric shield (SDS) shall be applied so that the (69) primer extends 7 feet, the middle coat extends 6.5 feet, and the top coat extends 6 feet outward from the edge of the anode (see figure 3 for the perimeter sha pe of the SDS primer). The SDS shall be uniform thickness under the anode extending to a feathered edge for each successive coat. The purpose is to create a tapered or gradually decreasing DFT effect lication. A sharp at the outer edge of the shield as a function of app edge denoting a change in film thickness is not intended. Note that the anode for this system is installed on top of the coating after the - final coat has cured. Except for diver serviceable anodes, once the - 10 anode is in place, roughen a inch wide perimeter of the topcoat grit paper, and fair from edge of anode case - around the anode with 80 to 10 inches out on shield, with EVOQUA Water Technologies LLC part - serviceable anodes shall number Capastic™ 35524 (W3T106410) . Diver have no Cap astic taper/fairing. Repair of the shield area is required when total deteriorated shield surface area is from 0 to 10 percent, and no single spot is greater than one square foot. Replacement (new when damage installation) of the entire dielectric shield is required to the shield is greater than 10 percent OR any single spot damage is 43 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

247 greater than one square foot. Repair of this system shall be performed with the same coating. Figure 3 (70) Only International Intergard 264 may be used with International Interfine 979SG Polysiloxane. - PRF 24667 color topping may be used on MIL - PRF Any MIL - 24667 Type XI - (71) nonskid (slip resistant deck coverings). - applied PRF products are not authorized for MIL - 24667 Type I spray - (72) application to critical coated areas on CVNs. - Runs, drips, and sags may appear in application of MIL (73) - PRF 23236, Type VII paint. When wet, runs, drips, and sags shall be brushed out to form a smooth, uniform film. Whe n cured, runs, drips, and sags shall be evaluated by the SUPERVISOR and if found to be detrimental to the coating system, shall be repaired. (74) Painting over PCMS tile is not covered by this Standard Item, but is . tions covered by the applicable PCMS specifica 44 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

248 (75) The entire deck surface (i.e. forecastle, fantail, flight, etc.) containing a Vertical Replenishment Deck area shall be considered a critical coated area as addressed in 3.7. nd (76) the 2 For aircraft carriers, substitute 1 stripe coat of primer for primer full coat. (77) The coating system for AFFF decks (i.e., under AFFF Proportioning Units) may be applied to bilge drain wells. (78) - Surface preparation of SSPC SP 3 may be used for locations located 12 top for the bilge area, with the inches and above the inner bottom tank - exception that the exterior structure of stand alone tanks on aircraft carriers will require a minimum of SSPC - SP 11. (79) These areas shall be considered heavily pitted. seconds of stationary Maximum water pressure shall be such that 30 (80) contained equipment produces no visible - operation of the vacuum self degradation of the nonskid surface. Vacuum self - contained equipment shall be capable of cleaning within 4 inches of bulkheads, coamings, - and other deck appurtenanc es. Abrade sides of dielectric shield anode bars by hand with 80 grit (81) SP 1 cleanliness prior to first sandpaper to SSPC - SP 2 and verify SSPC - application of dielectric shield to the bar. SP 2. - Each cell hatch lip shall be prepared to SSPC (82) - 24667, Type VIII nonskid - PRF shall not be used on LHA, LHD, LPD, MIL (83) and LSD Class ship flight decks. 45 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

249 NOTES OF TABLES 6 THROUGH 8 FOR SUBMARINES (1A) Hull inserts shall be coated with the preservation system applied to paint adjacent surfaces. Extend - inch on to non - system a minimum 1/2 For MBT vent valves, preserve weld radius ferrous liner or cladding. of the clad sealing surface and the vertical surface mating with the MBT vent valve gasket retainer; the only surface which is not painted he horizontal clad sealing surface which mates with the MBT vent is t valve disc gasket. Alternating AF colors may be used. Final coat can be red or black. (2A) (3A) The upper boottop limit is extended to 12” above the maximum condition diving trim waterline . For all surfaces above max beam that are to receive AF, all coats shall be black. The final coat of all exterior paint systems above the upper boottop shall also be black. A minimum of 24 hours drying time shall be allowed after last coat (4A) prior to undocking. Products used for the primer or single coat shall contain Optically (5A) Active Pigment (OAP). (6A) Blasting is not allowed in machinery spaces. ll match surrounding paint on visible surfaces. (7A) Topcoat color sha - MIL PRF for interior paints reviewed - NAVSEA Class 17 (8A) 23236 Type VII - submarine use under the Submarine Atmosphere Control Manual are International Interbond 998 and Sherwin Williams Euronavy ES301. based paints ( - MIL - (9A) To minimize premature yellowing, chlorinated alkyd - DTL ) shall not be applied within 4 weeks before and after the 24607 application of amine - cured epoxy paints formulated to MIL - - 23236. PRF - 246 (10A) When using paints qualified to MIL - DTL 10 of 2.2 - 07 , use Table 631 - 8 to select approved colors. PRF - MIL (11A) 24596 Class 2, Grade A, and Formula 25A may be substituted for - DTL MIL chlorinated alkyd enamels. Color shall match the 24607 - - existing surroundings. The SSBN/SSGN istics escape trunk (LET) fasteners and (12A) 726 Class log - bubble skirt knife edge in way of gaskets and fasteners for LET upper hatch fairings are to be left unpainted. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has found that samples of (13A) vermiculite ore contain asbest os fibers. Vermiculite was used as an anti - sweat treatment on the upper hatch covers on submarines. All facilities and workers shall assume vermiculite contains asbestos fibers until it has been tested. All facilities are to test new vermiculite or verm iculite in use prior to working with the material. 46 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

250 Workers who are doing work with or near vermiculite should be aware that it may contain asbestos and proper precautions shall be used. - The requirements of SSPC r SP 1 shall be met via a high pressure (HP) o (14A) ultra high pressure (UHP) fresh water washdown of the tank prior to blasting the tank to NACE 2/ SSPC - SP 10. (15A) - - DTL Motor generators require protection from paints conforming to MIL 24441 or MIL - PRF - 23236 during application and curing of the pai nt. When these paints are being applied or cured while venting in a space containing motor generators, the motor generators shall be protected (kW) and 500 kW watt using a NAVSEA - approved procedure. For 300 kilo - according to Appendix A of motor generators, a positive pressure unit the motor generator technical manual shall be used. Maintenance on motor generators shall not be performed for a minimum of 5 days after - 24441 and MIL - DTL - painting with MIL 23236 paints or any application - PRF 28, MIL PRF , TT - P - of silicones (e.g. - - 24635 silicone enamels) in the engine room. (16A) When lead is removed from lead bins, the structure shall be blasted to - , (even NACE 2/ SSPC paint SP 10 and preserved with an ultra high solids if the surrounding structure is being touch - up painted) prior to installing lead. - Immersed non resistant steel piping and cable - ferrous and corrosion (17A) pans shall be completely coated with the specified tank or bilge paint - ferrous and corrosion - system with the following exceptions: non resistant steel piping and CRES torpedo system components in torpedo impulse tanks shall not be painted; non - ferrous and CRES piping above nted; in all tanks, residual waterline in MBTs is not required to be pai closed system piping one inch diameter and less is to be protected from - blast and is not required to be painted. Succeeding coats of the coating system shall be of contrasting color, (18A) t pastel shade. and the top coat shall be white or a very ligh CRES fasteners (studs, nuts, washers) used to secure Type II vibration (19A) damping and acoustic tiles may be left unpainted. Unpainted hydraulic oil, hydrophone, and (20A) (CFO) tanks Clean Fuel Oil 726 Class - shall remain unpainted. Lube oil slu dge tanks on SSBN/SSGN submarines are not painted. up paint curing procedures of Section 7 of 2.2 do not - Reduced touch (21A) - apply to these surfaces. Also, note accelerated touch up times reactor potable water tank - s only, and authorized by 2.2 are for non therefore are not to be used for potable water, reserve feedwater, and tanks unless specifically approved by freshwater drain collecting NAVSEA. (22A) Total DFT specified in Table 8 for potable water tanks shall not be exceeded except in isola ted areas adjacent to shapes and stiffeners. In no case shall the maximum DFT be exceeded by more than 2 mils. The 47 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

251 isolated areas shall be less than 2 percent of the total area. For - touch up or overcoating intact aged paint in good condition, the same equirements for each coat apply, and the total film thickness maximum r requirement may be corrected to allow for thickness of underlying aged paint. Prior to surface preparation, flasks must be depressurized. Barrier (23A) e with NAVSEA S0400 protection shall be in accordanc - 010/TUM, URM - AD - - Out Users Manual (TUM), Appendix G. Tag (24A) 24441 primer (at Welds and area above welds will be coated with MIL - DTL - - mils/coat). Tek 3 - - Haz PRF - 6 mils/coat) and 2 coats MIL 2 - 4 24635 (at shall be applied i system paint n accordance with EB Specification 4277 and will extend to a line even with the underside of the ventilation plenum welds, but not including the welds. Bilge and Drain Collection Tanks includes the following: Bilge (25A) Collecting Tanks, Bilge Collecting Sump Tanks, Non - Oily Drain Collecting Tanks (other than Fresh Water), Oily Drain Collecting Tanks, Bilge Water Processing Tank, Drain Water Collecting Tanks, VLS Drain Collecting Tank, Oil Collection Tanks. For Moored Training Ships (MTS), the anti (26A) foulant coating is not required, because the tanks are blanked off and filled with fresh water. (27A) detection on 100 percent of potable water Conduct low voltage holiday 24441 Type III paint is being applied. Holiday tanks when MIL - DTL - shall detection up) areas of - also be performed on any repaired (touch system. The holiday checks are to be performed after an existing paint application of the topcoat using a low voltage wet sponge holiday marked detector. Any holidays (defects to bare metal) found shall be - be shall up. Holiday checks by the inspector and the area touched performed again on these areas after repair. (28A) - based paints (alkyd, epoxy, oil All painting with organic solvent based) that exceeds 1 quart per day for the entire ship shall be completed 5 days prior to the date of departure as determined by the Commanding Officer. Date of departure, as it relates to painting, is the date of first dive after departure for a period of operation. (29A) For coating repair or replacement, maintain the relative humidity in the tank or void space at a maximum of 50 percent from surface preparation checkpoint acceptance until cure to recoat time of final - up of the topcoat; relative humidity shall be maintained at a touch - e to recoat for the final touch up of the from cur maximum of 85 percent - topcoat through cure to service. For in - service coating touch up until cure to immersion of topcoat, maintain relative humidity at a maximum of 85 percent. (30A) Steam clean to remove excess oil. 48 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

252 (31A) Tank manho le covers are critical coated areas. Solvent based paint - systems may be used to paint manhole covers of tanks painted with high paint systems due to fit - up issues associated with high solids solids paint systems. Powder coatings shall not be applied to r eserve feedwater, potable water, freshwater drain collecting, and steam surge tank manhole covers. (32A) Areas visible from above shall be topcoated either gray or black. (33A) Total number of coats and total DFT specified in Table 7 for all interior spa ces shall not be exceeded. Maximum system total DFT shall not exceed 17 mils for surfaces topcoated with MIL - DTL - 24607 , 21 mils for surfaces topcoated with MIL - PRF - 24596, or 24 mils for surfaces topcoated with Formula 25A. (34A) Naval Shipyards are allow ed to work on these items. All other activities are to be approved by NAVSEA . 1110 and 2844 - system (DTRC 2844 paint The David Taylor Research Center - (35A) 1109) may be used on other exterior hull areas. This is to allow areas adjacent to areas covered by MIP or SHT to be re - preserved the same as MIP or SHT areas. For areas requiring stripe coat, refer to 3.2. (36A) ithin the HOSUB Deep Submergence System/Scope of Certification Areas w (DSS - SOC) boundary are not covered by this Standard Item but are - SOC preservation maintenance standard. covered by the applicable DSS The SUPERVISOR should be contacted to specify the areas th at are outside the DSS - SOC boundary. (37A) - PRF - 23236, Type Runs, drips, and sags may appear in application of MIL VII paint. When wet, runs, drips, and sags shall be brushed out to form a smooth, uniform film. When cured, runs, drips, and sags shall be evaluated by the SUPERVISOR and if found to be detrimental to the coating system, shall be repaired. Final grooming of bow domes must be performed by and chin arrays (38A) qualified shipyard personnel. Final surface finish of bow domes must microinches Ra or smoother. Measure and record surface be 180 roughness in accordance with ASME B46.1 - 2009 Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay.) If necessary, groom the surface of the dome to attain a maximum surface roughness of 180 microinch es Ra. This additional grooming can be accomplished by wet sanding the surface by hand using 120 grit paper and fresh water. Refer to the appropriate bow dome manual for the class for more specific guidance on surface roughness, grooming and paint applic ation. , follow the For MIL - PRF (39A) 23236, Type VII, Class 9 and 9/18 paints - cure, and recoat times. temperatures, ASTM F718 for NAVSEA - reviewed - 70 degree Fahrenheit, This supersedes the hour/5 - day requirement. 36/12 All references to pplied where possible. This product shall be spray a (40A) “brush coat” or “brush application” may be accomplished using a paint applied by coats brush or a paint roller or cartridge unit. Multiple 49 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

253 shall be substituted for one coat of the brush/roller/cartridge unit - spray appli cation of 20 - 30 mils total in areas where plural component spray application is not feasible or for touch - up. paint For brush application, the spray version of each product may be brush - applied or the brush coat version of the product may be used. The brush coat Williams Fast Clad ER is Fast Clad Brush Grade. The - version of Sherwin International Interline 783 is Interline 624. brush coat version of For application of the "single coat" products (by brush, roller, or spray) , the product shall be a pplied all at one time, meaning during a up - operation. Specifically, a “single coat” continuous spray and touch - evolution system involves one color of paint, applied during one work (i.e., no time is required to wait for the paint to dry), with a single p ass or double pass. Because the spray application is one work 9 evolution, coating need only be 3.10. inspection QA checkpoint conducted after completion of application of the full coat. Completing a single work evolution may involve actions over numerous days, but it is still one evolution, requiring one QA checkpoint. If a tank or void up with a contrasting color, it is acceptable for the area is touched - color appearance. - to have a multi (41A) Work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the fo llowing: - SSN Technical Handbook for Special Hull Treatment - Class 688 - NAVSEA S6360 - AD Maintenance and Repair for Submarines: HBK - 010. For Fairing Compound, use NAVSEA Drawing 605 - 6160358. - in - Place Special Hull Treatment SSN - 21 Class - Submarine Mold Maintenance and Repair Manual: 010/SHT - MMA - AN - NAVSEA S6360 SSN - 774 Class - Maintenance and Repair Manual for Virginia Class 010 - MMA - AV Mold - Submarine Place Special Hull Treatment: NAVSEA S6360 - in - (42A) Low Pressure Water Clean (LP WC) with a fan spray starting at a pressure of 1,000 PSI. Keep the cleaning lance nozzle tip perpendicular to and at least 4” from the surface. Increase pressure, if needed, in increments of 500 PSI up to a maximum of 5,000 PSI. gray Remove all paints down to sound - corrosive paint (F n anti or gree - 151 or F - 150) or bare GRP. Remove any remaining barnacle particles or other foreign objects with wood or plastic scrapers, or by sanding. Do not use wire brushes or other abrasive instruments. (43A) existing paint from the boot surface by Remove all marine growth and Low Pressure Water Cleaning (LP WC) or sanding with soft back dual action or soft back random orbital sanders and 60 grit paper. Observe ater Low Pressure W Cleaning (LP WC). Measure extreme caution when distance and control nozzle pressure to assure that the boot - stand off is not damaged during the cleaning process. Low Pressure Water Cleaning must be performed using fresh water with a starting pressure of 1000 PSI. Pressure must be increased in 500 PSI increment s until the desired results are obtained. Scuff the entire boot surface using 60 grit paper or equivalent coarseness Scotchbrite pad to remove any remaining paint and provide an adequately prepared surface for paint 50 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

254 ce with PF - 145HP degreaser (NSN application. Clean the bare boot surfa - 6850 - 01 - 378 - 0044) or degreasing solvent per MIL - PRF 680, Type I. Do not apply nonskid to Fairwater Planes or Retractable Bow Planes. (44A) 24647 coatings may be used for cold weather applications below MIL - PRF - (45A) 24647 PRF 50 deg rees Fahrenheit. For cold weather applications of MIL - - reviewed ASTM F718 shall be used to determine - coatings, the NAVSEA lower application temperature limit. Do not apply these coatings below 35 degrees Fahrenheit. (46A) Navy Formula F - 187 can not be applied over F - 184. (47A) If performing touch - up of paint in Steam Plant Surge Tanks, one coat Dampney Company ENDCOR 450 (no DFT required) shall be applied prior to application of the coats of Apexior No. 1. 2.6 Powder coatings approved for use on submarines are listed in . (48A) 51 of 99 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

255 C B F D A E G TABLE ONE PRIMER DRAFT MARKS KEEL TO BOTTOM OF SURFACE PREPARATION LINE BOOTTOP STEEL SURFACES BOOTTOP SURFACE SHIPS - 24647, 1 PRF NEAR WHITE METAL ONE AF COAT MIL 24647, - PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL - 24635 LT - PRF ONE COAT MIL - ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF - 24647, (LOW SOLAR MILS MILS - 7 - 5 TYPE I OR II, BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, TYPE I OR II, RED GRAY TYPE I OR II, 5 7 -- & -- INCLUDING PROPULSION ABSORPTION ONLY) TO 10 - PRF - 24647, SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING - BOOTTOPPING & BELOW, 2 OR - ONE AC COAT MIL - 3 WATERJETTING TO VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) 7 MILS - 5 TYPE I OR II, GRAY, MILS/COAT OR - -- NACE/SSPC SP -- WJ 2/M - UP TO 3 YEARS SERVICE COMMERCIAL GRADE WHITE LIFE AF 24635 - T ONE COA FOR SMALL BOATS AND PRF - MIL SERVICE CRAFT ONLY OCEAN GRAY (LOW SOLAR ABSORPTION ONLY) ABOVE (INCLUDING EMBARKED BOOTTOPPING, 2 3 MILS BOATS AND CRAFT) - SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (27), SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (27) & SEE NOTE (1) (8) & (48) ) 33 SEE NOTE ( SEE NOTES (48), & (68) (48) - ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF - SAME AS LINE ONE 5 MILS SAME AS LINE ONE ONE AF TIE COAT 3 5 MILS - ONE AF TIE COAT 3 2 24647, -- -- -- & TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, -- & ONE AF FULL COAT 5 ONE AF FULL COAT 5 5 - 7 MILS GRADE A, RED, - 7 MILS 7 MILS - -- MIL - PRF - 24647, TYPE III, & -- MIL 24647, TYPE III, PRF - - - CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, GRADE A ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF 24647, CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, GRADE TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, A GRADE A, GRAY, 5 - 7 MILS SEE NOTE (8) (8) & (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), & (8) SEE NOTES (2), (6), ONE AF COAT MIL - SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE 24647, - PRF 3 24647, - PRF - 2 AF COATS MIL UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL TYPE II, BLACK, TYPE II, BLACK 5 TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, 7 - & -- INCLUDING PROPULSION MILS/COAT -- 24647, - PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING TYPE II, RED, 5 - 7 MILS/COAT VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) UP TO 7 YEARS SERVICE SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (48) & LIFE (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8) & (48) SEE NOTE (46) SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 4 SAME AS LINE ONE PRF ONE - 24647, - PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL AF COAT MIL - UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL SAME AS LINE ONE 5 SAME AS LINE ONE 24647, SAME AS LINE ONE TYPE II, TYPE II, RED RED AND 2 AF COATS TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, & -- - PRF - MIL 24647, TYPE II, INCLUDING PROPULSION -- ONE AF COAT MIL - 7 - 5 PRF SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING - 24647, BLACK, MILS/COAT TYPE II, BLACK VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) & -- -- 24647, - PRF - UP TO 12 YEARS SERVICE ONE AF COAT MIL TYPE II, RED, LIFE 5 - 7 MILS/COAT SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (48) & SEE NOTE (46) (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8) & (48) EXISTING FIN STABILIZERS SAME AS LINE ONE 5 OFF BLAST TO SAME AS LINE 6 BRUSH - NACE 4/SSPC - SP 7 SEE NOTES (48) & (52) 5 SAME AS LINE ONE REFURBISHED FIN SAME AS LINE 7 HAND TOOL CLEAN TO SSPC SP 2 STABILIZERS - SEE NOTE (48) 52 99 of 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

256 D F A C E B G TABLE ONE SURFACE PREPARATION LINE DRAFT MARKS BOOTTOP PRIMER KEEL TO BOTTOM OF STEEL SURFACES BOOTTOP SURFACE SHIPS WHITE METAL BLAST, FOULING PAINT SAME AS UNDERWATER HULL ANTI 8 - ANTI - TROWELABLE DIELECTRIC SHIELD CORROSIVE SURROUNDING HULL (DIELECTRIC SHIELDS) - SP 5 NACE 1/SSPC PAINT SAME AS INNER SHIELD: SURROUNDING HULL EX ONE COAT EVOQUA WATER CEPT TM ONE COAT TECHNOLOGIES LLC CAPASTIC , PART NO. 35524 (W3T106410), 100 MILS MIN OUTER SHIELD: ONE COAT EVOQUA WATER TM TECHNOLOGIES LLC, CAPASTIC , PART NO. 35524 (W3T106410), 22 MILS MIN SEE NOTES (2), (6) & (8) SEE NOTES (10), (11), & (81) SAME AS LINE 8 SAME AS LINE 9 8 SAME AS LINE 8 SPRAYABLE DIELECTRIC SHIELD: ONE COAT INTERNATIONAL INTERLINE 624 BUFF OR SHERWIN - WILLIAMS NOVAPLATE UHS PRIMER AT 10 MILS MINIMUM DFT (OUT TO 7 FEET). & -- -- ONE COAT INTERNATIONAL - INTERLINE 624 OR SHERWIN WILLIAMS NOVAPLATE UHS AT 30 MILS MINIMUM DFT (OUT TO 6.5 FEET). & -- -- ONE COAT INTERNATIONAL INTERLINE 624 OR SHERWIN - W ILLIAMS NOVAPLATE UHS AT 30 MILS MINIMUM DFT (OUT TO 6 FEET WITH A TOTAL MINIMUM DFT OF 70 MILS). SEE NOTES (11), (69), & (81) SAME AS LINE - ANTI 24647, - PRF - EXPOSED AREAS OF ONE AC COAT MIL 7 FOULING PAINT SAME AS 10 5 SURROUNDING HULL MILS OUTBOARD SHAFTING 7 TYPE I OR II, - COVERED BY GLASS - REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) AND SHAFT SEE NOTES (6), (8) & (68) FLANGES SEE NOTES (8) & (48) 53 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

257 A G B F C D E TABLE ONE SURFACE PREPARATION LINE PRIMER KEEL TO BOTTOM OF BOOTTOP DRAFT MARKS ALUMINUM BOOTTOP SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL ONE AF TIE COAT MIL - 11 NEAR WHITE METAL - ONE AF TIE COAT MIL - PRF PRF - ONE AC COAT RED, WITHIN 4 - PRF ONE AF TIE COAT MIL - HOURS AFTER SURFACE 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, BLAST USING GARNET OR 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, INCLUDING PROPULSION PREPARATION AND 3, GRADE A, ALUMINUM OXIDE OR AND 3, GRADE A, APPLICATION AND 3, GRADE A, - I, 3 - 5 MILS APPLICATION I, 3 5 MILS CRUSHED GLASS OR APPLICATION I, 3 SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING -- 5 MILS & -- - -- -- - PRF - ONE AC COAT GRAY MIL -- & & -- & -- WALNUT SHELLS VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) -- PRF ONE AF FULL COAT MIL - OR 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, AND - - ONE AF FULL COAT MIL - PRF - PRF - - - ONE AF FULL COAT MIL 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, SEE NOTE (46) 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, 24647, TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, 7 - 3, GRADE A, APPLICATION I, 5 WATERJETTING TO MILS APPLICATION AND 3, GRADE A, AND 3, GRADE A, AND 3, GRADE A, NACE/SSPC 2 - WJ SP - APPLICATION I, APPLICATION I, I, 7 MILS, HAZE GRAY - 5 - 7 MILS, BLACK 5 5 7 MILS, HAZE GRAY - (48) & ), (8), SEE NOTES (2), (6 & (48) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), ) & (48) SEE NOTE (8) & (48) (68) SEE NOTES (1 S 24647, PRF - 2 AF COATS MIL - 24647, - 12 PRF SAME AS LINE 1 1 - ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF - 24647, 2 AF COATS MIL - ONE AF COAT MIL PRF 24647, - - 7 - TYPE I, BLACK, 5 TYPE I, BLACK, 5 7 TYPE I, RED WITHIN 4 HOURS TYPE I, BLACK MILS/COAT AFTER SURFACE PREPARATION MILS/COAT -- -- & & -- -- ONE AF COAT MIL - PRF - 24647, - TYPE I, RED, 5 ONE AC COAT MIL 7 MILS/COAT 24647, - PRF - - TYPE I, GRAY, 5 7 MILS/COAT (8), (48) & SEE NOTES (2), (6), SEE NOTES (2), (6), , & (48) (68) (8) NOTES (1) & (48) SEE (48) S (8) & SEE NOTE 2 2 SAME AS LINE 1 2 UNDERWATER HULL SAME AS LINE 1 13 SAME AS LINE 1 1 SAME AS LINE 1 SAME AS LINE 1 2 APPLIES TO EMBARKED BOATS AND CRAFT ONLY of 99 54 ITEM NO: 32 - 009 FY - 19

258 G A E B D C F TABLE ONE SURFACE PREPARATION KEEL TO BOTTOM OF PRIMER LINE BOOTTOP DRAFT MARKS GRP SURFACES BOOTTOP SURFACE SHIPS - ONE AF TIE COAT 3 14 ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF - 24647, UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL 24635 LT - PRF - ONE COAT MIL HIGH PRESSURE WASH 5 MILS ONE AF TIE COAT 3 - 5 MILS -- TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, & TO REMOVE MARINE TYPE III, CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, -- (LOW SOLAR GRAY -- & -- ONE AF FULL COAT 5 7 MILS 7 MILS GROWTH & LOOSE PAINT INCLUDING PROPULSION ABSORPTION ONLY) TO - GRADE A, ONE AF FULL COAT 5 - PRF - MIL - BELOW, 2 BOOTTOPPING & SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING - OR - MIL - PRF - 24647, TYPE III, 24647, TYPE III, - 5 - 7 MILS 3 MILS - CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, GRADE A UP OR REMOVAL VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) CLASSES 1, 2, AND 3, GRADE TOUCH A OF PAINT SYSTEM TO PRF - 24635 - SOUND AC COAT BY ONE COAT MIL UP TO 3 YEARS SERVICE LIFE OCEAN GRAY (LOW SOLAR LIGHT ABRASIVE BLASTING WITH WALNUT ABSORPTION ONLY) ABOVE BOOTTOPPING, SEE NOTE (46) SHELLS 3 MILS -- - -- 2 & SPOT CLEAN, CHAP 631, 5.2.6 - PARA 631 SEE NOTE (1) & (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8) SEE NOTE (8) SEE NOTES (2), (6) & (8) NOTE (21) SEE SAME AS LINE 14 24647, ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF - - PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 14 15 ONE AF COAT MIL - PRF - 24647, - MILS 5 TYPE I OR II, – 5 - 7 24647, TYPE I OR II, BLACK, TYPE I OR II, RED, 5 - 7 MILS MILS 7 SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (48) & (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8) & (48) SEE NOTES (8) & (48) - PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL 16 2 AF COATS SAME AS LINE 14 UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL SAME AS LINE 15 SAME AS LINE 14 24647, TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, 24647, TYPE II, - PRF - MIL TYPE II, BLACK 5 -- MILS/COAT 7 - BLACK, -- INCLUDING PROPULSION & SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL 24647, - VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) MILS/COAT - 5 TYPE II, RED, 7 SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (48) & UP TO 7 YEARS SERVICE LIFE (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8) & (48) SEE NOTE (46) SAME AS LINE 14 17 SAME AS LINE 14 SAME AS LINE 14 SAME AS LINE 14 SAME AS LINE 14 1 AF COAT RED AND 2 AF 24647, - PRF - ONE AF COAT MIL LINE 14 18 SAME AS SAME AS LINE 14 UNDERWATER HULL (KEEL SAME AS LINE 16 TO TOP OF BOOTTOP, TYPE II, RED COATS BLACK - PRF - 24647, TYPE II, -- & -- 5 INCLUDING PROPULSION MIL - 7 MILS/COAT - PRF - 24647, SHAFT OUTBOARD BEARING MIL ONE AF COAT VOIDS AND SEA CHESTS) TYPE II, BLACK -- & -- ONE COAT MIL 24647, UP TO 12 YEARS SERVICE - PRF - MILS/COAT LIFE 7 - 5 TYPE II, RED, SEE NOTE (46) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (48) & (68) SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8) & (48) SAME AS LINE 14 SAME AS LINE 15 SAME AS LINE 15 SAME AS LINE 15 UNDERWATER HULL 19 SAME AS LINE 14 APPLIES TO EMBARKED BOATS AND CRAFT ONLY of 99 55 32 - 009 ITEM NO: FY - 19

259 A F G D B E C ONE TABLE BOOTTOP DRAFT MARKS PRIMER SURFACE PREPARATION KEEL TO BOTTOM OF LINE GRP SURFACES BOOTTOP SURFACE SHIPS ANTI FOULING - ONE FULL COAT UNDERWATER HULL NEAR WHITE METAL 20 APPENDAGES ON BLAST USING GARNET OR PAINT SAME AS --- & --- SURROUNDING ONE STRIPE COAT ALUMINUM OXIDE MINESWEEPERS ONLY --- & --- - OR - HULL ONE FULL COAT WATERJETTING TO NACE/SSPC - --- & --- 2 - SP WJ ONE STRIPE COAT & --- --- ONE FULL COAT AMERCOAT 3258 5 MILS/COAT - DARK GRAY, 3 SEE NOTE (40) 21 SAME AS LINE MINESWEEPER SAME AS LINE 1 6 20 8 SAME AS LINE 1 PROPULSION SHAFTS 20 POWER TOOL CLEAN TO SAME AS LINE 20 SONAR TRANSDUCER TR - 22 SAME AS LINE 1 ON - 192B/UQN - BARE METAL PER SSPC MINESWEEPERS ONLY SP 11 56 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

260 G D F A B C E TABLE ONE KEEL TO BOTTOM OF SURFACE PREPARATION LINE DRAFT MARKS PRIMER BOOTTOP WOOD SURFACES BOOTTOP SURFACE SHIPS PRF ONE COAT MIL UNDERWATER HULL - 23 PRF BRUSH - OFF BLAST TO 24635 ONE AF COAT MIL - PRF - 24647, KEEL TO 6 INCHES ABOVE UPPER - ONE AF COAT MIL - 24647, - 7 - BOOTTOP LIMIT MILS TYPE I OR II, 5 - 5 TYPE I OR II, 7 MILS REMOVE LOOSE & (LOW SOLAR ABSORPTION DETERIORATED ONLY) LT GRAY, TO PRF - BOOTTOPPING & BELOW, 2 COATINGS ONE AC COAT MIL - - 24647, - TYPE I OR II, 3 MILS MILS 7 5 - OR - WASH HIGH PRESSURE TO REMOVE MARINE ONE COAT MIL - 24635 - PRF GROWTH & LOOSE PAINT (LOW SOLAR ABSORPTION ONLY) OCEAN GRAY, ABOVE SEE NOTES (2), (6), (8), (27) & (2), (6), (8), (27), (48) SEE NOTES BOOTTOPPING, 2 - 3 MILS (48) & (68) SEE NOTES (8) & (48) SEE NOTES (1) & (6) SEE NOTE (20) 57 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

261 B E F A D G C TABLE 2 VERTICAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS HORIZONTAL SURFACES LINE SURFACE PRIMER STEEL SURFACES DECKS & FITTINGS PREPARATION EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACE SHIPS - ONE COAT HAZE GRAY MIL - 1 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT ONE COAT HAZE GRAY NEAR WHITE METAL EXTERIOR SURFACES ONE COAT DECK GRAY MIL MIL BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - - TYPE III, 23236, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS TYPE III, 24635 -- & -- - CLASS TYPE III, 24635 PRF PRF - 24635 ABOVE BOOTTOP WITH PRF - - GRADE B OR C, 2 EXCEPTION OF AREAS 3 MILS - GRADE B OR C, 2 ONE FULL COAT , 2 SP 10 , 2 CLASS 2, GRADE B OR C, 2 3 MILS CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 23236, TYPE PRF - MIL MILS - OR - 3 MILS - - - OR - RECEIVING NONSKID & 24763, TYPE II OR - PRF - OR - - MIL WATERJETTING TO V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR WELL DECK OVERHEAD NACE/SSPC 4 - 8 MILS/COAT - 7, 4 MIL - PRF - 24763, TYPE II OR III, CLASS 2, GRADE B, 2 AREAS - SP WJ - 2/M - (FOR REPAIR OF MIL 4 MILS III, CLASS 2, GRADE B, 2 - - PRF 24635 TYPE III, AND MIL - PRF - MILS 24763 TYPE II OR III PAINT DESIGNATIONS & COATINGS ONLY) MARKINGS MIL - PRF - 24635 , 2 - 3 MILS ) 33 SEE NOTES (2), (3), & ( NOTE (42) SEE NOTE (47) SEE SEE NOTES (43) & (47) 2 ONE FULL COAT MIL - SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE ONE FULL COAT MIL PRF PRF - 23236, TYPE - 23236, TYPE VII, - 8 - CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - VII, CLASS 5 OR 7,10 MILS 12 MILS "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE ONE 3 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - TYPE VII CLASS 23236 5/18 OR 7/18, 20 30 - MILS SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE 4 ONE FULL COAT ONE STRIPE COAT CORROSIVE MIL -- & - -- ANTI - PRF ONE FULL COAT - 24647, TYPE I OR CORROSIVE MIL - - II, 5 ANTI - 7 MILS - PRF 24647, TYPE I OR 7 MILS II, 5 - SEE NOTE (8) SEE NOTE (8) ONE COAT MIL DECK GRAY HAZE GRAY 5 ONE COAT SAME AS LINE ONE - SAME AS LINE ONE HAZE GRAY ONE STRIPE COAT - ONE COAT EXTERIOR SURFACES MIL ABOVE BOOTTOP WITH 24635, TYPE V OR VI, PRF 24635, TYPE V OR VI, - PRF - PRF MIL - 24635, TYPE V OR - 23236, TYPE - PRF - MIL GRADE B OR C V OR VI, - 5 GRADE B OR C, CLASS 2, CLASS 5 OR , 5 - CLASS 2, EXCEPTION OF AREAS GRADE B OR VI, CLASS 2, 8 MILS 8 MILS 8 MILS , 4 RECEIVING NONSKID & 8 MILS - 5 C, 7 - WELL DECK OVERHEAD SEE NOTE (70) SEE NOTE S (64) & (70) AREAS S (64) & SEE NOTE (70) S (64) & - - (FOR REPAIR OF MIL PRF 24635 TYPE V OR VI 5 SAME AS LINE 5 6 5 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 2 COATINGS, AND NEW COATING APPLICATIONS) 5 7 5 SAME AS LINE ONE 5 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE SEE NOTES (2), (3), & ( ) 33 5 5 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE ONE STRIPE COAT 5 8 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 4 ANTI CORROSIVE MIL - - PRF - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 - 7 MILS SEE NOTE (8) 99 of 58 009 ITEM NO: 32 - - 19 FY

262 G D A E F B C TABLE 2 PRIMER VERTICAL SURFACES SURFACE HORIZONTAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS LINE STEEL SURFACES DECKS & FITTINGS EXPOSED TO GASES PREPARATION SURFACE SHIPS SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT HAZE GRAY, MIL SAME AS LINE ONE 9 SAME AS LINE 5 EXTERIOR SURFACES TO ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - ONE COAT HAZE GRAY, MIL - CLASS 5 OR PRF 24763 (LOW SOLAR - PRF 24763 (LOW SOLAR TYPE V OR VI, - BE INSULATED 4 - ABSORPTION ONLY), 2 8 MILS 4 7, - ABSORPTION ONLY), 2 - 4 MILS -- OR -- MILS - 24635, ONE COAT MIL - PRF TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 2, GRADE B OR C, 5 - 8 MILS FOLLOWED BY INSULATION SEE NOTES (64) & (70) SAME AS LINE ONE 9 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, 10 9 CLASS 5 OR 7, - TYPE VII, 4 8 MILS OR -- -- - PRF - ONE COAT MIL 24635, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 2, GRADE B OR 8 MILS C, 5 - FOLLOWED BY INSULATION SEE NOTES (64) & (70) SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 3 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, 9 SAME AS LINE 9 11 TYPE VII, CLASS 5/18 OR - 7/18, 4 8 MILS OR -- -- 24635, ONE COAT MIL - PRF - TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 2, - 8 MILS GRADE B OR C, 5 FOLLOWED BY INSULATION SEE NOTES (64) & (70) 9 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 4 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 8 9 ONE COAT ANTI - SAME AS LINE 12 MIL - - CORROSIVE PRF - 7 MILS 5 24647, -- -- OR - PRF - 24635, ONE COAT MIL CLASS 2, TYPE V OR VI, - GRADE B OR C, 5 8 MILS FOLLOWED BY INSULATION SEE NOTES (8), (64) & (70) NEAR WHITE STRIPE COAT OF ONE COAT ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MIL - METAL HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT 13 - PROPRIETARY PROPRIETARY PRF - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC 24667, TYPE V, COMP G DECKS & VERTICAL SP 10 REPLENISHMENT DECK NONSKID PRIMER NONSKID PRIMER - OR - AREAS LISTED ON THE QPL LISTED ON THE QPL 24667 - WATERJETTING TO PRF - MIL FOR - FOR MIL PRF - 24667 (OF NACE/SSPC - SP MINIMUM 3 YEARS SERVICE WJ - 2/L TYPE TO MATCH LIFE COLUMN E) SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), SEE NOTE (7) (75) & (83) SEE NOTE SEE NOTES (7) & (51) (56), (59), (61), & (63) S 59 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

263 C A F B G D E TABLE 2 MASTS & STACKS VERTICAL SURFACES PRIMER SURFACE HORIZONTAL SURFACES LINE STEEL SURFACES PREPARATION EXPOSED TO GASES DECKS & FITTINGS SURFACE SHIPS 13 SAME AS LINE - 13 SAME AS LINE HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MIL 14 SAME AS LINE 13 - DECKS & VERTICAL PRF 24667, TYPE VI, OR VIII, REPLENISHMENT DECK COMP G AREAS MINIMUM 12 MONTHS SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), SERVICE LIFE (56), (59), (61), (63), & (72) (75) & (83) ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MIL 15 13 SAME AS LINE - SAME AS LINE 13 SEE NOTE ONE FULL COAT OF S 24667, TYPE I, COMP G - PRF PROPRIETARY NONSKID PRIMER LISTED ON THE QPL - FOR MIL 24667 PRF - SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), SEE NOTES (7) & (76) (56), (59), (61), & (63) 13 - ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MIL 16 13 HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 13 SAME AS LINE - DECKS & VERTICAL PRF 24667, TYPE II, COMP G REPLENISHMENT DECK AREAS MINIMUM 6 MONTHS SERVICE LIFE SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), (75) & (83) S SEE NOTE (56), (59), (61), & (63) DECKS, FLIGHT 13 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT DARK GRAY, 13 SAME AS LINE 17 HANGAR POWER TOOL MIL CLEANING TO BARE 24667, TYPE VII, - PRF - DECKS, VERTICAL REPLENISHMENT DECK METAL, SSPC - COMP G OR L SP 11 AREAS, CVN FLIGHT DECK LANDING AREAS, WALK SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), AREAS AND ALL OTHER DECK AREAS (56), (60), (61), & (63) 17 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MINIMUM 30 DAYS SERVICE 18 LIFE 24667, TYPE VII, - PRF - MIL COMP G OR L S (75) & (83) SEE NOTE SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), (56), (60), (61), & (63) NEAR WHITE METAL SAME AS LINE 19 ONE COAT DARK GRAY, 13 CVN FLIGHT PRF DECK LANDING AREAS MIL - 24667, TYPE V, - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP 10 COMP L - OR - SERVICE LIFE MINIMUM WATERJETTING TO SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), 15,000 LANDINGS 2/L NACE/SSPC - WJ SP (60), & (63) - CVN FLIGHT 13 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT DARK GRAY, 9 1 20 SAME AS LINE - PRF DECK LANDING AREAS - MIL 24667, TYPE I, VI, OR VIII COMP L MINIMUM SERVICE LIFE 10,000 LANDINGS SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), & (72) (60), (63), 60 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

264 A G B E C F D TABLE 2 MASTS & STACKS LINE VERTICAL SURFACES PRIMER SURFACE HORIZONTAL SURFACES STEEL SURFACES DECKS & FITTINGS PREPARATION EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACE SHIPS ONE COAT MIL - 13 SAME AS LINE 24667, 13 SAME AS LINE - 21 PRF EXTERIOR WALK AREAS SAME AS LINE 13 (ALL DECK AREAS OTHER TYPE I, V, VI, OR VIII, COMP DECK, THAN HANGAR G TICAL - OR FLIGHT DECK, & VER - REPLENISHMENT DECK ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MIL AREAS) 24667, TYPE II, III, - PRF - IV, COMP G SEE NOTE (75) , & SEE NOTES (19), (22), (59) (63) ONE STRIPE COAT 22 ONE COAT DECK GRAY MIL SAME AS LINE - 13 ONE COAT PROPRIETARY CLASS 24635 TYPE III, - PRF PROPRIETARY NONSKID PRIMER 2, GRADE B OR C , 2 NONSKID PRIMER - 3 MILS, 8 MILS QPL LISTED ON THE LISTED ON THE QPL OR TYPE V, 5 - -- FOR MIL - PRF - 24667 FOR MIL - PRF - & 24667 -- OR VIII, TYPE I, V, VI, APPLICATION OF MIL OR VIII, TYPE I, V, VI, - PRF - COMP G, 4 COMP G, 4 - 6 MILS 24667, TYPE XI, COMP PS 6 MILS - (70) & ,(63), SEE NOTES (22) (71) SEE NOTES (7) & (70) SEE NOTE (7) 23 - SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 13 22 ONE COAT MIL PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT - V OR VI 23236, TYPE MIL - PRF 23236, TYPE CLASS 5, 15B, OR 17, 4 - CLASS 5, 15B, V OR VI OR 17, 4 - 6 MILS 6 MILS - 24 13 ONE COAT MIL - PRF SAME AS LINE 22 SAME AS LINE VII CLASS 23236, TYPE 8 MILS 5, 15B, OR 17, 6 - 25 - 17 ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT 22 SAME AS LINE 23236, TYPE - - MIL V OR VI 23236, TYPE PRF CLASS 15B OR 17, 4 6 - V OR VI CLASS 15B MILS OR 17, 4 - 6 MILS - ONE COAT MIL 22 17 26 - SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE PRF 23236, TYPE VII CLASS 8 MILS - 15B OR 17, 6 61 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

265 G A B C F D E TABLE 2 PRIMER VERTICAL SURFACES HORIZONTAL SURFACES SURFACE LINE MASTS & STACKS STEEL SURFACES DECKS & FITTINGS PREPARATION EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACE SHIPS 27 RAST TRACK TROUGHS NEAR WHITE METAL PRF - ONE COAT MIL - - - 23236, ONE COAT MIL PRF 8 - TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC WHERE PAINTED (WHERE 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS - 17, 6 MILS NONSKID NOT APPLIED) SP 10 8 MILS -- -- OR -- -- OR - OR - - PRF - WATERJETTING TO ONE COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS WJ - 2/L 8 - NACE/SSPC TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 SP - 15B, 6 MILS 8 MILS - OR - POWER TOOL CLEAN TO BARE METAL, SSPC - SP 11 28 "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT MIL - PRF 23236 TYPE VII CLASS - 17/18, 20 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) ONE COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL PRF - 29 23236, - PRF SAME AS LINE ONE - - TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - 12 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 8 MILS 5, 4 MILS - - WELL PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL 30 DECK OVERHEADS, NEAR WHITE METAL ONE COAT MIL - - PRF 12 BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC BOTH EXPOSED & NON - TYPE VII, CLASS 19, 10 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS - EXPOSED TO LCAC MILS 19, SP 10 4 - 8 MILS EXHAUST, AND ENCLOSED BOAT HANDLING AREA OVERHEADS SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTES (30) & (31) SEE NOTE (34) SAME AS LINE 30 31 "SINGLE COAT" ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS 19/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) 32 30 "SINGLE COAT" WELL DECK AND ENCLOSED SAME AS LINE BOAT HANDLING AREA - ONE COAT MIL PRF - BULKHEADS AND DECKS 23236 TYPE VII CLASS - 7/18, 20 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) 62 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

266 G A E F B D C TABLE 2 PRIMER LINE SURFACE HORIZONTAL SURFACES VERTICAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS STEEL SURFACES EXPOSED TO GASES DECKS & FITTINGS PREPARATION SURFACE SHIPS 33 ONE COAT MIL - EXTERIOR - SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE PRF 23236, TYPE VII, 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS PORTABLE/BOLTED - PRF - MIL 12 MILS LOUVERS FOR INTAKES 5 OR 7, CLASS 5 OR 7, 10 - 4 8 MILS AND UPTAKES - SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SAME AS LINE 34 33 5 SAME AS LINE 33 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 5 13 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT MIL - 35 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - ONE COAT MIL 24712, PRF - - NEAR WHITE METAL 24712, - PRF 23236, TYPE VIIIA TGIC POLYESTER, - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC TGIC POLYESTER, 30 - APPLIED BY FLUIDIZED TOTAL SYSTEM 15 SP 10 30 MILS TOTAL SYSTEM 15 - MILS BED METHOD ONLY, 10 MILS MINIMUM SAME AS LINE ONE "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE 36 PRF - ONE COAT MIL - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 7/ 30 MILS 18 , 20 - SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE 5 SAME AS LINE 13 SAME AS LINE 36 37 5 SAME AS LINE 35 35 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE DDG GAS TURBINE BOLTED 38 SAME AS LINE 35 35 SAME AS LINE AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST LOUVERS ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 35 35 - PRF - SAME AS LINE 35 SAME AS LINE POWDER COATED 39 23236, TYPE VIIIA WATERTIGHT DOORS: APPLIED BY FLUIDIZED INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BED METHOD ONLY, 10 MILS MINIMUM ONE FULL COAT - NEAR WHITE METAL ONE COAT HAZE GRAY MIL VERTICAL LAUNCH SYSTEM 40 ONE STRIPE COAT SAME AS LINE 5 ONE COAT - (VLS), MK PROPRIETARY NONSKID 41 BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC PROPRIETARY - 24667, TYPE I OR II, - PRF PROPRIETARY NONSKID PRIMER CO MP G PRIMER LISTED ON THE NONSKID PRIMER SP 10, USING NEW, - NON LISTED ON THE QPL -- & -- CLEAN, - 24667 PRF - QPL FOR MIL LISTED ON THE QPL - FOR MIL - 24667 - ONE COAT HAZE GRAY MIL (OF TYPE TO MATCH FOR MIL - - PRF PRF RECYCLED, NON 24667 (OF - FERROUS ALUMINUM COLUMN E) TYPE TO MATCH (OF TYPE TO MATCH PRF - 24635, TYPE V OR VI, OXIDE TYPE I, GRADE A COLUMN E) - COLUMN E) CLASS 2, GRADE B OR C, 5 8 MILS OR GARNET, TYPE IV, GRADE A QUALIFIED 59316 A - ) 23 - TO A SEE NOTE ( SEE NOTE ( 16 ) SEE NOTE (82) - - 24667 EXTERIOR MIL HIGH PRESSURE 41 PRF VIII) SURFACES (TYPES I – WATER CLEANING (HP WC) WITH VACUUM (GREEN CLEAN OF NONSKID CONTAINED SELF - DECK) EQUIPMENT TO NACE/SSPC - WJ - 4 SP SEE NOTE (80) 63 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

267 G A E B D F C TABLE 2 SURFACES SURFACE HORIZONTAL SURFACES VERTICAL LINE PRIMER MASTS & STACKS ALUMINUM EXPOSED TO GASES DECKS & FITTINGS PREPARATION SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS ONE COAT HAZE GRAY EXTERIOR SURFACES ONE COAT MIL - PRF - NEAR WHITE METAL ONE STRIPE COAT - ONE COAT HAZE GRAY MIL ONE FULL COAT 42 ONE COAT DECK GRAY MIL - 24635 - PRF , CLASS 2 23236, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS TYPE III MIL - P RF - 23236, TYPE 24635 - PRF - MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE V OR MIL ABOVE BOOTTOP, WITH BLAST USING GARNET, PRF - 24635 TYPE III, TYPE III, CLASS 5 OR 7, 3 MILS 3 MILS - OR C, 2 VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 CLASS 2, GRADE B OR C, 2 GRADE B - ALUMINUM OXIDE, V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR EXCEPTION OF AREAS 2, GRADE B OR C, 2 - 4 - 8 MILS - OR MILS 3 MILS - - CRUSHED GLASS, 7, 4 8 MILS RECEIVING NONSKID - - PRF - MIL (FOR REPAIR OF MIL - PRF 24763 TYPE II OR III, - OR - WALNUT SHELLS, OR DE B, 2 MIL - PRF - 24763 TYPE II OR - PRF - STAINLESS STEEL - CLASS 2, GRA 4 24635 TYPE III, AND MIL III, CLASS 2, GRADE B, 2 SHOT 4 24763 TYPE II OR III - MILS MILS - OR - COATINGS ONLY) PAINT DESIGNATIONS & WATERJETTING TO - 24635, 2 PRF - 2 - SP WJ SEE NOTE (2) - NACE/SSPC MARKINGS MIL - 3 MILS SEE NOTES (43) & (47) SEE NOTE (42) SEE NOTE (47) SEE NOTE (21) 42 SAME AS LINE 42 SAME AS LINE 42 43 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 42 - ONE COAT MIL - PRF ONE FULL COAT 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE VII, 5 OR 7, 4 CLASS 5 OR 7,10 - 8 MILS 12 MILS - SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 42 "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 42 SAME AS LINE 42 42 44 ONE COAT MIL - - PRF 23236 TYPE VII CLASS 5/18 OR 7/18, 20 30 - MILS SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 42 2 COATS F - 84, TT - P - 42 SAME AS LINE 45 42 SAME AS LINE 42 4 645, ALKYD, 2 - MILS/COAT ONE COAT HAZE - MIL HAZE GRAY ONE COAT ONE COAT - MIL 46 EXTERIOR SURFACES SAME AS LINE 42 GRAY ONE STRIPE COAT DECK GRAY 24635, TYPE V OR ABOVE BOOTTOP, WITH - PRF - 24635, TYPE V OR VI, - PRF MIL - PRF 23236, TYPE V 24635, TYPE V OR VI, MIL - PRF - GRADE B OR 5 - 5 GRADE B OR C, CLASS 2, VI, CLASS 2, EXCEPTION OF AREAS - OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 GRADE B OR C, CLASS 2, - 5 C, - RECEIVING NONSKID 8 MILS 8 MILS 8 MILS 8 MILS PRF OR -- (FOR REPAIR OF MIL - -- - 24635 TYPE V OR VI ONE STRIPE COAT 23236, TYPE - - MIL COATINGS, AND NEW PRF - VII, CLASS 5 OR 7, 6 10 COATING APPLICATIONS) MILS OR SEE NOTE (2) — -- ONE STRIPE COAT MIL PRF 23236, TYPE - - VII, CLASS 5/18 OR 7/18, 15 MILS 10 - OR — -- ONE STRIPE COAT PRF - MIL - 24635, TYPE V - 8 SEE NOTE (70) SEE NOTE (70) OR VI, CLASS 2, 5 SEE NOTE (70) MILS DECK GRAY 64 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

268 A F G D B E C TABLE 2 VERTICAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS PRIMER SURFACE LINE HORIZONTAL SURFACES ALUMINUM PREPARATION DECKS & FITTINGS EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS ONE COAT ONE COAT DARK GRAY, MIL NEAR WHITE METAL HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT - 47 - DECKS & VERTICAL 24667, TYPE V, COMP G BLAST USING GARNET, PRF PROPRIETARY NONSKID PRIMER ALUMINUM OXIDE, REPLENISHMENT DECK LISTED ON THE QPL CRUSHED GLASS, AREAS MIL MINIMUM 3 YEARS SERVICE 24667 (OF - PRF - FOR WALNUT SHELLS, OR LIFE TYPE TO MATCH STAINLESS STEEL SHOT COLUMN E) SEE NOTE (75) OR - - WATERJETTING TO - SP - NACE/SSPC WJ 2 SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), (56), (59), (61), & (63) SEE NOTE S (5), (7) , & SEE NOTE (21) (51 ) SAME AS LINE 48 ONE COAT DARK GRAY MIL - HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT SAME AS LINE 47 47 PRF DECKS & VERTICAL - 24667, TYPE I, VI, OR REPLENISHMENT DECK VIII, COMP G AREAS MINIMUM 12 MONTHS SERVICE LIFE SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), (59), (61), (63), & (72) (56), SEE NOTE (75) ONE COAT DARK GRAY MIL 47 SAME AS LINE - 49 HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT SAME AS LINE 47 DECKS & VERTICAL - PRF 24667 TYPE II, COMP G REPLENISHMENT DECK AREAS MINIMUM 6 MONTHS SERVICE LIFE SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), SEE NOTE (75) (56), (59), (61), & (63) SAME AS LINE ONE COAT DARK GRAY, POWER TOOL CLEAN 50 47 HANGAR DECKS, FLIGHT MIL DECKS, PRF VII, 24667, TYPE - TO BARE METAL, SSPC - VERTICAL - SP 11 REPLENISHMENT DECK COMP G OR L AREAS, CVN FLIGHT DECK SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), LANDING AREAS, WALK (60), (61), & (63) AREAS AND ALL OTHER (56), DECK AREAS MINIMUM 30 DAYS SERVICE 51 ONE COAT DARK GRAY, 50 SAME AS LINE LIFE MIL PRF 24667, TYPE VII, - - COMP G OR L SEE NOTE (75) SEE NOTES (19), (22), (50), (56), (60), (61), & (63) 65 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

269 A G B F C E D TABLE 2 SURFACE LINE HORIZONTAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS PRIMER VERTICAL SURFACES ALUMINUM PREPARATION DECKS & FITTINGS EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS 52 ONE COAT MIL PRF 47 24667, SAME AS LINE - 47 SAME AS LINE EXTERIOR WALK AREAS - (ALL TYPE I, V, VI, OR VIII, COMP G DECK AREAS OTHER - THAN HANGAR DECK, - OR FLIGHT DECK, ONE COAT DARK GRAY, 24667, TYPE II, III, PRF - MIL - & VERTICAL REPLENISHMENT DECK IV, COMP G AREAS) SEE NOTES (19), (22), , & (59) (63) SEE NOTE (75) 53 SAME AS LINE 47 ONE COAT DECK GRAY MIL - ONE COAT CLASS III, PRF PROPRIETARY - 24635,TYPE NONSKID PRIMER - 2, GRADE B OR C, 2 3 MILS, OR TYPE V, 5 8 MILS LISTED ON THE QPL - FOR MIL -- -- 24667 - PRF - & - PRF - APPLICATION OF MIL TYPE I, V, OR VI COMP 6 G, 4 - MILS 24667, TYPE XI, COMP PS (63), SEE NOTES (22), (70), & (71) SEE NOTES (7) & (70) 54 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 47 - 53 ONE COAT MIL - PRF 23236, TYPE V, VI, OR VII CLASS 5, 15B, OR 17, 4 - 6 MILS 53 PRF - SAME AS LINE 55 ONE COAT MIL POWER TOOL CLEAN - 23236, TYPE TO BARE METAL, SSPC V, VI, OR - SP 11 VII CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - 8 MILS SEE NOTE (5) ONE COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL 56 23236, NEAR WHITE METAL - RAST TRACK TROUGHS - PRF - PRF - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC WHERE PAINTED (WHERE TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR - 8 MILS NONSKID NOT APPLIED - SP 10 17, 6 15B OR 17, 6 8 MILS - - OR - WATERJETTING TO SP - WJ - 2/L NACE/SSPC - OR - POWER TOOL CLEAN TO BARE METAL, SSPC - SP 11 42 SAME AS LINE "SINGLE COAT" 57 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - CLASS 23236 TYPE VII 17/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) ONE COAT MIL PRF - ONE COAT MIL - - PRF 58 - SAME AS LINE 42 23236, 12 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 MILS - 8 MILS 5, 4 66 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

270 E C A D F B G TABLE 2 PRIMER SURFACE LINE VERTICAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS HORIZONTAL SURFACES ALUMINUM DECKS & FITTINGS PREPARATION EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS 42 59 ONE COAT EXTERIOR 23236, - PRF - SAME AS LINE 42 SAME AS LINE 42 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT MIL PORTABLE/BOLTED 23236, TYPE - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 5 OR 7, 10 MIL 8 LOUVERS FOR INTAKES - VII, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 12 MILS - AND UPTAKES MILS SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SAME AS LINE 59 60 SAME AS LINE 59 46 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 46 SAME AS LINE 42 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - PRF 24712, 24712, - ONE COAT MIL NEAR WHITE METAL 61 - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - TGIC POLYESTER, TGIC POLYESTER, 23236, TYPE VIIIA - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - 30 MILS SP 10 TOTAL SYSTEM 15 - 30 APPLIED BY FLUIDIZED TOTAL SYSTEM 15 BED METHOD ONLY, 10 MILS MILS MINIMUM 42 SAME AS LINE "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 62 42 SAME AS LINE 42 - - ONE COAT MIL PRF 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS - 30 MILS 7/ 18 , 20 SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE 62 46 63 SAME AS LINE 42 SAME AS LINE 46 SAME AS LINE - 64 NEAR WHITE METAL ONE FULL COAT ONE COAT VERTICAL LAUNCH SYSTEM ONE COAT HAZE GRAY MIL - - PROPRIETARY NONSKID PROPRIETARY (VLS), MK 41 BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC 24667, TYPE I OR II, - PRF COMP G NONSKID PRIMER PRIMER LISTED ON THE SP 10, USING NEW, - QPL FOR MIL & LISTED ON THE QPL - 24667 -- - CLEAN, NON PRF -- ONE COAT HAZE GRAY MIL RECYCLED, NON - PRF - 24667 (OF (OF TYPE TO MATCH - FOR MIL - 24635, TYPE V OR VI, TYPE TO MATCH - PRF FERROUS ALUMINUM COLUMN E) CLASS 2, GRADE B OR C OXIDE TYPE I, GRADE A COLUMN E) OR GARNET, TYPE IV, A QUALIFIED GRADE A - TO A ) 23 SEE NOTE ( - 59316 ) SEE NOTE (82) 16 SEE NOTE ( EXTERIOR MIL - PRF - 24667 HIGH 65 PRESSURE – WATER CLEANING (HP (TYPES I VIII) SURFACES WC) WITH VACUUM CONTAINED (GREEN CLEAN OF NONSKID SELF - FLIGHT S INCLUDING DECK EQUIPMENT TO - 4 - NACE/SSPC WJ DECK ) SP SEE NOTE (80) 67 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

271 G D F A C B E TABLE 2 SURFACE LINE VERTICAL SURFACES MASTS & STACKS PRIMER HORIZONTAL SURFACES GRP FIBERGLASS DECKS & FITTINGS EXPOSED TO GASES PREPARATION SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS ONE COAT DECK GRAY MIL HIGH PRESSURE WASH - MIL ONE COAT HAZE GRAY EXTERIOR SURFACES 66 ONE COAT F - 150, ONE COAT HAZE GRAY - ONE STRIPE COAT - PRF ABOVE BOOTTOP 24635 TYPE III, CLASS MIL - DTL - 24441, TYPE IV, DTL 24635 TYPE III, - PRF - MIL TO REMOVE MARINE - PRF 24635 TYPE III, GRADE 24441, TYPE IV, - MIL - 4 6 MILS 4 - 6 MILS - - GRADE B, 2 B, 2 3 MILS - 2, GRADE B OR C, 2 3 MILS 3 MILS GROWTH & LOOSE - OR - PAINT -- - & -- SEE NOTE (2) - OR - PRF - MIL - 24763, TYPE II OR - OR 24763, TYPE II OR ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, - PRF MIL - - - III, CLASS 2, GRADE B, 2 4 - 6 MILS - TYPE IV, 4 - III, CLASS 2, GRADE B, 2 TOUCH UP OR 4 REMOVAL OF PAINT MILS MILS SYSTEM TO SOUND IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS: PRIMER BY LIGHT PAINT DESIGNATIONS & ABRASIVE BLASTING MARKINGS MIL - 24635 PRF WITH WALNUT SHELLS - -- 3 MILS - TYPE III, 2 & -- SPOT CLEAN, CHAP 5.2.6 631, PARA 631 - SEE NOTE (42) SEE NOTE (43) SEE NOTE (29) SEE NOTE (21) SEE NOTE (29) EXTERIOR WALK AREAS ONE COAT 67 PROPRIETARY POWER TOOL CLEAN MIL ALL EXTERIOR DECK AREAS TO CLEAN FIBERGLASS 24667, TYPE I, II, - PRF - NONSKID PRIMER (DISC SANDER, ETC.) OR III, COMP G LISTED ON THE QPL - - OR - - 24667 - PRF - FOR MIL OR - - POWER TOOL CLEAN PRF MIL 24667 TYPE IV TO POLYURETHANE OVERLAY SUBSTRATE (DISC SANDER, ETC.) OR - - HYDROBLAST TO CLEAN FIBERGLASS SEE NOTE (7) SEE NOTES (25) SEE NOTES (19) & (22) & (62) ONE COAT DECK GRAY MIL - - ONE COAT F 68 150, SAME AS LINE 67 - - 24635 TYPE III, GRADE 24441, TYPE IV, PRF MIL - DTL - B, 2 4 - 6 MILS 3 MILS -- -- & APPLICATION OF MIL - PRF - 24667, TYPE XI, COMPOSITION PS SEE NOTE (71) 68 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

272 A F E G B C D TABLE 2 VERTICAL SURFACES LINE SURFACE PRIMER MASTS & STACKS HORIZONTAL SURFACES WOOD SURFACES PREPARATION DECKS & FITTINGS EXPOSED TO GASES SURFACE SHIPS EXTERIOR ABOVE ALL OTHER SURFACES: 69 IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS: HAND TOOL CLEAN DECKS, MASTS & 150, - ONE COAT F - MIL - OR BOOTTOPPING - DTL 24441, TYPE IV, - SPARS: POWER TOOL CLEAN 4 ONE COAT HAZE GRAY 6 MILS PAINT DESIGNATIONS & - PRF - 24635 - TO REMOVE - MIL ONE COAT DECK MARKINGS MIL PRF 24635 TYPE III, - - PRF 24635 3 MILS 3 MILS - GRADE B, 2 - TYPE III,, 2 GRAY MIL - DETERIORATED TYPE III, GRADE B, 2 - COATINGS 3 MILS - - OR ONE COAT BLACK 3 MIL - - 24635, 2 - PRF MILS SEE NOTE (43) 69 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

273 A G B F C D E TABLE 3 LINE BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS PRIMER DECKS MARKINGS SURFACE PREPARATION INSULATION STEEL SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS - TO DECKS NOT RECEIVING 1 24596, HAND TOOL CLEANING, 2 COATS MIL FOR INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS - HULL, VENTILATION & PIPING - P PRF 2 COATS FORMULA 84, TT - BASED INTERIOR - 4 MILS/COAT INSULATION COVERING: 645, ALKYD, 2 SP 2 - SSPC COMPARTMENT WATER - COLORS TO BE SPECIFIED PIPING & - OR - LATEX, 2 - 4 MILS/COAT 24596, - - - PRF - 32171, TYPE I OR III, - OR BY TYCOM OR SHIP'S VENTILATION MIL ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, PRF MIL COAT ONE - CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 2 COATS MIL - DTL - 24607 , - 12 MILS TYPE V, VI, OR VII, CLASS 5 OR WATER - BASED INTERIOR COMMANDING OFFICER PER - - 8.18.3.2 7, 4 2 - 4 MILS/COAT 8 MILS 4 MILS - LATEX, 2 CHAP 631, PARA 631 -- - OR - -- OR 32171, ONE COAT MIL PRF - COAT MIL ONE - - DTL - 24607, 4 MILS TYPE I OR III, CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 - 2 – 12 MILS IF REQUIRED FOR HIDING, ONE ADDITIONAL COAT SHALL BE APPLIED. SEE NOTES (17) & (28) SEE NOTES (9), (28) & (41) SEE NOTE (9) SEE NOTE (18) INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE FOR BARE 2 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE EXCEPT HAND TOOL CLEANING, ONE COAT METAL AREAS (OVERCOAT) SSPC - SP 2 SEE NOTE (28) WELDING BAYS AND LIGHT 3 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE C OAT BLACK, LOW ONE COAT BLACK, SEMI 23236, TYPE V PRF - MIL , TRAPS GLOSS MIL 23236, TYPE GLOSS, - - PRF - 8 MILS VI, OR VII, 4 - V VI, OR VII, 4 - 8 MILS - OR - PRF 32171, TYPE I OR III, - MIL - CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 - 12 MILS WET SPACES (WASH POWER TOOL CLEAN TO SAME AS LINE ONE "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE ONE 4 ROOMS, WATER CLOSETS, BARE METAL, SSPC - SP 11 PRF - 23236, SHOWER STALLS, GALLEYS, ONE COAT MIL - (DECKS) TYPE VII, CLASS 17/18, SCULL ERIES, & POWER TOOL CLEANING, 20 - STOREROOMS WHERE 30 MILS SSPC SP 3 (BULKHEADS/ - HEAVY CONDENSATION IS OVERHEADS) COMMON) SEE NOTE (28) SEE NOTE (24) - - SAME AS LINE 4 ONE COAT MIL - PRF 5 23236, SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE ONE FULL COAT MIL - PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - 24635, TYPE V OR VI, 5 - 8 MILS 8 MILS - SAME AS LINE ONE PRF - MIL 6 ONE FULL COAT SAME AS LINE 4 SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 - 32171, TYPE III, CLASS 1 OR 2, 15B OR 8 MILS 10 – 12 MILS -- OR -- PRF - 32171, ONE COAT MIL - 12 – , CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 III TYPE MILS 70 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

274 G A B E C F D TABLE 3 LINE PRIMER DECKS SURFACE PREPARATION BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS INSULATION MARKINGS STEEL SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS SAME AS LINE ONE INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS 7 POWER TOOL CLEAN TO - PRF - 24596, - SAME AS LINE ONE P - 2 COATS FORMULA 84, TT TO DECKS NOT RECEIVING 2 COATS MIL COVERING: BARE METAL, SSPC 645, 2 - 4 MILS/COAT - SP 11 WATER - BASED INTERIOR -- LATEX, 2 4 MILS/COAT - OR -- COLORS TO BE SPECIFIED BY TYCOM OR SHIP'S ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - OR - 24607, COMMANDING OFFICER PER TYPE V, VI, OR VII, CLASS 5 OR 2 COATS MIL - DTL - 32171, TYPE I OR III, - PRF - MIL - 7, 4 CHAP 631, PARA 631 - 8.18.3.2 - 12 MILS 2 4 MILS/COAT - CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 8 MILS -- OR -- - 32171, - ONE COAT MIL PRF TYPE I OR III, CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 SEE NOTES (17) & (28) – 12 MILS SEE NOTE (9) INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS SAME AS LINE ONE EXCEPT POWER TOOL CLEANING, SAME AS LINE ONE 8 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE FOR BARE SAME AS LINE ONE SP 3 ONE COAT (OVERCOAT) METAL AREAS SSPC - SEE NOTE (28) 7 9 WELDING BAYS AND SAME AS LINE 7 SAME AS LINE LIGHT SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS LINE 3 TRAPS ONE COAT 1 0 MACHINERY SPACES, POWER TOOL CLEAN TO SAME AS LINE ONE ABOVE BILGE AREA: BILGE AREA: PRF - BARE METAL, SSPC 23236, TYPE VII, - SP 11 - MIL BILGES, BILGE DRAIN PRF WELLS & DISTILLING UNIT ONE FULL COAT MIL - - 8 MILS - CLASS 17, 6 - OR - 124, - 2 COATS F WATERJETTING TO - - TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 23236, PANS MIL - DTL 24607 , - WJ SP - NACE/SSPC 8 MILS 4 MILS/COAT 2/L 2 - SEE NOTES (44) & (77) OR - - NEAR WHITE METAL - SP BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC 10 SEE NOTE (4) SEE NOTES (28) & (78) 0 11 ONE COAT SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 1 0 1 BILGE AREA: PRF - 23236, TYPE VII, MIL - - 8 MILS CLASS 15B, 6 ONE FULL COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 - 8 MILS SEE NOTE (4) SAME AS LINE 1 NEAR WHITE METAL ONE COAT SAME AS LINE ONE BILGE AREA: 0 12 23236, TYPE VII, SP BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC MIL - - - PRF 8 MILS ONE FULL COAT MIL 10 - PRF - CLASS 5, 4 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - 12 MILS SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTES (28) & (78) SEE NOTES (4) & (49) 13 SAME AS LINE 12 SAME AS "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 1 LINE ONE 0 - ONE COAT MIL - PRF 23236 30 - TYPE VII CLASS 5/18, 20 MILS & ( 67 ) SEE NOTES (24) 0 SAME AS LINE 1 14 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 1 0 "SINGLE COAT" 23236 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - - 30 TYPE VII CLASS 17/18, 20 MILS SEE NOTES (24) & ( 6 7 ) 99 of 71 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

275 E D A F B G C TABLE 3 INSULATION BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS SURFACE PREPARATION LINE DECKS MARKINGS PRIMER STEEL SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS 24596 - PRF MIL - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, TWO COATS 15 ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY VENT PLENUMS NEAR WHITE METAL - TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 4 - OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF - GRADE A WATER BASED - PRF BLAST, OR LIGHT GRAY MIL 8 MILS 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 LATEX, GRAY, AS REQUIRED - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - SP 10 - NACE 2/SSPC 12 MILS 12 MILS FOR HIDING (OVER INSTALLED INSULATION) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 15 16 SAME AS LINE 15 23236 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 30 - TYPE VII CLASS 5/18, 20 MILS & (79) SEE NOTES (24) - 17 ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY 23236, WATERJETTING TO PRF - SAME AS LINE 15 ONE COAT MIL - PRF 2/L TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - - - OR LIGHT GRAY MIL SP WJ - NACE/SSPC OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF - OR - 8 MILS 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 8 MILS 8 MILS - - OR 17, 6 NEAR WHITE METAL BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP 10 SAME AS LINE 15 "SINGLE COAT" 17 SAME AS LINE 18 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS - 17/18, 20 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) ONE COAT 19 NEAR WHITE METAL AND DIRTY SIDE OF ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY CLEAN ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY - 23236, TYPE VII, - BLAST, MIL OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF - - PRF OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF COMBUSTION AIR INTAKES/ CLASS 7, 4 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 7, 10 - 8 MILS NACE 2/SSPC EXHAUST TRUNKS - SP 10 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 7,10 - 12 MILS 12 MILS 20 ONE COAT HAZE GRAY OR ONE COAT HAZE GRAY OR WATERJETTING TO 23236, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL 2/L 23236, - PRF - LIGHT GRAY MIL - NACE/SSPC - - TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 SP WJ - 23236, - LIGHT GRAY MIL PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - - TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 8 MILS OR - 8 MILS NEAR WHITE METAL - 8 MILS BLAST, - SP 10 NACE 2/SSPC - - OR POWER TOOL CLEAN TO BARE METAL, SSPC - SP 11 SAME AS LINE 20 21 "SINGLE COAT" - PRF - ONE COAT MIL 23236 TYPE VII CLASS 17/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) ONE COAT MIL - FAN ROOMS - 22 PRF SAME AS LINE 1 0 - - PRF - 23236, PRF - ONE FULL COAT MIL ONE FULL COAT MIL - TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 8 MILS 8 MILS - OR 17, 6 8 MILS 17, 6 - 72 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

276 A B D C G F E TABLE 3 MARKINGS BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS PRIMER DECKS LINE SURFACE PREPARATION INSULATION STEEL SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS NEAR WHITE METAL ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY MIXING ROOM/GAS TURBINE 23 ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY 23236, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL OR LIGHT GRAY MIL BLAST TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 4 - 8 MILS EXHAUST UPTAKE SPACES - OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF - PRF - II, CLASS 5, 10 SP 10 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - - 23236, TYPE V NACE 2/SSPC AND TRUNKS WITH VENTS 12 MILS OR LOUVERS TO THE 12 MILS OUTSIDE ATMOSPHERE (BULKHEADS & DECKS) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) - 32171, - PRF UNDER AFFF MIL - 24 ONE COAT MIL POWER TOOL CLEAN TO ONE COAT PRF 32171, - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 32171, PROPORTIONING UNITS TYPE IV, CLASS 1 OR 2, 18 SP 11 - BARE METAL, SSPC TYPE IV, CLASS 1 OR 2, 12 - TYPE IV, CLASS 1 OR 2, 12 - 18 MILS 18 MILS (INSIDE THE COAMING) MILS 12 - SEE NOTES (32) & (36) NEAR WHITE METAL INTERIOR DECK 25 32171, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL 32171, ONE COAT MIL - PRF - SP - 2/SSPC BLAST, NACE TYPE I OR III, CLASS 1 OR 2, PASSAGEWAYS NOT TYPE I OR III, CLASS 1 OR 2, 12 MILS - 10 - 10 12 MILS RECEIVING DECK 10 - OR - COVERINGS (HIGH POWER TOOL CLEAN TO DURABILITY DECK PAINT) SP 11 - BARE METAL, SSPC SEE NOTE (12) 26 SAME AS LINE 1 5 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE INTERIOR STEEL SURFACES SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE 7 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE 27 SAME AS LINE 1 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE ONE 28 LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 2 5 SAME AS SAME AS LINE ONE 73 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

277 D B F C A G E TABLE 3 MARKINGS BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS PRIMER LINE DECKS SURFACE PREPARATION INSULATION ALUMINUM SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS CLEAN TO DTL INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS 2 COATS FOR POWER TOOL MIL - HULL, VENTILATION & PIPING - 24607 TO DECKS NOT RECEIVING 29 2 COATS FORMULA 84, , BARE METAL, SSPC P 645, ALKYD, 4 MILS/COAT - 2 - TT COVERING: INSULATION COMPARTMENT SP 11, - - - USING STAINLESS STEEL PIPING & 2 - 4 MILS/COAT - OR WIRE BRUSHES, MIL - OR - 2 COATS MIL - PRF - 24596, VENTILATION - PRF - 32171, TYPE I OR III, ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24607 , PRF CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 - 12 MILS WATER - BASED INTERIOR - ONE COAT MIL STAINLESS STEEL PADS, 23236, - 2 - 4 MILS 4 MILS/COAT OR ABRASIVE SANDING TYPE V VI, OR VII, CLASS 5 OR - OR LATEX, 2 - - - - 7, 4 PRF - COAT MIL 8 MILS ONE 24596, DISCS (ANSI/BHMA B74.18) WATER - BASED INTERIOR -- OR -- 32171, - 4 MILS - LATEX, 2 PRF ONE COAT MIL - TYPE I OR III, CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 IF REQUIRED FOR HIDING, – 12 MILS ONE ADDITIONAL COAT SHALL BE APPLIED. SEE NOTES (17) & (28) SEE NOTES (9), (28) & (41) SEE NOTE (9) SEE NOTE (18) 30 HAND TOOL CLEANING, SAME 9 9 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 9 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 AS LINE 2 SP 2 - SSPC SEE NOTES (17) & (28) SAME AS LINE 2 INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS 31 HAND TOOL CLEANING, 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 27 FOR BARE 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 EXCEPT ONE COAT METAL AREAS SSPC - (OVERCOAT) SP 2 SEE NOTE (28) 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 32 SAME AS LINE 27 FOR BARE 9 SAME AS LINE 2 POWER SAME AS LINE 2 9 TOOL CLEANING, METAL AREAS SSPC - SP 3 EXCEPT ONE COAT SEE NOTE (28) LOW GLOSS 33 SAME AS LINE 29 ONE COAT BLACK, SAME AS LINE 29 WELDING BAYS AND LIGHT ONE COAT BLACK, SEMI - TRAPS - 23236, TYPE V, VI, OR 23236, TYPE MIL - GLOSS MIL - PRF - PRF VII, 4 - 8 MILS V, VI, OR VII, 4 - 8 MILS - OR - - MIL - PRF 32171, TYPE I OR III, - 12 MILS CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 SAME AS LINE 33 SAME AS LINE 29 SAME AS LINE 30 34 SAME AS LINE 33 SAME AS LINE 29 WET SPACES (WASH 35 DECKS: "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 29 ROOMS, WATER CLOSETS, POWER TOOL CLEAN TO BARE METAL, SSPC SHOWER STALLS, GALLEYS, SP 11 - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - SCULLERIES, & 23236 TYPE VII CLASS STOREROOMS WHERE 17/18, 20 - 30 MILS BULKHEADS/OVERHEADS: HEAVY CONDENSATION IS POWER TOOL CLEANING, COMMON) SSPC - SP 3 SEE NOTE (28) SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE 35 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, SAME AS LINE 29 - 36 SAME AS LINE 29 ONE FULL COAT MIL - PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - 24635, TYPE V OR VI, 5 - 8 MILS 8 MILS ONE FULL COAT PRF - - SAME AS LINE 29 SAME AS LINE 29 37 23236, SAME AS LINE 35 MIL ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 32171, TYPE III, CLASS 1 OR 2, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - 8 MILS – 10 12 MILS -- -- OR ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 32171, 12 – TYPE III, CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 MILS 74 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

278 G A F B E D C TABLE 3 DECKS BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS PRIMER MARKINGS LINE SURFACE PREPARATION INSULATION ALUMINUM SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS POWER TOOL CLEAN TO MACHINERY SPACES & 23236, - SAME AS LINE 29 38 PRF - BILGE AREA: ONE COAT MIL ABOVE BILGE AREA: BARE METAL, SSPC BILGES SP 11 - 8 MILS - TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 OR PRF - ONE FULL COAT MIL - - - 24607, - DTL - 124, MIL - 2 COATS F - WATERJETTING TO 4 MILS/COAT 2 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 NACE/SSPC 8 MILS - 2 - SP WJ - OR - - NEAR WHITE METAL BLAST, USING GARNET, ALUMINUM OXIDE, CRUSHED GLASS OR WALNUT SHELLS SEE NOTES (28) & (78) 39 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, SAME AS LINE 29 SAME AS LINE 38 BILGE AREA: SAME AS LINE 38 TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 - 8 MILS - ONE FULL COAT MIL - PRF 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 8 MILS - SEE NOTE (4) - BILGE AREA: SAME AS LINE 38 NEAR WHITE METAL SAME AS LINE 29 ONE COAT MIL - PRF 40 23236, - 8 MILS BLAST, USING GARNET, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 4 ONE FULL COAT MIL - ALUMINUM OXIDE, PRF - CRUSHED GLASS OR 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - SEE NOTE (49) 12 MILS WALNUT SHELLS SEE NOTES (4) & (49) SEE NOTES (28) & (78) SAME AS LINE 38 41 SAME AS LINE 29 SAME AS LINE 40 "SINGLE COAT" - - 23236 PRF ONE COAT MIL 30 - TYPE VII CLASS 5/18, 20 MILS SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE 38 42 SAME AS LINE 29 SAME AS LINE 38 "SINGLE COAT" 23236 PRF ONE COAT MIL - - TYPE VII CLASS 17/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTE (24) 99 of 75 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

279 G B F C D A E TABLE 3 LINE BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS PRIMER DECKS INSULATION MARKINGS SURFACE PREPARATION ALUMINUM SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS - TWO VENT PLENUMS PRF 43 24596 NEAR WHITE METAL - ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY PRF ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY - COATS MIL ONE COAT MIL 23236, - BLAST, USING GARNET, OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 5, GRADE A WATER BASED - OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - 4 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - LATEX, GRAY, AS REQUIRED ALUMINUM OXIDE, - 8 MILS CRUSHED GLASS OR FOR HIDING (OVER 12 MILS 12 MILS WALNUT SHELLS INSTALLED INSULATION) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) 44 "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 43 SAME AS LINE 43 23236 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - TYPE VII CLASS 5/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTES (24) ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY SAME AS LINE 43 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 45 23236, WATERJETTING TO ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY - SP WJ - 2 - TYPE VII, CLASS 17, PRF - - NACE/SSPC OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF OR LIGHT GRAY MIL 8 MILS - - OR - 6 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 - 8 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 MILS NEAR WHITE METAL 8 MILS BLAST, USING GARNET, ALUMINUM OXIDE, CRUSHED GLASS OR WALNUT SHELLS SAME AS LINE 43 SAME AS LINE 45 ONE COAT MIL ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY PRF - 23236, ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY 46 - PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - - - OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - PRF 6 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 - 8 MILS 8 MILS 8 MILS - 45 47 "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 43 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS 17/18, 20 30 MILS - SEE NOTE (24) 76 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

280 E A D F B G C TABLE 3 PRIMER SURFACE PREPARATION BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS LINE DECKS MARKINGS INSULATION ALUMINUM SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS NEAR WHITE METAL 48 CLEAN AND DIRTY SIDE OF ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL BLAST, USING GARNET, COMBUSTION AIR - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 7, OR LIGHT GRAY MIL - 8 MILS INTAKES/EXHAUST 4 ALUMINUM OXIDE, - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 7, 10 TRUNKS 12 MILS CRUSHED GLASS OR WALNUT SHELLS SEE NOTE (66) 49 WATERJETTING TO FULL ONE HAZE GRAY 23236, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL COAT - SP WJ - 2 TYPE VII, CLASS 17 PRF - MIL OR LIGHT GRAY NACE/SSPC - - OR 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 6 - 6 - - 8 MILS NEAR WHITE METAL 8 MILS BLAST, USING GARNET, ALUMINUM OXIDE, CRUSHED GLASS OR WALNUT SHELLS - OR - POWER TOOL CLEAN TO BARE SP 11 - METAL, SSPC ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 49 FULL HAZE GRAY - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT 50 OR LIGHT GRAY TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, MIL - PRF - 6 8 MILS - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B, 6 8 MILS - SAME AS LINE 49 "SINGLE COAT" 51 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS 30 MILS - 17/18, 20 SEE NOTE (24) ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, 52 FAN ROOMS SAME AS LINE 4 9 ONE FULL COAT MIL - PRF - - PRF - ONE FULL COAT MIL TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 17, 6 - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B OR 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 15B - 17, 6 OR 17, 6 - 8 MILS 8 MILS 8 MILS - - ONE FULL COAT MIL NEAR WHITE METAL PRF MIXING ROOM//GAS ONE FULL COAT HAZE GRAY - 23236, ONE COAT MIL - PRF 53 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 - TURBINE EXHAUST UPTAKE - TYPE VII, CLASS 5, PRF GARNET, BLAST, USING - OR LIGHT GRAY MIL OXIDE, 4 - 8 MILS SPACES AND 12 MILS TRUNKS WITH - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 ALUMINUM 12 MILS VENTS OR LOUVERS TO CRUSHED GLASS OR THE OUTSIDE ATMOSPHERE WALNUT SHELLS (BULKHEADS & DECKS) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SEE NOTE (49) SAME AS LINE 2 9 INTERIOR ALUMINUM SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 9 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 54 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SURFACES SAME AS LINE 4 3 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 55 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 9 SAME AS LINE 2 9 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 56 9 SAME AS LINE 4 7 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 9 77 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

281 G D A B C E F TABLE 3 PRIMER LINE WELDING DECKS MARKINGS BULKHEADS & OVERHEADS SURFACE PREPARATION INSULATION GRP FIBERGLASS BAYS & LIGHT SURFACES TRAPS SURFACE SHIPS - 2 COATS WATER 57 SOAP & WATER CLEAN & ONE COAT FORMULA 84, TT INTERIOR FIBROUS GLASS P - BASED - PRF - BOARDS 645, ALKYD, 2 - 4 MILS HAND SAND AS - INTERIOR LATEX, MIL 4 MILS/COAT NECESSARY 24596, 2 - P - ONE COAT FORMULA 84, TT 2 COATS OF FINISH COAT - 57 - 5 8 MIL SAME AS LINE ALKYD, 2 24607 , 2 - DTL - 645, 4 MILS/COAT, F - 4 MILS - 124, 125, OR 126 (COLOR TO BE DESIGNATED) 78 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

282 E D F A G B C TABLE 3 OVERHEADS WELDING MARKINGS INSULATION PRIMER SURFACE PREPARATION LINE BULKHEADS & DECKS WOOD SURFACES BAYS & LIGHT TRAPS SURFACE SHIPS 2 COATS FORMULA 84, ALKYD, 24596, 5 9 HAND TOOL CLEAN - DTL INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS 24441 - ONE COAT MIL FOR 2 COATS MIL - PRF - TT 645, 2 TYPE IV, 2 - P - – - 4 MILS/COAT -- & COMPARTMENT -- 4 MILS WATER - BASED INTERIOR OR - POWER TOOL CLEAN TO PIPING & - 4 MILS/COAT LATEX, 2 - 24441 TYPE BARE WOOD OR TIGHTLY DTL ONE COAT MIL - VENTILATION - 4 MILS – IV, 2 ADHERING INTACT PAINT SEE NOTES (9) & (17) SEE NOTE (18) DTL 9 24441 - 4 - 60 , 2 SAME AS LINE 5 9 ONE COAT MIL 2 COATS FORMULA 84, ALKYD, 24607 - DTL - - MIL 2 COATS SAME AS LINE 5 - 645, 2 TYPE IV, 2 MILS/COAT – 4 MILS TT - P - 4 MILS/COAT - OR - 24441 TYPE - DTL - ONE COAT MIL 4 MILS IV, 2 – SEE NOTE (17) 79 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

283 G F A D B C E TABLE 4 SURFACE LINE TOTAL SYSTEM STEEL SURFACES PREPARATION SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS AIRCRAFT CARRIER ONE COAT MIL ONE COAT F - 150, - DTL - 1 ONE STRIPE COAT TOTAL SYSTEM 8 MILS ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, NEAR WHITE METAL ONE STRIPE COAT 24441, TYPE III, 2 MIN, 4 MILS - POTABLE WATER TANKS MIL - DTL - 24441, TYPE III, 24441, - DTL - 12 MILS MAX (AREAS BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - MIL - DTL TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS - 24441, TYPE III, MIL 4 MILS - 2 TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS 4 MILS - 2 WITHOUT STRIPE COAT) SP 10 AT ADEQUATE THICKNESS TO MEET SEE NOTE (37) COATING RANGE SEE NOTE (26) 2 - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL 23236, SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 9, 10 - 12 TYPE VII, CLASS 9, 8 MILS WHITE - MILS WHITE OR OFF 4 - SEE NOTES (55) & (73) SEE NOTES(55), (58), & (73) SAME AS LINE ONE 3 "SINGLE COAT" 23236 - ONE COAT MIL - PRF 30 TYPE VII CLASS 9/18, 20 - WHITE WHITE OR OFF MILS - SEE NOTES (24), (55), & (58) - 4 AIRCRAFT CARRIER SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT MIL 23236, PRF - 23236, PRF - ONE COAT MIL NON - TYPE VII, CLASS 9, 12 POTABLE WATER TANKS TYPE VII, CLASS 9, 10 - MILS WHITE OR OFF 8 MILS - 4 - WHITE SEE NOTE (54) SEE NOTES (55), & (58) SEE NOTE (55) 5 "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS 9/18, 20 - 30 WHITE OR OFF WHITE MILS - SEE NOTES (24), (55), & (58) 150, ONE STRIPE COAT AIRCRAFT CARRIER SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, TOTAL SYSTEM 8 MILS ONE STRIPE COAT 6 ONE COAT MIL - DTL - - ONE COAT F - 24441, TYPE III, MIL TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS RESERVE FEEDWATER MIL - MIL - DTL - 24441, DTL - 24441, TYPE III, - 24441, TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS MIN, 12 MILS MAX DTL - 4 MILS 4 MILS TANKS AND FRESH WATER (AREAS WITHOUT STRIPE 2 - 4 MILS AT ADEQUATE 2 - TYPE III, 2 THICKNESS TO MEET DRAIN COLLECTING TANKS COAT) RANGE COATING ONE COAT MIL DTL ONE STRIPE COAT TEM 8 MILS TOTAL SYS 7 NON SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT F - 150, AIRCRAFT CARRIER 24441, - DTL - ONE COAT MIL - ONE STRIPE COAT - MIN, 12 MILS MAX RESERVE FEEDWATER 4 MILS MIL - DTL - 24441, TYPE III, - 24441, TYPE III, 2 24441, - 24441, TYPE III, - DTL - TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS MIL DTL MIL - TANKS AND FRESHWATER 4 MILS 4 MILS TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS AT ADEQUATE 2 (AREAS WITHOUT STRIPE - - 2 COAT) DRAIN COLLECTING TANKS THICKNESS TO MEET COATING RANGE SEE NOTE (54) SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT MIL 8 PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL 23236, - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 11, TYPE VII, CLASS 11, 4 8 MILS 4 - 8 MILS - SEE NOTES (55) & (58) SEE NOTE (55) 9 SAME AS LINE ONE "SINGLE COAT" PRF - ONE COAT MIL 23236 - 30 TYPE VII CLASS 11/18, 20 - MILS SEE NOTES (24), (55), & (58) 99 of 80 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

284 B D F E C G A TABLE 4 TOTAL SYSTEM SURFACE LINE STEEL SURFACES PREPARATION SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS 23236, - JET PROPULSION FUEL (JP - 23236, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL PRF SAME AS LINE ONE - 10 ONE COAT MIL TYPE VII, CLASS 5, TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 5) TANKS, MOGAS TANKS, - 8 MILS 4 - 10 CONTAMINATED FUEL 12 MILS TANKS, DDG 51 CLASS FUEL SEE NOTES (49) & (58) SEE NOTE (49) FUEL SERVICE TANKS, STORAGE COMP TANKS, SUMPS, BILGE & OILY 11 SAME AS LINE ONE "SINGLE COAT" WASTE TANKS - ONE COAT MIL 23236 PRF - 20 YEARS SERVICE LIFE 15 - TYPE VII CLASS 5/18, 20 30 - MILS SEE NOTE (65) SEE NOTES (24) & (58) 5 TANKS, MOGAS TANKS, 10 JP - SAME AS LINE NEAR WHITE METAL SAME AS LINE 12 10 CONTAMINATED FUEL BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP 10 TANKS, DDG 51 CLASS FUEL SERVICE TANKS, FUEL STORAGE COMP TANKS, SEE NOTE (38) BILGE & OILY SUMPS, WASTE TANKS 3 SAME AS LINE "SINGLE COAT" 12 1 10 - 12 YEARS SERVICE LIFE MIL PRF ONE COAT - 23236 - - TYPE VII CLASS 5/18, 20 30 SEE NOTE (65) MILS SEE NOTES (24) & (58) ONE COAT MIL - - SAME AS LINE 12 23236, PRF - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL COLLECTION, HOLDING AND 14 TYPE VII, CLASS 13, 4 - 8 12 TRANSFER (CHT),VACUUM TYPE VII, CLASS 13, 10 - MILS MILS COLLECTION (VC) / MARINE SANITATION DEVICE (MSD)/ SEE NOTE (58) LAUNDRY DRAIN COLLECTION TANKS SAME AS LINE 12 "SINGLE COAT" 15 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE VII CLASS 13/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTES (24) & (58) 6 1 BALLAST TANKS, "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE ONE FLOODABLE VOIDS COAT MIL (SUBSTRATE ONE 23236 - PRF - TYPE VII CLASS 7/18, 20 TEMPERATURE 50 30 - DEGREES FAHRENHEIT & MILS ABOVE) EDGE RETENTIVE - EXTENDED SERVICE LIFE 15 - 20 YEARS (MORE STRINGENT HUMIDITY REQUIREMENTS) SEE NOTES (24) & (58) 81 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

285 A G B F C D E TABLE 4 LINE TOTAL SYSTEM SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SURFACES SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS 12 BALLAST TANKS, "SINGLE COAT" 1 7 SAME AS LINE FLOODABLE VOIDS - (SUBSTRATE - ONE COAT MIL 23236 PRF TYPE VII CLASS 7/18, 20 TEMPERATURE 50 30 - DEGREES FAHRENHEIT & MILS ABOVE) EDGE RETENTIVE SERVICE LIFE 10 12 YEARS (LESS - STRINGENT HUMIDITY REQUIREMENTS) SEE NOTES (24) & (58) - - PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL PRF 23236, - PRF - - 23236, BALLAST TANKS, 18 ONE COAT MIL NEAR WHITE METAL ONE COAT MIL BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC SP FLOODABLE VOIDS (USE 23236, TYPE V OR VI CLASS TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR - VI, CLASS 5 TYPE V OR 10 7, GRADE A OR B, 4 OR 7, GRADE A OR B, 4 - 8 8 - 5 OR 7, GRADE A OR B, 4 - ONLY WHEN SUBSTRATE 8 TEMPERATURE CANNOT BE MILS MILS MILS MAINTAINED ABOVE 50 SEE NOTE (58) DEGREES FAHRENHEIT) - NORMAL 5 7 YEARS 19 PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL - - 23236, SAME AS LINE 18 PRF ONE COAT MIL - SERVICE LIFE TYPE VII CLASS 5 OR 7, TYPE VII, CLASS 5 OR 7, 8 MILS GRADE A OR B, 4 - 8 MILS GRADE A OR B, 4 - SEE NOTE (58) PEAK TANKS PRF - 20 23236, SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL - TYPE VII CLASS 7, 10 TYPE VII CLASS 7, 4 - 8 12 MILS EDGE RETENTIVE MILS - EXTENDED SERVICE LIFE 20 YEARS (MORE - 15 SEE NOTE (58) STRINGENT HUMIDITY REQUIREMENTS) 21 SAME AS LINE 17 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 20 12 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 20 PEAK TANKS 22 RETENTIVE SERVICE EDGE - LIFE 10 12 YEARS (LESS STRINGENT HUMIDITY REQUIREMENTS) SAME AS LINE 23 12 SAME AS LINE 1 7 CHAIN LOCKERS AND NON - NEAR WHITE METAL 4 2 "SINGLE COAT" FLOODABLE VOIDS 2/SSPC - SP BLAST, NACE 10 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - , 20 TYPE VII, CLASS 7/ 18 30 MILS SEE NOTES (24) & (58) 5 2 4 ONE COAT INORGANIC CVN CATAPULT WATER SAME AS LINE 2 BRAKE TANKS ZINC SILICATE TYPE 4 MILS - COATING 2 82 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

286 D C F B A E G TABLE 4 SURFACE PREPARATION TOTAL SYSTEM LINE ALUMINUM SEE NOTE (53) SURFACES SURFACE SHIPS SAME AS FOR STEEL SAME AS FOR STEEL SAME AS FOR STEEL TANKS AND VOIDS SAME AS FOR STEEL 2 6 SAME AS FOR STEEL NEAR WHITE METAL SAME AS FOR STEEL BLAST, USING GARNET, ALUMINUM OXIDE, CRUSHED GLASS OR WALNUT SHELLS 83 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

287 F A B G C E D TABLE 5 TOTAL SYSTEM SURFACE PREPARATION LINE DESIGNATIONS & VARIOUS LOCATIONS MARKINGS SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS HAND TOOL CLEAN, - 84, ALKYD, TT - 2 COATS F 2 COATS OF BILGE FINISH 1 UNHEATED PIPING, ONE COAT SSPC - SP 2 P COAT TO MATCH - FITTINGS, VALVES 645, MIL - PRF - 24635, SURROUNDING 2 3 MILS, FOR COLOR - 4 MILS/COAT 2 - CODED SYSTEMS SURFACES, INCLUDING LAGGED SURFACES SAME AS LINE ONE POWER TOOL CLEAN, ONE COAT F - 111, IF REQUIRED FOR HIDING, 2 MACHINERY, GAGEBOARDS; UNHEATED FERROUS MIL - DTL - 15090, 2 - 4 MILS ONE ADDITIONAL COAT: F - - SP 3 SSPC - OR - MACHINERY EXTERNAL 111, SURFACES 4 MILS - ONE COAT GRAY MIL - PRF - MIL - DTL - 15090, 2 - OR - 24635, PRF MIL - - 24635, 2 - 3 MILS 2 - 3 MILS ONE COAT HEMPEL POWER TOOL CLEAN TO UNINSULATED SIDE OF ONE COAT HEMPEL 3 - SSPC HEMPADUR 45880, - BULKHEAD OR SHELL CONDENS ANTI SP BARE METAL, - 11 6 MILS 617US - 10000, 50 60 MILS ADJACENT TO SEA OR AC - 4 BOUNDARY (FOR INTERIOR COMPARTMENTS ONLY) 4 ONE COAT F - 84, ALKYD, ONE COAT TEMP - COAT COAT 101, - TEMP ONE COAT SAME AS LINE 3 ONE COAT TEMP - 22 - COAT 101, 20 TT - P 101, 645, - 20 - 22 MILS MILS OR - 22 MILS - - 20 2 - 4 MILS ONE COAT SHERWIN - - - OR - OR - OR - - - ONE COAT SHERWIN ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - ONE COAT SHERWIN WILLIAMS HEAT FLEX 3500, WILLIAMS HEAT FLEX 22 MILS WILLIAMS HEAT FLEX 20 – TYPE V, VI, OR VII, 4 - 8 – 22 MILS 3500, 20 - OR MILS - 22 MILS – 3500, 20 - OR - OR - ONE COAT MASCOAT - ONE COAT MASCOAT - DELTA 22 T MARINE, 20 - ONE COAT MASCOAT - MILS 22 - T MARINE, 20 - DELTA T MARINE, 20 DELTA - 22 MILS MILS 5 SAME AS LINE 3 ONE COAT KEFA AIRLESS SAME AS LINE 4 60 MILS - 8125, 50 BOILERS & ECONOMIZERS SAME AS LINE 3 6 ONE COAT AMERON 3 AMERCOAT 892HS, 2 - (EXCEPT PARTS USED FOR MILS HEAT TRANSFER), MACHINERY CASINGS, SEE NOTE (39) FERROUS SHEET METAL - P 28 SAME AS LINE 3 7 2 COATS OF TT - SUFFICIENT TO COVER THE PROFILE 8 STEAM, RESERVE POWER TOOL CLEAN TO FEEDWATER, BOTTOM/ BARE METAL, SSPC - SP 11, USING STAINLESS SURFACE BLOW & BOILER STEEL WIRE BRUSHES, PRESSURE VESSEL PIPING STAINLESS STEEL PADS, IN PREPARATION FOR OR ABRASIVE SANDING ULTRASONIC DISCS (ANSI/BHMA MEASUREMENTS B74.18) - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, - DTL 9 - SAME AS LINE ONE 111, MIL 2 COATS F - 84, TT - P - 645, 2 COATS F ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - 4 MILS/COAT 15090, 2 ALKYD, 2 4 MILS/COAT - SAME AS LINE ONE 24607 DTL - CABLE, INTERIOR 1 0 - 2 COATS WATER - BASED MIL 2 COATS - - PRF - 2 4 MILS/COAT (FOR 24596, LATEX PER MIL 4 MILS/COAT - 2 COLOR MATCH IF REQUIRED) of 99 84 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

288 F A B G C D E TABLE 5 SURFACE PREPARATION TOTAL SYSTEM LINE DESIGNATIONS & VARIOUS LOCATIONS MARKINGS SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS AS LINE ONE 2 COATS MIL SAME SAME AS LINE 1 0 1 - PRF - 24763, CABLE, EXTERIOR (OTHER 1 TYPE II, CLASS 2, 2 – THAN POLYVINYL CHLORIDE 4 MILS/COAT (PVC), LOW SMOKE) — OR -- PRF 24635 - ONE COAT MIL - (LOW SOLAR ABSORPTION ONLY) TO MATCH SURROUNDING AREA, 3 MILS - 2 NEAR WHITE METAL - 1 2 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT HAZE GRAY 36, 232 - PRF ANCHOR (SURFACE SHIP ONE COAT MIL ), - BOW ANCHORS) 24635 TYPE III, V, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR PRF BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP MIL - TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR - - 8 MILS OR VI, CLASS I GRADE B 7, 4 8 MILS 7, 4 10 OR C, - - OR - OR FOR ANCHORS BELOW - - PRF - 23236, PRF - 23236, 3 MILS - 2 LOWER BOOTTOPPING ONE COAT MIL - ONE COAT MIL - TYPE VII, CLASS 5 OR 7, 10 - CLASS 5 OR 7, TYPE VII, 4 LIMIT, SEE NOTE (13) 8 MILS SEE NOTES (14) & (21) 12 MILS 24635, 1 3 - COMMERCIAL BLAST PRF - 24635, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL MIL TYPE ANCHOR CHAIN ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 24635, V OR SSPC 8 VI, CLASS I CLEAN, NACE 3/ – TYPE 8 - V OR VI, CLASS I, 5 SP - TYPE V OR VI, CLASS I, 4 MILS MILS 6 NOTE (15) SEE OR -- -- ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 8 MILS TYPE VI OR VII, 4 - SEE NOTES (14) & (21) BRUSH - OFF BLAST, - ONE COAT WATER TOPCOAT TO MATCH INTERIOR GALVANIZED 1 4 BASED NACE 4/ - SSPC SURROUNDING AREA INTERIOR LATEX, SURFACES SP 7 OR - - PRF - 24596, 2 - 4 MILS MIL - POWER TOOL CLEAN, SP 3 SSPC - PRF 5 1 SAME AS LINE 1 4 EXTERIOR GALVANIZED ONE COAT MIL - - 23236 TOPCOAT TO MATCH 24763, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL SURROUNDING AREA 4 MILS - 2 SURFACES TYPE V CLASS 5 OR 7 - OR - DTL - MIL 2 MILS - 24441, 1 - EXHAUST PIPE EXTERIOR NEAR WHITE METAL 1 ONE COAT AMERCOAT 6 BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP 3 , 2 - 892HS, HAZE GRAY MILS 10 - - OR - P 2 COATS OF TT 28 - SUFFICIENT TO COVER THE PROFILE SEE NOTES (39) & (42) 1 7 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SAME AS LINE 1 6 24441 ONE COAT MIL - DTL - TYPE IV, 4 - PIPING AND MACHINERY, 6 MILS 200F - 125 SAME AS LINE 1 TEMPERATURE PIPING 1 8 HIGH 6 ONE COAT AMERCOAT - AND MACHINERY, 200 3 400F 892HS, HAZE GRAY , 2 - MILS SEE NOTE (39) - 2 COATS OF TT 28 HIGH TEMPERATURE PIPING - 19 P SAME AS LINE 1 6 AND MACHINERY, 400 - 1200F SUFFICIENT TO COVER THE PROFILE 99 85 of 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

289 D B C A G E F TABLE 5 LINE SURFACE PREPARATION TOTAL SYSTEM DESIGNATIONS & VARIOUS LOCATIONS MARKINGS SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS 2 0 A STRIP PAINT, USING L, PAINT REMOV PCMS - 7" "PEEL DOES NOT APPLY TO AWAY - OR - CARRIERS - PLASTIC MEDIA BLASTER - SEE NOTE (57) OR - SODIUM BICARBONATE MEDIA BLASTER SEE REPAIR & INSTALLATION 05P1 METHODS, RIM (LATEST REVISION) - 2 1 AIRCRAFT CARRIER NEAR WHITE METAL ONE STRIPE COAT AND ONE 23236 - PRF - NON ONE COAT MIL FULL COAT MIL PRF TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR PCMS (NEW - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC SP - - 23236, TILE 8 MILS 10 TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - INSTALLATION) 8 MILS - 7, 4 - - PRF - 23236 2 SAME AS LINE 2 - 1 ONE FULL COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL PRF 2 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 5 OR - TYPE VII CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 12 MILS 8 MILS 7, 10 - 2 SAME AS LINE 2 1 "SINGLE COAT" 3 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS5/18 OR MILS 7 /18, 20 - 30 SEE NOTE (24) SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 4 SAME AS LINE 2 2 2 1 2 AIRCRAFT CARRIER PCMS (NEW TILE INSTALLATION) 3 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 1 5 2 2 PCMS (NEW SOAP & WATER CLEAN & TILE 6 ONE COAT F - 150, MIL - DTL - 24441, TYPE IV, HAND SAND AS INSTALLATION) (GRP) 6 MILS NECESSARY - 4 - PRF 27 SSPC - SP 1 23236, 23236, PRF - ONE COAT MIL ARRESTING GEAR SHEAVE - ONE COAT MIL - -- - TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 4 TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 10 8 12 - -- FOUNDATIONS ( & OUTBOARD SPONGEJET TO NEAR OF ARRESTING GEAR MILS MILS ENGINE ROOMS) WHITE METAL BLAST, SP 10 NACE 2/SSPC - -- & -- SSPC SP 1 (STEAM - CLEAN) -- & -- SPONGEJET TO NEAR WHITE METAL BLAST, SEE NOTE (49) - SEE NOTE (49) SP 10 NACE 2/SSPC SAME AS LINE 27 - ONE FULL COAT MIL - 28 - PRF ONE COAT MIL PRF - 23236, – 23236 TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 8 TYPE VII CLASS 17, 6 6 – MILS 8 MILS of 99 86 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

290 C A E B F G D TABLE 5 TOTAL SYSTEM LINE SURFACE PREPARATION DESIGNATIONS & VARIOUS LOCATIONS MARKINGS SEE NOTE (53) SURFACE SHIPS "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 29 27 PRF - ONE COAT MIL - 23236 TYPE VII CLASS - 17/18, 20 30 MILS NOTE (24) SEE - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, 3 0 - POWER TOOL CLEAN TO ONE STRIPE COAT MIL ARRESTING GEAR SHEAVE 23236, - PRF PRF ONE COAT MIL - BARE METAL, SSPC 8 TYPE VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 - SP 23236, TYPE VI, CLASS 5 OR ARRESTING FOUNDATIONS ( TYPE VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 7, 4 - 8 MILS 11 GEAR ENGINE MILS MILS ROOMS) POWDER COATING FOR PRF - ONE COAT MIL 24712, 6 - 3 1 SAME AS LINE 1 EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS 2 - 9 MILS AND INTERIOR DRY APPLICATIONS OF REMOVABLE PARTS FOR - 23236, - ONE COAT MIL PRF 3 2 POWDER COATING SAME AS LINE 1 6 INTERIOR WET OR TYPE VIII, 2 - 9 MILS IMMERSION APPLICATION AREAS - CATAPULT WING VOIDS, 3 3 23236, NEAR WHITE METAL - - ONE COAT MIL - PRF ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, ONE STRIPE COAT MIL PRF BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP - 23236, TYPE VI, CLASS 5 OR TYPE VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 TYPE VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, CATAPULT EXHAUST 8 MILS - 4 10 7, 4 - 8 MILS 8 MILS BLOWDOWN TRUNKS, AND FREEING PORTS SEE NOTE (38) PRF - PRF - ONE COAT MIL - BARRICADE STANCHIONS PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL 23236, 23236, - - 3 4 ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 3 3 - 8 8 - 23236, TYPE VI, CLASS 5, 4 TYPE VI, CLASS 5, 4 - TYPE VI, CLASS 5, 4 AND WELLS, CATAPULT JET DEFLECTOR PITS, BLAST MILS MILS 8 MILS AND ASSOCIATED VOID SPACES SEE NOTE (35) of 99 87 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

291 E G B F C A D TABLE 6 LINE KEEL TO MAX BEAM DRAFT MARKS PRIMER SURFACE PREPARATION MAX BEAM TO UPPER STEEL SURFACES BOOTTOP SUBMARINES 1 - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - PRF - 2 AF COATS MIL - EXTERIOR SURFACES 2 AF COATS MIL - PRF - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - ONE COAT NEAR WHITE METAL PRF - ONE COAT MIL 186 23236, TYPE V OR VI 24647, TYPE I OR II MIL - DTL SP - 24631 F - 23236, TYPE V OR VI - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 PRF - 23236, TYPE V OR VI - CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 (KEEL TO UPPER BOOTTOP) BLACK, 5 - MILS/COAT 7 - 10 CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 MILS -- OR -- 8 MILS - CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 7 MILS/COAT 8 MILS 24441 ONE COAT DTL - -- OR — - OR - - -- OR — — OR -- MIL WATERJETTING TO - (NON - ONE TYPE IV, F - PRF - ONE AC COAT MIL - 152 SHT SURFACES - PRF - AC COATS MIL ONE AC STRIPE COAT MIL - 24647 PRF - 24647 TYPE I OR II, 5 - BELOW 24647 TYPE I OR II, 5 - 7 UPPER BOOTTOP) 7 -- OR -- 2/L WJ SP - NACE/SSPC 7 ONE AC COAT MIL PRF - MILS MILS MILS - 5 TYPE I OR II, - OR — - , WHITE, 3 23236 -- OR — -- OR — 4 MILS -- ONE DTL — OR 24441 - DTL - ONE COAT MIL -- COAT MIL - DTL - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - 24441 - TYPE IV, F COMMERCIAL GRADE 7 MILS - TYPE IV, 5 24441 7 MILS - MILS 7 - 5 150, , - TYPE IV, F 153, 5 - WHITE AF SEE NOTES (1A), (4A), SEE NOTES (1A), (4A), (35A) & SEE NOTES (3A), (4A) SEE NOTES (1A), (4A) , SEE NOTES (2A),(4A) 45 A ) ) & ( 45 & ( & ( ) A 45 A ) (35A) A A) 45 (35A) & ( ( 45 23236, 2 SHT, EXTERIOR SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - - NON 23236, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL ONE STRIPE COAT MIL TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR 23236, TYPE V OR VI - PRF TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR SURFACES ABOVE THE - 8 MILS 8 MILS - CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 7, 4 UPPER BOOTTOP 8 MILS 7, 4 -- -- -- OR -- (INCLUDES DSRV/SRC OR -- -- OR SEATING SURFACES) ONE MIL - - PRF - ONE COAT AC MIL ONE STRIPE COAT AC - PRF - COAT AC MIL 24647, TYPE I OR II, - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 7 - 5 7 PRF - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 - 7 MILS MILS MILS FINAL COAT TO BE BLACK & SEE NOTES (1A), (32A), SEE NOTES (1A), (35A) SEE NOTES (1A), (35A) & ( ) 45 45 A ) ( (35A) & ( 45 A ) A ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441 24441 SAME AS LINE ONE - DTL - 3 - DTL - ONE COAT MIL ONE STRIPE COAT MIL MILS - 153, 5 - TYPE IV, F 7 MILS 7 MILS TYPE IV, F - 24441 TYPE IV, 5 - 150, 5 - 7 SEE NOTES (1A), (32A), & (35A) SEE NOTES (1A)& (35A) SEE NOTES (1A) & (35A) - PRF - 23236, - 4 FOR MOORED TRAINING SAME AS LINE ONE PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - PRF - ONE COAT MIL UPPER BOOTTOP TO 23236, ONE COAT MIL 23236, TYPE V OR VI CLASS TOP OF SAIL ONLY: TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR SHIPS (MTS) ONLY; TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR 8 MILS EXTERIOR SURFACES 7, 4 - 5 OR 7, 4 - 7, 4 - 8 MILS 8 MILS PRF - ONE COAT MIL - -- OR -- OR -- ABOVE THE UPPER -- OR -- -- BOOTTOP (NON - IMMERSION - ONE COAT MIL 4 DTL - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, 24635 NO. 27038, 2 24441, ONE COAT MIL - DTL - - MILS TYPE IV 5 - 7 MILS 24441, TYPE IV 5 - 7 MILS SURFACES ONLY) 7 MILS TYPE IV 5 - - & - - PRF - ONE COAT MIL 24667, TYPE I OR X, SEE NOTES (1A) & (32A) SEE NOTES (1A) & (32A) SEE NOTES (1A) & (32A) COMP G - UNTILED (NON - SHT - ONE COAT MIL NONSKID: MIL - DTL - PRF 5 24441 SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT MIL - DTL - DTL ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - 24441 150, - 7 MILS 7 MILS - 153, 5 - TYPE IV F - TYPE IV, F 24667, TYPE I OR X, 24441 TYPE IV, 5 - 7 MILS COVERED) FOOT TRAFFIC 5 AREAS TO BE COMP G COVERED WITH NONSKID PAINT (ALL SEE NOTES (1A) & (32A) SEE NOTE (32A) CLASSES OF SUBMARINES) SEE NOTE S (1A) & (32A) SEE NOTE (44A) S (1A) & SAME AS LINE 5 ONE STRIPE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, 6 ONE COAT MIL 23236, - PRF - - TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR 23236, TYPE V OR VI - PRF TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 8 MILS - - CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 8 MILS 7, OR -- - — 4 8 MILS -- OR — — OR -- ONE COAT AC MIL - PRF - - ONE STRIPE COAT AC MIL - 7 - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 - ONE COAT AC MIL - PRF - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 PRF - 7 7 MILS MILS 24647, TYPE I OR II, 5 MILS FINAL COAT TO BE BLACK , (32A) SEE NOTES SEE NOTES (1A) , (32A) , & (1A) , & SEE NOTES (1A), (32A), & A A 45 ( ) 45 ( ( 45 A ) ) of 99 88 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

292 C E G D A F B TABLE 6 LINE SURFACE PREPARATION DRAFT MARKS KEEL TO MAX BEAM MAX BEAM TO UPPER PRIMER STEEL SURFACES BOOTTOP SUBMARINES 7 ONE STRIPE COAT HAND TOOL CLEAN, INTERIOR SURFACES OF 645 F 2 COATS TT - P - - 84 - P - TT SSPC - SP 2 2 MILS RUDDERS, PLANES, - - 2 MILS/COAT 645, 1 (PRIMER), 1 - OR - OR - STABILIZERS (SYNTACTIC - ONE COAT PRIMER MIL FILLED VOIDS) ONE STRIPE COAT - - - - MIL 23236, TYPE V OR VI, PRF 23236, TYPE V OR PRF 6 MILS 6 MILS - 4 - VI, 4 - OR - - OR - ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, ONE STRIPE COAT - 6 - 24441, TYPE IV, 4 - DTL TYPE IV, F MIL 6 MILS - 150, 4 - MILS 89 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

293 D F C G A B E TABLE 6 LINE DRAFT MARKS SURFACE PREPARATION MAX BEAM TO UPPER PRIMER KEEL TO MAX BEAM GRP FIBERGLASS BOOTTOP SURFACES SUBMARINES LOW PRESSURE WATER 8 UNBOOTED GRP BOW ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, DOMES ABOVE UPPER - 4 MILS CLEAN (LP WC) 6 TYPE IV, F - 150, BOOTTOP -- & -- DTL 24441 - ONE COAT MIL - - 153 OR F - TYPE IV, F 4 SEE NOTE (34A) 154, - 6 MILS -- -- OR - COATS MIL - PRF 2 24647 4 - MIL/COAT 6 -- OR -- 2 COATS MIL - PRF - 23236 TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 6 MILS/COAT , & SEE NOTES (32A), (38A) A SEE NOTE (42A) ( 45 ) - PRF UNBOOTED GRP BOW - 24441, - DTL - - 9 TWO COATS AF MIL SAME AS LINE 8 TWO COATS AF MIL ONE COAT MIL 24647, - 150, 4 - 6 TYPE IV, F MILS DOMES BELOW UPPER TYPE I OR II TYPE I OR 24647, - PRF BOOTTOP CLASS 1 , 4 6 - 4 , II CLASS 1 -- OR -- - 6 MIL/COAT ONE IL/COAT M COAT MIL - PRF - 24647 DARK GRAY MIL/COAT 6 - 4 SEE NOTE (34A) SEE NOTES (2A), (4A), SEE NOTES (3A), (4A), (38A) (38A), & ( 45 A ) 45 & ( (4A) ) S A 45 , & ( A SEE NOTE ) PRIOR TO INSTALLING 10 LOW PRESSURE WATER BOOTED GRP BOW DOMES ONE COAT ABOVE UPPER BOOTTOP CLEAN (LP WC) - THE BOOT - - 24441, TYPE IV, F DTL MIL - 150, 2 - 4 MILS SEE NOTE (34A) AFTER BOOT INSTALLATION ONE COAT NAVY FORMULA 187, 2 - 3 MILS SEE NOTES (38A) & (46A) SEE NOTE (43A) TWO TWO COATS AF MIL , BOOTED GRP BOW DOMES 11 - SAME AS LINE 10 COATS AF MIL PRIOR TO INSTALLING - PRF - THE BOOT - ONE COAT - PRF CHIN ARRAY, & LIGHT 24647, TYPE I CLASS 3, 4 24647, TYPE I WEIGHT WIDE APERTURE CLASS 3, 4 MIL - DTL - 24441, TYPE IV, F - 6 MIL/COAT - 6 - MIL/COAT ARRAY (LWWAA) BELOW 150, 2 - 4 MILS UPPER BOOTTOP AFTER BOOT SEE NOTE (34A) INSTALLATION ONE COAT NAVY SEE NOTES (2A), (4A), SEE NOTES (3A), (4A), & FORMULA 184, 2 & (38A), & ( 45 ) - 3 MILS (38A), & ( 45 A ) A 90 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

294 A G B F C D E TABLE 7 LINE THERMAL INSULATION BULKHEADS AND SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMER STEEL SURFACES OVERHEADS SUBMARINES BILGE AND - TRUNK INTERIOR POWER TOOL CLEAN TO - PRF 1 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, ONE FULL COAT MIL - SP VII, CLASS 17, 5 23236, TYPE AREAS BELOW THE LOWER TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 5 - 7 BARE METAL, SSPC - 11 7 MILS/COAT MILS WALKING FLAT SEE NOTES (7A), (8A), (9A), SEE NOTE (36A) (15A), (28A), & (33A) (15A) & SEE NOTE (6A) SEE NOTES (8A), (28A) ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, SAME AS LINE ONE 2 ONE STRIPE COAT AND DTL 6 MILS TYPE IV, F - - 150, 4 ONE FULL COAT MIL - - 24441, TYPE IV, F F 151 OR - - 157, 4 - 6 MILS/COAT SEE NOTES (7A), (15A), (28A), & (33A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (28A) SAME AS LINE ONE PRF ONE COAT MIL - 3 - ONE STRIPE COAT AND - 23236, TYPE V OR VI, ONE FULL COAT MIL - PRF 23236, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 MILS CLASS 8 MILS/COAT 5 OR 7, 4 - SEE NOTES (7A), (9A) , (15A) , (28A), & (33A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (28A) SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 WET SPACES (EXCEPT 4 BILGES AND TRUNKS) 5 LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS SAME AS LINE 3 VALVE REGULATED LEAD 6 - ONE STRIPE COAT, MIL SAME AS LINE 2 NEAR WHITE METAL - SP - BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC 151 or ACID (VRLA) BATTERY DTL - 24441, TYPE IV, F COMPARTMENT (SSN774, F - 157, AND ONE FULL COAT, 10 SSN21 AND SSN688 CLASS) DTL MIL - - 24441, TYPE IV, F - 152, 4 6 MILS/COAT - SEE NOTES (7A), (15A), (28A), & (33A) “SINGLE COAT” SAME AS LINE 6 VRLA BATTERY 7 COMPARTMENT ONE COAT MIL - - - 23236 726 CLASS) (SSBN/SSGN PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 7/18, 20 – 30 MILS SEE NOTES (15A), (16A) & (40A) TEK 8 HAZ GRAY TOPCOAT, SAME AS LINE ONE VA CLASS BATTERY - HAZ RED PRIME - TEK COMPARTMENT (DECK AND COAT, - 20 MILS 16 20 MILS - 16 BHDS UP TO 62” ABOVE TOP STEP OF DECK) SEE NOTES (24A), (28A), & SEE NOTES (24A) & (28A) (33A) - - PRF - 24441, - DTL VA CLASS BATTERY ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE ONE COATS MIL 9 2 - 24635, TYPE II, CLASS 3 MILS COMPARTMENT (OVHD AND 150, 2 - TYPE IV, F - 6 MILS/ COAT 1, 4 BHDS ABOVE 62” ABOVE TOP STEP OF DECK) SEE NOTES (24A), SEE NOTES (24A) & (28A) (28A), & (33A) 91 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

295 G A C B E F LINE D TABLE 7 BULKHEADS AND SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMER THERMAL INSULATION STEEL SURFACES OVERHEADS SUBMARINES - POWER TOOL CLEAN TO 23236, - PRF 10 SAME AS LINE ONE TRUNK INTERIORS, ONE COAT MIL UNINSULATED AREA ABOVE 7 BARE METAL, SSPC - SP - TYPE VII, CLASS 17, 5 THE LOWER FLAT 11 MILS (INCLUDING UPPER HATCH SEE NOTE (7A), (8A), (9A), COVER) SEE NOTES (6A) & (13A) (15A), (28A), & (33A) SEE NOTE (36A) SAME AS LINE 10 11 SAME AS LINE 2 - ONE COAT MIL - DTL - DTL - MIL ONE COAT 24441, TYPE IV, F 6 157, 4 - 151 OR F - - 24607 , 1 - 2 MILS MILS SEE NOTES (7A), (9A), SEE NOTES (7A), (15A), & (10A), (11A), (12A), (28A) (28A) & (33A) - SAME AS LINE 3 ONE COAT MIL - PRF SAME AS LINE 10 23236, SAME AS LINE 11 12 5 OR TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 8 MILS 7, 4 - , (15A), SEE NOTES (7A), (9A) & (28A) ONE FULL COAT MIL 13 SAME AS LINE 2 TRUNK INTERIORS UNDER - DTL SAME AS LINE ONE - 24441, TYPE IV, INSULATION ABOVE THE LOWER FLAT CONTRASTING COLOR, 4 - 6 MILS (36A) SEE NOTE SEE NOTES (15A), (28A), & (33A) 14 - PRF ONE FULL COAT MIL SAME AS LINE ONE - SAME AS LINE 3 23236, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 8 MILS 5 OR 7, 4 - SEE NOTES (15A) , (28A), & (33A) - MACHINERY SPACES 15 SAME AS LINE ONE - SAME AS LINE 2 , 1 SAME AS LINE 11 24607 2 COATS MIL - DTL 2 MILS/COAT (ENGINE ROOMS AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY SEE NOTES (7A), (9A), ROOMS) UNINSULATED (10A), (11A), (28A) & (33A) PRESSURE HULL 16 SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS LINE 12 SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 15 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE ONE MACHINERY SPACES 17 (ENGINE ROOMS AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY ROOMS) PRESSURE HULL TO SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS LINE ONE 18 COVERED BY INSULATION BE DTL - P 19 SAME AS LINE ONE MACHINERY SPACE ONE COAT TT - 24607, - 645 F - 84, 2 COATS MIL - OVERHEADS AND 2 MILS 1 2 MILS/COAT - 1 - BULKHEADS - DECKS WITHOUT SAME AS LINE ONE 24441, ONE COAT MIL 20 DTL - 24441, DTL - ONE COAT MIL - 4 MILS TYPE IV, 2 - 4 MILS - TYPE IV, 2 COVERINGS SEE NOTES (7A), (15A), SEE NOTES (7A), (15A), (25A), (28A), & (33A) & (33A) (28A), SAME AS LINE ONE SAME AS LINE 14 SAME AS LINE 3 21 of 99 92 - 32 ITEM NO: 009 FY - 19

296 A G F C LINE D E B TABLE 7 SURFACE PREPARATION BULKHEADS AND THERMAL INSULATION PRIMER STEEL SURFACES OVERHEADS SUBMARINES 2 COATS MIL 2 SAME AS LINE ONE - ONE COAT TT - P - 645, F - 84, - 24635, 1 - PRF 22 2 MILS - 1 MILS/COAT SEE NOTES (7A), (28A), & (33A) SEE NOTES (28A) & (33A) 32171, SAME AS LINE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - ONE 23 32171, - PRF ONE COAT MIL - I TYPE , CLASS 1 OR 2, - TYPE I I I, CLASS 1 OR 2, 10 - 10 12 MILS 12 MILS SAME AS LINE ONE 2 4 - DECKS WITH COVERINGS 24441, ONE COAT MIL - DTL TYPE IV, F 4 MILS - 150, 2 - - - OR ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 MILS SEE NOTES (6A), (15A), (28A) & (33A) SAME AS LINE 21 2 SAME AS LINE ONE 5 DETERGENT WASH AND 6 2 2 COATS MIL - DTL - ENSOLITE INSULATION (OVERCOAT) RINSE , 1 - 2 MILS/COAT 24607 SEE NOTES (7A), (9A), (10A), (11A), (28A) & (33A) 6 POLYIMIDE INSULATION 2 7 SAME AS LINE 2 SAME AS LINE 2 6 (OVERCOAT) SAME AS LINE 2 6 2 8 - 2 COATS MIL - PRF 24596, 1 - 2 MILS/COAT - OR - - 25A, 1 - 2 2 COATS F MILS/COAT SEE NOTES (28A) & (33A) SAME AS LINE ONE 2 9 DRY VOIDS SAME AS LINE 3 SAME AS LINE 14 SAME AS LINE ONE 20 SAME AS LINE SAME AS LINE 20 30 93 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

297 E A F B D G C TABLE 8 SURFACE PREPARATION LINE PRIMER TOTAL STEEL SURFACES SUBMARINES 1 PRF NEAR WHITE METAL - ONE COAT MIL - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, POTABLE WATER TANKS BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP - 8 TYPE VII, CLASS 9, 4 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS WHITE OR - 9, 10 12 MILS 10 SEE NOTES (31A) & (34A) MILS - OFF WHITE SEE NOTES (15A), (22A), SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), (39A), & (37A) SEE NOTE (29A) (39A), (5A), & (37A) SAME AS LINE ONE "SINGLE COAT" 2 - 23236 ONE COAT MIL - PRF 30 TYPE VII CLASS 9/18, 20 - MILS - WHITE OR OFF WHITE SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), (22A), (39A), (5A), & (37A) - DTL - ONE COAT MIL 3 ONE SAME AS LINE ONE TOTAL SYSTEM ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, ONE COAT MIL - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL STRIPE COAT MIL - DTL - - - 12 MILS (ON 4 MILS - 150, 2 DTL - 24441, TYPE III, 2 - 4 - 8 - TYPE III, F DTL - 24441, TYPE III, F 152, 2 - 4 24441, TYPE III, 2 24441, TYPE III, 2 - 4 MILS - 4 MILS DFT AT ADEQUATE MILS MILS AREAS WITHOUT STR THICKNESS TO MEET IPE COAT) COATING RANGE SEE NOTES (15A), (21A), SEE NOTES (15A), & SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), & SEE NOTES (15A) & (21A) (21A) & (27A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (21A) SEE NOTE (22A) (21A) - - 4 SAME AS LINE ONE ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, RESERVE FEEDWATER TANKS DTL - TOTAL SYSTEM ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 150, 2 - 4 MILS 152, 2 - - - DTL DTL 24441 TYPE III F 24441 TYPE III F - 152, - 151, - - 24441, TYPE III F 8 MILS MIN 24441, TYPE III, F 4 TYPE III, F - 4 MILS 2 - 4 MILS 4 MILS - 2 MILS SEE NOTES (31A) & (34A) 150, 2 - SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), & SEE NOTES (15A) & (21A) SEE NOTES (21A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (21A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (21A) (15A) & (21A) AUXILIARY TANKS, ACR HOLDING NEAR WHITE METAL "SINGLE COAT" 5 TANKS (MTS), DEPTH CONTROL BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - SP TANKS, NFO EXPANSION TANK, - 23236, ONE COAT MIL - 10 PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 7/18 , 20 - SEAWATER EXPANSION TANK, 30 MILS SECONDARY SHIELD WATER OVERFLOW TANK (MTS), TRIM TANKS, WRT WATER ROUND TORPEDO ( SEE NOTES (15A), (16A), ) SEE NOTE (29A) TANKS (17A), (40A), & (5A) 6 SAME AS LINE 5 BILGE AND DRAIN COLLECTION TANKS "SINGLE COAT" 23236, SEE NOTE (25A) ONE COAT MIL - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 5/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), (40A), & (5A) 5 SAME AS LINE "SINGLE COAT" 7 BOW TANK, BOW SONAR TANK, SONAR DOME AREA STEEL ONE COAT MIL STRUCTURE (INCLUDES SONAR - 23236, - PRF SPHERE, ITS SUPPORT STRUCTURE, 7/18 TYPE VII, CLASS - , 20 AND FORWARD SIDE OF MBT 30 MILS BULKHEAD) (17A), (18A), SEE NOTES (40A), & (5A) (19A), 94 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

298 D B C A G E F TABLE 8 PRIMER TOTAL SURFACE PREPARATION LINE STEEL SURFACES SUBMARINES FUEL OIL OVERFLOW/COLLECTING 8 ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441, ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - SAME AS LINE 5 - DTL - ONE COAT MIL DTL TANK, FUEL OIL FILTER SUMP DRAIN 152 OR - TYPE IV, F - 24441, TYPE IV, F - 150, 4 - 6 - 6 MILS 24441, TYPE IV, 4 TANK, ES DIESEL FUEL OIL TANK MILS 6 MILS F - - 151, 4 SEE NOTES (17A) & (19A) (MTS) - - 23236 9 - PRF - ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 5 PRF - ONE COAT MIL ONE STRIPE COAT MIL 23236 TYPE V OR VI, - TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5, 4 - PRF 23236 TYPE V OR VI, 8 MILS CLASS 5, 4 8 MILS - CLASS 5, 4 - 8 MILS SEE NOTES (17A), (19A), & (5A) NEAR WHITE METAL MAIN BALLAST TANKS ABOVE 10 "SINGLE COAT" BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC - RESIDUAL WATER LINE; HIGH SP PRF 10 - ONE COAT MIL PRESSURE AIR FLASKS IN MBT’S, - 23236, 7/18 , 20 - EMBT AIR FLASKS IN MBT’S TYPE VII, CLASS 30 MILS & SEE NOTES (16A), (17A), (29A) SEE NOTE (23A) , (40A), & (5A) (18A), (19A), MAIN BALLAST TANKS BELOW - PRF - - 1 1 PRF SAME AS LINE 10 - SAME AS LINE 9 ONE COAT AF MIL ONE COAT MIL RESIDUAL WATER LINE 2 24647 PRIMER, 1 – 24647 RED, 4 - 6 MILS, FROM BOTTOM MILS CENTERLINE TO APPROXIMATELY 2’ VERTICALLY ABOVE HEIGHT OF HIGHEST FLOOD LOUVER SEE NOTES (4A) & (26A) MISSILE 5 SAME AS LINE "SINGLE COAT" 1 2 MAIN INDUCTION SUMP TANK, COMPENSATING TANKS 23236, - ONE COAT MIL - PRF TYPE VII, CLASS 7/18 - , 20 30 MILS (15A), (17A), SEE NOTES (40A), & (5A) 24441, 5 3 ONE COAT MIL - 1 - SAME AS LINE - DTL TORPEDO IMPULSE TANKS ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - - ONE COAT MIL DTL 24441, TYPE IV, F - TYPE IV, F - 150, 4 152 OR DTL - 24441, TYPE IV, 4 - 6 6 MILS - - 6 MILS MILS F 151, 4 - SEE NOTES (15A) & (17A), SEE NOTES (15A) & (17A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (17A) ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 1 4 ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - PRF - - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL 5 OR VI, 23236, TYPE V TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 7, 23236, TYPE V OR PRF - 8 MILS VI, CLASS 7, GRADE B - GRADE B OR C, 4 CLASS 7, GRADE B OR C, OR C, 4 - 8 MILS 8 MILS - 4 SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), & SEE NOTES (15A) & (17A) (5A) SEE NOTES (15A) & (17A) "SINGLE COAT" 1 5 TORPEDO IMPULSE TANKS 5 SAME AS LINE (SSBN/SSGN ONLY) ONE COAT MIL PRF - 23236, - - TYPE VII, CLASS , 20 7/18 30 MILS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), (40A), & (5A) (19A), of 99 95 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

299 C F A D B E G TABLE 8 SURFACE PREPARATION LINE TOTAL PRIMER STEEL SURFACES SUBMARINES SANITARY TANKS SAME AS LINE 5 ONE COAT MIL - - - 23236, PRF - ONE COAT MIL PRF 16 8 - TYPE VII, CLASS 13, 4 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS - 12 MILS 13, 10 MILS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), & (5A) SEE NOTE (15A) SAME AS LINE 5 “SINGLE COAT” 17 - ONE COAT MIL 23236, - PRF - TYPE VII, CLASS 13/18, 20 30 MILS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), (40A), & (5A) 5 ONE COAT OF APEXIOR STEAM PLANT SURGE TANKS (MTS) ONE COAT OF APEXIOR 1 8 SAME AS LINE - NO. 1 (DAMPNEY CO.). 2 NO. 1 (DAMPNEY CO.), 2 - 4 MILS 4 MILS SEE NOTE (47A) (47A) SEE NOTE WASTE OIL COLLECTING TANKS, - 23236, ONE COAT MIL 19 PRF SAME AS LINE 5 - - ONE COAT MIL - PRF - WASTE OIL OVERFLOW TANKS, 8 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS TYPE VII, CLASS 5, 4 ENGINE ROOM OIL COLLECTION 12 MILS MILS 5, 10 - TANKS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), & (5A) SEE NOTE (15A) "SINGLE COAT" SAME AS LINE 5 20 - PRF - 23236, ONE COAT MIL TYPE VII, CLASS 5/18, 20 - 30 MILS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), (40A), & (5A) "SINGLE COAT" 21 FREE FLOOD AREAS AND RECESSES: SAME AS LINE 5 INSIDE SURFACES OF FAIRWATER, - ONE COAT MIL 23236, UNDERSIDE OF SUPERSTRUCTURE, - PRF TYPE VII, CLASS CHAIN LOCKERS, INTERIOR 7/18 , 20 - SURFACES OF STEEL DOMES, SHAFT 30 MILS TUBE INTERIOR SURFACES (WHEN SHAFT IS REMOVED), BOW DOME ACCESS FREE FLOOD AREA, BSY - 1 RECESS ( FRAME ( FR ) 29 - 30 ) STARBOARD ( STBD ), 726 CLASS - ACCESS SONAR DOME RECESS (FR 6 7 PORT), 726 CLASS SONAR SPHERE EXTERNAL SURFACES, 726 CLASS SONAR TRUNK EXTERNAL SURFACES, 726 CLASS SONAR DOME BULKHEAD ) (FR 4), 726 C LASS SONAR ( BHD 8), 726 CLASS SONAR CAVITY (FR 6 - 7), - DOME ACCESS TRUNK (FR 6 CAPSTAN RECESS, SONAR PENETRATION SPLICE TRUNK RECESSES (PORT AND STBD), SONAR CABLE TRUNK, EMERGENCY TOWING PENDANT, BETWEEN BLADES COVER PLATES (BBCP) RECESS, 726 CLASS SEE NOTES BHD 4, SHAFT TUBE MSS RECESS AT (1A), (32A), HULL INSERTS (40A), & (5A) of 99 96 - ITEM NO: 32 009 FY - 19

300 B F C G D A E TABLE 8 TOTAL PRIMER LINE SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SURFACES SUBMARINES 2 AF COATS MIL FREE FLOOD AREAS AND RECESSES: 2 2 - SAME AS LINE 5 - SAME AS LINE 21 PRF SAME AS LINE 21 - PRF ONE COAT MIL - 24647 TYPE I OR II, RED, TORPEDO TUBE RECESS, AFT FREE 24647 PRIMER, 1 – 2 4 6 MILS/COAT MILS FLOOD AREA (MUD TANK), EJECTION – PUMP RECESS, SECONDARY PROPULSION MOTOR (SPM) RECESS, - - - 688 CLASS BQN SSN 1 OR 17, BSY AN/BBQ - 10/V(1) RECESS (FR 14 - 15 PORT BOTTOM), 726 CLASS ANCHOR SEE NOTE (4A) RECESS SAME AS LINE 22 SAME AS LINE 5 ALL OTHER FREE FLOOD AREAS, "SINGLE COAT” 23 22 SAME AS LINE RECESSES BELOW UPPER BOOTTOP - 23236, PRF ONE COAT MIL - (APPLIES TO FREE FLOOD AREAS, RECESSES, AND VOIDS NOT LISTED TYPE VII, CLASS 7/18, 20 - ELSEWHERE IN THIS TABLE) 30 MILS SEE NOTES (1A), (16A), (32A), (40A), & (17A), (26A), (5A) 5 SAME AS LINE ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, - PRF - ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 22 24 SAME AS LINE 22 8 – TYPE VII, CLASS 7, 4 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS MILS 7, 10 – 12 MILS (17A), SEE NOTES (1A), (36A), & (5A) SEE NOTE (4A) - 25 - SAME AS LINE 5 SAME AS LINE 22 ONE COAT MIL - PRF PRF 23236, - ONE COAT MIL - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 22 23236, TYPE V OR VI, TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 23236, TYPE V OR - PRF 8 8 MILS 7, 4 - - VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 MILS - OR - OR - - MILS - ONE COAT MIL DTL - - OR - ONE COAT MIL - DTL - 24441 24441 TYPE IV, F 151 OR ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - - TYPE IV, F - 150, 4 - 6 MILS F - OR DTL - 24441 TYPE IV, F - 151 - 6 MILS 152, 4 - - 6 MILS - - - PRF - ONE AC COAT MIL OR F - 152, 4 - OR - - - 6 PRF OR ONE AC COAT MIL 24647, TYPE I OR II, 4 - - 6 ONE AC STRIPE COAT - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 4 MILS 24647, TYPE I - PRF - MIL MILS - 6 MILS SEE NOTES (1A), (16A), OR II, 4 (17A), & (5A) SEE NOTE (4A) 26 ALL OTHER FREE FLOOD AREAS, SAME AS LINE 5 "SINGLE COAT" RECESSES ABOVE UPPER BOOTTOP (APPLIES TO FREE FLOOD AREAS, ONE COAT MIL - PRF - 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS - RECESSES, AND VOIDS NOT LISTED , 20 7/18 ELSEWHERE IN THIS TABLE) 30 MILS SEE NOTES (1A), (16A), (17A), (26A), (32A), (40A), & (5A) PRF ONE COAT MIL SAME AS LINE 5 - ONE COAT MIL - 27 - 23236, - PRF – TYPE VII, CLASS 7, 4 23236, TYPE VII, CLASS 8 12 MILS – MILS 10 7, (16A), SEE NOTES (1A), (17A), (36A),& (5A) S (32 A) & (36A) SEE NOTE 99 of 97 ITEM NO: 009 - 32 FY - 19

301 G A B C D E F TABLE 8 TOTAL PRIMER LINE SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SURFACES SUBMARINES 28 ONE COAT MIL - PRF 23236, ONE COAT MIL - PRF - ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - SAME AS LINE 5 - TYPE V OR VI, CLASS 5 OR 23236, TYPE V OR - PRF 23236, TYPE V OR VI, - VI, CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 C 7, 4 - 8 MILS 8 LASS 5 OR 7, 4 8 MILS - - OR OR - MILS - - OR 24441 DTL DTL - - - - - ONE COAT MIL ONE COAT MIL - 24441 TYPE IV, TYPE IV, F - 150, 4 - 6 MILS ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - 151 OR - F - - 6 MILS - 4 152, - F OR 24441 TYPE IV, F - DTL - 151 , 4 - 6 MILS - - OR - OR F - ONE AC COAT MIL - PRF 152 - - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 4 - 6 PRF - ONE AC COAT MIL OR - MILS 6 - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 4 ONE AC STRIPE COAT MIL - - 24647, TYPE I MILS PRF - OR II, 4 1A ), (16A) & 6 MILS SEE NOTES ( (17A) SEE NOTE ( 32A ) MIL - 29 - POWER TOOL CLEAN, DTL 24441, TYPE IV, 24441, - DTL - CLEAN FUEL OIL, HYDRAULIC OIL, ONE COAT MIL - SP 3 TYPE IV, F - 150, 4 - 6 MILS 151, 4 152 OR F - F - SSPC LUBE OIL SLUDGE AND HYDROPHONE - 6 MILS TANKS SEE NOTES (15A), (17A), & SEE NOTE (20A) & (29A) (20A) SEE NOTE (15A) COMMERCIAL BLAST, 30 NACE 3/SSPC - SP 6 OR POWER TOOL CLEAN TO - SP BARE METAL SSPC 11 SEE NOTES (20A) & (29A) 31 NORMAL FUEL OIL COMMERCIAL BLAST, SSPC SP 6 OR - NACE 3/ (688 AND 726 CLASS:FROM BASELINE TO 4 FEET ABOVE BASELINE, POWER TOOL CLEAN TO 774 CLASS:FROM BASELINE TO 9 FEET METAL SSPC BARE SP - ABOVE BASELINE) 11 SEE NOTES (29A) & (30A) - ONE COAT MIL - DTL 2 24441, - NEAR WHITE METAL ONE STRIPE COAT MIL - 3 ONE COAT MIL - DTL - SP 6 MILS BLAST, NACE 2/SSPC TYPE IV, F DTL - 24441, TYPE IV, 4 - 6 152 OR - 150, 4 - 24441, TYPE IV, F - 151, 4 MILS 10 6 MILS - F - SEE NOTE (15A) SEE NOTE (15A) SEE NOTE (15A) SEE NOTES (14A) & (29A) SAME AS LINE TANK MANHOLE COVERS ONE COAT MIL - PRF 5 23236, 3 3 - TYPE VIII, 5 - 9 MILS -- -- OR USE APPROVED COATING SYSTEM SPECIFIED FOR TANK OR FREEFLOOD SEE NOTES (15A), (21A), (31A), & (48A) - 2 AF COATS MIL 34 SAME AS LINE 5 2 COATS AC MIL - PRF - PRF FREEFLOOD ACCESS COVERS - 24647, TYPE I OR II, - 24647, TYPE I OR II, 4 6 4 6 MILS/COAT – MILS/COAT SEE NOTES (2A), (3A), (4A), (7A), & (32A) SEE NOTE (32A) PRF 34 SAME AS LINE - 35 - SAME AS LINE 5 TWO COATS MIL 23236, TYPE V OR VI CLASS 5 OR 7, 4 - 8 MILS/COAT SEE NOTE (32A) of 99 98 009 - 32 ITEM NO: FY - 19

302 D F A G B E C TABLE 8 LINE TOTAL SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMER STEEL SURFACES SUBMARINES 5 24441, 36 SAME AS LINE 34 ONE COAT MIL - DTL - SAME AS LINE TYPE IV, F 6 MILS - 150, 4 - --- & --- - 24441, ONE COAT MIL - DTL TYPE IV, F F 151 OR - 152, - - 6 MILS 4 SEE NOTE (32A) 99 of 99 32 ITEM NO: - 009 FY - 19

303 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - 1 9 FY ITEM NO: 009 - 33 01 OCT DATE: 201 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Rotating Electrical Equipment; rewind 1.1 Title: REFERENCES : 2. 2.1 Standard Items 2.2 Equipment Technical Manual 2.3 S9086 - KC - STM - 010/CH - 300, Electric Plant - General 2.4 302, Electric Motors and Controllers - 0/CH 1 0 - STM - KE - S9086 - 310, Electric Power Generators and Conversion KN 2.5 S9086 - - STM - 010/CH Equipment - STM - HN - S9086 .6 2 - 244, Propulsion Bearings and Seals 010/CH - 010 - GTP - BJ , Electric S6260 2.7 al Machinery Repair, Electric Motor, Shop Procedures Manual 2.8 S9310 - AC - HBK - 010, Commutator/Slip Ring Maintenance Handbook STD 2.9 MIL - - 1310, Shipboard Bonding, Grounding, and Other Techniques for Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) Electromagnetic Compatibility , Mitigation, and Safety - 100, Hull Structures - 010/CH - STM - DA 2.10 S9086 2.11 MIL HORSEPOWER, - - DTL - 17060, MOTORS, ALTERNATING CURRENT, INTEGRAL SHIPBOARD USE : REQUIREMENTS 3. 3.1 Accomplish preliminary repair preparations as follows: 3.1.1 Prior to disconnecting equipment: 3.1.1.1 up data. - Record and retain electrical hook 33 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 1 FY - 1 9

304 s, wear, 3.1.1.2 Inspect couplings for cracks, broken segment and misalignment in excess of tolerances specified in 2.2. Record and retain air gap readings. Record and retain bearing clearances for sleeve bearing equipment only. Identify associated cables and wiring. Disconnect equipment 3.1.2 mechanic ally, using 2.2 for guidance. Matchmark, identify, and retain chocks, shims, shock 3.1.2.1 mounts, sound damping pads, and other accessories associated with equipment. readings. Record shaft thrust and run out 3.1.2.2 3.2 Remove equipment including rotating components connected directly to the shaft. 3.2.1 Remove entire vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan assemblies from the duct system and transport to the shop for repair. 3.3 inspection of each foundation in accordance Accomplish a structural with 2.10. approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in 3.4 , of a report for electrical hook up data recorded in 3.1.1.1, mechanical inspection required by 3.1.1.2 through 3.1.2.2, and structural i nspection required in 3.3 . to the SUPERVISOR upon request 3.5 Matchmark, disassemble and inspect the equipment removed in 3.2, using 2.2 through 2.7 for guidance. Accomplish a core loss test prior to winding removal 3.5.1 in 4.5.6.1 of 2.3. Record data. - accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 4.5.6 and 300 Inspect for hot spots in accordance with the Core 3.5.1.1 Loss Tester Instruction Manual. 3.5.1.2 - Conduct a loop test in accordance with Paragraph 300 4.5.6.1.2 of 2.3 w hen core indicates a marginal satisfactory reading or when test equipment does not directly support equipment being subjected to testing. 3.5.2 4.5.7.2 of 2.3 for Remove each winding, using Paragraph 300 - guidance for winding removal and 2.7 for core ins pection. 3.5.2.1 Verify the temperature limitations of the core material prior to exercising the burnout oven option. Record winding data. Verify conformance of recorded 3.5.2.2 data to the manufacturer's winding data. 2 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

305 3.5.2.3 Accomplish a cor e loss test after winding removal in - 4.5.6.1 of 2.3. Record data. accordance with Paragraph 300 - 4.5.6 and 300 Inspect for hot spots in accordance with the Core 3.5.2.4 Loss Tester Instruction Manual. 3.5.2.5 Conduct a loop test in accordance with Paragraph 300 - 4.5.6.1.2 of 2.3 when core indicates a marginal satisfactory reading or when test equipment does not directly support equipment being subjected to testing. - I 3.5.2.6 Dip core in a 20 percent solution of varnish MIL - - 24092 and dry. In I - localities where MIL 24092 does not meet state and local Air Pollution Control District (APCD) standards, spray the iron core with a clear air - drying varnish. Accomplishment of cleaning and 3.5.3 Protect machined surfaces. painting for equipment hous ing exterior, fan(s), core and interior and exterior of each end bell shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.7). wound rotors for loose or cracked bars, localized - 3.6 Inspect non overheating, and rubbing. Inspect wound rotors, sli p ring leads, and armatures for insulation damage and burns/hot spots. Inspect for loose coils and slot wedges. Inspect slip rings and commutators for damage and for wear limits, using 2.2 for criteria. Record data. 3.7 Inspect and dimensionally measu re end bells, frame, rabbet fits, shaft, sleeve and pedestal bearings, keyways, fan and running surfaces for wear, eccentricity, and other defects, using 2.2 for accept or reject criteria, and 2.6 for location and type of measurements to be taken. Record data. Inspect brush rigging for cracks, chips, worn areas, distortion, 3.8 spring condition, and insulating material for cracks and arc paths. Record data. - installation and post installation test, - 3.9 Accomplish commutator pre - using Table 300 .3 for guidance. Record data. 9 of 2 - 3 , of a approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in 3.10 report listing results of the requirements of 3.5 through 3.9 to the SUPERVISOR . upon request 3.11 Rewind the equipment in accordance with Original Equipment Manufacturer's (OEM) "for Navy use" winding data. 3.11.1 Do not permanently connect winding until after successful completion of testing of 3.11.3 through 3.11.6. 3 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

306 Material shall confor m to: 3.11.2 3.11.2.1 Magnet wire, National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MW - 1000, Table MW 16 (round wire), or NEMA MW - 1000, Table MW 20 (rectangular wire), or equivalent to OEM original 3.11.2.2 Slot and phase insulation, NEMA FI - 3 - 2004 3.11.2.3 Slot wedge - spacers and fillers, MIL - I - 24768/17 DTL 3.11.2.4 Lead wire, stranded, MIL - 16878 except for type - EPDM, which may be commercial grade 3.11.2.5 Glass banding, MIL - I - 24178 2.2 New temperature detectors in accordance with 3.11.2.6 (V) "INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST" 3.11.3 - volt megger insulation resistance test, using Accomplish 500 3.4.8, 300 Paragraphs 300 3.2.2 through 300 - 3.2.3, 300 - - - 3.4.11, and 300 - 5.3.7.1 of 2.3 for guidance. (V) "DC RESISTANCE TEST" Accomplis 3.11.4 h a DC resistance test of windings, using a Wheatstone or Kelvin bridge, or with an ohmmeter capable of resolving one milliohm (0.001 ohm). Record phase balance for multi - phase equipment, using 3.6.1 of 2.11 and for guidance. Paragraph 5.2 1 of 2.7 (V) " VOLTAGE SURGE TEST" 3.11.5 Accomplish a voltage surge test in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 3.5.4 through 300 - 3.5.5 of 2.3. (V) "DC HI POT TEST" - Accomplish a DC HI POT test in accordance with Paragraph 300 3.11.6 3.5.2 through 300 - 3.5.2.3.4 of 2.3. 3.12 Permanently connect the windings. 3.12.1 Repeat tests described in 3.11.3 through 3.11.6. (V) "BAR BAR TEST" - TO - to - bar test on commutators after making coil 3.12.2 - Accomplish DC bar 4.7.11. of 2.3. 3 connections to the risers in accordance with Paragraph - 300 (V) "VARNISH TEMPERATURE, VISCOSITY, AND GEL TIME TESTS" 4 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

307 Select the insulation process based on winding insulation 3.13 Windings classifications and to meet state or local air pollution standards. of a sealed insulation system by vacuum pressure impregnation shall be by a - Accomplishment of work on windings for certified repair facility. NAVSEA sealed insulation systems shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.8). Se 3.13.1 - lect varnish methods and material, using Paragraphs 300 - 9 of 2.3 for guidance. 4.5.8. 4.5.8 through 300 Maintain the varnish in accordance with Paragraphs 3.13.1.1 300 - 4.5.8.3 through 300 4.5.8.3.3 of 2.3 and the varnish manufacturer's - instructions. Maintain a current revision of the varnish 3.13.1.2 manufacturer's instructions on storage, maintenance, and use of the type of varnish to be applied. 3.13.1.3 Maintain a record of varnish temperature, viscosity, and, for solventless varnish, gel time tests. Tests must show varnish is within varnish manufacturer's recommendations and have been accomplished in the intervals specified by the varnish manufacturer. The record must also cturer. show the varnish is being stored as recommended by the varnish manufa 3.14 Varnish windings in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 4.5.8.2 of 2.3 and the varnish manufacturer's instructions. 3.14.1 Do not immerse the leads. Wipe surfaces that affect assembly such as rabbet fits and 3.14.2 mounting flanges with a cloth moistened with a solvent after draining and before baking. 3.15 Remove excess varnish runoff from the component locations described in 3.14.2 after final baking. Apply a thin coat of air - dry varnish to metal surfaces exposed by the removal process in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 4.5.8.6 of 2.3. - 4.5.8.5 and 300 3.16 Repeat tests described in 3.11.3 through 3.11.6. Record data. Accomplish an AC HI POT test in accordance with Paragraphs 300 - 3.5.3 3.17 through 300 3.5.3.2.9 of 2.3. Record data. - - Accomplish a 500 3.18 volt megger insulation resistance test, using 3.2.3, 300 - - 3.4.11, and 300 3.4.8, 300 - 3.2.2 through 300 - Paragraphs 300 - 5.3.7.1 of 2.3 for guidance. Record data. 3.19 sing Measure resistance value of each winding temperature detector, u a low voltage ohmmeter. Record data. 5 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

308 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media 3.20 , of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.16 through 3.19 to the SUPERVISOR upon request . 3.21 True the commutator or collector rings. Eccentricity shall not exceed the requirements of 2.8. Resurface or machine each individual collector ring to the same exact diameter to allow symmetrical brush holder to ring clearance spacing. Ensure metal shavings are not permitted to contaminate the rotor or stator assembly. Each cut shall not exceed 0.010 inch. Finish thickness shall 3.21.1 not be less than design wear tolerance as shown in 2.2. Undercut the mica between the commutator bars with the edge of 3.21.2 inch below the bars. th of 5/64 the mica not exceeding a dep - 3.21.3 Chamfer the bar edges and remove rough surfaces in accordance 7 with Paragraph 4 of 2.8. - Burnish the commutator with a very fine commercial burnishing 3.21.4 - A - 58052. Polish collector ring s to a mirror finish. stone conforming to A Accomplishment of the balancing requirement for each rotating 3.22 assembly shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.9). 3.23 Accomplish the following for the brush rigging: rigging. Disassemble the brush 3.23.1 3.23.2 Remove foreign matter. - plated parts with zinc in accordance e existing cadmium Replac 3.23.3 with ASTM A 153. Recondition threads of plated parts. 3.23.4 3.23.5 Assemble brush rigging. ing in the external connection 3.24 Install identification markers on wir box. Markers shall be aluminum wrap around type with metal stamped - 3.24.1 or embossed markings. 3.25 Repair lightly scored areas of frame, end bells, and shaft by manual Visually inspect methods. Recondition threads and fit key to keywa y. keyway for deformed, cracked or chipped edges or high spots. Verify that fit between key and key seat sides has a minimum clearance of 0.002 inch or - maximum interference of 0.0005 inch. High spots in keyway may be removed by g or grinding. Do not unnecessarily repair any keyway; instead, use machinin a step key up to a maximum of 0.010 inch oversize and, where possible, 6 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

309 include a radius in step. If key tightness cannot be corrected with a step sizes as follows: key, re - machine worn/damaged keyways to recommended over - Maximum of 0.015 inch oversize for a 1/8 - inch key and increasing oversize inch increase in key size up to a allowance of 0.010 inch for each 1/8 - maximum of 0.075 inch. If key tightness cannot be corrected by keyway repai r, replace part involved. 3.25.1 Apply a thin coat of petrolatum to unpainted mating surfaces proof motors that shall have clean, dry mating surfaces. - except for explosion Prepare and refinish equipment. Protect machine surfaces, windings, 3.26 and na meplates from being painted or otherwise damaged. Accomplishment of cleaning and painting for housing, fan, and 3.26.1 interior and exterior of each end bell shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.7). 3.27 Accomplishment of clea ning and painting for foundations of the equipment removed in 3.2 shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard items (See Note 4.7). - type Accomplish the following on equipment having other than sleeve 3.28 bearings unless otherwise specified in the invoki ng Work Item, using 2.7 for guidance. (utilizing Attachment A for 3.28.1 Except as indicated in 3.28.1.1 guidance) , install new bearings, seals, fittings, lock washers, and locknuts conforming to 2.2, using 2.6 and Chapter 6 of 2.7 for guidance. 3.28.1.1 Install Type 111, Class 8 (double seal) bearings in motors meeting the criteria identified in Chapter 6 of 2.7. Only double seal bearings identified in Chapter 6 of 2.7 are acceptable for this use. ors not meeting For vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan mot 3.28.1.2 the criteria of Chapter 6 of 2.7, if not originally furnished or already accomplished during previous repair, install Type 111, Class 8 (double seal) bearings with a C3 (greater than normal) radial internal clearance in place of the Type 11 1 bearing originally furnished. Install Type 120 bearings in vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan motors originally furnished with Type 120 bearings. 3.28.1.3 Install new label plates with the inscription "DO NOT ngs (Type 111, Class 8 or Type LUBRICATE" on equipment using double seal beari 120). lubricable bearings 3.28.1.4 For equipment converted from re - to double seal bearings, install pipe plugs on all grease fills and drains. 3.28.1.5 For equipment converted from lubricated bearings to earings, submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable double seal b 7 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

310 media, of a report that reflects the change in the maintenance requirements for the converted motor. 3.28.2 For equipment not using double seal bearings, lubricate bearings with grease conformi - G - 24508 as required in Paragraphs 244 - ng to DOD 1.7.7.2 and 244 - 1.7.7.3 of 2.6. 3.29 Assemble the equipment disassembled in 3.5, using 2.2 through 2.7 for guidance. 3.29.1 Do not use materials containing silicone in the repair and reassembly of equipm ent with commutator or collector rings. 2 Install new gaskets on covers, inspection plates, and between | 3.29. rame. Gaskets shall conform to MIL - PRF - the external connection box and the f 1149 unless otherwise specified in 2.2. 3.29. 3 Set brush holders not less than 1/16 - inch or more than 1/8 - inch from commutator or collector rings unless otherwise specified in 2.2. 3.29. 4 Set brush holders in e lectrical neutral plane and stagger brushes for maximum coverage of the commutator, in accordance with Paragraph 300 - 4.7.7.1.10 of 2.3. Center the brush holder over the collector rings. 5 3.29. e of Ensure the brushes do not extend beyond the edg .1 5 3.29. the collector rings. 3.29. 6 Install new brushes in accordance with 2.2. Sand new brushes - to fit curvature of the commutator or collector rings, using Paragraphs 6 3.5 through 6 - 3.5.4 of 2.8 for guidance. 3.29. 6 contact of 100 percent Brushes shall have a surface .1 and shall not be chipped, cracked, or broken. 3.29. 6 .2 Remove sand, carbon, and other foreign matter resulting from fitting new brushes. 3.29. 7 Adjust spring tension of brushes in accordance with 2.2. 3.29. 8 Adjust air gap as specified in 2.2, plus or minus 10 percent. 3.29. 9 Rotate shaft by hand a minimum of 3 revolutions. Rubbing or be allowed. binding of rotating assembly shall not DTL - 15024 for those 10 3.29. Install label plates conforming to MIL - to be missing or damaged. identified LOAD SHOP TEST" - (V) "NO 8 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

311 Accomplish a no - load shop test of the motor for a minimum of one - 3.30 half hour. 3.30.1 Verify proper direction of rotation. After one 3.30.2 - half hour, record current and voltage in each phase, speed and bearing temperature rise measured on the equipment's exterior near each bearing. approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in 3.30.3 , of the upon request . recorded data to the SUPERVISOR (V) "OPERATIONAL SHOP TEST (FOR VANEAXIAL/ TUBEAXIAL FANS - ASSEMBLY COMPLETELY REASSEMBLED)" With the vaneaxial/tubeaxial fan reassembled, accomplish an 3.31 operational test for one hour after bearing and stator temperatures stabilize within one degree Celsius for 3 consecutive 15 - minute intervals. Verify proper direction of rotation. 3.31.1 Record current, voltage, 3.31.2 frame and bearing temperature rise - minute intervals. and speed at 15 3.31.2.1 Bearing temperatures shall not exceed 180 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item or equipment technical manual. 3.31.3 Measure and recor d hot insulation resistances of winding to ground immediately upon completion of the operational shop test, using a 500 - volt megger. 3. 32 Install equipment removed in 3.2. | Install new gaskets conforming to MIL - 32.1 3. 900 on disturbed - PRF ventilation. 3. 32 . 2 Align equipment in accordance with 2.2. Measure and record facial and peripheral coupling data. 3. 32 . 2 .1 Install chocks, shims, shock mounts, and sound damping pads. .2 . 2 3. Accomplishment of pump and driver shaft alignment 32 shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.10). Connect electrical cables to equipment, using data retained in . 32 3. 3 3.1.1.1. . 32 4 accordance with 2.9, using new Bond and ground equipment in 3. ground straps. 9 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

312 3. 32 . 5 Rotate shaft by hand a minimum of 3 revolutions. Rubbing or binding of rotating assembly shall not be allowed. 3. 32 . 6 Measure and record the air gap and bearing clearance (sleeve bearing equipmen t only), insulation resistance (at 500 volts DC), and thrust. 3.33 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.1.1.1, 3.1.1.2, 3.1.2.2, 3.3, 3.5 through 3.9 and 3.16 through 3.19 to the SUPERVISOR. (V)(G) "OPERATIONAL TEST" 3. 3 (For continuous duty motors) Accomplish an operational test of the 4 assembled equipment at full system capacity for one hour after bearing and stator temperatures stabilize within one degree Celsius for 3 - consecutive 15 minute intervals, unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item. 3. 3 4 .1 Verify proper direction of rotation. Verify/establish oxide film coating of the commutator/ .2 4 3 3. collector rings, using 2.8 for guidance. current, voltage, frame and bearing temperature rise, Record .3 4 3 3. - minute intervals. Frame and bearing temperature rise and and speed at 15 speed is not required for vaneaxial and tubeaxial fan assemblies. 3. 3 4 .3.1 Bearing temperatures shall not exceed 180 degree s Fahrenheit unless otherwise specified in the invoking Work Item/equipment technical manual. Measure and record hot insulation resistances of windings to 3 4 .4 3. ground immediately upon completion of test, using a 500 volt megger. - (For two speed motors) Accomplish an operational test at l 3.35 ow speed in accordance with 3.34. Repeat 3.34 for high speed. 3.35 .1 Acc omplish the requirements of 3.34.1 through 3.34 .4. for a 3.36 complish the requirements of 3.34 (For limited duty motors) Ac period of time equal to the duty cycle of the motor. .4. For Acc .1 3.36 omplish the requirements of 3.34.1 through 3.34 motors with a duty cycle equal to or less than 30 minutes, record data every 10 minutes. 3. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable 37 , 3. 32 . 6 3. , of a report listing data recorded in .2 , media 32 3.31.2, 3.31.3, .4 to the SUPERVISOR. 4 3 .3, and 3. 4 3 3. 10 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

313 4. NOTES : 4.1 Equipment technical manual , Allowance Parts List (APL) ( if a pplicable ) and drawings will be listed in the invoking Work Item. 4.2 Shop test of generator will be addressed in the invoking Work Item. 4.3 The use of silicone is not allowed on any rotating electrical machinery containing brushes. 4.4 Utilize Atta chment A for determination if the Navy ’s motor bearing conversion program for Extended Life Double Seal (ELDS) ball bearings is permissible. - bearings ) MIL Bearings, Ball, Annular, For Quiet Operation ( - B 4.5 17931 are considered to be Long Lead Time (LLT) material. It is recommended these bearings be provided as Government Furnished Material (GFM). SUPERVISOR 4.6 Data received in 3.28.1.5 shall be forwarded to the for uring shipboard databases such as the the purpose of initiating action ens Equipment Guidance List (EGL) are updated to reflect the change in maintenance nally, where APL changes are o Additi requirements for converted motors. be initiated to convert to ELDS bearings, a COSAL feedback report will submitted, providing the NSN and part number for the ELDS bearing . T he following website to initiate changes to Technical Manuals, APLs, etc.: http://www.navy311.navy.mil . 4.7 If cleaning and painting of 3.5.3, 3.26.1, or 3.27 is required; the - 32 “Cleaning and Painting Requirements; use of Category II Standard Item 009 will be specified in the Work Item. of 2.1 accomplish” f 3.13 is If work on windings for sealed insulation systems o 4.8 required; the use of Category II Standard Item 009 - 113 “Rotating Electrical of 2.1 will be Equipment with Sealed Insulation Systems (SIS); rewind” specified in the Work Item. If balancing of rotating equipment of 3.22 is required; the use of 4.9 15 “Rotating Machinery; balance” - Category II Standard Item 009 of 2.1 will be specified in the Work Item. 4.10 If pump and driver shaft alignment of 3.32.2 .2 is required; the use - 58 “Pump and Driver Shaft Alignment; of Category II Standard Item 009 will be specified in the Work Item. accom plish” of 2.1 11 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

314 ATTACHMENT A 1. To reduce motor maintenance and repair costs, the NAVY has implemented a program that allows for the use of Extended Life Double Seal (ELDS) bearings. 2. LIMITATIONS: The ELDS program does NOT apply to motors that are under the cognizance of NAVSEA 08. 3. APLs for motors meeting the conversion criteria requirements have been modified to identify ELDS bearings. In these cases, the APL bearing criteria will override any specifications delineated in the equipment technical manual or the motor "Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)" drawings. If ELDS bearings are not indicated in an APL, the following motor criteria must meet the applicability specifications for motors to undergo conversi on to ELDS bearings: 3.a Motor must be installed on a surface ship and must NOT be under the cognizance of NAVSEA 08. 3.b Commercial motors are not eligible. Motors must have been furnished to the NAVY in accordance with MIL - DTL - 17060 ( Motors, Alternatin g Current, Integral Horsepower, Shipboard use ) , MIL - M - 17413 ( Motors, Direct - Motors, 60 ( 17059 - M or MIL ral H.P., Naval Shipboard [NAVY]) Current, Integ Shipboard Use Cycle, Alter nating Current Fractional H.P. [ . ]) - 17931 - 3.c Motors using one or more noise B quiet be arings per MIL - are NOT eligible for ELDS ) Bearings, Ball, Annular, For Quiet Operation ( conversion. 3.d Bearings originally furnished with the motor must be type 111 - 171. Motors are NOT to be considered as candidates for ELDS - B bearings per FF version in situations where the equipment technical manual and/or the OEM con B - motor drawings originally specified FF - 171 bearings but have notes 17931 indicating that replacement bearings are to be in accordance with MIL - B - . ) Operation ( Bearings, Ball, Annular, For Quiet 3.e The use of ELDS bearings is limited to motors where the full load speed and the size of both bearings are as follows: 1. Maximum bearing size 306 or 206 and full load rpm between 1,801 and 3,600 rpm. 2. Maximum bea ring size 313 or 213 and full load rpm between 1,201 and 1,800 rpm. 3. Maximum bearing size 318 or 218 and full load rpm less than 1200 rpm. 4. The repair process using ELDS bearings includes the following : requirements , in accordance with the following table 4.a Only ELDS bearings (Attachment A / Table 1), can be used. Other double seal bearings will not provide an acceptable bearing life. 12 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

315 Attachment A / Table 1 ELDS Bearings NSNs and Part Numbers SIZE P/N NSN 6201 - 2RS1C3/GHY 201 3110 - 01 - 492 - 0221 6202 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 491 - 0233 202 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 491 - 0234 6203 203 6204 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 491 - 6636 204 6205 01 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 205 - 451 - 9166 206 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9165 6206 01 207 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6207 - 451 - 9164 208 6208 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9170 - 209 6209 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 01 - 451 - 9252 210 6210 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 492 - 1831 211 0937 - 6211 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 518 303 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 493 - 3750 6303 01 304 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6304 - 451 - 9153 305 6305 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9158 - 306 6306 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 01 - 451 - 9159 3110 607 6307 - 2RS1C3/GHY - - 01 - 451 9161 308 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 451 - 9167 6308 01 309 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 6309 - 451 - 9168 310 6310 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 490 - 6683 - 311 6311 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 01 - 492 - 0223 - 6848 312 6312 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - 490 2RS1C3/GHY - 6313 313 0191 - 492 - 01 - 3110 13 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

316 - 6314 - 2RS1C3GHY 3110 01 - 492 - 0226 314 494 315 6315 - 2RS1C3/GHY 3110 - 01 - - 0993 316 2RS1C3/GHY 0188 - 492 - 01 - 3110 - 6316 3110 - 317 6317 2RS1C3/GHY - 01 - 492 - 0219 - 493 - 3749 - 01 3110 2RS1C3/GHY - 6318 318 4.b Both bearings of each converted motor must be ELDS bearings. 4.c A label plate must be permanently attached to the motor indicating "Do Not Lubricate". Grease fills and drains, if present, must be fitted with a pipe 4.d plug, securely fastened. Fittings to accommodate grease guns must be replaced with pipe plugs." 14 of 17 ITEM NO: 009 - 33 FY - 1 9

317 ATTACHMENT B SECTION 1. NAME PLATE DATA EQUIPMENT USS TYPE FRAME MFGR HP INSULATION CLASS *C/*F TEMP. RISE VOLTS AMPS CYO R/M PHASE ADDITOINAL DATA SERIAL NO. SECTION 2. INPLACE INSPECTION CAUTION: OBSERVE APLICABLE SAFETY PROCEDURES SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY __________ - 2) __________ INSULATION RESISTANCE IN MEGOHMS (REFER TO TABLE 3 POLARIZATION INDEX TEST 1 MIN 10 MIN RATIO 6) - MECHANICAL CONDITION (REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3 CONTINUITY OF WINDINGS (REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3 - 5.1) CURRENT BACLANCE (USE LIMITS PRESCRIBED IN PARAGRAPH 3 - 10) CONDITION OF BRUSHED AND COMMUTATOR CONDITION OF CABLES AND CONTROLLER TO MOTOR CONDITION OF CONTROLLER SECTION 3. INCOMING INSPECTION (GENERAL) 1 2 SURGE TEST - SAT/UNSAT 2 - 3 SAT/UNSAT - 3 1 SAT/UNSAT INSULATION RESISTANCE TO GROUND MEGOHMS RESISTANCE BALANCE - 2 1 OHMS WITH DIGITAL OHMETER 2 - 3 OHMS 3 OHMS 1 - ACTION REWIND RECONDITION 15 of 17 33 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

318 ATTACHMENT B SECTION 4. RECONDITIONING STEPS OF: AFTER DRYING CLEANING INSULATION RESISTANCE (MEGOHMS) PHASE RESISTANCE BALANCE TEST SURGE TEST (SAT/UNSAT) DC HIGH - POTENTIAL TEST ACTION REWIND VARNISH SECTION 5. AFTER RECONDITIONAING OR REWINDING AND VARNISHING MEGOHMS INSULATION RESISTANCE 1 RATIO 10 POLARIZATION INDEX MIN MIN TEST - 1 OHMS 2 RESISTANCE BALANCE WITH 2 - 3 OHMS DIGITAL OHMMETER 1 - 3 OHMS SAT/UNSAT SURGE TEST SAT/UNSAT AC HIGH - POTENTIAL TEST MEGOHMS INSULATION RESISTANCE AFTER AC POTENTIAL TEST HIGH - AMPERES PHASE NO - LOAD TEST A PHASE AMPERES B AMPERES PHASE C 16 of 17 33 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

319 ATTACHMENT C SHIPNAME & HULL NUMBER DATE MONTH/DAY/YEAR MOTOR LOCATION (I.E., NO.2 MAIN FEED PUMP, ETC.) HOUSING DIAMETERS DRIVE END B C A 1 2 3 OUTER END C B A 1 2 3 SHAFT DIAMETERS* OUTER END DRIVE END A B C A B C 1 2 3 FOR BEARING JOURNAL WIDTH LESS THAN 1 INCH ONLY SIX READINGS ARE REQUIRED. SHAFT RADIAL RUNOUT A FACE RUNOUT, BEARING INNER RING B DRIVE END OUTER END C FACE RUNOUT, BEARING OUTER RING DRIVE END OUTER END MECHANICAL CONDITION (LOSS OF LUBE, BURNED ETC.) - 33 009 ITEM NO: 17 of 17 19 FY -

320 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 9 - 1 FY ITEM NO: 34 - 009 6 201 NOV 18 DATE: CATEGORY: I : 1. SCOPE Vessel Fire Protection of Unmanned t Contractor Facility; 1.1 a Title: accomplish : REFERENCES 2. 2.1 NFPA Standard 312, Standard for Fire Protection of Vessels During Construction, Repair, and Lay up - 2.2 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard Employment REQUIREMENTS : 3. for an unmanned vessel at a contractor 3.1 Accomplish fire protection s of 2.1 and 2.2 and this item. facility in accordance with the requirement Maintain available for review, prior to commencement of work, a fire 3.2 safety plan meeting the requirements of 2.2. In addition to the requirements res, of 2.2, the plan shall include and identify the method for reporting fi the shipyard firefighting facilities, equipment, and organization (paid or volunteer), the procedures for maintenance of clear fire lanes in the shipyard and on the piers, and the nearest municipal firefighting organization, including the anticipated time of response. 3.3 Provide fire protection equipment consisting of: Fire fighting water, utilizing manifolds connected to a source 3.3.1 capable of providing 150 GPM at 60 PSIG at the manifold shall be in place before start of work. The number of manifolds shall be sufficient to 3.3.1.1 permit reaching all points on the vessel (including underwater body when the vessel is in dry dock or on a marine railway) with 2, 1 - 1/2 inch hoses of not more than 100 feet in length. Hoses shall be attached to the manifolds and fitted 3.3.1.2 purpose combination fog and straight stream nozzle. with an all - 1 of 2 M NO: ITE 009 - 34 9 FY - 1

321 Verify by the Pitot tube method or an in line flow - 3.3.1.3 meter that the water volume and pressure meets these requirements. 3.4 Ensu re access to temporary and Ship’s Force firefighting equipment is not obstructed or restricted. : NOTES 4. The term "unmanned" is defined as without the physical presence of 4.1 people in control; without a human operator. 009 M NO: 2 of 2 ITE - 34 FY - 1 9

322 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 ITEM NO: - 36 201 DATE: 01 OCT 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Controller; repair REFERENCES : 2. 2.1 Standard Items 2.2 Equipment Technical Manual 2.3 - General - 300, Electric Plant - 010/CH - STM - KC S9086 STD 2.4 MIL - - 2003 , Electric Plant Installation Standard Methods for Surface Ships and Submarines A6 S9300 - 2.5 - GYD - 010, Electrical Workmanship Inspect ion Guide for Surface Ships and Submarines - 1310, Shipboard Bonding, Grounding, and Other Techniques for STD - MIL 2.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility , Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) Mitigation, and Safety 3. : REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Identify and pull back associate d cables. Disconnect mechanically and remove controller . 3.1.1 Matchmark, identify, and retain shims. 3.1.2 Inspect each foundation for cracks, areas of distortion, and deterioration in excess of 25 percent of the thickness of each member of the tructure. s approved transferrable Submit one legible copy, in 3.1.2.1 , of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.1.2 to the media SUPERVISOR. Accomplishment of cleaning and painting for foundations of 3.1.3 equipment removed in 3.1 shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.2). 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 36 FY - 1 9

323 3.2 Disassemble each controller and clean components free of foreign matter. 3.3 Inspect each controller enclosure, mounting board, and component for values, and internal wiring for mechanical and physical defects, improper conformance to 2.2 and controller wiring diagram. 3.3.1 Test internal wiring and each coil for open circuits. Test insulation resistance to ground and between conductors, using a 500 volt - megger. Record readings. Minim um acceptable resistance to ground shall be one megohm. 3.3.1.1 Disconnect solid - state devices prior to measuring insulation resistance. 3.3.2 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media , of listing results of the requirements of 3.3 and 3.3.1 to the a report SUPERVISOR. Repair each controller, using 2.2 for guidance. 3.4 3.4.1 Straighten each enclosure and door. Free - up hinges and align door. Plug and seal unused cable openings. Install ground straps on each door on c ontrollers 3.4.1.1 ponents in accordance with with door mounted energized com DTL in 2036 - - MIL place of those to be missing or defective. identified 3.4.2 Accomplishment of cleaning and painting of the interior and exterior of the enclosure shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.2). 3.4.3 Remove existing and install new enclosure gaskets. | Remove existing and install new molded - 4 rubber switch covers. 3.4. 3.4. 5 Remove existing and install new components in place of those identified to be missing, defective or of improper value. Remove existing and install new wiring in place of wiring identified to be defective or frayed. Install new wiring where missing. 3. 4. 6 Inspect, dress, and adjust contacts. to Install new contacts in place of those .1 3.4. 6 identified be missing or defective, or resilver contacts in accordance with ASTM B 700. Remove existing cadmium - plated parts and install new zinc - 7 3.4. in accordance with ASTM A 153. parts plated 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 36 FY - 1 9

324 8 Wash, dip and bake, tape insulated coils and open 3.4. - transformers. Dipping shall be in varnish conforming to MIL - 24092, Class I 155. 3.4. 8 .1 Dip and bake coils and open transformers in Dolph 1105, Epoxylite Esterlite 605, or Schenectady International Isolite 862M varnish in localities where MIL - I - 24092 varnish does not meet state and local Air Pollution Control District (APCD) Standards. Repair and reinsulate coil and transformer leads. 8 .2 3.4. Free 3.4. 9 - up and lubricate moving parts. 3.4. 10 Adjust timing devices, relays, and contactors. 3.4. 11 Repair defective connections. Install a new wiring diagram and new heater table in each 12 3.4. guration of the controller. The new diagram shall reflect actual confi controller in which it is installed. New diagrams shall be sealed in transparent plastic and shall be mounted on the inside of each controller so as to be conveniently accessible. 3.5 Assemble each controller. 3.5.1 wiring and wire harnesses for neat Dress and shape appearance. Install wire clamps on both ends of wire hinges. Install flexible insulating tubing over wire hinges to prevent chafing. | (V) "SHOP OPERATIONAL TEST" 3.6 Accom plish an operational test of each controller and adjust to ensure correct operation in accordance w ith the wiring diagram of 3.4. 12 , using 2.2 for guidance. (V) "INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST" - using volt megger insulation resistance test, Accomplish 500 3.6.1 , 300 Paragraphs 300 3.2.2 through 300 - 3.2.3, 300 - 3.4. 7 - - 3.4. 10 , and 300 - 5.3.7.1 of 2.3 for guidance. Install each controller using shims retained in 3.1.1. | 3.7 3.7 .1 Remove existing and install new conductor identification in place of conductor identification sleeving identified sleeving to be illegible or missing. New conductor identification sleeving shall conform to DTL - AMS - SAE 23053, Class One, white, marked with indelible ink. - 3.7. ing in the Repair and reinsulate cable ends terminat 2 One of 2.4. Resleeve conductors over controller in accordance with Part 9 000 circular mils. , 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 36 FY - 1 9

325 3.7. 3 Remove defective and install new lugs, using 2.5 for accept or reject criteria. Install new lugs where missing. New lugs shall conform L AS7928 - to MI - 16366 or SAE T - Bond and ground equipment in accordance with 2.6. 3.7. 4 3.8 Connect each controller with the exception of the motor leads and the brake leads if applicable, using retained data of 3.1. (V) "PRELIMINARY SEQUENCE TEST" Accomplish a preliminary sequence test of each controller by 3.8.1 cycling the controller through 3 start and stop cycles from each local and remote pushbutton station. Observe controller for proper sequence. Correct deficiencies. tor leads and brake leads, if applicable, at 3.8.2 Connect the mo completion of preliminary sequence test. (V)(G) "OPERATIONAL TEST" Accomplish an operational test of each controller with its 3.9 associated motor for designed sequence of operation. Verify correct speed lection, correct motor rotation in each mode, and correct value of overload se setting or size of heater coils based on motor nameplate full load running current. : NOTES 4. Equipment technical manual and drawings will be listed in the 4.1 invoking Work Ite m. 4.2 If cleaning and painting of 3.1.3 or 3.4.2 is required; the use of - 32 “Cleaning and Painting Requirements; Category II Standard Item 009 of 2.1 accomplish” will be specified in the Work Item. 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 36 FY - 1 9

326 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 37 201 OCT 01 DATE: 7 CATEGORY: II : SCOPE 1. for Woodwork; accomplish Title: 1.1 General Procedure : REFERENCES 2. Standard Items 2.1 - 2. 2 Manual for Its Use as a Shipbuilding LP - 015 - 1010, Wood: A 0900 Material, Basic Wood Technology Applicable to Boat and Shipbuilding - 2. 3 0900 LP - 015 - 1020, Wood: A Manual for Its Use as a Shipbuilding Material, Techniques and Practices Applicable to Preservation and Storage - 1030, Wood: A Manual for Its Use as a Shipbuilding - 015 2. 4 0 900 - LP Material, Technical Data Applicable to Boat and Ship Design 2. 1040, Wood: A Manual for Its Use as a Shipbuilding - - LP - 0900 5 015 Material, Boat and Ship Construction Techniques MIL - 6 2. 1623, Fire Performance Requirements and Approved - STD Specifications for Interior Finish Materials and Furnishings (Navy Shipboard Use) 3. REQUIREMENTS : Accomplish the requirements of 2. 2 for performing through 2. 5 3.1 procedures. woodworking general 3.2 Install flush fitted wood plugs/dowels in holes resulting from the removal of fasteners. Drill out holes to sound wood and install plugs/dowels. 3.2.1 P commercial grade phenol and resorcinol resin lugs/dowels shall be set in a adhesive. base Where deterioration and decay exists around the perimeter of 3.2. 2 bolt holes have been elongated, enlarge the fastener holes and where through - the holes by drilling to a size (diameter) that will remove the elongation, prior to installing plugs/dowels. deterioration, decay, and 1 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

327 3.2. 2 .1 Clean - bore drill bit diameter shall not be more than one inch larger than the original fastener hole diameter, unless otherwise specified. 3.2. 3 Plugs/dowels shall be of the s ame wood species as the member being repaired, with their grain installed parallel with the grain of the existing wood, and then driven the full depth of the hole being repaired. 4 3.2. Soak plugs/dowels for a minimum of 10 minutes and saturate sed fastener holes with copper naphthenate wood preservative applied the expo t in accordance with manufacturer's ins ructions, and allow to dry to a moisture content of 15 percent or less prior to installation of plugs/dowels. in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items 2.1. asteners Install new f 3.3 | 3.3. Aluminum and aluminum alloy components and structural members 1 Grade 304 or 316 fasteners. shall be installed using CRES, 3.3. 1 .1 Fasteners with compositions of copper alloys shall not be used in contact with aluminum and aluminum alloy components and structural members. .2 3.3. 1 Install non - metallic (epoxy plastic, phenolic, polyimide [nyl on], Teflon) sleeves over CRES fasteners where they come in contact with the aluminum and aluminum alloy components and structural members. Install insulation tape, minimum thickness 20 mils, 1 . 3 3.3. - I 24391 (2 thicknesses) between fa ying surfaces of conforming to MIL - CRES to extend approximately 1/4 to - aluminum/aluminum alloy - inch beyond the - faying surfaces. 3.3. 1. 4 Ensure that the surfaces of aluminum and aluminum alloy components and structural members which will come in contact with wood members and CRES fasteners are protected with a minimum of 2 coats of epoxy polyimide primer conforming to MIL - PRF - 23236 . . 1 3.3. Apply one coat of phenolic varnish on 5 modified clear wood members which will come in contact with aluminum and aluminum alloy Refer to the Master Painters Institute components and structural members. (MPI) Approved Product List, MPI #28, for procurement of exterior marine spar varnish. metallic corrosion, fastener material composition 3.3. 2 To avoid bi - shall be the same material composition as that of the metal components and . structural members that they are fastening except as noted in 3.3. 1 3.4 Accomplish installation of new fasteners as follows: 2 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

328 3.4.1 Drill pre - bored pilot holes for screws and fetter ring nails prior to installation to prevent damage to wood members. 3.4.1.1 Diameter of pilot holes shall not exceed 70 percent of the root diameter of screws for soft woods, and 90 percent for hard woods. For screw shanks, the hole in the material to be fastened shall be 100 percent shank diameter. 3.4.1.2 Maximum depth of pilot holes shall not exceed 90 percent of the length of screws. 3.4.1.3 Holes for fetter ring nails shall be pre - bored not to exceed 60 percent of the nail diameter. inch of screws - ¼ Screws shall not be impact driven. The last 3.4.2 shall be hand tightened. - 3.4.2.1 snug but not so tight as to Fasteners shall be set weaken the material by rupture of wood fibers adjacent to the fasteners. 3.4.3 Bolt holes shall be drilled for a tight fit. Where watertight integrity shall be maintained, the fasteners 3.4.4 ody bound. shall be b bolts and hull plank fasteners shall be bedded in Through - 3.4.5 56 or caulking cotton, and a NAVSEA approved - marine oakum conforming to T - O natural bedding compound such as Interlux 214 or Dolchem 3400. 3.4.6 Counterbore wood fastener holes to permit the installation of a wood plug (bung) over the fasteners, unless otherwise specified. Install wood plugs over fasteners. The depth of counterboring is fixed by the thickness 3.4.6.1 of the planking, which in turn fixes the depth of the wood plug (bung) used. thirds its - half to two - The depth (thickness) of a bung plug shall be one diameter to ensure that it will stay in place. The rule for counterboring cessary to for bung plugs is that the plug diameter shall be no larger than ne allow the largest part of the fastener to enter the hole. 3.4.6.2 Plugs shall be of the same wood species as the member being plugged and their grain shall be installed parallel with the grain of the existing wood. Soak plugs for a minimum of 10 minutes and saturate 3.4.6.3 copper the fastener holes with wood preservative conforming to naphthenate, and allow to dry for t ructions, in accordance with manufacturer's ins applied a minimum of 4 days prior to installation of plugs. oat plugs on faying surfaces with a NAVSEA approved 3.4.6.4 C natural bedding compound such as Interlux 214 or Dolchem 3400, prior to 3 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

329 installation and cut level and smooth with surrounding surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 5 3. New wood materials shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise specified. Wood materials used for new interior finish materials and 3.5.1 furnishings shall conform to the requirements of MIL . 140 and 2.6 19 L - - 3.5.2 Types, grad es, and species of wood (lumber) shall be as specified in the invoking Work Item. Lumber shall conform to the specified grade after seasoning 3.5.3 to the required moisture content and after being sized to the approximate fashioned from it. dimensions of the members to be New wood members shall be finished smooth on each side. 3.5.4 3.5.5 Uncaulked seams, joints, and faying surfaces shall be fair and in continuous contact when assembled, except where specifically exempted, such as for hull sheathin g. 3.5.6 New wood members, when assembled in place, shall show no rupture as a result of overstraining. 15154 3.5.7 W - Laminated member construction shall conform to MIL - for red or white oak. 3.5.7.1 When bonding together wood surfaces which rely on mechanical fastening for main strength, commercial grade phenol and resorcinol resin base adhesive shall be used. P - Plywood shall conform to MIL 3.5.8 18066, Class 3A. - 3.5.9 Moisture content of new wood materials shall fall within the following parameters. New lumber shall have a moisture content of 13 3.5.9.1 percent, plus or minus 5 percent, at the time of installation. 3.5.9.2 nt of 10 New plywood shall have a moisture conte percent, plus or minus 5 percent, at the time of installation. 3.6 New lumber and plywood shall be soaked for 10 minutes in wood preservative after boring, shaping, and fairing operations have been ed. complet Apply one soaking brush coat of wood preservative on bare 3.6.1 wood surfaces exposed by removals and machining operations before surfaces are covered. 4 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

330 3.6.2 Wood preservative shall conform to copper naphthenate, applied in accordance with manufa cturer's ins t ructions, unless otherwise specified. treated wood to dry 3.6.3 Allow preservative - to a moisture content of 15 percent or less prior to gluing and/or painting operations. Apply a heavy coating of a NAVSEA approved natural bedding compound 3.7 such as Interlux 214 or Dolchem 3400 on the top surfaces of deck beams, frames headers, fillers, planking side of frames, deck beam ends, seams, and butts (except those to be caulked), and other faying (joining) surfaces before the faying surfaces are covered, except as follows: In between inner and outer layers of hull planking of crafts that do not have caulking seams, a wood bedding/sealant compound conforming to 3M - 5200 shall be installed. 3.7.1 419, Type III - C - PIA Install one layer of canvas conforming to (8 ounces or heavier) between faying surfaces of new leveling foundation pads installed on weather decks, in addition to a NAVSEA approved natural bedding compound such as Interlux 214 or Dolche m 3400. Remove surplus bedding/sealing compound after squeeze out. - 3.7.2 No new butt joints shall be established in any planking strake (hull 3.8 shell or deck) that will leave a portion that is less than 12 feet in length. portion of a planking strake shall be installed which is less than 12 No new feet in length. 3.8.1 Butt joints in adjacent strakes shall be separated by a minimum of 3 strakes. Butt joints in the same frame space shall be separated by a 3.8.2 minimum of 3 f rame spaces. Planking strakes may be scarf 3.8.3 joined to maintain butt joint - all be in accordance with 2.2 through 2. 5 . schedule. Scarfing sh 3.9 Wood members requiring caulking seams shall be installed with their tight and with an outgage (special bevel for caulking) in the faying surfaces side(s) to be caulked. Accomplish the following work to ensure watertight integrity of 3.10 caulked seams (including butt and rabbet seams). pound and loose and Reef out by hand, defective caulking com 3.10.1 decayed caulking (cotton/oakum) from existing caulking seams requiring installation of new caulking and caulking compound. 3.10.1.1 Exercise care when reefing out caulking compound and g seams. Power tools shall caulking to preclude damage to existing caulkin not be utilized for the reefing out process. 5 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

331 3.10.2 to be sound and in good identified Where existing caulking is condition, set the existing caulking deeper into the seam opening to ensure that it is driven solidly home and to make room for additional caulking. Set the existing caulking by driving the caulking 3.10.2.1 uniformly, to the s ame hardness in each seam. To prevent a wedging effect it shall be set to a hardness that would not allow an awl to penetrate more than 3/8 - inch. Caulking seams shall be clean and dry before installing new 3.10.3 caulking and caulki ng compound. Caulk deck planking caulking seams using treated caulking 3.10.4 56. Treat the caulking - type marine oakum conforming to T O - - cotton and spun cotton as follows. 3.10.4.1 The untreated caulking cotton shall be undyed, of - inch staple length, and shall be free from oil, fire - not less than 3/4 damaged or scorched cotton, added waste, and substantially free from linters. 3.10.4.2 The untreated caulking cotton shall be soft and fully opened and contain no sizing. The amount or size of spec ks shall not be objectionably noticeable upon casual examination. 3.10.4.3 The untreated caulking cotton shall be well carded to form a sliver and shall consist of not less than 9 nor more than 12 slivers laid parallel to form a composite untwisted str and. Each sliver untreated shall measure approximately 500, plus or minus 50 feet, to the pound. Treat the caulking cotton with a solvent solution of 3.10.4.4 to produce caulking cotton having a minimum of asphaltum - copper naphthenate 1/2 percent, plus or minus 1/2 percent, - one percent metallic copper and 1 asphalt, based on the weight of the treated cotton. The copper shall be uniformly distributed throughout the cotton. 3.10.4.5 The treated caulking cotton shall be dry to the touch prior to installation. Caulk hull shell planking caulking seams using treated 3.10.5 caulking cotton conforming to the requirements outlined in 3.10.4.1 through O - 56. - - typ e marine oakum conforming to T 3.10.4.5 and spun Drive one to 2 strands of caulking cotton into the 3.10.5.1 bottom of the seams, prior to installing marine oakum, to ensure that deep/tight seams are filled. 3.10.6 oakum caulking shall be looped, Caulking cotton and marine tucked, and hard driven to a depth that provides space for installation of - seam caulking compound. 6 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

332 The size of the seam in width and depth determines 3.10.6.1 the required amount of cotton/oakum caulking and shall be fi lled to within inch to 3/8 - - inch of the plank surface. 1/4 The amount of cotton/oakum caulking inserted shall 3.10.6.2 be carefully controlled to limit the possibility to "caulk off" a plank from its frames if too much is driven in and forced beyond the outgage bevel. 3.10.6.3 The cotton/oakum caulking shall be driven uniformly, to the same hardness and depth in each seam, to prevent a wedging effect. It shall be set to a hardness that would not allow an awl to penetrate more than 3/8 - inch. Butt caulking seams shall be caulked ahead of .6.4 3.10 adjoining longitudinal caulking seams to ensure that short ends of caulking will be locked in place. The ends of sound existing caulking and new caulking 3.10.6.5 o be married in a continuous bulk and shall be drawn out and tapered so as t then be installed as stated in 3.10.6 through 3.10.6.4. Hull shell planking caulking seams of heavy planked 3.10.6. 6 ome by means of a heavy horsing | ships shall have the caulking set firmly h e seams with a heavy mallet known as a beetle. This is a iron driven into th - 2 - man operation that requires one man to hold the long handled horsing iron while the second man swings the horsing beetle. This operation ensures that the caulking will be well seated, will not wo rk loose, and is the final means to stiffen the hull. Pay (fill) deck planking caulking seams with polyurethane 3.10.7 24340, Type I, or marine glue - S - caulking compound conforming to MIL 413, - - MIL G Item. as specified in the invoking Work 3.10.7.1 The depth of the seam caulking compound shall be one - 1/2 times the width of the seam but no deeper than 3/8 - inch. to 1 Seal the surfaces of the seams and the installed 3.10.7.2 cotton caulking with a seam primer that is compatible wi th the caulking compound. 3.10.7.3 inch wide masking tape on both sides of - Install one each caulking seam to keep the caulking compound from penetrating the open grain areas of the deck planking. 3.10.7.4 Remove the tape installed in 3.10.7.3 upon completion of caulking operations. 3.10.8 Pay hull shell planking caulking seams with caulking compound in accordance with the following requirements. 7 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

333 3.10.8.1 30 Pay underwater hull caulking seams with Interlux brown underwater seam compound (oleoresinous material cut with an aromatic solvent). 3.10.8.2 Pay hull caulking seams above the waterline with Interlux 31 white seam compound (oleoresinous material cut with an aromatic solvent). pth of the seam caulking compound shall be one The de 3.10.8.3 1/2 times the width of the seam. to 1 - 3.10.8.4 Paint the surfaces of the seams and the installed 24647, MIL PRF - - fouling paint conforming to cotton/oakum caulking with anti - prior to fillin Type II, Class 1, g underwater hull shell planking seams with caulking compound. 3.10.8.5 Seal the surfaces of the seams and the installed cotton/oakum caulking with a seam primer that is compatible with the caulking compound on hull shell planking seams existing above the waterline. 3.10.9 Prior to paying the caulking compound installed in 3.10.7 and 3.10.8, seams shall be thoroughly cleared and cleaned of foreign matter. 3.10.9.1 The caulking compound may be applied with a caulking gun but sh all be handworked into the seams to eliminate air pockets and voids in the seams. 3.10.9.2 Remove surplus caulking compound from surrounding surfaces. Pay and complete seams daily, leaving no exposed 3.10.9.3 cotton/oakum caulking at the end of eac h work shift to ensure the cotton/oakum caulking remains dry and clean. When installing caulking compound and its compatible 3.10.9.4 primer, the manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly adhered to. Seams inch width shall be paye d in 2 applications spaced 24 hours greater than 1/2 - apart. Blank openings resulting from removals and relocations, unless 11 3. otherwise specified, in accordance with the following. Blank deck planking as follows: 3.11.1 Route a 3/8 - inch deep indentation on both the top 3.11.1.1 and underside of the deck planking, centered over the area to be blanked. The routed area shall extend a minimum of 3 inches 3.11.1.2 beyond the perimeter of the area to be blanked. 8 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

334 3.11.1. 3 Fit and install a Douglas Fir insert in the area to be blanked. 3.11.1.4 Fit and install a 3/8 - inch thick plywood insert in each routed - out indentation. Bed faying surfaces of the inserts with a NAVSEA 3.11.1.5 approved natural wood bedding comp ound such as Interlux 214 or Dolchem 3400, and secure with round head bolts to ensure watertight integrity. Remove surplus wood bedding compound left after squeeze - out. 3.11.2 Blank plywood bulkheads and plywood decks as follows: 3.11.2.1 Enlarge the hole to be blanked to a minimum of 4 inches square. Install a fitted plywood insert in the resulting 3.11.2.2 opening in the deck or bulkhead. 3.11.2.3 Install a plywood lap cover on one side of and centered over the area to be blanked. The lap cover shall extend a minimum of 3 inches beyond the perimeter of the area to be blanked. Bed faying surfaces of the insert and the lap cover 3.11.2.4 in a NAVSEA approved natural wood bedding compound such as Interlux 214 or Dolch o ensure watertight em 3400, and secure with round head bolts t out. - integrity. Remove surplus wood bedding compound left after squeeze 3.11.3 sheathed bulkheads as follows: - Blank double heathing to a 3.11.3.1 Enlarge the opening in the inner s minimum of 4 inches square. 3.11.3.2 Enlarge the opening in the outer sheathing to a size that extends a minimum of 3 inches beyond the perimeter of enlarged inner sheathing opening. Install a fitted plywood insert in each opening. 3.11.3.3 The plywood inserts shall be the same thickness as the sheathing. 419, C - Install one layer of canvas conforming to PIA 3.11.3.4 - Type III (8 ounces or heavier), between the 2 inserts, the same size as the larger insert. Bed faying surfaces of the inserts and the canvas in 3.11.3.5 a NAVSEA approved natural wood bedding compound such as Interlux 214 or round head bolts t o ensure watertight Dolchem 3400, and secure with Remove surplus wood bedding compound left after squeeze out. integrity. - Sand new plywood blanks and disturbed surfaces to fair in 3.11.4 with surrounding areas. 9 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

335 Accomplishment of cleaning and painting for bulkhead 3.11.4.1 sheathing sanded surfaces shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard items (Se e Note 4.1). 4. NOTES : 4.1 If cleaning and painting for bulkhead sheathing sanded surfaces of 3.11.4.1 is required; the use of Category II Standard item 009 - 32 “Cleaning and Painting Requiremen ts; accomplish” of 2.1 will be specified in the Work . Item 10 of 1 0 37 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

336 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 38 18 DATE: NOV 201 6 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Reboiler Title: Boiler , Catapult Accumulator and 1.1 Dry Lay - up; accomplish REFERENCES : 2. 2.1 S9086 - GY - STM - 010/CH - 221, Boilers 010, Catapult Steam Support Systems - 2 .2 S9587 - B1 - MMA for CV/CVN Class Ships 2.3 7270424, Steam Accumulator Dehumidification - 525 0989 - 036 - 0000 2.4 CVN 68 Class Steam Plant Manual (CONFIDENTIAL) , 2.5 S9534 - AD - MMA - 010, Steam Reboiler REQUIREMENTS : 3. 3.1 Boiler: Prepare boiler for d ry l ay - u p in accordance with Paragraph 221 - 2.3.3 of 2.1. Fill or drain water in steam drum to 3.1.1 a level below the bottom of the manhole. 3.1. 2 Inject 10 pounds of sodium nitrite for each 1,000 gallons of boiler water in a slurry solution to the water in the boiler. 3.1. 2 .1 If boiler is pressurized, inject sodium nitrite after o 100 PSIG or less. pressure drops t 1.3 3. Fill the steam drum to bring water level to the top of the gage glass using water conforming to the following requirements: CONSTITUENT or PROPERTY REQUIREMENT pH 5.8 to 8.0 Conductivity 2.5 micromho/cm point of delivery) (at 0.2 ppm (0.2 mg/L) max Dissolved Silica Hardness 0.10 epm (0.10 meg/L) max 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 38 FY - 1 9

337 3. 1.3.1 Prevent water level from carrying the solution over into the superheater. 3. 1 . 4 Do not drain the solution to the bilge. 3 . 1.5 Remove each drum manhole plate and header handhole plate from boiler. 3. 1.5.1 Do not remove seal welded handhole plates. 3. 1.6 Blow out horizontal tubes with clean air to remove any water. Dry remaining solution from water walls, economizers, superheater headers, steam and water drums. 3. 1.7 Circulate heated air with positive flow through the firesides and watersides, as long as the boiler is in a dry lay - up condition, in accordance with - 2.3. 3 .1 of 2.1. (See Note 4.1) Paragraph 221 3. 1.7.1 Introduce and exhaust heated air in accordance with - 2 - Table 221 3 of 2.1. - 2 - and Table 221 2 pen manway access, dry out 3.2 Catapult Accumulator , Drain Accumulator: O 5.5.1 of 2.2. Paragraph and remove standing water in accordance with 3.2.1 Install temporary closures (FME) in accordance with Paragraph 5.5.3 of 2.2. 3.2.2 the Provide source of heated air to the a ccumulator thr ough manway opening in accordance with Paragraph 5.4.4 of 2.2. Introduce heated air thr 3.2.3 a 4.0 inch hose penetrating the ough ype temporary manhole cover in accordance with T able 221 2 - 3 of 2.1, Unit T - IV. 3.2.3.1 Manufacture manway cover in a ccordance with details 3 10 - E through 15 - of 2. E . up in accordance with 2.2 3.2.4 Accomplish d ehumidified air lay - , using 2. 3 for guidance. up in 3.3 : Reboiler Shell Side Accomplish dry lay - Drain Reboiler , . accordance with 2.4 and Chapter 3 of 2.5 Open manwa y access, conduct feed water wash down of the tube 3.3.1 bundle and internal areas of the shell with high pressure water lance in accordance w ith Chapter 3 of 2.5 . Dry out and remove standing water 3.3.2 . 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 38 FY - 1 9

338 3.3.3 Manufacture and install a plexiglass cover to seal the manway opening , using details 10 - E through 15 - E of 2.3 for guidance. Cover shall have a 4.0 inch hole in the middle to allow penetration of air vent duct (supply) and 4 each 0.75 inch holes for air exh aust points in accordance with Chap ter 3 of 2.5 . 3.3.4 Introduce heated air thr ough a 4.0 inch hose penetrating the T 2 able 221 - temporary manhole cover in accordance with - 3 of 2.1, Unit T ype I. from outlet of the heater 3.3.5 Install vent ducting hose (supply) to the conical section the manway cover (rear) ough thr of the Reboiler and V280 and Bottom Blow align air exit points by opening drum vent valve RB - V105A/105B/108 in accordance with Chapter 3 of 2. . 5 - valves RB , ACCUMULATOR AND REBOILER LAY - UP" (V) "INSPECT BOILER 3.4 Inspect the b oiler , a ccum u lator and r eboiler daily and at the end of - each work shift and ensure dry lay up conditions are maintained in accordance of 2.1. 2.4.6.3 - 2.4.6.2 and 221 - 221 with Paragraphs in accordance 3.5 Remove and dispose of spent chemicals and solutions . with federal, state, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations : NOTES 4. 4.1 For ships using chelant treatment, the use of sodium nitrite prior up is prohibited unless the - to placing boiler on hot air or desiccant lay ship is in . CNO Availability a . 4.2 Catapult a ccumulator and eboiler requirements apply to CVN only r anway covers when ial may be used to manufacture m Aluminum mater 4.3 authorized by the SUPERVISOR. 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 38 FY - 1 9

339 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 39 20 DATE: 18 NOV 16 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR) for a New Technical Manual for Commercial Equipment/Component; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : - 000, Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR); - 000172 2.1 NDMS Shelf (COTS) Equipment Requirements - The - Commercial Off 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Accomplish the requirements of 2.1. 3.1.1 Deliver th e data items listed in Paragraph 1.3 of 2.1 as follows: 3.1.1.1 Submit 3 advance copies to the SUPERVISOR for review within 10 days upon receipt of equipment/component from the vendor. 3.1.1.2 One copy shall be in a form suitable for offset printin g. 3.2 Submit supplementary data for commercial manuals in accordance with 2.1 to the SUPERVISOR. 3.2.1 Deliver the data items listed in Paragraph 1.4 of 2.1 as follows: 3.2.1.1 Submit 3 review draft copies (RDC) of the supplementary data to the SUPERVISOR for review within 10 days of receipt of equipment from vendor. One copy of the commercial manual with supplementary 3.2.1.2 ting. data inserted shall be in a form suitable for offset prin NOTES 4. : line at: - 2.1 is available and can be read on 4.1 nmci ://nsdsa. s http .navy.mil 1 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 39 FY - 1 9

340 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 40 7 DATE: 01 OCT 20 1 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Contractor Crane, Multi - Purpose Machine and Material Handling Equipment at a Naval Facility ; provide : REFERENCES 2. Standard Items 2.1 2. 2 29 CFR Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards 3 2. 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard Employment 2. 4 29 CFR Part 1917, Marine Terminals 2. 5 29 CFR Part 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction 6 2. NAVFAC P - 307, Management of Weight Handling Equipment REQUIREMENTS : 3. , Notify the SUPERVISOR one day prior to bringing any crane s 3.1 , material handling multi - purpose machines equipment, or construction - equipment that may be used in a crane like application to lift suspended loads on a Naval facility. 3.2 Comply with the requirements of 2.1 through 2. 5 , and Paragraph 11.1.b of 2. 6 , prior to bringin g or using any contractor crane, multi - purpose | machine and material handling equipment that may be used in a crane - like app lication to lift a suspended load on a Naval facility. | 3.2.1 Maintain written documentation of the last weight test of the crane and all related weight handling equipment on site. Ensure the handling and rigging gear and below the hook lifting 3. 3 devices and personnel comply with the following requirements: 3. Personnel performing rigging shall have an understanding of 1 . 3 all signs, notices, and operating instructions, and be familiar with the applicable hand signals prescribed by the ASME B30 standard for the type of crane in use. .2 3 Personnel performing r igging shall be familiar with the 3. rigging requirements in 2.1 through 2. . 5 40 1 of 6 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

341 3.3.3 Provide qualified signal personnel in accordance with 2. 5 . 3. 4 Inspect rigging gear in accordance with 2.1 through 2. 5 and Paragraph 11.1.b of 2. 6 . 3. 4 .1 Maintain certification records on site available for review during all work. (V) "INSPECT CRANE" 3. 5 Contractor shall: 3. 5 .1 Ensure all inspections are performed in accordance with 2.1 through 2. (daily, monthly, quart erly, and yearly), and retain the current 6 documentation of inspections. Documents shall be kept on site. 3. 5 .1.1 Perform daily pre - use inspections and testing on all load hoisting and lowering mechanisms, boom hoisting and lowering mechanisms, swinging mechanisms, traveling mechanisms (if to be used that day), and safety devices. 3. 5 .2 Cranes that have to be re - rated shall be in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice, Crane Load Stability Test Code J765 and documentation maintained on site. 5 3. Have an operational anti block - block device or a two - two - 3 . damage prevention feature for all points of two blocking. - 3. 5 . 4 Have a boom hoist disconnect, shutoff, or hydraulic relief to automatically stop the boom hoist when the boom reaches a predetermined high angle. 3. 6 Conduct a joint verification with the Government representative to 1 A ppendix P, F igure P - ensure that a legible and indelible completed copy of , multi purpose and material handling is maintained on the crane - of 2. 6 used in a crane T - equipment like application to lift suspended loads. he following certification and testing documentation shall be on site prior to entry and use on any Naval facility: , multi .1 used in al handling equipment purpose and materi - Crane 3. 6 a crane certification like application to lift suspended loads - 3. 6 .2 Load testing 3. Yearly, monthly, and daily inspection logs .3 6 3. Rope/sling certifications .4 6 Operator certifications/designations 3. 6 .5 Designation of person performing log inspections .6 6 3. 40 2 of 6 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

342 6 .7 Cranes that are permanently located on a Naval facility shall 3. have a quarterly joint verification. 3. Develop and maintain on site a critical lift plan in accordance with 7 Pa ragraph 1 1.1.g of 2. 6 . Complete and maintain a copy of Attachment 3. 7 . 1 A for each lift. 8 3. Report verbally each accident to the SUPERVISOR immediately but not later than 4 hours of such an event. preserve the scene 3. 8 .1 until Secure the accident site and released by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 8 .1.1 Conduct an accident investigation to establish root cause(s) of any accident. 3. 8 .2 Withhold further crane , multi - purpose and material handling equipment operations until the cause is determined and corrective actions are implemented and approved by the SUPERVISOR. A crane .3 8 accident is when any of the 3. and rigging gear , multi - purpose and material handling equipment following occurs during crane tions: opera 3. 8 .3.1 Personnel injury or death 3. 8 .3.2 Material or equipment damage 3. 8 .3.3 Dropped load 3. 8 .3.4 Derailment .3.5 3. Two blocking - 8 3. 8 .3.6 Overload 3. 8 .3.7 Collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, multi - purpose, material handling equipment and/or other objects Provide a formal written report of the event to the 3. 8 .4 SUPERVISOR within one day of each accident. of .5 8 , Submit one legible copy, in 3. approved transferrable media the accident report consisting of a summary of circumstances, and explanation B of cause(s), and corrective actions taken, using Attachment , to the within 15 days of each accident . SUPERVISOR : NOTES 4. 4.1 None. 40 3 of 6 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

343 ATTACHMENT A YES CONTRACTOR CRANE OPERATION CHECKLIST FOR CRITICAL LIFTS NO 1 Does the operator know the weight of the load to be lifted? 2 Is the load to be lifted within the crane manufacturer's rated capacity in its present configuration? Is the crane level and on firm ground? 3 4 Are outriggers required? If so, are outriggers fully extended and down, and the crane 5 load off the wheels? 6 If blocking is required, is the entire surface of the outrigger pad supported and is the blocking material of sufficient strength to safely support the loaded outrigger pad? - rubber 7 If outriggers are not used, is the crane rated for on cturer's load chart? lifts by the manufa Is the swing radius of the crane counterweight clear of people 8 and obstructions and accessible areas within the swing area barricaded to prevent injury or damage? Has the hook been centered over the load in such a manner to 9 minimize swing? Is the load well secured and balanced in the sling or lifting 10 device before it is lifted more than a few inches? Is the lift and swing path clear of obstructions? 11 12 If rotation of the load being lifted is hazardous, is a tag or restraint line being used? 13 Are personnel prevented from standing or passing under a suspended load? Is the crane operator's attention diverted? 14 Are proper signals being used at all times? 15 Do the operations ensure that side loading is prohibited? 16 17 Are personnel prevented from riding on a load? Are start and stop motions in a smooth fluid motion (no sudden 18 acceleration or deceleration)? 19 If operating near electric power lines, are the rules and guidelines understood and adhered to? 20 Is the lift a critical lift? - 21 If so, are critical lift regulations understood, check off sheets initialed and signed off, and was there an interactive brief conducted with associated personnel? 1 of 2. 6 Figure P current, filled out - ppendix P, Is A 22 ? completely, and posted in the crane Contractor: Subcontractor: Location: Date: 40 4 of 6 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

344 ATTACHMENT B FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY CRANE AND RIGGING GEAR ACCIDENT REPORT Rigging Gear Accident Crane Accident Accident Category: To: SUPERVISOR From: Report No: Activity: Crane No: Category: Accident Date: Time: hrs GPS Category of Service: Crane Type: Crane Manufacturer: SPS Was Crane/Rigging Gear Being Used in SPS? Was Crane/Rigging Gear Being Used in a Complex Lift/Critical non - crane rigging operation? Yes_____ No_____ Yes _____ No_____ Location: Weather: Crane Capacity: Hook Capacity: Weight of Load on Hook: Fatality or Permanent Disability? Material/Property Cost Estimate: Yes No Accident Type: Personal Injury Overload Derail Damaged Rigging Gear Two Blocked Load Collision Dropped Load Damaged Crane Damaged Load Crane Collision Other Specify Cause of Accident: Improper Operation Equipment Failure Inadequate Visibility Switch Alignment Improper Rigging Inadequate Communication Track Condition Procedural Failure Other Specify Chargeable to: Crane Walker Rigger Operator Maintenance Management/Supervision Other Specify Crane Function: Travel Hoist Rotate Luffing Telescoping Other N/A Is this accident indicative of a recurring problem? Yes No If yes, list Accident Report Nos.: ATTACH COMPLETE AND CONCISE SITUATION DESCRIPTION AND CORRECTIVE/PREVENTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN AS ENCLOSURE (1). Include probable cause and contributing factors. Assess damages and define responsibility. For equipment nction o r malfunction or failure, include specific description of the component and the resulting effect or problem caused by the malfu failure. List immediate and long term corrective/preventive actions assigned and respective codes. Code Date Phone and email Preparer: Concurrences: Date Code Date Code Date Code Certifying Official (Crane Accidents Only): ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE 40 5 of 6 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

345 CRANE AND RIGGING GEAR ACCIDENT REPORT INSTRUCTIONS Electronic submission will be accepted without signatures but the names of the preparer, concurring personnel, and certifying official (for crane accidents only) must be filled in. 1. Accident Category: Indicate either crane accident or rigging gear accident. 2. From: The contractor that is responsible for reporting the accident. Activity: The naval activity where the accident took place. 3. - 001). gned accident number (e.g., 95 Report No.: The activity assi 4. 5. 5), if applicable. - Crane No.: The activity assigned crane number (e.g., PC Category: Identify category of crane (i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 4), if applicable. 6. Accident Date: The date the accident occurred. 7. Time: The time (24 hour clock) the accident occurred (e.g., 1300). 8. 9. Category of Service: Check the applicable service (SPS as defined by NAVSEA 0989 - 030 7000). - , if applicable. 10. Crane Type: The type of crane involved in the accident (e.g., mobile, bridge) 11. Crane Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the crane (e.g., Dravo, Grove, P&H), if applicable. 12. SPS: Was the crane or rigging gear being used in an SPS lift? 13. Complex lift: Was the crane or rigging gear being used in a complex lift? 14. Location: The detailed location where the accident took place (e.g., building 213, dry dock 5). 15. Weather: The weather conditions at time of accident (e.g., wind, rain, cold). g., 120,000 pounds), if applicable. 16. Crane Capacity: The certified capacity of the crane (e. Hook Capacity: The capacity of the hook involved in the accident at the maximum radius of the operation, if 17. applicable. 18. Weight of Load on Hook: If applicable, the weight of the load on the hook. y or Permanent Disability?: Check yes or no. 19. Fatalit 20. Material/Property Cost Estimate: Estimate total cost of damage resulting from the accident. explanatory. - 21. Reported to NAVSAFECEN?: Self 22. Accident Type: Check all that apply. Accident: Check all that apply. 23. Cause of 24. Chargeable to: Check all that apply. 25. Crane Function: Check the function(s) in operation at time of accident. Check all that apply. Check N/A if a rigging gear accident. heck yes or no. Identify any other similar accidents. 26. Is this a recurring problem?: C - 27. Situation Description/Corrective Actions: Self explanatory. 28. Preparer: Self - explanatory. 29. Concurrences: Self - explanatory. - Self 30. Certifying Official (Crane Accidents Only): explanatory. 40 6 of 6 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

346 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 41 ITEM NO: 009 - 6 DATE: 18 NOV 20 1 CATEGORY: II SCOPE : 1. 1.1 Title: Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR) for a Topically Structured Technical Manual; accomplish REFERENCES : 2. - 000173 000, Technical Manual Contract Requirements (TMCR); 2.1 NDMS - Hull, Mechanical and Electrical (HM&E) Equipment Technical Manual Requirements 3. : REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Accomplish the requirements of 2.1. Deliver t he data items listed in Paragraph 1.3 of 2.1 as follows: 3.2 3.2.1 review draft copies (RDC) to the SUPERVISOR for 3 Submit review within 10 days of receipt of equipment. Submit one proof copy and one reproducible copy with 3.2.2 integrally related art t o the SUPERVISOR not later than 30 days after receipt of the reviewed final reproducible copy (FRC). 4. : NOTES line at: - 2.1 is available and can be read on 4.1 nmci https://nsdsa. .navy.mil 1 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 41 FY - 1 9

347 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 42 - ITEM NO: 18 16 20 DATE: NOV II CATEGORY: 1. : SCOPE ) for Updating 1.1 Title: Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR ; Technical Manual accomplish REFERENCES : 2. 000174 2.1 NDMS - - 000, Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR); Technical Manual Revision Requirements 2.2 000, Technical Manual Contract Requirement (TMCR); NDMS - 000175 - Technical Manual Change Package Requirements 3. : REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Accomplish the requirements of 2.1 or 2.2 as appropriate. Deliver the data items listed in Paragraph 1.3 of 2.1 or 2.2 as 3.2 follows: Submit 3.2.1 3 review draft copies (RDC) to the SUPERVISOR for review within 10 days after receipt of equipment/ component. Submit one proof copy and one final reproducible copy (FRC) 3.2.2 with integrally related art to the SUPERVISOR not later than 30 days after receipt of the reviewed draft copy. NOTES 4. : line at: - 2.2 are available and can be read on 2.1 and 4.1 https://nsdsa. .navy.mil nmci 1 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 42 FY - 1 9

348 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 43 30 DATE: JUL 201 5 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : L 1.1 Title: Engineering Plant Pr oduction Completion Date (PCD), - ight Off Assessment (LOA) Support provide ; 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 Standard Items Total Ship Test Program Manual - TRQ - AD - S9095 010 2.2 , : REQUIREMENTS 3. 3.1 Complete all work in the e For . PCD ngineering spaces prior to availabilities in excess of 120 days (140 days for forward deployed CVNs), For availabilities 120 days PCD will be scheduled 14 days prior to the LOA. or less (140 days for forward deployed CVNs), PCD will be scheduled between 4 - 14 days prior to e eering plant light - off. PCD will not be less than 4 ngin days prior to e ngineering plant light - off regardless of whether a LOA is scheduled. For availabilities 120 days and less (140 days for forward by the TYCOM. deployed CVNs), the requirement for a LOA will be determined 3.1 .1 The term complete is defined to mean the accomplishment of all responsible contractor - that is possible i t , and certifica testing , on work without lighting off boilers, gas turbine engines, or main propulsion diesels Steam shall not be introduced into propulsion systems from (as applicable). any source until after a successful LOA. All work 3. 1 . 2 required to conduct e ngineering plant light - off n regardless of whether a LOA is scheduled shall be assigned to be completed - 60 and 009 - 009 using to 67 of 2.1. meet the Engineering Plant PCD Key Event All work is defined as any work planned for accomplishment during the Ship’s )orce other than maintenance availability by all organizations : Commercial Industrial Services including Alteration Installation Team (AIT), (CIS), and Fleet Maintenance Activity (FMA). 3.1 D key event can only be called The Engineering Plant PC met .3 after all required reports and OQE have been submitted to, reviewed and . In order to approved by the SUPERVISOR meet the PCD Key Event, the minimum equipment listed in Attachment A must be ready for start - up in its normal configuration, and ready for testing per applicable test requirements. The following work shall be completed to declare the met: PCD 009 of 1 1 1 ITEM NO: - 43 9 FY - 1

349 to the degree such that no workers are Complete work .3.1 3.1 required to occupy the affected spaces for any reason. The affected spaces are must enter to defined as those spaces or compartments in which workers accomplish work. where work is being This includes not only the spaces accomplished, but also adjacent spaces where fire watches or other workers mu st be present to complete work. he degree required for the completion of work T in associated spaces includes filling of lube oil, fuel oil, and feed water as tanks, of all bilge spaces to “Safe for :orNers” freeing cleaning and g conditions, final paint, decking, lagging or any other repair work which Spaces are required to be requires workers to be in the space to complete. operationally ready for al l syst ems listed in Attachment A and subsequent engineering plant operations includ completion of support ing sustained , systems test procedures or applicable portions thereof so that the equipment is operating within design parameters. Additionally, full, unimp eded access to all engineering spaces, escape trunks, access doors, scuttles, repair The is required without exception. lockers and firefighting equipment selected tests to be conducted prior to PCD shall be identified in the ) LMA ( Lead Maintenance Activity Integrated Test Schedule mana ged by the Chief 67 of 2.1. - Test Engineer as defined in 009 and installation of machinery, equipment, 3.1 2 . 3 . Repair blowers, piping systems, gages, thermometers, meters, operating instructions and warning plates, protec tive guards, flange shields, remote shutdown devices, strainer shields, valves and hand wheels, insulation and lagging, check valves, steam traps and orifices, regulators and reducing valves, remote operating gear and pull cables, valve reach rods, pipe ha ngers and braces, valve locking devices, valve position indicators, indicators, gage lines, label plates, relief valves and hand lifting levers, boiler safety valves and easing gear, boiler uptakes and stacks, fuel burner drip pans, boiler combustion monit oring system, boiler igniter system, automatic boiler control system, main feed pump control system, deck plates, sight glasses and guards, fuel strainers, soot blowers, boiler casings, firefighting systems and equipment, handrails, nd scuttles, ventilation systems, supply and exhaust ladders, access doors a battle vent screens, lighting systems (incandescent, fluorescent, and emergency lanterns), electric cables and runs, cable straps, cable packing, cable tags, ilient mounts, safety devices, alarm systems, ground straps, flex hoses, res stenciling, interior communication systems, access closures, tachometers, and resiliently - mounted pipe hangers. Calibration of gages, thermometers, tachometers, . 3 . 3 3.1 pyrometers, and meters. . 3 Cold setting of relief valves, governors for steam 3.1 4 . turbine, gas turbine or diesel engines (as applicable), over - speed trips, low suction trips, piping spring hangers, regulators and reducing valves, high temperature alarms and switches, high and low pressure control switc hes, low lube oil pressure alarms, ship service boiler water high and low level alarms, main boiler water high and low level alarms, and waste heat boiler water high and low level alarms. of 1 1 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 43 9 FY - 1

350 to the SUPERVISOR in 3.1 . Proposed e xceptions shall be submitted 4 1 Proposed exceptions shall include writing in accordance with 009 - 0 of 2.1 . that a methodic al plan for completion of work does not interrupt activities Ship’s )orce planned during LOA or activities during non - LOA hours planned by (see 4.5 for training evaluation by n In the event of incomplete work, a . ) and LMA must be performed to SUPERVISOR the ship’s Commanding 2fficer and determine if that work will impede uninterrupted preparations accomplishment of LOA. Exceptions must be a pproved by the SUPERVISOR and agreed to in Zriting by the Ship’s C ommanding O fficer . weeks 3.1 . 5 Hold a dedicated PCD progress meeting no later than 2 prior to PCD and get positive concurrence (by name) from all entities that all work tied to PCD is on schedule. involved in the availability Submit in writing to the SUPERVISOR a list of any work items with anticipated completion delays. These work items must be tracked daily thereafter and the until adequate status thereof discussed during daily production meetings date its or on to complete the work solutions are identified ginal i schedule ’ . s Force or on a new date as agreed upon by the In all Ship and SUPERVISOR nform the SUPERVISOR that work cases, do not wait for meetings to convene to i may PCD tied to Immediate not be completed and certified on time. notification is required. 3.1 . 6 discrepancies discovered during Correct c ontractor - responsible preliminary LOA inspections prior to the turnover of engineering spaces to Ship's Force. Reserve t he 2 - week period prior to LOA for Ship's Force in preparation . Do not allow c ontractor work s for LOA engineering spaces during this period unless approved by the S hip’s Commanding 2fficer and specifically authorized by the SUPERVISOR. 5 to ubmit , s . progress meeting required in 3.1 CD After the P 7 . 1 3. report on the SUPERVISOR, a daily status preliminary responsible - contractor LOA discrepancies. Additionally, notify the SUPERVISOR verbally, immediately upon determination of any discrepancies that cannot be corrected prior to the , the reason and expected completion in writing scheduled LOA and provide . 4 . 1 the process required in 3. in accordance with Propose exceptions date. Provide the services of a contractor quick response team during the 3.2 correct Government discrepancies. LOA to 3.2 Coordinate the correction of discrepancies as they are .1 discovered. 3.2 .2 Ensure that quick response team members have with them (or readily accessible), the tools of their trade for immediate use in the correction of discrepancies. 4. NOTES : Definitions. 4.1 4.1.1 Engineering Plant Production Completion Date (PCD): Key Event scheduled prior to propulsion plant hot operations to document that all 1 3 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 43 9 FY - 1

351 production work effecting the minimum equipment requi Off - rements for Light Assessment (LOA) is completed and certified up through Stage 2 testing per 2.2. Stage 2 testing is accomplished prior to operation of installed or relocated equipment, cabling, piping, ventilation, etc., to ensure that each ion has been accomplished in accordance with established plans and installat specifications. PCD includes all required reports and Objective Quality Evidence (OQE) have been submitted to, reviewed and approved by the SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR and Lead Maintenance . The Activity (LMA) are responsible for thorough and rigorous management of this Key Event and minimizing exceptions. In the event of incomplete work, an evaluation by the SUPERVISOR Ship’s Commanding 2fficer and TYCOM must be performed to determine if the i ncomplete work will impede uninterrupted preparations and and accomplishment of LOA. Exceptions must be approved by the SUPERVISOR agreed Zith in Zriting by the Ship’s Commanding 2fficer PCD is scheduled to d train for LOA, and to shift provide the crew sufficient time to prepare an from a maintenance environment to an operations environment. 2 4. The LOA is a comprehensive assessment of the ship in the key areas plant of: The level of knowledge and firefighting capability of engineering personnel; the adequacy of Engineering Department administrative programs and engineering procedures; the material readiness of the plant; and the state of cleanliness and preservation of main and auxiliary machinery engineering spaces. The LOA will Immediate Super or in C ommand i be accomplished by the or the Type Commander Staff. The ISIC), Afloat Training Group (ATG) ( Main mediately prior to and concluded im assessment will be conducted - light Systems Propulsion ually takes off. The material assessment portion us less than 12 hours. If restrictive discrepancies are identified, those discrepancies must be corrected prior to off. - Main Propulsion Systems light 4.3 The SUPERVISOR will establish an inspection team and accomplish a n in conjunction with Ship's Force 4 to 8 weeks preliminary LOA inspectio prior to the LOA to determine and record discrepancies which would impact LOA. uninterrupted completion of The pre - LOA will be about 4 days in duration and will result in the identification of discrepancies and . OA incomplete work considered necessary to support a successful L Each discrepancy noted in the inspection will be described in simple terms on a 4 - part, serialized form. The form will identify the general location of the discrepancy and the associat The fourth ed work Item number, if applicable. copy of the form, made of hard card with an attachment wire, will be hung by the SUPERVISOR'S inspection team in the immediate proximity of the discrepancy (on the deficient item itself, when practical). Upon completion will identify contractor - LOA the S UPERVISOR of the pre - responsible discrepancies to the contractor. Deficient items identified that are the responsibility of the Government will be screened for accomplishment by the rtion of this work that cannot be accomplished by the That po Ship's Force. Ship's Force will be considered for accomplishment by the contractor. LOA inspection that - Any time after completion of the pre .1 4.3 additional discrepancies are discovered, they will be similarly id entified and sc reened. 009 of 1 1 4 ITEM NO: - 43 9 FY - 1

352 to the It is never anticipated or expected that exceptions 4.4 are an acceptable practice and in no case should completion of work a trend. The process for handling indicates exceptions happen at a rate that luded in this NSI in the event unforeseen circumstances eptions is only inc exc prevent work from being accomplished on time. 4.5 An example of an acceptable plan for work completion is as follows: Unfinished work on piping in an engineering main space that yond PCD) of hot work, painting and lagging to days (be 2 requires complete. Work shall be planned for and accomplished during the hours of the day that the space isn’t occupied for activities related to /2A However, all tools, materials, hoses, lines, workers, and equipme nt must be cleared from the space and all interference removals reinstalled no later than one hour prior to commencement of the next LOA event taking through requirements place in that space. The space must pass safety walk - nd the SUPERVISOR. as determined by Ship’s )orce a 1 009 of 1 5 ITEM NO: - 43 FY 9 1 -

353 ATTACHMENT A CLASS SPECIFIC MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LISTS 1 n t CG DDG FF G L C S - e L C S - 2 pm i E qu HF V B2B/ 1 1 1 1 1 on o le - - - 1 of 1 - C&M C s CE T S 1 1 - - of 1 - of 1 r e P F s i ump 3 of 6 3 of 5 2 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 6 LT F 2 I: of 3; t a t i on s S C A C h a r g i n B g S 79 A F : 1 of 2 of 3 of 3 1 2 1 of 1 2 of 1 C B A A B P A 2 of 2 2 of 2 (F LT I) 2 of 2 - - S C S E B AC B A of 3 of 3 2 of 3 1 2 of 1 1 of 1 2 90%) ( 50 of 55 ( 90%) 36 of 33 90%) ( 50 of 55 33 9 ( 66 A B C 0%) of 76 S of 73 1 0 0 P of 3 2 of 4 2 of 3 2 of 3 1 of 2 2 Y u i nt e g r i t y Y es es Y es Y es Y es ll H F F F S t a t i on s A 1of 2 1 of 2 of 2 1 of 2 2 of 3 1 MMR g e S p r i n k l i n g MMR / A MR MMR / A MR MMR / A MR Bil / A MR MMR / A MR a e of 2, 2 h c r 100% e - - ist m - W t a a t i o nal r ope i n s pa c e m a 100% n M ain S p aces) 100% ( 100% - - o Hal C O 2 / Hal on /H F P fo r F ixed G M o du les G T E / G T 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% ain D r ai n a g e Ca p a b ili t y M Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes er t o d e w a t as a n i ed e f a e b ili (d t y th o r u si n g th at m ain s p ace l o c a l l y , ot e y , o r s p ace ’ s e du c a to r re m l t a m o r f ed ec onn c - ss o r c s p a ce d i r ec t l y a d j a ce n t ) S h a fts 2 of 2 2 of 2 1 of 1 2 of 2 2 of 4 1 of 2 per s ha f t 1 of 2 per s ha f t s h a f t 2 of 2 ng i n es E 1 of 2 per 2 of 4 u S S e r v P /W m p s ( A SW ) 2 of 3 3 of 5 1 of 2 3 of 5 2 of 3 per el s e i d of 2 1 of 2 1 P ump s v /O F S r e 1 of 2 per MMR 1 of 2 2 of 2 G T M MMR 1 of 2 e of 2 2 l e c t r i c L S e r v P ump s, p e r s h a f t ) B /O , A ( of 2 1 atta c h ed, and ) B , A ( of 2 1 c i r t c e l e 1 of 2 A , B ) and of 4 4 ( h and atta c ed s of 1 th r 1 t u o w n c and C oa s a nd atta t h e d D p u P d e h c atta bea ri ng pu m p m P C P P CR pump s e l ec / 2 of 2 1 2 of 1 - - of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 p F /O X f er P u m of 2 s 1 of 2 ter il 1 of 2 ( f F /O pu r i f ie r s epa of 2 s 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 ) rs ato r 1 of 2 3 of 7 CCS 2 of 2 4 of 4 CCS 3 of 3 CCS ECS at Consoles (CCS/RCO) 1 of 3 each MER 1 of 1 MER 2 of 2 CCS minimum of 2 (Fwd/Backfit) consoles 1 of 1 MER 4 of 7 TAC 4 4 of 7 RSCs (Fwd/Backfit) 009 6 of 1 43 - 1 ITEM NO: 19 - FY

354 N V N s v r s w i t h a u x & p r o p A L A s i n g l oop c t fun i on - 1 of 2 - - - L S P M Cs P M C - - 1 of 2 - - l I/O bo x e s A l - - Yes - - S / S F C S ( 1 00 % B E ll n o s e C u y ) t c i on fun ali t - - - - 1 of 1 2 of 4 with Generators 2 of 3 2 of 4 2 of 3 1 of 2 SACs 2 of 4 SFCs (400hz) 1 of 2 1 of 1 2 of 3 2 of 4 2 of 2 HPACs 1 of 2 (FLT 1) 1 of 2 - 1 of 2 - MPACs - 1 of 2 - - 1 of 2 LPACs 2 of 3 1 of 2 - 2 of 3 - HPU Fwd - - - - 1 of 1 HPU Aft - - - - 1 of 2 90) 2 of 4 (51 - A/C 1 of 2 2 of 3 2 of 5 (91 AF) 2 of 4 2 of 3 CHT sys operational Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Oily Waste sys operational (must be able to process or hold Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes oily waste onboard) Waste Heat Boilers (Pre - MOD) - - 1 of 3 - - Hot water tanks/heaters 1 of 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 1 1 of 2 Evap/RO units 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 2 of 3 Splitter Gear L/O scavenging 1 of 2 per gear pumps - - - - Auxiliary Propulsion Unit - 1 of 2 - - - 2 of 4 Steering Units or Steerable 1 of 2 per rudder 2 of 2 1 of 2 per rudder 2 of 2 waterjets with Waterjets 1 of 2 electric and 1 attached hydraulic/lubr icating oil pumps per shaft Rudder 1 of 2 1 of 2 - 1 of 2 2 0 of Canman Waterjet Control System - - 1 of 1 - - Surface radars 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 Gyro 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 Gyro Repeaters (Helm, Bridge 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each Centerline, Aft Steering) Fathometer 1 1 1 1 1 Military GPS, NAVSSI, or plug in 1 1 1 1 1 udd er i nd i c a to r s ( H el m , A f t R ) ee t S r i ng 2 2 of 3 2 of 3 of 3 - - - - Dis C) l a y ( B r i dg e, C I Ra d p ar h 1 ea c h 1 ea c h c 1 ea I e r n al nt C om m s es es Y es Y es Y Y es Y I o r S oun d CS P o w e r ed V ( hon es) P 7 of 1 1 43 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

355 es M OL R E G S Y es Y es Y C Y es Y es eet - - - (fo r E CDI S - N E h i p s) CD I S - s N es Y es Y m M a n a g e a e n t o y g e V y m /B M E - V M S / R P A S A s t e 2 of 3 - of 2 1 - - S h ip C ont r o l C on s o les I Y Y es Y es Y es ( es B S) 4 of 5 - - - i g a t i o n Da t a C on v U n it /NDC of 1 1 Na v 1 of 1 c r o h n A s s la nd i W 1 1 of 1 1 of 1 1 of 1 1 of 1 of 2 n c h o s 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 1 1 of 1 A 1 of 1 r 2 of 3 s r Ree e f of 2 of 2 1 of 2 1 1 of 2 1 r s f r ee z e h i l 1 of 2 l c bo x es o t W t r P ump s ( a d a s s o cia t ed P n n g pu mp if a pp l i ca b l e) p r i m i of 2 of 2 1 of 2 1 1 of 2 1 1 of 2 of 2 of 2 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 of 2 1 H o t W a t er Ci r c P u m p s 1 8 of 1 1 43 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

356 - H A L HD - 1 L HD - 8 L P D L 4 L P D - 17 L SD M CM PC L CC E pm e i n t qu 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HF V B2B/ of 5 3 F 6 of 12 i 8 of 16 r 3 of 5 e 5 P ump s of 10 of 4 2 6 of 3 2 of 3 2 of 12 48) - 41 ( 4 of 7 49 ( - 52) A B C S - of 3 of 3 2 1 3 of 5 3 of 5 - 3 of 5 3 of 5 2 of 3 g n i g r a h C s on i t a t S of 3 of 3 1 - - of 2 2 of 3 2 of 3 2 of 3 2 - 2 A B A A B C S P of 3 of 3 1 of 1 3 of 6 3 of 6 3 of 6 2 1 2 of 3 2 of 3 1 of 1 B S AC B E A C S C B A 115 of144 308 222 of278 of 246 228 of 285 of 10 65 of 72 9 of 24 153 of 191 21 105 of 116 ( 80%) ( 90%) ( 90%) ( 80%) ( 90%) 90%) 80%) ( 80%) ( ( 80 % ) ( of 5 3 2 of 3 3 of 5 2 of 3 2 of 4 2 of 4 2 of 4 1 of 2 1 of 1 0 1 P 0 es Y es Y es Y es Y Y es Y es Y es Y es Y es ll t i r g e nt i y u H i n ne i l - edu c to rs , 3 of 6 3 of 6 of 2 3 of 6 2 of 4 of 2 4 of 7 2 of 4 1 1 s a t S F F F A on i t l ge b i i n r li ng p s k y f i r e ent r s i tat o ns MMR/ MMR/ Bil g e MMR/ MR A A MMR/ MR as MMR/ , s e Y A A MR/ MR/ Y es Y es MMR b a c li p ap S p MR A g r le i n i l k n 1 & 2 1 & 2 i e s e l s l e e D i D m Roo s m Roo s MMR/ e r m ist W a t s e l e i D - - - of 2 - - - 2 - n c l o s u r e/ E 1 & 2 s D e l e i m s Roo n ( M ain Hal o 100% 100% 100% - 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% S a c p es) F ixed E 1 & 2 G T - - - - - - - 100% /H r P F fo on 2/Hal O C e E n c l o s u r / les odu M G T G T G H ( P ) F Main Drainage Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (defined Capability as the ability to er a main dewat space locally, or using that space’s educator remotely, connected - or cross from a directly adjacent space) MOB - E 1 of 1 2 of 2 2 of 2 2 of 4 2 of 2 2 of 2 2 of 2 2 of 2 2 of 2 Shafts Support 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 1 per shaft 2 of 2 per shaft 2 of 2 2 of 2 per shaft 2 shafts 2 of 2 Engines 1 of 2 Aux - - 2 of 2 2 of 2 - 2 of 2 (if applic) 2 of 2 - Boilers 009 9 of 1 43 - 1 ITEM NO: 19 FY -

357 DFT - 2 2 of 2 - - 2 - - 1 of 1 of 2 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 2 of 2 - - - - 4 of 4 - FDB per MMR MFP/Emerg FP - 2 of 3 - - 2 of 3 - 2 of 3 2 of 3 - Per MMR ME Gland Exhaust - - 2 of 2 - - 2 of 2 1 of 1 2 of 2 - Fans per MMR 1 of 2 of 2 1 of 2 2 - - - - 3 of 3 - MFBP per MMR Main Condensate 2 of 2 1 of 2 - 1 of 2 - - - 1 of 2 - Pumps per MMR Main Condenser - 1 of 1 1 of 1 - - 1 of 1 - 1 of 1 - Sea Water Circulating Pumps per MMR - - - - 2 of 4 - - - - MPDE L/O Pumps - - - - 3 of 6 2 of 4 1 of 2 - 2 of 2 S/W Service Pumps (ASW) 2 of 3; 2 of 3; 2 of 3; 2 of 3; 2 of 3; 1 of 1 2 of 3; - 2 of 2; A or B, L/O Service Pumps ALOP, electric ALOP, ALOP, ALOP or ALOP, ALOP, and per MMR A or B A or B STBY A or B A or B A or B coastdown Gearbox Trailing - - - - - - - 2 of 4 1 of 2 Pump CRP/CPP - - - 2 of 2 - 2 of 2 - 2 of 2 2 of 4 s elec pump FOT 1 P er f /O X F of 4 1 2 1 2 of 2 1 of 2 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 or FO P of 2 1 s ump P P 1 FO P FOT or - - - of 2 - 1 of 2 - 1 1 of 2 iers ri pu /O F f f (i of 4 Lo c al 2 in Lo c al of 5 3 al c Lo i n of 4 2 r l ro Cont l CCS Ct ro Cont l app l ) - - - CCS s on les C o o n M u l t i - Fun c t i - - - - - - - - of 7 4 W o rk S t a t i o n F (M WS) em t g Sys n E Yes - - - - es Y - - - i ’s WAN C ont r o p l /S h appl) f (i ESC/SWAN) ( - of 2 2 2 of 4 3 of 5 of 3 2 2 of 4 3 of 5 2 of 4 4 of 6 rs G era n e to cy erge m E n of 2 of 2 1 of 2 1 1 of 2 - - - 1 - - rs to era n e G - 1 of 1 1 of 1 - 1 of 1 - 1 of 1 - - wd EPCP F - 1 of 1 - - - - - - - Aft EPCP of 2 2 1 of 2 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 5 2 of 3 1 of 2 1 of 5 3 ) hz ( Cs F S 400 2 of 3 1 of 2 of 2 1 - - 1 of 2 - - of 2 1 HPACs - - - - - 1 of 2 - 1 of 2 - MPAC of 4 3 of 5 3 of 5 2 - 2 2 of 3 2 of 3 - of 2 of 5 3 L PACs or of 2 2 or of 4 2 3 of 4 4 of 7 of 6 3 of 6 of 5/6 3 1 of 2 of 6 2 2 of 4 4 of 7 4 A/C CHT sys Y es es es Y Y Y es Y es Y Y es es - es Y i on al op era t t ily Was O e sys Y es Y es es Y es es Y Y es Y es es Y Y es Y t i on op b st (mu al era e t le b a r o r o cess o p ily was o ld ho te 009 43 - ITEM NO: 1 1 of 10 FY 19 -

358 onbo ) ar d of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 2 of 3 1 of 2 1 2 of 4 ts i un /RO p Eva N MOB - of 2 1 1 of 2 ts i n g U n eeri t S 1 udder per r of 2 2 per r udder 2 of 2 of 2 2 of 2 of 1 2 of 2 2 per of 2 1 o le r S t eera b udder r Wa t t s erje of 2 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 of 2 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 of 2 1 er udd R 1 of 2 1 1 1 1 1 of 2 1 1 of 1 1 ars d ace ra f r u S of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 1 1 1 of 1 1 of 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 yro G t ea p yro Re G ers Af ge, Brid h c h 1 ea c h c 1 ea c h ea ea 1 h 1 1 ea c h c 1 ea h t 1 ea c h ea 1 c e Hel m , Bri ( dg tee ri ng S erline, A nt Ce ft ng S t eeri ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 er t e thom a F G ary t Mili PS, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 g in u p r o NAVSSI, l to rs ica nd er i udd R ea ea 1 h c ea 1 1 h c ea 1 1 ea c h 1 ea c h h c h c ea h 1 ea c h c 1 ea 1 c h t S Helm, A ( t r g ) f lay p d Ra ar Dis ea c - 1 ea c h ea 1 1 ea c h h - 1 ea c h c 1 1 h h 1 ea c dg Bri ( e, CIC) al n nt I er es Y es es Y es Y Y es Y es Y es es Y Y s Y e IVCS o ( omm r s C wered S oun d P o P hon es) Meet Y es Y Y es es Y es Y es Y es Y es es Y es Y S G RE OL C (fo r N - ECDIS - 1 - 1 1 1 1 - - s) i h N s - ECDIS p o h r ont ip C l S es es es Y es Y Y es Y Y es Y es es Y Y es Y C on s o les S MOB - or h Anc 1 1 of 2 1 of 1 1 of 2 of 2 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 of 2 1 of 1 of 2 1 lass nd Wi of 2 1 of 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 1 of 2 ors h Anc NCO 1 of 2 of 1 1 1 of 3 1 of 3 of 2 1 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 of 3 ers f Ree of 4 2 of 2 1 of 2 1 2 of 4 2 of 4 of 2 1 1 of 2 2 of 4 of 4 2 s ump t t W o P r P t W tr o P - - - - - of 2 1 of 2 1 of 2 1 - er P t s oo ump B s 11 of 1 1 43 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 19

359 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 45 01 DATE: 7 OCT 201 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Tapered Plug Valve; repair 2. REFERENCES : - 010/CH 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - 2.1 S9086 - RJ - STM and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments 3. : REQUIREMENTS . 3.1 Matchmark each valve part (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" Disassemble, clean 3.2 internal and exter each nal surfa ce free of foreign matter (including paint), and inspect part for defects. each 3.3 Repair valve as follows: Machine, grind, or lap and spot - in plug to bore to obtain an 3.3.1 80 percent minimum surface contact, evenly distributed over 100 pe rcent of the area. (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" 3.3.1.1 Inspect contact using blueing method. Vertical misalignment of ports in the plug valve and 3.3.1.2 body with the plug fully seated shall not be of a degree that will restrict flow. 3.3.2 Chase and tap exposed threaded areas. 3.3.3 Dress and true gasket mating surfaces. packing, Assemble each valve installing new each gasket and each 3.4 r instruction. fastener in accordance with manufacturer's specification o - V - Lubricate each MIL 3.4.1 24509 valve with grease conforming to - G - AMS - SAE 6032. 1 of 3 45 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

360 3.5 Hydrostatically test valve as follows: 3.5.1 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following capabilities: Manual overpressure protection release valve. 3.5.1.1 actuated and resetting relief valve with a set - Self 3.5.1.2 point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) " GAGE CHECK" 3.5.1.3 Master and backup test gages with gage range and - 6 - Table 504 graduation shown on The backup gage shall be cross . 1 of 2.1 - checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. 3.5.1.4 Protection equipment shall be accessible and test gages shall be located where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and inspector. "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (I) 3.5.2 Test for seat tightness with valve in closed position with opposite side open for inspection. 3.5.2.1 Plug shall be seated by hand force. 3.5.2.2 Test shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes kage or, in the event of visible leakage, until if there is no evidence of lea accurate determination of leakage can be made. 3.5.2.3 metal to - Maximum allowable leakage for a metal - seated valve: 10 cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe siz e; 10 cc maximum per ho ur for alve sizes less than 1 - 1/2 inches . v 3.5.2.4 Allowable leakage for soft seated plug: None. (I) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" Test plug valve of duplex strainer to each strainer chamber 3.5.3 with unpressurized side top cover removed (2 tests per strainer). Allowable leakage: With the drain valve closed the non - pressurized side shall not fill within one hour. NOTES 4. : 2 of 3 45 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

361 4.1 Test pressures of 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 will be specified in Work Item. Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4.2 4.3 Test medium will be specified in Work Item. 3 of 3 45 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

362 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 46 7 01 OCT 201 DATE: CATEGORY: II : 1. SCOPE 1.1 Title: Butterfly Valve, Synthetic and Metal Seated; repair 2. REFERENCES : 010/CH STM - 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - 2.1 S9086 - RJ - and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments 3. : REQUIREMENTS each valve part Matchmark 3.1 . (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" Disassemble, clean each internal and external surface free of 3.2 each part for defects. foreign matter (including paint), and inspect 3.3 Repair valve as follows: 3.3.1 Polish stem to remove raised edges and foreign matter. 3.3.2 Chase and tap exposed threaded areas. 3.3.3 in metal metal seat to - to - - Machine, grind, or lap and spot disc to obtain a leakage rate at or below that allowed in 3.5.5. 3.3.4 Polish seating surface of synthetic seated valve to remove high spots, nicks, and burrs. Assemble valve installing new 3.4 each bushing, each O - Ring, each seat assembly each washer each , pin , and each V - Ring , each valve liner, each , in accordance with manufacturer's specifications or instructions. fastener ws: Hydrostatically test valve as follo 3.5 3.5.1 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following capabilities: Manual overpressure protection release valve. 3.5.1.1 1 of 3 46 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

363 Self - actuated and resetting relief valve with a set 3.5.1.2 or 10 percent above point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" 3.5.1.3 Master and backup test gages with gage range and in accordance with Table 504 - 6 - 1 of 2.1 . The backup gage shall be graduation cross - checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. Protection equipment shall be accessible and test 3.5.1.4 gages shall be located where clearly visible and re adable to pump operator and inspector. (I) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" 3.5.2 Test for seat tightness alternately on each side of the disc with opposite side open for inspection. 3.5.3 Disc shall be seated by hand force. minimum of 3 minutes if there Test shall be continued for a 3.5.4 is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. : metal seated valves - to - Leakage rate of metal 3.5.5 conforming to MIL 3.5.5.1 Valves - V - 22133, Type II shall not exceed the following criteria: Valve size Leakage rate Valve size Leakage rate gal/min inches gal/min inches 2 l.5 10 35 2 - 1/2 2.25 12 50 3 3.25 14 60 4 6 16 80 5 9.5 18 100 6 14 20 140 8 25 24 200 alves conforming to MIL V 2 . 3.5.5 24624 shall have a - V - maximum seat leakage rate of 10 cubic centimeters per inch of nominal pipe size per hour. Allowable leakage for synthetic seated valve: None. 3.5.6 2 of 3 46 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

364 NOTES : 4. The test pressure of 3.5.2 will be specified in Work Item. 4.1 4.2 Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. Test medium will be specified in Work Item. 4.3 3 of 3 46 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

365 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - 1 9 FY ITEM NO: 009 - 47 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: II : 1. SCOPE 1.1 Title: Gate Valve; repair 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 S9086 - CJ - STM - 010/CH - 075 , Fasteners 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices 2. 2 S9253 AD - MMM - - Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information (Non - - STM - RJ 2. 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - - 010/CH S9086 3 and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments 2. 4 S9086 - RK - STM - 010/CH - 505, Piping Systems 3. REQUIREMENTS : . 3.1 Matchmark each valve part (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" Disassemble, clean internal and external surfaces free of foreign 3.2 for defects. matter (inclu ding paint), and inspect each part 3.2.1 The removal of body - bound studs only to determine the condition of threads is not required. | (V) “TORQUE TEST” (I) or (See 4. 3 ) - 3.2.2 Torque test each body bound stud in accordance with Section 075 - 8.6.3.2(d) of 2.1. Repair valve as follows: 3.3 inch total indicator reading. 0.002 Straighten stem to within 3.3.1 - Square finish in way of packing surface and - Mean - Polish stem to a 32 Root remove raised edges and foreign matter. 3.3.2 . each exposed threaded area Chase and tap 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 47 FY - 1 9

366 3.3.3 Dress and true each gasket mating surface . 3.3.4 Machine, grind, or lap and spot - in gate to seats (including backseat) to obtain a 360 degree continuous contact. - (I) or (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" (See 4. 3 ) 3.3.4.1 Inspect contact using blueing method. 3.3.4.2 Transfer line shall not exceed 3/ - inch in width 16 and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of the gate seating surface. (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS AND CLEANLINESS " each 3.4 Assemble each valve installing new , each gasket and packing specifications. e manufacturer's in accordance with th fastener Pack feedwater, condensate, and steam valves with valve stem 3.4.1 - 24503/24583 combination in accordance with - P packing conforming to MIL Chapter 6 of 2. 2 . 3.4.2 er than feedwater, condensate, or Pack valves of systems oth steam with valve stem packing conforming to MIL 24396, Type B. - P - 3.5 Hydrostatically test valve as follows: 3.5.1 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following capabilities: 3.5.1.1 Manual overpressure prote ction release valve. Self 3.5.1.2 actuated and resetting relief valve with a set - point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" 3.5.1.3 Master and backup test gage s with gage range and The backup gage shall be - 6 1 of 2. 3 . graduation - in accordance with Table 504 checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test - cross pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track n 2 percent of each other. withi 3.5.1.4 Protection equipment shall be accessible and test gages shall be located where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and inspector. (V)(G) ) or (I)(G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. 4 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 47 FY - 1 9

367 tightness alternately on each side of gate for 3.5.2 Test for seat double seated valves, and on outboard side only on single - seated valves, with the opposite side open for inspection. Do not exceed the handwheel closing force specified 3.5.2.1 . 4 2 of 2. Table 505 in - 11 - 3.5.2.2 Test shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes if there is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: nch of nominal pipe size 10 cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per i ; 10 cc 1/2 inches. - maximum per hour for valve sizes less than 1 4. : NOTES The test pressures of 3.5.2 will be specified in Work Item. 4.1 4.2 Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the 4. 3 valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V). 4. 4 The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I)(G) if the valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, th e paragraph is considered a (V)(G). 4.5 Test medium will be specified in Work Item. 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 47 FY - 1 9

368 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 48 DATE: 01 OCT 2017 CATEGORY: II : 1. SCOPE 1.1 Ti tle: Pressure Seal Bonnet Valve Shop Repair; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : STM 2.1 S9086 - CJ - - 010/CH - 075 , Fasteners 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing - GIB - - AS 2. 2 T9074 Methods - STD MIL 3 2. - 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria 4 803 - 6074287, Repair Guide, Pressure Seal Valves 2. 2. 5 803 - 5001021, Pressure Seal Rings Standard and Oversize Valve Pressure Class 600 - 1500 - 2. 6 S9253 - AD MMM - 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices (Non - Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information 2. - 010/CH - STM - - S9086 RJ 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical 7 and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments STM 505, Piping Systems - - 2. 8 S9086 - RK - 010/CH 3. REQUIREMENTS : . Matchmark each valve part 3.1 (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" each internal and external surface free of Disassemble, clean 3.2 part for defects. each foreign matter (including paint), and inspect - bound studs only to determine the 3.2.1 The removal of body condition of threads is not required. | (I) ) or (V) “TORQUE TEST” (See 4.3 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 48 FY - 1 9

369 Torque test each body - bound stud in accordance with Section 3.2.2 - 8.6.3.2(d) of 2.1. 075 (I) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECT" Accomplish liquid penetrant inspection of seats (including 3.2. 3 back seat), discs, or gate and body inlay area in accordance with 2. 2 . .1 Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with 3.2. 3 Paragraph 7 of 2. , except hairline cracks in ha rd - faced areas of seats and 3 discs or gate are acceptable provided the valve does not show evidence of leakage. 3.3 Repair valve as follows: - 3.3.1 Straighten stem to within 0.002 inch total indicator reading. Polish stem to a 32 Root - Mean - Square (RMS) finish in way of packing surface and remove raised edges and foreign matter. each Chase and tap 3.3.2 exposed threaded area. each Dress and true 3.3.3 gasket mating surface. inlay area and ng surfaces of Inspect and repair seali 3.3.4 each bonnet as follows: ) (See 4. 3 (V) "VISUAL INSPECT" (I) or Inspect valve body to verify that stainless steel 3.3.4.1 inlay is free of steam cuts and cracks and diameter of inlay area is round to within 0.003 inch and free of non design taper. Measure diameter at top and - bottom of inlay area in increments of 45 degrees, on each circle. round, non - For the inlay, correct out design - of 3.3.4.2 - tapered condition and provide 32 RMS finish. Finished inlay diameter shall provide 0.002 to 0.005 inch clearance on the standard size diameter for seal rings described by 2. 4 . Machine valve bonnet tapered area for concentricity 3.3.4.3 and design angle to within 0.002 inch total indicator reading and 32 RMS finish. Machine, grind, or lap and spot .3.5 - in discs or gate to seats 3 - (including back seat) to obtain a 360 degree continuous contact. (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" (I) or (See 4. 3 ) Inspect contact using blueing method. 3.3.5.1 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 48 FY - 1 9

370 Tran 3.3.5.2 sfer line for gate valve shall not exceed 3/16 inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of the gate seating surface. 3.3.5.3 Transfer line for globe valve shall not exceed 1/16 inch in width. " CLEANLINESS AND (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS 3.4 Assemble each valve installing n each ew fas tener for those removed in 3.2 in accordance with manufacturer’s specification or instruction . 3.4.1 , using 2. Install new seal ring in accordance with 2. 4 5 for guidance. 3.4.1.1 The SUPERVISOR must approve fitting new seal ring to inlay bores above first oversize. Attach a metal identification tag to the valve 3.4.1.2 body bonnet indicating the size of seal ring installed, straight or tapered neck, name of installing activity, and date of installation. - 3.4.2 Install new valve stem packing conforming to MIL - P 24503/24583 combination in accordance with Chapter 6 of 2. 6 . 3.5 Hydrostatically test va lve as follows: Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following 3.5.1 capabilities: Manual overpressure protection release valve. 3.5.1.1 - 3.5.1.2 Self actuated and resetting relief valve with a set point no greater than 100 PSIG above the te st pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" Master and backup test gages with gage range and 3.5.1.3 - 6 - in accordance with Table 504 graduation . The backup gage shall be 1 of 2. 7 hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test checked to the master - cross pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. Protection equipment shall be accessible and test 3.5.1.4 gages shall be located where clearly vi sible and readable to pump operator and inspector. 4 (V)(G) or (I)(G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. ) 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 48 FY - 1 9

371 3.5.2 Test for seat tightness alternately on each side of gate for double seated valves, and on outboard side only on single seated valves, with the opposite side open for inspection. 3.5.2.1 Do not exceed handwheel closing force specified in . Table 505 - 11 - 2 of 2. 8 3.5.2.2 m of 3 minutes Test shall be continued for a minimu if there is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: 10 cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe size; 10 cc maximum per ho ur for valve sizes less than 1 - 1/2 inches. or (I)(G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. 4 ) (V)(G) 3.5.3 Test globe valve in the direction tending to open valve. Do not exceed the handwheel closing force specified 3.5.3.1 11 - Table 505 in . 8 2 of 2. - 3.5.3.2 Test shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes if there is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: 10 cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe size ; 10 cc maximum per hour for valve sizes less than 1 - 1/2 inches. : 4. NOTES 4.1 The test pressures of 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 will be specified in Work Item. 4.2 Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4. The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the 3 valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V). The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I)(G) if the 4. 4 val ve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V)(G). 4. 5 Reference 2. provides guidance with respect to applicable APLs and 5 other information not in direct conflict with the material and hardness . 4 specified in 2. requirements for seal rings 4.6 Test medium will be specified in Work Item. 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 48 FY - 1 9

372 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 49 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Pressure Seal Bonnet Valve In - line R epair ; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : - 075, Fasteners - 2.1 S9086 - CJ - STM 010/CH T9074 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing - GIB - AS - 2 2. Methods STD 3 MIL 2. - 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria - 2. 4 803 - 6074287, Repair Guide, Pressure Seal Valves - 2. 5 803 5001021, Pressure Seal Rings Standard and Oversize Val ve Pressure Class 600 - 1500 - 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices - MMM - AD S9253 6 2. - Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information (Non 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 . each valve part Matchmark (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECT S" 3.2 Disassemble, clean free of foreign matter (including paint), and part for defects. each inspect bound studs only to determine the 3.2.1 The removal of body - condition of threads is not required. | (I) ) or (V) “TORQUE TEST” (See 4.3 - 3.2.2 bound stud in accordance with Section Torque test each body 075 - 8.6.3.2(d) of 2.1. (I) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECT" 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 49 FY - 1 9

373 3.2. 3 Accomplish liquid penetrant inspection of seats (including 2 . back seat), discs or gate, and body inlay area in accordance with 2. 3.2. 3 .1 Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with Paragraph 7 of 2. 3 , except hairline cracks in hard - faced seats and discs or gate are acceptable provided the valve does not show evidence of leakage. 3.3 Repair valve as follows: 3.3.1 Straighten stem to within 0.002 - inch total indicator reading. Square (RMS) finish in way of packing surface Polish stem to a 32 Root - Mean - and remove raised edges and foreign matter. 3.3.2 Chase and tap each exposed threaded area. 3.3.3 Inspect and repair sealing surfaces of each inlay area and bonnet as follows: (I) or (V) "VISUAL INSPECT" (See 4.3) Inspect valve body to verify that stainless steel 3.3.3.1 inlay is free of steam cuts and cracks and that diameter of inlay area is on - design taper. Measure diameter at round to within 0.003 inch and free of n top and bottom of inlay a rea in increments of 45 degrees, on each circle. design 3.3.3.2 For the inlay, correct out - of - round, non - tapered condition and provide 32 RMS finish. Finished inlay diameter shall inch clearance not exceed oversize number one diameter, plus 0.002 to 0.005 - . 4 described by 2. 3.3.3.3 Machine valve bonnet tapered area for concentricity and design angle to within 0.002 - inch total indicator reading and 32 RMS finish. Machine, grind, or lap and spot in discs or gate to seats 3.3.4 - degree continuous contact. (including back seat) to obtain a 360 - (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" (See 4.3) (I) or 3.3.4.1 Inspect contact using blueing method. - e valve shall not exceed 3/16 Transfer line for gat 3.3.4.2 inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of the gate seating surface. Transfer line for globe valve shall not exceed 1/16 3.3.4.3 - inch in width. (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS " AND CLEANLINESS 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 49 FY - 1 9

374 valve, for those removed 3.4 Assemble each fastener installing new each in accordance with manufacturer's specification or instruction . in 3.2 , using 2. 4 Install new seal ring in accordance with 2. 3.4.1 for 5 guidance. The SUPERVISOR must approve new seal rings to inlay 3.4.1.1 bores above first oversize. 3.4.1.2 Attach a metal identification tag to the valve bonnet indicating the size of seal ring installed, straight or tapered body neck, name of installing activity, and date of installation. - Install new valve stem packing conforming to MIL 3.4.2 - P 24503/24583 combination in accordance with Chapter 6 of 2. 6 . : NOTES 4. 4.1 Operational test of the valve will be specified in Work Item. Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4.2 The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the 3 4. onsidered a valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is c (V). 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 49 FY - 1 9

375 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 50 201 7 DATE: 01 OCT CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Horizontal Swing Check Valve; repair 2. REFERENCES : 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - 010/CH 2.1 S9086 - RJ - STM - and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments 3. : REQUIREMENTS Matchmark 3.1 each valve part . (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" Disassemble, clean each internal and external surface free of 3.2 each part for defects. foreign matter (including paint), and inspect 3.3 Repair valve as follows: 3.3.1 Chase and tap each exposed threaded area. 3.3.2 Dress and true each gasket mating surface. 3.3. Machin in disc to seat to obtain - e, grind, or lap and spot 3 degree continuous contact. - 360 (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" 3.3. 3 .1 Inspect contact using blueing method. 3.3. 3 .2 Transfer line for swing check valve shall not exceed 1/16 - inch in width. , each each bushing 3.4 Assemble each valve installing new each gasket, hinge pi each disc retaining nut, plug in accordance with each n, and o r instruction . manufacturer's specifications Hydrostatically test valve as follows: 3.5 1 of 2 50 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

376 3.5.1 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following capabilities: 3.5.1.1 Manual overpressure protection release valve. Self 3.5.1.2 actuated and resetting relief valve with a set - point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" 3.5.1.3 Master and backup test gages with gage range and graduation 1 of 2.1. - 6 - in accordance with Table 504 The backup gage shall be - cross checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum t est pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. 3.5.1.4 Protection equipment shall be accessible and test gages shall be located where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and i nspector. (I) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" 3.5.2 Test for seat tightness in the direction tending to close the valve (back pressure) for a minimum of 5 minutes. Allowable leakage as follows: LEAKAGE RATE VALVE SIZE (NOM) Up to 2 inches inclusive 25 cc/hr./ in. dia. 50 cc/hr./in. dia. 10 inches inclusive 2 - 1/2 inches - Over 10 inches 100 cc/hr./in. dia. The back pressure applied shall be in accordance with the following: VALVE PRESSURE RATING TEST BACK PRESSURE 50 PSIG 150 PSIG and Below IG 100 PSIG Over 150 PS : NOTES 4. 4.1 Test medium will be specified in Work Item . 2 of 2 50 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

377 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - 1 9 FY ITEM NO: 009 - 51 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Globe, Globe Angle, and Globe Stop Check Title: 1.1 Valve; repair 2. REFERENCES : STM 2.1 S9086 - CJ - - 010/CH - 075 , Fasteners 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices 2. 2 S9253 - AD - MMM - (Non - Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information STM - RJ - S9086 Other Mechanical 504, Pressure, Temperature and - 010/CH - 2. 3 and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments - 4 S9086 - 2. STM - 010/CH - 505, Piping Systems RK 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Matchmark each valve part. (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" internal and external surface free of 3.2 Disassemble, clean each foreign matter (including paint), and inspect part for defects. each 3.2.1 The removal of body - bound studs only to determine the condition of threads is not required. | (I) or (V) “TORQUE TEST” (See 4.3 ) 3.2.2 Torque test each body - bound stud in accordance with Section 075 - 8.6.3.2(d) of 2.1. Repair valve as follows: 3.3 within 0.002 - inch total indicator reading. Straighten stem to 3.3.1 Square finish in way of packing surface and - Mean - Polish stem to a 32 Root remove raised edges and foreign matter. exposed threaded area. each Chase and tap 3.3.2 1 o f 3 51 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

378 Dress and true each 3.3.3 ace. gasket mating surf Machine, grind, or lap and spot 3.3.4 - in disc to seat to obtain a 360 - degree continuous contact. (I) or (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" (See 4. 3 ) 3.3.4.1 Inspect contact using blueing method (soft seated valves excluded). 3.3.4.2 Transfer line (ha rd seated valves) shall not exceed 1/16 - inch in width. (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS AND CLEANLINESS " and each fastener for 3.4 Assemble each valve installing each new gasket or h manufacturer's specification in accordance wit those removed in 3.2 . instruction 3.4.1 Pack feedwater, condensate, and steam valves with valve stem packing conforming to MIL - P - 24503/24583 combination in accordance with 2 Chapter 6 of 2. . k valves of systems other than feedwater, condensate, or 3.4.2 Pac - steam with valve packing conforming to MIL 24396, Type B. - P 3.5 Hydrostatically test valve as follows: Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following 3.5.1 capabilities: 3.5.1.1 overpressure protection release valve. Manual actuated and resetting relief valve with a set - Self 3.5.1.2 point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" d backup test gages with gage range and Master an 3.5.1.3 . - 6 - The backup gage shall be graduation 1 of 2. 3 in accordance with Table 504 checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test cross - shall track pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages within 2 percent of each other. 3.5.1.4 Protection equipment shall be accessible and test gages shall be located where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and inspector. ) 4 (V)(G) or (I)(G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. 2 o f 3 51 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

379 3.5.2 Test for seat tightness in the direction tending to open valve. Do not exceed the handwheel closing force specified 3.5.2.1 2 of 2. - 11 - . 4 in Table 505 3.5.2.2 Test shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes if there is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: 10 cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe size ; 10 cc maximum per hour for valve sizes less than 1 - 1/2 inches. ( (I) ) 4 (V)(G) or G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. 3.5.3 Back pressure test globe stop check valve with stem in the open position. Allowable leakage as follows: VALVE SIZE (NOM) LEAKAGE RATE 25 cc/hr./in. dia. Up to 2 inches inclusive - 1/2 inches 2 - 10 inches inclusive 50 cc/hr./in. dia. 100 cc/hr./in. dia. Over 10 inches The back pressure applied shall be in accordance with the following: TEST BACK PRESSURE VALVE PRESSURE RATING 150 PSIG and below 50 PSIG 100 PSIG Over 150 PSIG 4. NOTES : test pressures of 3.5.2 will be specified in Work Item. The 4.1 4.2 Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4. 3 The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the is considered a valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph (V). The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I)(G) if the 4. 4 valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V)(G). 4.5 Test medium will be specified in Work Item. 3 o f 3 51 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

380 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 52 7 201 01 DATE: OCT CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Relief Valve; repair 2. REFERENCES : - S9086 RJ - ST M - 010/CH - 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical 2.1 nd Electromechanical Measuring Instruments a 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Matchmark each valve part. (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" 3.2 internal and external surface free of each Disassemble, clean foreign matter (including paint), and in each parts for defect. spect Repair valve as follows: 3.3 inch total indicator reading. - Straighten stem to within 0.002 3.3.1 Mean Polish stem to a 32 Root Square finish and remove raised edges and - - foreign matter. in metallic disc to seat to 3.3.2 pot - Machine, grind, or lap and s obtain a 360 degree continuous contact. - (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" 3.3.2.1 Inspect contact using blueing method. Transfer line shall not exceed 1/16 - inch in width. 3.3.3 Dress and true each gasket ma ting surface. 3.3.4 Chase and tap each exposed threaded area. each , soft seat each , packing, Assemble valve installing new gasket 3.4 in accordance with manufacturer's specifications fastener each or and instruction . Hydrostatically test valve as follows: 3.5 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following 3.5.1 capabilities: 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 52 FY - 1 9

381 3.5.1.1 Manual overpressure protection release valve. 3.5.1.2 Self - actuated and resetting relief valve with a set point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" 3.5.1.3 Master and backup test gages with gage range and graduation in accordance with Table 504 - 6 - 1 of 2.1. The backup gage shall be cross checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test - pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. 3.5.1.4 Protection equipment shall be accessible and test gages shall be lo cated where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and inspector. (I) "SHOP TEST" S 5.2 ) 4.1 through 4.3. See Note 3. ( et valve to lifting pressure. . 5 3. 3 Seat tightness test shall be accomplished for a minimum of 3 minutes. Allowable leakage: None. 3. 5.4 Purge valve of test medium. 3. 5.5 Install wire and lead lock seals. 3. 6 Attach a metal tag to valve, stamped with t he following information: 3. .1 Ship name and hull number 6 6 Valve number or identification .2 3. Valve lifting pressure .3 6 3. 3. 6 .4 Date valve tested and set 6 3. Name of repair facility .5 4. : NOTES 4.1 Test medium, seat tightness, and lifting pressures will be specified in Work Item. 4.2 Steam relief valves shall have setpoint established using steam as the test medium. 4.3 Steam system service and heating boiler pressure relief valves 20065, ASME BPVC Section VIII or ASTM F1508 shall have - DTL - constructed to MIL setpoint established using steam, nitrogen/dry, oil free air or a combination - il of water and nitrogen/dry, o - free air as the test medium, as specified in the work item. 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 52 FY - 1 9

382 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 53 DATE: 7 201 OCT 01 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Bolted Bonnet Steam Valve 1.1 ; Shop Repair accomplish Title: : REFERENCES 2. STM - 010/CH - 075, Fasteners - CJ - S9086 2.1 AS - 2. 2 T9074 - GIB - 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing Methods STD MIL - 3 - 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria 2. 2. 4 S9253 - AD - MMM - 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices (Non Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information - 2. 5 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - RJ - ST M - 010/CH - S9086 and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments RK 6 505, Piping Systems - 010/CH - - STM - 2. S9086 3. REQUIREMENTS : each Matchmark valve part. 3.1 (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" each 3.2 Disassemble, clean internal and external surface free of each part for defects. foreign matter (including paint), and inspect - bound studs only to determine the 3.2.1 The removal of body required. condition of threads is not | (I) ) or (V) “TORQUE TEST” (See 4.3 3.2.2 Torque test each body - bound stud in accordance with Section 075 - 8.6.3.2(d) of 2.1. (I) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECT" 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 53 FY - 1 9

383 3.2. 3 Accomplish liquid penetrant inspection of each seat (including back seat), discs, or gate in accordance with 2. 2 . 3.2. 3 .1 Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with 2.3 Paragraph 7 of - , except hairline cracks in hard faced areas of seats and discs or gate are acceptable provided the valve does not show evidence of leakage. 3.3 Repair valve as follows: 3.3.1 Straighten stem to within 0.002 - inch total indicator reading. Polish stem to a 32 Root - Mean - Square finish in way of packing surface and remove raised edges and foreign matter. exposed threaded area. Chase and tap 3.3.2 each each Dress and true 3.3.3 gasket mating surface. in gate or discs to seats Machine, grind, or lap and spot - 3.3.4 degree continuous contact. - (including back seat) to obtain a 360 (I) or (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" (See 4.3) Inspect contact using blueing method. 3.3.4.1 valve shall not exceed 3/16 3.3.4.2 Transfer line for gate inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of the gate seating surface. Transfer line for globe valve shall not exceed 1/16 3.3.4.3 inch in width. (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS AND CLEANLINESS " Assemble valve, installing new and each fastener for each 3.4 gasket in accordance with th those removed in 3.2 e manufacturer's specification or . instruction Install new valve stem packing conforming to MIL P - - 3.4.1 . 4 24583 combination in accordance with Chapter 6 of 2. 24503/ 3.5 Hydrostatically test valve as follows: 3.5.1 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following capabilities: 3.5.1.1 Manual overpressure protection release valve. 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 53 FY - 1 9

384 actuated and resetting relief valve with a set 3.5.1.2 Self - point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 percent above the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" Master and backup test gages with gage range and 3.5.1.3 6 The backup gage shall be . 5 1 of 2. gr aduation in accordance with Table 504 - - - checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test cross pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. 3.5.1.4 Protection equipment shall be accessible and test gages shall be located where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and inspector. (V)(G) or (I)(G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. 4 ) 3.5.2 Test for seat tightness alternately on each side of gate for double seated valves, and on outboard side only on single seated valves, with the opposite side open for inspection. Do not exceed handwheel closing force specified in 3.5.2.1 11 Table 505 - . 6 2 of 2. - Test shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes 3. 5.2.2 if there is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: of nominal pipe size; 10 cc 10 cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch 1/2 inches. - maximum per hour for valve sizes less than 1 (V)(G) or (I)(G) "SEAT TIGHTNESS" (See 4. ) 4 3.5.3 Test globe valve in the direction tending to open valve. ified Do not exceed the handwheel closing force spec 3.5.3.1 11 - 2 of 2. - 6 . in Table 505 Test shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes 3.5.3.2 if there is no evidence of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until accurate determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: 10 ; 10 cc maximum cubic centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe size 1/2 inches. - per hour for valve sizes less than 1 ) (V)(G) or (I)(G) "BACK PRESSURE TEST" (See 4. 4 Back pressure test globe stop check valve with stem in the 3.5. 4 open position. Allowable leakage as follows: 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 53 FY - 1 9

385 LEAKAGE RATE VALVE SIZE (NOM) 25 cc/hr./in.dia. Up to 2 inches inclusive 50 cc/hr./in.dia. 10 inches inclusive - 1/2 inches - 2 Over 10 inches 100 cc/hr./in.dia. The back pressure applied shall be in accordance with the following: VALVE PRESSURE RATING TEST BACK PRESSURE 50 PSIG 100 PSIG and Below 100 PSIG Over 150 PSIG NOTES 4. : The test pressures of 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 will be specified in Work 4.1 Item. r of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4.2 Repai The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the 4.3 valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V). 4 considered an (I)(G) if the 4. The paragraph referencing this note is valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V)(G). 4.5 Test medium will be specified in Work Item. 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 53 FY - 1 9

386 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 009 ITEM NO: - 54 201 01 OCT DATE: 7 II CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : 1.1 T itle: Bolted Bonnet Steam Valve In - Line Repair; accomplish : REFERENCES 2. - 2.1 T9074 - AS GIB - 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing Methods STD MIL - 2.2 - 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria 2.3 S9253 - AD - MMM - 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices (Non - Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information MENTS : 3. REQUIRE 3.1 each Matchmark valve part. (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" Disassemble, clean free of foreign matter (including paint), and 3.2 inspect each part for defects. (I) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECT" 3.2.1 seat each of Accomplish liquid penetrant inspection (including back seat), discs or gate in accordance with 2.1. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with 3.2.1.1 Paragraph 7 of 2.2, except hairline cracks in hard faced areas of seats and ve does not show evidence of discs or gate are acceptable provided the val leakage. Repair valve as follows: 3.3 inch total indicator reading. - Straighten stem to within 0.002 3.3.1 Mean - - Square finish in way of packing surface and Polish stem to a 32 Root remove raised edges and foreign matter. Chase and tap 3.3.2 each exposed threaded area. 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 54 FY - 1 9

387 - 3.3.3 Clean and spot in each bonnet to body gasket mating surface. in gate or discs to seats - Machine, grind, or lap and spot 3.3.4 degree continuous contact. ain a 360 - (including back seat) to obt (I) or (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" (See 4.3) 3.3.4.1 Inspect contact using blueing method. - Transfer line for gate valve shall not exceed 3/16 3.3.4.2 the gate inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of seating surface. - 3.3.4.3 Transfer line for globe valve shall not exceed 1/16 inch in width. (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS AND CLEANLINESS " each installing new Assemble valve in ner faste each gasket, and 3.4 . or instruction e manufacturer's specification accordance with th - 3.4.1 Install new valve stem packing conforming to MIL - P 24503/24583 combination in accordance with Chapter 6 of 2.3. 4. NOTES : 4.1 Operational test of valve will be specified in Work Item. Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4.2 The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the 3 4. ph is considered a valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragra (V). 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 54 FY - 1 9

388 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 - 55 ITEM NO: OCT 01 DATE: 7 201 CATEGORY: II : 1. SCOPE 1.1 Title: Regulating/Reducing Valve; repair 2. REFERENCES : T9074 - - GIB - 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing AS 2.1 Methods 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria - STD - 2.2 MIL - 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - 010/CH ST 2.3 S9086 - RJ - M and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments REQUIREMENTS : 3. 3.1 valve part. each Matchmark (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" internal and external surface free of Disassemble, clean each 3.2 part for defects. each foreign matter (including paint), and inspect (I) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECT" inspection of hard Accomplish liquid penetrant each 3.2.1 faced - metallic seat and disc in accordance with 2.1. 3.2.1.1 Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with - faced areas of seats and Paragraph 7 of 2.2, except hairline cracks in hard discs are acceptable provided the valve doe s not show evidence of leakage. 3.3 Repair valve as follows: - inch total 3.3.1 Straighten stems and pushrods to within 0.002 Square finish Mean indicator reading. Polish stems and pushrods to a 32 Root - - packing or seal surfaces and remove raised edges and foreign in way of matter. each exposed threaded area. Chase and tap 3.3.2 of 3 009 1 ITEM NO: - 55 9 FY - 1

389 gasket mating surface. each Dress and true 3.3.3 3.3.4 Machine, grind, or lap and spot - in metallic discs to seats to obtain a 360 degree continuous contact. - (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" Inspect contact using blueing method. 3.3.4.1 Transfer line shall not exceed 1/16 3.3.4.2 - inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of the seating surface . installing new diaphragm, 3.4 Assemble valve packing, each gasket, each fastener each and soft seat each spring, and each th in accordance wi manufacturer's specification or instruction . 3.5 Hydrostatically test valve as follows: 3.5.1 Hydrostatic test equipment shall have the following capabilities: 3.5.1.1 Manual overpressure protection release valve. actuated and resetting relief valve with a set - Self 3.5.1.2 ercent above point no greater than 100 PSIG above the test pressure or 10 p the test pressure, whichever is less. (V) "GAGE CHECK" Master and backup test gages with gage range and 3.5.1.3 The backup gage shall be graduation - 6 - 1 of 2.3 . in accordance with Table 504 ge up to the maximum test checked to the master hydrostatic test ga - cross pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. Protection equipment shall be accessible and test 3.5.1.4 gages shall be located where clearly visible and readable to pump operator and inspector. "SHOP TEST" (I) Test and set valve in shop. 3.5.2 Test shall be applied for a minimum of 3 minutes. 3.5.2.1 the following information: 3.6 Attach a metal tag to valve, stamped with Ship name and hull number 3.6.1 3.6.2 Valve number or identification 009 of 3 2 ITEM NO: - 55 9 FY - 1

390 3.6.3 Valve regulation range and set point Date valve tested and set 3.6.4 3.6.5 Name of repair facility : NOTES 4. regulated Test medium and test pressure for valve inlet and 4.1 specified Work Item. in emperature, shall be the invoking pressure/t Nitrogen or air may be used for shop test of steam valves. 4.2 ied in Work Item. Repairs to pilot control will be specif 4.3 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 55 9 FY - 1

391 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 1 FY - 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 56 NOV 6 201 DATE: 18 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Main Propulsion Boiler Wet Lay - Up; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : - 220, Boiler Water/ Feedwater Test and Treatment 2.1 S9086 - GX - STM020/CH REQUIREMENTS : 3. up of each boiler. - wet lay carbohydrazide Accomplish 3.1 up of each boiler. prior to lay - 3.2 Notify the SUPERVISOR one day 3.3 Provide the volume of water requir ed to fill each boiler, superheater, economizer, and associated piping by consulting Table 220 11 22 - - of 2.1. Include an additional 500 gallons for reserve in the total amount 22 - up shall conform to - 11 of 2.1. Water used for lay - required in Table 220 the following requirements: REQUIREMENT CONSTITUENT or PROPERTY SHORE STEAM AND CONDENSED SHORE STEAM USED AS FEEDWATER 8.0 to 9.5 pH 1 Conductivity 5 micromho/cm max Dissolved Silica 0.2 ppm max 0.10 epm max Hardness Total Suspended Solids 0.10 ppm m ax SHORE PROCESSED FEEDWATER (DEMINERALIZERS, REVERSE OSMOSIS) Conductivity 2.5 micromho/cm max (at point of delivery) 0.2 ppm max Silica 3.3.2 The use of filming amines to control steam/steam condensate pH is prohibited. Provide a pierside tank that will hold the quantity of 3.3.3 carbohydrazide layup feedwater required. The tank shall be used to mix the solution. 1 of 2 56 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

392 be treated, 3.3.4 For each 2 ,000 gallons of feed quality water to gallon of 6.5 percent carbohydrazide and one - 1/ 2 quart of 40 - percent 22 of 2.1 . morpholine shall be used , in accordance with P aragraph 220 - Transfer the required amount of carbohydrazide and 3.3.4.1 morpholine to a narrow mouthed polyethylene bottle as appropriate to the volume needed. Pour the car bohydrazide and morpholine into the tank. Immediately fill the tank with feed 3.3.4. water to quality 2 the level calculated in 3.3. Remove water from the boiler, superheater, and economizer. 3.3.5 Close boiler drains and openings with the exception of steam drum, superheater, and economizer vents. Immediately fill the boiler, including superheater and 3.3.6 up solution - carbohydrazide lay economizer, taking suction from the treated tank. While filling the boiler, clo se each vent in turn as 3.3.6.1 the treated water overflows. After the boiler is filled as shown by an overflow from the highest vent, crack each lower vent in turn to ensure that there are no trapped air pockets. 3.4 Mai ntain positive pressure on each boiler, not to exceed 150 PSIG, using a head tank, or shore steam in accordance with P aragraph 220 - 1.1 of 2.1 . each concentration on the day carbohydrazide Determine the boiler is 3.5 placed under lay - thereafter. up and weekly Draw a sample through the boiler water sample line after 3.5.1 allowing the boiler water to flow for 5 minutes to flush the line. Rinse the sample bottle with boiler water sample prior to filling. Allow the sample bottle to overflow before capping the bottle to eliminate trapped air. concentration carbohydrazide Determine the 3.5.1.1 after sampling. immediately 3.5.1.2 If the carbohydrazide concentration falls below 2.0 ated or ppm, the layup is lost and the boiler shall be dumped and retre changed to an authorized layup. boiler Drain the superheater and bring to operating level. each 3.6 Dispose of removed solution in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 3.6.1 Do not drain the solution to th e bilge. 4. NOTES : None. 4.1 2 of 2 56 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

393 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 57 6 DATE: NOV 201 18 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Reduction Gear Security; accomplish REFERENCES : 2. 2.1 Standard Items - 010/CH - STM H7 - S9086 262, Lubricating Oils, Greases, Specialty 2.2 - Lubricants, and Lubrication Systems HK 2.3 S9086 - 241, Propulsion Reduction Gears, Couplings, - STM - 010/CH - iated Components Clutches, and Assoc 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.5.7 of 3.1 Accomplish the requirements of Paragraph s 262 - 3.5.6 and 262 - 2.2 to prevent entry of foreign matter into the lube oil system during work accomplished by the Work Item. 3.1.1 Notify the ship's Engineering Officer via the SUPERVISOR before opening and closing each main reduction gear or main reduction gear attached components. 3.1.2 Accomplish the requirements of Paragraph 241 - 3.5.2 of 2.3 to prevent rust/moisture damage to components when the reduction g ear is going 2 to remain inoperative in excess of weeks. 3.2 Remove and dispose of system fluids to accomplish the requirements of the Work Item. 3.3 Provide and install temporary machinery protection in accordance 6.1.1.m of - Paragraph 241 d the following requirements: 2.3 an with Establish a limited access area and the physical boundary of 3.3.1 the security control area. The security control area shall be established prior to and 3.3.2 maintained during the time an access to the reduction gears ( including the lines which terminate [MRG] case, MRG sump, lube oil [ LO ] main reduction gear in the MRG, or LO cooler is opened. ) 1 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

394 (V)(G) "INSPECTION/APPROVAL OF SECURITY CONTROL AREA" 3.3.3 Notify the SUPERVISOR prior to opening any clean system or c omponent within the area. The SUPERVISOR shall inspect and approve the security control area prior to start of work. 3.3.4 Maintain on site Accountability Logs, Attachments A and B, of , all tools equipment , and personnel entering and leaving the securi ty control area to verify adherence to the requirements set forth in 3. . 7 and 3.8 3.3.4.1 Inspect the log at the beginning and end of each shift to ensure that it describes the equipment and tools within the security control area. Use Attac , and , hment A to log all tools 3.3.4.2 equipment personnel . Use Attachment B 3.3.4.3 for shift turnover verification. 3.3.5 Post warning signs at the entry points to the security control area and limited access area to maintain control of the area and infor m personnel that the reduction gear is open. 3.3.5.1 Set up Limited Access Area with rope/line and signs to restrict unnecessary traffic. 3.3.6 site surveillance by contractor - hour continuous on - Provide 24 ion gear is exposed. personnel in the area as long as the reduct Policing of limited access area shall be routine 3.3.6.1 or systems which flow into the MRG are open (e.g., while gear is exposed VFP]) vent fog precipitator [ ion lube oil [PLO] system, dehumidifier, p ropuls . 3.4 Observe Ship's Fo rce security control/accountability measures. Provide reduction gear security 3.5 4.2 - in accordance with Paragraph 241 of 2.3 during periods that require the gear train to be exposed from access openings where direct or indirect paths to gearing will res ult. Notify the ship's Engineering Officer or designated 3.5.1 representative prior to disassembly and removal of the following gear casing components: 3.5.1.1 Hinged, pinned, or bolted gear casing covers, inspection ports, and plates Sight flow indicators, gear mesh spray nozzles, 3.5.1.2 thermometers, and associated fittings 2 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

395 3.5.1.3 Oil supply and return piping, vent lines, fittings, and plugs. 3.5.2 The ship's Engineering Officer or designated representative shall be present at all ti mes when external connections are attached to the reduction gear casing, oil sump, and oil piping. 3.5.3 The surrounding limited access area shall be secured and policed to remove overhead or local dirt, loose objects, or any potential g objects prior to and during gear exposure. security violatin (V)(G) "PRE OPENING CLEANLINESS" - 3.5.4 Prior to opening casing, ensure no foreign material exists on adjacent surfaces that could contaminate the internal areas upon lifting casing covers, piping, and assoc iated equipment. 3.5.5 Construct a temporary cover over openings of the gear train, in addition to the required limited access area controls, if it becomes necessary to stop work with the casing/covers removed. s Protective covering 3.6 : repairs require the removal of main bolted cover plates, When 3.6.1 a ssemble an enclosure made from Herculite or canvas covering conforming to - A A 55308 over the top of the reduction gear housing, lashing the bottom of - the enclosure to the deck structure or piping at deck level. 3.6.1.1 Snaps, staples, or similar shall not be used on enclosure. Utilize heavy duty zippers and Velcro hook - pile. Secure all grommets attached to enclosure with line or lanyard to prevent loss of grommets. ge of the enclosure to overhead 3.6.1.2 Lash the top ed structural members to form a work area over and around the reduction gear casing. 3.6.1.3 Lace the top flaps to the sides. The top shall utilize a center joint if lifting gear is utilized. Unlace center joint when util izing lifting gear. 3.6.1.4 Lace all but one of the corners to each other, utilizing stiffeners, to form a secure work area. The unlaced corner shall be used for a security door constructed to be capable of being secured. Stencil "CONTROLLED AREA ± A UTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY" on the sides and top of the enclosure or install signs at enclosure boundaries. hen 6.2 W repairs do not require removal of main bolted cover 3. rotect planned open and accessible areas of the reduction gear by plates, p assem bling an enclosure made from Herculite or canvas covering conforming to - A - A 55308. 3 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

396 3. 6.2 .1 Submit one legible drawing or sketch of proposed enclosure(s) to the SUPERVISOR 5 days prior to entering the reduction gear. Drawing shall include enclosure acc ess for installation of lifting gear (if required). Snaps, staples, or similar shall not be used on 3. 6.2 . 2 enclosure. U elcro hook tilize heavy duty zippers and V - pile. Secure all grommets attached to enclosure with line or lanyard to prevent loss of grommets. .3 3. 6.2 Stencil “C2N7R2//(D AR(A ± AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 2N/<” on the sides and top of the enclosure or install signs at enclosure boundaries. Prepare an Accountability Log, Attachment A , immediately after 7 and B 3. limited access area has b een approved by the SUPERVISOR, but prior to opening an access. Maintain the Accountability Log while reduction gears and attached components are open. 7 3. Station a Control Watch at the enclosure door/flap and .1 and hardware which is small enough to maintain Attachment A for all material fit inside access opening. The Control Watch shall record the date and time in the 3. 7 .2 appropriate block on Attachment each time accountability is started or B stopped, and each time access is opened or closed. he log is Any time t turned over to another Control Watch , both the outgoing and incoming Control Watches shall sign Attachment B to document that all items are accounted for. 3. 7 .3 Any material permanently or temporarily installed shall be noted as suc h in the remarks column on Attachment A. 3. 8 Inspection equipment, tools, and personnel clothing shall be captured, secured, and accounted for to preclude introduction of foreign matter into the reduction gear. 8 re: Acceptable methods of capturing a .1 3. .1.1 3. 8 Drilling and lockwiring 8 3. .1.2 Tackwelding or silver brazing 8 3. .1.3 Using nylock - type locking devices 3. 8 .1.4 Upsetting or staking threads 8 Attaching a lanyard 3. .1.5 .1.6 8 3. Taping with duct tape 4 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

397 personnel working in or around an open gear casing shall 8 .2 All 3. have all eye glasses, buttons, zippers, and other loose items on their clothing properly taped to prevent them from breaking loose and falling into the gear casing. All jewelry, pens, change, metal objects, loose items, etc., shall be removed from the person and clothing pockets prior to entering area. 3. 9 Notify the SUPERVISOR in all matters involving foreign material retrieval from the reduction gear. Report all incidents breaching reduction gea r security to the ship's Engineering Officer or Engineering Duty Officer . via the SUPERVISOR (V)(G) "INSPECTION PRIOR TO CLOSURE" 3. 10 Accomplish a visual inspection of the exposed reduction gear and associated components prior to each closing (daily and final) . Ensure no foreign matter has entered or remains within the reduction gear and/or components. Inspect each ledges, including th e underside of ledges, pockets, gear teeth, and bearing journals and caps, using mirrors, periscopes, and borescopes. 3. The inspection shall be made jointly with the SUPERVISOR and .1 10 the ship's Engineering Officer or designated representative. 1 verify that all tools and equipment each closing Prior to .2 0 3. listed on Attachments A and B have been either logged out satisfactorily or are annotated as installed, permanently or temporarily, in the remarks column. when the access is closed. 10 .2.1 Accountability shall stop 3. .3 10 3. Attachments A and B the shall be available for review by SUPERVISOR at time of final closure. approved Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or 3. .3.1 10 transferrable media , of completed Attachments A and B to the S UPERVISOR within 2 days of final closure. 11 3. Disassemble and remove the enclosure and limited area boundary when directed by the SUPERVISOR. 3. Accomplishment of cleaning and painting for new and disturbed 12 A Standard Items (See Note 4.3). surfaces shall be in accordance with NAVSE 4. NOTES : 4.1 In support of emergency inspections, limited inspections or minor repairs to the propulsion reduction gear, the requirements for a security control area may be omitted at the discretion of the SUPERVISOR with the concurrence of the ship's Engineering Offic er. If the security control area 5 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

398 is precluded during these special circumstances, the security of the reduction gear shall be maintained. The requirements for contractor accountability cannot be 4.1.1 waived. 4.2 Definitions of terms used are: Clean Work Area: An area requiring a cleanliness/ 4.2 .1 accountability level at least equal to that required for in shop repair of - similar equipment to permit the easy recovery of any dropped tools, material, etc. This area shall be free of excess moisture a nd contaminants, i.e. , abrasive materials resulting from blasting, grinding, or other particle generating processes. Areas where this condition would apply are inspection and/or access covers removed or open. 4.2.2 Security Control Area: An area or enc losure that provides a physical boundary around access opening (Herculite) which will preclude the inadvertent introduction of any uncontrolled personnel, tools, equipment or foreign material. This area shall always meet the requirements of a Clean Work A rea and can be upgraded to a Limited Access/Exclusion Area. A Controlled Area shall always require Physical Separation. Full Enclosure: An enclosure that has all edges (sides, top, 4.2.3 and bottom) secured with cabling that is woven through grommets a nd secured to stanchions, foundations, deck grating, etc. The enclosure will be considered adequately secured if a person cannot enter through any opening other than the designed entry accesses. Limited Access Area: An area requiring the maximum level of 4.2.4 concern and accountability for personnel and material. During this condition a Full Enclosure is required. This type of area isolation is required where the recovery of dropped or broken material would be difficult and/or requires rk of the task in progress. The Full Enclosure shall be locked extensive rewo when unattended by production and during the unattended time keys shall be controlled by the Ship's Engineering Office. An area established outside the onnel allowed to enter the reduction security control area to limit the pers gear area and is intended to prevent unnecessary traffic. Accountability: The method used to maintain foreign material 4.2.5 exclusion from reduction gears by keeping a formal record (accountability ials, including tools and hardware that may pass through log) of all mater access opening. If cleaning and painting for new and disturbed surfaces of 3.12 are 4.3 32 “Cleaning and Painting - required; the use of Category II Standard Item 009 Requirements; accomplish” will be specified in the Work Item. of 2.1 6 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

399 ATTACHMENT A ACCOUNTABILITY LOG SHEET______OF______ SHIP/HULL_________________________ SPEC. ITEM________________ SYSTEM - LOCATION ________________________________ Entered Area (Note 1) Exited Area (Note 2) Qty of Item Qty of Item (N/A for CTRL Item Personnel Name/Item (N/A for CTRL Description Personnel) Date/Time Watch* Remarks (Note 3) Personnel) Date/Time Watch* No. * The person designated to sign for an action verifies, based on personal observation, and certifies by their signature that the action has actually been performed in accordance with the specified requirements. Note 1: Verify personnel and material entering area meet the requirements of 3.8 Note 2 ([isting material removed shall be documented Zith “(ntered Area” marNed “NA” orarily or permanently installed in system per para 3.7.3. Include additional remarks as Note 3: Record if item is temp required for clarification. 7 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

400 ATTACHMENT B ACCOUNTABILITY LOG (WATCH TURNOVER VERIFICATION) SHIP/HULL_____________________ SPEC. ITEM____________ LOCATION______________________________ SYSTEM - Logged items remaining within the exposed location at the change of watch shall be verified present by the in - coming the area and confirming - and out going control watches. This verification shall be accomplished by physically checking those items required to be logged. Both the outgoing and incoming watches shall sign the watch turnover verification to certify that the remaining items have been physically verified, no unnecessary items are left in accountability area, containments are satisfactory, and area is cleaned. Logged items on Attachment A verified at watch turnover Date/Time Date/Time Date/Time Date/Time Off Going watch System Ctrl Watch System On Coming watch signature* Stopped signature* Open Name Closed Started Remarks THIS LOG IS CLOSED. ALL ITEMS ARE ACCOUNTED FOR AS INDICATED. Inspector**_______________ Date/Time_______________ Supervisor**__________________ Date/Time_______________ * The person designated to sign for an action verifies, based on personal observation, and certifies by their signature ly been performed in accordance with the specified requirements. that the action has actual ** The person designated to sign for an action verifies, based on personal observation certified records, and or certifies by their signature that the action has been performed in accordance with the specified requirements. 8 of 8 57 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

401 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 9 FY - 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 58 5 201 SEP DATE: 01 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Pump and Driver Shaft Alignment; accomplish Title: 1.1 : REFERENCES 2. - 2.1 010, Instruction Manual for the Indicator Reverse JX - MMA - S6226 Method of Pump Shaft Alignment 803 - 6397419, Standard Machinery Shim Kits 2.2 REQUIREMENTS 3. : 3.1 Measure pump and driver shaft alignment using the indicator reverse m ethod and the mathematical equations or graphs or alignment computer or laser based measuring instruments in accordance with 2.1. 3.1.1 Determine soft foot and correct in accordance with Section 2, 2 6.6.18 of 2.1. Shims shall be in accordance with 2.2. - 6.5.13 or 2 - 2 - (V) "INSPECT PIPING ALIGNMENT PRIOR TO REMOVAL " 3 of 2.1 prior 3.2 Inspect piping alignment in accordance with Section 2 - to removal. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved 3.2.1 transferrable media, of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.2 to the SUPERVISOR. (V)(G) “INSPECT PIPING ALIGNMENT AT INSTALLATION” Inspect piping alignment in accordance with Section 2 3.3 - 3 of 2.1 at installation. ed Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approv 3.3.1 transferrable media, of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.3 to the SUPERVISOR. 4 of 2.1. - Measure indicator sag in accordance with Section 2 4 3. 4 (V)(G) "COLD ALIGNMENT" (See 4. ) 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 58 FY - 1 9

402 3. 5 Align each shaft to the offset and angular align ments in accordance with the cold alignment settings invoked in the Work Item (see 4.1). Cold alignments for horizontally mounted machinery shall be accomplished in - 1 through 2 accordance with Chapter 2, Sections 2 - 7 of 2.1, and vertically mounted machine ry shall be in accordance with Chapter 5, Sections 5 - 1 through 5 - 3 of 2.1. Pumps/motors with magnetic couplings shall be aligned in accordance with 2.1. .1 If hot alignment is not required, complete cold final 5 3. inal alignment check of pump with alignment verification. Accomplish a f dowels installed. 3. 5 .1.1 Fit and install new chocks and shims conforming to ASTM A 240 to accomplish alignment. Shims shall be in accordance with 2.2. - Drill and ream foundations. Fit and install new SAE 5 .1.2 3. AMS 763, Grade 304, dowels in each unit to retain final satisfactory - S - QQ - - 8 of 2.1. unit alignment in accordance with Section 2 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved 3. 5 .2 - age 7 transferrable media, of a completed alignment data collection form (P 2 for the results of the requirements of 3. to the 5 ) of 2.1) (see 4. 5 SUPERVISOR. 6 3. Align shafts so that offset and angular alignments are acceptable when the unit is hot. Acceptable alignment tolerances shall be based on the - pump and the alignment tolerance listed in Table 1 rated speed of the 1 of 2.1 (see 4.2). Hot alignments for horizontally mounted turbine driven - 1 machinery shall be accomplished in accordance with Chapter 2, Section 2 - 8 of 2.1. Hot alignment is not required for v through 2 - ertically mounted Hot alignment is machinery unless specified in the unit’s technical manual. driven machinery. Accomplish - not required for horizontally mounted, motor hot alignment check only on units when the cold alignment has been rmal growth. (Hot alignment readings must be taken within compensated for the 30 minutes of shutting down unit). .1 Fit and install new chocks and shims conforming to ASTM A 240 3. 6 to accomplish alignment. Shims shall be in accordance with 2.2. .2 Drill and ream foundations. Fit and install new 3. 6 - S - QQ - AMS - 763, Grade 304, dowels in each unit to retain final satisfactory SAE unit alignment in accordance with Section 2 8 of 2.1. - (V)(G) "FINAL HOT ALIGNMENT" 3. ordance with in acc Accomplish a final hot alignment check of pump 7 2.1 with dowels installed. 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 58 FY - 1 9

403 7 .1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved 3. 7 transferrable media, of a report listing results of the requirements of 3. to the SUPERVISOR. The report shall include the following: 3. 7 .1.1 Ship's na me and hull number 3. 7 .1.2 Contractor and subcontractor 3. 7 .1.3 Job Order and Work Item number 7 3. Identity of pump aligned .1.4 Completed alignment data collection form (Page 7 3. 7 .1.5 - 2 of 2.1) (see 4. 5 ) for final hot alignment condition . NOTES 4. : 4.1 Reference that contains the cold setting alignment will be identified in the invoking Work Item. 4.2 Hot alignment criteria if different from zero will be identified in the invoking Work Item. Turbine driven unit must be run a 4.3 minimum of 2 hours to achieve operating temperature. (V)(G) is invoked only when hot alignment is not required. 4. 4 5 4. If utilizing laser based measuring instruments, a completed results printout may be utilized in lieu of 2 of 2.1. - 7 Page 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 58 FY - 1 9

404 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 ITEM NO: - 59 DATE: 18 NOV 2016 I CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Organotin Antifouling Material; control 2. REFERENCES : - STM VD - S9086 2.1 - ervice 631, Preservation of Ships in S - 010/CH 3. REQUIREMENTS : Accomplish work associated with application, removal, or disturbance 3.1 of organotin materials in accordance with 2.1, using this item for control, up, safety precautions, and environmental practices. clean - 3.1.1 Apply and dispose of organotin material in accordance with federal, state, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations. Personnel with occupational exposure to organotin shall be in 3.1.2 the medical monitoring program. 3.1.3 Safety an d environmental protection shall include total encapsulation of the work site. Blank ship intake ventilators and close hatches 3.1.3.1 within the work site enclosure to prevent entry of paint, blasting particles, or vapors into the ship. Take precaut ions to prevent circulation of paint mists and vapors throughout the interior of the ship. 3.1.3.2 Remove all unnecessary equipment from the containment. up at the completion of the 3.1.4 Accomplish the following clean - r blasting operation: painting o Sweep (in a wet state) or vacuum all dry dock and 3.1.4.1 equipment surfaces after painting or blasting. Clean up accidental spills immediately. 3.1.4.2 1 of 3 59 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

405 3.1.4.3 Decontaminate keel blocks, staging, planks, suspended platfor ms, dry dock, or equipment surfaces contaminated with organotin paint prior to reuse. 3.1.5 Provide personal protective equipment (PPE) for personnel as follows: Organotin workers shall wear protective impervious 3.1.5.1 cl othing, including gloves, aprons, suits, hoods, and boots when needed to prevent skin contact. 3.1.5.2 Abrasive blasting operators, in addition to their regular protective clothing, shall wear rubber boots and impervious coveralls All openings shall be taped. as outer garments. Blasters/blasting support personnel (personnel 3.1.5.3 contained breathing - within the work area containment) shall use self demand mode, or a - apparatus (SCBA) with a full facepiece operated in pressure combination supplied air respirator with full facepiece and an auxiliary - self contained air supply operated in pressure - demand mode. - 3.1.5.4 Protective equipment shall be cleaned before/after use. 3.1.5.5 Personnel handling potentially contaminated items shall wear ru bber gloves and disposable coveralls. Where small areas of paint removal are required, a 3.1.5.6 small containment shall be set up around the area. Paint removal other than blasting shall be used to remove paint a minimum of 6 inches on either side repair. of Provide training for all personnel involved in the 3.1.6 application, removal, disturbance, or disposal of organotin and support personnel. Training shall be documented. Training shall include the hazards, phys 3.1.6.1 ical symptoms, appropriate emergency procedures, and proper conditions and precautions for the safe handling or use of organotin to workers in areas where exposure may occur. Additionally, training shall include the use of PPE and shall ensure that person nel have a knowledge of job hazards, proper maintenance, clean up methods, and respirator usage. As a minimum, the following safety and health precautions 3.1.7 shall be enforced: reas. No eating, drinking, or smoking in work a 3.1.7.1 Protective clothing must be worn. 3.1.7.2 2 of 3 59 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

406 3.1.7.3 Avoid inhaling vapor, dust, mist, or fumes. 3.1.7.4 Avoid direct contact of paint with skin. 3.1.7.5 Avoid eye and skin contact with mist or spray. After working with organotin and immediately upon 3.1.7.6 removal of protective clothing, personnel must shower using soap and water unless otherwise informed. 3.1.7.7 Avoid contact between hands and mouth if hands have been exposed to the material. Post the exposure zone whenever organotin work is in 3.1.8 progress. During the application, removal or disturbance of 3.1 .8.1 organotin, a sign must be posted at each entrance to the work area and at FOULING PAINT CONTAINING each entrance to the dry dock reading: ANTI - ORGANOTIN BEING APPLIED OR REMOVED. Work area s shall be posted with signs stating PPE 3.1.8.2 requirements. : NOTES 4. None. 4.1 3 of 3 59 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

407 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 19 FY - ITEM NO: 009 - 60 DATE: 7 201 01 OCT I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : Title: Schedule and Associated Reports for Availabilities Over 9 1.1 Weeks in Duration; provide and manage 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 Standard Items 2.2 010 General Specifications for Overhaul of Surface , - GOS - AB - S9AAO Ships REQUIREMENTS : 3. format of 3.1 Develop one legible copy in Gantt Chart an Integrated Production Schedule (IPS) that reflects the manner in which the availability will be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements : Key Events, Milestones, and work being tests, Include 3.1.1 s Contracted - ), Government Installation Teams (AIT accomplished by Alteration (S/F) , Commercial Industrial Third Party Maintenance Providers, Ship's Force Services (CIS ), and Fleet Maintenance Activities (FMA s ). s numbers, Job Sequence Numbers Alteration (ALT) 1 3.1.1. and Task Order numbers (TOs) are considered equivalent to the , (JSNs) contractor’s Work Specification Work Items for the purposes of scheduling the party organizations in accordance with this Standard work of these third - Item. T 3.1.1. ive of these additional he term Work Item is inclus 2 methods of identifying a body of work. Schedule each Work Item to the Work Activity level, listing .1.2 3 the planned start and planned completion dates, and durations for each Work . Activity 3.1.2.1 with the appropriate Assign each Work Activity predecessor and successor relationships within the contractor’s scheduling software that establish the logic relationship between schedule Work Activities. An individual Work Activity may have more than one predecessor and more than on e successor. 009 - 1 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

408 3.1.2.2 Assign appropriate predecessor relationships to each Key Event and Milestone(s) to ensure there is an accurate logical progression through all work activities leading to their assigned Key Event and supports accurate prediction of Key Event Milestone(s), and ensure the IPS and Milestone(s) attainment. 3.1.2.3 Schedule Stage 2 Weight Tests and Hydrostatic Tests, and all Stage 3 through Stage 6 required tests as Work Activities by Work tionships between tests, the Item. Include the predecessor/successor rela production work, and system restoration required to manage work - to - test progression. Test Stages are defined in Section 092 of 2.2. 3.1. 3 Schedule production work final inspections and testing for work that has to be comple ted prior to pre - flood/undocking and which generates technical data requiring Government review to complete no later or provide than four days prior to the scheduled undocking (when applicable) a technical justification for not meeting this requirement . 4 3.1. a revised IPS at the , O (S the Schedule of Record R) Develop start of the availability (A - 0 day) that includes refined sequencing and completeness as a result of completed subcontracting actions, incorporation (GFI) mation of additional Government Furnished Infor , or any contract modifications increasing the scope of work between contract/delivery Order award and availability start. be scheduled such that ould Work activities sh y no portion of a Work Activity’s effort exceeds the dates of its assigned Ke Event or Milestone(s). 3.1. Identify the amount of total float available on each Work 5 Item Work Activity . Activity schedules should b on a 5 - day workweek e based unless otherwise specified. Manpower resource allocations shall support - accomplishment of the availability on a 5 day workweek basis. 3.1. IPS at the Work Activity level to include Weekly 6 Revise additions, deletions, modifications, actual start and finish dates, progress, and completions. Progress shall be based on degree of completion of physical ment of the Work Activity. accomplish work or Reassign Milestone and Key Event relationships for . 6 3.1. 1 incomplete Work Activities when the associated Milestone or Key Event has passed and the Work Activity was authorized as an exception. Activities that fall outside their assigned Key 3.1.6.2 Event or Milestone shall be identified and a mitigation plan shall be developed. 3.1. 7 Include t he following minimum data elements for each Work Activity in the schedule, as appropriate. Elements listed in Table 1 are not required to be displayed in ADOBE PDF views of submitted IPS unless otherwise directed in this Standard Item. 009 - 2 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

409 Table 1 Activity Data Elements and Descriptions Data Element Description E specification Work Item number Work Item Number (as - 4 appropriate ) Work Activity Identifier Numerical designator identifying the Work Activity within the Work Breakdown Structure Descriptive title of Work Item and Work Activity Title Industrial Control Number (ICN): AIM/PSS system ICN (as appropriate ) identifier for naval shipyard and FMA work Key Event applicable to the Work Activity (See 4.5) Key Event Milestone (as Milestone applicable to the Work Activity appropriate ) System(s) affected (See 4.6) System (as Component Component Unit (For example: tank, valve, motor, appropriate) pump) Work location/compartment number (See 4.7) Location rganization: Prime KTR, Sub specific o ID Executing Activity KTR, FMA, - or OSIC SMMO, AIT, Superintendent or Zone Responsible Contractor Superintendent or Zone Manager Manager The start date identified on the current baseline Planned Start IPS The finish date id entified on the current baseline Planned Finish IPS Software determined date ( Early Start See 4.1.13 ) ) Early Finish Software determined date ( See 4.1.14 Late Start ) See 4.1.15 ( Software determined date Late Finish Software determined date ( See 4.1.16 ) Actual date for the Work Activity’s start Actual Start Actual Finish Actual date for the Work Activity’s finish Percent Complete Degree of completion based on the Work Activity’s work scope and degree of accomplishment Duration The total number of work periods required to complete a Work Activity. Number of scheduled workdays per week Calendar Identification Total Float The amount of time a Work Activity can be delayed without affecting the project finish date ts in a an export of the IPS data elemen 3.1. 8 Develop sortable/filterable spreadsheet format compatible with Microsoft Excel. oriented Gantt chart format that shows Display the IPS in a time - 3.2 Critical Path and Controlling Work Items at the Work Activity level and and/or Milestones Key Events . assigned Gantt Chart Revise the weekly in conjunction with the weekly 3.2.1 IPS revisions of 3.1.6. 009 - 3 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

410 a Develop 3 Critical Path Network in Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) 3. format that displays the Critical Path of the availability and the C ontrolling Work Items with associated Key Event s and Milestones. Display Critical Path and Controlling Work Items at the Work Activity level to provide visual representation of the logic relationships between displayed Work Activities. 1 - k or any sub . The networ network thereof may be continued on 3. 3 additional pages. 3. 3 . 2 Label each Work Item, Work Activity, Milestone, and Key Event dentifier and title. I of the network with the Work Activity 3 . Revise the network weekly in conjunction with the weekly IPS 3. 3 . 3.1.6 revisions of Provide Key Event and Milestone listing. 4 3. , showing for s Generate a listing of Key Event and Milestone .1 4 3. each: Event Title, Original Schedule Date, Revised Schedule Date, and Actual Date of Accomplishment. 3. 4 .1.1 The revised schedule date and actual date of accomplishment shall be left blank on the initial submission and filled in to reflect actual conditions on subsequent submission of the listing. ly to 3. 4 .1.2 Revise the and Milestone listing week Key Event reflect up - to - date contract performance. 3. 5 Provide manpower management information. Develop a total manpower 3. 5 .1 loading curve showing proposed - per - men manning throughout the contract period calculated in average day. - The curve shall indica te that portion of the total that is subcontractor provided. 5 . 2 Develop manpower curves showing proposed manning by trade 3. throughout the contract period calculated in average men - per - day. The curves shall indicate that portion of the total that is subcontractor provided. The curve shall be incremented on a weekly progression. .3 5 .1 and 3. 5 .2 weekly. Update the manpower curves of 3. 3. 5 ation report showing total a weekly manpower utiliz Develop .4 5 3. mandays expended during the previous week, indicating that portion of the hat is subcontractor provided. total t Provide a representative whose function is to coordinate and 3. 6 aintenance Providers, , schedule AIT, Government - Contracted Third Party M S/F CIS, and FMA work with contractor work into the IPS. 009 - 4 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

411 6 .1 The representative shall meet with the AIT, Government - 3. 90 , CIS, and FMA between A - Contracted Third Party Maintenance Providers, S/F but no later than A - 5 and then daily thereafter commencing on A - 0 to compare and coordinate programmed AIT, Government - Contracted Third Party Maintenance Provider, S/F , CIS, and FMA work with the IPS. Coordinate AIT, Government .2 6 3. Contracted Third Party Maintenance - Provi der, S/F , CIS, and FMA work integration into the IPS prior to setting ( R) . ) See 4.1.21 the Schedule of Record O (S The representative shall .2.1 3.6 develop a report identifying missing or incomplete schedule integration data for known Identification is submitted. R O S e availability when the participants in th of missing or incomplete schedule integration data is required to highlight areas of elevated IPS uncertainty, but shall not be cause for delay in establishing the S nor the delivery of reports required under this Standard oR Item. Incorporate updated progress from AIT, Government .3 3.6 Contracted - Third Party Maintenance Providers, S/F , CIS, FMA , and other maintenance providers into the IPS. Excel Provide a common template in Microsoft 3.6 .3.1 .3. compatible format to facilitate submission of progress updates of 3. 6 6 3. Identify, at the weekly progress meeting, schedule conflicts .4 Contracted Third Party Maintenance Provider, where programmed AIT, Government - eres with previously scheduled contractor work. S/F , CIS, and FMA work interf .5 Identify, at the weekly progress meeting, required AIT, 6 3. S/F - Government Contracted Third Party Maintenance Provider, , CIS, and FMA pment prerequisite actions necessary to support contractor testing and equi operation schedule. Provide cognizant shipyard management representation to participate 7 3. in the weekly progress meeting at the time and location agreed to by the SUPERVISOR. The representative(s) must be authorized to make management relative to the routine requirements of the Job Order that, in good decisions - faith, commit the contractor. AIT Managers and/or On Site Installation Coordinators (OSIC) shall participate and represent respective alteration s. teams in scheduled weekly progress meeting Develop report listing for each Work Item of the Job Order, a 3. .1 7 the Work Item number, Work Item title, scheduled start date, scheduled completion date, actual start date, and the percentage complete. The report vents and Milestones Key E list and major shall address changes to the s problems of Work Item , to include negative float, and proposed corrective action. The report shall reflect the addition, deletion, or modification of Work Items. Completed Work Items need not be addressed. percent 3.8 Participate in review conferences at the 25, 50, and 75 points in the availability. Data from the most recent submission in 009 - 5 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

412 accordance with 3.7 .1 will be used at the review conferences. Review c onferences will be held within two days of th e Weekl y progress Meeting of 3. or, subject to SUPERVISOR approval, may be held simultaneously with the 7 Weekly Progress Meeting. The conferences will be scheduled at a time and place mutually agreeable to all parties. The contractor shall: Be prepared 3.8 .1 to discuss planned production manning versus and subcontractors. , actual production manning by total, trades 3.8 .2 Identify known factors that may affect Key Events, Milestones and the contract completion. Provide recommended courses of action to reso lve problem areas. with the status of open and inspect 3.8 .3 Provide the SUPERVISOR reports and be prepared to discuss possible impact of growth work in these percent review conference. items at the 25 e SUPERVISOR with the following for the information Provide th .4 3.8 review conference 50 percent : .4.1 3.8 A machinery reinstallation plan showing projected dates for installing the equipment on the foundation, hook - up of the equipment, and operational tests of the equipment. 3.8 .4.2 status list showing projected completion and A valve reinstallation dates. .4.3 3.8 A list of items required for the next Key Event and Annotate those items Production Completion Date (PCD) that are not complete. on the list that may be in jeopardy of completi ng by the next Key Event and PCD. 8 one legible copy, in approved .5 Provide the SUPERVISOR with 3. transferrable media, of a test schedule for all planned underway equipment percent to support the 75 and system testing to the SUPERVISOR review . conference 3.9 Submit the following reports as listed in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf), Microsoft Excel (.xls), or Microsoft Word (.doc) as per compatible media and Table 3 : Table 2 009 - 6 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

413 Table 2 Deliverables. ID Due Title Format Requirements Number 3.9.1 Initial IPS Based on contract *.pdf 3.1 - Gantt chart 3.1.8 type a s *.xls - Spreadsheet - 3.2 Critical Path (Gantt) *.pdf listed in *.pdf Table 3 3.3 Critical Path Network (PDM) - *.doc 3.4 - Key Events/Milestones - 0 3.9.2 A of Record Schedule 3.1.4 Gantt chart - *.pdf 3.1.8 Spreadsheet - *.xls *.pdf Critical Path (Gantt) - 3.2 *.pdf 3.3 - Critical Path Network (PDM) *.doc 3.4 - Key Events/Milestones - Manpower Curves (Total) *.pdf 3.5.1 3.5.2 *.pdf - Manpower Curves (Trades) *.doc - 3.6.2.1 Incomplete GFI Weekly after 3.9.3 eekly IPS W 0 3.1.8 Spreadsheet A - - *.xls *.pdf - 3.2.1 Critical Path (Gantt) 3.3.3 *.pdf - Critical Path Network (PDM) *.doc 3.4 - Key Events/Milestones *.pdf 3.5.3 - Manpower Curves (Total/Trades) Manpower Utilization Report - *.pdf 3.5.4 - Incomplete GFI 3.6.2.1 *.doc 3.7.1 - *.doc Weekly Meeting Report Percent 3 days prior Conference Support 25 3.9.4 - Gantt Chart 3.1.6 *.pdf to meeting (Most recent Revised Weekly IPS) Percent 50 Conference Support 3 days prior 3.9.5 Gantt Chart - to meeting 3.1.6 *.pdf (Most recent Revised Weekly *.pdf IPS) *.xls Machinery Reinstallation Plan - 3.8.4.1 3.8.4.2 *.xls - Valve Listing - 3.8.4.3 Incomplete PCD Listing 3 days prior Conference Support 3.9.6 75 Percent to meeting Gantt Chart - *.pdf 3.1.6 (Most recent Revised Weekly IPS) *.doc 3.8.5 Underway test schedule - 009 - 7 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

414 able 3 T Initial IPS Schedule Submission Requirements Firm Fixed Price Type Contract Cost Plus Type Contract No Later Than (NLT) 15 days NLT - 30 Days(Surface Ships) A after award (Availabilities 64 90 days) - NLT 30 days after award - 60 Days(CVNs and Submarines) (Availabilities greater than NLT A 90 days) 4. NOTES : Definitions. 4.1 Industrial Testing: Conducted by using stages of testing for 4.1.1 the proper installation and perfor the progressive validation of mance of equipment and systems. Test Stages are identified in 009 - 67 of 2.1 . 4.1.2 Integra A schedule used by the ted Production Schedule (IPS): - conflicting contractor as a means of planning, tracking, coordinating and de all work planned for work during the availability. It incorporates accomplishment during the maintenance availability including; Alteration m (AIT), Government Installation Tea Contracted Third Party Maintenance - Providers, Ship's Force, Commercial Industrial Services (CIS), and Fleet Maintenance Activity (FMA) work. A portion of an individual Work Item, which is Work Activity : 4.1.3 the Work Item, representing a manageable unit of a logical subdivision of work which must be accomplished at a specific period of time in relation to other Activities of the Job Order. The total number of work periods (not including 4.1.4 Duration: holidays or other nonworking periods) required to complete a scheduled Work Activity. 4.1.5 An event that, if slippage occurs, could impact or Key Event: delay the overall schedule, or prevent timely delivery of the vessel. Key R, or the contractor. Events are identified by the contract, the SUPERVISO Milestone: A significant event identified by the Maintenance 4.1.6 Team. Milestones are used as a scheduling aid and establish significant points where progress must be evaluated and confirmed. Accumulated failure to achieve Miles Milestones tones on schedule may result in missed Key Events. may be identified by either the contractor or the SUPERVISOR. 4.1.7 That sequence of Work Activities which forms Critical Path: the work and test chain of the longest duration, and directly affects the completion of the availability. Factors that influence when a Work Activity is on the Critical Path include: time duration required for the Work Activity, space limitations, manpower available, and the predecessor/successor relationships betwee n Work Activities. Typically, the 009 - 8 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

415 Critical Path is determined by automated schedule analysis and will include any sequential set of Work Activities forming the longest chain of events extending throughout the schedule and which has the least Total Float. 4.1.8 Controlling Work Items: Those Work Items which include activities that are on the critical path of the IPS, which, by virtue of scope, material requirements, complexity, or other considerations, have the significant potential for impact on the sch eduled project Key Events or completion of the availability. 4.1.9 Total Float: The total number of days that a path of Work Activities can be delayed without affecting the project finish date. A path of Work Activities is established by predecessor an d successor relationships. 4.1. 10 Logic Relationship: Defines an interdependence between Work Activities. It is established by assigning predecessor and successor relationships to Work Activities using the functionality provided by project scheduling so ftware. An individual Work Activity will frequently have more than one predecessor or more than one successor. Network: 1 A graphic display showing the planned sequence and 4.1.1 interdependent relationship of Work Activities, Milestones, or Key Events w ithin the Job Order. Resource: Labor and non 4.1.1 2 labor demands required to complete a - Work Activity. These may include personnel (trade skills), material, special tools, facilities, space, and equipment. 13 ime that a Work Activity Early Start: The earliest point in t 4.1. may start based on the IPS network logic and any other schedule constraints. Early start dates may change as the availability progresses. The earliest point in time that a Work Activity 4 4.1.1 Early Finish: d on the IPS network logic and any schedule constraints. may be completed base Early finish dates may change as the availability progresses. The latest point in time that a Work Activity may Late Start: 5 4.1.1 based on the IPS begin without delaying the applicable Milestone or Key Event network logic . The latest point in time that a Work Activity Late Finish: 6 4.1.1 may be completed without delaying the applicable Milestone or Key Event based . on the IPS network logic 4.1.17 The incorporation of all work (including testing Integration: and availability work certification) for a ll organizations involved in an availability. 4.1.18 Precedence Diagram Method (PDM): Used in Critical Path Method dule network diagram using Project Management for building a project sche to show the logical relationship between schedule activities. lines and nodes 009 - 9 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

416 4.1.19 Gantt Chart: A graphic display of schedule - related information. Typically, schedule Work Activities or work breakdown structure components a re listed down the left side of the chart, dates are shown across the top, and Work Activity durations are shown as date - placed horizontal bars. The amount of time by which the early start Negative Float: 4.1.20 or finish dates of a Work Activity exceed s its late start or ending dates. The quantity of float then indicates the amount of time that must be recovered in order to achieve an imposed date. 4.1.21 Schedule of Record: The official IPS at the start of the 0 day) that includes availability (A - refined sequencing and completeness as a result of completed subcontracting actions, incorporation of additional Government Furnished Information (GFI), or any contract modifications increasing the scope of work between contract/delivery Order award and av ailability start. 4.2 The SUPERVISOR will provide, or direct provision, of the AIT, , CIS, and FMA Government S/F Contracted Third Party Maintenance Providers, - , 3.1.2.3, an d availability data required for schedule integration in 3.1.1 - . progress/de 6 ion in 3. conflict 4.3 The IPS data element export required by 8 may be used to support 3.1. the development of the Master Requirements List (MRL) and Event Readiness 04 of 2.1 and/or locally invoked certification - List (ERL) of 009 requirements. 4.4 When invoked, the following Standard Items interface with this - Standard Item: 009 43, 009 - 67 , and 009 - 81. The following codes are provided as designators for Key Events 4.5 . 7 within the IPS as directed in 3.1. Code Description / Meaning Complete Availability AC C5ILO Command, Control, Communication s, Computer, Combat Systems and Off - Intelligence (C5I) Light Dock Trials DT Fast Cruise FC Undock/Flood Dock UD PCD Engineering Plant Production Completion Date (Propulsion/Aux) Sea Trials ST The following codes are provided as designators for specific ship 4.6 . 3.1.7 systems when applied to Work Activities in the IPS as directed in More than one designator may be used for a Work Activity. This list is not inclusive - . all Code System ACE Aircra ft Elevator ACP Air Conditioning Plant 009 - 10 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

417 AG Arresting Gear Antenna ANT AUX Auxiliary Steam Bilges BIL Catapults CAT CHT Collecting, Holding and Transfer Chilled Water CHW Communications COM CNDS Condensate Combat Systems CS Countermeasures W ash Down CWA Any Decking Work DECK DC Damage Control ENG Engineering Main Feed MNFD FDK Flight Deck FM Fire Main FO Fuel Oil HAB Habitability HDK Hangar Deck HPA High Pressure Air HULL Hull IC Internal Communication JP5 JP - 5 Tanks/System LAG Lagging and Insulation LC Load Center Lube Oil LO Magazine MAG MS Main Steam NSK Non - Skid PROP Propulsion System, including Controllable Pitch Propeller PW Potable Water SCAF Scaffolding Required SS Service Steam STRG Steering System Struct STRL ural, General SW Sea Water TIS Temporary Industrial Systems Vents/Ventilation VEN Vertical Package Conveyor VPC WH Water Heaters WEL Weapons Elevator WPNS Weapons WW Waste Water 4.7 The following standard convention is used for identifying locations when applied to Work Activities in the IPS as directed in 3.1.7 . The use of as a means of documenting general terminology, such as “throughout ship ”, location shall be minimized. 130 - ompartment Number (i.e. 03 Space/C - E, etc.) - 0 - 81 - L, 6 - 2 - 009 - 11 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

418 - P or S (e.g. 04 - 190 - S or frame - Flight and Hangar Deck Locations: deck - - 1 P) - 190 P or S (e.g. 03 - P - 140 - WEA) - frame - - Weather Decks: closest deck - frame span Span of Frames: deck - P or S (e.g. for flight deck fra mes 55 - - to 100 starboard side use 04 S) - 55/100 - Masts: Use mast name (e.g. Main Mast, etc.) 009 - 12 60 of 12 ITEM NO: 1 FY - 9

419 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 - 61 009 ITEM NO: DATE: 18 JUL 2014 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : Title: Shipboard Use of Fluorocarbons; control 1.1 : REFERENCES 2. 2.1 Standard Items 2. 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for 2 Shipyard Employment 3 NFPA Standard 306, Standard for the Control of Gas Hazards on 2. Vessels 40 CFR Part 82, Protection of Stratospheric Ozone, Subpart F 4 2. 3. : REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Accomplish work associated with the use of fluorocarbons aboard ship in accordance with this item. Maintain at the work site a copy of the credentials of the 3.2 inspect and certify Competent/Qualified Person who will monitor atmosphere, spaces are safe to enter, and who will supervise all activities. A Qualified Person is defined as a National Fire Protection 3.2.1 Association Certified Marine Chemist, an Industrial Hygienist, or a Competent . These 07 of 2.1 Person as defined in 2. - 2 and trained in accordance with 009 Qualified Persons shall be capable of specifying the necessary protection and precautions to be taken during fluorocarbon operations, as designated in 2. 2 . and 2. 3 at the work site . a Maintain a copy of fluorocarbon control plan 3.3 The plan shall include the following information and shall be provided to the : SUPERVISOR upon request 3.3.1 Identification of hose/piping routes and steps to be taken to rotect hoses along those routes p Typ e and location of warning signs .3.2 3 1 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 61 FY - 1 9

420 3.3.3 Type and location o f portable ventilation required 3.3.4 Means of communication to be utilized 3.3.5 compatibility to fluorocarbons Type of hoses and material that are immediately 3.3.6 Type of emergency breathing devices accessible ide monitoring 3.3.7 Type and location of portable oxygen and hal detectors/alarms 3.3.8 vacuation and rescue procedures Emergency e pen flame and hot work controls O 3.3.9 3.3.10 Results of preliminary tests, ensuring system integrity and absence o f leakage 3.3.11 Provisions for periodic inspections that include adjacent spaces to ensure work area containment and work practices are effective Submit written notification to the SUPERVISOR and the Commanding 3.4 Officer's designated representative at least 4 hours, but not more than 24 hours prior to commencement, each time fluorocarbons are utilized aboard ship for any purpose. Identify the time, location, and purpose of each e volution. Notify the SUPERVISOR and designated ship's representative immediately prior to the actual start and upon completion of each evolution. Deliver notification of work planned Tuesday through Friday 3.4.1 presentative at least 30 minutes and to the Commanding Officer's designated re not more than 24 hours preceding start of work. Deliver notification of work planned over a weekend or Monday 3.4.2 following that weekend to the Commanding Officer's designated representative he Friday immediately preceding that weekend. no later than 0900 on t (I) "INSPECT FLUOROCARBON " EQUIPMENT A certified technician shall, as required by 2. 3.5 , pressure test the 3 fluorocarbon charging and flushing handling equipment, i.e., hoses, piping, manifolds, using dry nitrogen with trace amounts of valves, fittings, and 22 compound at 150 percent of charging equipment working pressure within - HCFC 30 days prior to use aboard ship. Hold test pressure for 15 minutes. Allowable leakage: None. tag with the following to each piece of 3.5.1 Attach a solid metal equipment passing test: Name and address of testing facility 3.5.1.1 2 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 61 FY - 1 9

421 3.5.1.2 Description of equipment 3.5.1.3 Date of test 3.5.1.4 Test pressure (I)(G) "INSPECT WORK SITE AND PROCESS PRIOR TO FLUOR OCARBON OPERATIONS" 3.6 Inspect work site to ensure the following prior to fluorocarbon operations: 3.6 .1 Provide ventilation to maintain oxygen content above 19.5 percent and not greater than 22.0 percent by volume in spaces where fluorocarbon compou nds are in use. 3. 6.2 Establish and maintain telephone communication between the pumping station and the space involved when the fluorocarbon compound is being transferred by hose or pipe. 3. 6.3 Ensure that all personnel in a space where fluorocarbon operations are being carried out have an emergency escape breathing device (EEBD) in their possession or in the immediate area so that they can quickly don the units in case of a leak. 3. 6.3.1 Each person shall have received instruction and practice in the use of the particular EEBD to be used, prior to entering each space where fluorocarbon operations are being carried out. 3. 6.4 Suspend hot work in spaces prior to hook - up, test, and disconnect operations in which fluorocarbon compounds are expose d to the atmosphere. 3. 6.4.1 Hot work is permitted in spaces traversed by lines carrying fluorocarbon compounds provided the lines are clearly tagged and no hot work is attempted within 3 feet of a tagged line. 6.5 arm or equivalent instrument 3. Provide a halide monitor with al to continuously monitor the atmosphere in spaces where fluorocarbon compounds are used. If the concentration of fluorocarbon compound in the space exceeds the T hreshold L imit V alue (TLV) for the fluorocarbon compound (where the instrument is set to alarm), clear the space of personnel, notify Quarterdeck Watch immediately and the SUPERVISOR as soon as practical but not more than 30 minutes after the instrument alarms. nce to the 3. 6.6 Post a caution sign in the area and at each entra area. 6.6.1 The sign shall read: CAUTION: No open flames. Do 3. not enter without testing the air for fluorocarbons. inch high. - The sign letters shall be at least one 6.6.2 3. 3 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 61 FY - 1 9

422 3. 6.7 Provide a minimum of 2 people trained and with the familiar operation while a fluorocarbon compound is being used in quantities exceeding 10 pounds. 3. 7 Accomplish preliminary pressure tests of charging/flushing equipment after connecting aboard ship each time equipment is used. Pressure shall percent of charging/flushing equipment working pressure. Hold test equal 100 pressure for 15 minutes. Allowable leakage: None. 3. 7 .1 Ensure charging equipment is isolated from equipment to be charged prior to test. , ensure that 3. 8 A certified technician shall, as requi red by 2. 4 fluorocarbon gases are not vented to the interior of the ship or to the atmosphere when pressure is released from the system by utilizing reclaiming/recycling equipment tested and certified by an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA ) approved laboratory or organization. 3. 8 .1 Collect CFCs and HFCs for either recycling back into the same system/piece of equipment from which the material wa s removed or recovering the CFC s for turn - in. 4. NOTES : 4.1 Following are examples of commonly used fluorocarbon compounds: Trichlorofluoromethane, Freon 11, R - 11 (CFC - 11) - 12 (CFC - 12) Dichlorodifluoromethane, Freon 12, R 503) (CFC - 13 (also component of R Chlorotrifluoromethane, R - 13) - Pentachlorofluoroethane (CFC - 111) - Tetrachlorod ifluoroethane (CFC 112) 1,1,2 Trichloro - 1,2,2 Trifluoroethane, Freon 113, Freon TF, Freon PCA, Genetron 113 (CFC - 113) - 114, Freon 114 (CFC 114) 1,2 Dichlorotetrafluotethane, R - 115) - - of R 115 (also component - Chloropentafluoroethane, R 502) (CFC 211) - Heptachlorofluoropropane (CFC - Hexachlorodifluoropropane (CFC 212) 213) - Pentachlorotrifluoropropane (CFC - 214) Tetrachlorotetrafluoropropane (CFC 215) - Trichloropentafluoropropane (CFC 216) Dichlorohexafluoropropane (CFC - Chloroheptafluoropropane (CFC - 217) 134a) Tetrafluoroethane (HFC - 4.2 EEBD equipment for Government representatives will be provided by the Government. ODS material must be procured as Government Furnished Material (GFM) 4.3 Notify the SUPERVISOR at least 14 days prior to from the DOD ODS Reserve. anticipated usage. 4 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 61 FY - 1 9

423 The following definitions are delineated by Navy policy: 4.4 To remove refrigerant in any condition from a 4.4.1 - Recover necessarily testing or system and store it in an external container without processing it in any way. Recycle - To reduce contaminants in used refrigerant by oil 4.4.2 separation and single or multiple passes through devices such as replaceable core filter dryers that reduce moisture, acidity and particul ate matter. The term usually applies to procedures implemented at the field job site or at a local service shop. 4.4.3 To reprocess refrigerant to new product Reclaim - specifications by means that may include distillation. Chemical analysis of the re frigerant is required to determine that appropriate product specifications are met. This usually implies the use of processes or procedures that are available only at refrigerant reprocessing or manufacturing facilities. 5 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 61 FY - 1 9

424 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 62 18 DATE: NOV 20 1 6 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : oiler Handhole, 1.1 Title: B Manhole Seat and Plate ; inspect REFERENCES : 2. S9221 - C1 - 2.1 Boiler s; Repair and Overhaul 010, Main Propulsion - GTP 2.2 803 - 841216, Handhole Plates and Arch Bars for Boilers 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Remove each handhole and manhole plate from each header and drum of boiler. Each plate shall be identified and tagged as t o respective boiler . manhole plate, stud, , each handhole 3.2 Wire brush clean to bare metal handhole and each . Wire brush clean to bare metal , and fastener strongback using a power driven wire cup brush. Ensure manhole gasket seating surface complete removal of rust and gasket material. Wire brush clean to bare metal external surfaces in way of 3.2.1 - "B" and "C" measurement contact areas using a power driven wire wheel or needle gun. 3.3 of handhole and manhole each gasket seating surface Visually inspect plates and the drum and header for erosion, corrosion, gouges, steam cuts, crack indications, excessive pitting, grooves, and any irregularities that may cause poor or leaky joints. Inspect external surfaces of headers in way rement areas for erosion and corrosion. Inspect studs of "B" and "C" measu and nuts for deterioration and damaged and stripped threads. 3.3.1 Visually inspect, measure, and record the following handhole and manhole gasket seating surface criteria in accordance with Paragra - ph 5 8.2 of 2.1 and Attachment A. Seat taper: Use template of flat stock and feeler 3.3.1.1 gage to measure maximum taper around periphery of handhole and manhole seats. Minimum wall thickness: Measure header wall 3.3.1.2 micrometer at each side of the header cross sectional thickness using a point minor axis. 1 of 3 62 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

425 3.3.1.3 Minimum seat thickness: Measure header seat faced micrometer at the 4 points of the header cross thickness with a flat - sectional major and minor axis. Plate Overlap: Measure maximum gap Handhole 3.3.1.4 clearance between shoulder of the handhole plate and handhole with handhole plate located in the most extreme misaligned position. Subtract the measurement from the plate seat width to establish the amount of plate ove rlap. Handhole plates used for measurements shall conform to 2.2. 3.3.1.5 Manhole Plate Clearance: Measure clearance between - degree increments, with the shoulder of manhole plate and manhole at 8, 45 manhole plate accurately centered. 3.4 , of a approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in results of the requirements of 3.3 to the SUPERVISOR. Report report listing and manhole seat which failed to meet the minimum shall list each handhole allowable values listed in Appendices 5D, 5E, and 6C of 2.1. , using new gaskets Install each handhole and manhole plate 3.5 15342 and applicable boiler technical manual. - conforming to MIL G - : 4. NOTES 4.1 Equipment technical manual will be listed in the invoking Work Item. 2 of 3 62 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

426 Attachment A 3 of 3 62 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

427 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 63 DATE: 18 NOV 2016 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Lubricating Oil and Hydraulic Fluid ; analyze 2. REFERENCES : 262, Lubricating Oils, - Greases, Specialty 010/CH 2.1 S9086 - H7 - STM - Lubricants, and Lubrication Systems 556, Hydraulic Equipment (Power Transmission and - 010/CH - - S4 - S9086 2.2 STM Control) HB 2.3 S9086 - 233, Diesel Engines - STM - 010/CH - 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Provide samples (lubricant oil or hydraulic fluids) to a certified 2 of 2.1. - laboratory as listed in Table 262 - 4 Accomplish tests of each sample in accordance with the specified 3.2 test methods of . Attachment A or Attachment B 3.2.1 Test selections shall be based on the sample type and service. 3.3 water contamination by Analyze each sample for metal content and utilizing a spectrographic analysis in accordance with ASTM D - 6595. 3.3.1 Determine if water contamination is fresh or salt water based sodium levels. on high Record and report the concentration of the following elements 3.3.2 in ppm with the indicated degree of accuracy: IRON LEAD MAGNESIUM TIN COPPER SILVER CHROMIUM ALUMINUM NICKEL SILICON SODIUM 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 63 FY - 1 9

428 reliability of the equipment 3.3.2.1 The sensitivity and used for the test shall be in accordance with ASTM D - 6595. - 4 Accomplish specific gravity test for each MIL 3. H - 19457 hydraulic sample and determine hydrocarbon oil content fluid in accordance with T able 556 8 - 1 of 2.2 . - 3. 5 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media , of a report listing completed test results of 3.2 through 3. 4 for each sample to the SUPERVISOR. 2 days Reports shall be submitted within after the qualif 5 3. ied .1 chemical laboratory receives each sample. 5 Reports shall include recommendations for continued use, .2 3. sampling of each tested oil or fluid sample. disposal, or re - 1 of 2.1 and Table 556 - 1 of 2.2 for gui - dance for 8 - 3. 6 Use Table 262 - 4 - test accept and reject criteria for each in service sample. 6 2 of 2.3 for test accept and reject criteria - 8 - 3. Use Table 233 .1 - 2104 lube oil . for 9000 Series lube oil /MIL - PRF 7 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable 3. , of original manufacturer's certificate of compliance and material media s conformance test data in accordance with Military Specification listed in Attachment A and Attachment B . , 7 days prior to use of new fluids and oils 4. NOTES : 4.1 . Ship's Force will label all samples in accordance with 2.1 and 2.2 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 63 FY - 1 9

429 ATTACHMENT A LUBRICATING OILS 17672 - PRF MIL - ASTM - PRF - 2104 MIL - MIL - PRF MIL 9000 PRF - 17331 - TH MS - 2075 - VV 825 - L MIL - PRF - 23699 - TEST MS - 9250 - TEP 2190 15W/40 MS TH - 2110 - METHOD - MS TH 2135 - FUEL DILUTION VIA FLASH X X POINT ASTM D93 PERCENT WATER X X X X ASTM D6304 VISCOSITY X X X X ASTM D445 ACID NO. X X X X X ASTM D974 TOTAL BASE NO. X X ASTM D2896 SPECTROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS X X X X X X ASTM D6595 of 4 63 - 009 ITEM NO: X - 3 IDENTIFIES EACH TEST REQUIRED FOR EACH FLUID TYPE 9 1 - FY

430 ATTACHMENT B HYDRAULIC FLUIDS 2104 - PRF - MIL ASTM 17672 - - MIL PRF MIL - 17331 - PRF 22072 - H - 19457 17111 - DTL MIL MIL - H MIL - - TEST MS TH 2075 - - MS TEP - 2190 - METHOD MS - 2110 - TH MS - 2135 - TH FLASH POINT X X D92 ASTM PERCENT WATER X ASTM D95 PERCENT WATER X X X X ASTM D6304 VISCOSITY X X X ASTM D445 ACID NO. X X X X ASTM D974 PARTICLE COUNT NAS/SAE 4059 X X X X X (Automatic Particle Count Method) ITEM NO: X - 63 - 009 IDENTIFIES EACH TEST REQUIRED FOR EACH FLUID TYPE of 4 4 1 FY - 9

431 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 64 DATE: 18 NOV 20 16 CATEGORY: I I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Synthetic Fire - Resistant Hydraulic Fluid; control 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 None. 3. REQUIREMENTS : - H - Accomplish the following for control of MIL 3.1 - H - 19457 and/or MIL 22072 Synthetic Fire - Resistant Hydraulic Fluid: 3.1.1 Monitor each and exercise positive control of accesses to and egresses from areas in which the hydraulic fluid is being handled. 3.1.1.1 Post warning signs at entrances and in work areas (2 - inch minimum letters on signs) stating: CAUTION: SYNTHETIC FIRE - RESISTA NT HYDRAULIC FLUID HANDLING. UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL KEEP OUT. 3.1.1.2 shall be roped off or otherwise secured and Each area identified. 3.1.2 Hydraulic fluid shall be contained and immediately cleaned up in event of spill. 3.1.2.1 Rags in sufficient quantity shall be on hand to clean up and control spills. 3.1.2.2 Plastic bags for disposal of oily rags shall be available and partially filled or filled bags removed at the end of each shift. pumped into drums stenciled: 3.1.2.3 Used fluid shall be USED SYNTHETIC FLUID, for disposal. 3.1.3 Requirements for handling: In addition to normal personal protective equipment 3.1.3.1 (PPE), rubber gloves, face shields, and rubber aprons shall be used by resistant hydraulic fluid. - personnel handling fire 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 64 FY - 1 9

432 3.1.3.2 Spills on clothing shall be cause to remove clothing and rinse in fresh water. 3.1.3.3 Spills on skin shall be washed with soap and rinsed with fresh water. 3.2 Report verbally each spill in excess of 5 gallons as soon as management becomes aware of such an event. , of a approved transferrable media 3.2.1 Submit one legible copy, in formal written report of the event to the SUPERVISOR within one day . Upon completion of work the contractor shall notify the SUPERVISOR 3.3 in writing of the completion of the work, certifying that the area is cleaned and that the area is safe to enter. : NOTES 4. 4.1 None. 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 64 FY - 1 9

433 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 65 ITEM NO: - 009 DATE: 01 OCT 2017 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs); control Title: : 2. REFERENCES 2.1 40 CFR Part 761, Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and Use Prohibitions 2.2 Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) : REQUIREMENTS 3. Visually inspect equipment suspected of containing PCBs for leaks, 3.1 prior to opening, removing, or installing deterioration, and corrosion equipment. approved transferrable media , of Submit one legible copy, in 3.1.1 a report listing results of the inspection conducted in 3.1 to the SUPERVISOR a leak, deterioration, or corrosion is found if . Consider wool felt to contain PCBs and chromium. 3.2 approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in , of 3.2.1 a report listing the type of wool felt (gasket or damping material), VISOR. location, and approximate quantity to the SUPER Provide a copy of a control, method of removal, and disposal plan in 3.3 accordance with 2.1 and/or 2.2 to the SUPERVISOR. : NOTES 4. None. 4.1 1 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 65 FY - 1 9

434 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 67 01 DATE: OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: I SCOPE: 1. manage Title: Integrated Total Ship Testing; 1.1 REFERENCES: 2. 2.1 Standard Items for 2.2 S9AAO AB - GOS - 010, General Specifications - Overhaul of Surface Ships (GSO) Test Program Manual Total Ship - 2.3 S9095 - AD - TRQ 010/TSTP, 2.4 MIL - 2106 (SH), Development of Shipboard Industrial Test - STD Procedures 2.5 Maintenance Manual (JFMM) Joint Fleet 3. REQUIREMENTS: Ship 3.1 an Integrated Total Develop Test Plan (ITSTP), using contracted work package and available GFI. Comprehensive Prepare and manage a 3.1.1 Test Plan (CTP) in - accordance with Section 092c of 2.2; using 009 60 of 2.1, and 04 and 009 - 2.3 for guidance. the Define and document 3.1.1.1 responsibility, lines of authority, and interrelation of personnel who manage, assist, perform, or verify work. 3.1.1.2 Include provisions for completion of total ship testing through Stage 6 in accordance with section 092c of 2.2 and 2.3 - 60 of 2.1 (See 4.1 for prior to dock trials using data from 009 examples). copy, 3.1.1.3 Submit one legible in approved later no SUPERVISOR the to 15 days transferrable media, of the CTP than ility b availa start date. prior to 3.1.2 Include a Test Schedule (TS). (See 4.3 and 4.4) 1 of 5 67 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

435 special purpose 3 Include a list of 3.1. test equipment and | software, with required dates and responsible provider (See 4. 6 ). for special 3 .1 Provide the requirements 3.1. purpose test to equipment, weapon test shapes, dummy loads, and test weights, accomplish total testing. Identify known and anticipated ship deficiencies in required type, quantity, calibration, or availability to support the production or test schedule. 3.1. 4 Include organizational responsibility for equipment operation, start up, and accomplishment of testing, including manning requirements. contractor, Alteration SUPERVISOR, of list a Include 5 3.1. Installation (AIT), and Ship's Force key test Team team personnel, with - off authority. test sign 3.1. 6 Include administrative procedures for submittal of Test Problem Reports (TPRs), Test Failure Reports (TFRs), and test status. media, e l transferrab approved legible in copy, 3.1. of 7 Submit one availability. the of start the no later than SUPERVISOR the ITSTP to the 3.2 Provide Test Procedures (TP) for all Stage 3 through 7 Tests as specified in the work item. 3.2.1 Reuse existing Government approved test procedures when available. Test and Evaluation Automated Management Information System Nuclear Surface Ship Test procedure - (TEAMIS), the government’s Non roved Government management program, shall be the primary source for app test procedures per 2.3. Modify existing test procedures to limit scope to 3.2.1.1 match repair and/or update to match current equipment or revised the test requirements. All modified test procedures specifications for shall comply wi th 2.4. 3.2.2 Develop new test procedures when reusable product is not available for the required tests. All new test procedures shall comply with 2.4. 3.2.2.1 Cover sheet must designate ship or ship class and review signatures. system or component, and provide completed one 3.2.3 Submit legible transferrable media, of approved in copy, each test procedure to the SUPERVISOR for review and approval. Submission shall be no later than 14 days prior to start of the required test or as otherwise designated by the SUPERVISOR. 2 of 5 67 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

436 3.2.4 Submit legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of one each updated or changed test procedure to the SUPERVISOR at least 3 days prior to implementation. 3.2.5 Make pen - and ink editorial changes to the test procedure - when required after testing commences. Editorial changes are limited to those correcting typographical errors. All other changes are considered technical and require SUPERVISOR approval. 3.2.5.1 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of any editorial change made to the test procedure to the SUPERVISO R within one day of making the change. 3.2.6 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a report to the SUPERVISOR identifying any technical changes required after testing has commenced and prior to proceeding with the affected procedura l steps. 3.2.6.1 Make technical changes to the test procedure and proceed when approved by the SUPERVISOR. 3.2.7 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of the completed test procedure no later than 1 day after test completion. 3.3 Ma nage the Total Ship Testing Task Group (TSTTG) to coordinate the test program in accordance with Section 092c of 2.2 . SUPERVISOR The group shall consist 3.3.1 of representatives of the and Force, Ship's scene, on (acts as Chairman), Contractor, AIT Team(s) shall and others as requested by the SUPERVISOR or LMA (See 4.8) weekly meet unless otherwise directed the SUPERVISOR. by all problems impacting schedule 3.3.2 Evaluate and document and/or satisfying technical requirements. 3.3.3 Maintain agendas and minutes . As a minimum, agendas shall include tests completed since last meeting, tests not completed as scheduled with explanation and plan to resolve, issues impacting testing, and tests scheduled within the next 2 weeks . Minutes shall include a list highlights and of attendees, action items with assignments, of proceedings, potential identified problems with impact. 3.3.4 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of the minutes , and changes to the ITSTP no later than 2 business days after | each meeting. to the ITSTP to TSTTG CTP and 3.3.5 Distribute minutes and changes after 2 business days than later each members no meeting. Ship Total 3.4 Testing. Manage 3 of 5 67 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

437 3.4.1 Accomplish requirements of the the ITSTP of 3.1. 3.4.2 Incorporate all updates to ITSTP and status of Total Ship Testing including growth and new work no later than 24 hours after each TSTTG meeting. 3.4.3 Coordinate testing in accordance with the ITSTP. 3.4.4 Coordinate stationing of test in accordance with personnel the ITSTP. Provide test procedures and test data sheets to test personnel. performance and the procedure test each of 3.4.5 Coordinate record results. test 4. NOTES: Test stage examples, not all inclusive. 4.1 and Shop Tests: Material Receipt Inspection Stage 1 – Physical inspection of new material, equipment and systems, - and associated documentation. - Ensure receipt of equipment is in good physical condition. - Formal test procedure not required typically. spection and Tests: Stage 2 – Shipboard Installation In Cable integrity verification and insulation resistance checks. - - Hydrostatic tests of piping systems. - Coolant flushing. - Pre - energizing tests. Stage 3 Equipment Tests: – - Equipment element level initial light off, diagnostic and functional tests. - Hinged/retractable mast operational test. - Shaft torsion meter performance test. Stage 4 System Tests: - Intra – Propulsion seawater cooling system operational test. - - Auxiliary propulsion system operational test. - Diesel ge nerator parallel and reverse power load bank test. - System local area network interface test. - Navigation system alignment verification. – Inter - System Tests: Stage 5 Search radar distribution & display interface test. - 73 external interface test. - SPS - - AN/SPQ - 9B video and trigger verification. - AN/SPN - 41A stabilization verification. Integrated propulsion test. - 4 of 5 67 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

438 Stage 6 Special Tests: – - EMI Phase I test (dockside). - Hull generated IMI test. - Data Link opera tional demonstrations dockside. - SSDS MK 2 MOD 4B Combat System Integration test (dockside). - Stage 7 Trials Tests: - Radar set operational test (at sea). - EMI Phase I test (at sea). - Landing system correlation verification test (at - sea). - Propu lsion plant performance tests. - SSDS MK 2 MOD 4B detect to engage demonstration (at sea). ITSTP the Portions of include: may 4.2 GFI required to develop FMA/FMR Work Schedule, Ships Force Work List (ITP), Test Package Integrated test AIT (SFWL), IDIQ, Test Index, and requirements unavailable to known the contractor. 4.3 Coordination of preparations for Sea Trials, including the test schedule for all planned underway testing will be included with the requirements of 009 - 60 of 2.1. 4.4 The Test Schedule is composed of the export of Integrated Production Schedule (IPS) data elements, developed in accordance with 009 - 60 of 2.1, sorted to include only test work activities. Commanding 4.5 The ship's recording for Officer will provide personnel testing. during data 4.6 Special purpose test equipment and software are defined as having unique functions and whose use is controlled and managed by an outside activity. 01 and - 4.7 This standard item interfaces with 009 04 of 2.1 for - 009 test and inspection records. 4.8 The Lead Maintenance Activity (LMA)is defined in 2.5. MSRA/ABR contractors tasked with availability schedule management under 009 - 60/009 - 111 of 2.1 are considered the LMA. 5 of 5 67 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

439 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 68 01 DATE: OCT 7 201 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Title: Bolted Bonnet Valve; repair 1.1 2. REFERENCES : - 2.1 S9086 - CJ STM - 010/CH - 075, Fasteners Requirements for Nondestructive Testing T9074 2 AS 010/271, - GIB - - 2. Methods MIL 2. 3 - STD - 2035, Nondestructive Testing Acceptance Criteria AD - 2. 4 S9253 - 010, Maintenance Manual for Valves, Traps, and Orifices - MMM - Nuclear), User's Guide and General Information (Non 3. REQUIREMENTS : . 3.1 Matchmark each valve part (V) "INSPECT PARTS FOR DEFECTS" 3.2 luding paint), and Disassemble, clean free of foreign matter (inc inspect each part for defects. determine the bound studs only to 3.2.1 The removal of body - condition of threads is not required. | ) (I) or (V) “TORQUE TEST” (See 4.3 bound stud in accordance with Section - each body Torque test 3.2.2 075 8.6.3.2(d) of 2.1. - (I) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECT" each seat Accomplish liquid penetrant inspection of 3 3.2. , or gate in accordance with 2. (including back seat), disc . 2 .1 3 Acceptance criter ia shall be in accordance with 3.2. faced areas of seats and - , except hairline cracks in hard 3 Paragraph 7 of 2. 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 68 FY - 1 9

440 discs or gate are acceptable provided the valve does not show evidence of leakage. 3.3 Repair each valve as follows: 3.3.1 Straighten stem to wi thin 0.002 - inch total indicator reading. Polish stem to a 32 Root - Mean - Square finish in way of packing surface and remove raised edges and foreign matter. each exposed threaded area Chase and tap 3.3.2 . Clean and spot 3.3.3 e - in bonnet to body gasket ach mating surface . each seat in gate or discs to - Machine, grind, or lap and spot 3.3.4 degree continuous contact. - (including back seat) to obtain a 360 (V) "INSPECT CONTACT" 3.3.4.1 Inspect contact using blueing method. for gate valve shall not exceed 3/16 Transfer line 3.3.4.2 inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of the gate seating surface. Transfer line for globe valve shall not exceed 1/16 3.3.4.3 inch in width. (I)(G) "VERIFY LEVEL I PARTS" in 3.4 Assemble valve, installing new each gasket and each fastener . or instruction e manufacturer's specification accordance with th 3.4.1 Pack feedwater, condensate, and steam valves with valve stem - - ng conforming to MIL P 24503/24583 combination in accordance with packi . Chapter 6 of 2. 4 other than feedwater, condensate, or Pack valves of systems 3.4.2 steam with valve stem packing conforming to MIL - P - 24396, Type B. : NOTES 4. Operational test of valve will be specified in Work Item. 4.1 4.2 Repair of valve operating gear will be specified in Work Item. 4.3 The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I) if the valve is Level I. If the valve is not Level I, the paragraph is considered a (V). 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 68 FY - 1 9

441 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 9 FY - 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 7 201 01 OCT DATE: I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : Title: /Mooring Plan; provide Heavy Weather 1.1 : REFERENCES 2. 2.1 845 - 6686999 Rev E, US Navy Vessel Water Depth, Mooring and Hull/Appendage Clearance Requirements for Transit and Berthing 1, Design Data Sheet, Calculations for Mooring Systems DDS 582 2.2 - 582, Mooring and Towing 2.3 S9086 - TW - STM - - 010/CH - 2.4 UFC 4 15 9 - 03, Mooring Design : REQUIREMENTS . 3 3.1 Maintain that shall be implemented Heavy Weather Plan a written during gales, storms, hurricanes, and destructive weather, including mooring calculations in accordance with 2.1 and 2.2, 4 and 2. using 2. 3 for guidance. The documented Heavy Weather Plan shall be submitted to the SUPERVISOR for a review and acceptance. The contractor shall have an acceptable document documented Heavy Weather Plan, in accordance with this Standard Item, in an 15 days prior to availability start date. The Heavy place no later th Weather Plan shall be subject to periodic conformity audits by the SUPERVISOR throughout the contract. 3.1. 1 Submit updated or changed plans to the SUPERVISOR as they occur. 3.2 plan designates responsibility and implements Ensure that the procedures for prevention of damage to naval ships, craft, barges, and lighters. This includes periods when ships, craft, barges, and lighters are s when work on physically located in private contractors' plants; during time ships, craft, barges, and lighters at naval facilities requires openings to hulls or decks; and when contractor owned/furnished floating equipment is tied alongside ships, craft, barges, and lighters. responsibilities and detailed The plan shall contain specific 3.2.1 actions to be taken during the weather conditions listed below. 1 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

442 3.2.2 Conditions where there is substantial advance warning for approaching adverse weather are addressed by the following 4 categories: m/Hurricane Condition IV 3.2.2.1 Gale/Stor : Trend indicates a possible threat of destructive winds of force indicated within 72 hours. 3.2.2.2 : Destructive Gale/Storm/Hurricane Condition III winds of force indicated are possible within 48 hours. : Destructive /Hurricane Condition II 3.2.2.3 Gale/Storm winds of force indicated are anticipated within 24 hours. 3.2.2.4 Gale/Storm/Hurricane Condition I : Destructive winds of force indicated are anticipated within 12 hours or less. s little or no advance warning for Conditions where there i 3.2.3 approaching adverse weather are addressed by the following 2 categories: 3.2.3.1 Thunderstorm/Tornado Condition II : Destructive winds accompanying the phenomenon indicated are reported or expected in the general ar ea within 6 hours. Lightning and thunder are also anticipated. : Destructive winds Thunderstorm/Tornado Condition I 3.2.3.2 accompanying the phenomenon are imminent. Lightning and thunder are also anticipated. Ensure that the plan contains, as a minimum, the following 3.3 information as dictated by conditions listed in 3.2: Steps to be taken to remove or secure staging items or 3.3.1 r or dry dock, equipment on decks of ships, craft, barges, and lighters, pie - including cranes that could become wi nd borne. 3.3.2 Protection of ships, craft, barges, and lighters from damage from other floating equipment, such as barges, doughnuts, work floats, and other ships, craft, barges, and lighters. and 3.3.3 Provisions for protection of government equipment material in custody of the contractor from damage by pierside flooding. Provisions for removal of temporary hoses, welding lines, air 3.3.4 lines, oxygen/acetylene lines, etc., extending through watertight closures. emergency fire and flooding Provisions for security, 3.3.5 protection, emergency shipboard dewatering and fire main capability, emergency shipboard electrical generation, and emergency shipboard communications. Specific requirements for emergency shipboard fire 3.3.5.1 ity are shown on Attachment A. main capabil 2 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

443 The minimum requirements for emergency shipboard 3.3.5.2 electrical generation equipment are shown on Attachment B. One portable dewatering pump and associated 3.3.5.3 equipment shall be available adjacent to each damage control equipment box such that 200 gal/min at a discharge head of 50 feet of dewatering capacity can be used at the scene of a casualty within 3 minutes of receiving an alarm. Additional dewatering capacity to provide 1,000 gal/min at a discharge head of 50 feet at the scene shall be available within 15 minutes. During the waterborne overhaul period, no damage control system associated with flooding prevention and control or any portion thereof shall be removed or made SUPERVISOR fication of the inoperable without prior noti - and to the casualty up system has been established. - control station and until a back Provisions for access to the ship for personnel and emergency 3.3.6 prudent equipment during and immediately following the storm consistent with safety precautions. 3.3.7 Assurance that all hull/deck openings are made watertight. 3.3.8 Steps to be taken to secure floating piers during high winds/high tides. Provisions for messing contractor, Ship's Force, and 3.3.9 SUPERVISOR duty personnel for 3 days (minimum). The maximum number of Navy personnel will be 15. The name and telephone number (business and residential) of 3.3.10 the private contractor's single point of contact. This person shall have the ntractor to take necessary actions as requested by authority to commit the co the SUPERVISOR. Provisions for operation and manning of a Hurricane Control 3.3.11 Center, with capabilities of telephone and portable radio communications with duty personnel. SUPERVISOR the ship and Ensure that the plan contains the following mooring related 3.4 information: Specify steps to be taken to secure ships, craft, barges, and 3.4.1 lighters to contractor's pier, dry dock, graving dock, marine railway, or other facility. Inf ormation must define specific precautions to contractor's be taken and supporting calculations, to include limits of docking blocks and dock stability for both normal and heavy weather conditions. Calculations dal considerations. for heavy weather configurations shall include wind and ti 3.4.1.1 Provide the heavy weather state at which the ship must be undocked. Submit mooring calculations for the worst anticipated loading 3.4.2 condition during the availability. For ships with a self compensating fuel - 3 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

444 system, - compensation fuel system the loading condition shall show the self full of water, fuel, or some combination of fuel and water, projecting the worse possible condition as shown in calculations for maintaining ship’s stability . Determine the combined loadi ng due to wind load from each direction and both peak flood and ebb current loads at low and high tide s. Calculations may require re - submittal if significant changes occur from the original estimate on which the calculations were based. 3.4.3 For ships in dry dock, provide limits and supporting calculations for listed conditions. Analyze both the "normal" dock configuration and the "heavy weather" configuration. 3.4.3.1 Maximum safe wind speed and surge for side block strength and stability. Include maximum loading of the side blocks on ship. Maximum safe wind speed and surge for dry dock 3.4.3.2 strength and stability. 3.4.3.3 Surge required to float ship. 3.4.3.4 Table or graph showing safe combinations of wind speed and surge. 3.4.4 For ships pierside, provide limits and supporting calculations for ship loading conditions specified in 3.4.2. Analyze the "heavy weather" mooring configuration that would be used during the irections including case wind d - . Analyze worst 3.2 conditions specified in frontal, broadside, and quartering. 3.4.4.1 Maximum safe wind speed for mooring strength. Include strength of pier, pier fittings, mooring lines, and shipboard fittings. Maximum applied load on any mooring line shall be the breaki ng strength of the mooring line divided by 2.5 (factor of safety of 2.5). 3.4.4.2 Maximum safe surge for mooring. Maximum safe elongation of mooring lines. Include 3.4.4.3 the following information: Size and type of mooring line; elongation of mooring line at failure; Percent Tattletale - free length and length between attachments. 3.4.4.4 Sketch, showing size, type, and location (vertical and horizontal angles) of all securing devices including fenders, bumpers, and camels. 3.4.5 Include the following statement, providing the necessary data: ___ can be safely moored to withstand a maximum of __________ USS mph winds knot current and a __ with a foot storm surge. __ 4 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

445 4. : NOTES The SUPERVISOR will set Conditions of Readiness consistent with the 4.1 forecasts and advisories of the local Weather Service Office of National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). 4.2 NOAA defines the 5 categories of hurricanes as follows: CATEGORY WIND SPEED STORM SU RGE 1 74 - 95 MPH OR 4 - 5 FT ABOVE NORMAL 2 8 FT ABOVE NORMAL - 110 MPH OR 6 - 96 - 3 111 1 29 MPH OR 9 - 12 FT ABOVE NORMAL 18 FT ABOVE - MPH OR 13 6 15 - NORMAL 4 0 13 7 MPH OR HIGHER OR GREATER THAN 18 FT 15 5 ABOVE NORMAL 4.3 Attachment C contains regional heavy weather conditions based on historical data and is provided as information only; the historical data is not intended to place limitations/restrictions on other values appropriate Supervising Activity for their and/or previously authorized by a Naval cognizant contractor(s) sites. - The Heavy Weather Plan submitted in 3.1 requires a one 4.4 time submittal/acceptance unless this NAVSEA Standard Item and/or references change or contractor's status changes. 5 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

446 ATTACHMENT A RE PROTECTION WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS FI FLOW, GPM SHIP TYPE * Destroyer Tender 1,500 AD Degaussing Ship ADG 500 AF Store Ship 1,500 AG Miscellaneous Auxiliary Ship 1,500 AGEH Hydrofoil Research Ship 500 2,000 Miscellaneous Flagship AGF AGFF 1,000 Frigate Research Ship AGM Missile Range Instrumentation Ship 1,500 AGMR Major Communications Relay Ship 1,500 AGOR Oceanographic Research Ship 500 AGP Gunboat Support Ship 2,000 AGS 1,000 Surveying Ship AH Hospital Ship 1,000 AK Cargo Ship 1,500 AKS Store Issue Ship 1,500 Vehicle Cargo Ship 1,500 AKR Net Laying Ship ANL 500 AO Oiler 1,500 Fast Combat Support Ship AOE 1,500 AOG Gasoline Tanker 1,000 AP Transport Ship 1,000 APB Self propelled Barracks Ship - 500 AR Repair Ship 1,500 ARB Battle Damage Repair Ship 500 ARC Cable Repair and Laying Ship 1,000 1,500 Internal Combustion Engine Repair Ship ARG Landing Craft Repair Ship ARL 1,000 Salvage Ship 500 ARS ARSD Salvage Lifting Ship 500 1,000 ARST Salvage Tender Aircraft Repair Ship ARVA 1,000 Aircraft Engine Ship 1,000 ARVE Helicopter Tender ARVH 1,500 AS Submarine Tender 1,500 600 Submarine Rescue Ship ASR 500 Ocean Tug ATA Ocean Tug Fleet 500 ATF 500 Salvage and Rescue Tug ATS AVM Guided Missile Ship 1,500 CV, CVN Aircraft Carrier 3,000 Guided Missile Cruiser 1,000 CG 6 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

447 ATTACHMENT A FIRE PROTECTION WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS (Con't) SHIP TYPE * FLOW (GPM) DDG Guided Missile Destroyer 1,000 FFG Guided Missile Frigate 1,000 IX Unclassified Miscellaneous 1,500 LCC Amphibious Command Ship 1,000 LCS 1,000 Littoral Combat Ship 2,500 ** LHA Amphibious Assault Ship LHD Amphibious Assault Ship 2,500 LKA Amphibious Cargo Ship 1,500 LPD Amphibious Transport Dock 1,500 *** LSD *** 2,000 Landing Ship Dock Repair and Berthing Barge 500 YRB Repair, Berthing and Messing Barge YRBM 500 Repair, Berthing and Messing Barge (large) 500 YRBL LST Landing Ship Tank 1,500 *** MCM Mine Counter Measures Ship 750 Patrol Coastal 500 PC Hydrofoil Patrol Craft 500 PCH 500 Patrol Combatants PG Hydrofoil Gunboat 500 PGH * All flows are from the pier or dry dock outlet and are available at adequate residual pressures from those systems in compliance with present design criteria for dry docks and piers as reflected in NAVFAC design - 150 - 12, UFC 4 - 150 - - 02, and 01, UFC 4 manuals (UFC 4 - 213 - 10, UFC 4 - 213 06). - 150 - UFC 4 inch - ** Includes supply to operate 2 hangar sprinkler groups and 2, 2 1/2 - hoselines. - *** Includes supply to operate one sprinkler group and 2, 2 - 1/2 inch hoses. 7 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

448 ATTACHMENT B HEAVY WEATHER EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENT MINIMUM POWER REQUIREMENT (KILOWATTS EXCEPT AS NOTED) SHIP TYPE (NOTE 3) 358 AD 15, 18, 19 Destroyer Tender AD 37, 38 529 AD 41, 42, 43, 44 809 AE 2 6 64 CL Ammunition Ship 2 ence Support Ship 186 AGDS 2 Deep Submerg AGF 3, 11 Miscellaneous Flagship 498 AGM Missile Range Instrumentation Ship AGOR 11, 23 Oceanographic Research Ship AGOS 1 Ocean Surveil lance Ship 109 AGOS 19 Ocean Surveillance Ship 246 AGS Survey Ship 221 AH Hospital Ship 628 AK Cargo Ship AKR Vehicle Cargo Ship AO(J) 51, 98, 99 Oiler 186 AO 105, 143, 187 Oiler AO 177CL 373 AO 177 (JUMBO) Oiler 451 436 AOE 1CL Fast Combat Support Ship 090 , AOE 6 Fast Combat Support Ship 1 AOT 168 Transport Oiler AP 122 Transport Ship APL Berthing and Messing Barge AR 5, 6, 7, 8 Repair Ship 373 ARC Cable Repair and Laying Ship 264 ARD Auxiliary Repair Dock ARDM Medium Auxiliary Repair Dock 8 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

449 ATTACHMENT B (CON'T) R HEAVY WEATHE EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENT MINIMUM POWER REQUIREMENT (KILOWATTS EXCEPT AS NOTED) SHIP TYPE (NOTE 3) 15 ARS 8, 38CL Salvage Ship ARS 50CL Salvage Ship 100 AS 11 Submarine Tender 327 AS 18 436 AS 19 559 AS 31, 32 622 AS 33, 34 529 AS 36, 37 467 653 AS 39, 40, 41 ASR 9, 13, 14, 15 Submarine Rescue 16 ASR 21CL 124 ATF 91, 113 Ocean Tug Fleet 16 Salvage and Rescue Tug 93 ATS 1CL BB Battleship 436 CG 16 - 24 Guided Missile Cruiser 467 CG 26CL 358 47CL 638 CG CG 52CL 623 CGN 9 Guided Missile Cruiser (Nuclear) 872 CGN 25 872 CGN 35 872 CGN 36CL, 38CL 653 62, 66 Air craft Carrier , 152 1 CV 60 - 339 , 1 CV 63, 64, 67 837 , CVN 65 Aircraft Carrier (Nuclear) 1 - CVN 68 70 2 , 491 CVN 71 CVN 72 9 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

450 ATTACHMENT B (CON'T) HEAVY WEATHER EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENT MINIMUM POWER REQUIREMENT (KILOWATTS SHIP TYPE (NOTE 3) EXCEPT AS NOTED) 963 DD - 992, 997 Destroyer 498 DDG 2CL Guided Missile Destroyer 280 37CL 358 DDG DDG 51CL 1 , 121 DDG 993CL 662 FFT 1052CL Frigate (Reserve Training) 202 436 Guided Missile Frigate 7CL FFG LCC 19, 20 436 Amphibious Command Ship LCU* Landing Craft LHA 1CL Amphibious Assault Ship 840 LHD 1CL LKA 113CL Attack Cargo Ship 218 218 1, 2, 4CL, 7CL, 14CL Amphibious Transport LPD LPD 17CL 1 , 050 280 2, 3, 7, 9 LPH Amphibious Assault Ship - 12 LSD 36CL Landing Ship Dock 295 LSD 41CL 334 1179CL LST Landing Ship Tank 280 80 1 Mine Countermeasures MCM 50 Patrol Coastal PC PHM 35 Missile Patrol Guided 6 - 1 Combatants (NOTE 2) YD Floating Crane * Type includes ASDV, YFU, YFB 10 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

451 ATTACHMENT B (CON'T) HEAVY WEATHER EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENT MINIMUM POWER REQUIREMENT (KILOWATTS SHIP TYPE EXCEPT AS NOTED) (NOTE 3) YRB Repair & Berthing Barge YRBM Repair, Berthing and Messing Barge YTB Harbor Tug (Large) Yard Craft (Misc.) : The power requirement listed is the minimum considered GENERAL NOTES necessary for emergency power if the main source of shore power is lost during heavy weather situations. Each contractor's heavy weather plan shall specify the individual power capacity for each ship connected to the ship's - shore power distribution system. Electrical information referenced from MIL 1025/2. HDBK - : NOTES CAPACITY IS GIVEN IN KW. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. INPUT VOLTAGE IS - 1 450 VOLTS, 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE, 60 HERTZ, UNGROUNDED. POWER FACTOR IS APPROXIMATELY 0.8. REQUIREMENT IS TO SUPPORT AN EXISTING PORTABLE MOTOR GENERATOR SET WHICH - 2 CONVERTS THE 60 HERTZ POWER TO 400 HERTZ POWER. THE MOTOR GENERATOR SET NORMALLY ACCOMPANIES THE SHIP SUPPORT FACILITIES. 3 - POWER REQUIREMENTS FOR ANY SHIP TYPE NOT LISTED SHALL BE DETERMINED BY COMPARISON WITH A SHIP(S) OF SIMILAR DESIGN LOAD AND APPROPRIATE SHIP'S NFORMATION BOOK. I 11 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

452 ATTACHMENT C HEAVY WEATHER CONDITIONS WIND CURRENT SURGE SITE (Knots) (Knots) (Feet) Bath, ME 83 2.5 8.7 Portsmouth NSY, NH 84 3.8 12.8 87 0.2 10.8 SUBBASE New London, CT Norfolk NSY, VA 82 0.4 8.9 NAVSTA Norfolk, VA 87 0.8 8.4 91 7.1 0.3 NAB Little Creek, VA Newport News Ship Building, 87 VA 8.4 1.3 96 0.3 9.1 SUBBASE Kings Bay, GA NAVSTA Mayport, FL 96 3.1 7.5 NAVSTA Pascagoula, MS 104 Negligible 6.1 NAVSTA Ingleside, TX 109 2 16.2 74 0.6 14.4 NAVSTA Everett, WA SUBBASE Bangor, WA 64 1.1 14.7 Puget Sound NSY, WA 15.4 0.5 64 8.4 0.6 NAS North Island, CA 52 Pearl Harbor NSY, HI 3.5 Negligible 87 122 Guam 2 4.7 Not Available 89 Negligible La Maddelana, Italy 12 of 12 ITEM NO: 009 - 69 FY - 1 9

453 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM 9 FY - 1 09 0 ITEM NO: 70 - 18 NOV 6 201 DATE: CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : Confined Space Entry, Certification, Fire Fire Protection, 1.1 Title: Vessels Prevention and Housekeeping for Unmanned ; accomplish REFERENCES : 2. Standard Items 2.1 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for 2.2 Shipyard Employment 29 CFR Part 1910.134, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, 2.3 Respiratory Protection 2.4 NFPA Standard 51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work NFPA Standard 312, Standard for Fire Protection of Vessels During 2.5 Construction, Repair, and Lay - up 2.6 merican Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) A Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents NAVSEA OP 7 2. 4, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat - : REQUIREMENTS 3. Comply with the requirements of 2.2 through 2.5 and this item for an 3.1 to determine whether or not an explosive or other dangerous unmanned vessel atmosphere exists in tanks, spaces, and associated piping, including adjacent tanks, spaces, and piping, aboard the craft and control hot work and entry to craft or injury to personnel during those spaces to preclude damage to the the of this Job Order. accomplishment 3.1.1 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of a list of tanks or spaces to be opened or certified to the SUPERVISOR at least . one day prior to opening the tank or void 3 1 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

454 88 of 2.1 - Comply with additional requirements of 009 3.1.1.1 when accomplishing work in Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) and Motor Gasoline (MOGAS) tanks, spaces, or associated piping. 3.1.1.2 For fuel tanks that contain or have or spaces - 5, in addition to the atmospheric - 76 and JP contained fuel, including F - testing required by 2.2, test for diesel fuel (CAS No. 68334 - 30 - 5; 68476 - 30 34 - - 3) as total hydrocarbons in accordance - 28 - 6, 77650 - 3; 68476 2; 68476 - 31 with 2.6, a nd record total hydrocarbon test results on the Marine Chemist record . om Certificate or C petent person’s tests/ inspection 3.1.2 Provide initial and annual update training for Competent sociation (NFPA) Certified Persons by utilizing a National Fire Protection As . The length of the initial training class Instructor Marine Chemist or NFPA shall be at least 24 hours. Annual update training shall be at least 8 hours. Maintain a current roster of designated Competent 3.1.2.1 nd copies of certificates of completion for the training required Person(s) a in 3.1.2 for reference by the SUPERVISOR. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of the specific documents when requested by the SUPERVISOR. C Post a copy of the M 3.1.3 ertificate, Certified arine Chemist Industrial Hygienist's test/inspection record, or Competent Person's test/inspection record at each access to the affected space while work in the copy of the MCC or test/inspect When requested, a ion space is in progress. record shall also be delivered to a location designated by the SUPERVISOR. In the event that the space is identified to be NOT SAFE FOR WORKERS or NOT other affected SAFE FOR HOT WORK, the space shall be posted accordingly and (if applicable) Ship’s Force the SUPERVISOR and contractors, shall be notified immediately. The posted copy shall be clearly visible and legible. Initial certification of spaces that require a 3.1.3.1 ion record in Certified MCC or Certified Industrial Hygienist's test/inspect support of work operations shall be effective until conditions change which A Competent Person would void the certificate or test/inspection record. shall conduct the same Atmosphere testing as annotated on the MCC Certified nist's test/inspection record. Industrial Hygie For those certified spaces which employees will 3.1.3.2 test , and record each space enter, a Competent Person shall visually inspect certified as ENTER WITH RESTRICTIONS or SAFE FOR WORKERS as often as minimum, prior to entry by employees on a daily basis. necessary, and as a If a space is not to be entered on any given day, it is not required to be inspected and tested by a Competent Person. The initial MCC remains valid if he MCC. conditions have not changed, unless noted on t For those certified spaces affected by hot work, a 3.1.3.3 each space certified Competent Person shall visually inspect , test and record as SAFE FOR HOT WORK as often as necessary and, as a minimum, daily prior to 3 2 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

455 commencement of hot work to en sure that conditions established by the , the affected spaces continuous certificate are maintained. When hot work is shall be visually inspected, tested, and recorded on a daily basis to maintain the SAFE FOR HOT WORK certification. If a Compe 3.1.3.4 tent Person finds that the conditions within a certified space fail to meet the applicable requirements for which it was certified, work in the space shall be stopped and may not be resumed until the space has been recertified by a Marine Chemist. 3.5 3.1. For those spaces where only Competent Person tests and inspections are required in accordance with 2.2, a Competent Person shall visually inspect and test each space as often as necessary and, as a minimum, daily prior to entry or commencement of hot w ork to ensure that conditions are safe. After the Competent Person has determined initially 3.1.3.6 that a space is safe for entry and finds subsequently that the conditions within the tested space fail to meet the requirements of 2.2, work shall be stopped until the conditions in the tested space are corrected, the space is reinspected, and a new record of tests/inspections is recorded and retested, posted. Tank cleaning personnel shall be trained annually on safety 3.1.4 scussion of safety information found in Subparts A, practices to include a di B, and Section 1915.152 of Subpart I of 2.2. Maintain a current roster 5 3.1. of the names of the Shipyard/Plant Rescue Team Members, along with contractor certification that training requirements of Su bpart B of 2.2 have been accomplished and are current for each Rescue Team Member, or documentation of arrangements made for an outside rescue team to respond promptly to a request for rescue service in a contractor facility. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of the specific documents when requested by the SUPERVISOR. .1 . At a naval facility, the Navy will respond 5 3.1. 3.1. Spaces that are determined to contain Immediately Dangerous 6 ll never be entered except for to Life or Health (IDLH) atmospheres sha emergency rescue or for short duration for installation of ventilation equipment in accordance with 2.2 and 2.3. When entering IDLH spaces for the purpose of installing ventilation, notify the SUPERVISOR prior to entry. management becomes aware of Not ifications of rescue shall be made as soon as such an event. 3.1. 7 Confirm that all personnel have exited the space prior to closure of tanks, voids, and cofferdams. Designate one person to account for all personnel who may have entered the space. 3.2 Provide a written notice for each job or separate area of hot work aboard craft. 3 3 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

456 The notice shall state a description of the work to be done, 3.2.1 the specific location , to include compartment number and , of the hot work , compartments adjacent to decks, bulkheads, and similar structures upon which hot work is to be accomplished, the time hot work will commence, current free status of the area (if required), the absence or existence of gas - in any direction of the operation (or combustible material within 35 feet further, if affected by the operation), and if combustible material exists, what action shall be taken to protect the material from fire, the provision and assignment of a fire watch, and the affirmation that conditio ns at the work site (ventilation, temporary lighting, accesses) permit the fire watch(es) to have a clear view of and immediate access to all areas included in the fire watch. charged fire - The notice shall affirm that a suitable, fully 3.2.2 r shall be available at the job site and provide for an inspection extinguishe of the area 30 minutes after completion of the hot work or the cessation of hot work at the job site unless the contractor's Hot Work Supervisor surveys s that there is no further fire hazard as the affected work area and determine the final action to complete the notice. 3.2.3 The notice shall be signed by a supervisor specifically designated as responsible for coordination of the hot work and the fire watch . re hot work is being conducted for each shift whe requirement 3.2.4 when One copy of each notice shall be given to the SUPERVISOR and at a minimum, one copy of each notice shall also be requested conspicuously posted at the location where the hot work is being . accomplished Deliver written notification of hot work planned 3.2.4. 1 SUPERVISOR Tuesday through Friday to the at least 30 minutes and not more than 24 hours preceding start of work. Deliver written notification of hot work planned 3.2.4. 2 no later SUPERVISOR following that weekend to the over a weekend or Monday than 0900 on the Friday immediately preceding that weekend. Deliver written notification of hot work planned on 3 3.2.4. a federal holiday and on the day following the federal holiday to the SUPERVISOR o later than 0900 of the last working day preceding the federal n holiday. 3.2.4. 4 The notice shall be effective for 24 hours unless a free status of the - shorter period is specified in the contract or the gas k. A new notice is required if work area or system requires stopping the wor free status. - work is interrupted due to loss of gas fire watches, at all affected areas where hot work trained Provide 3.3 is being accomplished. Provide fire extinguishing equipment as described in 2.2, 2.4, and 2.5. 3 ITEM NO: of 1 4 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

457 program utilized to train fire watches in shall be 3.3.1 The and include steps to be accordance with the requirements of 2.2 and 2.4, taken by the fire watch and hot work operator prior to accomplishment of hot uishing equipment and other work, proper selection and use of fire exting safety equipment, relationship between the fire watch and hot work operator, proper fire reporting procedures and other sounding of fire alarms, and reporting of fires to the ship's Quarterdeck. A means of communicating fire watches and their corresponding hot workers shall be between all provided. on) fire - This training shall include theory and practical (hands suppression techniques. This training shall be provided to all newly ided to personnel. Provide assigned fire watches, with annual updates prov visible means of identifying trained fire watches, i.e., badge, sticker, vest, etc. Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable 3.3.1.1 media, of the training program when requested by the SUPERVISOR. Each fire watch attending worker(s) accomplishing hot work 2 3.3. shall be equipped with a fully - have charged and operable fire extinguisher, affected ed view of the immediate access and an unobstruct area to hot work and shall remain at the job site for 30 minutes from which they are assigned the time the hot work is completed unless the contractor's Hot Work Supervisor surveys the affected work area and determines that there is no further fire hazard. 2 other duties 3.3. .1 The fire watch shall not accomplish while hot work is in progress. accomplishing Where several workers are 3 3.3. hot work at one site, the fire watch shall have a clear view of and immediate access to each worker accomplishing hot work. 3.3. No more than 4 workers shall be attended by a single .1 3 fire watch. 3.3. 4 In cases in which hot material from hot work may involve more and on scaffolding , a fire , than one level, as in trunks machinery spaces, level unless positive means are available to watch shall be stationed at each prevent the spread or fall of hot material. on a bulkhead In cases where hot work is to be 5 3.3. accomplished or deck, combustible material shall be removed from the vicinity of the hot work on the opposite side of the bulkhead, overhead, or deck, and a fire watch shall be posted at each location. If multiple blind compartments are involved in any .1 5 3.3. hot work job, fire watches shall be posted simultaneously in each blind area. 3 5 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

458 3.3.6 e firefighting and fire prevention requirements Comply with th work operations in or adjacent to prior to hot 7 areas containing of 2. ammunition or explosives. work shall not be conducted during any logistics Hot 3.3.6.1 or maintenance movement of ammunition or explosives. 3.3.7 No hot work shall be performed without an operational general announcing system, i.e., Ship’s 1MC, or a documented communication strategy approved by the SUPERVISOR. toxic, oxygen depleting (OD) gas Locate oxygen, acetylene, fuel gas, 3.4 supply systems off the craft. Manifolds connected to pierside supply systems may be placed on board as long as they are equipped with a shutoff valve the located on the pier. The pierside shutoff valve shall be in addition to shutoff valve at the inlet to each portable outlet header required by 2.2. 1 3.4. , acetylene, fuel gas, toxic, and OD gas supply systems O xygen shall be stored to prevent collisions by trucks, forklifts, falling objects, etc. 3.4 LOX tanks shal 2 l be staged in designated locations on the quay . and the wall/pier to be determined jointly by the contractor SUPERVISOR. 3 3.4. When gas cylinders are in use on board the craft, they shall be located on the weather decks or in a location determined joint ly by the and shall be secured and in and the SUPERVISOR contractor in cylinder racks, an upright position. The number of in use cylinders shall be limited to those - which are required for work in progress and which have pressure regulators - cylinder valves. On connected to the board reserve gas cylinders shall not exceed one - - use cylinders and shall be located in a half the number of in remote area of the weather decks or in a location determined jointly by the contractor . Reserve acetyle ne cylinders shall be secured and the SUPERVISOR in an upright position. 3.4. When not in use, gas cylinders and manifolds on board shall 4 have valves closed, lines disconnected, protective cover (cap) in place, and in cylinder racks and shall be secured. Acetylene cylinders shall be secured in an upright position. run Each fuel gas and oxygen hose 3.5 shall be positively identified with durable unique markings that include maintenance activity name, service type, location, and shore side shut located (at a off points. Tags shall be - minimum) at the source, point of entry aboard ship, at each connection point (including quick disconnects), and termination point. .1 5 Unattended fuel gas and oxygen hose lines or torches are 3. . prohibited in confined spaces Unat tended charged fuel gas and oxygen hose lines or torches .2 5 3. . are prohibited in enclosed spaces for more than 15 minutes 3 6 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

459 All fuel gas and oxygen hose lines shall be disconnected at 3 5. 3. the supply manifold at the end of each shift . .4 5 All disconnected fuel gas and oxygen hose lines shall be 3. rolled back to the supply manifold or to open air to disconnect the torch; or extended fuel gas and oxygen hose lines shall not be reconnected at the were itive means of given a pos supply manifold unless the lines identification when they were first connected and the lines are tested using a drop test to ensure the integrity of fuel gas and oxygen burning system. Alternate procedures must be approved by the SUPERVISOR. Upon completion of oxy 3. 5 . 5 gen - fuel gas system hook - up, accomplish a pressure drop test to include the torch, hoses, and gages. 3. 5 . 5 .1 Apply pressure to the system. Back off pressure by turning off the valve supplying gases to the system. If the pressure on the gage drops, a leak in the system exists. If the pressure on the gage does not drop, the system is tight. 5 5 .2 After applying pressure, wait 2 minutes to ensure . 3. pressure does not drop. 5 3. is prohibited. The use of gas hose splitters 6 . Each i run nert gas/oxygen depleting (OD) hose shall be positively 6 3. identified with durable unique markings that include maintenance activity name, service type, location, and shore side shut - off points. Tags shall be located (at a mini mum) at the source, point of entry aboard ship, at each connection point (including quick disconnects), and termination point. 3. 6 .1 Unattended inert gas/OD hose lines or torches are prohibited in confined spaces. 3. gas/OD hose lines or torches are Unattended, charged inert .2 6 prohibited in enclosed spaces for more than 15 minutes. .3 All inert gas/OD hose lines shall be disconnected at the 6 3. supply manifold at the end of each shift. inert gas/OD 3. 6 .4 All disconnect ed hose lines shall be rolled back to the supply manifold or to open air to disconnect the torch; or extended hose lines shall not be reconnected at the supply manifold inert gas/OD unless the lines were given a positive means of identificatio n when they were first connected and the lines are tested using a drop test to ensure the integrity of inert gas/OD systems. Alternate procedures must be approved by the SUPERVISOR. 3. - Upon completion of inert gas/OD gas system hook .5 6 up, pressure drop test to include the torch, hoses, and gages. accomplish a of 1 3 7 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

460 .5 Apply pressure to the system. Back off pressure by .1 6 3. turning off the valve supplying gases to the system. If the pressure on the gage drops, a leak in the system exists. If the pressu re on the gage does not drop, the system is tight. 6 .5 .2 After applying pressure, wait 2 minutes to ensure 3. pressure does not drop. 3. 6 .6 The use of gas hose splitters is prohibited. - Use fireproof or fire 3. 7 C - retardant covering in accordance with MIL - 24576, such as fireproofed canvas, fire - resistant synthetic fabrics, non - combustible fabrics, metal covers in accordance with ASTM D6413, or other suitable materials, to protect ship’s equip ment from falling sparks or other potential sources of fire. Coverings shall be in place prior to commencing hot work and be maintained throughout the hot work evolution. Proper documentation of fire retardancy shall be available for review upon request. Non fire - retardant temporary wooden structures located on the 3.7.1 pier, dry dock edge, or in the dry dock (not including dry dock blocks) shall be a minimum of 35 feet from the ship to prevent spread of fire. Lumber 2 . 7 3. rds, except that used for , plywood, and staging boa pallets, shall be fire retardant in accordance with Category Two, Type II, of L 19140. - MIL - 7 3 3. Storage of material aboard the craft shall be limited to that . which is required for work in progress. quipment or working material aboard the Prior to bringing e 4 . 3. 7 craft, its crating and packing shall be removed. If the equipment or material may be damaged during handling, the crating and packing shall be removed immediately after the equipment or working material is brought a board and taken ashore for disposal. A small quantity of pallets may be staged in aboard the a location determined jointly by the contractor and the SUPERVISOR craft for use in materials handling operations. 7 The quantity of flammable and 5 . 3. combustible liquids brought onboard shall be kept to a minimum, shall not exceed that necessary for one shift’s use, and shall not be left unattended. 7 3. Ensure at least one unobstructed access to each main and 6 . auxiliary machinery space. 8 Accomplish a fire prevention and housekeeping inspection . during each 3 shift whenever work is in progress. Once each manned/regular workday, the inspection shall be mad e jointly with the SUPERVISOR. Deviation from this s than 30 days in duration must be requirement for availabilities les adjudicated by the SUPERVISOR. 3 8 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

461 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferable media, of 3.8.1 request for deviation to the SUPERVISOR. media, of 3. 8 . 2 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable written report of the discrepancies and corrective action a s, using the SUPERVISOR within 4 hours after completion to be taken to Attachment A, of the inspection. Develop and implement a written fire safety plan in accordance with 9 3. 2.2. Review the pla n with contractor employees and subcontractors. Ensure access to temporary firefighting equipment is not obstructed 3.10 or restricted. Ensure firefighting equipment is not relocated without 3.10.1 written authorization from the SUPERVISOR. Provide a secure temporary storage facility for firefighting equipment that is moved from its original location. Conduct a firefighting and fire prevention conference in conjunction 3.11 with the arrival conference or no later than 5 days after start of the avai . This conference shall for availabilities in excess of 30 days lability cover the contractor’s fire safety and fire response plan for fire prevention and firefighting and the procedures that will be in use by the contractor and municipal fire and emergency services, as well as the region/installation or familiarize the contractor and the region/installation or municipal fire and emergency services with the craft arrangement, onboard fire prevention, and firefighting systems, equipment, and organization, an d familiarize all parties with the scope of work and aspects of the work or craft conditions that have significance in fire prevention and firefighting. The conference shall specifically address the following 3.11.1 matters: 3.11.1.1 Fire alarm and response procedures Contractor firefighting capability and procedures 3.11.1.2 Region/installation or municipal fire and emergency 3.11.1.3 services firefighting capability and procedures Firefighting jurisdictional cognizance dent 3.11.1.4 and inci command procedures 3.11.1.5 Communication system for fire reporting and control or firefighting efforts Craft arrangement including access routes, 3.11.1.6 availability or firefighting systems (installed and temporary), fire zone a boundaries, nd communication systems 3 of ITEM NO: 1 9 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

462 Craft firefighting organization, systems, drills, 3.11.1.7 and equipment to include rehabilitation procedures Craft, space, and equipment security consideration 3.11.1.8 Compatibility of contractor, and region/installation 3.11.1.9 or municipal fire and emergency services firefighting equipment 3.11.1.10 Industrial work scope, including location of craft, and effect on firefighting systems, access, and communications 3.11.1.11 The roles, responsibilities, and membership of the Fire Safety Council (FSC). Include the requirement to obtain permission from the FSC to perform work that affects the fire safety posture (e.g., securing the firemain, securing the 1MC, undocking, transferring fuel/lube oil) of the s hip. 3.11.1.12 Hotwork monitoring and confined space practices. The firefighting and fire prevention conference shall include 3.11.2 a table top fire drill. Provide a portable 300 KW diesel generator with associated cables, 3.12 lugs/plugs to supply emergency power during transits to and from dry dock when ship’s emergency power cannot be used or anytime during the availability craft’s power is not availab le as an emergency back - up to installed that the shore power. 3.13 Maintain available for review, prior to commencement of work, a fire safety plan meeting the requirements of 2.2. In addition to the requirements ting fires, the shipyard of 2.2, include and identify the method for repor firefighting facilities, equipment, and organization (paid or volunteer), the procedures for maintenance of clear fire lanes in the shipyard and on the piers, and the nearest municipal firefighting organization, including the antic ipated time of response. 3.14 Provide fire protection equipment consisting of: 3.14.1 Firefighting water, utilizing manifolds connected to a source capable of providing 150 GPM at 60 PSIG at the manifold shall be in place before start of work. 3.14.1.1 The number of manifolds shall be sufficient to permit reaching all points on the vessel (including underwater body when the vessel is in dry dock or on a marine railway) with 2, 1 - 1/2 inch hoses of not more than 100 feet in length. ses shall be attached to the manifolds and fitted 3.14.1.2 Ho - purpose combination fog and straight stream nozzle. with an all 3 ITEM NO: of 1 10 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

463 line flow - 3.14.1.3 Verify by the Pitot tube method or an in meter that the water volume and pressure meets these requirements. re access to temporary and Ship’s Force firefighting equipment 3.15 Ensu is not obstructed or restricted. 4. NOTES : In addition to CHT and MOGAS 4.1 S) may be Hydrogen sulfide (H tanks, 2 found in AFFF , seawater, and firemain systems. and Tank Sounding Tables are available for Booklet of General Plans 4.2 review at the office of the SUPERVISOR. The term "unmanned" is defined as without the physical presence of 4.3 people in control; without a human operator. 4.4 A "quick disconnect" is a coupling or connecting device/system designed to permit easy and immediate separation of lines without the use of tools and to ensure the contents do not escape. of 1 3 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 9 FY - 1

464 ATTACHMENT A Attendees Fire Zone Boundaries SH Discrepancy and Corrective E Action Log Ship name/hull number: Location: Prime Contractor: Time: Date: Discrepancy Location Date Point of Contact No. Code Corrective Action Corrected - Type Codes: 1 Fire Prevent./ Fire Equipment , 3 - Hot Work ., 4 - FZ Boundary, 5 - Electrical, 6 - Compress Housekeeping, 2 - anifolds , 7 - Scaffolding, 8 - Egress/Exit, 9 - Walking/Working Surfaces, 10 - PPE , 11 - Containment , 12 - Gas/Hoses/Bottles/M Openings/Fall Protection, 13 - Confined/Enclosed Spaces, 14 - Lines & Leads Hazards, 15 Unguarded/Edges/Holes/ Equip. Adrift & - Rollback, 16 - Ventilation, 17 - Machine G uardin g/Hand T ools , 18 - Crane/Rigging, 19 - Environmental & Hazardous Material/Com munication, 20 Environmental P rotection, 21 - General Safety - 1 2 1 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 70 of FY - 1 9

465 ATTACHMENT A INSTRUCTIONS ESH DISCREPANCY AND CORRECTIVE ACTION LOG - 1 : List the designated Fire Zone Fire Zone Boundaries Boundaries. 2 - : List Company and or Command and names of personnel present for walk thru. Attendees 3 - Ship Name/H ull Number : Indicate ship name and hull number of the location of the walk thru. . name of contractor facility or pier at Naval Base or Station. Indicate location where ship is moored or docked, i.e : Location - 4 : 5 Prime Contractor - Indicate prime contractor who has the contract with the SUPERVISOR. - : Indicate date of walk thru being accomplished. Date 6 7 - Time : Indicate start time (24 hour clock) of walk thru being accomplished. 8 N - o. (n umber ) : List sequentially, each discrepancy noted during the walk thru. N umber will continue where the n umber ing left off the previous day , un til the end of the availability . discrepancy the ified with ident : Point of Contact - 9 /Command . Indicate Company - 10 Date Corrected : Date condition was corrected. If condition is not corrected , condition will be carried over to the next walk thru until condition is corrected. 11 - Location : Indicate location of the condition, i.e. space number or frame number. 12 Discrepancy : Indicate condition that needs corrective action, be specific as necessary. - 13 - Corrective Action : Indicate corrective action taken to correct the condition and who is responsible for the corrective action. Lines and - Code : 14 code, located at the bottom of ATTACHMENT A that condition can be grouped with, i.e. lines on deck causing trip hazard would use code 14 - Indicate Leads Hazards. FZ Boundary, 5 Type Codes: 1 - Fire Prevent./Fire Equipment, 3 - Hot Work., 4 - Housekeeping, 2 - El ectrical, 6 - Compress - Gas/Hoses/Bottles/Manifolds, 7 - Scaffolding, 8 - Egress/Exit, 9 - Walking/Working Surfaces, 10 - PPE, 11 - Containment, 12 - Unguarded/Edges/Holes/Openings/Fall Protection, 13 - Confined/Enclosed Spaces, 14 - Lines & Leads Hazards, 15 - Equip. Adrift & - Ventilation, 17 - Machine Guarding/Hand Tools, 18 Rollback, 16 - Crane/Rigging, 19 - Environmental & Hazardous Material/Communication, 20 General Safety - Environmental Protection, 21 - 1 of 13 70 - 009 ITEM NO: 3 - 19 FY

466 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 - 71 ITEM NO: 6 201 DATE: 18 NOV CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Piping System ; test 2. REFERENCES : - Piping Systems Shipboard 2.1 S9086 - RK - STM - 010/CH 505, - RJ - S9086 2.2 504, Pressure, Temperature and Other Mechanical - 010/CH - STM and Electromechanical Measuring Instruments - 3 S9074 AR 2. GIB - 010/278, Requirements for Fabrication Welding and - Inspection, and Casting Inspection and Repair for Machinery, Piping, and Pressure Vessels - 4 T9074 - AS - GIB 2. 010/271, Requirements for Nondestructive Testing Methods - - ceptance Criteria 2035, Nondestructive Testing Ac 2. 5 MIL STD REQUIREMENTS : 3. new and disturbed piping systems in 3.1 Accomplish testing of each accordance with 2.1. (V) "GAGE CHECK" aster and backup test gage shall conform to gage range 3.1.1 Each m shown on . The backup gage shall be 2.2 1 of - 6 - and graduation Table 504 - checked to the master hydrostatic test gage up to the maximum test cross pressure just prior to start of testing. Master and backup gages shall track within 2 percent of each other. ge used for vacuum 3.1. 1.1 Each master and backup test ga 30 PSI range. - testing shall consist of 2 compound gages with a 30 inch 0 - "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECTION" or "MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION" (G) (I) 3.1.2 Accomplish liquid penetrant or magnetic particle test on root 1 and - layer of all P LT welded joints in accordance with Paragraph - /or P 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 71 9 FY - 1

467 in systems 505 4 11.1.2.6.a(1) of 2.1, and the requirements of 2. 3 and 2. - which exceed the reduced energy criteria of operating conditions of 200 degrees Fahrenheit or 500 PSIG . The accept or reject crit eria shall be in . accordance with Class One of 2. 5 (See 4.2) "LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECTION" (G) (I) 1 - Accomplish liquid penetrant tests on final layer of all P 3.1.3 and/or P - LT welded joints in accordance with Paragraph 505 - 11.1.2.6.a(1) of and 2. e requirements of 2. in systems which exceed the reduced 4 3 2.1 and th energy criteria of operating conditions of 200 degrees Fahrenheit or 500 PSIG . The accept or reject criteria shall be in accordance with Class One of 2. (See 4.2) 5 . ANT INSPECTION” (I)(G) “LIQUID PENETR 3.1.4 Accomplish liquid penetrant tests on final layer of all Class 11.1.2.6.a(2) of 2.1 and the P - 2 welds in accordance with Paragraph 505 - requirements of 2.3 and 2.4 in systems which operate above 200 degrees or reject criteria shall be in accordance with Class Fahrenheit. The accept 2 of 2.5. (See 4.2) ) 3 SHOP TEST" (See 4. - (V)(G) or (I)(G) "VISUAL INSPECTION 3.1. 5 Accomplish a shop hydrostatic test of replacement piping, fittings, and components for evidence of external leakage and/or deformation. Allowable external leakage and/or deformation: None. (V)(G) or (I)(G) "VISUAL INSPECTION - HYDROSTATIC , LOW PRESSURE AIR , VACUUM , OR ) 3 TEST" (See 4. OPERATING PRESSURE 6 3.1. or system under ized system Visually inspect the pressur vacuum for evidence of external leakage and/or deformation. Allowable external leakage and/or deformation: None. .1 3.1. 6 requiring inspection shall remain Each joint inspection. uninsulated and unpainted until completion of successful Provide a sketch of that portion of the system to be 3.1. 6 .2 tested, showing the location of blanks, isolation valves, test connection, and the location of air vents to vent air. Sketch shall be on the test site of the test. during the accomplishment (I) "STATIC TEST" new and disturbed each Accomplish a static head pressure test of 3.2 gravity drain piping (unpressurized piping), using clean, fresh water for a minimum of 30 minutes. Allowable leakage: None. (V)(G) "OPERATIONAL TEST" 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 71 9 FY - 1

468 new and disturbed gravity each Accomplish an operational test of 3.3 drain piping for proper operation and unobstructed flow. (V)(G) "OPERATIONAL TEST" 3.4 new and disturbed sounding Accomplish an operational test of each inch theft sampler into sounding tube until it - tube piping by inserting a 16 bottoms. Accomplish the test a minimum of 4 times for each sounding tube. There shall be no binding or sticking of sampler during this test. : NOTES 4. 4.1 fined as, "The piping from the Boiler pressure vessel piping is de pressure vessel drum or header up to the first valve off the pressure vessel drum or header." 3.1.3 , apply 4.2 Nondestructive testing requirements in 3.1.2 , and 3.1.4 lected. only when the operating pressure test option has been se the The paragraph referencing this note is considered an (I)(G) if 4. 3 3a. If the system is P - system is P LT, or P 2 or P - - - 3b - , then the 1, P paragraph is considered (V)(G). 4. Test pressure and test medium will be specified in invoking Work 4 Item. 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 71 9 FY - 1

469 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 72 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : Facility; a Private Contractor Physical Security at 1.1 Title: accomplish 2. : REFERENCES DODI 2000.16 DOD ANTITERRORISM (AT) PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION: DOD 2.1 FORCE PROTECTION CONDITION (FPCON) SYSTEM 2.2 33 CFR Part 165, Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited Access Areas 2. Restricted Area Regulations 33 CFR Part 334, Danger Zone and 3 REQUIREMENTS : 3. The requirements of 3.2.5, 3.2.6, 3.2.7, 3.2.8, and 3.2.9 are Force 3.1 at a Protection measures the Contractor shall be able to meet Private under Force Protection Conditions Normal, Alph a, Bravo, Contractor Facility Charlie, and Delta, respectively. The solicitation shall define the Force Additional measures may be directed by the SUPERVISOR Protection Condition. Implementation of any other measures, when directed in accordance with 2.1. ill be the subject of an equitable adjustment. by the SUPERVISOR, w 3.2 Provide a written plan which shall be implemented for the protection of personnel, U.S. Naval vessels, work owned floating dry docks, Government - in process, therein, at the the material and equipment to be installed and | Contractor's facility, which addresses the requirements of this Standard Item. The written plan shall, as a minimum, be identified as "For Official Use Only (FOUO)". 3.2.1 Provide written designation to the SUPERVISOR of the individual who will be in charge of the security effort. Attend security coordination meeting with Ship's Force and 2 3.2. the SUPERVISOR to brief the Contractor's security plan and procedures prior 3 to security conference of 3.2. . 3.2.3 Conduct a sec urity conference with federal, state, and local authorities, Ship's Force, and the SUPERVISOR within days prior to ship's 45 to ensure all parties are in agreement with the security procedures arrival while the ship is in port . 1 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

470 3.2.4 Coordinate the esta blishment and enforcement of the land and water areas adjacent to U.S. Naval vessels as restricted areas or limited water way areas in accordance with 2. 2 or 2. 3 , in cooperation with the Navy, U.S. Coast Guard, and Army Corps of Engineers. 3.2.5 The Secu rity Plan shall include the roles and responsibilities for application of deadly force in the protection of US Navy assets and crew. 3.2. 6 Under Force Protection Condition NORMAL, establish and maintain physical security boundaries, positive access cont rols, and other security measures to provide safeguards against hazards, including unauthorized entry, malicious mischief, theft, espionage, sabotage, and terrorism at Contractor's facility in accordance with Attachment A, to include the following: 3.2 6 .1 Perimeter physical barriers . 3.2. 6 .2 Perimeter openings control 6 3.2. .3 Access and circulation control 6 3.2. Armed security force .4 6 3.2. .5 Protective lighting 6 3.2. .6 Signs and posting of boundaries 3.2. 6 .7 Security force communications Random antiterrorism measures (RAM) 3.2. 6 .8 3.2. 7 Under Force Protection Condition ALPHA, establish and maintain the following requirements in addition to 3.2.5: 3.2. 7 .1 Additional plant boundary protection .2 7 3.2. Assistance from state, local, and other law enforcement agencies 3.2. 7 .3 Increased personnel, property, and perimeter security checks .4 7 Increased security force manning commensurate with 3.2. the additional actions directed under this section Inc .5 3.2. reased waterfront surveillance 7 .6 7 3.2. Place vehicle barriers to reduce ease of vehicular access adjacent to the ship 2 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

471 3.2. 7 .7 Brief the security force and the SUPERVISOR concerning the threat, the security precautions being implemented, and what ac tion is to be taken with respect to strangers, unidentified vehicles, abandoned parcels or suitcases, or unusual activity in or near the Contractor's facility. .8 checks of vehicles, persons, - Increase security spot 3.2. 7 ssels. and buildings near U.S. Naval ve 7 3.2. .9 Limit access points for vehicles and personnel commensurate with performance of the Job Order. .10 3.2. 7 Inspect 100 percent of commercial vehicles entering the controlled industrial area and/or piers. 3.2. Test procedures for mass notification . .11 7 .12 7 3.2. Review requirements related to implementing ed threat. additional security actions in the event of an increas 3.2. 7 .13 Review barrier plans. Under Force Protection Condition BRAVO, establish and 8 3.2. m aintain the following requirements in addition to 3.2.5 through 3.2.6: 8 3.2. Request the Captain of the Port or U.S. Coast Guard .1 District Commander to activate the Naval Vessel Protect ion Zones in . 2 accordance with 2. communications with state, local, and 3.2. 8 .2 Establish other law enforcement, fire, and emergency management agencies. 8 3.2. .3 At the beginning of each workday, as well as at random intervals, inspect the interior and exterior of buildings in regular Secure and regularly inspect buildings, rooms, . s use for suspicious package and storage areas not in regular use for unusual conditions or suspicious activity. .4 3.2. 8 Clear the area within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of U.S. ials as and vehicles Naval vessels of all non - mission - essential mater determined by the SUPERVISOR. 3.2. 8 .5 Review requirements related to implementing additional security actions in the event of an increasing threat. 8 3.2. .6 Identify paths for critical materials to maintain production. .7 Brief all employees working at the facility, 8 3.2. including the ship's crew and subcontractor employees, concerning the threat, 3 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

472 the security precautions being implemented and what action is to be taken with respect to strangers, unidentified vehicles, abando ned parcels, containers or suitcases, and any other suspicious or unusual activity. 3.2. 8 Increase security presence and surveillance, and .8 r a ndomly inspect vehicles, persons and accompanying items entering the facility. Review 3.2. 8 .9 mail and material screening procedures at the facility. 3.2. 9 Under Force Protection Condition CHARLIE, establish and maintain the following r 6 through 3.2. 7 : equirements in addition to 3.2. 3.2. 9 .1 Inspect the interior and exterior of buildings in regula r use for suspicious activity or objects at frequent intervals. 3.2. 9 .2 Increase protection for crew berthing to reduce vulnerability. .3 9 3.2. List work that would be required to permit safe relocation of the vessel and its crew to the nearest Government facility as designated by the SUPERVISOR. 9 3.2. Determine work that will be stopped if the next .4 higher Force Protection Condition is implemented. Determine a list of and inform mission - essential personnel, including Contractor work force. Communicate critical Work Items to the SUPERVISOR, ship's Commanding Officer, and/or Shipyard Commander. 3.2. 9 .5 Increase surveillance in and around waterside perimeter and facilities. Position floats, work boats, and barges along the sides of the U .S. Naval vessel and any occupied berthing barges to create a buffer zone. Limit access points to strictly enforce entry .6 9 3.2. Inspect all vehicles entering the controlled industrial area and/or control. nsure no Review access procedures to e pier. unauthorized personnel gain access into the facility . 3.2. 10 Under Force Protection Condition DELTA, establish and 9 maintain the following r equirements in addition to 3.2. 6 through 3.2. : Immediately notify state and local law enforcement .1 3.2. 10 any knowledge of terrorist activity, encies and the U.S. Coast Guard of ag suspicious persons or criminal activity. 10 3.2. Limit access points to the absolute minimum. .2 .3 10 3.2. Strictly control all facility access points, ensure and their ion of all personnel, and search all vehicles positive identificat 4 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

473 contents , suitcases, briefcases, and packages entering the Contractor's facility. 3.2. 10 .4 Accomplish continuous security patrols of all areas of the facility , to include the waterfront, occupied by U.S. Naval vessels and personnel. .5 3.2. 10 Prepare U.S. Naval vessels for movement away from the Contractor's facility when directed by the SUPERVISOR. 10 .6 Discontinue work except that directly related to the 3.2. integrity of the vessel and as otherwise directed by the SUPERVISOR. individuals not 3.2. 10 Implement the plan to deny access to .7 moving and/or protecting essential or critical to the overall mission of vital Navy assets onto the facility and occupied buildings . , of the approved transferrable media gible copy, in Submit one le 3.3 plan to the SUPERVISOR for review and approval no later than 15 days prior to start date a vailability . Accomplish the requirements of the approved plan. 3.3.1 acility affecting physical Any changes at the Contractor's f 3.3.2 security or the approved plan shall be submitted to the SUPERVISOR for approval within 24 hours. 3.4 Provide procedures for coordinating the Contractor's security the Commanding Officer's d esignated , efforts with those of the SUPERVISOR , and any subcontractor when using the subcontractor’s facility representative to host the vessel . 3.4.1 Identify whose physical security plan, prime or subcontractor, will be used for the availability. 3.5 st incurred for the work covered Prepare an itemized statement of co approved transferrable by this Standard Item. Submit one legible copy, in , of the statement to the SUPERVISOR within 30 days of delivery or media redelivery (as applicable) of the ship. The statement shall itemize the tot al direct labor hours with the applicable direct labor rates, overhead, General and Administrative (G&A) and/or other indirect rates, material, material handling charges, subcontractor costs, Other Direct Costs (ODC), and freight costs (as applicable). Wh ere final overhead rates are not available, use the most current billing rate(s). The Government may perform an audit of the Contractor's 3.5.1 statement of cost incurred. The Contractor, upon request, shall make available to the SUPERVISOR all records , related correspondence, and the substantiating data upon which the statement of cost incurred is based. : NOTES 4. 5 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

474 U.S. Naval vessel means any vessel owned, operated, chartered, or 4.1 commissioned vessel under - leased by the U.S. Navy; any pre construction for the U.S. Navy, once launched into the water; and any vessel under the operational control of the U.S. Navy or a Combatant Command. 4.1.1 For a non - nuclear new construction vessel in a private or a dedicated security boat, shipyard, a physical port security barrier detailed in Attachment A, are applicable at Crew Move Aboard. 4. Controlled Industrial Area (CIA) means an area of the shipyard in 2 which construction, conversion, repair, or overhaul of U.S. Navy vessels is conducted. provides general security requirements 4. 3 USFF AT OPORD 3300 (series) Activities The SUPERVISOR will use thi s reference as a guide in . for Fleet applying f orce protection measures appropriate to the unique situation at each Contractor’s facility. hicle is defined as a means of transportation that transports 4.4 A ve people or objects. 6 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

475 ATTACHMENT A OTHER SECURITY MEASURES : 1 Perimeter Physical Barriers . Physical barriers, including both natural (e.g., mountains, swamps, a . Port thick vegetation, rivers, bays, cliffs) and structural (e.g., , Security Barriers (PSB) fences, walls, doors, gates, vehicle delay, impede, and discourage access by barriers) which control, unauthorized persons. To be effective, such barriers shall be augmented by armed security force personnel or other means of protection and assessment. ed along Contractor facility Physical barriers shall be employ . b perimeters. The barrier or combination of barriers used shall afford an equal degree of continuous protection along the entire perimeter. Structural barriers such as fences or walls shall be a mi c . nimum of 8 feet in height, and any uncontrolled opening shall be securable to afford protection against unauthorized entry. rotect the Navy asset is The waterfront security required to p d. depende nt on the asset . Damage to the dry dock gate could result in flooding of the dry dock resulting in possible damage or loss of the vessel. Therefore, the dry dock gate is not considered to be a physical or structural barrier and must be protected. Additionally, floating drydocks shall be protected commensurate w ith the provisions for the docked asset. Closed Circuit Television ( e. installs will be planned for ) CCTV installation by using Chapter 4 of the Unified Facilities Criteria 02NF. Plans will be submitted to the SUPERVISOR for - 021 - (UFC) 4 to installation. This UFC document provides approval, prior guidance on how to design electronic security systems required by protection environment. the current antiterrorism/force - The patent number for the original Port Security Barrier (PSB) is f. T is 7401565 B2. There - 6681709 B1. The patent number for the PSB P or PSB - is no separate patent number for the PSB V variant. At the - 72 FY - - 12 (CH - time of publishing SI 009 2), Harbor Offs hore Barriers (5720 Nicolle St., Ventura, CA 93003) and Truston Technologies, Inc. (520 Ridgely Ave., Annapolis, MD 21401) were both licensed to manufacture the original PSB as well as the variants. 7 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

476 Security measures Asset (PC) , For Patrol C oastal - Adjacent landside security (patrols, MSC | surveillance, pier access control) no special requirements in waterways. - Identify restricted area waterways with buoys and signs. The requirements above and Surface combatants, , mine Amphibious ships | auxiliary ships , Security Zone per 3.2.4 warfare - (USS only), and MSC Naval of - Auxiliary (Cargo - Use Laden), a Port Security Barrier (see 1.d and 1.f), and MSC OCONUS repair numbered Fleet Commander - approved barge or other ( facilities . physical barrier depend e nt on expected geographic and environmental conditions as per 1.d above, or ) SUPERVISOR determined by the other physical barrier approved by the numbered Fleet C ommander . cognizant In areas where the - agrees SUPERVISOR waterborne barrier(s) is not in the the use of best interest of the US Navy, a dedicated shall patrol within 200 w aterborne security boat s of the protected vessel d yar with a equipped bullhorn, night vision device, spotlight, marine and non flares, l ethal - lethal weapons , and a two - way communications device according to the . specifications described in Addendum 1 ** Note: If the primary security measure is unavailable, then the Private Contractor Facility shall ensure adequate backup security measures are in place to maintain the security posture as per the associated FPCON The requirements above and Carriers, submarines (see next row for SSBN) - Electronic water/waterside security system to circuit , include, but not limited to - closed television for the purposes of surface craft detection. - Use water barriers to prevent direct unchallenged access from small boat attacks. SSBN The requirements above and - Per SECNAVINST S8126.1 - oat threat Use water barriers to stop small b 8 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

477 : Openings in the perimeter barrier shall be operated . Perimeter Openings 2 by the contractor and shall be kept to the minimum necessary for the safe and efficient operation of the Contractor facility. Access through such openings shall be controlled, or the openings shall be secured. : Access and Circulation Control . 3 . a A system of personnel and vehicle movement control is required at keeping Contractor facilities. The degree of control shall be in - with efficient operations yet afford defense depth to provide - in graduated levels of protection. Armed or unarmed sentries may be assigned to check identification at . b to restrict and control pedestrian a nd vehicle entry control points movement by vehicles and unauthorized personnel from gaining access into the facility. c The facility shall coordinate with the local postal and courier . services in developing a plan for ensuring that all mail and courier are properly screened by the red packages to the facility ive del delivery service prior to being delivered to the contractor s mailroom. y' facilit : The Contractor security force shall consist of . 4 Armed Security Force designated persons specifically organized, trained, and equipped to provide physical security. Security Force shall be armed with lethal and non - lethal weapons, and qualified in accordance Federal and/or State laws ersonnel to carry and use firearms in the performance of protecting p and/or property. . : Protective Lighting 5 . Protective lighting, to include work lighting, increases the a effectiveness of security forces and has considerable deterrent value. nation to discourage or Contractors shall provide adequate illumi b . detect attempts to enter facilities and reveal the presence of unauthorized persons within such areas. c Lighting shall support security force activities such as . identification of badges and personnel at perimeter openings, illance of facility perimeter/avenues of approach, and surve inspection of unusual or suspicious circumstances. . Signs and Posting of Boundaries : 6 . Trespass laws applicable to the jurisdiction in which the facility a is located will govern signs and posting of perimeter boundaries at Contractor facilities. 9 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

478 Size, placement, and use of any language in addition to English . b should be appropriate for the stated purpose. Signs will read essentially as follows: WARNING A RESTRICTED ARE KEEP OUT Authorized Personnel Only - . used points of entry and at c Signs shall be posted at regularly intervals along the facility perimeter such that any reasonable person would conclude that everyone crossing the boundary into the ve been informed of the above. facility would ha . 7 Security Force Communications : a. The activity security force requires sufficient equipment to way voice communications between - maintain continuous, secure 2 elements (fixed/mobile posts, and supervisory personnel) of the security force and U.S. Naval vessel's watch section. Establish communications between the Contractor's security force and the U.S. Naval vessel's watch section. The facility shall maintain a communication system for use b. in - to facilitate effective two mergencies or crisis situations way e voice communications among state and local law enforcement agencies and the U.S. Coast Guard. . c - recorded The facility shall establish a communication system, pre capable of broadcasting information to all voice, but - and/or live building occupants or personnel in the immediate vicinity during or prior to an emergency or crisis situation . : As a deterrent, randomly apply the Random Antiterrorism Measures (RAM) . 8 asures from higher Force Protection Conditions and other RAM including: me . a Keep personnel involved in implementing increased security requirements on call. Inspect deliveries to protect against the introduction of . b unauthorized material. and other non - mission essential items shall be moved 100 feet c . Cars from U.S. Naval Vessels and buildings where the crew is located or work is in progress. d . Inspect mail for letter or parcel bombs. 10 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

479 t them and On entry of visitors to the facility, physically inspec . e accompanying items. . f Search vehicles entering the facility. Erect barriers and obstacles to provide additional traffic controls . g to areas where U.S. Naval Vessels and crews are located. . h roads and facilities Consult local authorities about closing public that might make sites more vulnerable. . - i specific RAM that shall be incorporated into the Other site specific Contractor's physical security plan and/or company - implementation procedures. 11 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

480 One to Attachment A Addendum of Standard Item 009 - 72 Waterborne Security Boats Mission The boats are primarily used to provide a dedicated waterborne presence and deterrence in the immediate vicinity of no more than three (3) U.S. Naval - site, 24 - dedicated” is defined as on days a 7 Assets. The word ” hours a day, week, and responsive solely to the operational confines of the protected asset(s). Normally, a single waterborne security boat will be designated for each U.S. Naval Asset. Waterborne security boat s must be capable of conducting continuous patrols in the immediate vicinity of the protected asset(s), or continuous monitoring of a patrol zone when assigned to protect clustered U.S. Naval Assets (a patrol zone shall not exceed 200 yards and s nclude more than 3 protected assets). hall not i Waterborne security boats will be used to provide restricted area enforcement by providing a layered defense and deterrence mechanism. This includes the weather - ability for early detection of intruders under day/night, and all conditions. ting Environment Projected Opera The projected operating environment of the waterborne security boats will normally be in protected harbors or inland waterways. These boats will be expected to operate in varying temperatures depending on the climate at the oat(s) will be used. Temperatures can be expected to vary from location the b below 32 degrees Fahrenheit to above 100 degrees Fahrenheit. Storm conditions and warnings often issued in the operating environment include: small craft, gale, storm, and hurricane warnings. General Characteristics There are no specific hull material requirements for waterborne security boats. Waterborne security boats must be visible from distances of at least 500 yards to the unaided eye, during periods of unrestricted visibility and t possess all safety equipment required by federal and local regulations. mus Waterborne security boats must also display a placard on both sides of the vessel with the word "Security" of sufficient size and reflective composition to the unaided eye, during periods of to be visible from 500 yards unrestricted visibility (250 yards during periods of low - light) and in accordance with federal and local regulations. These boats must possess a rds. hailing mechanism capable of warning/hailing approaching craft at 500 ya Hailing capability may consist of modified human voice (e.g., through the use of a bull horn, PA system, etc.), or mechanical (e.g., siren, pulsating tone, etc.). The boat must have a weather resistant spot/flood light capable of rotating s with instant start/restart and at least 6,000,000 candlepower. 360 degree 12 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

481 The boat must have a fully operable marine band radio (VHF). to 4 27 feet Length range : 0 feet And why: This size is necessary for safety and mission accomplishment, ease of discernment, crew accommodation, visual deterrent, and ease of maneuverability when responding to contacts of interest during all weather - patrols. Breadth 8 feet 6 inches And why: 8 feet 6 inches The minimum breadth of is necessary to provide a stable platform, crew accommodation, visual deterrent, ease of maneuverability, safety and mission accomplishment when responding to contacts of interest weather patrols. - during all : m Draft Maximu is necessary for feet The maximum draft of 4.5 feet 4.5 ease of maneuverability in and around the protected assets. . Two At least one coxswain and one observer/lookout shall : Number of Crew be assigned to each boat for the duration of the p atrol period. These personnel shall be qualified in the operation of the security boat, and shall be qualified with, and armed with personal protective weapons in accordance state and local as permitted by with SECNAVINST 5500.29C, DoDD 5210.56, regulations. Stowage space must be sufficient to : Required Cargo Capacity or Deck Space spare) life vests, a flood light, a accommod ate at least four (including 2 aid kit, a back board, and specialized tactical equipment, etc. - first Propulsion System (e.g., Diesel inboard with outdrive, Diesel inboard with waterjet, or gasoline outboard) and why: The propulsion system must be able to conduct multiple idle/sprint missions during each patrol period. Because of the limited operating ar ea, propulsion systems must be capable of rapidly responding to a contact of interest (normally within the 200 yard operating zone) and rapidly reversing. 20kts. Speed minimum speed of 20kts is necessary to provide the capability A to rapidly respond to contacts of interest or rapidly move out of the line of fire from shipboard responders in the event of a deadly engagement. 13 of 13 72 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

482 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 73 01 OCT DATE: 201 7 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Shipboard Electrical/Electronic Cable P rocedure ; accomplish REFERENCES : 2. 2.1 Standard Items STD - MIL 2003, Electric Plant Installation Standard Methods for - 2.2 Surface Ships and Submarines 2.3 - 010, Navy Installation and Maintenance Book (NIMB), - IMB 01 - SE000 Section IX, Installation Standards (So urce CD: N0002400003) 2.4 MIL - STD - 2042, Fiber Optic Cable Topology Installation Standard Methods for Naval Ships 2.5 S9086 - KC - STM - 010/CH - 300, Electric Plant - General 6 STD 1310, Shipboard Bonding, Grounding, and Other Techniques for - - MIL 2. Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety A6 2.7 S9300 - - GYD - 010, Electrical Workmanship Inspection Guide for Surface Ships and Submarines - - S9AA0 010, General Specifications for Overhaul of Surface 2.8 GOS AB - Ships (GSO) SE000 2.9 lation and Maintenance Book (NIMB), 010, Navy Instal - 01 - IMB - Section VII, Industrial Electromagnetic Compatibility (IEMC) Work Process Instructions (Source CD: N0002400003) IA PUB - 2.10 5239/31, Information Assurance Shipboard Red/Black Installation Publication - 95, Red/Black Installation Guidance (FOUO) NSTISSAM TE .11 2 MPEST/2 REQUIREMENTS 3. : 1 Submit written designation of the Qualified Personnel who will 3. connectors, assemble connector prepare electrical cable endings to receive 1 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

483 parts on the cable endings, and attach the connectors to the cable endings. ed Personnel who will supervise and Submit written designation of the Qualifi inspect the execution of the process. 3. 1 .1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of any additions or modifications to the SUPERVISOR prior to the start or continuation of work. 1 .2 3. Maintain current copies of the credentials of the Qualified Personnel for reference by the SUPERVISOR. 3. 1 .2.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of specific documents when requested by the SUPERVISOR. 3.2 Subm it a written procedure to the SUPERVISOR for review and approval prior to the initiation of production work for the installation of multi - pin 2.3 for the minimum requirements. and connectors, using and coaxial 2.2 3. ndard Items change and/or Submit new procedure when the Sta .1 2 - time references change or are updated. This procedure only requires a one submittal/approval and shall contain the following minimum information: Reference the appropriate fabrication document for 3. 2 .1.1 s applicable. which the procedure i .1.2 3. 2 eference the R qualification requirements for the personnel performing the work. Reference the inspection and documentation forms. .1.3 3. 2 3. .1.4 2 Reference the acceptance and rejection criteria. Ensure only Qualified Personnel accomplish the work required by this 3.3 Standard Item. 3. Inspect existing cable installations affected as a result of work 4 required by the individual Work Item and interferences within the first 25 in percent of contract completion. Ensure that cable installations are 2.2 accordance with for fiber optic cable. 2.4 , and Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved .1 4 3. transferrable media, of a report of cable installation conditions not in 2.2 compliance with and to the SUPERVISOR, using Attachments A and B, 2.4 within 4 days of completio n of inspections. 4 3. Ensure report states cable installation inspection .1.1 results and identifies non - compliance issues. ble test on cables 3.5 Accomplish a shipboard electrical/electronic ca affected by the individual Work Items. 2 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

484 Accomplish an insulation resistance test of each electric 5. 1 3. using Table 300 - cable conductor using the appropriate direct current megger 2.5 - 4 of 3 for guidance. 3. 5. 1.1 Disconnect low vol tage equipment associated with circuits to be tested to prevent damage during tests. 5. Ensure the minimum acceptable readings of each cable 1.2 3. conductor to ground and between conductors are: Lighting Circuit 0.5 Megohm Power Circuit 1.0 Megohm Degaussing Circuit 0.1 Megohm 1.0 Megohm Interconnecting Control Circuit 0.2 Megohm Interior Communication Circuit rcuit Sound Powered Telephone Ci 0.05 Megohm (with telephone disconnected) Multiconductor Cables 0.05 Megohm (with circ mil less than 1700) 3. 5. Ensure the minimum acceptable reading of coaxial 1.3 cable are in accordance with Section 2.8.3.3 of 2.3 : Insulation resistance in megohms Length (feet) Coax cable with... (To equal or exceed) 100 (or less) 40,000 Polyethylene or 20,000 200 polytetrafluorethylene 8,000 500 (Teflon) dielectric 4,000 1,000 Synthetic rubber 1,000 Up to 1,000 dielectric Magnesium oxide 10,000 Up to 1,000 dielectric Dielectric material arranged in layers of Up to 1,000 500 conducting and non - conducting rubber 1.4 Discharge coaxial cable to ground following 5. 3. insulation resistance test. 3. Test each cable 2 conductor for continuity and complete 5. circuit. Ensure terminal connections are tight. 3. 6 Install each new cable, cableway, penetration, lug, and connector in accordance with , and and referenced drawings, to support work , 2.2 2.6 2.3 required by the ind ividual Work Items. 3 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

485 - 6 .1 Ensure new cable conform s to MIL 3. DTL - 24643 (low smoke) and MIL - DTL - 24640 (lightweight). New Radio Frequency (RF) cables shall conform to MIL - DTL - 17 ( low smoke ) . 3. 6 . 2 Use existing cableways and penetrations wherever possible. 3.6 .3 Ensure penetrations are the correct size in accordance with 2.2 . 3. 6 . 4 new cable conductor identification sleeving Install conforming to SAE - AMS - DTL - 23053, Class One, white, marked with indelible ink. 4 3. 6 . .1 Mark in accordance with the referenced drawings and/or equipment technical manual. , 2.2 Install lugs and connectors in accordance with and 2.3 .5 3.6 referenced drawings. shape .1 5 . 6 3. Install new lugs of correct size and - conforming to MIL T - 16366 or SAE - AS7928. Do not cut off strands of copper to reduce size of lead to fit lug. Use correct barrel and hole size. .6 3. 6 Accomplishment of local air hose tests after the installation, removal and relocation of cables - cable of each new and disturbed multi transit device, multi - cable penetrators, stuffing tubes, kick pipes, and cable penetrations of tightness boundaries shall be in accordance with NAV SEA Standard items (See Note 4.8 ). . 2.2 cordance with Part 4 of Band disturbed cable in ac 3. 6 .7 3. 6 . 2.6 Bond and ground cable in accordance with .8 6 3.5 3. .2 immediately . 9 Accomplish the requirements of 3 .5 through to conductor or cable termination. prior 6 3. Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved . 9 .1 transferrable media, of a report listing results of the requirements of 3. , including circuit number, lead numbers, and readings obtained, t 9 . 6 o the 3 days of completion of tests. in SUPERVISOR with .10 3.6 Connect each cable using referenced drawings. 3.6 .11 2.2 Install new cable identification tags in accordance with and 2.3 . 3.7 Disconnect and remove each cable to be replaced in its enti rely. up data. - Record and retain electrical hook complish the requirements of 3.6 through 3.6 .9.1. Ac .1 3.7 4 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

486 .2 Connect each cable using referenced drawings and retained 3.7 - up data. electrical hook 3. 7 .3 Ac complish the requirements of 3.6 .11. 3. 8 Identify and isolate each cable to be pulled back, reused, rerouted, relocated, or repurposed to support work required by the individual Work Items. .1 8 3. Inspect each cable end to be disconnected for correct conductor identification sleeving, includin g size, type, and legible lettering in accordance with referenced drawing. Ensure lugs are secured to leads and are of correct size and type, and t he insulation is not damaged. Accept and reject criteria for lugs and sleeving for cables shall be in accordance with Chapters 3 and 4 of 2.7 . | Disconnect each cable. Record and re tain electrical hook - up 8 3. .2 data. .2 for 5 through 3.5 Accomplish the requirements of 3. .3 3.8 disconnected cables. Remove each cable from equipment and pull back to 3. 8 .4 predetermined locations. Coil each cable and secure to prevent damage. .4.1 3. 8 Protect disconnected connectors and w iring from the industrial environment and weather. 3. 8 .5 Accomplish the requirements of 3. 6 .6 through 3. 6 .9.1 .6 3.8 Accompl .2. ish the requirements of 3.7 .7 3.8 Inspect each cable for missi ng or defective cable identification tags. .7.1 Install new cable identification tags in place of 3.8 o be missing or defective in 3.8 those identified t .7 in accordance with 2.2 and 2.3 . Identify, isolate and remove each cable designated for 3 removal by .9 . the individual Work Items. 3. Remove each cable in its entirety. .1 9 .2 9 3. cable - Blank each bulkhead, deck penetration, and multi transit device from which cable was removed and which will not be reused, in accordance with Part 3 of 2.2 . 9 3. .3 Blank each unused hole in equipment, in accordance with 2.2. 5 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

487 Remove unused hangers from which cable was removed and which .4 9 3. . 2.8 will not be reused, in accordance with Section 070a of Install new banding for cableways affected by cable removals, 3. 9 .5 2.2 in accordance with Part 4 of . .6. complish the requirements of 3.6 Ac .6 3.9 e weather in 1 0 Weatherproof and seal connectors exposed to th 3. accordance with 2.9 . Accomplishment of cleaning and painting for new and disturbed 1 1 3. SEA Standard Items (See Note 4.9 surfaces shall be in accordance with NAV ). 3. 1 2 Remove, install, and relocate cables which are part of the secure electrical information processing systems or are located within a secure to support work required by 2.10 and 2.11 processing space in accordance with the individual Work Items. 4. NOTES : The requirements in this Standard Item apply to installation, 4.1 repair, removal, relocation, test, and inspection of electrical/electronic cables on Naval surface ships and submarines and personnel supporting these he following cable usages; new, tasks. This Standard Item applies to t removed, pulled back, reused, rerouted and repurposed. Definitions 4.2 a cable is defined as a cable not previously – New Cable 4.2.1 installed. 4.2.2 – a pulled back cable is defined as those Pulled Back Cable whic h are disconnected and physically removed from a wireway, conduit, or cableway to protect the cable from industrial use. a reused cable is defined as those cables – Reused Cable 4.2.3 disconnected from the equipment to facilitate equipment removal. Rerouted Cable – a rerouted cable is defined as those cables .2.4 4 disconnected from their equipment and physically moved to a new wireway , conduit or, cableway and then reconnected in the new location to the same equipment. 4.2.5 Repurposed Cable – a r epurposed cable is defined as those which have had their termination points changed. Cable installations consist of cable, banding, boxes, equipment, 4.3 penetrations, cableways, cable separation and connection(s) and associated components. 6 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

488 4 Electrical connector fabrication is the preparation of cable endings 4. - to receive multi pin connectors, coaxial connectors, and securing connectors to cables. 4. 5 A Qualified Person is defined as a person who has successfully completed connector fabrication training and meets the qualification requirements stated below. 4. 5 .1 Emphasizes the importance of connector fabrication to the performance and long - term re liability of shipboard combat systems. 4. 5 .2 Uses 2.2 , 2.3 , and 2.7 for basic instructional material supplemented by connector manufacturer's instructional material as desired. 4. 5 .3 Requires classroom lecture, study, and demonstration of each topic in Appendix A of Part 5 of 2.2 . 4. .4 Requires individual student practice in the use of specified 5 tools and performance of connector fabrication techniques and procedures 20.2 of - and Paragraph 2 2.2 of 5 t Par s B through H of Appendice described in 2.3 . Requires a minimum of 32 hours of combined classroom lecture 5 5. 4. and laboratory practice in the type of connectors to be fabricated. 6 4. Connector fabrication qualifications consist of: Connector Fabricator Qualification requirement: Successful 4. .1 6 followed by successful .5 5 completion of the training course required in 4. - tutelage of a qualified job training under the the - completion of 40 hours on connector fabricator or a qualified connector fabrication supervisor in the type of connectors to be fabricated. 4. Connector Fabrication Supervisor Qualification requirement: .2 6 5 .5 plus be the l completion of the classroom training required in 4. Successfu incumbent of a supervisory electrical or electronic mechanic position. .3 6 4. Connector Fabrication Quality Assurance Inspector Qualification requirement: Successful completion of the classroom training 5 required in 4. .5 plus be the incumbent of a quality assurance specialist or inspector position. is provided as an aid to completion of Electrical Attachment 7 4. B Cableway Inspection Form. 8 If local air hose test of 3.6.6 is required, the use of Standard 4. - Item 009 Structural Boundary Test; accomplish” will be specified 25 of 2.1 “ in the Work item. 7 of 1 3 73 009 ITEM NO: - FY - 1 9

489 are 4. 9 If clea ning and painting for new and disturbed surfaces of 3. 12 required; the use of Standard Item 009 - 32 of 2.1 “Cleaning and Painting Requirements; accomplish” will be specified in the Work Item. 009 8 of 1 73 - 3 ITEM NO: 9 FY - 1

490 ATTACHMENT A ELECTRICAL CABLEWAY INSPECTION FORM DATE HULL NUMBER INSPECTED BY INSPECTING ORGANIZATION *NAVSEA DWG *CAT CABLE TYPE POS EQUIPMENT CABLE CIRCUIT SER # COMPT DECK FRAME P/S DESIG NO. DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION FOR "CATEGORY" GUIDANCE B * SEE ATTACHMENT of 73 - 009 ITEM NO: 1 9 3 FY - 1 9 FY - 08 FY - 08

491 B ATTACHMENT INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR ELECTRICAL CABLES AND CABLEWAYS Immediate Hazard - CATEGORY 1 Potential Hazard - CATEGORY 2 Non Hazardous CATEGORY 3 - - CATEGORY CRITERIA ITEM I. CABLES A. Installation causing visual Minimum bend radius exceeded, 1 1. damage to cable. No visual Minimum bend radius exceeded; cable damage, cable rings out and meggers 2. 3 satisfactorily. Equipment connector supporting weight of (more than 32 inches of cable cable from 3. 1 equipment). (18 end use last support to from shock mounted motors). inches Cables run on or near hot objects (steam or 4. 1 pipes, griddles, ovens, etc. exhaust 5. Cable run outside of hangers. 3 Lack of slack at expansion joints. 2 6. Excess slack between hangers. (Minimum 7. 3 of 6 feet 4 inches between deck and distance cables.) 3 Excess cable slack stored in wireway. 8. B. Damage d Bulging, bubbling or discoloration of cable 1 overloading, overheating jacket (evidence of 1. or hot spots.) Bulging, bubbling or discolored cable 2 2. jacket; but cable rings out and meggers satisfactorily. Cable chafed or cut through outer jacket 2 3. only. Cable chafed or cut through, inner wire 1 4. insulation damage. equipment/junction box Cable pulled out of 1 5. penetrations and leads exposed Armored and unarmored cables in contact at an oblique 6. 2 angle causing chafing of unarmored jacket. of 1 3 009 - 10 73 ITEM NO: FY - 19

492 ITEM CRITERIA CATEGORY Fiber cable chafed or cut beyond the cable 7. 1 outer jacket evlar strength members K to the ended - C. Dead s ended, not end - Cable dead ealed and labeled 1. 1 (serialized) properly at both ends. Cable for future use not properly sealed on 2. both ends the 1 and labeled at both ends for specific use. Cable dead ended, end sealed and labeled - 3. 3 (serialized) properly. D. Spliced Improper materials/methods used for 1. 1 splicing, or evidence of loose joints. cable. 2. Splice located in bend of 2 II. BANDING A. All Cable Runs Banding cuts cable outer jacket (banding too 1 1. tight). Banding compressing outer jacket (banding 2. 3 too tight but not cutting jacket). Plastic tie wraps used in place of banding 3. 2 (metal banding strap required). straps Cables secured to hanger with bailing wire 1 4. or rope. 2 Bands cut and left in wireway. 5. 6. 2 Channel rubber not installed where required. B. Horizontal Cable Runs Banding not installed at breakout hangers 1. at change 2 before and after penetrations or wireway. of direction of C. Vertical Cable Runs No banding or loose banding (banding 2 1. hanger). required on every III. A. Cableways Cable hangers or hardware cutting into the 1 1. jacket. cable ITEM NO: 009 of 73 11 3 1 - - 1 9 FY FY - 08 FY 08 -

493 CATEGORY CRITERIA ITEM Improper hanger spacing (Cable hangers are required at least every 32 inches except 2 2. that hangers for multiple tier overhead aluminum decks shall be spaced every 16 inches). Inadequate cableway support (hangers, 2 3. hardware, tiers, or cable straps missing) or welds cracked. Overload/Overcrowded cable hangers. 3 4. 5. Maximum no. of tiers exceeded. 3 3 Inadequate fastener length. 6. clearance between cable run half inch - One 2 7. above or structure not provided. and hangers IV. E QUIPMENT A. Covers Junction box or equipment covers loose or 1. 1 missing. B. Mounting Cable supporting the weight of equipment 1. 1 (power junction boxes, lighting fixtures switch boxes, etc.) Missing loose or improperly installed 2. 2 on equipment. mounting hardware C. Cable Entrance Watertight penetrators not utilized for 1. 1 to entrance watertight equipment enclosures. Drip loops, drip shields plastic sealer or 1 2. penetration not utilized bottom for entrance drip proof equipment. watertight - to non Cable can be moved in and out of tube. 3. 1 packed. Improperly packed or not - Nylon tube base loose in enclosure. (O ring 1 4. missing) DECK/BULKHEAD PENETRATION V. A. Non - watertight Deck or Bulkhead Cable Penetration No plastic sealer around cables through 1 1. collars where required. - Chafing protection not installed at non watertight 2 deck or bulkhead cableway 2. penetrations. of 1 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 73 12 - 1 9 FY FY - 08 FY 08 -

494 CATEGORY CRITERIA ITEM Chafing ring overloaded. 3 3. Inadequate chafing protection and damage 1 4. evidence. B. Watertight Deck or Bulkhead Cable Penetration No plastic sealer around cable at stuffing which are exposed to the tubes weather. 2 Note: If installed at 1. plastic sealer is locations other than those exposed to the required to be removed. weather, it is not Stuffing tube or kickpipe not utilized 1 2. installed without tube). (cable kickpipe not Unused stuffing tube or 1 3. plugged. Stuffing tube or kickpipe assembly 1 4. packing, or incomplete (missing gland nut, pipe connector). Stuffing tube assembly incorrect (improper 2 5. packing). Stuffing tube or kickpipe too large for size 3 6. of cable. Multiple cables in a single stuffing tube or 7. 2 kickpipe. Stuffing tube or kickpipe damaged to point possible where complete assembly not (cracked welds, 2 - of - 8. damaged threads, out round, etc.) if firestop material is installed. C. Watertight Deck or Bulkhead Penetrations Utilizing Multiple Cable Penetration Insert blocks, compression bolts or filler 1. 1 blocks missing. Improper size blocks used for size cable 2. 2 violating watertight integrity. installed Incorrect type of RTV used to seal armored 3. 1 cable through MCP blocks. 1 4. RISE type MCP not properly sealed. ITEM NO: 73 1 3 of 009 - 13 FY - 1 9 08 FY - 08 FY -

495 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 0 09 - 74 DATE: 7 201 01 OCT I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : 1.1 ; a Plan ccomplish Occupational, S Title: afety and Health : REFERENCES 2. 2.1 Standard Items 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Part 29 CFR 2 2. Shipyard Employment 46 CFR 164.009, Noncombustible Materials for Merchant Vessels 3 2. 4 Safe Work Practices for Marine Hanging Staging: An OSHA Guidance 2. Document, April 2005 2. 5 Joint Fleet Maintenance Manual (JFMM) 2. 6 S0400 - AD - URM - 010/TUM, Tag - Out User ’ s Manual STM KC - S9086 General – 300, Electric Plant - 010/CH - - 2. 7 Occupational Injuries 8 2. 29 CFR Part 1904.7, Recording and Reporting and Illness, General Recording Criteria 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Establish, document, implement, and maintain a written Occupational and Health Safety Plan appropriate for the work to be accomplished. Provide a copy of the to the SUPERVISOR upon Occupational Safety and Health Plan shall include Occupational Safety and Health Plan request. At a minimum, the the following elements: 3.1.1 Method(s) of communicating potential hazards, prior to the ractor’s employees, subcontractor employees, and task, to cont start of any other potentially affected personnel. 3.1.1.1 Hazards to be addressed shall include but not be limited to emergency evacuation and muster policy, confined space, and energy control. of 009 11 1 ITEM NO: - 74 FY - 1 9

496 A process for performing a Job Safety Analysis/Job Hazard 3.1.2 Analysis (JSA/JHA) for: t new to the worksite. Processes and equipmen 2 .1 3.1. 2 3.1. .2 Existing processes and equipment that have been involved in mishaps or near misses. .3 2 3.1. which shall be Maintain a copy of each JSA/JHA the SUPERVISOR upon request. for review by available 3.1. entification, communication, abatement, and 3 A process for id prevention of unsafe conditions and work practices. Method(s) to account for employees and subcontractors working 4 3.1. in isolated areas, e.g. Confined spaces. walkways are adequately 5 3.1. Method(s) to ensure work area s and . illuminated 6 Method(s) to establish and maintain good housekeeping 3.1. practices. 3.1. 7 Method(s) to ensure that medical services and first aid are readily accessible. accessible Method(s) to provide adequate and readily 3.1. 8 sanitation facilities. 9 3.1. otifying the Quarter A process for n eck and initiating d emergency response. 3.2 Update the Safety Plan as circumstances warrant or at the request of the SUPERVISOR. 3.3 SUPERVISOR before each ontact to the Provide a Safety Point of C project. Provide appropriate P 4 3. quipment (PPE) for Protective E ersonal . employees and monitor utilization in accordance with 2. 2 5 3. facilities naval Mark or tag material and equipment brought aboard and vessels. Marking or tags must endure the repair process, and must stay . dismantled attached and/or be readable until the material or equipment is .1 5 3. display the company name, point of Marking/tags shall contact, phone number, item description and contents. 6 Provide the SUPERVISOR a complete list of subcontractors (e.g., 3. company name) hired by the contractor prior to subcontractor(s) commencing work aboard naval facilities or vessels. 2 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 74 FY - 1 9

497 3. 6 .1 Contractor shall monitor, inspect, oversee, and abate hazardous or deficient conditions related to the conduct and work practices of subcontractor(s). 7 Ensure Material Handling Equipment (MHE) and Aerial Work Platforms 3. (AWP) are operated and maintained in accordance with 2. 2 and manufacturer's specifications. .1 operators of MHE and AWP meet applicable training and Ensure 7 3. licensing requirements and provide documentation to the SUPERVISOR upon request. .2 Ensure operators conduct a daily operational check of the MHE 3. 7 or AWP before use. al for check s 3. 7 .2.1 Maintain copies of the daily operation the duration of the performance period of the prime contract and provide copies to the SUPERVISOR upon request. “Screw type” hose clamps are prohibited on any pressurized hose 3.8 and gas compressed (e.g., . hoses) air 3.9 Temporary lights shall have 3 conductor cable, guard or shield, - - current - carrying metal parts of the hook, and lamp holder. Exposed non fixture shall be grounded either through a third wire in the cable containing the current conductors, or t hrough a separate wire that is grounded at the fixture's voltage source. Temporary lighting fixtures shall not be used to power 3.9.1 portable electric tools. 3.9.2. Maintain temporary lights in a safe condition. Splices shall gazine and ammunition handling spaces. not be permitted in ma Temporary services shall be suspended using non 3.10 combustible high - test requirements of s that meet temperature devices, brackets, or material Plastic tie wraps, string, rope, or other combustible material shall . 3 2. not be used. .1 3.10 All temporary services shall be positively identified with durable unique markings that include maintenance activity name, service type, location, and shore side off points. Tags shall be located (at a - shut minimum) at the source, point of entry aboard ship, at each connection point point. termination and , (including quick disconnects) 3.10.2 Identify vital temporary services with a unique marking or tag at the shore side shut - off location. Markings or tags shall endure the repair process, and shall stay attached and readable until the vital temporary service is no longer in service. V ital temporary services shall be determined by the SUPERVISOR. Rigging of temporary services, such as but not limited to hoses, 1 3.1 electrical lines, welding leads, and temporary lights shall be kept clear of 009 of 11 3 ITEM NO: - 74 FY - 1 9

498 the decks temporary support trees or utilizing ship’s structural members, such as beams, braces, and welded brackets and be arranged to minimize tripping and other safety hazards and to allow free access through doors, hatches, and passageways. 3.1 1 .1 Temporary service lines shall be routed to a llow emergency access and egress to all areas of the ship and shall not impede damage control and watchstander performance of duties. Where appropriate, run temporary services outboard to keep passageways clear. 3.1 1 . 2 Remove temporary services from the ship when no longer needed. fire prevention daily valuate temporary services during the E 3 . 1 3.1 and housekeeping inspection made jointly with the SUPERVISOR and Ship’s Force . Discrepancies shall be promptly corrected. 3.11. 4 Shipboard temporary ventilation systems used for exhausting toxic contaminants and/or flammable vapors shall be constructed so that ducting within confined and enclosed spaces is under negative pressur e. .1 3.11. 4 Use fire retardant ventilation ducting. Proper documentation of fire retardancy shall be available for review upon request of the SUPERVISOR. adequate light source or other 3. 1 2 Each employee shall have a flashlight vessel. navy a onboard 3.1 3 Notify personnel of lifting operations by audible alerts during shall crane operations (e.g., whistles or horns) . Audible alerts be utilized throughout the lifting evolution . 3. 1 4 Comply with the fall protection requirements of 2. 2 . and dismantled 5 , maintained Scaffolding shall be built, in accordance 3. 1 2 and manufacturer's specifications or under the direction of a with 2. Professional Engineer. 3. Provide manufacturer's specifications to the SUPERVISOR upon .1 5 1 request. 3. 5 .2 Tag all scaffolding. Tags must endure the repair process, 1 and must stay attached and be readable. 3. 1 5 .2.1 Tags shall display the stage of completion, scaffold load capacity, and availability for use. swing each a that so at installed is gate 3.1 5 .3 Erect scaffolding orking level accessed by a ladder. w 3. 4 . 5 1 Ensure marine hanging scaffolding meets the guidance provided . 3 in 2. 4 of 11 009 ITEM NO: - 74 FY - 1 9

499 5 When there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment 5 3. 1 . falling from a scaffold and striking employees below during the erection, dismantling, or altering of scaffolding, the area below the scaffold to which objects can fall shall be barricaded and adequately identified with signs and danger tape. Employees not involved with the scaffolding operation shall not be permitted to enter the hazard area. 2 6 3.1 Ensure protective measures are taken in accordance with 2. before creating a deck opening or an unguarded edge. .1 Deck openings and unguarded edges shall not be left 3.1 6 unprotected for any amount of time. Crimping or pinching of fuel gas/oxygen/compressed gas hoses, air 7 3.1 hoses, or hoses carrying hazardous/toxic/flammable materials is prohibited. All hoses shall be disconnected at the manufacturer’s fittings. Prior to ent/tool, pressure shall be released by disconnecting hoses from equipm disconnecting the hose from the source, e.g., manifold or gas cylinder. 8 3.1 Volume 2 Notify the SUPERVISOR and accomplish the requirements of 2. , IV, Chapter 10 of prior to working aloft. 2. 6 , 5 and 2. Accomplish the requirements of the vessel’s work aloft .1 8 3.1 instruction and utilize the vessel’s working aloft request form. The vessel’s working aloft .1.1 3.1 8 request form shall be routed in accordance with the ship’s aloft instruction for permission for working over the side or in aloft zones. Do not enter aloft zones or be suspended over the side by a crane without first obtaining written permission from the Officer of the Deck (OOD) in the form of working aloft request form. 3.1 he working aloft request form is active Verify that t .1.2 8 prior to going aloft each time. 3.1 Provide and use personal fall arrest system (PFAS), working .2 8 lanyard, and climber safety device when going aloft where a climber safety rail is not installed, use a double rail is installed. If a climber safety lanyard configuration. In the absence of a properly guarded work platform, position .3 8 3.1 a safety observer on deck near the work being performed. The safety observer shall keep the deck area beneath the work aloft free of unnecessary personnel. In case of an emergency, the safety observer shall notify the 3.1 8 .4 Quarterdeck or emergency services. 7 for work on 3.1 Accomplish safety precautions as specified in 2. 9 electrical/electronic circuits and equipment. 9 3.1 .1 Obtain written authorization from the ship’s Commanding before testing or Officer entering components which are energized at a value greater than 30 volts. 5 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 74 FY - 1 9

500 20 3. Notify the SUPERVISOR and vessel’s Quarterdeck immediately by verbal cident ( means of each in fire, flooding, and electrical accident, injury, shock occurring on the vessel, dry dock or pier/berth involving ) contractor/subcontractor personnel. and preserve Secure .1 3. 20 until released by the scene the SUPERVISOR. 3. , in one legible copy Submit 20 media, of approved transferrable .2 a formal written report, Attachment A, of the incident to the SUPERVISOR each electrical one day of each accident requiring medical treatment, within when reques ted by the SUPERVISOR . Provide , each fire shock, incident any or upon request by the SUPERVISOR, until the final daily updates within one day report is submitted. The written report shall contain the name of each injured person, date and time of incident/fire, extent of each personal ury or property damage, contractor/subcontractor name, Job Order/Work Item inj Number, type of incident/fire, location of event (ship name and hull number, space, compartment), a brief description of the event including occurrences leading up to the incident/f ire, equipment involved, Contract Number, witness and/or individuals involved, short term and long term corrective action, and root cause analysis. 1 2 3. docks Repair and maintenance employees working aboard vessels, dry and piers shall have a valid 10 ho ur OSH A Maritime Shipyard Employment C ourse #7615 approved equivalent completion card within 60 days of or NAVSEA - and shall maintain the qualification. employment 3.21.1 Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or approved transferrable media, of a report listing the OSHA outreach training program report as documentation of completing Course number 7615 until completion cards are received to the SUPERVISOR upon request. 1 2 3. .2 The authorized maritime trainer shall have successfully completed the OSHA 540 0 trainer course in occupational safety and health The authorized maritime trainer shall standards for the maritime industry. have a current OSHA Training Institute ID number and shall follow the OSHA outreach training program guidelines. in current copies of the training documents required by Mainta .3 1 2 3. Submit one legible copy in the guidelines for reference by the SUPERVISOR. media when requested by the SUPERVISOR. approved transferrable Install a temporary general announcing system which ca n be heard or 3.22 the ship’s in spaces that are not normally manned and seen general announcing system cannot be heard, such as occupied tanks and voids, including tanks The temporary general entered through hull cut access when in dry dock. announcing system must be approved by the SUPERVISOR prior to the start of work. - Install casualty reporting non 3.23 dial red telephones with an indicator light that report to the Ship’s Quarter Deck when the Shipboard Casualty Reporting System is nonoperational. Instal l telephones in each fire zone at 6 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 74 FY - 1 9

501 least every 100 feet of ship’s length on decks/platforms, placed on alternating sides of the deck/platform and located at a junction with athwartship passageways. Install a telephone on each level and each fire zone of the ship’s superstructure, such that a telephone is within 100 feet of any part of the level. Install telephones in each space of decks/platforms below the Damage Control or Main Deck less than 100 feet of ship’s length, within ten feet of all exit ladders. I nstall a telephone within ten feet of the exit to each tank open for maintenance. Label each phone with space location. The use of tobacco products (cigarettes, cigars, smokeless tobacco, 3.24 electronic cigarettes, and electronic nicotine delivery syst ems) is prohibited onboard vessels, adjacent piers and dry docks, except in designated areas. 3.2 5 Food and beverages (excluding water and “hydration supplements,” e.g., Gatorade) shall not be permitted aboard vessels, except in areas designated by the S UPERVISOR. 3.2 Property taken onboard, such as bags and tool boxes, shall be 6 identified to include organization name, employee name and badge number. 7 3.2 Label compressed gas cylinders or cylinder storage racks with company name or unique identifier. .1 Secure all compressed gas cylinders in a cylinder rack. 7 3.2 3.2 .2 Compressed gas cylinders shall not be secured to pier or 7 vessel structures. .3 Secure all compressed gas cylinders for transportation by 3.2 7 pallet or cylinder rack. Submit a written request to use Ship’s Force services (e.g., air, 3.2 8 water and electrical power). Request shall include rational for deviation, duration of use, and type and description of equipment that will be utilizing ship’s services. .1 Subm 8 3.2 it one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of each request to the SUPERVISOR. 4. NOTES : 4.1 The term “medical treatment” is defined in 2. 8 . Requests for deviations/waivers of training requirements will only 4.2 on a case be approved by NAVSEA and - by - case basis. This includes equivalent training for foreign nationals. The term “repair and maintenance employee” is defined as one whose 4.3 employment relates to or is in conjunction with ship repairing, shipbuilding, or shipbreaking work , including, but not restricted to, inspection, testing, 7 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 74 FY - 1 9

502 and employment as a fire watch. This excludes employees who provide incidental services that do not influence shipyard employment such as delivery services. or connecting device/system A "quick disconnect" is a coupling 4 4. designed to permit easy and immediate separation of lines without the use of tools and to ensure the contents do not escape. 4.5 Meeting the requirements of 3.21.1 satisfies the requirement of 3.21. et the requirement of 3.21 4.6 OSHA 5400 trainers me . ted in accordance 009 - 120 of 2.1 , 4.7 When a Fact Finding Report is direc complete initial submission of Attachment A as directed by this Standard Item, report corrective action and root cause analysis in accordance with 120 of 2.1. - 009 009 8 of 11 ITEM NO: - 74 9 1 - FY

503 ATTACHMENT A FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY INCIDENT REPORT Report # REQUESTED UPDATE INITIAL REPORT FINAL REPORT TYPE OF : INCIDENT (if applicable) : D OF INJURE NAME (S) INCIDENT : COMPANY : DATE TIME : SUPERVISOR: LOCATION OF INCI DENT : TYPE OF INJURY OR FIRE : EQUIPMENT INVOLVED : CAUSE OF IN CIDENT : CONTRACT NUMBER : WORK ITEM NUMBER : /OR INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED WITNESS AND DEPT. NAME(S) COMPANY INCIDENT DESCRIPT I ON OF (if applicable) DISPOSITION OF INJURED IMMEDIATE CORRECTIVE ACTION : TITLE INVESTIGATED BY (NAME) : : DATE : SIGNATURE OF INVESTIGATOR 74 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 9 FY - 19

504 ATTACHMENT A FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY INCIDENT REPORT Report # LONG TERM CORRECTIVE ACTION ROOT CAUSE ANALYSIS : TITLE : INVESTIGATED BY (NAME) 74 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 10 FY - 19

505 ATTACHMENT A FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY DATE : : SIGNATURE OF INVESTIGATOR Incident Report Instructions REPORT N UMBER - Unique tracking number created by contractor TYPE OF INCIDENT - Injury, fire or near miss NAME(S) OF INJURED - Self Explanatory INCIDENT DATE : - Self Explanatory : TIME - Self Explanatory COMPANY : - Prime and subcontractors involved SUPERVISOR – Supervisor of employee(s) involved and - hull number, space number and compartment name Base/Yard, Ship name LOCATION OF INCIDENT : arm, laceration to head or Class A, B, C fires, smoldering TYPE OF INJURY OR FIRE – i.e. broken i.e. Equipment failure, PPE, process – CAUSE OF INJURY – EQUIPMENT INVOLVED Equipment working on and equipment being used to cause incident ork – W WORK ITEM NUMBER I tem being accomplished when incident occurred CONTRACT NUMBER : - Contract Number assigned by government agency i.e. RMC, Alteration Installation Team ( AIT ) Sponsor. – . and or individuals involved with the incident witnesses company of Name, WITNESS AND/OR INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED DESCRIPTON OF INCIDENT OR NEAR MISS – Short description of events leading up to incident and extent of injuries and or damage to equipment. – DISPOSITION OF INJURED hospital, name i.e. Transported to hospital via ambulance or POV, transported to clinic, released from of hospital or clinic, limited duty or loss time (if known). ship notified (who and when), RMC notified (who secured, /space i.e. Scene when) and IMMEDIATE CORRECTIVE ACTION – clean up of blood, equipment secured fire debris cleaned up. – Self Explanatory. INVESTIGATED BY – Self Explanatory. TITLE Self Explanatory. – SIGNATURE OF INVESTIGATOR Self Explanatory. – DATE – What action(s) were taken so that incident does not reoccur, i.e. training, safety stand down LONG TERM CORRECTIVE ACTION or process/policy change. Process by which you will identify the cause or contributing factors of the incident. – ROOT CAUSE ANALYSIS Note: necessary. Attach additional information as 74 of 11 ITEM NO: 009 - 11 FY - 19

506 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 009 - 75 ITEM NO: 201 7 DATE: 01 OCT II CATEGORY: : SCOPE 1. Circuit Breaker; repair Title: 1.1 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 Equipment Technical Manual : REQUIREMENTS 3. 3.1 Identify and pull back associated cables and wiring. M echanically remove each circuit breaker, using 2.1 for guidance. 3.1.1 Matchmark and retain mounting hardware and fasteners. Protect exposed terminal connections and internal switchboard 1.2 3. parts from dirt and damage. 3.1.2.1 Each phase shall be isolated and protected from other phases. 1 for guidance. 3.2 Disassemble each circuit breaker, using 2. Inspect and test electrical and mechanical components, 3.2.1 assemblies, subassemblies, internal circuitry, and hardware to design characteristics and determine missing and defective components, circuitry, and hardware in accordance with 2.1. Acceptance criteria for silver contacts is that wear 3.2.1.1 shall be less than 50 percent of original thickness after dressing, contacts shall have no evidence of copper migration, and shall have no irregular, essing. burnt, or pitted interface after dr - Acceptance criteria for non silver contacts is that, 3.2.1.2 after dressing, wear shall be less than 10 percent of original thickness and contacts shall have no irregular, burnt, or pitted interface after dressing. Test internal wiring, coils, and transformers for open and 3.2.2 short circuits and 500 volt megger insulation resistance to ground. Record readings. Minimum acceptable resistance to ground shall be one megohm. 1 of 5 75 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

507 , of 3.2.3 transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in approved a report listing results of the requirements of 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 to the SUPERVISOR. 3.3 Remove defective and install new electrical and mechanical components, assemblies, subassemblies, internal circuitry, and h ardware. Install new electrical and mechanical components, assemblies, subassemblies, internal circuitry, and hardware where missing. New material shall conform to the requirements of 2.1 and shall be obtained from the Federal Stock - System or the Origina l Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), except for non restricted parts. Clean each component free of dirt, lubricants, and other 3.3.1 foreign matter. Steam cleaning of circuit breakers is not 3.3.1.1 authorized. Resilver previ ously silver plated contacts in accordance with 3.3.2 ASTM B 700. 3.3.3 Dress, burnish, adjust, and align arcing and main contacts (contacts that experience arcing in functional duty) in accordance with 2.1. 3.3.4 zinc in accordance existing cadmium - plated parts with Replace . with ASTM A 153 Dip and bake taped insulated coils and open transformers in 3.3.5 I - - 24092, Class 155. varnish conforming to MIL Dip and bake insulated coils and open transformers 3.3.5.1 in Dolph Varnish 1105, Epoxylite Esterlit e 605, or Schenectady International Isolite 862M varnish in localities where MIL - - 24092 varnish does not meet I state and local air pollution control district standards. in 3.3.6 Remove existing and install new coil and transformer leads place of those identified to be missing or defective. 3.3.7 Repair defective connections. Free - up and adjust moving parts and latching mechanisms. 3.3.8 Lubricate the current - carrying parts (except for interrupting 3.3.9 87177, Type - L - joints with lubricant conforming to MIL contacts) and sliding I, Grade B. Lubricate mechanical pivots, excluding latch roller face - G - - purpose grease conforming to DOD components, with high performance multi 24508. 3.3.9.1 off excess. Apply new lubricant sparingly and wipe 2 of 5 75 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

508 3.3.10 Test and inspect molded and insulation parts in accordance with the following criteria: Phase phase dielectric strength 2 to - 000 volts , 3.3.10.1 - minimum. Surface burn marks and hairline cracks are 3.3.10.2 acceptable but shall not deteriorate the mold surface or impair physical strength. Cracks are not permitted in wall section between phase and a ground plane when there is a conducting part in contact with the wall section. ch in length, and in no case should be Cracks should not exceed 0.75 in greater than 50 percent of the length of the surface in which the crack appears. 3.3.10.3 Surface cracks should not exceed 1.5 inches in e length, and in no case should be greater than 50 percent of the length of th surface in which the crack appears. approved transferrable 3.3.10.4 Submit one legible copy, in media report listing results of the requirements of 3.3.10 to the , of a SUPERVISOR. (V) "SHOP TEST" est and inspect each motor operator and motor in accordance Shop t 3.4 with 2.1. , of a 3.4.1 Submit one legible copy, approved transferrable media report to SUPERVISOR listing defects. the (V) "SETTINGS AND MILLIVOLT DROP TEST" le each circuit breaker and accomplish adjustments and Reassemb 3.5 settings in accordance with 2.1. Align and true each set of stationary and movable contacts to 3.5.1 the manufacturer's specifications. 3.5.2 contacts in Accomplish millivolt drop test to each set of accordance with 2.1 or Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) requirements. (V) "TEST, CALIBRATION, AND ADJUSTMENT" 3.6 Test, calibrate, adjust, and certify the trip units of each circuit breaker for time delay and instan taneous trip settings in accordance with 2.1. 3.6.1 Accomplish a heat run test for repaired type ACB and AQB circuit breakers. 3 of 5 75 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

509 to a test set 3.6.1.1 Connect each ACB type circuit breaker and apply rated current to each individual phase of the circuit breaker for 30 minutes. After 5 minutes, measure the voltage across the line to load contacts of each pole and calculate the contact impedance. Satisfactory 000 , 4 , 050 , , and below 1 - ampere ACB's is below 225 microhms impedance for 1 0 60 microhms for 600 - 900 ampere ACB's. 3.6.1.2 Connect each AQB - type molded case circuit breaker to a test set and apply rated current to each phase simultaneously for one hour. trip within that hour. The AQB shall not approved Submit one legible copy, in hard copy or 3.6.2 , of a report listing results of the requirements of 3.6.1 transferrable media to the SUPERVISOR. 3.6.3 Attach a calibration label to the face of each c ircuit breaker denoting the name and location of the calibration facility and date of calibration. In the event there is insufficient room on the face of the circuit breaker, attach the calibration label to the right hand side of the m the front. breaker as viewed fro Install and connect each circuit breaker. 3.7 | (V)(G) "OPERATIONAL TEST" 3.8 Accomplish final adjustments and test operate each circuit breaker, including control and safety devices. 3.8.1 Close and trip each circuit breaker electrically from local Three consecutive successful times required. and remote stations. Ensure generator heater interlock is de energized by - 3.8.1.1 the generator circuit breaker. Repeat the requirements of 3.8.1 manually. 3.8.2 : 4. NOTES 4.1 Equipment technical manual will be listed in the invoking Work Item. 4.2 Repair a nd overhaul will be accomplished by the Navy Designated Overhaul Point (DOP) at Puget Sound Naval Shipyard, the OEM, or a commercial repair facility that has demonstrated to the SUPERVISOR the capability to perform the work. Capability to perform circuit breaker overhaul and repair work includes having the facilities, trained mechanics, and access to the - OEM`s qualified parts and repair procedures. Use of non qualified restricted parts violates the integrity of the circuit breaker, nullifying the breakers prior qualification under the QPL process. Restricted parts must be obtained from the OEM either directly or via (if available) the Federal stock system. If a restricted part is replaced with an unqualified part, the qualification 4 of 5 75 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

510 of the particular circ uit breaker is revoked until the full set of QPL required tests are repeated and submitted to NAVSEA for approval. restricted parts are defined as nuts, bolts, screws, washers, - Non 4.3 ght lockwashers, cotter pins, O - rings, indicator lights, and indicator li globes (colored and clear) only. 4.4 The following ACB circuit breakers listed by manufacturer contain friable asbestos arc chutes: non - SPD, ITE, ITE/Gould: 640R, 900RC, 901R, 1600R, 1600HR, 4.4.1 0HR, 4000HR. 1600HRC, 2000HR, 2000RC (450V), 2601R, 2801R, 320 General Electric: all types. 4.4.2 4.4.3 Westinghouse: All DBN types. 5 of 5 75 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

511 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 76 DATE: 18 NOV 20 1 6 CATEGORY: II SCOPE : 1. Waveguide and 1.1 Title: Rigid Coaxial Lay - Up ; accomplish 2. REFERENCES : Equipment Technical Manual 2.1 SE000 Installation and Maintenance Book (NIMB), 010, Navy - IMB - 01 - 2.2 Section IX, Installation Standards (Source CD: N0002400003) : REQUIREMENTS 3. Disconnect each dry air pressure line at last mechanical joint 3.1 as up - designated by the SUPERVISOR and connect tem porary nitrogen or dry air lay to ship's dry air panel, control/monitor panels and associated equipment using 2.1 for guidance. 3.1.1 Where lay up conditions permit, ensure temporary nitrogen or - dry air lay up control/monitor panels are operational f or continuous - monitoring of temporary nitrogen or dry air in the equipment space(s). 3.2 Accomplish uninterrupted nitrogen or dry air lay - up for each 2.7 of 2.2 waveguide and rigid coaxial cable in accordance with Paragraph 5 - and lay up procedures of 2.1 . - - Do not connect unregulated pressurized air to equipment sub 3.2.1 assemblies or components. Ensure that temporary dry air pressure source each is - connected in accordance with lay up procedures of 2.1 to prevent equipment pressuriza - tion. No pressurization shall be supplied to damage due to over waveguide in excess of the normal operating pressures specified for that equipment. 3.2.2 Ensure temporary dry air meets the requirements of Paragraph - 1.14 and 5 - 5 1.15 of 2.2, and the following: 3.2.2.1 Dew Point: Minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit at 80 PSIG. 3.2.2.2 Quality of Air: Filtered to remove all particulate matter greater than one micrometer and filtered for a total amount of 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 76 FY - 1 9

512 contamination (including oil contaminants) not to exceed one part per million by weight. 3.2.3 Pressurize each line as specified in the lay - up procedures of 2.1. up instructions are not 3.2.3.1 Where specific lay - available, pressurize those lines to 3 PSIG. 3.2.3.2 Install relief valve downstr eam of temporary source, setting relief pressure at 5 PSIG. - 2.7.2 and 5 - Identify leaks in accordance with Paragraph 5 3.2.4 2.7.3 of 2.2. approved transferrable Submit one legible copy, in 3.2.4.1 media , of a report listing resul ts of the requirements of 3.2.4 to the SUPERVISOR. 3.3 Remove temporary pressurization when directed by the SUPERVISOR. the dry air pressure line 3.3.1 disconnected in 3.1. Connect 3.3.2 in accordance with Paragraph 5 Purge and pressurize - 2.7 of 2.2. : NOTES 4. 4.1 Equipment technical manual will be listed in the invoking Work Item. Where lay 4.2 - up conditions permit, ensure equipment's dry air control/monitor panels are operational for continuous monitoring of temporary dry air in the equipment space(s). 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 76 FY - 1 9

513 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 77 DATE: 01 OCT 201 7 II CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : ; accomplish 1.1 Title: Cofferdam Installation 2. REFERENCES : Standard Items 2.1 2.2 - PRO - AA - S0600 160/CH 16, Underwater Ship Husbandry Manual, Cofferdams - 3. REQUIREMENTS : Maintain watertight integrity to a level 4 feet above the max imum 3.1 draft, including but not limited to the following operations: calculated access openings, hull plating replacement, welding to the hull when pre - heating is required, modifications or repairs to damage or deterioration that will degrade watertight int egrity or stability, or piping and mechanical repairs that are expected to result in less than double valve protection. - 3.2 Accomplishment of a Process Control Procedure (PCP) to support installation of a cofferdam (e.g., plug, patch, dry chamber, stern tube seal) shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.4) and include the following: 1 Include the Operational Checklist, Table 16 9 of 2.2, in the - 3.2. PCP . 3.2. 2 Prior to the start of the PCP , any time the installed cofferdam will serve as the only barrier to the sea (single valve protection), ensure Ship's Commanding Officer sign - off via the SUPERVISOR, as required by Paragraph 16 - 4.7.1.4 (plugs), or Paragraph 16 - 5.2.10 (patches), 5 or Paragraph 16 6.6 (dry chambers), or Paragraph 1 6 - 7.6. - (stern tube seals) of 2.2 . The first pa ge of the PCP shall be stamped SINGLE 3.2.2.1 - inch letters. in , at the top, VALVE PROTECTION one half minimum Attachment A shall be used to document single valve 3.2.2.2 isolation signatures. 1 of 15 77 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

514 , of the 3.3 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media maintenance records in accordance with Paragraph 16 design and - 5.2.7 (stern (patches), or Paragraph 16 - 6.6.4 (dry chambers), or Paragraph 16 - 7.6. 3 tube seals) of 2.2 to the SUPERVISOR. , submit one legible copy, in 3.4 Prior to the start of the PCP approved , of Ship's Force notification in accordance with transferrable media Paragraph 16 - 4.7.1.3 (plugs), or Paragraph 16 - 5.2.9 (patches), or Paragraph (stern tube seals) 8 - and 16 16 - 6.6 (dry chambers), or Paragraphs 16 - 7.6. 5 7.6. of 2.2 to the SUPERVISOR. 3.5 Prior to the removal of the cofferdam, submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of Ship’s Force notification in accordance with 5.2.9 (patches), or Paragraph Par agraph 16 - 4.7.1.3 (plugs), or Paragraph 16 - - 16 7.6.5 and 16.7.6.8 (stern tube seals) - 6.6 (dry chambers), or Paragraphs 16 of 2.2 to the SUPERVISOR. (I)(G) “REMOVAL OF COFFERDAM” 6 amber, or stern tube seal) 3. Remove each cofferdam (plug, patch, dry ch and all associated components upon completion of repairs. 4. : NOTES 2.2 and associated forms are available at: 4.1 http://www.navsea.navy.mil/Portals/103/Documents/SUPSALV/UWSH/chap16.pdf https://secure.supsalv.org/00C5publications.asp . B Attachment is provided as an aid to cofferdam PCP development 4.2 The maximum draft, calculated Maximum Calculated Draft (MCD) – 4.3 during the period in which ship’s draft is affected due to evolutions which add, remove, or change weight. It represents the “worst case” cumulative t, or draft for the proposed weight effect at any one time on trim, lis - changes throughout the period that hull penetrations are in a non standard configuration. MCD shall be known and utilized by SUPERVISOR and Ship’s ds. Force in scheduling work and testing during waterborne maintenance perio A PCP to support installation of a cofferdam (e.g., plug, patch, dry 4.4 chamber, stern tube seal) is required; the use of Category II Standard Item - 009 09 “Process Control Procedure (PCP); provide and accomplish” of 2.1 shall k Item. be specified in the Wor 2 of 15 77 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

515 ATTACHMENT A AUTHORIZATION FOR SINGLE VALVE ISOLATION Date____________________ PROVIDE NOTIFICATION OF SINGLE VALVE ISOLATION REQUIREMENT AND PROVIDE Subj: PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES TO BE EMPLOYED DURING REPAIRS/ALTERATIONS TO SEA - CONNE CTED SYSTEMS. Ref: (a) OPNAVINST 3120.32 Series 1. The procedures involved in this repair/alteration will subject the affected area to a flooding hazard during the responsibilities for time the repair is being accomplished. The purpose of this notification is to outline the precautionary measures placed upon the contractor and the ship while the repairs/alterations are in progress. lished to the following system: 2. System: The repairs/alterations to be accomp nt/Space _______________________________ ______________________________________Compone 3. ll provide: Prior to Commencing work, the contractor sha 77, has been developed a. A procedure, in accordance with the requirements of NAVSEA Standard Item 009 - and approved by the SUPERVISOR (Copy Attached). b. The se quence of repairs to be accomplished, including drawings of the system and valve locations. The proposed system isolation must be discussed and mutually agreed upon between the ship, SUPERVISOR, and the contractor. Identify possible hazards of single valv e isolation failure. ___________________________________ c. Expected start ______________ and completion _______________ for single valve isolation evolution. d. e. Watertight boundaries have been defined, sighted, tagged out and verified. ______________________ 4. During the period of this repair, the following minimum precautions are required: a. Ship’s Supervisor, E - 7 or above, must be present to verify single valve isolation and breaking of pressure boundary. ffected system and monitor for leaks, etc. b. the a Ship’s For ce will provide a watch on Ship will maintain appropriate state of damage control readiness. c. 5. See attached drawing of system and valve locations. ______________________________ ________________________ ________ _________________ Commanding Officer/approval Ship’s SRA Coordinator Engineering Officer ______________________________ hip / Project Management Officer ( R PMO ) epair (Notification made to Waterfront Operations O fficer (SRO) S Officer) (Held on site for SBS Review) 3 of 15 77 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 19

516 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors References 1. NAVSEA STD ITEM 009 - 01, General Criteria; accomplish 09, Process Control Procedure (PCP); provide and accomplish - 2. NAVSEA STD ITEM 009 160 Underwater Ship Husbandry Manual, Chapter 16 (Appendix C, D, E, F, G; Table 16 - S0600 - AA - PRO - 3. 9) 4. NAVSEA STD ITEM 009 - 77, Cofferdam Requirements NAVSEA STD ITEM 009 24, Authorization, Control, Isolation, Blanking and Tagging Requirements; 5. - accomplish 6. 777, Schedule of Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Associated Piping Components for Naval Surface - STD - MIL - Ships - 5959353, MIL - STD or 802 777 Modified for DDG - 51 Class 7. NAVSEA STD ITEM 009 - 04, Quality Management System; provide 1 All cofferdam PCPs shall include the following MINIMUM criteria, including Critical Factors , as appropriate, preferably in the order shown below (for further elaboration, see the applicable Reference): Ref Justification Criteria YES NO N/A 1. OLS . ADMINISTRATIVE CONTR SHIP’S NAME 1 3.2.4.1 1.1. 1 3.2.4.1 SHIP’S HULL NUMBER 1.2. NUCLEAR VESSEL? 2 3.1.1 1.3. CONTRACTOR’S NAME Attachment A 2 3.1.1 2 CONTRACTOR’S ADDRESS 1.4. 2 Attachment A 2 Attachment A 1.5. WORK ITEM AND PARAGR APH 1 3.2.4.1 3.1.2 2 1.6. PCP TITLE 2 Attachment A 2 3.1.2 ISION) 1.7. PCP NUMBER (WITH REV Attachment A 2 2 3.1.2 1.8. DATE OF PCP DEVELOPM ENT 2 Attachment A 2 3.1.10 PCP SUBMISSION DATE 1.9. 2 Attachment A 3.2.4.4 1 2 1.10. . The individual S REPRESENTATIVE TITLE OF CONTRACTOR’ 3.1.10 3.2.4.4 responsible for creating the PCP. 1 3.1.10 2 APPROVAL SIGNATURE 1.11. 2 Attachment A ITEM NO: - 77 4 of 15 009 19 FY -

517 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors 2. PURPOSE/SCOPE . Describe the process and: 3.1.3 2 Type of cofferdam (a) Attachment A 2 (b) Affected hull opening 3 Appendix C (c) Affected equipment/system(s) 2 3.1.4 PERSONNEL QUALIFICAT IONS . 2 3. Attachment A 3 - 16 10.2.3 10.2.1 - 16 3 16 3 - 10.2.2 3.1. . Note the Diving Contractor‘s Training Plan Diver Training Plan - 10.2.4.1 16 3 & documentation complies with Reference 3, 16 10.2.1 & 10.2.2. - 3 - 10.2.4.2 16 16 - 10.2.4.3 3 3.2. Diver Competency . Note the Divers: Are ADCI recognized with 7 years (min.) commercial diving (a) experience; - 16 1.6 3 (b) Have current medical physical screening; - 3 16 10.2.3.3.1 16 3 (c) Have current CPR and First Aid certification; 10.2.3.3.2 - 10.2.4.2.5 - 16 3 qualification; Have cofferdam program (d) 3 16 - 10.2.4.2.8 (e) Have performed six (6) cofferdam installations; Have performed a cofferdam installation within the past six (f) (6) months. 5.2.20 - 16 Minimum Diver Cofferdam Training Requirements . 3.2.1. 3 16 10.2.2 - 3 Require the completion of Reference 3, Appendix E - 16 demonstrating Diver fundamental cofferdam 3 10.2.3.3.4.(c) knowledge. 3 Appendix E 2 16 3 were 3.3. standard cofferdam(s) - . Specify NON Engineering 3.11 - 3 16 designed by a degreed Engineer or Professional Engineer. 10.2.3.1 - . Note Contractor Welders are qualified to 10.2.3.2 16 3 - 3.4. Fabrication Personnel 3 16 - 10.2.4.3 Company’s approved welding procedure. SAFETY GUIDELINES 4. . Personnel Protective Gear . Note that the minimum required PPE 4.1. 2 Attachment A CF will be used and provide several examples. . Note Hazardous Material Identification and Hazardous Materials 4.2. 2 3.1.9 minimization methods comply with NAVSEA STD ITEM 009 03, - Attachment A 2 Hazardous Substances; control, as required. Toxic and - 5 009 ITEM NO: 77 of 15 - 19 FY

518 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors - Emergency Flooding Plan valve protection is 4.3. . Whenever single in place, include in the written notification to the ship a specific 4.7.1.5 3 16 - plan for immediate installation of a replacement piping - component or internal sealing blank. Provide a note indicating 5.2.10 3 16 - 16 5 7.6. - site Emergency that S/F is responsible for developing an on 3 3 16 Flooding Plan (dewatering response), which includes additional - 10.2.6 16 - 10.2.6.9 3 emergency dewatering equipment that shall be operationally ready befo re commencing work and available for the entire time single valve protection is in place. 4.4. . Note participation in a pre - job Joint Safety Joint Safety Brief 2 3.4 Brief, if Contractor attendance was required. . Specify and Posted Safety Precautions – Warning Signs 4.5. CF describe each of the following (e.g., figure, sketch, etc.): 4.5.1. Warning Sign posted at Quarter Deck to space that contains the system impacted by the PCP. Warning Sign 4.5.2. posted at entrance to space that contains the system impacted by the PCP. 4.5.3. Warning Sign posted at seawater supply manifold (eductor), if applicable. 4.5.4. Warning Sign at deck edge in way of cofferdam support rigging, if applicable. 3.1.3 2 . ESIGN AND INTERNAL BLANK D COFFERDAM 5. 6 of 15 ITEM NO: 009 - 77 19 FY -

519 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors - 16 3.7 3 Cofferdam Design . Specify a suitable capacity cofferdam, 5.1. - 16 3.8.(7) 3 including: - 16 10.2.4.5 3 Appendix C: 1 - 3 7 Supporting Documentation 5.1.1. . Require design and Reference 3, maintenance records that comply with 6.6.4 (dry chambers), 5.2.7 (patches), or 16 - Paras. 16 - 7.6.2 (stern tube seals), including, as necessary: - or 16 (a) Fabrication drawing(s) (b) Inspections (c) Engineering Calculations 3.2.1 4 (d) Cofferdam Rated depth - 16 3 5.2.7 (e) Maximum hull opening size 3 5.2.8 - 16 (f) Gasket requirements 6.6.4 - 3 16 3 16 - 6.7.4 Eductor and vent line requirements (g) Patch specific hull opening (h) (i) Attachment and alignment requirements Note: Commercially procured plugs from an approved manufacturer do not require a design sketch. Cofferdam designs from NAVSEA approved DWGs or Reference 3 do not require engineering calculations. 5.1.2. . Require an installed data plate or Identification 3 16 - 5.2.7 engraved serial number on cofferdams, corresponding - 6.6.4 16 3 to supporting documentation. 3 - 2.1.2.2 16 2.1.2.3 - 3 16 3 16 - 3.10 5.3.3 - 16 3 . Note the cofferdam is contoured to fit the Templating 5.1.3. - 16 3 6.7.3 hull curvature, as necessary. 3 16 - 7.7.3 16 8.1 3 - 16 3 8.2 - Appendix C 3 Overall Dimensions 16 3 10.2.4.5 - . Specify the gross dimensions of 5.1.4. 3 16 - the cofferdam 3 . 3.8 Material Types and Thicknesses . Specify the 5.1.5. 3.8 - 3 16 appropriate material types and thicknesses 3 - 10.2.4.5 16 3 . conforming to Reference 3, Section 9 3 16 - 2.1.2.2 3 3.8 - 16 5.1.1 - 16 3 . Specify the size and spacing of the Stiffeners 5.1.6. 16 6.2 - 3 3 . stiffeners, as necessary - 16 3 9.1.1.2 3 16 - 9.2.3.7 9.5.4 3 - 16 7 of 15 ITEM NO: 009 - 77 19 FY -

520 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors . Specify: Supply and Vent Eductor, Air 5.1.7. As necessary, attachment locations of the (a) eductor, air supply and vent, including suction 3 . side closure valves Note: All patch pipe nipples used to attach external vent lines must have valves installed to secure the n dewatering is complete . space whe (b) As necessary, size and type of eductor, air supply 3 . and vent collapsible - Note: External vent lines shall be non . hoses As necessary, that the cofferdam shall be vented (c) 3 16 - 3.8 to atmosphere by an internal vent or an external 3.9 16 - 3 collapsible vent line. non - 16 5.2.2 3 - 3 - 16 5.2.14 Note: When using an internal vent, communications 5.3.4 - 16 3 must be established between topside and internal space workers to ensure that the internal vent valve is open prior to eductor operation. As necessary, that a vent line (inter nal or (d) external) must be installed and opened before dewatering to prevent a vacuum and overloading the patch. (e) As necessary, a caution tag on all internal vents stating: “ EXTERNAL COFFERDAM V ENT ENT OR VALVE. IF WATER PRES PRESSURIZED AIR RELE ASED WHEN OPENED, TAKE ACTION TO CONFIRM COFFERDAM ADEQUACY. " 5.1.8. . Require gasket to be fabricated from Gasket Design - 00 Type 2, Class B or C, Grade 1 or 2 3 ASTM D 1056 3.8 16 - 9.3.1 - 16 closed cell foam and a minimum of 3 inches in 3 width 16 (complying with Reference 3, 16 9.3.2, as - 9.3.1 or 16 - - 10.2.4.5 3 applicable). . Specify that a marine Gasket Adhesive grade - 5.1.9. adhesive was used to mount the gasket to the 5.1.1 - 16 3 CF cofferdam flange. . Specify the method 5.1.10. Positive Securing Device Design 3 3.8 - 16 - used to secure the cofferdam to the hull (e.g., J bolt, 3 Appendix F hogging lines, etc.) . Refer to, J - Bolt Minimum Requirements 5.1.10.1. 16 - 9.2.3.4 3 and include, Reference 3, Appendix F if 3 Appendix F a j - bolt is used. 3 - 16 Mechanical Fasteners 5.1.11. 3.8 . Specify the fastener type, as 9.4 - 16 3 necessary. 77 ITEM NO: - of 15 8 009 19 FY -

521 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors - 3.4.2.1.(2) 3 5.2. Internal Sealing Blank Design and Documentation . If an internal 16 sealing blank is necessary, require the installation of a less than 4.7.1.1 - 16 3 the blank and specify: - - ½ inch vent valve in 3 4.7.1.2 16 4.7.1.5 - 3 16 3 Note: Vent lines shall be less than ½” IPS or else a temporary 5.2.1 16 - 5.2.2 16 3 - reducer shall be installed to make the opening less than ½” IPS. App D: 2, 19 3 5.2.1. - conforms to Standard DWG# 845 Blank 3.6.1 5 4612172(latest applicable revision). 5 3.6.1 Gasket conforms to MIL 5.2.2. - PRF - 1149 (latest revision). - 1 & D - 6 3 Cat D 5 3.6.1 - - 1222J. DTL 5.2.3. Fasteners conform to with MIL 6 4.15 3 Appendix D: 19 5.2.4. Positive attachment of a Danger Tag. 3.6.1.1 5 5.2.5. Require the blank to be documented on a certified App D: 2, 19, check 3 - off sheet (Reference 3, Appendix D) verifying its 22, 23 installation and removal. 5.3. Rigging Plan . Specify a rigging plan to positively secure the cofferdam to the hull, including, as necessary: (a) Lifting requirements (b) Suitable rigging equipment (e.g., chainfalls, turnbuckles, shackles, bellybands, hogging lines, chafing gear, counterweights) (c) Securing and attachment requirements (e.g., padeye dimensions and locations) and consideration of rigging load requirements, per Reference 3, Section 9 (d) Manufacturer and weight testing requirements (Lifting Straps, Padeyes, Wire) 3 16 - 3.12 (e) Direction and magnitude of expected loads from installation, 16 5.2.6 - 3 us e, and removal of the cofferdam 9.2.3.4 - 16 3 Rigging points and supporting structure designed with the (f) 9.5.2 16 3 - factors of safety from Reference 3, Table 16 - 6. 3 - 10.2.5.2 16 Note: If rigging to existing ship structure include the following for rigging statement: "All existing ship structure selected purposes, in accordance with this procedure, shall be visually inspected, before its use, for any questionable indications that would appear to compromise its strength (e.g., cracks, unintentional holes, severe corrosion) or items or structure that appear insufficient to carry the intended load(s). This authorization is ONLY applicable to the installation and removal of the cofferdam of this procedure." If Contractor personnel are unclear or unsure as to whether an item is acceptable to rig from, contact the SUPERVISOR immediately for clarification / approval. 5.4. PREPARATION . - 009 77 9 of 15 ITEM NO: 19 FY -

522 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors 3 - 3.7.3.(b) 16 - 3 16 3.8.(7) 16 - 4.7.1.3 3 Patch and Plug Inspection . Include Reference 3, 5.4.1. 4.7.1.6 - 16 3 Appendix C Patch and Plug Inspection 5.2.8 3 - 16 Checksheet and require its completion 3 16 - 5.2.11 confirming cofferdam inspection. 16 - 6.6.5 3 6.7.4 3 - 16 3 Appendix C . Note that watertight integrity of 4 Freeboard - 5.4.2. 3.1 4 feet (MIN) above the maximum anticipated draft shall be maintained. . To locate Hull Opening or Access Cut Location 5.4.3. CF cofferdam, specify, as necessary: Hull Opening Item # . Referenced on 5.4.3.1. drawing. docking 5.4.3.2. Hull Opening Size . Referenced on docking drawing. 5.4.3.3. Hull Fairing . Referenced on docking drawing. Hull Opening Strainer Bars 5.4.3.4. . Detailed on the seachest drawing and referenced on the piping drawing. 5.4.3.5. Access Cut . In lieu of hull opening, detail the location and access cut size. 3 4.8.6 - 16 4.9.2 - 16 3 5.4.3.6. Surface Preparation . Inspect and - 16 5.4.2 3 clean hull surfaces to obtain a 100% - 16 3 6.8.1 seal. - 16 7.8.1 3 3 Appendix C Sealing Surface, Hull inch - . A 3 5.4.3.7. surface on the hull minimum sealing 9.3.1.(b) - 16 3 CF around the opening to accommodate 3 App D: 5 the minimum cofferdam gasket width. 5.4.4. Briefing . Specify a method ensuring cognizant 2 3.1.7 personnel shall have direct knowledge of the Attachment A 2 requirements before starting the process. ITEM NO: - 009 of 15 10 77 19 FY -

523 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors . Specify that the site Documentation - On 5.4.5. site documentation shall be - following on available for the duration of the process, separately or as part of the PCP. (a) Applicable System Drawings. (b) Docking Plan Drawing. Approved PCP (c) .7 3.1 2 (d) Reference 3 2 Attachment A 16 3 - 10.2.6 (e) Applicable Standard Forms. Including but not limited to, Reference 3, Appendices C, D and G, as necessary (f) Rigging Plan (g) Cofferdam Design Package Emergency Flooding Plan (h) (i) Diving Contractor’s Safe Practices Manual PCP Control . Specify a method establishing 5.4.6. administrative control of the authorized PCP for the duration of the process, including a record of 2 3.1.8 the data demonstrating satisfactory completion 3.2 2 of the procedure. 2 Attachment A - Line normally accomplished by a First Note: This is Supervisor ensuring all personnel shall maintain compliance with PCP requirements. . Notifications 5.4.7. 5.4.7.1. Government . Notify the Government 3.1.11 2 (G) of the start of the process, in 2 4.1 with Reference 7, Para compliance Attachment A 2 - off as: 3.8.2. Label the notification sign 3.8.2 7 “(V)(G) START OF PROCEDURE”. 11 of 15 - 77 ITEM NO: 009 19 FY -

524 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors Ship’s Force Notification of Cofferdam 5.4.7.2. Installation (Location) and Single Valve 3.2.2 4 Protection . Include, and complete, as 4 3.2.4 - 16 4.7.1.3 3 required, Reference 3, Appendix G 3 4.7.1.4 16 - Report of Ship’s Responsibility for - 16 3 5.2.1 Patch Installation and/or Single Valve .2.2 16 5 3 - Protection confirming the Ship’s C.O. or - 5.2.9 3 16 - 5.2.10 16 3 Designated Representative have been 6.6.10 3 16 - notified and acknowledge the .5 7.6 3 - 16 ocation (if installed) and cofferdam’s l 16 7.6.6 - 3 level of valve protection. 16 - 10.2.6.6 3 Note: Unlike single/double valve protection, weld 5 3.1 repairs to the hull do not require App. G as 10.2.6.6. - implied by Ref. 3, 16 - 3 4.7.1.8 16 5.2.17 - 16 3 5.4.8. . Specify an appropriate leak rate. Leak Rate 16 3 - 7.6.6 installation Inspection Dive . Note a pre - 5.4.9. 3.6 - 16 3 inspection dive shall be accomplished verifying 7.7.4 16 - 3 existing conditions. . Specify mandatory two Communications 5.4.10. way - 3 - 3.4.2.6 16 communication (e.g., hand held radio, sound - 16 - 3 4.8.4 powered telephone) between the Contractor 3 5.2.14 - 16 CF - 3 5.5.1 16 (Surveillance Personnel) and Ship’s Force - 3 10.2.5.1 16 of (Quarterdeck or OOD Station) for the duration 3 App D: 14, 21 the process. CF 5.4.11. Dewatering . 16 - 3 5.2.2 5.4.11.1. Dewatering . If necessary, require - 5.2.14 16 3 3 16 5.2.15 - installation, tagging (as required) 16 - 3 5.2.18.1 and inspection of all vent lines, 3 - 5.2.18.2 16 and air supply lines (dry eductors - 16 3 5.3.4 chambers), in accordance with 3 - 16 6.6.7 16 - 3 6.7.5 Reference 3, Appendix D, as - 16 3 7.6.6 necessary. 3 Appendix D . If Pumping, Seawater Supply 5.4.11.2. necessary, require maintenance of a seawater supply (supply valve wired CF open and either a backup fire pump or secondary fire main). List . Include, and - Operational Compliance Check 5.4.12. 3.2.3 4 List, Reference CF complete, the Operational Check - 3 10.3.1 - 16 - 9. 3, Table 16 009 - 77 ITEM NO: of 15 12 19 FY -

525 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors 5.5. . INSTALLATION 16 3.13 - 3 . Include Reference 3, 5.5.1. Installation Checksheet 4.7.1.3 - 16 3 Appendix D Patch and Plug Installation Check - 3 4.7.1.9 16 5.2.11 - 16 3 sheet and complete only those steps pertaining 3 5.2.19 - 16 to cofferdam installation. 3 Appendix D 5.5.2. . Verify the Verify System and Hull Opening - 5.4.1 3 16 removed valve or system corresponds to the system blanked and the hull opening. 5.5.3. Locate and Position Cofferdam . Require: (a) Cofferdam to be located in conjunction with 3.1 4 the Rigging Plan and Inspection Dive. 3.6 3 A 4 - foot minimum freeboard (conforming to (b) 3.12 3 3 5.3.5 GOS, S9AA0 - AB - GOS - 010, Section 045) CF 3 6.7.6 inch minimum clearance between the - A 6 (c) 3 7.7.5 cofferdam side and hot work area, if 3 App C: 1b, 1c App D: 1 3 inch minimum clearance - applicable. If the 6 cannot b e maintained provide written justification. . 5.5.4. Verify Cofferdam Seal (Watertight Integrity) Require Divers to verify cofferdam’s watertight Appendix D 3 integrity, and, if necessary, retightening of the CF primary means of cofferdam attachment to establish a watertight seal. . Notification of Cofferdam Seal 5.5.4.1. 3 Appendix D Require Lead Shop notification that a seal has been established. Internal Seal Blank . If necessary, require: 5.5.5. The installation of an internal seal blank, (a) conforming to the specified design requirements, immediately after removal of 3 - 3.4.2.1.(2) 16 4.7.1.1 - 16 3 the damaged (or repair) component (internal 16 - 4.7.1.2 3 piping or watertight boundary is opened) to - 16 4.7.1. 3 5 CF maintain double - valve protection. 5.2.1 16 3 - 3 16 - 5.2.2 (b) The Contractors to confirm that an internal App D: 2, 19 3 seal blank with a less than ½” diameter vent valve has been installed immediately after removal of the damaged (or repair) component. ITEM NO: 009 - 77 13 of 15 19 - FY

526 ATTACHMENT B COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors Test & Inspection Plan; Acceptance & Rejection 5.5.6. CF 3.6.1 2 Criteria . Include a Test & Inspection Plan Attachment A 2 denoting the relevant acceptance and rejection 3.4.1 7 criteria, in compliance with Reference 7, Paras. 7 3.5.1 3.4.1 and 3.5.1. Monitoring 5.5.7. . Require cognizant personnel (e.g., Divers or Ship’s Force) to monitor watertight integrity of all applicable cofferdams (with dewatering equipment secured) while actually providing single or double protection at valve - intervals no greater than every 7 days for - 3 5.2.2 16 patches and continuously for dry chambers 5.2.18 - 3 16 - 3 6.7.2 16 (when occupied). Appendix D: 19 3 Note 1: The vent valve on internal seal blanks facilitates internal vent cofferdam monitoring. Note 2: The blank vent valve may be left shut when not temporarily opened by the ship's sounding and security detail for patch or plug seal monitoring or, upon approval by the , the blank vent valve may be left continuously open to Ship maintain cofferdam differential pressure. . 5.6. REMOVAL - 3.13 3 16 4.7.1.3 3 16 - 3 16 - 4.7.1.9 . Remove cofferdam and Removal Checklist 5.6.1. 3 4.8.1 complete those remaining steps in Reference 3, 4.9.7 3 Appendix D Patch and Plug Installation 16 5.2.11 - 3 Checksheet applicable to the removal phase of 16 3 - 5.2.19 3 5.5 the cofferdam procedure. 3 7.9 Appendix D 3 5.6.2. site - Removal/Reinstallation Equipment, On . Equipment to move/manipulate the component CF shall be available on site. - - . Either open the ½ Cofferdam Seal Verification 5.6.3. inch vent valve or loosen blank fasteners to 3 4.8.9 4.8.10 3 CF slightly spread (open) the seal and verify the 3 Appendix D cofferdam is holding back sea pressure. If leakage exists correct cofferdam seal. 5.6.4. . Remove internal sealing Internal Sealing Blank Appendix D 3 blank and retain on CF - site for immediate installation, if necessary. Double Valve Protection 5.6.5. . Verify reestablishment valve protection after component has of double - 3 Appendix D - been installed and 24 hour surveillance or diver CF valve protection is no longer stand by for single - - required. - 77 14 of 15 009 ITEM NO: - FY 19

527 B ATTACHMENT COFFERDAM PCP REVIEW GUIDE Minimum Requirements and Critical Factors . Require Divers to be By, Removal - Divers Stand 5.6.6. Appendix D 3 - by during removal of internal blank and CF on stand re/installation of component. Require loosening of . Verify System Integrity 5.6.7. cofferdam after the component is installed to verify the flange seal is tight (zero leaks) and, if 3 Appendix D CF not, the Divers shall retighten the cofferdam to reestablish watertight integrity of the component. When seal is verified, remove the co fferdam. Notes. Items referenced to this note are considered “critical factors, which have direct bearing on the process 1. are either only generally implied in the quality and safety” in accordance with Reference 2, Para. 3.1.3 and References or are not readily specified but are nevertheless considered critical and required for a successful cofferdam process. These Items are marked “CF” in this Review form. cofferdams other than those provided by Reference 4, Section 9. 2. standard cofferdams are Non - 3. Can be included as part of design sketch. 15 of 15 ITEM NO: 009 - 77 19 FY -

528 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 - ITEM NO: 009 78 18 6 DATE: NOV 201 CATEGORY: II SCOPE 1. : ; Passive Countermeasures System (PCMS) Material Title: 1.1 repair 2. REFERENCES : Standard Items 2.1 2.2 , Passive Countermeasures System (PCMS) Repair/Installation RIM 05T1 Methods , Passive Countermeasures System Packaging, Handling, 2.3 PHS&T 05T1 Storage and Transportation Plan ACD 05 2.4 , Passive Countermeasures System (PCMS) Access, Material P1 Control and Disposal Manual : 3. REQUIREMENTS Remove existing and i nstall new PCMS material in accordance with 2.2 3.1 . through 2.4 3.1. 1 Accomplish additional PCMS material handling and storage requi rements in accordance with 2.3. (V) "ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS" Verify the environmental requirements of Section C.1 of 2.2 2 3.1. are met prior to application of primers, tiles, caulking, and paint. (V) "WELD FAIRING" 3 3.1. weld seams is in accordance with Verify the fairing of Section C.3 of 2.2. (V)(G) "FINAL INSPECTION" Accomplish a final inspection of newly installed PCMS 4 3.1. material to verify correct installation. 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 78 FY - 1 9

529 Accomplish surface preparation and preservation for topcoat 5 3.1. of new PCMS material in accordance with Section C.6 of 2.2. Accomplishment of cleaning and painting for new and disturbed 3.2 surfaces shall be in accordance with NAVSEA Standard Items (See Note 4.1). NOTES : 4. If cleaning and painting for new and disturbed surfaces are 4.1 - 32 “Cleaning and Painting required; the use of Category II Standard item 009 will be specified in the Work Item. of 2.1 Requirements; accomplish’ 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 78 FY - 1 9

530 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 79 DATE: 18 NOV 201 6 I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : overnment Owned Material (GOM) S report tatus 1.1 Title: G ; RE 2. : FERENCES None. 2.1 3. : REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Provide an accurate accounting of Government Owned Material (GOM), traceable to the Lowest Replaceable Unit (LRU), in the custody of the contractor. For this tasking, GOM is defined as gove rnment furnished material (GFM) and contractor acquired material (CAM) which the Navy has either paid for or provided directly to the contractor. 3.2 Prepare and submit one legible copy of GOM Status Reports in approved transferrable media (similar or eq ual to Excel ) . This report shall specify all the current inventory of GOM 3.2. 1 baseline, residual, and excess assets including COSAL material, installation spares, GFM, and CAM. Specific content requirements and checkout (INCO) shall be as specified in 3.2. and shall include the following: 2 3.2. 1 .1 Allowance Parts List/Allowance Equipage List (APL/AEL). An alphanumeric code, minimum of 8 characters and maximum of 11 cters, that identifies the unique characteristics of an equipment or chara installed system provisioned by the Naval Inventory Control Point, or the non - material collectively known as equipage. 1 3.2. .2 Document GFM Requisition/CFM purchase order number. .3 National Item Identification Number. Represents the 3.2. 1 digit Naval Stock Number and identifies a specific - last 9 digits of the 13 item catalogued in the Federal Supply System. Part Number. , .4 3.2. A manufacturer’s part number s 1 used to s , and model, type, or source controlling number s mber drawing nu identify an item of production or supply. 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 79 FY - 1 9

531 - 3.2. 1 .5 Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE). A 5 digit number assigned to an individual supplier, manufacturer, corporation, or government acti vity for identification purposes. 3.2. 1 .6 Unit of Issue. A 2 - character abbreviation code used to identify the types of units under which material is issued. For example, shoes would be issued as a pair (PR), while hammers would be issued one at a tim e or each (EA). Allowance/Required Quantity. The total number of a 3.2. 1 .7 given item of replacement allowed onboard. 1 .8 Quantity on Order. The number of a given item for 3.2. which requisitions are in process. number of a given item 3.2. .9 Quantity Received. The 1 acquired as a result of a requisition. Quantity on Hand. The number of a given replaceable .10 3.2. 1 item currently in the storeroom/storage location. 1 3.2. Unit Price. The cost of the unit of issue (i.e., .11 gross, pair, e ach, quart, gallon, ton, ounce, etc.). Extended Price. The cost calculated by multiplying 3.2. 1 .12 the unit price by the quantity of items. Material Accessibility Code (MAC). A 2 .13 1 3.2. character - alphabetic code that defines the material's inte nded use and disposition. Generally speaking, excess assets are available as free issue redistributions while baseline and residual assets are either non available for - redistribution or are negotiable at the SUPERVISOR 's discretion. A single item may hav e multiple MACs assigned to it; some of its quantity on hand could be in each category. Valid MACs include IC (Inaccessible and contractually required), ID (Inaccessible and Deferred), and AR (Accessible and Residual). .14 1 digit accounting - e. A 5 Unit Identification Cod 3.2. number that identifies a ship, shore activity, operational unit, agency, contractor or other organized entity that may be involved in acquiring and/or managing material. Type Number Code. A one 3.2. hat digit alphabetic code t - 1 .15 28 as either a document number [R] or a - identifies the data in position 12 contract number (P). digit alphabetic code that - Condition Code. A one .16 1 3.2. identifies the condition of the material, whether it is ready for issue or in level of repair. need of some 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 79 FY - 1 9

532 3.2. 1 .17 Cognizance Code. A 2 - position code. The first position identifies the stores account to which the item belongs and the second position identifies the combined technical and inventory manager having jurisdiction over the item . - 3.2. 1 Federal Supply Classification. A 4 position code .18 assigned to designate various groups of common use, commercial type items. 3.2. 1 .19 COAR/Material Group. A 6 - position code locally SUPERVISOR to indicate the modernizatio n program under which assigned by the the work on the ship is being performed or the outfitting material group material is being purchased to support. 3.2. 1 .20 Item Name. A 48 - position nomenclature assigned to an item to describe the item for allowance purposes. .21 3.2. Technical Characteristics. A 200 - character field 1 used to describe the technical characteristics of an item. 3.2. 2 The GOM Report Format (character positions, data element numbers, and field lengths) shall use the following table as an illustration of the data elements with their respective character positions and field lengths: DEN DATA DESCRIPTION POSITION PICTURE REMARKS 11 1 D008G - APL/AEL X (11) 12 - 28 K002/P699 Document/Contract Number X ( 17) NIIN 29 D046D 37 X (9) N/R if no NSN - assigned 38 67 D001W - Part Number X (30) N/R if NSN assigned 72 N/R if NSN X (5) CAGE 68 - C035 assigned - C005 Unit of Issue X (2) 73 74 75 79 E372 Allowance Quantity 9 (5) - 80 - 84 F977C Quantity on Order 9 (5) 85 89 F977D Quantity Received 9 (5) - 90 - 94 A012 Quantity on Hand 9 (5) 95 105 B053 - Unit Price 9 (11) 106 - 116 G101A Extended Price 9 (11) 117 - Material Access Code (AF) X(2) 118 - Material Access Code (AR) 119 X(2) 120 121 122 Material Access Code (IC) X(2) - 123 - 12 4 Material Access Code (ID) X(2) 125 129 A002 Unit Identification Code X (5) - 130 T088 Type Number Code X 131 SD041 Condition Code X C003 Cog X(2) 132 - 133 X(4) FSC C042 137 - 134 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 79 FY - 1 9

533 POSITION DEN DATA DESCRIPTION PICTURE REMARKS COAR X(6) 138 - 143 - C004C 191 144 X(48) Item Name N/R if NSN X(200) Technical Characteristics 192 - 392 T059B assigned N/R = Not Required 3.3 Submit the GOM Status Report to the SUPERVISOR 4 days prior to the 5 days after the end of the availability. percent conference and 50 4. NOTES : The GOM Status Report will be invoked in the solicitation for multi - 4.1 year availabilities. - ship/multi 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 79 FY - 1 9

534 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 80 DATE: 18 NOV 201 6 I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : 1.1 maintain Facilities; Ship Title: 2. : REFERENCES None. 2.1 REQUIREMENTS : 3. 3.1 Accomplish the following requirements to keep the ship habitable and maintain the ship's facilities operational at times when spaces are inhabited by the crew. 3.1.1 Maintain operational sanitary services. 3.1.2 Identify span of time each CHT zone will be taken out of e. servic Install and maintain temporary, primary, and back 3.1.3 up CHT - pumps during such time that ship's CHT system is inoperative. 3.1.4 Ensure that the ship's power, steam, fire main, seawater service system, flushing system, heating system, CHT system , potable water, air conditioning, and ventilation is maintained operational. Install temporary cables, jumpers, pumps, spool pieces, 3.1.5 valves, hoses, and ducts when required to maintain systems operational. uption of the facilities listed in 3.1 and systems Coordinate disr 3.2 listed in 3.1.4 with the ship via the SUPERVISOR. 3.3 , of a Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media schedule showing when each facility/system will be disrupted to detailed 3.1.5 and include the following: accomplish Original schedule is due 5 days prior to availability start 3.3.1 . date 3.3.2 Submit updated schedules weekly throughout the entire availability. 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 80 FY - 1 9

535 Include each compartment disrupted and specify the system(s) 3.3.3 a ffected, with the scope of the disruption. Remove the temporary installations and restore the systems to 3.4 operational conditions when directed by the SUPERVISOR. 4. : NOTES to maintain those systems The contractor is only required 4.1 operational which he disturbs or disrupts in the performance of work in the Job Order, and only to the extent possible, using temporary methods consistent with 3.1.5. 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 80 FY - 1 9

536 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 81 7 201 OCT DATE: 01 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Compartment Closeout; Title: accomplish : REFERENCES 2. 2.1 Standard Items 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media , of a compartment closeout schedule to the SUPERVISOR no later than the 50 Percent CNO availabilities for all CNO availabilities and non - 9 Review Conference weeks in length or longer. 3.1.1 The compartment closeout schedule shall contain the following minimum information: A list of work contractor compartment where each 3.1.1.1 contained in the Integrated Production Schedule or Production Schedule (see has been or remains to be accomplished. Include each compartment Note 4.6) number and name. 3.1.1.2 Identification of work not completed in each compartment by the Work Item number and associ ated Key Event or Milestone. , Ship's Force work by Any impact that known 3.1.1.3 Alteration Installation Teams (AIT), Fleet Maintenance Activity (FMA), or other third Party Maintenance Providers ’s will have on the contractor ability to complete work in the compartment. 3.1.1.4 The date when the contractor expects to complete his work within each compartment. Highlight major trouble spots. the compartment closeout schedule by of ndex 3.1.1.5 An i compartment number listing the page number of where the information about the compartment can be located. 3.1.2 Scheduling of closeout for compartments associated with the support Crew Move Aboard milestone completion of work on associated shall machinery, equipment, electrical, alarm, control, piping, and ventilation 1 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 81 FY - 1 9

537 systems, necessary to permit crew berthing and messing aboard ship. Applicable compartments include : 3.1.2.1 living compartments, Messing, berthing, and in freezer, chill and - including galley, scullery, pantry, mess decks, walk thaw boxes, dry provisions and breakout storerooms, wardroom, CPO mess, berthing compartments, staterooms, lounges, wash rooms, water closets and showers, laund ry, and associated access routes and passageways that have had other than cable installation performed. 3.1.2.2 Refrigeration and a ir conditioning machinery rooms 3.1.2.3 CHT machinery spaces and tanks Medical and dental spaces 3.1.2.4 Scheduling of closeout for compartments associated with the 3.1.3 Production Completion Date (PCD) Key Event shall be prior to the PCD Key | Event date and support the requirements of 009 - 43 of 2.1 when invoked. Exceptions shall be clearly annotated on the c loseout schedule and the impact 43 of 2.1. - adjudicated in accordance with 009 3.1.4 Scheduling of closeout for compartments associated with the | Command, Control, Communications, Computer, Combat Systems and Intelligence t shall be prior to the corresponding Key Even Off (C5ILO) Key (C5I) Light - Event date and support the requirements of 009 - 117 of 2.1 when invoked. Exceptions shall be clearly annotated on the closeout schedule and the impact 117 of 2.1. adjudicated in accordance with 009 - 5 ling of closeout for compartments associated with the Schedu 3.1. Undocking Key Event (when invoked) shall be prior to the Undocking Key Event. 3.1.6 Scheduling of closeout for all other compartments shall be at ailability Completion Key least one day prior to Dock Trials, Sea Trials or Av Event, as invoked. (V)(G) "COMPARTMENT INSPECTION" 3.2 Accomplish a joint inspection with the SUPERVISOR and the Commanding Officer's designated representative upon completion, inspection, and work within each compartment. acceptance, by the contractor, of 3.2.1 Acceptance criteria is completion of all contractor work within the compartment inclusive of associated Work Items, settled changes to associated Work Items, restoration of removals under 009 - 23 of 2.1, removal - mporary blanks under 009 of te 24 of 2.1, as well as insulation, paint, and floor covering restoration required as a result of contractor work. Incomplete work is cause for rejection. Minor cleanliness deficiencies shall be promptly corrected by the contractor w ithin one shift of the closeout inspection. Minor cleanliness deficiencies or outstanding work by Ship’s Force, AIT, FMA, or other Third Party Maintenance providers shall not be 2 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 81 FY - 1 9

538 cause for rejection. “FINAL CONTAMINATION/DAMAGE INSPECTION” in accordance h 009 - 06 of 2.1 will normally be accomplished for all work within the wit compartment prior to, or in conjunction with compartment closeout, but may be delayed to facilitate ongoing equipment protection with SUPERVISOR approval. 3.2.1.1 Provide a listing o f all contractor work applicable to the compartment for use in evaluating the status of contractor’s work completion during the inspection. 3.2.2 , of approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in a report to the SUPERVISOR after each compartment inspection, listing any incomplete work or discrepancies preventing compartment turnover, and recommendation for disposition. Turn over each compartment 3.2.3 accepted in accordance with 3.2.1 /use e for maintenance to Ship's Forc and indicate on the updated compartment closeout schedule as complete. 3.3 Update the compartment closeout schedule at the weekly progress meeting after the first report is published. partment closeout Highlight changes from the previous com 3.3.1 schedule. Highlight each discrepancy in the spaces in 3.1.2 3.3.2 through 3.1.6 their associated Key Event or that cannot be corrected prior to , providing the reason and expected completion date. Milestone date 4. NOTES : .1 4 The ship's Commanding Officer will furnish the SUPERVISOR the work is planned for accomplishment schedule, which by compartment, including the by Ship's Force on a weekly basis. 4.2 For purposes of this item, the term compartment includes compartments , tanks, and voids. The terms "space/spaces", "room/rooms", and "compartment/compartments" are synonymous. The crew move aboard evolution is a difficult and complex one. Key 4.3 areas of concern are: safety of the crew; sanitation and serviceability of food preparation, serving, and eating areas; livability of berthing and sanitary spaces; cleanliness. 4.4 Interface conflicts in the closeout schedule will be resolved as they occur. 4.5 Integrated Production Schedule and Production Schedule are 111 of 2.1. - - ribed by 009 presc 60 and 009 4.6 The term “contractor work” is inclusive of any service or product subcontracted by the contractor. 3 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 81 FY - 1 9

539 4.7 When invoked, the following Standard Items interface with this Standard Item: 009 - 60, 009 - 3, 009 4 24, 009 - 06, 009 - 04, 009 - 111, and - 67, 009 - 117. - 009 - 43 and 009 - 117. These Standard Items provide 4.8 Coordination with 009 direction for the completion of work and processes to ensure the ship’s crew 81 is a final closeout of - can conduct downstream operations. In contrast, 009 contractor work accomplished in a compartment and marks the end of contractor work in that compartment. 4 of 4 ITEM NO: 009 - 81 FY - 1 9

540 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 82 DATE: 18 NOV 20 1 6 I CATEGORY: 1. SCOPE : Title: 1.1 Equal Component Vice Specified Component; Installation of report 2. REFERENCES : 2.1 None. REQUIREMENTS 3. : hard copy or Submit one legible copy, in 3.1 approved transferrable to the SUPERVISOR in each , of media a report listing the following data instance when the Work Item all ows, and the contractor chooses, to install "an equal component" vice a “specified component ” listed in the Work Item. Provide data to compare the equal component to that specified including the following: 3.1.1 Physical dimensions of each 3.1.2 Bo lting pattern required to install the component 3.1.3 Power requirements Size, location, and type of miscellaneous service connections 3.1.4 Modifications required for installation 3.1.5 per minute, Comparison of the characteristics, i.e., gallons 3.1.6 cubic feet per minute, and temperature ranges 3.1.7 Submission of the reports shall be 20 days after award of CNO availabilities and 2 days after award for other availabilities. : 4. NOTES 4.1 None. 1 of 1 ITEM NO: 009 - 82 FY - 1 9

541 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 83 18 DATE: NOV 201 6 CATEGORY: I I : 1. SCOPE 1.1 Title: Wire Rope Assembly ; Fabricate 2. REFERENCES : 010/CH 2.1 S9086 - UU - STM - - 613, Wire and Fiber Rope and Rigging 3. REQUIREMENTS : Comply with the following specifications when procuring wire rope 3.1 fittings. S - RR - SOCKETS 3.1.1 550 - - 3. 1.2 FIEGE - TYPE MIL - S - 21433 3.1.3 SWAGE SLEEVES - Commercial, supplied by the same manufacturer as the swaging machine 276 Type 3 only T 3.1.4 THIMBLES - FF - - - C - RR - SHACKLES 3.1.5 271 24141 - - MIL - BLOCKS 3.1.6 B specification when procuring wire rope. Comply with the following 3.2 410 – W - RR WIRE ROPE AND STRAND 3.2.1 - 3.3 Fabricate wire rope assemblies from the materials specified in 3.1 in accordance with the assembly and testing requirements of 2.1. 3.4 roved transferrable media, to the Submit one legible copy, in app SUPERVISOR of certification from each manufacturer that states that the wire rope and all components listed in 3.1.1 through 3.1.6 comply with the requirements and specifications listed in 3.1 and 3.2. 5 3. Verify each fi tting is legibly marked with manufacturer's name or trademark and size. Shackles and blocks shall also be marked with safe working load. 3. 5 .1 1 of 2 83 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

542 Thimbles are not required to be marked. .2 5 3. 3.6 In addition to the certifications of 3.4, submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media, of testing results in accordance with 2.1. Provide certification documentation of qualified assembly personnel in accordance with 2.1 if required. 4. NOTES : None. 4.1 2 of 2 83 ITEM NO: 009 - FY - 1 9

543 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY 19 - ITEM NO: 009 - 84 01 OCT DATE: 2017 CATEGORY: I 1. SCOPE : 1.1 Title: Threaded Fastener Requirements; accomplish 2. : REFERENCES 2.1 Standard Items 2. 2 S9086 - CJ - STM - 010/075, Fasteners 3. REQUIREMENTS : 3.1 General inch nominal - 3. 1. 1 Replace the following non - Level I fasteners 1/2 fasteners same material, strength the of diameter and smaller with new and design; - N - 281, FF - 3.1.1.1 Monel, QQ - 85 , ASTM 468 Alloy 400 S 3.1.1.2 CRES, 300 Series, FF - S - 85 /A193M B16 3.1.1.3 Steel, ASTM A193 3.1.1.4 Steel, Grade 5 and Grade 8 (V) "INSPECT FASTENER" 3.1.2 each For for wear and defects. intended for reuse fastener Inspect - bound stud use 075 - 8.2 of 2.2 for accept the exposed portion of each body or reject criteria. For each other fastener, use Attachment A and paragraph 075 - 8.3 of 2.2 for accept or reject criteria. 3.1.3 Fasteners larger than 1/2 - shall be retained inch nominal diameter for reuse to the maximum extent possible. Reuse existing fasteners if the acceptance criteria of Attachment A and paragraph 075 - 8.3 of 2.2 are met. 1.3 3. .1 Maintain fastener accountability to ensure fasteners item are reused in the same joint from meeting the criteria of this which they came. 3. .2 Clean each fastener free of foreign matter (including 1.3 paint). 1.3.3 Chase and tap exposed threaded areas. 3. Install new threaded fasteners, washers, and lock 4 3.1. washers in place identified of those to be missing or defective. ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 1 FY - 19 of

544 one 3.1. 4 .1 Utilize table each replacement to select and 2.2 fastener when necessary . 5 3.1. oxide coated brass threaded fasteners (BOCBTF) is - Use of black prohibited in the accomplishment of any work. BOCBTFs are most commonly marked with “462”, “464”, “F467C”, “F467D”, “F468C”, and “F468D.” 6 Fasteners, body - fitted bolts, and studs requiring a permeability 3.1. factor of 2.0 or less shall conform to 500 Series Monel , 316L CRES , or 304 CRES where required. 3. 2 Externally threaded fastener installation acceptance criteria unless otherwise specified or approved: male threaded fastener each 3. .1 The minimum thread protrusion for 2 shall be one full thread beyond the face of the nut. The maximum thread protrusion for 10 male threaded fastener is full threads beyond the each face of the nut. 3. 2 .2 For self - locking (plastic insert) nut installations, the minimum bolt or stud end may be flush with the face of the thread protrusion for nut after the threaded fastener(s) have been installed and tightened. The locking nuts shall be 5 threads after - maximum thread protrusion for self d. the threaded fastener(s) have been installed and tightene 3.3 Internally threaded fastener installation acceptance criteria shall be - 7.6 of 2.2. in accordance with paragraph 075 4 3. Temporary Fasteners Use of 4 3. Maintain a single log/file of installed/removed temporary fasteners .1 with the following information: 3. 4 .1.1 System 3. 4 .1.2 Component (valves, flanges, foundations, brackets) 3. 4 .1.3 Location (deck, frame, port, starboard, tank, manhole) .1.4 Company name/badge number/name of mechanic 3. 4 .1.5 Date installed/date removed 3. 4 emporary fasteners blaze orange unless an alternate color .2 Paint t 3. 4 has been authorized by the SUPERVISOR. Minimum requirements for painting fasteners are as follows: Nut Bearing faces (top) 3.4.2.1 Bolt bolt head 3.4.2.2 Top of stud Both ends of Stud 3.4.2.3 ) (e dge and bottom 3.4.2.4 of washer Washer Faces .3 Remove temporary fasteners prior to any testing, lagging, and/or 3. 4 painting of systems or components. ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 2 FY - 19 of

545 4 3. .4 Logging - in of temporary fasteners shall be accomplished no later than the end of the wo rk shift. .5 Existing system fasteners used for blanking that will be reused for 3. 4 installation are excluded from the requirement . of 3.4.2 NOTES: 4. 4.1 For purposes of this item, temporary fasteners are defined as those in lieu of the final fasteners that are fasteners that are installed specified for system installation. Examples would include temporary fasteners used to hold fittings, valves, or machinery in place. 4.2 One complete thread or one thread length is defined as one complete 60 degrees on a single thread), starting at a point along the rotation (3 thread. ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 3 FY - 19 of

546 Attachment A The following criterion applies to the inspection of fasteners : 1 General inspection: Fasteners shall bear markings identifying material to be Black - compatible with the system. xide coated fasteners and f asteners without o mixed material fasteners are not with markings are not acceptable. Joints acceptable. 2. Engaged Thread Area: Cracks are not acceptable. 2.1 Broken, chipped, or missing threads or other indications of brittle material failure, are not acceptable. 2.2 Galling, spalling, or pitting is not acceptable. fect is a single defect 2.3 Major defects are not acceptable. A major de (after removal of sharp edges and raised metal) that has a depth over half the thread depth. - one 2.4 Isolated minor defects are acceptable. A minor defect is a single nick, gouge, or flattened thread (after removal of sharp edges a nd raised metal) that has a depth greater than 1/64 - - half inch, but less than one the thread height (depth), and a width less than the thread spacing - (pitch). Defects less than 1/64 inch deep may be ignored. width criterion for 2.4.1 An isolated minor defect that exceeds the a minor defect is acceptable when the total length of the defect does not exceed 15 percent of one thread length in any one complete thread. 2.4.2 Any combination of minor defects is acceptable when the total combined length of the def ects does not exceed 15 percent of one thread length in any one complete thread. locking Class 3 B fit - - self 2.5 Repaired threads that engage with a non - nut, turned with fingers, are acceptable. 3. Non - Engaged Thread Area: 3.1 Cracks are not acceptable. 3.2 For externally threaded fasteners, no minimum thread form is required, except as needed to provide initial thread engagement and passing of the nut. - 4. Self locking nuts shall have positive reinstallation torque. Cuts, tears, or looseness in self king elements or the adjacent metal are not acceptable. - loc 4.1 Determine adequate torque values (i.e., posi tive reinstallation, 5 - running) in accordance with Table 075 breakaway, . 2 1 of 2. - 5 . Deformed or damaged flats on fasteners are not acceptable. 6. Discard fasteners not meeting the acceptance requirements of this item. ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 4 FY - 19 of

547 ATTACHMENT B VALVE BODY MATERIAL 2 / Nonferrous 1/ Carbon Steel Alloy Steel / 3 Phosphor Bronze - Any Grade Silicon Bronze - Any Grade - 16 Studs and Bolts to Grade B - 16 Grade B Nickel Copper - Class A - MIL DTL - 1222 4/ Any Grade Silicon Bronze - Phosphor Bronze - Any Grade Nuts to MIL - DTL - 1222 Class A or Class B - Nickel Copper Grade 4 or 7 Grade 4 or 7 5/ Socket Head Cap 86 FF - S - FF - S - 86 Screws NOTES / Alloy steel is of Composition A - 1 - 2 1/4 percent Chromium, one percent Molybdenum, Composition B - 1 - - Carbon Molybdenum. percent Chromium, 1/2 percent Molybdenum, and Composition C 1/4 2 / Nonferrous Alloy except Aluminum. / Studs shall be Class 2 or 3 fit on the nut end and Class 5 fit on the stud and, except that a Class 3 3 und may be used where temperatures do not exceed 250 degrees Fahrenheit. fit with a thread locking compo The thread locking compound shall conform to ASTM D 5363. Check Class 3 fit stud ends in accordance with J2270. - SAE / Fasteners of Nickel Copper Aluminum shall be the only type used 4 on sea chest and hull valves. 281 Class A or B, or Nickel Copper Aluminum / Nuts of Nickel Copper Alloy, conforming to QQ 5 - N - 286 shall be the only type used on sea chest and hull valves. conforming to QQ - N - ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 5 FY - 19 of

548 ( DDG - 51 Class ) C ATTACHMENT MATERIAL VALVE BODY 1/ 2 / Alloy Steel/Carbon Steel Nonferrous / 5 5 / 4 / 3 / - Studs and Bolts For services up to and including 650 degrees Fahrenheit; Grade 5 Phosphor Bronze steel 1222 - - DTL Any Grade to MIL For services to 775 degrees Fahrenheit; Grade B 16 - 7 or B - Silicon Bronze - For services to 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit; Grade B 16 - Any Grade 5 lubricating oil, or inflammable gas or For services in which JP - liquid of any kind, regardless of pressure and temperature, which Nickel Copper - are within 3 feet of hot surfaces (above 650 degrees F) and where Class A steel tubing is required; Grade 2, 5 or 8 steel Bolting subject to seawater corrosion (other than hull integrity integrity bolting see Note 4) Connections in bolting; for hull contact with bilge regions. Where strength requires ferrous bolting and is exposed to the weather; Class A Nickel - Copper alloy to QQ - - N - 281 or silicon bronze to ASTM B 98 with dimensions of MIL DTL - 1222. Where greater strength is required, use Nickel - Copper - 286. - Aluminum alloy QQ - N - 5 - Phosphor Bronze / - DTL Nuts to MIL For services up to and including 650 degrees Fahrenheit; Grade 5 Any Grade 1222 steel Silicon Bronze - For service to 775 degrees Fahrenheit; Grade 2H or 4 steel Any Grade For services to 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit; Grade 4 steel Nickel Copper - - For services in which JP 5, lubricating oil, or inflammable gas or Class A or regardless of pressure and temperature which are liquid of any kind, Class B within 3 feet of hot surfaces (above 650 degrees F) and where steel 4 5 / / tubing is required; Grade 5 or 8 steel Nuts subject to seawater corrosion. Connections in the bilge ferrous material and is exposed to regions. Where strength requires - the weather; Class A or B Nickel Copper Alloy to QQ N - 281 or Silicon DTL Bronze to ASTM B 98 with dimensions to MIL - 1222 . - ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 6 FY - 19 of

549 NOTES 2 - position B - 1/4 percent 1/4 percent Chromium, one percent Molybdenum, Com - 1 1 / Alloy steel is of Composition A - Chromium, 1/2 percent Molybdenum, and Composition C Carbon Molybdenum. - / Nonferrous Alloy except Aluminum. 2 / Studs shall be Class 2 or 3 fit on the nut end and Class 5 fit on the stud end, except that a Class 3 fit with a 3 hread locking compound may be used where temperatures do not exceed 200 degrees Fahrenheit. The thread locking t - compound shall conform to ASTM D 5363. Check Class 3 fit stud ends in accordance with SAE J2270. the only type used on sea chest and hull valves. / Fasteners of Nickel Copper Aluminum shall be 4 / Where these materials would constitute part of a galvanic couple, proposals for alternate materials shall be 5 submitted for approval. ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 7 FY - 19 of

550 TABLE ONE S MATERIAL REPLACEMENT FASTENER Fastener Application Nut Other Comments Temporary Access 1222, Grade - DTL - MIL - (009 304 05) May be selected and ASTM A 563 Zinc Meter Installation ASTM A 449, Type I, - 13) (009 Zinc Coated for identified in Coated accordance with SAEJ Bolts 2280 Gages, Switches & May be selected and ASTM A 449, Type I, ASTM A 563 Zinc Zinc Coated for identified in Thermometers (009 Coated - Bolts 14) accordance with SAEJ 2280 Locking Hex Lock Washers shall Self Rotating Electrical Lock Nuts shall 1222 Type I - - MIL - DTL 17, - or II, Grade 5, Zinc Equipment (009 conform to Nuts shall conform conform to 009 33) requirements o f the to NASM 25027, requirements of the - Coated Equipment Technical Equipment Technical excluding body Manual Manual fitted bolts and studs. Self Lock Washers shall Lock Nuts shall 1222 Type I - DTL - MIL Electrical Locking Hex - conform to Controllers (009 o r II, Grade 5, Zinc Nuts shall conform - conform to 36) Coated requirements of the requirements of the to NASM 25027, Equipment Technical excluding body Equipment Technical Manual Manual fitted bolt s and studs. Nickel copper alloy Flat washers shall Woodwork (009 - 37) Nuts shall conform Bolts, studs, and N - to MIL - conform to FF - W cap screws shall 1222. - 92, - - DTL conforming to QQ Grade I. 281, Grades 400 or conform to MIL - DTL - Fasteners subject to 405. Lock washers shall 1222. contact with sea Wood screws shall FF conform to - W Nickel copper - 100. water and bilge aluminum S alloy 111. - conform to FF - water shall be Lag bolts (screws) conforming to QQ - N - coated with a light shall conform to 286 (UNS N05500) viscosity epoxy where greater ASME B18.2.1. resin prior to Round head bolts strength is installation. required. shall conform to Copper silicon alloy ASME B18.5, Type I, conforming to ASTM B Class One. 98, Grades 651 or 655. ITEM NO: 009 - 84 8 19 of 9 FY -

551 TABLE ONE REPLACEMENT FASTENER S MATERIAL Corrosion resistant Install non - metallic Fasteners with 37) - Woodwork (009 steel (CRES) compositions of (epoxy plastic, conforming to SAE - Aluminum and phenolic, polyimide copper alloys shall aluminum alloy - STD - AMS [nylon], Teflon) not be used in 66, Grades components and 304 or 316. contact with sleeves over CRES structural members. aluminum and fasteners where they aluminum alloy come in contact with the aluminum and components and To avoid bi - metallic aluminum alloy structural members. corrosion, fastener components and material composition shall be the same structural members. material composition as that of the metal components and structural members that they are fastening except as his table. noted in t - - Shipboard Electrical MIL 1222, Type I Grade 316, stainless DTL steel, for areas / Electronic Cable exposed to weather (009 - 73) and high moisture areas Grade 2 or 5, carbon steel, zinc plated, for other areas to support work required by individual Work Items 1222, Type I 25027, self NASM - DTL - MIL Rotating SIS - Lock Washers shall - locking hexagon or II, Grade 5, zinc Electrical Equipment conform to requirements of the coated - (009 113) nuts, excluding - fitted bolts Equipment Technical body and studs. Manual Attachment B or C (for DDG - 68 and 009 55, 009 - 96) – 51 class). See - - - Valves (009 - 45, 009 47 through 009 ITEM NO: 009 - 84 9 9 FY - 19 of

552 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 85 - 009 ITEM NO: DATE: 19 JUL 2007 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : Title: 1.1 Government Sponsored Planning Yard/Configuration Data Manager - Site Representative Facility; provide (CDM) On 2. : REFERENCES 2.1 None. : REQUIREMENTS 3. Provide a separate, lockable, and secure office space for use by the 3.1 Government Sponsored Planning Yard/CDM On Site Representative furnished with - 2 desks with chairs, lights, heat, air con ditioning, electrical outlets, sanitary facilities, filing cabinets, telephone service, janitorial service, and 2, 15 - pound fire extinguishers and 24 - hour service for the entire contract period. 3.1.1 The facility shall have a minimum of 240 square feet of floor space. quarter mile of the - The facility shall be located within one 3.1.2 ship. Provide a parking area adjacent to the facility. 3.1.2 .1 The area shall be lighted and accommodate 2 automobiles simultaneously. 3.1.3 Lighting shall provide 28 foot candles of illumination measured at the desktop level. 3.1.4 and air conditioning shall be capable of maintaining Heating the temperature between 65 and 78 degrees Fahrenheit. - pedestal desks 30 - Provide 2 double 3.1.5 - inches inches wide by 60 long. 3.1.5.1 volt, - Provide one telephone desk set and one 115 shock resist ant, double electrical receptacle for each desk. Each receptacle shall be a convenient height and located adjacent to each desk. 1 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 85 FY - 1 9

553 - 3.1.5.2 Provide one swivel chair and one straight back chair for each desk. 3.1.6 Provide telephone communications with separate circuits for each desk set, between the facility, shipyard, ship, and the municipal telephone system. One telephone line shall be capable of digital transmission. 3.1.6.1 Telephone systems designated long distance shall b e installed in such a manner that the only way long distance calls can be made will be with a long distance calling card (credit card) that shall be obtained by the On - Site Representative prior to availability start date . 3.1.7 Provide 4 - drawer filing cabinets with lock and keys. 3.1.8 Provide sanitary facilities equipped with drains, hot and cold potable water, and the following: Hot water shall be maintained at 120 to 140 degrees 3.1.8.1 Fahrenheit. ory One lavat 3.1.8.2 3.1.8.3 One water closet One soap dispenser 3.1.8.4 3.1.8.5 One towel dispenser Facilities shall be provided 2 days prior to contract start 3.1.9 date through 2 days after the contract completion date unless otherwise specified. Provide janitorial services to include sweeping, mopping, buffing, 3.2 and trash pickup on a daily basis. 3.3 The facility shall be in accordance with local building codes, facility shall include smoke sanitary and current fire regulations. The alarms, 2, 15 pound fire extinguishers, and sprinkler systems. - 3.4 Furnishings and equipment in this item shall be maintained in a fully operable condition by the contractor. The facility shall be delivered to the Gover 3.5 nment clean, sanitary, damage free, and vermin free. 4. NOTES : 4.1 The On - Site Representative will retain the keys during the entire contract period. 2 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 85 FY - 1 9

554 4.2 The SUPERVISOR will identify the Government Sponsored Planning te Representatives upon request of the contractor. Yard/CDM On - Si 4.3 - Site Representatives The Government Sponsored Planning Yard/CDM On shall obtain the telephone credit card specified in 3.1.6.1 from their command. 3 of 3 ITEM NO: 009 - 85 FY - 1 9

555 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 ITEM NO: 009 - 86 DATE: 7 01 2 OCT 01 CATEGORY: I I 1. SCOPE : Title: In of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS); - Recovery and Turn 1.1 accomplish : REFERENCES 2. 49 CFR Part 173, General Requirements for Shipments and Packagings 2.1 In Procedures, - Department of Defense Ozone Depleting Substances Turn 2.2 Defense Logistics Agency (DLA), Dated December 2015 3. REQUIREMENTS : refrigerants and halon materials ) 3.1 Recover Chlorofluorocarbon s ( CFC that are not recycled back into the specific system's A ttachment listed in A equipment from which they were removed as follows: Fire suppression (halon) cylinders and canisters with 3.1.1 electrical charges or in itiators must be deactivated and safety caps must be used to cover exposed actuating mechanisms and discharge ports prior to shipping the intact cylinder. in to the DoD - Recover other halon and CFC materials for turn 3.1.2 ODS Reserve at the Defense Depo t Richmond VA (DDRV). Empty cylinders shall be used to recover the materials. Empty recovery cylinders can be requisitioned through normal MILSTRIP stock ordering procedures from DDRV. ge and cylind ers used The cylinders used to recover CFC shall be painted oran shall be painted red. Both cylinders shall have yellow tops and for halon shall also have dual port valves to ease the recovery process. Do not mix new materials with used materials and do 3.1.2.1 not mix different types of materials in the s ame cylinders. 3.1.3 Ensure the recovered materials cylinder is tagged. The tag should be placed beneath the cylinder protective cap or attached securely t o the container. Do not stencil on cylinder. The tag shall contain the following information: 3.1.3.1 The shipper's DOD Activity Address Code (DODAAC). - If the turned in material originates from a ship or submarine, use the DODAAC of the ship/submari ne on the tag. 1 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 86 FY - 1 9

556 3.1.3.2 The shipping activity with point of contact and telephone number. 3.1.3.3 The National Stock Number (NSN) that applies to the filled cylinder being returned. The identity of the recovered material (Navy 3.1.3.4 - recovered R - XXX, CFC - XXX, or HALON XXXX). The amount, in pounds, of recovered materials in the 3.1.3.5 cylinder. Do not fill more than 80 percent of its water weight capacity. Apply a warning/hazardous label to the cylinder in 3.1.3.6 compliance with 2.1. The quantity of containers on the pallet or within 3.1.3.7 the shipping crate. When multiple containers with the same NSN are shipped palletized or in a box/crate, apply only one tag/label to the shipment, not to each item. 3.2 Prior to shipping the reclaimed materials to DDRV, notify the SUPERVISOR so that a DD Form 1348 - 1 MILSTRIP can be prepared and transaction authorization procured. 3.3 Upon receipt of the completed DD Form 1348 - 1, and transaction authori ty from the SUPERVISOR, ship the reclaimed materials to: Defense Depot Richmond Virginia (DDRV) SWO400 Cylinder Operations 8000 Jefferson Davis Highway 5000 - Richmond, VA 23297 : 4. NOTES ransporting ODS to the DoD ODS If your activity is personally t 4.1 Reserve, be sure to schedule your delivery with the DDRV Dispatch Office at 3834 or (804) 279 - 3834. DSN 695 - 4.2 Current NSNs for cylinders are available from the SUPERVISOR. follows: Condition codes for cylinders are as 3 4. .1 3 Condition Code A: To be used for returning original 4. cylinders whose seal was never broken or for recovery cylinders. 3 4. Condition Code B: To be used for returning full, original .2 cylinders or for standard DOD refillable cylinders. 2 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 86 FY - 1 9

557 Condition Code F: To be used to return partially depleted .3 3 4. cylinders whose purity cannot be guaranteed or for returning other (non - standard/commercial) cylinders. Definition of Recover 4. condition from To remove refrigerant in any - 4 a system and store it in an external container without necessarily testing or processing it in any way. 3 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 86 FY - 1 9

558 ATTACHMENT A - In to Defense Reserve in accordance with reference 2.2 ODS Requiring Turn : PRODUCT TYPE WEIGHT CYLINDER WATER WEIGHT PRODUCT TYPE R 11 59 - 42 170 122 1,400 1,000 100 (drum) N/A 200 (drum) N/A 650 (drum) N/A R - 12 45 42 145 122 1,190 1,000 44 R - 42 22 128 122 1,050 1,000 R - 113 6 ounces N/A 1 pint N/A 1 quart N/A 1 gallon N/A N/A 5 gallons (60 lbs) 100 lbs (can) N/A 200 lbs (drum) N/A 55 gallons (drum) N/A 6 ounces N/A Methyl Chloroform 1 pint N/A (1,1,1 Trichloroethane) 1 quart N/A 1 gallon (12 lbs) N/A 5 gallon (60 lbs) N/A 55 gallon (640 lbs) N/A - 113 or Methyl Chloroform (1 ,1,1 Trichloroethane) Note: Only unused CFC solvent contained in original drums or cans with unbroken seals shall be returned to DDRV. Used R - 113 refrigerant can also be returned. Call (804) 279 - 5203 or DSN 695 - 5203 for specific turn - in guidance. - 114 57 42 R 165 122 1,350 1,000 R - 500 43 42 127 122 1,045 1,000 R - 502 44 42 122 125 1,000 1,050 4 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 86 FY - 1 9

559 PRODUCT TYPE WEIGHT CYLINDER WATER WEIGHT PRODUCT TYPE - 1202 160 H 122 H - 1211 1 - 5 6 - 10 - 11 20 21 - 60 61 - 125 126 - 200 122 200 122 201 - 340 341 - 1,500 1,000 1,500 1,000 1 H - 1301 5 - 6 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 70 71 - 100 101 - 117 117 118 - 125 126 - 150 150 122 151 - 200 201 - 260 261 - 350 351 - 530 531 - 600 - 1,240 601 1,240 1,000 5 of 5 ITEM NO: 009 - 86 FY - 1 9

560 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM - FY 1 9 87 ITEM NO: 009 - 201 OCT 01 DATE: 7 CATEGORY: II 1. SCOPE : ; accomplish hemical Disinfection Procedure C Title: 1.1 : REFERENCES 2. - 2.1 NAVMED P 5010 - 6, Manual of Naval Preventive Medicine, Chapter 6, Water Supply Afloat : 3. REQUIREMENTS Accomplish of each affected potable water chemical 3.1 a disinfection system (e.g. , tank, pump, piping and hose s) in accordance with 2.1. 3.2 Accomplish a halogen (chlorine) residual test for each affected potable water system. Acceptable free available chlorine (FAC) shall meet minimum levels specified in 2.1. 3.2.1 Submit one legible copy, in approved transferrable media , of the chlorine residual test to the SUPERVISOR not later than after the one day completion of the test, stating that minimum FAC level has been met in accordance with 2.1. 3.3 g out each affected potable water system upon Secure and ta completion of the residual test. chlorine Accomplish a bacteriological test for each affected potable water 3.4 system. 3.4.1 Bacteriological testing must be accomplished at laboratories regulatory agencies in states having primacy, or by the certified by state Regional EPA Office in states not having primacy. 3.4.2 approved transferrable media Submit one legible copy, in , of after the report to the SUPERVISOR not later than one day completed completion of the test, with certification that the water is safe for human consumption. Remove each tag upon completion of satisfactory bacteriological test 3.5 and release each potable water system for Ship's Force use. 1 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 87 FY - 1 9

561 each 3.6 Accomplish chemical localized disinfection of new and disturbed of 2.1 pipe fitting, pipe end, and valve in accordance with Article 6 - 22d(2) . 2 - ensuring, at a minimum, each method is consistent with METHOD 2 of Table 6 l rinse water in Remove and dispose of chlorinated water and al 3.7 accordance with federal, state, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations. 4. NOTES : Do not take calcium hypochlorite in dry powder form aboard ship. 4.1 Mixing is to be done ashore. 4.2 2.1 can be accessed at: http://navymedicine.med.navy.mil (use link to Navy Medicine Directives, Publications and Manuals) or 6.pdf - 5010 - nehc.med.navy.mil/downloads/prevmed/NewP - http://www 2 of 2 ITEM NO: 009 - 87 FY - 1 9

562 NAVSEA STANDARD ITEM FY - 1 9 - ITEM NO: 009 88 DATE: 18 NOV 201 6 CATEGORY: I I : SCOPE 1. Title: 1.1 Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) and Motor Gasoline (MOGAS) MOGAS - Tanks, Spaces, and Piping, including Sewage or Contaminated Tanks, Spaces, and Piping; certify : 2. REFERENCES Standard Items 2.1 2.2 29 CFR Part 1915, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Shipyard Employment 2.3 NFPA Standard 312, Standard for Fire Protection of Vessels During Construction, Repair, and Lay - up 2.4 NFPA Standard 306, Standard for the Control of Gas Hazards on Vessels - T8 - S9086 593, Pollution Control - 010/CH 2.5 - STM 2.6 Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, Pamphlet 7.1 - G 2.7 29 CFR Part 1910.134, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Respiratory Protection REQUIREMENTS 3. : 3.1 Certify ENTER WITH RESTRICTIONS, SAFE FOR WORKERS and/or SAFE FOR HOT WORK in accordance with 2.2 through 2.4, using 2.5 and 2.6 for guidance, Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) and MOGAS tanks, spaces, and jacent tanks, spaces, or piping, associated piping, and inspect and certify ad where the scope of repairs will result in a need for certification during the of this Job Order. accomplishment 3.1.1 A National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Certified